Updated August 2019

Updated August 2019

 i

COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2013 by the U.S. Green Building Council. All rights reserved.
The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED
Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, LEED v4 Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use of the
Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees:
1. to retain all copyright and other proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide,
2. not to sell or modify the Reference Guide, and
3. not to reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose,
including display on a website or in a networked environment.
Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited.

The text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., reproduced in the Reference Guide is
used under license to USGBC or, in some instances, in the public domain. All other text, graphics, layout, and other
elements of content in the Reference Guide are owned by USGBC and are protected by copyright under both United
States and foreign laws.

NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide:

Redistributing the Reference Guide on the internet or otherwise is STRICTLY prohibited even if offered free of
charge. DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR DISTRIBUTED. THE USER OF
THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
IN WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE
DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS.

DISCLAIMER

None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including the USGBC, its members,
its contractors, or the United States government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties
for the accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained in the Reference Guide, or for
any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) arising from such use or reliance.
Although the information contained in the Reference Guide is believed to be reliable and accurate, all materials
set forth within are provided without warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited
to warranties of the accuracy or completeness of information contained in the training or the suitability of the
information for any particular purpose.
As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building
Council, its members, its contractors, and the United States government from any and all claims, demands, and
causes of action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) that the
user may now or hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the
Reference Guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

2101 L Street, NW
Suite 500
Washington, DC 20037

TRADEMARK
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
LEED Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction
LEED v4 Edition
ISBN # 978-1-932444-26-1
ii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The LEED Reference Guide for Interior Design and Construction, 2013 Edition, has been made possible only through
the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff members, and others in the USGBC community. The Reference Guide
drafting was managed and implemented by USGBC staff and consultants and included review and suggestions by
many Technical Advisory Group (TAG) members. We extend our deepest gratitude to all of our LEED committee
members who participated in the development of this guide, for their tireless volunteer efforts and constant support
of USGBC’s mission:

LEED Steering Committee

Joel Todd, Chair Joel Ann Todd
Bryna Dunn, Vice-Chair Moseley Architects
Felipe Faria Green Building Council Brasil
Elaine Hsieh KEMA Services
Susan Kaplan BuildingWrx
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Lisa Matthiessen Integral Group
Brenda Integrated Environmental Solutions
Tim Murray Morris Architects
Sara O’Mara Choate Construction Company
Bruce Poe Modus Architecture Collaborative
Alfonso Ponce Deloitte Finance
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Lynn Simon Thornton Tomasetti
Doug Gatlin (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Scot Horst (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Brendan Owens (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Peter Templeton (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council

LEED Technical Committee

Susan Kaplan, Chair BuildingWrx
Maureen McGeary Mahle, Vice-Chair Steven Winter Associates
Jennifer Atlee BuildingGreen
Steve Baer Five Winds International
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
Daniel Bruck BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
David Carlson Columbia University
Jenny Carney YR&G
Mark Frankel New Buildings Institute
Nathan Gauthier EA Buildings
George Brad Guy Catholic University of America
Michelle Halle Stern The Green Facilitator
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
John McFarland Working Buildings LLC
Jessica Millman The Agora Group
Neil Rosen North Shore LIJ Health System
Thomas Scarola Tishman Speyer
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Sheila Sheridan Sheridan Associates
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
 iii

LEED Market Advisory Committee

Lisa Matthiessen, Chair Integral Group
Holley Henderson, Vice-Chair H2Ecodesign
Liana Berberidou-Kallivoka City of Austin
Jeffrey Cole Konstrukt
Walter Cuculic Pulte Homes
Rand Ekman Cannon Design
Richard Kleinman LaSalle Investment Management
Craig Kneeland NYSERDA
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Cindy Quan Goldman Sachs & Co.
Matt Raimi Raimi + Associates
Jon Ratner Forest City Enterprises
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Rebecca Stafford University of California, Office of President
Gary Thomas CB Richard Ellis
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners

Implementation Advisory Committee

Brenda Morawa, Chair Integrated Environmental Solutions
Adam Fransen, Vice-Chair CB Richard Ellis
Michelle Malanca Michelle Malanca Sustainability Consulting
Brad Pease Paladino and Co.
Ken Potts McGough
Richard Schneider U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center
Greg Shank Altura Associates
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Natalie Terrill Viridian Energy & Environmental
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrick Design
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions

Location and Planning TAG

Jessica Millman, Chair The Agora Group
John Dalzell, Vice-Chair Boston Redevelopment Authority/ City of Boston
Eliot Allen Criterion Planners
Laurence Aurbach Office of Laurence Aurbach
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Erin Christensen Mithun
Andy Clarke League of American Bicyclists
Fred Dock City of Pasadena
Bruce Donnelly Auricity
Victor Dover Dover, Kohl, and Partners
Reid Ewing University of Utah
Doug Farr Farr & Associates
Lois Fisher Fisher Town Design
Tim Frank Sierra Club
Randy Hansell Earth Advantage Institute
Justin Horner Natural Resources Defense Council
Ron Kilcoyne Lane Transit District
Todd Litman Victoria Transport Policy Institute
Dana Little Treasure Coast Regional Planning Council
Art Lomenick Parsons Brinckerhoff
Steve Mouzon New Urban Guild
Lynn Richards U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
iv

Harrison Rue ICF International

Shawn Seamen PN Hoffman
Anthony Sease Civitech
Laurie Volk Zimmerman/ Volk Associates
Patricia White Defenders of Wildlife

Sustainable Sites TAG

Jenny Carney, Chair YR&G
Neal Billetdeaux, Vice-Chair SmithGroupJJR
Michele Adams Meliora Environmental Design
Joby Carlson University of Arkansas
Laura Case Southface Energy Institute
Stephen Cook VIKA
Richard Heinisch Acuity Brands Lighting
Heather Holdridge Lake | Flato Architects
Jason King Greenworks, PC
Katrina Rosa The EcoLogic Studio
Kyle Thomas Natural Systems Engineering
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
Teresa Watkins St. John’s Water Management District
Steve Benz OLIN

Water Efficiency TAG

Neil Rosen, Chair North Shore LIJ Health System
Doug Bennett, Vice-Chair Las Vegas Valley Water District / Southern Nevada Water Authority
Damann Anderson Hazen & Sawyer
Gunnar Baldwin TOTO USA
Robert Benazzi Jaros Baum & Bolles
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
David Carlson Columbia University
Ron Hand E/FECT. Sustainable Design Solutions
Bill Hoffman H.W. Hoffman and Associates
Winston Huff SSR Engineers
Joanna Kind Eastern Research Group
Heather Kinkade Forgotten Rain
Gary Klein Affiliated International Management
John Koeller Koeller and Company
Shawn Martin International Code Council
Don Mills Clivus Multrum
Geoff Nara Civil & Environmental Consultants
Karen Poff Austin Energy
Shabbir Rawalpindiwala Kohler
Robert Rubin NCSU
Stephanie Tanner US Environmental Protection Agency
David Viola International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
Bill Wall Clivus New England
Daniel Yeh University of South Florida
Rob Zimmerman Kohler
 v

Energy and Atmosphere TAG

Nathan Gauthier, Chair EA Buildings
Jeremy Poling, Vice-Chair Goby
John Adams General Services Administration
Amanda Bogner The Energy Studio
Kevin Bright Harvard University
Lane Burt Natural Resources Defense Council
Allan Daly Taylor Engineering
Charles Dorgan University of Wisconsin-Madison
Jay Enck Commissioning & Green Building Solutions
Ellen Franconi Rocky Mountain Institute
Scott Frank Jaros Baum & Bolles
Gail Hampsmire Low Energy Low Cost
Tia Heneghan ZIA for Buildings
Rusty Hodapp Dallas/Fort Worth International Airport Board
Brad Jones Sebesta Blomberg
Dan Katzenberger Engineering, Energy, and the Environment
Doug King King Sustainability
Chris Ladner Viridian
Richard Lord Carrier Corporation
Bob Maddox Sterling Planet
Rob Moody Organic Think
Brenda Morawa BVM Engineering
Paul Raymer Heyoka Solutions
Erik Ring LPA
David Roberts National Renewable Energy Laboratory
Michael Rosenberg Pacific Northwest National Laboratory
Greg San Martin PG&E
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Gordon Shymko G.F. Shymko & Associates
Jason Steinbock The Weidt Group
Jorge Torres Coto MBO
Tate Walker Energy Center of Wisconsin

Materials and Resources TAG

Steve Baer, Chair PE INTERNATIONAL/ Five Winds Strategic Consulting
Brad Guy, Vice-Chair Material Reuse
Paul Bertram Kingspan Insulated Panels, North America
Paul Bierman-Lytle Pangeon/ iMCC Management Consulting
Steve Brauneis Rocky Mountain Institute
Amy Costello Armstrong World Industries
Chris Geiger San Francisco Department of the Environment
Barry Giles BuildingWise
Avi Golen Construction Waste Management
Lee Gros Lee Gros Architect and Artisan
Rick Levin Kahler Slater
Joep Meijer The Right Environment
Xhavin Sinha CH2M HILL
Raymond Smith U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Wes Sullens StopWaste.Org of Alameda County
Denise Van Valkenburg Eurofins
vi

Indoor Environmental Quality TAG

Daniel Bruck, Chair BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
Michelle Halle Stern, Vice-Chair The Green Facilitator
Sahar Abbaszadeh The Cadmus Group
Terry Brennan Camroden Associates
Aida Carbo UL Environment
Randal Carter Steelcase
Wenhao Chen California Department of Public Health
Nancy Clanton Clanton & Associates
Dan Dempsey Carrier
Larry Dykhuis Herman Miller
Dwayne Fuhlhage PROSOCO
Stowe Hartridge Beam Scientific Certification Systems
Dan Int-Hout Krueger
Alexis Kurtz The Sextant Group
Matt Latchford Lam Partners
David Lubman David Lubman & Associates
Richard Master USG Corporation
John McFarland WorkingBuildings
Bud Offermann Indoor Environmental Engineering
Reinhard Oppl Eurofins Product Testing A/S
Ozgem Ornektekin New York University
Charles Salter Salter Associates
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Dana Schneider Jones Lang LaSalle
Dennis Stanke Trane Commercial Systems
Don Stevens Panasonic Home and Environment Company
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Ellen Tohn Tohn Environmental Strategies
Prasad Vaidya The Weidt Group

Pilot Credit Library Working Group

Marc Cohen (Chair) The Cadmus Group
Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
Cheryl Baldwin GreenSeal
James Bogdan PPG Industries
Carlie Bullock-Jones Ecoworks Studio
Paul Firth UL Environment
Mick Schwedler Trane
Steve Taylor Taylor Engineering
Richard Young Fisher-Nickel

Integrative Process Task Group

Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
John Boecker 7group
Penny Bonda Ecoimpact Consulting
Jenny Carney YR&G
Joel Todd Joel Ann Todd
Bill Reed Integrative Design Collaborative
Heather Rosenberg The Cadmus Group
Linda Sorrento National Academy of Environmental Design
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrik
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions
 vii

A special thanks to USGBC and GBCI staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this reference guide, especially
to the following for their technical expertise: Emily Alvarez, Eric Anderson, Theresa Backhus, Lonny Blumenthal,
Amy Boyce, Steve Brauneis, Sarah Buffaloe, Sara Cederberg, Christopher Davis, Robyn Eason, Corey Enck, Sean Fish,
Asa Foss, Deon Glaser, Scott Haag, Gail Hampsmire, Jason Hercules, Jackie Hofmaenner, Theresa Hogerheide, Mika
Kania, Heather Langford, Christopher Law, Rebecca Lloyd, Emily Loquidis, Chrissy Macken, Chris Marshall, Batya
Metalitz, Larissa Oaks, Lauren Riggs, Jarrod Siegel, Micah Silvey, Ken Simpson, Megan Sparks, Rebecca Stahlnecker,
and Tim Williamson.
A special thanks to Jessica Centella, Selina Holmes, and Dave Marcus for their graphics support and eye for design.
A thank you also goes to Scot Horst, Doug Gatlin, and Brendan Owens for their vision and support, and Meghan
Bogaerts for her hard work, attention to detail and flair for writing. A very special thanks to Dara Zycherman, staff
lead on the development of the LEED v4 Reference Guide suite, for her unwavering commitment to quality and her
dedication to the production of the guides.
A special thanks to the consultant team which included Arup, CBRE, C.C. Johnson & Malhotra, Criterion
Planners, Goby, Paladino & Co., Post Typography, West Main, and YR&G, and the unique artwork created for this
publication by RTKL Associates.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE 4

GETTING STARTED 9

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS 21

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE 27

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS CREDIT 31

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION 45

LT Overview.........................................................................................................................................................45
LT Credit LEED for Neighborhood Development Location......................................................... 47
LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses.............................................................................. 51
LT Credit Access to Quality Transit..........................................................................................................59
LT Credit Bicycle Facilities............................................................................................................................ 67
LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint..................................................................................................... 75

WATER EFFICIENCY 87
WE Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 87
WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction...................................................................................89
WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction............................................................................................. 103

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE 111

EA Overview.........................................................................................................................................................111
EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification................................................113
EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance...............................................................................125
EA Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management..............................................................157
EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning......................................................................................................161
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance............................................................................................173
EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering...................................................................................................181
EA Credit Renewable Energy Production........................................................................................... 189
EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management................................................................................ 199
EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets....................................................................................209
 MATERIALS AND RESOURCES 219
MR Overview......................................................................................................................................................219
MR Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables..............................................................225
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning...................231

MR Credit Long-Term Commitment......................................................................................................237
MR Credit Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction............................................................................241
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental
Product Declarations.....................................................................................................................................253
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of
Raw Materials................................................................................................................................................... 265
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients............281
MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management................................................. 299

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 309

EQ Overview....................................................................................................................................................309
EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance........................................................315
EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control.............................................................331
EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies........................................................................337
EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials......................................................................................................... 349
EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan............................................... 367
EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment..........................................................................................373
EQ Credit Thermal Comfort...................................................................................................................... 385
EQ Credit Interior Lighting.........................................................................................................................401
EQ Credit Daylight......................................................................................................................................... 413
EQ Credit Quality Views............................................................................................................................. 429
EQ Credit Acoustic Performance...........................................................................................................443

INNOVATION 455
IN Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 455
IN Credit Innovation...................................................................................................................................... 457
IN Credit LEED Accredited Professional............................................................................................ 463

REGIONAL PRIORITY 467

RP Overview..................................................................................................................................................... 467
RP Credit Regional Priority.......................................................................................................................469

APPENDICES 473
Appendix 1. Use Types and Categories................................................................................................473
Appendix 2. Default Occupancy Counts.............................................................................................474
Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines.......................................................................................475
 4
PREFACE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING

Green buildings are an integral part of the solution to The impetus behind development of the
the environmental challenges facing the planet. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Today we use the equivalent of 1.5 Earths to meet the (LEED) rating systems was recognition of those
resource needs of everyday life and absorb the resulting problems, coupled with awareness that the design
wastes. This measure of our planet’s carrying capacity and construction industry already had the expertise,
means that it takes Earth 18 months to regenerate what tools, and technology to transform buildings and
is used in only 12 months. If current trends continue, make significant advances toward a sustainable
estimates suggest, by the year 2030 we will need the planet. LEED projects throughout the world have
equivalent of two planets.1 Turning resources into waste demonstrated the benefits of taking a green design
faster than they can be regenerated puts the planet into approach that reduces the environmental harms of
ecological overshoot, a clearly unsustainable condition buildings and restores the balance of natural systems.
that we all must address. Buildings have a major role to play in
The forces driving this situation are numerous. sustainability through their construction, the lifetime
Human population has increased exponentially in the of their operation, and patterns of development.
past 60 years, from about 2.5 billion in 1950 to more As Earth’s population continues to increase,
than 7 billion today. Our linear use of resources, treating construction and renovation of buildings expand
outputs as waste, is responsible for the toxins that are even more rapidly. For example, estimates for the U.S.
accumulating in the atmosphere, in water, and on the indicate that two-thirds of the structures that will
ground. This pattern of extraction, use, and disposal has exist in 2050 will have been built between now and
hastened depletion of finite supplies of nonrenewable then.4 What we build today and where we build it are
energy, water, and materials and is accelerating the pace profoundly important.
of our greatest problem—climate change. Buildings The green building portion of the construction
account for a significant portion of greenhouse gas market is rapidly expanding. It represented 2% of
emissions; in the U.S., buildings are associated with nonresidential construction starts in 2005, 12%
38% of all emissions of carbon dioxide2; globally, the in 2008, and 28% to 35% in 2010.5 The concept of
figure is nearly one-third.3 The problem is anticipated to green buildings provides a vision for resource equity
worsen as developing countries attain higher standards between developing and developed nations. As green
of living. These forces are bringing us to a tipping point, building practices guide developed nations toward
a threshold beyond which Earth cannot rebalance itself a more responsible use of resources, they enable
without major disruption to the systems that humans developing nations to attain essential improvements
and other species rely on for survival. in quality of life without overtaxing local resources.

1. Global Footprint Network, footprintnetwork.org/en/index.php/gfn/page/wor

2. ld_footprint/, accessed 9/11/2012
3. Energy Information Administration (2008). Assumptions to the Annual Energy Outlook
3. unep.org/sbci/pdfs/SBCI-BCCSummary.pdf.
4. Ewing, R., K. Bartholomew, S. Winkleman, J. Walters, and D. Chen, Growing Cooler: The Evidence on Urban Development and Climate Change (Washington,
DC: Urban Land Institute, 2008), p. 8, smartgrowthamerica.org/documents/growingcoolerCH1.pdf.
5. Green Outlook 2011: Green Trends Driving Growth (McGraw-Hill Construction, 2010).
 5

ABOUT LEED
Developed by the U.S. Green Building Council, LEED is a framework for identifying, implementing, and measuring
green building and neighborhood design, construction, operations, and maintenance. LEED is a voluntary, market-
driven, consensus-based tool that serves as a guideline and assessment mechanism. LEED rating systems address
commercial, institutional, and residential buildings and neighborhood developments.
LEED seeks to optimize the use of natural resources, promote regenerative and restorative strategies, maximize

PREFACE
the positive and minimize the negative environmental and human health consequences of the construction
industry, and provide high-quality indoor environments for building occupants. LEED emphasizes integrative
design, integration of existing technology, and state-of-the-art strategies to advance expertise in green building
and transform professional practice. The technical basis for LEED strikes a balance between requiring today’s best

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING

practices and encouraging leadership strategies. LEED sets a challenging yet achievable set of benchmarks that
define green building for interior spaces, entire structures, and whole neighborhoods.
LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations was developed in 1998 for the commercial building industry
and has since been updated several times. Over the years, other rating systems have been developed to meet the
needs of different market sectors.
Since its launch, LEED has evolved to address new markets and building types, advances in practice and
technology, and greater understanding of the environmental and human health effects of the built environment.
These ongoing improvements, developed by USGBC member-based volunteer committees, subcommittees, and
working groups in conjunction with USGBC staff, have been reviewed by the LEED Steering Committee and the
USGBC Board of Directors before being submitted to USGBC members for a vote. The process is based on principles
of transparency, openness, and inclusiveness.

LEED’S GOALS
The LEED rating systems aim to promote a transformation of the construction industry through strategies designed
to achieve seven goals:
·· To reverse contribution to global climate change
·· To enhance individual human health and well-being
·· To protect and restore water resources
·· To protect, enhance, and restore biodiversity and ecosystem services
·· To promote sustainable and regenerative material resources cycles
·· To build a greener economy
·· To enhance social equity, environmental justice, community health, and quality of life
These goals are the basis for LEED’s prerequisites and credits. In the ID+C rating system, the major prerequisites
and credits are categorized as Location and Transportation (LT), Water Efficiency (WE), Energy and Atmosphere
(EA), Materials and Resources (MR), and Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ).
The goals also drive the weighting of points toward certification. Each credit in the rating system is allocated
points based on the relative importance of its contribution to the goals. The result is a weighted average: credits
that most directly address the most important goals are given the greatest weight. Project teams that meet the
prerequisites and earn enough credits to achieve certification have demonstrated performance that spans the goals
in an integrated way. Certification is awarded at four levels (Certified, Silver, Gold, Platinum) to incentivize higher
achievement and, in turn, faster progress toward the goals.

BENEFITS OF USING LEED

LEED is designed to address environmental challenges while responding to the needs of a competitive market.
Certification demonstrates leadership, innovation, environmental stewardship, and social responsibility. LEED
gives building owners and operators the tools they need to immediately improve both building performance and the
bottom line while providing healthful indoor spaces for a building’s occupants.
 6

LEED-certified buildings are designed to deliver the following benefits:

·· Lower operating costs and increased asset value
·· Reduced waste sent to landfills
·· Energy and water conservation
·· More healthful and productive environments for occupants
·· Reductions in greenhouse gas emissions
PREFACE

·· Qualification for tax rebates, zoning allowances, and other incentives in many cities

By participating in LEED, owners, operators, designers, and builders make a meaningful contribution to the green
building industry. By documenting and tracking buildings’ resource use, they contribute to a growing body of
knowledge that will advance research in this rapidly evolving field. This will allow future projects to build on the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

successes of today’s designs and bring innovations to the market.

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

The process begins when the owner selects the rating system and registers the project (see Rating System Selection
Guidance). The project is then designed to meet the requirements for all prerequisites and for the credits the team
has chosen to pursue. After documentation has been submitted for certification, a project goes through preliminary
and final reviews. The preliminary review provides technical advice on credits that require additional work for
achievement, and the final review contains the project’s final score and certification level. The decision can be
appealed if a team believes additional consideration is warranted.

LEED has four levels of certification, depending on the point thresholds achieved:
·· Certified, 40–49 points
·· Silver, 50–59 points
·· Gold, 60–79 points
·· Platinum, 80 points and above

There are also two alternative certification processes for owners with multiple spaces pursuing LEED certification,
(1) LEED volume certification and (2) LEED campus certification. In some cases the LEED campus certification is
used to achieve one single certification for many spaces on nonconsecutive floors within a single office building with
similar fit-out (group certification project) and in others it used to achieve pre-approval for credits to be utilized by a
number of certifications (campus credits).
See www.gbci.org for more information about the review processes and eligibility requirements.
 7

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING PREFACE

 REFERENCE GUIDE OVERVIEW

GUIDE STRUCTURE CREDIT STRUCTURE

GETTING STARTED Each credit category begins with an overview

provides a that discusses sustainability and market factors
recommended specific to the category. For each prerequisite
PREFACE
process for achieving and credit, readers will then find the following
certification and sections:
GETTING STARTED
addresses issues that
cut across the entire INTENT & REQUIREMENTS
MINIMUM PROGRAM outlines the rating system requirements for
rating system.
REQUIRMENTS
STARTED
GETTING

achieving the prerequisite or credit. They were

CATEGORY approved through the rating system development
OVERVIEWS RATING SYSTEM process and can also be found on the USGBC
SELECTION GUIDANCE website.
emphasize
sustainability topics,
CATEGORY OVERVIEW BEHIND THE INTENT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

market factors, and

credit relationships connects credit achievement with larger
CREDITS sustainability issues and provides information
that are specific to a
single credit category on how the credit requirements meet the intent
and information stated in the rating system.
that is applicable to
multiple credits within STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
that category. suggests the implementation and documentation
CATEGORY OVERVIEW steps that can be used by most projects, as well
as generally applicable tips and examples.
CREDITS CREDITS
contain content FURTHER EXPLANATION
that is specific to provides guidance for lengthy calculations or
the achievement of for special project situations, such as tips for
that credit. nonstandard project types or different credit
approaches. It includes a Campus section and,
sometimes, an International Tips section.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
lists the items that must be submitted for
certification review.

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

identifies other credits that may affect a project
team’s decisions and strategies for the credit in
question; the relationships between credits may
imply synergies or trade-offs.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

ICONS THAT MAY APPEAR WITHIN EACH CREDIT is a quick reference of changes from the previous
REFER THE USER TO FOLLOWING SECTIONS: version of LEED.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Getting Started (beginning of book) lists the technical standards related to the credit
and offers weblinks to find them.
Further Explanation (within same credit)
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
identifies the threshold that must be met to earn
an exemplary performance point, if available.

DEFINITIONS
gives the meaning of terms used in the credit.
 STARTED
GETTING
Getting Started
HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
This reference guide is designed to elaborate upon and Within each section, information is organized to flow
work in conjunction with the rating system. Written from general guidance to more specific tips and finally
by expert users of LEED, it serves as a roadmap, to supporting references and other information.
describing the steps for meeting and documenting credit Sections have been designed with a parallel structure
requirements and offering advice on best practices. to support way finding and minimize repetition.

CREDIT CATEGORIES

INTEGRATIVE LOCATION AND WATER ENERGY AND

PROCESS TRANSPORTATION EFFICIENCY ATMOSPHERE
(LT) (WE) (EA)

MATERIALS AND INDOOR INNOVATION REGIONAL

RESOURCES ENVIRONMENTAL (IN) PRIORITY
(MR) QUALITY (EQ) (RP)
 10

MORE ABOUT THE FURTHER EXPLANATION SECTION

Further Explanation contains varied subsections depending on the credit; two of the common subsections are
elaborated upon here.

PROJECTS USING CAMPUS CERTIFICATION

The Campus section is for projects using LEED campus certification.
The guidance under Group Approach must be followed by group certification projects. Group certification
projects receive a single certification for all project spaces included in the group, but are still required to demonstrate
credit compliance at the project space level for some credits. If the guidance under Group Approach states "All
project spaces in the group may be documented as one.", then credit compliance can be demonstrated for the group
as a whole, for example, by pooling resources or purchasing. However, if the guidance under Group Approach states
"Submit separate documentation for each project space.", then credit compliance must be demonstrated for each
STARTED
GETTING

project space individually, for example, by performing one calculation per project space.
The guidance under Campus Approach must be followed for projects pursuing the credit as a campus credit.
Note that an additional registration and review under a master site is required, which results in a pre-approval of
the credit for all projects registered under the master site. Only certain credits are available and appropriate to be
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

pursued at the campus level. The guidance under Campus Approach will indicate whether the credit is “Eligible.” or
“Ineligible.”. If the credit is ineligible, each project may still earn the credit but it must be pursued during the regular
individual or group project review process rather than through the master site.

PROJECTS OUTSIDE THE U.S.

The International Tips section offers advice on determining equivalency to U.S. standards or using non-U.S.
standards referenced in the rating system. It is meant to complement, not replace, the other sections of the credit.
Helpful advice for projects outside the U.S. may also appear in the Step-by-Step Guidance section of each credit. When
no tips are needed or available, the International Tips heading does not appear.
Units of measurement are given in both Inch-Pound (IP) and International System of Units (SI). IP refers to
the system of measurements based on the inch, pound, and gallon, historically derived from the English system and
commonly used in the U.S. SI is the modern metric system used in most other parts of the world and defined by the
General Conference on Weights and Measures.
Where “local equivalent” is specified, it means an alternative to a LEED referenced standard that is specific to a
project’s locality. This standard must be widely used and accepted by industry experts and when applied, must meet
the credit’s intent leading to similar or better outcomes.
Where “USGBC-approved local equivalent” is specified, it means a local standard deemed equivalent to the listed
standard by the U.S. Green Building Council through its process for establishing non-U.S. equivalencies in LEED.
 11

TAKING AN INTEGRATIVE APPROACH TO DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The realization of benefits associated with LEED starts with a transformation of the design process itself. Success in
LEED and green building design is best accomplished through an integrative design process that prioritizes cost-
effectiveness over both the short and long terms and engages all project team members in discovering beneficial
interrelationships and synergies between systems and components. By integrating technical and living systems, the
team can achieve high levels of building performance, human performance, and environmental benefits.1
Conventionally, the design and construction disciplines work separately, and their solutions to design and
construction challenges are fragmented. These “solutions” often create unintended consequences—some positive, but
mostly negative. The corollary is that when areas of practice are integrated, it becomes possible to significantly improve
building performance and achieve synergies that yield economic, environmental, and human health benefits.
In the conventional design process, each discipline’s practitioner is expected to design the subassemblies
and system components under his or her control for the most benefit and the least cost. In an integrative process,

STARTED
GETTING
an entire team—client, designers, builders, and operators—identifies overlapping relationships, services, and
redundancies among systems so that interdependencies and benefits (which otherwise would have gone unnoticed)
can be exploited, thereby increasing performance and reducing costs.
To work this way requires that project teams, whose members represent various disciplines, come together so that
the knowledge, analyses, and ideas from each discipline can inform and link with the systems and components of all

HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE

other disciplines. In this way, LEED credits become aspects of a whole rather than separate components, and the entire
design and construction team can identify the interrelationships and linked benefits across multiple LEED credits.
The coordination of building and site systems—and how they relate to the tenant space— should be addressed
early, preferably before schematic design. The Integrative Process credit formally introduces this way of working
into LEED so that the team members’ expertise in building and site systems can inform the performance, efficiency,
and effectiveness of every system.
The strategies in the Integrative Process credit are recommended for all LEED projects because they encourage
integration during early design stages, when it will be the most effective. The credit introduces an integrative process
by focusing on engaging energy- and water-related research and analysis to inform early design decisions through
high levels of collaboration among all project team members.
Approaching certification using an integrative process gives the project team the greatest chance of success. The
process includes three phases:
·· Discovery. The most important phase of the integrative process, discovery can be thought of as an extensive
expansion of what is conventionally called predesign. A project is unlikely to meets its environmental goals
cost-effectively without this discrete phase. Discovery work should take place before schematic design begins.
·· Design and construction (implementation). This phase begins with what is conventionally called schematic
design. It resembles conventional practice but integrates all the work and collective understanding of system
interactions reached during the discovery phase.
·· Occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. This third stage focuses on preparing to measure
performance and creating feedback mechanisms. Assessing performance against targets is critical for
informing building operations and identifying the need for any corrective action.
Achieving economic and environmental performance requires that every issue and all team members (clients,
designers, engineers, constructors, operators) be brought into the project at the earliest point, before anything is yet
designed. The structure to manage this flow of people, information, and analysis is as follows:
·· All project team members, representing all design and construction disciplines, gather information and data
relevant to the project.
·· Team members analyze their information.
·· Team members participate in workshops to compare notes and identify opportunities for synergy.
This process of research, analysis, and workshops is done in an iterative cycle that refines the design solutions.
In the best scenario, the research and workshops continue until the project systems are optimized, all reasonable
synergies are identified, and the related strategies associated with all LEED credits are documented and
implemented.

1. Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities
(February 2, 2012), p. 4, webstore.ansi.org/RecordDetail.aspx?sku=MTS+2012%3a1.
 12

DEVISING A LEED WORK PLAN

It is recommended that LEED applicants follow a series of steps to certification.

STEP 1. INITIATE DISCOVERY PHASE

Begin initial research and analysis (see Integrative Process Credit). When sufficient information has been
gathered, hold a goal-setting workshop to discuss findings.

STEP 2. SELECT LEED RATING SYSTEM

The LEED system comprises 21 adaptations designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of market
sectors (see Rating System Selection Guidance). For many credits, Further Explanation highlights rating
STARTED
GETTING

system and project type variations to help teams develop a successful approach.

STEP 3. CHECK MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

All projects seeking certification are required to comply with the minimum program requirements (MPRs)
for the applicable rating system, found in this reference guide and on the USGBC website.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 4. ESTABLISH PROJECT GOALS

Prioritize strategies for certification that align with the project’s context and the values of the project
team, owner, or organization. Once these values are articulated, project teams will be able to select
appropriate strategies and associated LEED credits to meet the goals.
The recommended method for establishing project goals is to convene a goal-setting workshop (see
Integrative Process Credit) for the project team members and the owner. Understanding the owner’s
goals, budget, schedule, functional programmatic requirements, scope, quality, performance targets,
and occupants’ expectations will promote creative problem solving and encourage fruitful interaction.
To capture the most opportunities, the workshop should occur before any design work and include
wide representation from the design and construction disciplines.

STEP 5. DEFINE LEED PROJECT SCOPE

Review the project’s program and initial findings from the goal-setting workshop to identify the project
scope. Special considerations include building or site amenities or shared facilities that may be used by
project occupants.
Next, map the LEED project boundary along departmental or ownership lines. If the project boundary
is not obvious because of scope of work, partial renovations, or other issues, see the minimum program
requirements. Share the final project boundary decision with the entire team, since this definition
affects numerous prerequisites and credits.
Finally, investigate any special certification programs that may apply based on the project’s scope,
such as the Volume Program or the Campus Program. If the project owner is planning multiple similar
projects in different locations, Volume may be a useful program to streamline certification. If the
project includes multiple project spaces in a single location, Campus may be appropriate.

STEP 6. DEVELOP LEED SCORECARD

Use the project goals to identify the credits and options that should be attempted by the team. The
Behind the Intent sections offer insight into what each credit is intended to achieve and may help teams
align goals with credits that bring value to the owner, environment, and community of the project.
This process should focus the team on those credits with the highest value for the project over the
long term. Once the high-priority credits have been selected, identify related credits that reinforce the
priority strategies and provide synergistic benefits.
Finally, establish the target LEED certification level (Certified, Silver, Gold, or Platinum) and identify
additional credits needed to achieve it. Make sure that all prerequisites can be met and include a buffer
of several points above the minimum in case of changes during design and construction.
 13

STEP 7. CONTINUE DISCOVERY PHASE

Project team members should perform additional research and analysis as the project progresses,
refining the analysis, testing alternatives, comparing notes, generating ideas in small meetings, and
evaluating costs. Examples of research and analysis for energy- and water-related systems are outlined in
the Integrative Process credit.
The project team should reassemble occasionally to discuss overlapping benefits and opportunities
(e.g., how best to use the waste products from one system to benefit other systems). This approach
encourages the discovery of new opportunities, raises new questions, and facilitates testing across
disciplines.

STEP 8. CONTINUE ITERATIVE PROCESS

The above pattern of research and analysis followed by team workshops should continue until the
solutions satisfy the project team and owner.

STEP 9. ASSIGN ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

STARTED
GETTING
Select one team member to take primary responsibility for leading the group through the LEED
application and documentation process. This leadership role may change from the design to the
construction phase, but both the design and the construction leaders should be involved throughout the
process to ensure consistency, clarity, and an integrative approach.

LEED WORK PLAN

Cross-disciplinary team ownership of LEED credit compliance can help foster integrative design while
ensuring consistent documentation across credits. On a credit-by-credit basis, assign primary and
supporting roles to appropriate team members for credit achievement and documentation. Clarify
responsibilities for ensuring that design decisions are accurately represented in drawings and specifica-
tions and that construction details match design documentation.
Establish regular meeting dates and develop clear communication channels to streamline the process
and resolve issues quickly.

STEP 10. DEVELOP CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION

Consistent documentation is critical to achieving LEED certification.
Data accumulated throughout the construction process, such as construction materials quantities,
should be gathered and assessed at regular intervals to allow the team to track ongoing progress
toward credit achievement and ensure that information is not misplaced or omitted. Maintaining
Consistency in the Application, below, and the credit category overviews discuss the numeric values
and meaning of terms that affect achievement of multiple credits within a credit category.

STEP 11. PERFORM QUALITY ASSURANCE REVIEW AND SUBMIT FOR CERTIFICATION
A quality assurance review is an essential part of the work program. A thorough quality control check
can improve clarity and consistency of the project’s LEED documentation, thereby avoiding errors
that require time and expense to correct later in the certification process. The submission should
be thoroughly proofread and checked for completeness. In particular, numeric values that appear
throughout the submission (e.g., site area) must be consistent across credits.
 14

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

Certain concepts and numeric values recur across multiple credits and credit categories and must be treated
consistently throughout the submission.

INCOMPLETE SPACES
Spaces that earn LEED certification should be completed by the time they have submitted their final application for
LEED certification. Complete means that no further work is needed and the project is ready for occupancy. For ID+C
projects, spaces are considered incomplete if they do not include the furnishings, fixtures, and equipment intended
for regular operations of the space. No more than 40% of the certifying gross floor area of a LEED project may consist
of incomplete space. Additionally, projects that include incomplete spaces must use Appendix 2 Default Occupancy
Counts to establish occupant counts for incomplete spaces.
STARTED
GETTING

For incomplete spaces in ID+C projects, the project team must provide supplemental documentation.
·· Submit a letter of commitment, signed by the owner, indicating that the remaining incomplete spaces will
satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by this project if and when completed by
the owner. This letter may cover the commitment in general terms and need not address each prerequisite or
credit individually.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· For incomplete spaces intended to be finished by tenants (i.e., parties other than the owner), submit a set of
nonbinding tenant design and construction guidelines, with a brief explanation of the project circumstances.

For prerequisites with established baselines (e.g., WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use, EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance) and the credits dependent on the calculations in the prerequisites, the proposed design must
be equivalent to the baseline for the incomplete spaces. Project teams that wish to claim environmental performance
or benefit beyond the baseline for incomplete spaces should provide a binding tenant sales and lease agreement
for the incomplete space. This must be signed by the future tenant and include terms related to how the technical
credit requirements will be carried out by the tenant. If the tenant and the owner are the same entity, a signed letter if
commitment is sufficient. An unsigned or sample lease agreement is not acceptable.

PREVIOUS DEVELOPMENT
Several credits require the assessment of a piece of land to determine whether it has been previously developed,
defined as follows:
previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required
regulatory permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not
previously developed and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry
use, or preserved natural area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit
issuance constitutes the date of previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous
development.

Tricky lands to assess include those with few buildings present. If the land previously had buildings, then it is
considered previously developed even if those buildings have since been torn down. Another frequently confusing
situation is parkland. Pay careful attention to the type of parkland. Improved parks with manicured landscaping and
constructed features like playgrounds (e.g., a city park) are considered previously developed. Land that has only
been cleared or graded, with no additional improvements, is not considered previously developed. Land maintained
in a natural state (e.g., a forest preserve) is not considered previously developed, even if minor features like walking
paths are present.

DENSITY
Density can be calculated separately for residential and nonresidential elements or as a single value. The following
definitions apply:
density a ratio of building coverage on a given parcel of land to the size of that parcel. Density can be measured
using floor area ratio (FAR); dwelling units per acre (DU/acre) or dwelling units per hectare (DU/hectare); square
feet of building area per acre of buildable land; or square meters of building area per hectare of buildable land. It
does not include structured parking.
 15

buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and
not constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land
excluded from development by codified law.

Land voluntarily set aside and not built on, such as open space, is considered buildable because it was available for
construction but set aside voluntarily. For example, 5 acres (2 hectares) of park space required by local government
code would be considered nonbuildable, but if a developer voluntarily sets aside an additional 3 acres (1.2 hectares)
for more park space, those 3 acres (1.2 hectares) must be categorized as buildable land.

After determining buildable land, calculate residential or nonresidential density or a combined density. To
calculate residential density, divide the number of dwelling units by the amount of residential land. To calculate
nonresidential density, use floor area ratio (FAR):
floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of structured parking, measured as the total

STARTED
GETTING
nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential buildings.

For example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable nonresidential land area, a building
of 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of floor area would have a FAR of 1.0. On the same site, a building of 5,000
square feet (465 square meters) would have a FAR of 0.5; a building of 15,000 square feet (1395 square meters) would

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

have a FAR of 1.5; and a building of 20,000 square feet (1860 square meters) would have a FAR of 2.0.
To calculate the combined density for residential and nonresidential areas, use FAR.

OCCUPANCY
Many kinds of people use a typical LEED project space, and the mix varies by project type. Occupants are sometimes
referred to in a general sense; for example, “promote occupants’ comfort, well-being, and productivity by improving
indoor air quality.” In other instances, occupants must be counted for calculations. Definitions of occupant types
are general guidelines that may be modified or superseded in a particular credit when appropriate (such changes
are noted in each credit’s reference guide section). Most credits group users into two categories, regular building
occupants and visitors.

Regular Building Occupants

Regular building occupants are habitual users of a building. All of the following are considered regular building
occupants.
Employees include part-time and full-time employees, and totals are calculated using full-time equivalency (FTE).
A typical project can count FTE employees by adding full-time employees and part-time employees, adjusted for
their hours of work.
EQUATION 1.

FTE employees = Full-time employees + (Σ daily part-time employee hours / 8)

For buildings with more unusual occupancy patterns, calculate the FTE building occupants based on a standard
eight-hour occupancy period.
EQUATION 2.

FTE employees = (Σ all employee hours / 8)

Staff is synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.

Volunteers who regularly use a building are synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.
Residents of a project are considered regular building occupants. This includes residents of a dormitory. If
actual resident count is not known, use a default equal to the number of bedrooms in the dwelling unit plus one,
multiplied by the number of such dwelling units.
 16

Primary and secondary school students are typically regular building occupants (see the exception in LT
Credit Bicycle Facilities).
Hotel guests are typically considered regular building occupants, with some credit-specific exceptions.
Calculate the number of overnight hotel guests based on the number and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5
occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting total by 60% (average hotel occupancy). Alternatively, the
number of hotel guest occupants may be derived from actual or historical occupancy. 
Inpatients are medical, surgical, maternity, specialty, and intensive-care unit patients whose length of stay
exceeds 23 hours. Peak inpatients are the highest number of inpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour period.

Visitors
Visitors (also “transients”) intermittently use a LEED building. All of the following are considered visitors:
Retail customers are considered visitors. In Water Efficiency credits, retail customers are considered separately
STARTED
GETTING

from other kinds of visitors and should not be included in the total average daily visitors.
Outpatients visit a hospital, clinic, or associated health care facility for diagnosis or treatment that lasts 23 hours
or less.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Peak outpatients are the highest number of outpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour period.
Volunteers who periodically use a building (e.g., once per week) are considered visitors.
Higher-education students are considered visitors to most buildings, except when they are residents of a dorm,
in which case they are residents.

In calculations, occupant types are typically counted in two ways:

Daily averages take into account all the occupants of a given type for a typical 24-hour day of operation.
Peak totals are measured at the moment in a typical 24-hour period when the highest number of a given
occupant type is present.

Whenever possible, use actual or predicted occupancies. If occupancy cannot be accurately predicted, one of the
following resources to estimate occupancy:
a. Default occupant density from ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Table 6-1
b. Default occupant density from CEN Standard EN 15251, Table B.2
c. Appendix 2 Default Occupancy Counts
d. Results from applicable studies.

If numbers vary seasonally, use occupancy numbers that are a representative daily average over the entire operating
season of the building.
If occupancy patterns are atypical (shift overlap, significant seasonal variation), explain such patterns when
submitting documentation for certification.

Table 1 lists prerequisites and credits that require specific occupancy counts for calculations.

TABLE 1. Occupancy types for calculations, by project type variation

Regular Average
Peak
Prerequisite, credit building daily Other Notes
visitors
occupants visitors

LT Credit Bicycle Facilities 

Commercial Interiors, Hospitality X   X    

Retail X        

WE Prerequisite and Credit Indoor Water Use 

Commercial Interiors, Hospitality, X X     Retail customers are considered

Retail separately and not included in
average daily visitors.
 17

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 2. Credit Attributes

Eligibility Points
Prereq-
Design/ Exemplary
Category uisite/ Credit Name
Campus Group Construction Performance Commercial
Credit Retail Hospitality
Approach Approach Interiors

Integrative
IP C - G D no 2 2 2
Process

LT
Location and Transportation

STARTED
GETTING
LEED for
Neighborhood
LT C C G D no 18 18 18
Development
Location
Surrounding
LT C Density and - G D no 8 8 8

QUICK REFERENCE
Diverse Uses

Access to Quality
LT C - - D yes 7 7 7
Transit

LT C Bicycle Facilities C G D no 1 1 1

Reduced Parking
LT C C G D yes 2 2 2
Footprint

WE
Water Efficiency

Indoor Water Use

WE P - - D no Req Req Req
Reduction

Indoor Water Use

WE C - G D yes 12 12 12
Reduction

EA
Energy and Atmosphere
Fundamental
EA P Commissioning - G C no Req Req Req
and Verification

Minimum Energy
EA P - - D no Req Req Req
Performance

Fundamental
EA P Refrigerant C - D no Req Req Req
Management

Enhanced
EA C - G C no 5 5 5
Commissioning

Optimize Energy
EA C - - D yes 25 25 25
Performance

Advanced Energy
EA C - - D no 2 2 2
Metering

Renewable
EA C Energy - G D yes 3 3 3
Production
Enhanced
Opt 1 - yes
EA C Refrigerant - D no 1 1 1
Opt 2 - no
Management

Green Power and

EA C - - C no 2 2 2
Carbon Offsets
 18

TABLE 2. (CONTINUED) Credit Attributes

Eligibility Points
Prereq-
Design/ Exemplary
Category uisite/ Credit Name
Campus Group Construction Performance Commercial
Credit Retail Hospitality
Approach Approach Interiors

MR
Materials and Resources
Storage and
MR P Collection of C G D no Req Req Req
Recyclables
Construction and
Demolition Waste
MR P - G C no Req Req Req
Management
Planning
Long-term
MR C C G D no 1 1 1
Commitment
STARTED
GETTING

Interiors Life- Opt 1 - yes

MR C Cycle Impact - Opt 2 - yes C yes 4 5 4
Reduction Opt 3 - no
Building Product
Dislosure and
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Optimization—
MR C - G C yes 2 2 2
Environmental
Product
Declarations
Building Product
Disclosure and
MR C Optimization— - G C yes 2 2 2
Sourcing of Raw
Materials
Building Product
Disclosure and
MR C Optimization— - G C yes 2 2 2
Material
Ingredients
Construction and
MR C Demolition Waste - G C yes 2 2 2
Management

EQ
Indoor Environmental Quality
Minimum Indoor
EQ P Air Quality - - D no Req Req Req
Performance
Environmental
EQ P Tobacco Smoke C G D no Req Req Req
Control
Enhanced Indoor
EQ C Air Quality - G D yes 2 3 2
Strategies
Low-Emitting
EQ C - G C yes 3 3 3
Materials
Construction
EQ C Indoor Air Quality - G C no 1 1 1
Management Plan
Indoor Air Quality
EQ C - G C no 2 2 2
Assessment

EQ C Thermal Comfort - - D no 1 1 1

EQ C Interior Lighting - G D no 2 2 2

EQ C Daylight - - D no 3 3 3

EQ C Quality Views - - D yes 1 1 1

Acoustic
EQ C - - D no 2 N/A 2
Performance
 19

TABLE 2. (CONTINUED) Credit Attributes

Eligibility Points
Prereq-
Design/ Exemplary
Category uisite/ Credit Name
Campus Group Construction Performance Commercial
Credit Retail Hospitality
Approach Approach Interiors

IN
Innovation

IN C Innovation C G D/C no 5 5 5

LEED Accredited
IN C - G D/C no 1 1 1
Professional

RP
Regional Priority

RP C Regional Priority - - D/C no 4 4 4

STARTED
GETTING
QUICK REFERENCE
 21

Minimum Program
Requirements

MPR
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS
INTRODUCTION
The Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs) are the minimum characteristics or conditions that make a project
appropriate to pursue LEED certification. These requirements are foundational to all LEED projects and define the
types of buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods that the LEED rating system is designed to evaluate.
22

1. MUST BE IN A PERMANENT LOCATION ON EXISTING LAND

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods in the context of their
surroundings. A significant portion of LEED requirements are dependent on the project’s location, therefore
it is important that LEED projects are evaluated as permanent structures. Locating projects on existing land is
important to avoid artificial land masses that have the potential to displace and disrupt ecosystems.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must be constructed and operated on a permanent location on existing land. No project that is
designed to move at any point in its lifetime may pursue LEED certification. This requirement applies to all land
within the LEED project.

ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE
Permanent location
·· Movable buildings are not eligible for LEED. This includes boats and mobile homes.
·· Prefabricated or modular structures and building elements may be certified once permanently installed as part
of the LEED project.
Existing land
MPR

·· Buildings located on previously constructed docks, piers, jetties, infill, and other manufactured structures
in or above water are permissible, provided that the artificial land is previously developed, such that the land
once supported another building or hardscape constructed for a purpose other than the LEED project.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2. MUST USE REASONABLE LEED BOUNDARIES

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods, and all environmental impacts
associated with those projects. Defining a reasonable LEED boundary ensures that project is accurately evaluated.

REQUIREMENTS
The LEED project boundary must include all contiguous land that is associated with the project and supports its
typical operations. This includes land altered as a result of construction and features used primarily by the project’s
occupants, such as hardscape (parking and sidewalks), septic or stormwater treatment equipment, and landscaping.
The LEED boundary may not unreasonably exclude portions of the building, space, or site to give the project an
advantage in complying with credit requirements. The LEED project must accurately communicate the scope of the
certifying project in all promotional and descriptive materials and distinguish it from any non-certifying space.

ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE
Site
·· Non-contiguous parcels of land may be included within the LEED project boundary if the parcels directly
support or are associated with normal building operations of the LEED project and are accessible to the LEED
project’s occupants.
·· Facilities (such as parking lots, bicycle storage, shower/changing facilities, and/or on-site renewable energy)
that are outside of the LEED project boundary may be included in certain prerequisites and credits if they
directly serve the LEED project and are not double-counted for other LEED projects. The project team must
also have permission to use these facilities.
 23

·· The LEED project boundary may include other buildings.

°° If another building or structure within the LEED project boundary is ineligible for LEED certification, it may
be either included or not included in the certification of the LEED project.
°° If another building within the LEED project boundary is eligible for LEED certification, it may be either
included or not included in the certification. If included, the project must be registered as a group
certification project and the LEED campus certification process must be used.
·· Sites with a master plan and/or phased development must designate a LEED project boundary for each
LEED project.
·· The gross floor area of the LEED project should be no less than 2% of the gross land area within the LEED
project boundary.

Building
·· The LEED project should include the entire building and complete scope of work.
·· Buildings or structures primarily dedicated to parking are not eligible for LEED certification. Parking that
serves an eligible LEED project should be included in the certification.
·· Buildings that are physically connected by programmable space are considered one building for LEED
purposes unless they are physically distinct and have distinct identities as separate buildings or if they are a
newly constructed addition. If separated, the projects should also have separate air distribution systems and
water and energy meters (including thermal energy meters).

MPR
·· Buildings that have no physical connection or are physically connected only by circulation, parking, or
mechanical/storage rooms are considered separate buildings and individual projects for LEED purposes, with
the following exceptions:
°° Primary and secondary school projects, hospitals (general medical and surgical), hotels, resorts, and resort

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS

properties, as defined by ENERGY STAR building rating purposes, may include more than one physically
distinct building in a single LEED project. For new construction projects, each building in the application
must be less than 25,000 sq. ft. Please contact USGBC if with any questions.
°° For other cases such as buildings that have programmatic dependency (spaces – not personnel – within
the building cannot function independently without the other building) or architectural cohesiveness
(the building was designed to appear as one building), project teams are encouraged to contact USGBC to
discuss their project prior to proceeding.

Interiors
·· The LEED project should be defined by a clear boundary such that the LEED project is physically distinct from
other interior spaces within the building.

Neighborhood
·· The LEED neighborhood includes the land, water, and construction within the LEED project boundary. 
·· The LEED boundary is usually defined by the platted property line of the project, including all land and water
within it.
°° Projects located on publicly owned campuses that do not have internal property lines must delineate a
sphere-of-influence line to be used instead.
°° Projects may have enclaves of non-project properties that are not subject to the rating system, but cannot
exceed 2% of the total project area and cannot be described as certified.
°° Projects must not contain non-contiguous parcels, but parcels can be separated by public rights-of-way.
·· The project developer, which can include several property owners, should control a majority of the buildable
land within the boundary, but does not have to control the entire area.  
24

3. MUST COMPLY WITH PROJECT SIZE REQUIREMENTS

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods of a certain size. The LEED
requirements do not accurately assess the performance of projects outside of these size requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must meet the size requirements listed below.
LEED BD+C and LEED O+M Rating Systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross floor area.
LEED ID+C Rating Systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor area.
LEED for Neighborhood Development Rating Systems
The LEED project should contain at least two habitable buildings and be no larger than 1500 acres.
LEED for Homes Rating Systems
The LEED project must be defined as a “dwelling unit” by all applicable codes. This requirement includes, but
is not limited to, the International Residential Code stipulation that a dwelling unit must include “permanent
provisions for living, sleeping, eating, cooking, and sanitation.”
MPR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS MPR
25
 27

Rating System
Selection Guidance
INTRODUCTION

SELECTION
SYSTEM
This document provides guidance to help project teams select a LEED rating system. Projects are required to use the
rating system that is most appropriate. However, when the decision is not clear, it is the responsibility of the project
team to make a reasonable decision in selecting a rating system before registering their project. The project teams

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

should first identify an appropriate rating system, and then determine the best adaptation. Occasionally, USGBC
recognizes that an entirely inappropriate rating system has been chosen. In this case, the project team will be asked
to change the designated rating system for their registered project. Please review this guidance carefully and contact
USGBC if it is not clear which rating system to use.
 28

RATING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

LEED FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Buildings that are new construction or major renovation. At least 60% of the project’s gross floor area must be
complete by the time of certification (except for LEED BD+C: Core and Shell). Must include the entire building’s
gross floor area in the project.
·· LEED BD+C: New Construction and Major Renovation. New construction or major renovation of buildings
that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data centers, warehouses and distribution centers,
hospitality, or healthcare uses. High-rise residential buildings 4 stories or more can use New Construction or
Multifamily Midrise.
·· LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Development. Buildings that are new construction or major renovation for
the exterior shell and core mechanical, electrical, and plumbing units, but not a complete interior fit-out.
LEED BD+C: Core and Shell is the appropriate rating system to use if more than 40% of the gross floor area is
incomplete at the time of certification. 
·· LEED BD+C: Schools. Buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds. LEED
BD+C: Schools may optionally be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED BD+C: Retail. Buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both direct
customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED BD+C: Data Centers. Buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high density
computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing.  LEED BD+C: Data Centers
only addresses whole building data centers (greater than 60%).
·· LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Buildings used to store goods, manufactured products,
merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings, such as self-storage.
·· LEED BD+C: Hospitality. Buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the service
SELECTION
SYSTEM

industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.

·· LEED BD+C: Healthcare. Hospitals that operate twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week and provide
inpatient medical treatment, including acute and long-term care.
·· LEED BD+C: Homes and Multifamily Lowrise. Single-family homes and multi-family residential buildings
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of 1 to 3 stories. Projects 3 to 5 stories may choose the Homes rating system that corresponds to the ENERGY
STAR program in which they are participating.
·· LEED BD+C: Multifamily Midrise. Multi-family residential buildings of 4 or more occupiable stories above
grade. The building must have 50% or more residential space. These buildings may also use LEED BD+C: New
Construction.

LEED FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.

Interior spaces that are a complete interior fit-out. In addition, at least 60% of the project’s gross floor area must be
complete by the time of certification.
·· LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors. Interior spaces dedicated to functions other than retail or hospitality.
·· LEED ID+C: Retail. Interior spaces used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both
direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED ID+C: Hospitality. Interior spaces dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.

LEED FOR BUILDING OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE.

Buildings that are fully operational and occupied for at least one year. The project may be undergoing improvement
work or little to no construction. Must include the entire building’s gross floor area in the project.
·· LEED O+M: Existing Buildings. Existing buildings that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data
centers, warehouses and distribution centers, or hospitality uses.
·· LEED O+M: Retail. Existing buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes
both direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer
service.
 29

·· LEED O+M: Schools. Existing buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds.
May also be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED O+M: Hospitality. Existing buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.
·· LEED O+M: Data Centers. Existing buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high
density computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing.  LEED O+M: Data
Centers only addresses whole building data centers.
·· LEED O+M: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Existing buildings used to store goods, manufactured
products, merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings (such as self-storage).

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT

New land development projects or redevelopment projects containing residential uses, nonresidential uses, or a
mix. Projects may be at any stage of the development process, from conceptual planning through construction. It
is recommended that at least 50% of total building floor area be new construction or major renovation. Buildings
within the project and features in the public realm are evaluated.
·· LEED ND: Plan. Projects in conceptual planning or master planning phases, or under construction.
·· LEED ND: Built Project. Completed development projects.

CHOOSING BETWEEN RATING SYSTEMS

The following 40/60 rule provides guidance for making a decision when several rating systems appear to be
appropriate for a project. To use this rule, first assign a rating system to each square foot or square meter of the
building. Then, choose the most appropriate rating system based on the resulting percentages.

SELECTION
SYSTEM
The entire gross floor area of a LEED project must be certified under a single rating system and is subject to all
prerequisites and attempted credits in that rating system, regardless of mixed construction or space usage type.

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

PERCENTAGE OF FLOOR AREA APPROPRIATE
FOR A PARTICULAR RATING SYSTEM

<40% 40% - 60% >60%

SHOULD NOT USE PROJECT’S TEAM SHOULD USE
THAT RATING SYSTEM CHOICE THAT RATING SYSTEM

·· If a rating system is appropriate for less than 40% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should not be used.
·· If a rating system is appropriate for more than 60% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should be used.
·· If an appropriate rating system falls between 40% and 60% of the gross floor area, project teams must
independently assess their situation and decide which rating system is most applicable.
 31

CREDIT

IP
Integrative Process

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (2 points)
Retail (2 points)
Hospitality (2 points)

INTENT

To support high-performance, cost-effective project outcomes through

an early analysis of the interrelationships among systems.

REQUIREMENTS

Site Selection and Energy-Related Systems (1 point)

Starting in predesign and continuing throughout the design phases, identify and use opportunities to achieve
synergies across disciplines and building systems. Use the analyses described below to inform the owner’s project
requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD), design documents, and construction documents. Conduct analyses in
site selection and energy-related systems (1 point).

SITE SELECTION:
Discovery
Before site selection, analyze project goals to identify and select the building site that will provide the most
opportunities and fewest barriers for the tenant improvement project. Assess at least two potential locations or base
building options, taking into consideration at least the following:
·· Building site attributes. Assess the base building’s location and site design characteristics.
·· Transportation. Assess the tenant occupants’ transportation needs for commuting to and from the site,
including convenient access to alternative transportation that meets occupants’ needs.
·· Building features. Assess the base building’s envelope, mechanical and electrical systems that will affect
tenant space (e.g., controls, HVAC, plumbing fixtures, renewable energy supply), adaptability to future needs,
and resilience in the event of disaster or infrastructure failure.
·· Occupants’ well-being. Assess the base building’s ability to provide daylight and views, indoor air quality, and
other indoor environmental quality characteristics.
32

Implementation
Document how the above analysis informed selection of a building site for the project’s tenant improvement and
informed the OPR and BOD and site selection for the interior design project, including the following, as applicable:
·· suitability of the base building for meeting project goals relative to the building’s site attributes;
·· suitability of the base building site location for meeting daily occupants’ commuting needs;
·· suitability of the base building mechanical and electrical systems for meeting project goals;
·· capability of the tenant space for meeting the project goals related to indoor environmental quality and
occupant well-being; and
IP

·· other systems.
Commit to the establishment and use of ongoing feedback mechanisms that provide information about tenant
space performance and occupants’ satisfaction. Provide documentation of methods planned to gather feedback on
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

occupants’ satisfaction.

ENERGY-RELATED SYSTEMS
Discovery
Perform a preliminary energy analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce energy
loads for the interior design project and accomplish related sustainability goals by questioning default assumptions
and testing options. Assess at least two potential options associated with each of the following in terms of project
and human performance:
·· Basic envelope attributes. Insulation values, window-to-wall ratios, glazing characteristics, shading, window
operability.
·· Programmatic and operational parameters. Multifunctioning spaces, operating schedules, space allotment
per person, teleworking, reducing building area, ongoing operations and maintenance issues.
·· Lighting levels. Interior surface reflectance values and lighting levels in occupied spaces.
·· Thermal comfort ranges. Assess thermal comfort range options.
·· Plug and process load needs. Reducing plug and process loads through programmatic solutions such as
equipment and purchasing policies or layout options.

Implementation
Document how the above analysis informed interior design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD and the interior
design of the project, including the following, as applicable:
·· building envelope and façade conditions;
·· elimination and/or significant downsizing of building systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls, exterior
materials, interior finishes, functional program elements);
·· methods planned to gather feedback on energy performance and occupants’ satisfaction during operations;
and
·· other systems.
Project teams may also choose Option 1 for an additional point.

OPTION 1. WATER-RELATED SYSTEMS (1 POINT)

Discovery
Perform a preliminary water budget analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to
reduce potable water loads and accomplish related sustainability goals. Assess and estimate the project’s potential
nonpotable water supply sources and water demand volumes, including the following:
·· Fixture and fitting water demand. Assess flow and flush fixture demand volumes, calculated in accordance
with WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.
·· Process water demand. Assess kitchen, laundry, cooling tower, and other equipment demand volumes, as
applicable.
·· Supply sources. Assess all potential nonpotable water supply source volumes, such as on-site rainwater and
graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable water, and HVAC equipment condensate.
 33

Implementation
Document how the above analysis informed building and site design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD.
Demonstrate how at least one onsite nonpotable water supply source was analyzed to reduce the burden on
municipal supply or wastewater treatment systems by contributing to at least two of the water demand components
listed above. Demonstrate how the analysis informed the design of the project, including the following,
as applicable:
·· plumbing systems;
·· sewage conveyance and/or on-site treatment systems;

IP
·· process water systems;
·· methods planned to gather feedback on the performance and efficiency of water-related systems during
operations; and

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
·· other systems.
34

BEHIND THE INTENT

The integrative process takes a comprehensive approach to building systems and equipment. Project team
members look for synergies among systems and components, the mutual advantages that can help achieve high
levels of building performance, human comfort, and environmental benefits. The process should involve rigorous
questioning and coordination and challenge typical project assumptions. Team members collaborate to enhance the
efficiency and effectiveness of every system.
The Integrative Process credit goes beyond checklists and encourages integration during early design stages,
IP

when clarifying the owner’s aspirations, performance goals, and project needs will be most effective in improving
performance. An integrative process comprises three phases.
The first—discovery—is also the most important and can be seen as an expansion of what is conventionally
called predesign. Actions taken during discovery are essential to achieving a project’s environmental goals cost-
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

effectively. The second phase, design and construction, begins with what is conventionally called schematic design.
Unlike its conventional counterpart, however, in the integrative process, design will incorporate all of the collective
understandings of system interactions that were found during discovery. The third phase is the period of occupancy,
operations, and performance feedback. Here, the integrative process measures performance and sets up feedback
mechanisms. Feedback is critical to determining success in achieving performance targets, informing building
operations, and taking corrective actions when targets are missed.
A fully integrative process accounts for the interactions among all building and site systems; this credit serves
as an introduction, rewarding project teams that apply an integrative approach to energy and water systems. By
understanding building system interrelationships, project teams will ideally discover special opportunities for
innovative design, increased building performance, and greater environmental benefits that will earn more LEED
points. By identifying synergies between systems, teams will save time and money in both the short and the long
term and optimize resource use. Finally, the integrative process can avoid the delays and costs resulting from design
changes during the construction document phase and can reduce change orders during construction.
Through the integrative process, project teams can more effectively use LEED as a comprehensive tool for
identifying interrelated issues and developing synergistic strategies. When applied properly, the integrative process
reveals the degree to which LEED credits are related, rather than individual items on a checklist.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Discovery Steps
STEP 1. BECOME FAMILIAR WITH INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
Review the Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and
Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities, which provides step-by-step guidance and
a methodology for improving building design, construction, and operations through a replicable,
integrative process. Although this standard encourages project teams to engage in a comprehensive
integrative process, the credit requirements address only the discovery phase, whose steps are similar to
those described in the ANSI guide for engaging energy and water-related systems.

STEP 2. COLLECT INFORMATION ABOUT POTENTIAL PROJECT SITES

Identify and collect data for at least two potential project sites.
·· Refer to the credit requirements for specific features and qualities to consider.
·· Determine whether potential project sites have nonpotable water sources, which may contribute to
achievement of Option 1.

STEP 3. EVALUATE PROJECT SITES

Use the project goals and requirements to select the building site that will provide the most opportunities
and fewest barriers to meeting the qualitative and performance aspirations for the project. Complete the
site analysis worksheet, describing how the base building analysis informed site selection for the project’s
 35

tenant improvement and informed the owner’s project requirements and basis of design. Consider
completing as many of the following steps as possible for all potential project sites to determine the
most advantageous project location.

STEP 4. CONDUCT PRELIMINARY ENERGY RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS

(IN CONCERT WITH STEP 5)
Complete energy-related research and analysis to support effective and informed discussions about
potential integrative design opportunities (see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Data
Collection). Obtain the following for all base buildings under consideration for a tenant location, as

IP
appropriate:
·· Collect information about the local climate, site conditions, energy sources, transportation options,
and potential building features.
·· Use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Target Finder tool or other data sources to benchmark

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
energy performance for the project’s type, scope, occupancy, and location.
·· Use this conceptual energy model to analyze design alternatives for potential load reduction strategies
(see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Energy Analysis and Example – Light Level
Analysis).

STEP 5. CONDUCT PRELIMINARY WATER RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS

(IN CONCERT WITH STEP 4)
Complete water-related research and analysis to support effective and informed discussions about
potential integrative design opportunities. Obtain the following for all base buildings under consideration
for a tenant location, as appropriate:
·· Collect information about waste treatment infrastructure, water sources, and potential building
features (see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Data Collection).
·· Assess expected water demand for indoor water using the methodology for WE Prerequisite Indoor
Water Use Reduction.
·· Gather data to quantify the project’s potential nonpotable supply sources, such as captured rainwater,
graywater from flow fixtures, or condensate from HVAC cooling equipment.
·· Conduct a preliminary water budget analysis to quantify how fixture and equipment selection and
nonpotable supply sources may offset potable water use for the water demands.

STEP 6. CONVENE GOAL-SETTING WORKSHOP

Engage the project owner in a primary project team workshop to determine the project goals, including
budget, schedule, functional programmatic requirements, scope, quality, performance, and occupants’
expectations. Understanding the owner’s goals promotes creative problem solving and encourages
interaction. This workshop should accomplish the following:
·· Introduce all project team members to the fundamentals of the integrative process.
·· Share initial background research and analysis findings from Steps 2 through 5.
·· Elicit the owner’s and stakeholders’ values and aspirations.
·· Clarify functional and programmatic goals.
·· Establish initial principles, benchmarks, metrics, and performance targets.
·· Identify targeted LEED credits.
·· Review the potential project sites.
·· Generate potential integrative strategies for achieving performance targets.
·· Determine the questions that must be answered to support project decisions.
·· Identify initial responsibilities and deliverables.
·· Initiate documentation of the owner’s project requirements (OPR).
All principal project team members should be present at the goal-setting workshop.

STEP 7. EVALUATE POSSIBLE ENERGY STRATEGIES (IN CONCERT WITH STEP 8)

Evaluate the proposed goals and performance targets for feasibility by exploring possible strategies
for the project’s energy-related systems. Evaluate strategies against the initial performance targets
and targeted LEED credits. It is recommended that project teams engage this initial early research and
analysis by evaluating each subsystem described in the ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for
Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities.
Conduct preliminary comparative energy modeling using the “simple box” energy model before
completing schematic design to evaluate energy load reduction strategies (see Further Explanation,
36

Recommended Preliminary Energy Analysis and Example—Determining Load Reduction Strategies).

Consider the following aspects, as appropriate:
·· Building envelope attributes. Wall and roof insulation, thermal mass, window size and orientation,
exterior shading devices, window performance (U-values, solar heat gain coefficient, visible light
transmittance).
·· Lighting levels. Lighting power density, lighting needs in workspaces, reflectance values for ceiling
and wall surfaces, high-efficiency lighting fixtures and controls, daylighting.
·· Thermal comfort ranges. Temperature setpoints and thermal comfort parameters.
·· Plug and process loads. Equipment and purchasing policies, other programmatic solutions, layout
IP

options.
·· Programmatic and operational parameters. Hours of operation, space allotment per person, shared
program spaces, teleworking policies.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Assess at least two optional strategies for the above aspects.

STEP 8. EVALUATE POSSIBLE WATER STRATEGIES (IN CONCERT WITH STEP 7)

Evaluate the proposed goals and performance targets for feasibility by exploring possible strategies
for the project’s water-related systems. Conduct a preliminary water budget analysis using research on
potential water-use reduction strategies (Step 5).
For all base buildings under consideration, consider the preliminary baseline and design case water
consumption based on the tenants’ use of assumed plumbing fixture flow and flush rates (using the
methodology for WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction).
Gather data (in addition to that for Step 5) to assess and quantify the project’s potential nonpotable
supply sources, such as captured rainwater, graywater from flow fixtures, and condensate produced by
initially assumed HVAC cooling equipment.
Assess and quantify how potential nonpotable supply sources can be used to offset potable water use
for the water demands calculated above. Identify at least one on-site nonpotable water source that could
supply a portion of the demand components.

Implementation Steps
STEP 9. DOCUMENT HOW ANALYSIS INFORMED DESIGN
Describe how the analysis informed the selection of a building site (for the project’s tenant improvement)
and informed the OPR and basis of design (BOD) and site selection (for the interior design project).
·· Address how the tenant space, base building, and site meet the project goals for the following, as
applicable:
°° Building’s site attributes, such as wildlife habitat, open space, recreational areas, and proximity to
surrounding uses and alternative transportation options
°° Occupants’ daily commuting needs
°° Mechanical and electrical systems
°° Indoor environmental quality and occupants’ well-being
°° Other systems
Document energy-related research and analysis from the discovery phase. Describe how the energy-
related analysis informed design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD, including the following, as
applicable:
°° Building envelope and façade conditions
°° Elimination and/or significant downsizing of building systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting controls, exterior
materials, interior finishes, and functional program elements)
°° Methods planned to gather feedback on energy performance and occupants’ satisfaction during
operation
°° Other systems
·· Provide narrative explanations of the energy evaluation in the energy analysis section of the
Integrative Process worksheet.
 37

·· Document water-related research and analysis from the discovery phase. Describe how the water-
related analysis informed building and site design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD, including
the following, as applicable:
°° Plumbing systems
°° Sewage conveyance and/or on-site treatment systems
°° Process water systems
°° Methods planned to gather feedback on the performance and efficiency of water-related systems
during operation
°° Other systems

IP
·· Provide narrative explanations of the water evaluation in the water analysis section of the Integrative
Process worksheet.

STEP 10. CONSIDER OPTIONS FOR GATHERING FEEDBACK

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
Occupants’ feedback is critical to ensuring that the project is operating as the design intended. Project
teams should discuss with the owner the methods that are most feasible.
·· Methodology. Surveys are commonly used for point-in-time analyses of multiple indicators. Depending
on the project’s size, some teams may find that short meetings can serve the same purpose. A public
whiteboard or suggestion box accessible to occupants and responded to appropriately is a simple way
to solicit information on building performance and occupants’ satisfaction, though it may be useful to
provide prompting questions to ensure that important topics are not overlooked.
·· Sample size. There are no requirements for sample size, but understanding the needs and satisfaction
of a large number of occupants will not only help identify the full spectrum of issues but also help in
prioritizing responses.
·· Frequency. There are no requirements for the frequency of obtaining feedback, but providing
frequent, convenient opportunities for occupants to provide comments will benefit the project.
38

FURTHER EXPLANATION

RECOMMENDED PRELIMINARY DATA COLLECTION

To understand the likely energy load distribution by end use, use a “simple box” energy model (Figure 1) to identify
initial annual energy consumption percentages of total energy use for each of the following end uses:
·· Space heating
·· Space cooling
IP

·· Ventilation
·· Domestic hot water
·· Lighting
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Miscellaneous equipment
·· Other, as applicable

Typical energy consumption by end use for a project depends on building type, occupancy, climate, and other
project-specific conditions.

ANNUAL ENERGY CONSUMPTION BY ENDUSE: HOSPITAL

Space cooling 16%

Space heating 26%

Vent fans 6% Task lights 0%

Heat reject 1%
Pumps 3%
Refrig display 0%
Domestic hot water 10% Ht pump supplement 0%
Ext usage 0%

Other 4%

Misc Equipment 25%

Lights 13%

Figure 1. Example energy load distribution graph

Local climate data include annual and hourly dry-bulb temperature, wet-bulb depression, relative humidity, comfort
hours, and average annual and monthly rainfall for the project site.
For Steps 4 and 5, gather the information outlined for SS Credit Site Assessment, including solar and wind
capacity, heating and cooling degree days, seasonal wind velocity and direction, precipitation, microclimate,
available energy sources, utility providers, energy and peak load costs, potential financial incentives, and other issues
likely to affect energy-related systems.
For Step 5, consider the location (distance from site), capacity, and type and level of treatment for the sewage
system serving the site, including any sewage plant facilities. Include data on average water treatment cost.
For Step 5, consider the location, capacity, and type of water sources serving the site, such as reservoirs, aquifers,
wells, lakes, rivers, nonpotable sources, and municipal supply. Include monthly and annual rainfall data and the
average cost of potable (and/or nonpotable) water.
 39

RECOMMENDED PRELIMINARY ENERGY ANALYSIS

An energy analysis can be used to evaluate potential energy strategies, such as insulation levels and window
performance levels. This will not only inform potential load reduction strategies but also help the tenant determine
whether the base building is appropriate.

Building envelope performance. Consider the following aspects of all base buildings under consideration for a
tenant location:
·· Solar heat gain coefficients, overall U-value of glazing systems, performance criteria for windows in low,

IP
medium, and high ranges
·· R-value (insulation) of walls, roofs, and conditioned below-grade structures in low, medium, and high ranges
·· Effect of orientation on energy loads

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
·· Effect of percentage of exterior glazing (e.g., 30%, 50%, and 70%) on energy loads

Lighting levels. Consider at least two options for reasonable reductions in lighting power density, including one
aimed at a significant reduction from ASHRAE standards.

Thermal comfort ranges. Consider options for expanding the thermal comfort range.

Plug and process load needs. Consider at least two options for reasonable reductions in plug load density,
including one aimed at a significant reduction from ASHRAE standards.

Programmatic and operational parameters. Consider options aimed at reducing tenant space, hours of
occupancy, and/or number of occupants.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Light level analysis1
During the early stages of a Schools project, the team was able to reduce the number of lighting fixtures in classrooms
by 25% compared with standard practice by selecting a paint color whose light reflectance value was 75%, instead of
64% for the initial proposed paint selection, while maintaining adequate illuminance (roughly 50 footcandles) on
work surfaces.
The reduction in the number of light fixtures has multiple benefits, beyond the initial savings in fixture purchases
and installation: the cost of electrical energy for lighting falls by 25% over the life of the building, and since lighting
produces heat, the costs for cooling (roughly 1 watt of energy for every 3 watts of lighting) are reduced.

Example 2. Determining load reduction strategies

Determining effective load reduction strategies is the first step in creating an energy-efficient building. Early focus
on load reduction is important because once the space programming is completed and the building is constructed,
changing certain components that affect loads becomes difficult and expensive, especially for a building dominated
by external or building envelope loads.
An example of a dominant external load is a fully glazed western façade in a mixed climate like New York City.
This type of façade creates large loads for both cooling and heating, resulting in excessive energy use and oversizing
of HVAC systems. Example strategies to decrease envelope loads include increasing insulated opaque wall area
(balanced with daylighting strategies), increasing the insulating value of the glazing and window frame system, and
summer solar shading.
On the other end of the spectrum are large buildings with dominant internal loads, like hospitals. Internal
loads are often cooling loads, created by a combination of heat-producing lighting, equipment, and occupants.
Conditioning of outside air is another big internal load. Load reduction strategies include decreasing lighting
power, providing daylighting, reducing plug loads, using economizers for free cooling, and reducing the amount of
ventilation air during periods of partial occupancy with CO2 sensors.
In both cases, significant energy load reduction can be achieved. The concept model can provide feedback
on which combination of strategies is likely to be the most effective and guide the design team in preparation for

1. Adapted from 7group and Bill G. Reed, The Integrative Design Guide to Green Building: Redefining the Practice of Sustainability (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2009).
40

modeling HVAC systems. This allows HVAC systems to be properly sized and equipment efficiency improved in
subsequent models; the team may be able to downsize or even eliminate equipment. The integrated approach can
thus save both energy and capital costs of construction.

EXAMPLE WORKSHEET DOCUMENTATION

Provide a brief explanation of how the analysis informed tenant space selection.

The project team was considering two sites for the tenant space. One was a suburban location where most of the staff would
IP

need to drive to work, and the other was downtown, close to the office’s current location. The client had not considered
bringing the staff into the space selection process and viewed the move mainly as a rent reduction strategy. After forming a
focus group and convening it to discuss location alternatives, the client discovered that a majority of the staff appreciated
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

having an office close to public transportation, and many also took advantage of the childcare services in the vicinity.
Some parents walked to a daycare center at lunch to visit their young children, and they wanted to be close by in case their
children got sick. Although the suburban location would have saved the company several thousand dollars per year in
rental cost, the current employees would have been leaving work more often and for longer periods if they were far from
their children, and those who did not own cars would likely have quit their jobs, taking their years of experience with them;
both results would have been costly to the company. This engagement process established that finding a downtown location
close to services and alternative transit was a very high priority.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All projects in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project pay pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Integrative Process worksheet (site and energy analysis tabs, water tab optional) X

Narrative explaining methods to gather feedback X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. The related credit’s methodology for calculating transit service daily trips can
be used to compare the suitability of project site locations for commuters.

WE Prerequisite and Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. The building water use and appliance and process use
calculation methodologies of the related prerequisite and credit must be used for conducting the preliminary water
budget analysis.

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. The narrative that this credit requires,
describing the preliminary energy-related systems analysis and preliminary water budget analysis, must be included
in the project’s OPR and BOD, both of which are required by the related prerequisite. The purpose here is to give the
commissioning authority an understanding of the process and criteria used to select the designed systems—that is,
the “why,” not just the “what.”
 41

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The
preliminary energy analysis required for this credit encourages project teams to focus on load reductions before
analyzing system efficiencies. Using “simple box” energy modeling at an early stage, even before determining
building form, gives a project team energy end-use benchmarks that directly inform design decisions during an
iterative process, significantly improving energy performance and reducing operating costs.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The preliminary energy analysis requires project
teams to calculate basic energy end use distribution in the earliest design stages. By doing so, teams can compare the

IP
relative energy demands of different ventilation strategies while meeting minimum ventilation requirements.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. The preliminary energy-related systems analysis requires
project teams to calculate basic energy end use distribution in the earliest design stages. By doing so, teams can

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
compare the relative energy demands of different ventilation strategies, including filtration, exhaust, demand
control ventilation, and natural ventilation.

EQ Credit Thermal Comfort. Adjusting thermal comfort ranges can dramatically affect energy consumption.
The preliminary energy-related systems analysis allows project teams to study the relative energy demands of
adjustments to thermal comfort in the earliest design stages. Thermal comfort depends on many interrelated issues
covered by a preliminary energy-related systems analysis, such as ventilation, internal loads from lighting and
occupants, daylighting strategies, and external loads associated with envelope performance. Early modeling allows
project teams to iteratively adjust and evaluate the associated parameters before schematic design.

EQ Credit Daylight. Effective daylighting, including appropriate levels of natural light with controls that reduce
electric lighting, can dramatically affect energy consumption. The preliminary energy analysis allows project
teams to compare daylighting design strategies, particularly balancing total glazing area with its effect on thermal
performance and human comfort.

EQ Credit Quality Views. The preliminary energy-related systems analysis helps project teams give occupants
exterior views while balancing total glazing area with its effect on thermal performance and comfort.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and
Communities (February 2, 2012): ansi.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

charrette an intensive, multiparty workshop that brings people from different disciplines and backgrounds together
to explore, generate, and collaboratively produce design options
42

integrated project delivery an approach that involves people, systems, and business structures (contractual and
legal agreements) and practices. The process harnesses the talents and insights of all participants to improve results,
increase value to the owner, reduce waste, and maximize efficiency through all phases of design, fabrication, and
construction. (Adapted from American Institute of Architects)

owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

simple box energy modeling analysis (also known as “building-massing model energy analysis”) a simple base-
IP

case energy analysis that informs the team about the building’s likely distribution of energy consumption and is used
to evaluate potential project energy strategies. A simple box analysis uses a basic, schematic building form.

water budget a project-specific method of calculating the amount of water required by the building and associated
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

grounds. The budget takes into account indoor, outdoor, process, and makeup water demands and any on site supply
including estimated rainfall. Water budgets must be associated with a specified amount of time, such as a week,
month, or year and a quantity of water such as kGal, or liters.
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS IP
43
 45

LT
Location and

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION

Transportation (LT)
OVERVIEW
The Location and Transportation (LT) category rewards thoughtful project team decisions about the location of
their tenant space, with credits that encourage compact development, alternative transportation, and connection
with amenities, such as restaurants and parks. The LT category is an outgrowth of the Sustainable Sites (SS) category,
which formerly covered location-related topics.
Well-located tenant spaces are those that take advantage of existing infrastructure—public transit, street
networks, pedestrian paths, bicycle networks, and services and amenities. By recognizing existing patterns of
development and land density, project teams can reduce strain on the environment from the social and ecological
costs that accompany sprawling development patterns. In addition, the compact communities promoted by the
LT credits encourage robust and realistic alternatives to private automobile use, such as walking, biking, vehicle
shares, and public transit. These incremental steps can have significant benefits: a 2009 Urban Land Institute
study concluded that improvements in land-use patterns and investments in public transportation infrastructure
alone could reduce greenhouse gas emissions from transportation in the U.S. by 9% to 15% by 20501; globally, the
transportation sector is responsible for about one-quarter of energy-related greenhouse gas emissions.2
If integrated into the surrounding community, a well-located tenant space can also offer distinct advantages
to the owner and users of the space. For owners, locating the tenant space in a vibrant, livable community makes
it a destination for residents, employees, customers, and visitors. For occupants, walkable and bikable locations
can enhance health by encouraging daily physical activity, and proximity to services and amenities can increase
happiness and productivity.
Design strategies that complement and build on the project location are also rewarded in the LT section. For
example, by limiting parking, a project can encourage building users to take alternative transportation. By providing
bicycle storage, a project can support users seeking transportation options.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Smart Growth and Climate Change, epa.gov/dced/climatechange.htm (accessed September 11, 2012).
2. International Council on Clean Transportation, Passenger Vehicles, theicct.org/passenger-vehicles (accessed March 22, 2013).
46

CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION
Walking and bicycling distances are measurements of how far a pedestrian and bicyclist would travel from a point
of origin to a destination, such as the nearest bus stop. This distance, also known as shortest path analysis, replaces
the simple straight-line radius used in LEED 2009 and better reflects pedestrians’ and bicyclists’ access to amenities,
taking into account safety, convenience, and obstructions to movement. This in turn better predicts the use of these
amenities.
Walking distances must be measured along infrastructure that is safe and comfortable for pedestrian: sidewalks,
all-weather-surface footpaths, crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities.
Bicycling distances must be measured along infrastructure that is safe and comfortable for bicyclists: on-street
bicycle lanes, off-street bicycle paths or trails, and streets with low target vehicle speed. Project teams may use
bicycling distance instead of walking distance to measure the proximity of bicycle storage to a bicycle network in LT
Credit Bicycle Facilities.
When calculating the walking or bicycling distance, sum the continuous segments of the walking or bicycling
LT

route to determine the distance from origin to destination. A straight-line radius from the origin that does not follow
pedestrian and bicyclist infrastructure will not be accepted.
Refer to specific credits to select the appropriate origin and destination points. In all cases, the origin must be
accessible to all building users, and the walking or bicycling distance must not exceed the distance specified in the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

credit requirements.
 47

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

LEED for Neighborhood

Development Location

LT
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (8-18 points)
Retail (8-18 points)

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION

Hospitality (8-18 points)

INTENT

To avoid development on inappropriate sites. To reduce vehicle

distance traveled. To enhance livability and improve human health
by encouraging daily physical activity.

REQUIREMENTS
Locate the project within the boundary of a development certified under LEED for Neighborhood Development
(Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating systems, Certified Plan or Certified Project under the LEED v4
rating system).

Projects attempting this credit are not eligible to earn points under other Location and Transportation credits.

TABLE 1. Points for LEED ND location

Certification level Points

Certified 8

Silver 10

Gold 12

Platinum 18
48

BEHIND THE INTENT

The LEED for Neighborhood Development (LEED ND) rating system combines principles of smart growth, new
urbanism, and green building design and construction to promote sustainable, healthful, and equitable places
for neighborhood residents, workers, and visitors. Certified neighborhoods exhibit a wide range of sustainability
features, such as walkability, transit access, sensitive land protection, connectivity, and shared infrastructure.
Project teams that select a project location in a LEED ND certified neighborhood or plan have demonstrated
a commitment to the fundamental goals of the Location and Transportation credit category: excellent building
location and linkages with the surrounding community. The requirement for this credit is that the project be
certified (not just registered) under LEED ND, to ensure that all the goals of the LT category are addressed. This
credit thereby provides a streamlined alternative to the pursuit of the individual LT credits.
LT

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. IDENTIFY LEED ND NEIGHBORHOOD OR CERTIFIED PLAN AREA FOR POTENTIAL

DEVELOPMENT
Identify an interior space within a building that is located fully within a LEED ND–certified neighborhood
or certified plan area.
·· Check the USGBC website for up-to-date lists of LEED ND projects.
·· Local USGBC chapters in the United States or other green building councils in other countries
may also serve as valuable resources for identifying certified or soon-to-be-certified LEED ND
neighborhoods.

STEP 2. CONFIRM ELIGIBILITY OF LEED ND PROJECT

Confirm that the LEED ND neighborhood or plan area in which the project is located meets credit criteria
by collecting the following information:
·· Rating system and rating system version
·· Certification designation (Table 2; note differing terminology)
·· Certification level and certification date

TABLE 2. Eligibility by LEED ND certification designation

Version Eligible Ineligible

Stage 2 LEED for Neighborhood Development Certified Plan Stage 1 LEED for Neighborhood
LEED ND Pilot
Stage 3 LEED for Neighborhood Development Certified Project Development Pre-reviewed Plan

Stage 2 Pre-certified LEED for Neighborhood Development Plan Stage 1 Conditional Approval of
LEED 2009
Stage 3 LEED ND Certified Neighborhood Development LEED ND Plan

LEED for Neighborhood Development Certified Plan LEED for Neighborhood Development
LEED v4
LEED for Neighborhood Development Certified Built Project Conditional Approval

The LEED ND project must be certified to earn this credit. LEED ND projects that have only been
registered or submitted for certification review do not qualify.
Project teams must consider the certification timelines of related ID+C and ND projects:
·· If an associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND Plan, be sure that the individual
interiors projects are registered before the LEED ND project submits its application for certification.
·· If an associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND Plan and all building designs are
substantially complete, it is recommended to complete the ID+C design review phase first, then
the LEED ND Plan certification. Major overlap exists between the water and energy prerequisites.
Completing the ID+C certifications first will greatly streamline the LEED ND Plan review process.
·· If the associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND, both certifications need to be
submitted at approximately the same time to stay on schedule, since each depends on the certification
(not just registration) of the other.
 49

Delays or appeals of one or both certification reviews could complicate matters if submission timelines
are not coordinated. Alert USGBC as early in the documentation process as possible when simulta-
neous certifications are expected for advice on how to proceed.

STEP 3. DETERMINE POTENTIAL POINTS AVAILABLE FOR LEED ND LOCATION CREDIT AND
INDIVIDUAL LT CREDITS
If the LEED ND project is certified and eligible for this credit, compare the available points offered by the
other LT credits and the LEED ND Location credit.

STEP 4. DETERMINE FINAL CREDIT ACHIEVEMENT PATHWAY

Select the preferred credit achievement pathway. Projects achieving the LEED ND Location credit are
ineligible to pursue additional LT credits.
·· LEED ND Location credit is appropriate if the points available for LT Credit LEED for Neighborhood
Development Location exceed the potential points available for individual LT credits. The compliance
path offered by this credit will likely save a project team time in documentation.
·· Individual LT credits are appropriate if the project is in an eligible LEED ND project or certified plan

LT
area but can achieve more points by pursuing multiple LT credits. Evaluate the trade-off between
additional points and the level of effort required to document them.
·· If the prospective LEED ND area is ineligible (Table 2), pursue individual LT credits.

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION

STEP 5. GATHER AND CONFIRM LEED ND PROJECT INFORMATION
Contact members of the LEED ND project team to gather the following information:
·· Project name and ID number
·· Map of certified LEED ND neighborhood or plan boundary

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. The entire group boundary must be within the LEED ND
project boundary to earn credit.

Campus Approach
Eligible. The entire campus boundary must be within the LEED ND project boundary to use the campus credit
approach.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

LEED ND project information (name, ID number, rating system and version, certification level, and date) X

Vicinity base map with LEED project boundary and LEED ND certified neighborhood or plan boundary X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
50

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
LT

DEFINITIONS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

None.
 51

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Surrounding Density
and Diverse Uses

LT
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (1–8 points)
Retail (1–8 points)

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

Hospitality (1–8 points)

INTENT

To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by

encouraging development in areas with existing infrastructure. To
promote walkability, and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle
distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily
physical activity.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. SURROUNDING DENSITY (3–6 POINTS)

Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a ¼-mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary
meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate residential and nonresidential densities” or the “combined
density” values.

TABLE 1A. Points for average density within ¼-mile of project (IP units)

Combined density Separate residential and nonresidential densities Points

Square feet per acre of buildable land Residential density (DU/acre) Nonresidential density (FAR)

22,000 7 0.5 3

35,000 12 0.8 6
52

TABLE 1B. Points for average density within 400 meters of project (SI units)

Combined density Separate residential and nonresidential densities Points

Square meters per hectare of

Residential density (DU/hectare) Nonresidential density (FAR)
buildable land

5 050 17.5 0.5 3

8 035 30 0.8 6

DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. DIVERSE USES (1–2 POINTS)

LT

Construct or renovate a building or a space within a building such that the building’s main entrance is within a
½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the main entrance of four to seven (1 point) or eight or more (2 points)
existing and publicly available diverse uses (listed in Appendix 1).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The following restrictions apply.

·· A use counts as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells products in several
categories).
·· No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g. if five restaurants are within walking distance,
only two may be counted).
·· The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use.
 53

BEHIND THE INTENT

Because most people prefer to walk no more than a quarter of a mile (400 meters) or five minutes to casual
destinations and no more than half a mile (800 meters) for regular trips such as a daily commute,1 locating different
kinds of destinations close to each other achieves a long list of documented environmental and social benefits. For
example, doubling residential and nonresidential density reduces the length of vehicular trips and total air pollution
by 30 percent.2 Air particulate levels go down along with greenhouse gas emissions, reducing transportation’s
climate change effects.3
Furthermore, per capita pedestrian and bicycle injuries and deaths tend to be fewer in denser neighborhoods
with more pedestrians and cyclists, since motorists must drive more slowly and carefully in these areas. The rate of
car collision fatalities goes down, too, as the average length of vehicular trips grows shorter.
Moreover, density improves community members’ health. As neighborhoods become more compact, residents
who frequently walk, bike, or use transit are more physically fit and less likely to be overweight.4 One study found
that the probability of being overweight falls around 5% for every half-mile (800 meters) walked per day.5 Finally,

LT
compact development capitalizes on existing infrastructure, saving money and resources while more efficiently
using land and preserving habitat, farmland, and open space on the urban fringe.
For all those reasons, this credit rewards a project location that is surrounded by existing built density and within
walking distance of a variety of services (“uses”). The density thresholds correspond to the minimum densities

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

needed to support bus transit (seven dwelling units per acre, 17.5 DU per hectare) and fixed-rail transit (12 DU per
acre, 30 DU per hectare). Two threshold types are listed, one combining residential and nonresidential densities, the
second separating them. Project teams therefore have flexibility in calculating the surrounding built density based
on the information available to them.
The credit restricts which uses can and cannot count to ensure a diversity of destinations. The more diverse types
of services within walking distance of the project, the more opportunities occupants have to combine their trips
when meeting daily needs—for example, stopping at a dry cleaner on the way to the bank.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SELECT BUILDING IN WHICH TO LOCATE

Use the criteria in the credit requirements to evaluate potential project locations. Follow these
suggestions to maximize the chances of identifying an appropriate location:
·· Limit site selection to areas within the central business district of a city or town center.
·· Give preference to areas of development that include residential uses.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY ELIGIBLE OPTIONS

Select the appropriate option(s) for the project.
·· Option 1 is for projects in dense locations. Spot-check density on an aerial map to determine whether
calculations can demonstrate credit achievement.
·· Option 2 is for projects that are close to a variety of amenities and services. If the main entrance within
easy walking distance of diverse uses, investigate this option in addition to Option 1.

1. Interview with Dan Burden, Walkable Communities, cited in How to Create and Implement Healthy General Plans (Raimi + Associates and Public Health
Law and Policy, 2008), p. B2, changelabsolutions.org/sites/default/files/Healthy_General_Plans_Toolkit_Updated_20120517_0.pdf (accessed June 10,
2013).
2. Raimi, Matthew, and Sarah Patrick with Design Community & Environment, in association with Reid Ewing, Lawrence Frank, and Richard Kreutzer,
Understanding the Relationship between Public Health and the Built Environment, Report prepared for the U.S. Green Building Council LEED ND Core
Committee and Congress for the New Urbanism (2006), p. 116, usgbc.org/Docs/Archive/General/Docs3901.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
3. Ewing, R., et al., Growing Cooler: The Evidence on Urban Development and Climate Change. (Urban Land Institute, 2007), postcarboncities.net/files/
SGA_GrowingCooler9-18-07small.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
4. Frank, L., et al., Linking Objectively Measured Physical Activity with Objectively Measured Urban Form: Findings from SMARTRAQ, American Journal of
Preventive Medicine (February 2005): 117–1255.
5. Frank, L. et al., Obesity Relationships with Community Design, Physical Activity, and Time Spent in Cars, American Journal of Preventive Medicine 27(2)
(August 2004): 87–96.
54

Option 1. Surrounding Density

STEP 1. IDENTIFY BUILDING SITES AND BUILDABLE LAND WITHIN REQUIRED RADIUS OF
PROJECT SITE
On a map, plot a ¼-mile (400-meter) radius around the project site from the project boundary.
·· Indicate building site types as residential, nonresidential, or mixed-use.
·· Indicate buildable land (see Getting Started, Previous Development). Do not include project buildings
or nonhabitable space, such as parking garages.

STEP 2. COLLECT INFORMATION ON DENSITY

For each building site location within the radius, determine whether sufficient information is available to
calculate residential and nonresidential building densities separately.
·· If the project team cannot determine the number of dwelling units in the surrounding land, use the
combined density calculation.
·· It might not be necessary to determine the total number of dwelling units or building floor area for all
LT

properties within the radius. If the area features a few extremely dense buildings, start with these first
to see whether the threshold can be met without further calculations.
Provided that all land area within the radius is accounted for, project teams must collect only enough
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

density information to demonstrate that values in Table 1 are met or exceeded.

STEP 3. PERFORM SEPARATE RESIDENTIAL AND NONRESIDENTIAL DENSITY

CALCULATIONS, IF APPLICABLE
If the information is available, calculate the density for each building type within the ¼-mile (400-meter)
radius. Designate each building and its associated land area as residential, nonresidential, or mixed use
(see Getting Started, Density).
·· Calculate total dwelling units per acre or hectare for all residential buildings.
·· Calculate the total floor-area ratio for all nonresidential buildings.
·· For mixed-use buildings within the radius, use Equations 1 and 2 to apply a weighted average of the
residential and nonresidential components.

EQUATION 1. Weighted average applied to residential land use for mixed-use projects

Mixed-use residential land = % Residential floor area × Total mixed-use land area (acres or hectares)

EQUATION 2. Weighted average applied to nonresidential land use for mixed-use projects

Mixed-use nonresidential land = % Nonresidential floor area × Total mixed-use land area (acres or hectares)

Add the mixed-use buildings’ dwelling units, nonresidential floor area, residential land, and nonresi-
dential land to the values determined when calculating the densities of purely residential or nonresi-
dential areas (see Further Explanation, Example 1).

STEP 4. CALCULATE COMBINED DENSITY, IF APPLICABLE

When separate residential or nonresidential density calculations cannot be performed for all areas, use
Equation 3 instead to determine the combined density within the prescribed radius.
·· Exclude parking garages.
·· For buildings with simple, rectilinear footprints, estimate floor area by measuring the building footprint
area and multiplying it by the number of floors.

EQUATION 3. Combined density

Combined density (ft2/acre or m2/hectare) = Total floor area (ft2 or m2) / Total buildable land (acres or hectares)
 55

STEP 5. DETERMINE POINTS EARNED

Refer to Table 1 in the credit requirements to determine points earned, based on the combined or
separate residential and nonresidential densities.
For separate calculations, if the point values for the residential and nonresidential densities are
different, the lowest performing land use is used to determine the number of points achieved.

Option 2. Diversity of Uses

STEP 1. DOCUMENT NEARBY USES

Survey the eligible existing uses in or near the project and classify the use types according to Appendix 1.
To be eligible, uses that are planned but not currently operating must be occupied within one year of
the date of the LEED project’s initial certificate of occupancy.

LT
Use the credit requirements to determine the number and category of uses that contribute to credit
achievement. Note the restriction on the number of uses of each type (see Further Explanation,
Example 2).

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

STEP 2. MAP WALKING ROUTES TO USES
On a map, label the eligible uses and plot walking routes from the project’s main entrance.
·· Measure the distance along each walking route to determine whether it meets the credit’s distance
requirements (see Figure 1 and LT Overview, Consistent Documentation).

Greater than 1/2 (800m) mile

walking route from
project site to diverse use Project site to bank:
5/8 mile (1 006m) -
DOES NOT QUALIFY
BANK X 1/2 mile (800m) or less
walking route from project site
to diverse use

PHARMACY
Project site to restaurant:
1/4 mile (400m) - DOES QUALIFY Project site to pharmacy:
LAUNDROMAT
RESTAURANT 7/16 mile, (704m) - DOES
QUALIFY

Project site to supermarket:

3/8 mile (604m) - DOES QUALIFY PROJECT
SITE

SUPERMARKET
Project site to laundromat:
3/16 mile, (302m) - DOES QUALIFY

PARK X
Project site to park:
9/16 mile, (905m) - DOES NOT QUALIFY

SCALE:
1/8 mile 1/4 mile 1/2 mile
(200m) (400m) (800m)

Figure 1. Example walking routes to diverse uses

56

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Residential and nonresidential density calculations
An interiors project in a new commercial building is surrounded by a variety of residential, nonresidential, and
mixed-use buildings within a ¼-mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary.
The project developer does not know the size of many of the residential buildings within the ¼-mile (400-meter)
radius of the project site and therefore chooses to do a separate density calculation for residential and nonresidential
densities. A survey of the area provides the following information:
LT

TABLE 2. Land area

Building type All types Residential Nonresidential Mixed-use

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Land area
130 acres 60 acres 60 acres 10 acres
(53 hectares) (23 hectares) (23 hectares) (4 hectares)

The project determines that 80% of the total mixed-use building floor area is residential and the other 20% is
nonresidential, and allocates the land area proportionally according to Equations 1 and 2:
Mixed-use residential land = 80% x 10 acres = 8 acres

Mixed-use nonresidential land = 20% x 10 acres = 2 acres

TABLE 3. Adjusted land area

Building
Total Residential Nonresidential
type

130 acres
Land area
(53 hectares)
60 acres + 8 acres = 68 acres (28 hectares) 60 acres + 2 acres = 62 acres (25 hectares)

There are 680 dwelling units within ¼-mile (400 meters) (including all residential units in mixed-use buildings).
The project team calculates density in dwelling units (DU) as follows:
Residential density = 680 DU / 68 acres = 10 DU / acre (24 DU / hectare)

Nonresidential space (including all nonresidential buildings and nonresidential space in mixed-use buildings)
within the radius totals 1,600,000 square feet (148 645 square meters), and the total nonresidential land area is
2,700,720 square feet (250 905 square meters). The team calculates the nonresidential density in floor-area ratio
(FAR) as follows:
Nonresidential density = 1,600,000 ft
2
/ 2,700,720 = 0.59 FAR

(Nonresidential density = 148 645 m

2
/ 250 905 = 0.59 FAR)

TABLE 4. Summary of densities

Building type Total Residential Nonresidential

130 acres 68 acres 62 acres (25 hectares)

Land area
(53 hectares) (28 hectares) 2,700,720 ft2 (250 905 m2)

Dwelling units 680 DU

Nonresidential 10 DU/acre
FAR 0.59
building space (24 DU/hectare)
 57

Since the density within ¼-mile (400 meters) is 10 dwelling units per acre (24 dwelling units per hectare) and the
nonresidential FAR is 0.59, the project can earn 3 points.

Example 2. Diversity of uses

A commercial interiors project selects a building that is within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of eight uses
in three categories (Appendix 1).

TABLE 5. Summary of uses

Category

Service Food retail Civic and community facilities

Use type Restaurant Grocery Child care Library Total

Number of uses 3 2 1 2 8
Eligible uses 2 2 1 2 7

LT
Only two uses from any one type are eligible, however. Thus, the project team can count only two of the three
restaurants. This leaves seven allowable uses, so the project can earn 1 point.

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Area plan or map showing project site, previous development, surrounding area, location of residential
X
and non-residential buildings, and ¼-mile (400-meter) radius from project site

Description of the previous development on the site X

Area plan or map showing project site, location and type of each use, and walking routes X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. High-density areas are more likely to be served by transit. Density levels
required to support transit services correspond to each density threshold in Option 1 of this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Points have been redistributed such that the credit’s full value can be earned only if the requirements for both
Options 1 and 2 are met.
·· There are now thresholds for separate residential and non-residential densities.
·· The radius for building density calculation is now specified as ¼-mile (400 meters) from the project boundary.
·· Proximity to the diverse uses is now based on walking distance instead of a radius.
·· Additional restrictions have been added to stipulate how diverse uses can be counted.
58

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and not
LT

constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land excluded
from development by codified law.

density a measure of the total building floor area or dwelling units on a parcel of land relative to the buildable land
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of that parcel. Units for measuring density may differ according to credit requirements. Does not include structured
parking.

diverse use a distinct business or organization that provides goods or services intended to meet daily needs and is
publicly available. Automated facilities such as ATMs or vending machines are not included. For a full list, see the
Appendix.

floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of parking, measured as the total
nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential structures. For
example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable land area, an FAR of 1.0 would be 10,000
square feet (930 square meters) of building floor area. On the same site, an FAR of 1.5 would be 15,000 square feet
(1395 square meters), an FAR of 2.0 would be 20,000 square feet (1860 square meters), and an FAR of 0.5 would be
5,000 square feet (465 square meters).

previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required regulatory
permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not previously developed
and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or preserved natural
area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit issuance constitutes the date of
previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous development.
 59

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Access to
Quality Transit

LT
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (1–7 points)
Retail (1–7 points)

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

Hospitality (1–7 points)

INTENT

To encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal

transportation choices or otherwise reduced motor vehicle use,
thereby reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and other
environmental and public health harms associated with motor vehicle use.

REQUIREMENTS

Locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus,
streetcar, or informal transit stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid
transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations, or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at
those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations
may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are
complete within 24 months of that date.

Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.

·· Qualifying transit routes must have paired route service (service in opposite directions).
·· For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold.
·· If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only trips from one stop
are counted towards the threshold.

TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry)

Weekday trips Weekend trips Points

72 40 2
144 108 5
360 216 7
60

TABLE 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter rail or ferry service only

Weekday trips Weekend trips Points

24 6 1

40 8 2

60 12 3

Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the documented
levels may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with
service at or above the prior level.
LT

ALL OPTIONS
For all options, provide dedicated walking or bicycling lanes toward the transit lines. The lanes must extend from the
school building to at least the end of the school property and may not have any barriers (e.g., fences). School grounds
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

may be enclosed with fences during class hours for security purposes, provided the fences are open before and after
class hours for traveling students, faculty, and staff.
 61

BEHIND THE INTENT

Compact, walkable communities located near existing or planned transit provide alternatives to driving that benefit
the environment as well as the health and well-being of the community. Access to transit is particularly beneficial for
young people, the elderly, and people who cannot afford to own cars.
Nearly all forms of public transit create fewer greenhouse gas emissions per passenger than single-occupancy
vehicles. Developments in areas near existing transit also consume less land than low-density, auto-oriented
growth, reducing conversion of farmland and open spaces into built development. Investment in transit-oriented
development, a proven strategy for revitalizing downtowns and declining urban neighborhoods, brings a city roughly
twice the economic benefit as would result from the same monetary investment in highways.1
Transit-oriented development locations support transit services by boosting ridership, while project occupants
enjoy access to public transportation. Projects that are within walking distance of multiple transit routes will further
encourage occupants and visitors to use public transportation.

LT
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

STEP 1. IDENTIFY TRANSIT STOPS WITHIN ½-MILE (800 METERS)
On a site map, identify the location of any transit stops that appear to be within ½-mile (800 meters) of
the building in which the project is located.
·· Existing, temporarily rerouted, or planned stops may be eligible, provided they meet the credit
requirements for each situation.
·· Projects counting planned or temporarily rerouted service must provide documentation from the
transit authority indicating that the criteria will be met for those stops.

STEP 2. CLASSIFY TRANSIT BASED ON VEHICLE TYPES

Identify the type of transit vehicles that serve each transit stop, which could include bus, streetcar, bus
rapid transit (BRT), rail, or ferry.
·· Classify the identified transit stops by transit vehicle type (e.g., bus, streetcar, rail).
·· Transit stops for bus, streetcar, or informal transit between the ¼-mile (400-meter) and ½-mile
(800-meter) distance do not contribute to credit compliance.

STEP 3. CONFIRM WALKABILITY

Plot walking routes and distances from transit stops to the project building’s nearest functional entry (see
Figure 1 and LT Overview, Consistent Documentation).
·· Confirm that each functional entry is located with the required walking distance of one or more transit
stops, according to the maximum distances outlined in the credit requirements.
·· Each point at which a transit vehicle stops to receive or discharge passengers is considered a separate
stop; this includes stops facing each other on opposite sides of a street. If a route has two, separated
stops to serve each direction (e.g., on opposite sides of a street or on separated, one-way streets),
choose one stop to from which to measure the distance to that route.
·· Any transit stop reaching any functional entry of the project’s building within the specified distance
can be counted towards the credit. Therefore, different stops within walking distances of different
functional entries may count, provided they meet the credit requirements.

1. Newman, P., and J. Kenworthy, Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence (Washington, DC: Island Press, 1999).
62

3/16 mile (302m) walking

route from project site
(main entrance) to bus stop BUS
STOP

MAIN ENTRANCE

7/16 mile (704m) walking PROJECT SITE

route from project site
(main entrance) to rail
station
LT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

RAIL
STATION

SCALE:
1/4 mile (400 m)

BASED ON DETROIT SCHOOL OF ARTS, DETROIT PUBLIC SCHOOLS / PREPARED BY GREENSPACE LLC

Figure 1. Example walking distance map

STEP 4. COUNT AGGREGATE TRIPS AVAILABLE AT ALL QUALIFYING TRANSIT STOPS

A trip is considered the point at which passengers embark or disembark from a transit vehicle at a stop.
For a given route, count trips in only one direction.
For each transit stop within the required walking distance, review transit service schedules to
determine the following:
·· The number of transit vehicle trips on a weekday. If service varies by weekday, count the weekday with
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
the lowest number of trips.
LT2
LTc5:
·· The number of transit vehicle rides on a weekend. If weekend Access
counts to Quality
are different, Transit
use an average.
·· An individual transit stop can be counted only once, regardless of the number of entrances within
walking distance of it.

STEP 5. CALCULATE POINTS EARNED

Refer to Table 1 (for multiple transit types) or Table 2 (for commuter rail or ferry only) of the credit
requirements to determine the number of points earned.
·· If weekday and weekend trips meet different point thresholds, then the lowest performing time period
(weekday or weekend) determines the number of points documented.
·· If there is sufficient diversity of transit service among multiple routes, projects may be eligible to earn
1 bonus point, as outlined in the credit requirements.
 63

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLE
The project is a commercial office space pursuing Commercial Interiors and the building has two functional building
entries.
A light rail stop is within a ¼-mile (400-meter) walking distance of one of the functional building entries. A
commuter rail station is within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the other functional building entry. This
project meets the walkability requirement.
Both the light rail station and the commuter rail station have service in both directions. To determine the number

LT
of trips, the project team counts service in one direction and summarizes the service available at the eligible stops
(Table 3).

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

TABLE 3. Example transit service summary

Weekday Weekend day A Weekend day B Weekend average

Light rail 80 60 54 57

Commuter rail 25 10 10 10
Total 105 67
Point threshold 1 1

Using the table for project with multiple transit types (Table 1) (light rail and commuter rail service), the project is
eligible for 2 point.
The project team determines that the light rail provides more than 60% of the accessible transit (Table 4). The
bonus point for having no service that exceeds 60% is therefore unavailable.

TABLE 4. Route diversity

Weekday trips Average weekend trips Total

Light rail 80 57 137 (80% of trips)

Commuter rail 25 10 32 (20% of trips)

Total service 105 67 172

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

For government projects with security restrictions (e.g., military), on-site mass transit can be used to document
credit compliance. Transit service outside secured entrances may contribute to credit compliance, provided it is
within the required walking distance (based on mode type) of a stop along the on-site mass transit service.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
64

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Map showing project, project boundary, transit stop locations, and walking routes and distances to those stops X

Timetables or other service level documentation X

If applicable, documentation of planned transit or restoration of temporarily rerouted service X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
LT

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Transit service frequency is now included in the credit requirements.

·· Access is now measured by walking distance to functional building entries.
·· The credit now addresses both weekday and weekend availability.
·· Point thresholds are now based on the number of transit trips available within the required walking distance.
·· Modes of transportation have been expanded to include ferry, streetcar, rapid transit, and informal transit.
·· Private shuttles cannot be used to comply with the requirement

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Double the highest transit service point threshold.

DEFINITIONS
bus rapid transit an enhanced bus system that operates on exclusive bus lanes or other transit rights-of-way. The
system is designed to combine the flexibility of buses with the efficiency of rail.

functional entry a building opening designed to be used by pedestrians and open during regular business hours. It
does not include any door exclusively designated as an emergency exit, or a garage door not designed as a pedestrian
entrance.

light rail transit service using two- or three-car trains in a right-of-way that is often separated from other traffic
modes. Spacing between stations tends to be ½-mile (800 meters) or more, and maximum operating speeds are
typically 40–55 mph (65–90 kmh). Light-rail corridors typically extend 10 or more miles (16 kilometers).
 65

informal transit a publicly available transit service that includes a fixed route service, fare structure, and regular
operation. It does not consist of taxi, private shuttles or seasonal, oncall or on-demand transit

streetcar a transit service with small, individual rail cars. Spacing between stations is uniformly short and ranges
from every block to ¼-mile (400 meters), and operating speeds are primarily 10–30 mph (15–50 kmh). Streetcar
routes typically extend 2–5 miles (3-8 kilometers).

walking distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
in a safe and comfortable environment on a continuous network of sidewalks, all weather-surface footpaths,
crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities. The walking distance must be drawn from an entrance that is
accessible to all building users.

LT
ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

66
LT
 67

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Bicycle Facilities
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (1 point)

LT
Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

BICYCLE FACILITIES
INTENT

To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle

distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging utilitarian
and recreational physical activity.

REQUIREMENTS

COMMERCIAL INTERIORS, HOSPITALITY

Bicycle Network
Locate the space in a building such that a functional entry and/or the bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter)
walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
·· at least diverse 10 uses (see Appendix 1); or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.

All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4 800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.

Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms

Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% or more of all peak visitors, but no fewer than two storage spaces
per project.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants but no fewer than 2 spaces per
project in addition to the short-term bicycle spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one
additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter.
68

Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-
term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.

RETAIL

Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter)
walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1); or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.

All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
LT

Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.

Bicycle Storage
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Provide two short-term bicycle storage spaces for every 5,000 square feet (465 square meters), but no fewer than two
storage spaces per tenant space.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants, but no fewer than two storage
spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces.
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-
term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
Provide a bicycle maintenance program for employees or bicycle route assistance for employees and customers.
Route assistance must be provided in a manner easily accessible to both employees and customers.
For projects that are part of a master plan development only: If bicycle storage has been provided by the
development in which the project is located, determine the number of spaces that may be attributed to the project by
dividing the floor area of the retail project by the total floor area of the development (buildings only) and multiplying
the percentage result by the total number of spaces. If this number does not meet the credit requirement, the project
must provide additional bicycle storage.
 69

BEHIND THE INTENT

Bicycling offers many individual and global benefits. For every mile (1 600 meters) pedaled rather than driven,
nearly 1 pound (450 grams) of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions is avoided.1 People who shift from car to bicycle use
for short trips extend their lives by an estimated three to 14 months, gaining such health benefits as a lower risk of
cardiovascular disease.2 Planners and developers whose investments support bicycling as a transportation option
often win political and popular support.3
To promote bicycle-friendly design, this credit rewards two things: the provision of long- and short-term
bicycle storage, and access to a “bicycle network” (paths, trails, designated bike lanes, and slow-speed roadways).
Short-term and long-term bicycle storage capacity is considered separately because visitors and regular occupants
have different bicycle storage needs. For residential spaces, long-term storage must be provided in an area outside
individual dwelling units, because having to carry a bicycle into a living space is inconvenient and discourages bicycle
use. Finally, being adjacent to a bicycle network means that building occupants can more easily bicycle to and from
the building. The route destinations emphasize the role of bicycles for travel to and from home, work, and errands, as

LT
well as to other transportation modes such as transit.

BICYCLE FACILITIES
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY BICYCLE NETWORK AND ELIGIBLE DESTINATIONS

Obtain or create a map of bicycle networks in the area surrounding potential project locations.
·· Survey and map transit stops and other eligible uses (Appendix 1).
·· A “bicycle network” is defined to include, in any combination, demarcated bike lanes, bike trails, and
streets with a maximum speed limit of 25 mph (40 kph). Both bike lanes and bike trails must meet the
credit’s width requirements.
·· For differences in eligible destinations for specific project types, see Further Explanation, Rating
System Variations.

STEP 2. SELECT BIKE-FRIENDLY PROJECT LOCATION

Locate the project close to an existing or planned bicycle network that meets credit requirements for
uses within the specified distance from the project boundary (see Figure 1 and LT Overview, Consistent
Documentation).
·· The bicycle route connecting the project to the qualifying uses may include any combination of trails,
bike lanes, and slow-speed streets, provided the total distance traveled is less than 3 miles
(5 kilometers).
·· For planned bicycle trails or lanes, confirm the schedule for funding and completion.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Light-Duty Automotive Technology, Carbon Dioxide Emissions, and Fuel Economy Trends: 1975 through 2012, epa.
gov/OMSWWW/fetrends.htm#summary (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. de Hartog, J.J., H. Boogaard, H. Nijland, and G. Hoek, Do the Health Benefits of Cycling Outweigh the Risks? Environmental Health Perspectives 118(8)
(2010).
3. Royal, D., and D. Miller-Steiger, National Survey of Bicyclist and Pedestrian Attitudes and Behavior (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
2008), nhtsa.gov/DOT/NHTSA/Traffic%20Injury%20Control/.../810972.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
70

2 3/4 mile (4km) biking

route from project site (main
entrance) to rail station

STREET WITH SPEED

LIMIT UNDER 25 MPH BUS
BANK STOP

HARDWARE
PHARMACY

PROJECT SITE
DAY CARE
RESTAURANT

BEAUTY SCHOOL
ON-STREET BIKE LANE
SUPERMARKET
LT

DEDICATED
BIKE LANE

DENTAL
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OFF-STREET
RAIL BIKE TRAIL MEDICAL
STATION

SCALE:
1/2 mile 1 mile
(800m) (1600m)

BASED ON DETROIT SCHOOL OF ARTS, DETROIT PUBLIC SCHOOLS / PREPARED BY GREENSPACE LLC

Figure 1. Example bicycle network

STEP 3. GATHER OCCUPANT COUNT INFORMATION

Determine the number of expected regular occupants in the project space (see Further Explanation, Rating
System Variations, and Getting Started, Occupancy, on which users to include in calculations).
·· For all rating systems except Retail, also determine the number of expected peak visitors.
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
·· If actual occupancy is not known, see Getting Started, Occupancy. LT4
LTc6: Bicycle Facilities_2
STEP 4. DETERMINE NUMBER OF BICYCLE STORAGE SPACES REQUIRED
Calculate the number of required short-term and long-term bicycle spaces, using the following equations.

EQUATION 1. Short-term bicycle storage

Short-term bicycle storage = Peak visitors × 0.025

EQUATION 2. Long-term bicycle storage

Long-term bicycle storage = Regular building occupants × 0.05

EQUATION 3. Retail short-term bicycle storage

Short-term bicycle storage = ( 2 × [ Building floor area (f2) / 5000 ] )

OR
Short-term bicycle storage = ( 2 × [ Building floor area (m2) / 465 ] )

·· For all rating systems except Retail, calculate the number of required bicycle spaces using Equations 1
and 2.
·· For Retail, calculate the number of required long-term (Equation 2) and short-term (Equation 3)
bicycle spaces. Short-term bicycle storage is based on the total floor area of the tenant space (see
Further Explanation, Rating System Variations).
 71

The following conditions apply to all calculations for short- and long-term bicycle storage:
·· Results must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.
·· Storage spaces must be devoted to the project pursuing LEED certification and cannot be double-
counted. For example, a project team may not count the storage of other tenants toward its own
storage requirements if that storage is already allocated to the other building’s tenants. In addition,
if any non-LEED project occupants have access to the storage, then either sufficient spaces must
be provided for all occupants with access to amenities or the storage must be designated for the
occupants of the LEED project only.

STEP 5. DETERMINE NUMBER OF SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES REQUIRED

For all rating systems except Retail, use Equation 4 to determine the number of showers with changing
facilities required and incorporate these facilities into the project design (see Further Explanation, Rating
System Variations).

EQUATION 4. Shower facilities

≤ 100, Shower facilities =

LT
If regular building occupants 1

Regular building occupants – 100

If regular building occupants > 100, Shower facilities = 1 +
150

BICYCLE FACILITIES
·· Results must be rounded up to the next whole number. For projects with 100 or fewer regular building
occupants, only one shower is required.
·· Showers are required for commercial or institutional spaces only. For residential spaces, no additional
showers are required beyond those provided inside dwelling units. Projects with hotel guests may
exclude these occupants from shower calculations.
·· Shower facilities should be available to all project occupants without cost during the project’s hours
of operation.

STEP 6. INSTALL BICYCLE STORAGE

Locate short-term and long-term bicycle storage facilities within 100 feet (30 meters) of main and
functional entrances, respectively. Bicycle storage spaces are more likely to be used if they are located in
a well-lit, safe, and accessible area (see Further Explanation, Selecting Bicycle Storage).

FUNCTIONAL
ENTRY

SHORT-TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE

t
fee
40 2m)
(1
60 m)
(18
fee
t

MAIN ENTRANCE

LONG-TERM BICYCLE
STORAGE

Figure 2. Example bicycle storage locations

72

RETAIL

STEP 7. INSTITUTE PROGRAMS TO SUPPORT BICYCLING USE

Implement a bicycle maintenance program for retail store employees, or provide route assistance for
both employees and customers. Consider the best way to promote the bicycling program in order to
create and sustain participation.
·· Examples of maintenance programs include coupons for yearly bicycle tune-ups for those who ride to
work or on-site supplies for basic self-repairs (e.g., tire pumps, patch kits, basic tools).
·· Examples of route assistance include a map identifying bicycle routes to the project site, posted online
and in a location on the property that is easily accessible to employees and customers.
LT

FURTHER EXPLANATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CALCULATIONS
See Calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

SELECTING BICYCLE STORAGE

Bicycle racks should reflect best practices in design and installation. For example, the rack should support the bicycle
in at least two places, to keep it from falling over, and allow the owner to lock both the bicycle frame and one or
both wheels with a U-lock. The rack must be securely anchored and resistant to cutting, rusting, bending, and other
deformation.

EXAMPLE
A 30,000-square-foot (2 800-square-meter) retail space pursuing Retail has met the bicycle network requirement by
being within 3 miles’ (5 kilometers’) bicycling distance of 10 diverse uses on a bicycle network. The building will have
31 full-time employees plus 18 part-time employees who each work 20 hours per week. To determine the number of
bicycle storage spaces required, the team calculates regular building occupants for the building (see Getting Started,
Occupancy):

(18 part-time employees × 4 hours per day)

31 full-time employees + ______________________________________________ = 40 regular building occupants
8 hours per day

The team uses Equation 3 to determine the number of short-term bicycle storage spaces:
2 × [30,000 ft2 / 5,000] = 12 spaces

Equation 2 yields the number of long-term bicycle storage spaces:

40 regular building occupants × 0.05 = 2 spaces
 73

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Commercial Interiors, Hospitality
At least two short-term and two long-term bicycle storage spaces are required.

Retail
At least two short-term and two long-term spaces are required. Short-term spaces are based upon building floor area,
per Equation 3. Showers are not required. A bicycle maintenance or route assistance program is required. See Further
Explanation, Example.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Bike Path Width
European projects located in historic urban centers may be exempted from bike path width requirements on routes
where the requirements cannot be met due to space constraints. Additionally, the bicycle network definition is

LT
expanded to include additional criteria on these routes.

CAMPUS

BICYCLE FACILITIES
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. Measure distances from farthest building.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Commercial Interiors,
Documentation Retail
Hospitality

Vicinity map showing bicycle network and route and distance along
network to eligible destination(s). For planned bicycle networks,
X X
capital improvement plan demonstrating completion within one year
of certificate of occupancy.
Calculations for bicycle storage X X
Calculations for shower facilities X
Site plan showing bicycle storage locations X X
Description of programs to support bicycle use X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. A project in close proximity to 10 diverse uses under the related
credit may apply those uses to the requirements for this credit, provided they are located on a bicycle network that
meets this credit’s requirements.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Requirements for proximity to a bicycle network have been added.
·· Separate short- and long-term bicycle storage requirements have been created.
·· The shower room calculation method has changed.
74

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
bicycle network a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following:
LT

·· off-street bicycle paths or trails at least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet
(1.5 meters) wide for a one-way path
·· physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· streets designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 kmh)

bicycling distance the distance that a bicyclist must travel between origins and destinations, the entirety of which
must be on a bicycle network

bus rapid transit an enhanced bus system that operates on exclusive bus lanes or other transit rights-of-way.
The system is designed to combine the flexibility of buses with the efficiency of rail.

functional entry a building opening designed to be used by pedestrians and open during regular business hours. It
does not include any door exclusively designated as an emergency exit, or a garage door not designed as a pedestrian
entrance.

long-term bicycle storage bicycle parking that is easily accessible to residents and employees and covered to
protect bicycles from rain and snow

short-term bicycle storage non-enclosed bicycle parking typically used by visitors for a period of two hours or less

walking distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
in a safe and comfortable environment on a continuous network of sidewalks, all weather-surface footpaths,
crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities. The walking distance must be drawn from an entrance that is
accessible to all building users.
 75

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Reduced Parking
Footprint

LT
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points)

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

Hospitality (1–2 points)

INTENT

To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking facilities,

including automobile dependence, land consumption, and rainwater runoff.

REQUIREMENTS
Do not exceed the minimum local code requirements for parking capacity.
Provide parking capacity that is a percentage reduction below the base ratios recommended by the Parking
Consultants Council, as shown in the Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning Handbook,
3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4.

Case 1. Baseline Location

Projects that have not earned points under LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to
Quality Transit must achieve a 20% (1 point) or 40% (2 points) reduction from the base ratios.

Case 2. Dense and/or Transit-Served Location

Projects earning 1 or more points under either LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access
to Quality Transit much achieve a 40% (1 point) or 60% (2 points) reduction from the base ratios.
76

FOR ALL PROJECTS

The credit calculations must include all existing and new off-street parking spaces that are leased or owned by the
project, including parking that is outside the project boundary but is used by the project.  On-street parking in public
rights-of-way is excluded from these calculations.
For projects that use pooled parking, calculate compliance using the project’s share of the pooled parking.
Provide preferred parking for carpools for 5% of the total parking spaces after reductions are made from the base
ratios. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street parking is provided.
Mixed-use projects should determine the percentage reduction by first aggregating the parking amount of each
use (as specified by the base ratios) and then determining the percentage reduction from the aggregated parking
amount.
Do not count parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles unless these vehicles are regularly used by
employees for commuting as well as business purposes.
LT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 77

BEHIND THE INTENT

Inefficient parking systems result in increased congestion and carbon emissions, lost productivity and economic
opportunities, and unnecessary paved areas. For example, the United States has roughly two to three times more
parking spaces than people. Parking lots’ concrete and asphalt cover approximately 2,000 to 6,000 square miles
(5 180 to 15 000 square kilometers) 1, 2, 3 comprising about 35% of the surface area in the average U.S. residential
neighborhood and 50% to 70% of the average nonresidential area.4
The impervious surface of most parking spaces has environmental and financial downsides. Runoff from
impervious surfaces can overwhelm municipal stormwater systems and flushes contaminants into waterways.
Dark-colored parking lot surfaces trap heat, raising ambient air temperatures, which in turn necessitate more energy
for cooling. Parking is also expensive, costing landowners and developers an average of about $15,000 per space in
the U.S.5
Parking demand can be reduced by locating projects in high-density, mixed-use areas or in places well served
by transit, or by instituting transportation demand management strategies, such as providing preferred parking for

LT
carpools. To complement the use of these alternative modes or vehicle-sharing arrangements, vehicular parking
itself can be limited by designing fewer spaces. This credit uses the Transportation Planning Handbook base ratios
as a baseline against which reductions in parking supply can be compared. When combined with a requirement to
provide no more parking than is necessary by code, this baseline ensures that meaningful reductions are achieved.

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS

Identify the minimum amount of parking required by local code. Confirm that the project’s maximum
allowable parking is less than or equal to minimum code requirements.
·· In some cases, local codes do not establish minimum thresholds. Projects located in areas without a
code minimum automatically meet this requirement.
·· Projects with no associated off-street parking automatically achieve credit compliance; no calculations
or preferred parking spaces are required.

STEP 2. CALCULATE BASE RATIOS AND BASELINE PARKING CAPACITY

Based on the project’s space use type(s) and size, determine the parking capacity base ratio using the
Transportation Planning Handbook (see Further Explanation, Base Ratios).

STEP 3. IDENTIFY APPROPRIATE CASE

Case 2 is appropriate for projects that expect to earn at least 1 point in either LT Credit Surrounding
Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to Quality Transportation. Otherwise, use Case 1.

STEP 4. ESTIMATE PARKING DEMAND

Estimate how many cars are likely to drive to and from the project, and determine whether this number is
less than the local code minimum and the capacity calculated from the base ratios.
The Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Trip Generation Handbook provides estimates for the number
of car trips generated by space type.

1. Chester, Mikhail, Arpad Horvath, and Samer Madanat, Parking Infrastructure: Energy, Emissions, and Automobile Life-Cycle Environmental Accounting,
Environmental Research Letters 5(3) (2010), dx.doi.org/10.1088/1748-9326/5/3/034001 (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. Ben-Joseph, Eran, ReThinking a Lot: The Design and Culture of Parking (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2012).
3. Delucchi, Mark, Annualized Social Cost of Motor-Vehicle Use in the U.S., 1990–1991, vol. 6 (Institute of Transport Studies, 1997), Table 6-A.1, its.ucdavis.
edu/?page_id=10063&pub_id=571 (accessed June 10, 2013).
4. Akbari, Hashem, L. Shea Rose, and Haider Taha, Analyzing the Land Cover of an Urban Environment Using High-Resolution Orthophotos, Landscape and
Urban Planning 63(1) (2003): 1–14, sciencedirect.com/science/journal/01692046 (accessed June 10, 2013).
5. Victoria Transportation Policy Institute, Transportation Cost and Benefit Analysis II: Parking Costs (2012), Table 5.4.3-1, vtpi.org/tca/tca0504.pdf
(accessed June 10, 2013).
78

STEP 5. DEVELOP AND IMPLEMENT STRATEGIES TO REDUCE PARKING DEMAND

Consider both new and existing parking associated with the project. Based on estimated demand,
if significant reductions are likely to be necessary, consider implementing multiple strategies for a
cumulative effect.
·· Choose a project location that maximizes the opportunity for building occupants to travel via transit,
walking, bicycles, and other modes that reduce off-street parking demands.
·· Integrate transportation demand management (TDM) strategies to reduced parking demands (see
Further Explanation, TDM Strategies).
Incorporate the selected strategies into the project.
·· Projects that do not provide additional parking must meet the credit requirements for the existing
parking.
·· If the project’s required parking capacity falls below the local code minimum design thresholds, work
with the municipality to secure zoning variances. Referencing the requirements of this LEED credit
may prove helpful in discussion with local governments.

STEP 6. DETERMINE PROJECT’S REDUCED PARKING CAPACITY

LT

Compute the project’s total parking capacity including both new and existing spaces, and ensure that it
does not exceed the local code minimum.
·· Use Equation 1 to determine whether the project complies with the credit requirements for the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

appropriate case, based on the designed capacity and the baseline capacity determined using the
base ratio method for each space type (see Further Explanation, Example).
·· If the project type does not fit any base ratio category or if the tenant is not yet known, select the best
approximation and provide a narrative justifying this selection.

EQUATION 1. Percentage of parking capacity reduction

Parking reduction = (Total baseline capacity – Total provided capacity) / Total baseline capacity × 100

·· Include pooled parking used by the project building (as a proportionate share of total pooled parking;
see Further Explanation, Total Vehicle Parking Capacity) and any parking used by the project both
inside and outside the project boundary, as indicated in the credit requirements.
·· Exclude fleet and inventory vehicles and parking in public rights-of-way, as indicated in the credit
requirements.

STEP 7. PROVIDE CARPOOL PARKING

Based on the project’s reduced parking capacity design, reserve 5% as preferred parking for carpools
(see Further Explanation, Preferred Parking).
 79

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

BASE RATIOS

TABLE 1. Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces

Arena   0.33/seat
Assisted living   0.35/DU

LT
Boarding house, B&B, convent, and other   1/unit or room plus 2 for owner and staff
sleeping rooms

Church   0.4/seat
College, university School population: students, faculty and staff 0.4/school population

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

Condo, townhouse   Use Owned Apartment ratios
Consumer services (including banks)   4.6/1,000 ft2 (5.0/100 m2)
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel < 25,000 ft (2 325 m )
2 2
30/1,000 ft2 (32.29/100 m2)
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room (4.65
m2 per guest room)

Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 25,000 ft2 to 50,000 ft2 Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room (4.65 (2 325 m2 to 4 650 m2) If x is ft2, 30-[10 x (x-25,000)/25,000]
m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 32.3-[10.8 x (y-
2325)/2325] spaces per 100 m2 GLA
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 50,000 ft2 to 100,000 ft2 Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room (4.65 (4 650 to 9 300 m2) If x is ft2, 20-(10 x (x-50,000)/50,000)
m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 10.8-[10.8 x (y-
4650)/4650] spaces per 100 m2 GLA
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 100,000 to 250,000 ft2 Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room (4.65 (9 300 to 23 225 m2) If x is ft2, 10-(4 x (x-100,000)/150,000)
m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 10.8-[4.3 x (y-9300)/13
925] spaces per 100 m2 GLA
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel More than 250,000 ft2 (23 225 m2) 6/1,000 ft2 (6.5/100 m2)
but exceeding 50 ft per guest room (4.65 m
per guest room)

Data processing, telemarketing   6.0/1,000 ft2 (6.5/100 m2)

Day care   0.3/licensed student
Dry cleaners   Use General and Convenience Retail ratio
Elderly housing   0.5/DU
Elementary school   Higher of 0.2/auditorium or gym seat, or
0.25/student
Fast food With or without drive-through 15/1,000 ft2 (16/100 m2)
Free-standing discount super store   5.5/1,000 ft2 (5.92/100 m2), including
outdoor sales areas
General and convenience retail Not in shopping center 2.75/1,000 ft2 (2.96/100 m2)
General light industrial, industrial park, and   1.85/1,000 ft2 (1.99/100 m2)
manufacturing
80

TABLE 1 (CONTINUED). Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces

Government office building   Use Office Building radio if general office

only; otherwise, parking study prepared for
complex
Health, fitness club   7/1,000 ft2 (7.5/100 m2)
Heavy, hard goods, furniture store, carpet   2.5/1,000 ft2 (2.7/100 m2)
store

High school   Higher of 0.3/auditorium or gym seat, or

0.3/student
High-turnover restaurant No bar 15/1,000 ft2 (16/100 m2)
High-turnover restaurant With bar 20/1,000 ft2 (21.5/100 m2)
Hospital   1.1/employee
LT

Hotel, motel   1.25/room. Add 10/1,000 ft2 (10.8/100 m2) for

lounge/restaurant. Add conference/banquet
at following rates:
1. < 20 ft2/room (1.86 m2/room): none
2. 20 ft2/room (1.86 m2/room) to 50 ft2/room
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

(4.65 m2/room): Scaled

If x is ft2 per room, 30-[10 x (x-20)/30]
spaces per 1,000 ft2 GLA conference banquet
If y is m2 per room, 32.3-[10.8 x (y-1.86)/2.79]
spaces per 100 m2 GLA conference banquet
3. > 50 ft2/room (4.65 m2/room): 20/1,000
ft2 (21.5/100 m2)
Junior or community college School population: students, faculty and staff 0.25/school population

Live theater   0.4/seat

Medical, dental office building Not on hospital campus 4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2)
Medical, dental office building On hospital campus 4/1,000 ft2 (4.3/100 m2)
Mini-warehouse   1.75/100 units
Movie theater with matinee 1 screen 0.5/seat
Movie theater with matinee 2 to 5 screens 0.33/seat
Movie theater with matinee 5 to 10 screens 0.3/seat
Movie theater with matinee more than 10 screens 0.27/seat
Nightclub   19/1,000 ft2 (20.5/100 m2)
Nursing home   0.5/bed
Office building < 25,000 ft (2 325 m )
2 2
3.8/1,000 ft2 (4.1/100 m2)
Office building 25,000 to 100,000 ft2 (2 325 to 9 300 m2) Scaled
If x is ft2, 3.8-[0.4 x (x-25,000)/75,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2, 4.1-[0.43 x (y-2325)/6975] spaces
per 100 m2
Office building 100,000 ft2 (9 300 m2) 3.4/1,000 ft2 (3.67/100 m2)
Office building 100,000 to 500,000 ft 2
Scaled
(9 300 to 46 500 m2) If x is ft2, 3.4-[0.6 x (x-100,000)/400,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2, 3.67-[0.67 x (y-9300)/37 200]
spaces per 100 m2
Office building more than 500,000 ft2 (more than 46 500 m2) 2.8/1,000 ft2 (3.0/100 m2)
Other public assembly   0.25/person in permitted capacity where not
seated, or 0.3/seat where seated
Owned accessory dwelling unit   1/Accessory DU. Den must be counted as
bedroom if it has closet. Ratios include 0.15
space per unit for visitors.
 81

TABLE 1 (CONTINUED). Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces

Owned apartment Efficiency 1/DU for efficiency units. Den must be

counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Owned apartment With bedroom 1.75/DU for first bedroom plus 0.25 space
for each additional bedroom. Den must be
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Pharmacy With or without drive-through Use General and Convenience Retail ratio
Pro baseball stadium   0.35/seat
Pro football stadium   0.31/seat
Quality restaurant   20/1,000 ft2 (21.5/100 m2)
Rental apartment Efficiency 1/DU for efficiency units. Den must be

LT
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Rental apartment With bedroom 1.5/DU for first bedroom plus 0.25 space
for each additional bedroom. Den must be
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Rental apartment In college or university housing district 1/DU for efficiency and 1 bedroom units plus
0.5 space for each additional bedroom. Den
must be counted as bedroom if it has closet.
Ratios include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in < 400,000 ft2 (37 200 m2) GLA 4/1,000 ft2 (4.3/100 m2)
nonretail uses

Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in 400,000 to 600,000 ft2 (37 200 m2 to Scaled
nonretail uses 55 750 m2) GLA If x is ft2, 4+[0.5 x (x-400,000)/200,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2, 4.3+[0.5 x (y-37 200)/18 550]
spaces per 100 m2
Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in More than 600,000 ft2 (55 750 m2) GLA 4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2)
nonretail uses

Shopping center, more than 10% GLA in   Shared parking analysis

other uses

Single-family detached residential < 2,000 ft2 (186 m2) 1/DU

Single-family detached residential 2,000 to 3,000 ft2 (186 to 279 m2) 2/DU
Single-family detached residential More than 3,000 ft2 (280 m2) 3/DU
Specialty super stores, home improvement   4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2), including outdoor
sales areas

Supermarket, convenience market   6.75/1,000 ft2 (7.3/100 m2)

Video rental   Use General and Convenience Retail ratio
Warehousing   0.67/1,000 ft2 (0.72/100 m2)

DU = dwelling unit
GLA = gross leasable area
Adapted from PCC Recommended Zoning Ordinance Provisions (2006), by Parking Consultants Council (PCC), National Parking Association,
published by Institute of Transportation Engineers, Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4. Use authorized by
the Institute of Transportation Engineers, 1627 I Street, NW, Suite 600, Washington, DC 20006 www.ite.org

TOTAL VEHICLE PARKING CAPACITY

When determining total parking capacity, include all off-street spaces available to users of the tenant space seeking
certification. This includes spaces within and outside the project boundary.
If parking spaces are shared by two or more buildings (“shared” or “pooled” parking), determine the share of this
parking allocated to the project. Include this number of spaces in the total parking capacity and provide the rationale
for any parking distribution.
82

The following parking spaces must be included in total parking capacity:

·· New and existing surface parking spaces
·· New and existing garage or multilevel parking spaces
·· Any off-street parking spaces outside the project boundary that are available to users of the tenant space

Exclude the following:

·· On-street (parallel or pull-in) parking spaces on public rights-of-way
·· Parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles, unless these vehicles are regularly used by employees for
commuting as well as business purposes
·· Motorbike and bicycle spaces

PREFERRED PARKING
Preferred parking is the spaces with the shortest walking distance to the main entrance to the tenant space or
LT

building in which the tenant space is located, exclusive of designated spaces for persons with disabilities. If parking is
provided on multiple levels of a facility, locate preferred spaces on the level closest to the main entrance.
If the parking area is subdivided by user type (e.g., customers versus employees, staff versus students, VIP
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

parking for ranking military officials), the required number of preferred parking spaces may be distributed
proportionally across each parking area. Alternatively, provide one preferred parking area for all user types while
maintaining separate parking areas for nonpreferred vehicles.

TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES

Examples of transportation demand management strategies include the following.
·· Telecommuting. Allow employees to work remotely on certain days.
·· Shuttles. Provide shuttle service between transit stops and/or commercial and residential centers. Although
shuttles can help reduce parking demand, they cannot be used to earn LT Credit Access to Quality Transit.
·· Shared parking between uses. Size the parking supply so that surrounding uses with different peak
occupancies can all use the parking. For example, a commercial office with daytime peak occupancy can share
its parking supply with an adjacent movie theater with evening peak occupancy. Doing so will ensure that the
parking is maximized throughout the day.
·· Residential units rented or sold separately from parking. Conventionally, a dwelling unit’s rent or for-sale
price includes one or more parking spaces. Instead, rent or sell parking separately so that occupants internalize
the cost of parking and those without automobiles can opt not to have parking spaces.
·· Transit subsidy. Provide building occupants with a subsidy to help pay for transit trips.
·· Compressed workweek schedule. Structure employees’ schedules such that some work longer days in
exchange for not working on a particular day every one to three weeks.

EXAMPLE
A 20,000-square-foot (1 900-square-meter) commercial office space is adjacent to a movie theater complex and a
high-frequency light rail line, earning 1 point under LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. The project narrowly missed
achieving LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses because there were not enough nearby neighborhood
uses, but it still must comply with Case 2 since it achieved LT Credit Access to Quality Transit.
Tables 18-2–18-4 in the Transportation Planning Handbook indicate a baseline of 3.8 parking spaces per 1,000
square feet for an office building space smaller than 25,000 square feet (2 325 square meters), or 76 parking spaces for
this project. According to Case 2 requirements, the project should provide no more than 45 spaces (a 40% reduction
from 76 baseline spaces) to earn 1 point.
The project team reduces overall parking demand by providing secure bicycle storage spaces, arranging carpools
among employees, and being located within walking distance to transit. The project team then secures 40 spaces on
one level of the movie theater’s off-site, multilevel parking garage that can be leased and used by project occupants;
it provides no other parking. In addition, two of the 40 spaces are preferred parking for carpool use, meeting the
required 5% minimum. This parking reduction of 48% (40 instead of 76 spaces) earns the credit under Case 2.
 83

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Military Installations
Parking for ranking officials may be separated from regular parking, but the proportion of preferred parking for
carpools must be applied to each pool of parking.

Separated Employee or Visitor Parking

Projects with separate parking areas for visitors, employees, or students must apply the proportion of preferred
parking for carpools to each pool of parking.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Preferred Parking for Carpools and Shared-Use Vehicles
For European projects pursuing Case 2, provide preferred parking for carpool or shared-use vehicles for 5% of the
total parking spaces after reductions are made from the base ratios. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street

LT
parking is provided.

Discounted Parking Rate

For projects pursuing Case 2 which will require payment for parking, a discounted parking rate of at least 20% for

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

carpool vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking spaces.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. All the parking located within the LEED project boundary
must be included in the calculations. Submit a site plan that illustrates a reasonable distribution of preferred parking
spaces for the buildings or spaces seeking LEED certification.

Campus Approach
Eligible. All the parking located within the LEED campus boundary must be included in the calculations (including
parking associated with buildings or spaces that are not pursuing LEED certification). Submit a site plan that
illustrates a reasonable distribution of preferred parking spaces for the projects seeking LEED certification.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Site plan indicating parking areas and preferred parking spaces X

Calculations demonstrating threshold achievement X

Drawings or photographs of signage or pavement markings indicating reserved status of preferred parking areas X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. Projects that earn the related credit are required to further
reduce parking in order to achieve this credit.

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. Projects that earn the related credit are required to further reduce parking in
order to achieve this credit.
84

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· A baseline reference to a third-party standard (ITE Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables
18-2 through 18-4) has been added.
·· The credit is no longer awarded for providing no new parking. If there is existing parking that will continue to
be used by the project, it must also comply with credit requirements.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Institute of Transportation Engineers, Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through
18-4: ite.org
LT

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Case 1. Achieve a 60% parking reduction from the base ratios.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Case 2. Achieve an 80% reduction from the base rations.

DEFINITIONS
preferred parking the parking spots closest to the main entrance of a building (exclusive of spaces designated
for handicapped persons). For employee parking, it refers to the spots that are closest to the entrance used by
employees.
REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT LT
85
 87

Water
Efficiency (WE)

WE
WATER EFFICIENCY
OVERVIEW
The Water Efficiency (WE) section addresses water holistically, looking at indoor use, outdoor use, specialized
uses, and metering. The section is based on an “efficiency first” approach to water conservation. As a result, each
prerequisite looks at water efficiency and reductions in potable water use alone. Then, the WE credits additionally
recognize the use of nonpotable and alternative sources of water.
The conservation and creative reuse of water are important because only 3% of Earth’s water is fresh water, and of
that, slightly over two-thirds is trapped in glaciers.1 Typically, most of a building’s water cycles through the building
and then flows off-site as wastewater. In developed nations, potable water often comes from a public water supply
system far from the building site, and wastewater leaving the site must be piped to a processing plant, after which it is
discharged into a distant water body. This pass-through system reduces streamflow in rivers and depletes fresh water
aquifers, causing water tables to drop and wells to go dry. In 60% of European cities with more than 100,000 people,
groundwater is being used faster than it can be replenished.2
In addition, the energy required to treat water for drinking, transport it to and from a building, and treat it
for disposal represents a significant amount of energy use not captured by a building’s utility meter. Research in
California shows that roughly 19% of all energy used in this U.S. state is consumed by water treatment and pumping.3
In the U.S., buildings account for 13.6% of potable water use,4 the third-largest category, behind thermoelectric
power and irrigation. Designers and builders can construct green buildings that use significantly less water than
conventional construction by incorporating native landscapes that eliminate the need for irrigation, installing water-
efficient fixtures, and reusing wastewater for nonpotable water needs. The Green Building Market Impact Report
2009 found that LEED projects were responsible for saving an aggregate 1.2 trillion gallons (4.54 trillion liters) of
water.5 LEED’s WE credits encourage project teams to take advantage of every opportunity to significantly reduce
total water use.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Water Trivia Facts, water.epa.gov/learn/kids/drinkingwater/water_trivia_facts.cfm (accessed September 12, 2012).
2. Statistics: Graphs & Maps, UN Water, http://www.unwater.org/statistics/en/ (accessed July 9, 2014).
3. energy.ca.gov/2005publications/CEC-700-2005-011/CEC-700-2005-011-SF.PDF.
4. USGBC, Green Building Facts, http://www.usgbc.org/articles/green-building-facts.
5. Green Outlook 2011, Green Trends Driving Growth (McGraw-Hill Construction, 2010), aiacc.org/wp-content/uploads/2011/06/greenoutlook2011.pdf
(accessed September 12, 2012).
88

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES
The focus of the interiors version of the WE category is indoor water for fixtures, appliances, and processes. Several
kinds of documentation span these components, depending on the project’s specific water-saving strategies.

Floor plans. Floorplans are used to document the location of fixtures, appliances, and process water equipment
(e.g., cooling towers, evaporative condensers), as well as submeters.

Fixture cutsheets. Projects must document their fixtures (and appliances as applicable) using fixture cutsheets or
manufacturers’ literature. This documentation is used in the Indoor Water Use Reduction prerequisite and credit.

Occupancy calculations. The Indoor Water Use Reduction prerequisite and credit require projections based on
occupants’ usage. The Location and Transportation credit category also uses project occupancy calculations.
Review the occupancy section in Getting Started to understand how occupants are classified and counted. Also see
WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction for additional guidance specific to the WE section.
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 89

WATER EFFICIENCY PREREQUISITE

Indoor Water Use

Reduction
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

WE
INTENT

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

To reduce indoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

BUILDING WATER USE

For the fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to the project scope, reduce aggregate water consumption
by 20% from the baseline. Base calculations on the volumes and flow rates shown in Table 1.
All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that are eligible for labeling must be
WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Projects where fixtures or fixture fittings are not within the tenant spaces are exempt from this prerequisite.

TABLE 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings

Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)

Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf 6 lpf

Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf

0.5 gpm at 60 psi** all others except 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet
private applications except private applications

Private lavatory faucets* 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa

Kitchen faucet (excluding faucets used

2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
exclusively for filling operations)

Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per shower stall

*WaterSense label available for this product type

gpf = gallons per flush gpm = gallons per minute psi = pounds per square inch 
lpf = liters per flush lpm = liters per minute kPa = kilopascals
90

Appliance and Process Water Use

Install appliances, equipment, and processes within the project scope that meet the requirements listed in the tables
below.

TABLE 2. Standards for appliances

Appliance Requirement

Residential clothes washers ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent

Commercial clothes washers CEE Tier 3A

Residential dishwashers (standard and compact) ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent

Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)

ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent and use either air-cooled

Ice machine
or closed-loop cooling, such as chilled or condenser water system

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

WE

TABLE 3. Standards for appliances

Process Requirement
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

No once-through cooling with potable water for any equipment or

Heat rejection and cooling
appliances that reject heat

Equip with
• makeup water meters
• conductivity controllers and overflow alarms
Cooling towers and evaporative condensers
• efficient drift eliminators that reduce drift to maximum of 0.002%
of recirculated water volume for counterflow towers and 0.005%
of recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

 91

RETAIL AND HOSPITALITY ONLY

In addition, water-consuming appliances, equipment, and processes must meet the requirements listed in Tables 4
and 5.

TABLE 4. Standards for appliances

Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)

Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack

Stationary, single tank, door ≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack

Single tank, conveyor ≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack

Multiple tank, conveyor ≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4liters/rack

Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hour ≤ 680 liters/hour

Food steamer Batch ≤ 6 gal/hour/pan ≤ 23 liters/hour/pan

Cook-to-order ≤ 10 gal/hour/pan ≤ 38 liters/hour/pan

Combination oven Countertop or stand ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan

Roll-in ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan

WE
TABLE 5. Process requirements

Process Requirement

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Where local requirements limit discharge temperature of fluids into
drainage system, use tempering device that runs water only when
equipment discharges hot water
OR
Discharge water temperature tempering Provide thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools drained
discharge water below code-required maximum discharge
temperatures while simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water
OR
If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler

Use no device that generates vacuum by means of water flow

Venturi-type flow-through vacuum generators or aspirators
through device into drain
92

BEHIND THE INTENT

Potable water usage in buildings constitutes a large portion of freshwater consumption. Strategies to reduce potable
water use in buildings entail the selection of efficient plumbing fittings, fixtures, and equipment. Fixtures that use
20% to 50% less water than code-required levels are now widely available. The WaterSense label was developed by
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency to identify these efficient fixtures and ensure that higher efficiency does
not come at the cost of performance. The WaterSense label has been incorporated as a requirement for this credit to
ensure that fixtures in a LEED building are both water efficient and high performing.
In some buildings, intensive appliance and process water use can exceed water use from fixtures and landscape
combined. This is especially true for buildings with cooling towers or evaporative condensers. Appliance and process
water use is therefore addressed specifically with a separate set of requirements.
Because the WE section is designed around an “efficiency first” model, the prerequisite deals only with the
efficiency of fixtures and fittings; alternative or nonpotable water sources that offset potable water demand are also
addressed in the corresponding credit.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
WE

STEP 1. SELECT COMPLIANCE PATH

Determine the appropriate compliance path(s) for the project.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Compliance Path 1 is for projects whose installed fixtures do not exceed WaterSense maximum levels.
Compliance is documented through product cutsheets or fixture schedules.
·· Compliance Path 2 is for projects that cannot demonstrate the 20% reduction for each fixture, based
on manufacturers’ documentation. The project team must perform calculations to show that, in
aggregate, the fixtures comply with prerequisite requirements. Projects pursuing points under WE
Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction must use this compliance path.
Calculations for the prerequisite are based only on the fixtures within the tenant space (note that this
differs for WE Credit Indoor Water Use).
Commercial interiors projects do not need to comply with the cooling tower or other building systems
requirements if these systems are outside the project’s scope of work.

STEP 2. SELECT WATERSENSE-LABELED PRODUCTS

Select WaterSense-labeled products for all new fixtures within the project by verifying that the
manufacturer and model are listed on the WaterSense website. The WaterSense label can be found for
fixtures in the following product categories:
·· Tank-type toilet (water closet)
·· Water-using urinals
·· Private lavatory faucets
·· Showerheads
The following fixture types are not labeled by WaterSense and must comply with the percentage
reduction criteria:
·· Tankless toilets
·· Composting toilets and waterless toilets
·· Waterless urinals
·· Public lavatory faucets
Using aerators is an acceptable water savings strategy.
·· Newly installed aerators or flow restrictors added to private lavatories or showers must be WaterSense
labeled.
·· For private lavatories, WaterSense requires a maximum flow rate of 1.5 gallons per minute at 60
pounds per square inch and a minimum flow rate of 0.8 gallons per minute at 20 pounds per square
inch. The installed fixtures in the design case must use the rated flow rate from the manufacturer, and
the underlying assumptions must remain consistent between the baseline and design cases.
 93

For projects in countries where WaterSense-labeled products are not readily available, see Further
Explanation, International Tips.

STEP 3. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY FIXTURES

For all product categories, including those covered by WaterSense, specify low-flow fixtures.
Where possible, select fixtures that meet or exceed the 20% reduction indicated in the prerequisite
requirements.
·· Some equipment does not need to meet the 20% reduction threshold (see Further Explanation,
Excluded Water-Using Equipment).
·· The distinctions between public and private determine which thresholds each fixture and fitting must
meet (see Further Explanation, Public versus Private Lavatories).
·· For guidance on unusual fixtures, see Further Explanation, Unique or Nonstandard Water Closets.
·· Sinks can be defined as public, private, kitchen, or process, depending on use and location. Kitchen
sinks include all sinks in public or private buildings that are used with patterns and purposes similar to
residential kitchen sinks. Hotel or motel kitchenette sinks, office kitchenette sinks, staff lounge sinks,
pantry or nutrition station sinks, school classroom sinks (if used similarly to residential kitchen sinks),
and commercial (food service) kitchen hand sinks that do not pass through a grease interceptor are
considered kitchen sinks.

STEP 4. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY APPLIANCES

Select appliances that meet the labeling or performance requirements outlined in the prerequisite
requirements. ENERGY STAR may not be readily available in all areas (see Further Explanation,
International Tips). Existing appliances intended for reuse in the project are not required to meet the

WE
requirements in Table 2. Standards for appliances.

STEP 5. DESIGN PROCESS WATER SYSTEMS

Where applicable, select and design appliances and equipment that meet the standards for process

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

water in the prerequisite requirements. Existing equipment intended for reuse in the project is not
required to meet the requirements in Table 3. Standards for processes.

Compliance Path 1. Prescriptive Achievement (Prerequisite Only)

STEP 1. CONFIRM PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE

Ensure that all selected fixtures meet the following prescriptive flush or flow rate thresholds.

TABLE 6. Maximum installed flush or flow rates for prescriptive path

Maximum installed Maximum installed

Fixture or fitting Threshold below code baseline
flush or flow rate flush or flow rate

Toilet (water closet)* 1.28 gpf** 4.8 lpf** 20%

Urinal* 0.50 gpf 1.9 lpf 50%

Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.40 gpm 1.5 lpm 20%

Private lavatory faucets* 1.50 gpm 5.7 lpm 32%

Kitchen faucet 1.75 gpm 6.7 lpm 20%

Showerhead* 2.00 gpm 7.6 lpm 20%

* The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type.

**The average flush rate for dual-flush toilets must be calculated as the average flush volume of one full flush and two reduced flushes,
using a 1:2 (high flush:low flush) ratio.
gpf = gallons per flush  gpm = gallons per minute  lpf = liters per flush  lpm = liters per minute

STEP 2. COLLECT MANUFACTURERS’ INFORMATION

Compile fixture cutsheets or manufacturers’ information for all fixtures and appliances. The fixture data
must highlight the flush or flow rate(s). A plumbing fixture schedule is acceptable, provided it contains
the fixture manufacturer, model, flush or flow rate information, and the WaterSense designation where
applicable.
94

Compliance Path 2. Usage-Based Calculation

STEP 1. COMPILE CUTSHEETS OR PREPARE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

For each fixture, compile manufacturer’s data that indicate its flush or flow rate.
·· To simplify the collection of calculation data, consider creating a table or plumbing fixture schedule
that indicates the flush or flow rate information for each fixture.
·· For ease of documentation, collect fixture model, flush or flow rate, percentage of occupants with
access to the fixture, and so on.

STEP 2. GATHER INFORMATION FOR CALCULATOR

The indoor water use calculator provided by USGBC requires the following information:
·· Project occupancy. Count occupants consistently across all LEED credits (see Further Explanation,
Occupant Types).
°° If the project has different sets of fixtures for different parts of the building, create a separate
table for each subset. If fixtures are uniform across the project and restroom access is unrestricted,
multiple calculations are not necessary; one calculation can cover all building fixtures and
occupants.
°° A separate calculation to accommodate visitors is not necessary because the calculator
automatically assigns them a lower daily usage rate. For example, it assumes that visitors do not use
kitchen faucets.
·· Gender ratio. The default gender mix is half male and half female. Assumptions that differ from
the default must be supported by a narrative and supporting data (see Further Explanation, Gender
WE

Ratio).
·· Days of operation. The default number of days of operation per year is 365.
°° If the project is in use for only a portion of the year or closes on specific days, the days of operation
can be reduced.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

°° The same number of days of operation must be applied to both the baseline and the design cases.
°° Ensure that the number of days of use is consistent with the building’s operating schedule and
prepare supporting documentation.
·· Fixture types used in the project.

STEP 3. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS

Complete the calculations for the design case (installed) flush and flow fixtures. The following
information is required:
·· Fixture type
·· Flush or flow rate
·· Fixture manufacturer and model (which should match cutsheets)
·· Percentage of occupants using each fixture model. The total for all fixtures of each type must total
100% of occupants for standard fixture types.
The calculator determines usage based on the following equation (see Further Explanation, Calculations and
Default Durations and Uses).

EQUATION 1. Basic indoor water use reduction calculation

Daily water
Fixture flush Uses per person
use for each = or flow rate × Duration of use × Users × per day
fixture type

·· The duration of use, number of users, and uses per person per day must be the same in both the
baseline and the design cases.
·· Dual-flush toilet flush rates must be calculated as the average using a 1:2 (high flush:low flush) ratio.
·· Metering faucets measured in gallons (liters) per cycle (gpc, lpc) and cycle duration in manufacturer’s
documentation must be converted to a flow rate in gallons (liters) per minute (gpm, lpm). Use
Equation 2 to perform the conversion.
 95

EQUATION 2. Faucet flow rate conversion

Gallons per cycle (gpc) × 60 sec

Flow rate (gpm)
=
Cycle duration (seconds)

Liters per cycle (lpc) × 60 sec

Flow rate (lpm)
=
Cycle duration (seconds)

For example, convert a 0.2 gpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:

0.2 gpc × 60 sec

= 1 gpm
12 sec

WE
Likewise, convert a 0.76 lpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

0.76 lpc × 60 sec
= 3.8 lpm
12 sec

Similarly, convert a 0.083 gpc metering faucet with a 10-second cycle duration as follows:

0.083 gpc × 60 sec

= 0.5 gpm
10 sec

Likewise, convert a 0.314 lpc metering faucet with a 10-second cycle duration as follows:

0.314 lpc × 60 sec

= 1.9 lpm
10 sec

Provide manufacturer’s documentation and a brief narrative to confirm the flow rate conversion.
96

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See equations in Step-by-Step Guidance. Calculations are built into the indoor water use calculator; the following is
provided for reference.
The usage-based calculation for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline
case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case reduction by the baseline reduction. In traditional
plumbing design, calculations are based on fixture counts; the methodology under this prerequisite calculates water
use according to fixture consumption rates and estimated use. Occupants’ estimated use is determined by counting
full-time-equivalent and transient occupants and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each. The calculator
estimates the percentage reduction of potable water use, compared with the baseline, using the following equation
(see Further Explanation, Default Durations and Uses for more about this equation’s variables).

EQUATION 1. Basic indoor water use reduction calculation

Daily water use for Fixture flush Uses per person

each fixture type = or flow rate × Duration of use × Users × per day
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The calculator produces the following:

·· Annual baseline water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Annual design case water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Percentage savings between baseline and design cases

EQUATION 3. Indoor water-use reduction

% improvement
Baseline volume − Performance volume
from baseline = × 100
Baseline volume

This prerequisite deals only with the water efficiency of fittings and fixtures, appliances, and processes that use
potable water. Water derived from alternative sources, such as captured rainwater, is not considered under this
prerequisite but can be used to document additional savings in WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.

PUBLIC VERSUS PRIVATE LAVATORIES

Lavatory faucets must be classified as public or private. The Uniform Plumbing Code, International Plumbing Code,
and the National Standard Plumbing Code each define private as those fixtures in residences, hotel or motel guest
rooms, and private rooms in hospitals. All other applications are deemed to be public.
Fixtures used by residential occupants and fixtures used by residential-type occupants who use the building for
sleeping accommodations fall into the private classification. Resident bathrooms in dormitories, patient bathrooms
in hospital and nursing homes, and prisoner bathrooms are considered private use.
If it is unclear whether the classification should be public or private, default to public use flow rates in performing
the calculations.
Lavatory faucets are intended for hand washing (Table 7). Private lavatory faucets are subject to the federal
standard of 2.2 gallons per minute at 60 pounds per square inch (8.3 liters per minute at 415 kilopascals). Public lavatory
faucets are subject to the federal standard of 0.5 gallons per minute at 60 pounds per square inch (1.9 liters per minute at
415 kilopascals).
 97

TABLE 7. Typical public and private lavatory faucet applications

Lavatory faucet Classification

Restroom sink
Public (baseline: 0.5 gpm, 1.9 lpm)
School classroom sinks (if used primarily for hand washing)

Residential bathroom sink

Hotel or motel bathroom sink

Dormitory bathroom sink Private (baseline: 2.2 gpm, 8.3 lpm)

Patient room sink

Patient bathroom sink in hospital or nursing home

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

OCCUPANT TYPES
Identify the daily average number of building users by type (see Getting Started, Occupancy). The indoor water use
calculator requires total occupant counts in the following categories:
·· Employees and staff, expressed as full-time-equivalent (FTE) employees.

WE
·· Residents
°° Determine the number of residents—residential occupants in dormitories, hospital in-patients, prisoners,
hotel guests, and any other people who use the building for sleeping accommodations. For apartments or
multifamily residences where resident occupancy is unknown, estimate the default resident number as the

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

total number of bedrooms + 1 for each residential unit. For example, assume two residents per one-bedroom
unit, three residents per two-bedroom unit, and so forth, unless a different assumption is warranted.
°° Include inpatients at health care facilities with residents.
°° Include hotel guests with residents. Calculate the number of overnight hotel guests based on the number
and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5 occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting total by 60%
(average hotel occupancy, per American Hotel and Lodging Association).
·· K–12 students. See Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.
·· Retail customers
·· Visitors (excluding retail customers)
°° Include outpatients and higher education students.
°° Report visitors as a daily average total.

Regular building occupants and occupancy counts are calculated based on the tenant occupancy of the lease space.
If occupancy is known, use the actual occupant counts for calculating occupancy. Use occupancy numbers that are a
representative daily average over the course of the year. If the occupancy is not known, see Getting Started, Occupancy.
Tables 8 and 9 (see Further Explanation, Default Duration and Uses) provide default fixture use values for different
occupancy types. These values should be used in the calculations unless special circumstances warrant modifications.
For office and retail establishments that are open Saturdays but not Sundays, assume 313 days of operation.

GENDER RATIO
The default gender ratio for full-time-equivalent occupants is 50:50. In special circumstances, where an alternative ratio
may be justified, provide a narrative and supporting documentation. Modifications to the 50:50 ratio must be shown to
apply for the life of the building.
Acceptable special circumstances include projects specifically designed for an alternative gender ratio—for
example, a single-gender educational facility. Such projects must show that flush and flow fixtures have been distributed to
account for the modified ratio. Project teams must provide documentation of the code-required plumbing fixture counts
per gender so that the review team can verify that the flush-fixture ratio installed in the project supports the alternative
gender ratio.
98

Gender ratio affects water usage only when urinals are installed. If the project does not include urinals, a 50:50 or 0:100
male:female ratio should yield the same usage results.

UNIQUE AND NONSTANDARD WATER CLOSETS

For unique or nonstandard toilets and fixtures, the following may apply:
·· Toilets with flush valve control and separate bowls. The flush rates should be based on installed flush valve.
Confirm that bowl and flush valve rates are compatible to ensure performance.
·· Prison fixtures. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets.
·· Children’s toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets. Confirm that the flush rates of the flush valves are compatible with the bowl sizes to ensure
performance.
·· Squat (floor-mounted) toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design
standards as commercial toilets covered by EPA WaterSense.

EXCLUDED WATER-USING EQUIPMENT

Appliances and equipment that use water on materials intended for human consumption may be excluded. For example,
bread and produce misters, soda machines, coffee-making machines, and fixtures used to fill sinks for washing produce are
WE

excluded.
Fixtures whose flow rates are regulated by health codes may be excluded from the calculation. For example, regulated
medical equipment is considered a process water user and is excluded from fixture calculations.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Process water sinks are excluded from the fixture water-use reduction calculations.
The following list provides examples of process water sink fixtures that are excluded.

Specialized
·· Janitor sinks
·· Laboratory sinks regulated for medical or industrial purposes

Commercial kitchens (food service)

·· Commercial kitchen (food service) sinks and prep sinks, including pot filling sinks, wash-down, and cleaning
sinks

Health care
·· Surgical scrub sinks
·· Exam or procedure room sinks for clinical use
·· Medication room sinks

General
·· Janitor closet sinks
·· Soiled utility room flushing rim sinks
·· Soiled utility room hand-washing sinks
·· Clean utility room hand-washing sinks
 99

DEFAULT DURATIONS AND USES

Duration of use and uses per day are calculated using defaults (Tables 8 and 9).
TABLE 8. Nonresidential default fixture uses

Uses per day

Fixture type Duration (sec)

Employees (FTE) Visitors Retail customers Students

Water closet (female) n/a 3 0.5 0.2 3

Water closet (male) n/a 1 0.1 0.1 1

Urinal (female) n/a 0 0 0 0

Urinal (male) n/a 2 0.4 0.1 2

Public lavatory faucet 30 3 0.5 0.2 3

Shower 300 0.1 0 0 0

Kitchen sink 15 1 0 0 0

TABLE 9. Residential default fixture uses

WE
Equipment Duration (sec) Uses per day

Water closet (female) n/a 5

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Water closet (male) n/a 5

Private lavatory Faucet 60 5

Shower 480 1

Kitchen sink 60 4

For residents, hospital inpatients, hotel guests, prisoners, or any other residential occupants who use the building for
sleeping accommodations, use the default residential fixture usage assumptions.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Mixed-Use Projects
If a mixed-use project uses the same fixtures throughout the building, complete one calculation for building water
use. If the spaces use different fixtures or have dramatically different patterns of occupancy or varying annual days of
operation, complete the indoor water use calculator with a separate fixture group for each space type.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For fixtures that require the WaterSense label in countries where the label is unavailable, look up acceptable
WaterSense substitutes at usgbc.org. Project outside the U.S. must meet WaterSense flush and flow rates..
For appliances that require the ENERGY STAR label, a project outside the U.S. may install products that are not
labeled under the ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the
ENERGY STAR website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date
of their purchase.
For appliances that require the Consortium for Energy Efficiency (CEE) label, a project outside the U.S. may
purchase products that have not been qualified or labeled by CEE if they meet the CEE product criteria for efficiency.
Projects served by water supply pressures different than specified in LEED v4 may install pressure compensating
aerators in flow fixtures to achieve the desired flow rate without compromising user satisfaction.
100

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Fixtures
Documentation Appliances Process water
Compliance Path 1 Compliance Path 2

Product cutsheets, manufacturers’

X X X X
information

Indoor water use calculator X

WE

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This prerequisite now includes requirements for water-using appliances and processes, as well as cooling towers and
evaporative condensers.
The WaterSense label requirements were recommended in LEED 2009. They are now mandatory in the U.S.

The prescriptive compliance path (based on demonstrating that all fixtures are 20% below baseline) is new.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992 and as amended: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact1992.html

EPAct 2005: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact2005.html

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Publication IAPMO / ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org

International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water
Distribution System: iccsafe.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov/

Consortium for Energy Efficiency: cee1.org/

WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense/

IgCC/ASHRAE 189.1 – cooling tower and evaporative condenser requirements:

ashrae.org/resources--publications/bookstore/standard-189-1
 101

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
baseline water consumption a calculated projection of building water use assuming code-compliant fixtures and
fittings with no additional savings compared with the design case or actual water meter data

nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

process water water that is used for industrial processes and building systems, such as cooling towers, boilers,
and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice
making.

WE
INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION WE

102
 103

WATER EFFICIENCY CREDIT

Indoor Water Use

Reduction
This credit applies to:
Commercial Interiors (2-12 points)
Retail (2-12 points)
Hospitality (2-12 points)

WE
INTENT

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

To reduce indoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS
Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite level using alternative water
sources. Include fixtures and fittings necessary to meet the needs of the occupants. Some of these fittings and
fixtures may be outside the tenant space. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for reducing water use

Points Points Points

Percentage reduction
(Commercial Interiors) (Retail) (Hospitality)

25% 2 2 2

30% 4 4 4

35% 6 6 6

40% 8 8 8

45% 10 10 10

50% 12 — 11
104

RETAIL AND HOSPITALITY ONLY

Meet the percentage reduction requirements above.

AND

Appliance and Process Water

Install equipment within the project scope that meets the minimum requirements in Table 2, 3, 4, or 5. One point is
awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any one table. All applicable equipment listed in each table must
meet the standard.
Retail projects can earn a second point for meeting the requirements of two tables.

To use Table 2, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs (57 606 kg) of laundry per year.

TABLE 2. Compliant commercial washing machines

Washing machine Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)

On-premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs

Maximum 1.8 gals per pound * Maximum 7 liters per 0.45 kilograms *
(1 088 kg) per 8-hour shift

* Based on equal quantities of heavy, medium, and light soil laundry.

WE

To use Table 3, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation. All process and appliance equipment
listed in the category of kitchen equipment and present on the project must comply with the standards.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 3. Standards for commercial kitchen equipment

Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)

Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Stationary, single tank, door ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Single tank, conveyor ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Multiple tank, conveyor ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Flight machine ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Food steamer Batch (no drain connection) ≤ 2 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 7.5 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Cook-to-order (with drain ≤ 5 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 19 liters/hour/pan including

connection) condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Combination oven Countertop or stand ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/panincluding ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including

condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including

condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Food waste disposer Disposer 3-8 gpm, full load condition, 10 11–30 lpm, full load condition,
minute automatic shutoff; or 1 gpm, 10-min automatic shutoff; or
no-load condition 3.8 lpm, no-load condition

Scrap collector Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water

Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water

Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage

gpm = gallons per minute gph = gallons per hour lpm = liters per minute lph = liters per hour
 105

To use Table 4, the project must be a medical or laboratory facility.

TABLE 4. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment

Points
Lab equipment Requirement (IP units)
(Schools, Retail, Hospitality, Healthcare)

Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery 75% recovery

For 60-inch sterilizer, 6.3 gal/U.S. tray For 1520-mm sterilizer, 28.5 liters/DIN tray
Steam sterilizer
For 48-inch sterilizer, 7.5 gal/U.S. tray For 1220-mm sterilizer, 28.35 liters/DIN tray

Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray

X-ray processor, 150 mm or more in any

Film processor water recycling unit
dimension

Digital imager, all sizes No water use

To use Table 5, the project must be connected to a municipal or district steam system that does not allow the return
of steam condensate.

TABLE 5. Compliant municipal steam systems

WE
Steam system Standard

Cool municipally supplied steam condensate (no return)

Steam condensate disposal
to drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed water

OR

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse
106

BEHIND THE INTENT

See Behind the Intent in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS IN PREREQUISITE

Follow the instructions in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction to determine water savings resulting
from efficiency of fixtures and fittings. Additionally, include in the credit calculations all plumbing fixtures
necessary to meet the occupants’ needs whether they will be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or
not. Include at a minimum all necessary restroom fixtures (toilets, urinals, and lavatories) to meet the project
occupants’ needs, and showers when seeking LT Credit Bicycle Facilities. The WaterSense label requirement
does not apply to fixtures that are outside of the scope of the LEED project.

STEP 2. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Alternatives to potable water include municipally supplied reclaimed water (“purple pipe” water), graywater,
rainwater, treated seawater, stormwater, condensate, foundation dewatering water, used process water, and
WE

reverse osmosis reject water.

·· Untreated water sources ineligible for this credit include raw water from naturally occurring surface bodies
of water, streams, rivers, groundwater, well water, and water discharged from an open-loop geothermal
system.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· When choosing alternative sources of water, target the uses that require the least treatment first. In most
cases, water can be reused outside the building (for irrigation) or inside (for toilet flushing) with minimal
treatment, but other uses will require more energy-intensive treatment.

STEP 3. CALCULATE ADDITIONAL SAVINGS FROM USING NONPOTABLE WATER

If the project is using an alternative, nonpotable water source, calculate the total annual projected water
savings, using Equation 1.

EQUATION 1. Indoor water-use reduction with nonpotable supply

( )
Annual
Annual Annual
baseline water − design − nonpotable
case water
consumption water supply
Total % consumption
improvement = × 100
from baseline
Annual baseline water consumption

·· Prepare documentation, including a narrative describing the nonpotable water source, plumbing system
design drawings that highlight the nonpotable water system, and supply and demand calculations that
confirm the available quantity of nonpotable water.
·· Address any change to the calculated usage demand of seasonal availability or storage capacity. If the
nonpotable water is used for multiple applications—for example, flush fixtures and landscape irrigation—a
sufficient quantity must be available to meet the demands of all uses. The amount of nonpotable water
meant for indoor and outdoor uses cannot exceed the total annual nonpotable water supply.

STEP 4. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY SPECIALIZED APPLIANCE AND PROCESS WATER

SYSTEMS, WHERE APPLICABLE
Retail and Hospitality projects may earn additional points for selecting appliance or process water systems
that meet the standards in the credit requirements.
 107

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance and in the indoor water use calculator provided by USGBC.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
Include fixtures necessary to meet occupants’ needs, including customers. If restrooms are not provided for
customers within the retail project, the nearest public or common area restrooms within the mall or base building
must be included in the calculations for this credit (not required in prerequisite calculations).

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Mixed-Use Projects
If a mixed-use project uses the same fixtures throughout the building, complete one calculation for building water
use. If the spaces use different fixtures or have dramatically different patterns of occupancy or varying annual days of
operation, complete the indoor water use calculator with a separate fixture group for each space type.

WE
INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For fixtures that require the WaterSense label in countries where the label is unavailable, look up acceptable
WaterSense substitutes at usgbc.org. Projects in unlisted countries must comply with the 20%-below-baseline

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

requirement but have no additional performance requirements.
For appliances that require the ENERGY STAR label, a project outside the U.S. may install products that are not
labeled under the ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the
ENERGY STAR website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date
of their purchase.
For appliances that require the Consortium for Energy Efficiency (CEE) label, a project outside the U.S. may
purchase products that have not been qualified or labeled by CEE if they meet the CEE product criteria for efficiency.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Eligible. The percentage reduction can be based on the total combined water use reduction in all LEED project
buildings. The baseline adjustment for year of substantial system completion should be averaged based on all
plumbing fixtures in all buildings. If nonpotable water systems will be shared by multiple projects, ensure adequate
supply to meet the demands of all projects using nonpotable water. The nonpotable water may not be double-
counted among projects. Submit separate documentation for each building, as required for WE Prerequisite Indoor
Water Use Reduction.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
108

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Appliances Process water
Documentation Fixtures
(Retail, Hospitality projects only)

Alternative water source calculations (if applicable) X

Plumbing system design drawings (if applicable) X

Alternative water narrative X

Cutsheets, manufacturers’ information X X X

Indoor water use calculator X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
WE

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Appliance and process water savings can earn credit under the Retail and Hospitality rating systems.
·· The WaterSense label requirements, merely recommended in LEED 2009, are now mandatory in the U.S.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· To earn points, project teams must include fixtures necessary to meet occupants’ needs. When no facilities are
available within project boundaries, the closest available restrooms must be included in credit calculations.
These additional restrooms can be excluded from prerequisite compliance requirements.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
The Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992 and as amended: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact1992.html

EPAct 2005: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact2005.html

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Publication IAPMO / ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org

International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water
Distribution System: iccsafe.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov/

WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense/

IgCC/ASHRAE 189.1 – cooling tower and evaporative condenser requirements:

ashrae.org/resources--publications/bookstore/standard-189-1

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve 55% water use reduction.
 109

DEFINITIONS
conductivity the measurement of the level of dissolved solids in water, using the ability of an electric current to pass
through water. Because it is affected by temperature, conductivity is measured at 25°C for standardization.

drift water droplets carried from a cooling tower or evaporative condenser by a stream of air passing through the
system. Drift eliminators capture these droplets and return them to the reservoir at the bottom of the cooling tower
or evaporative condenser for recirculation.

makeup water water that is fed into a cooling tower system or evaporative condenser to replace water lost through
evaporation, drift, bleed-off, or other causes

nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

process water water that is used for industrial processes and building systems, such as cooling towers, boilers,
and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice
making.

WE
INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
 111

Energy and
Atmosphere (EA)
OVERVIEW

EA
The Energy and Atmosphere (EA) category approaches energy from a holistic perspective, addressing energy
demand reduction, energy-efficient design strategies, and renewable energy sources.
The current worldwide mix of energy resources is weighted heavily toward oil, coal, and natural gas.1 In addition

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE

to emitting greenhouse gases, these resources are nonrenewable: their quantities are limited or they cannot be
replaced as fast as they are consumed.2 Though estimates regarding the remaining quantity of these resources vary,
it is clear that the current reliance on nonrenewable energy sources is not sustainable and involves increasingly
destructive extraction processes, uncertain supplies, escalating market prices, and national security vulnerability.
Accounting for approximately 40% of the total energy used today,3 buildings are significant contributors to these
problems.
Energy efficiency in a green building starts with a focus on design that reduces overall energy needs, such as
building orientation and glazing selection, and the choice of climate-appropriate building materials. Strategies such
as passive heating and cooling, natural ventilation, and high-efficiency HVAC systems partnered with smart controls
further reduce a building’s energy use. Interior Design and Construction projects can encourage these methods
by choosing to locate in buildings that have been designed with efficiency in mind and then continuing the process
through actions such as installing efficient lighting and appliances. The generation of renewables on the project site
or purchase of green power allows portions of the remaining energy consumption to be met with non–fossil fuel
energy, helping to balance the demand on traditional sources.
The commissioning process is critical to ensuring high-performing buildings. Early involvement of a
commissioning authority helps prevent long-term maintenance issues and wasted energy by verifying that the
design meets the owner’s project requirements and functions as intended. In an operationally effective and efficient
building, the staff understands what systems are installed and how they function.
The American Physical Society has found that if current and emerging cost-effective energy efficiency measures
are employed in new buildings and in existing buildings as their heating, cooling, lighting, and other equipment is

1. iea.org/publications/freepublications/publication/kwes.pdf
2. cnx.org/content/m16730/latest/
3. unep.org/sbci/pdfs/SBCI-BCCSummary.pdf
112

replaced, the growth in energy demand from the building sector could fall from a projected 30% increase to zero
between now and 2030.4 The EA section supports the goal of reduced energy demand through credits related to
reducing usage, designing for efficiency, and supplementing the energy supply with renewables.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

4. Energy Future: Think Efficiency (American Physical Society, September 2008), aps.org/energyefficiencyreport/report/energy-bldgs.pdf (accessed
September 13, 2012).
 113

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Fundamental
Commissioning
and Verification
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

EA
To support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project
that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water, indoor

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

environmental quality, and durability.

REQUIREMENTS

COMMISSIONING PROCESS SCOPE

Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and renewable
energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for
HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
Requirements for exterior enclosures are limited to inclusion in the owner’s project requirements (OPR) and
basis of design (BOD), as well as the review of the OPR, BOD and project design. NIBS Guideline 3-2012 for Exterior
Enclosures provides additional guidance.
·· Develop the OPR.
·· Develop a BOD.
The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following:
·· Review the OPR, BOD, and project design.
·· Develop and implement a Cx plan.
·· Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into the construction documents.
114

·· Develop construction checklists.

·· Develop a system test procedure.
·· Verify system test execution.
·· Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the Cx process.
·· Prepare a final Cx process report.
·· Document all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout the process.
The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed by a qualified member of the design or construction
team (or an employee of that firm) who is not directly responsible for design of the building envelope.

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
By the end of the design development phase, engage a commissioning authority with the following qualifications.
·· The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two building projects with
a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of
occupancy;
·· The CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an independent consultant, or an employee of the design or
construction firm who is not part of the project’s design or construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor
of the design or construction team.
°° For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters), the CxA may be a qualified member of
the design or construction team. In all cases, the CxA must report his or her findings directly to the owner.

Project teams that intend to pursue EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning should note a difference in the CxA
qualifications: for the credit, the CxA may not be an employee of the design or construction firm nor a subcontractor
to the construction firm.
EA

CURRENT FACILITIES REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PLAN

Prepare and maintain a current facilities requirements and operations and maintenance plan that contains the
information necessary to operate the building efficiently. The plan must include the following:
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· a sequence of operations for the building;

·· the building occupancy schedule;
·· equipment run-time schedules;
·· setpoints for all HVAC equipment;
·· set lighting levels throughout the building;
·· minimum outside air requirements;
·· any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day;
·· a systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment;
·· a preventive maintenance plan for building equipment described in the systems narrative; and
·· a commissioning program that includes periodic commissioning requirements, ongoing commissioning tasks,
and continuous tasks for critical facilities.

Interior Design and Construction projects are responsible for completing the above tasks for all systems and
equipment included in their scope, including items furnished by the base building, but modified or relocated as part
of tenant fit-out. Information such as sequences of operations, schedules, equipment setpoints, and outside air
requirements for tenant equipment and spaces must be coordinated with base building requirements.
 115

BEHIND THE INTENT

The commissioning (Cx) process is an integrated set of activities intended to ensure that the project meets both the
design intent and the owner’s operational needs. An owner’s goals and objectives should drive the project team. The
value of Cx lies in its power to verify that those goals and objectives have been met and that systems and equipment
within the space perform as intended.
A properly executed Cx process clearly expresses the owner’s project requirements, often leading to fewer
change orders and system deficiencies, fewer corrective actions implemented while contractors are on-site,
improved planning and coordination, reduced energy consumption, and overall lower operating costs. Another
benefit of Cx is occupants’ health and comfort because of better temperature and ventilation control.
The qualified commissioning authority (CxA) chosen to represent the owner’s needs should be brought in early
in the design process. As a third party, the CxA can verify early on that the architects’ and engineers’ designs meet the
owner’s project requirements. During the construction phase, the commissioning team, led by the CxA, will verify
that contractors install and program the systems correctly according to the design.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DEVELOP OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

The owner, with the help of the design team and other stakeholders, should develop the initial owner’s
project requirements (OPR) in the predesign stage (see the Integrative Process Credit and Further
Explanation, Owner’s Project Requirements).
·· This document establishes the owner’s goals and the project’s intended function and operation.

EA
·· The owner will use this document as the foundation for all design, construction, acceptance, and
operational decisions.
·· The OPR must cover all systems to be commissioned. If the building envelope is part of the project’s
scope of work, it must be included in the OPR.

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

STEP 2. DEVELOP BASIS OF DESIGN
Create a basis of design (BOD) to provide clear technical guidance for the project. Start this in the
schematic design phase and update it throughout the design and construction process (see Further
Explanation, Basis of Design).
·· The BOD is the project team’s interpretation of the OPR.
·· Any revisions to the OPR should also be reflected in the BOD so that both documents align.
·· If the building envelope is part of the project’s scope of work, it must be included in the BOD.

STEP 3. ENGAGE COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

Identify a CxA with the proper experience and credentials to develop and implement effective
commissioning. Though the CxA must be engaged by the design development phase, earlier engagement
allows the CxA to be involved in the development of the OPR and BOD and see the design intent through
to completion.
·· The CxA should have direct experience with at least two similar projects and must have been
involved from the early design phase through at least 10 months after occupancy begins (see Further
Explanation, Commissioning Authority Qualifications).
·· CxA requirements differ depending on the scope and size of the project. The project team should
engage a CxA that has appropriate qualifications for the goals of the program.
·· The CxA will lead, review, and oversee the Cx process for all systems to be commissioned, including
both Fundamental and Enhanced commissioning activities if Enhanced Commissioning is pursued
(see Further Explanation, Systems to Be Commissioned).
·· Work with the CxA to determine the systems that need to be commissioned for compliance with the
OPR and the credit requirements.
116

Note: The use of the phrase “lead, review and oversee” defines a high level of participation while
providing some flexibility for fitting the process to the project.
Therefore, at a minimum, the lead commissioning agent should be participating in ALL commissioning
activities including BOTH fundamental and enhanced commissioning activities. The exact level of
leading, reviewing, and overseeing can vary based on individual project scenarios. However, for enhanced
commissioning, the entity selected as the lead CxA must complete the following tasks at a minimum:
·· Fundamental commissioning tasks to be performed by lead CxA:
°° Review owner’s project requirements and basis of design during the early design phase.
°° Conduct commissioning design review prior to mid-construction documents.
°° Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into construction documents.
°° Develop or approve construction checklists.
°° Develop or approve system test procedures.
°° Witness at least a portion of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and (if applicable) renewable
system functional testing that verifies installation and performance of commissioned systems. Refer
to ASHRAE Guideline 0 for additional guidance.
°° Review an issues log throughout the Cx process. If the CxA does not directly update the log, the
CxA must approve all updates to the log on a continuous basis.
°° Report findings directly to the owner throughout the process.
°° Develop or approve the summary commissioning report.
·· Enhanced Commissioning Tasks to be performed by lead CxA:
°° Review contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned.
°° Develop or approve systems manual updates and delivery.
°° Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
°° Perform seasonal testing
°° Develop or approve an ongoing commissioning plan
°° Develop or approve a monitoring-based commissioning plan
°° Review building operation within 10 months after substantial completion.

STEP 4. DEVELOP PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING PLAN

EA

Establish a preliminary plan for the Cx to outline the scope of commissioning and systems to be tested
(see Further Explanation, Cx Plan).
·· Project roles and responsibilities, the commissioning team’s project directory, and schedule of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

commissioning activities should all be included in the Cx plan.

·· The Cx plan is a living document that is updated throughout the life of the project and will become the
basis for the final commissioning report.

STEP 5. REVIEW OPR, BOD, AND DESIGN DOCUMENTS

The CxA completes a review of the OPR, BOD, and design documents to verify that the program’s goals
are properly included in the design documents.
·· The intent of the review is to have a third party, acting as an advocate for the owner, ensure that the
BOD reflects the OPR and that the design documents reflect the BOD and the OPR.
·· The review should be conducted on middesign documents so that the project team has time to make
any necessary changes.
·· Earlier and additional reviews at other project milestones are advisable and often beneficial to project
performance but are not required.
·· Record the review comments in an issues log that details the drawing set or document version that
was used for performing the review (see Further Explanation, Issues Log for the Design Review).

STEP 6. DEVELOP CX REQUIREMENTS AND INCORPORATE INTO CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTS
Before construction begins, develop commissioning requirements based on the systems included in the
design and incorporate them into the construction documents.
·· Cx specifications inform the contractors of their roles and responsibilities throughout the
commissioning process.
·· ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, Table L-1, identifies titles, contents, and scopes for each commissioning-
related specification section and may be used as guidance (see Further Explanation, Example Issues
Log).
 117

STEP 7. UPDATE OPR, BOD, AND CX PLAN

If necessary, the owner should update the OPR, the design team should update the BOD, and the CxA
should update the Cx plan. Items such as design changes, value engineering modifications, new or
reassigned team members, or updated operating conditions would warrant an update.

STEP 8. CONDUCT CX KICKOFF MEETING

Assemble the team of stakeholders and hold a kickoff meeting to introduce the team members, review
roles and responsibilities, and review all remaining Cx activities. The CxA should provide information on
the process and requirements for the following:
·· Installation verification (construction) checklists
·· Functional performance tests
·· Issues log
·· Team meetings
·· Contractors’ and subcontractors’ participation on the Cx team
·· Schedule
The CxA should update and redistribute the Cx plan as necessary. The CxA is also responsible for setting
up periodic Cx meetings, developing a communication protocol, and managing the schedule for all Cx-
related activities.

STEP 9. DEVELOP CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

The CxA, the design team, or the contactor prepares construction checklists (also known as installation
verification checklists and prefunctional checklists) for the project.
·· Checklists provide confirmation to the CxA that the systems have been installed, started up,
programmed, tested, and balanced, and that the team is ready to proceed with functional testing.
·· In general, contractors are responsible for filling out the checklists and returning them to the CxA.
·· Construction checklists must be completed for all equipment, assemblies, and systems included in Cx
scope. Sampling strategies are not permitted.

STEP 10. CONDUCT PREFUNCTIONAL INSPECTIONS

EA
Communicate with the contractors to determine the exact schedule for prefunctional inspections to
verify proper installation and handling of systems to be commissioned. Several activities that can be
considered prefunctional inspections include site visits, field observations, and review of start-up forms,

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

construction checklists, and complete test-and-balance reports.
·· The CxA may conduct site visits as necessary to inspect the installation of individual systems and
components. Site visits are an important opportunity to observe equipment installation and identify
issues before a system becomes difficult to access or change.
·· It is good practice to document the site visit findings in a field observation report that is distributed
to the relevant parties. The CxA should report any noncompliance to the owner and project team for
them to help resolve.
·· The number of site inspections depends on the project’s size and scope.

STEP 11. DEVELOP FUNCTIONAL TEST SCRIPTS

The CxA, with the design team or contractor, must write and develop the functional test scripts for the
project.
·· Functional testing scripts typically follow the sequence of operations developed by the engineer.
If a controls contractor created the sequence of operations, the design engineer must approve the
controls submittal to ensure it adheres to the BOD.
·· Provide contractors and design engineers with the functional tests before testing to allow them the
opportunity to review the scripts, verify proper operating modes, and comment on any modifications
to match actual operation (see Further Explanation, Functional Performance Tests).

STEP 12. EXECUTE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

Perform functional performance testing once all system components are installed, energized,
programmed, balanced, and otherwise ready for operation under part- and full-load conditions.
·· Some systems may require deferred or seasonal testing or verification for proper operation in
each mode.
·· The systems or modes that require seasonal or deferred testing must be noted in the Cx report. A
report addendum discusses the deferred testing results can then be issued.
·· The functional performance testing follows the functional performance test scripts developed by the
CxA in Step 11.
118

·· The CxA generally oversees the testing; the contractors execute the testing.
·· Sampling strategies may be implemented for functional testing. An acceptable sampling rate is “10 or
10%,” meaning that for multiple units of the same type with the same components and sequences (e.g.,
fan coil units or variable air volume systems), the commissioning team may test only 10 units or 10% of
the units, whichever is greater.
·· When possible, include the building engineer or owner in the testing execution to provide training for
future operation of the systems.

STEP 13. DOCUMENT FINDINGS

Use the issues log to track any deficiencies discovered and any benefits identified through functional
testing.
·· The CxA is responsible for documenting the test results and maintaining the issues log.
·· Documentation should include the status and responsible party for the correction or improvement
actions.

STEP 14. PREPARE CX REPORT

The CxA should write the Cx report after installation inspections and functional performance test
verification. The report covers all components of the commissioning process, including the following:
·· Executive summary of commissioning process and results, system deficiencies identified and
resolution, and outstanding issues
·· Project directory
·· Cx process overview
·· Owner’s project requirements
·· Basis of design
·· Submittals
·· Design review log
·· Cx specifications
·· List of systems commissioned
·· Installation verification checklists
EA

·· Functional performance tests

·· Issues log, detailing open and closed issues

STEP 15. COMPILE CURRENT FACILITY REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONS AND

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

MAINTENANCE PLAN
Prepare and maintain a current facility requirements (CFR) and operations and maintenance (O&M) plan
that contains the information necessary to operate the space efficiently. This information is covered in
the OPR, BOD, and functional test scripts, but more information may be taken from specific submittals or
equipment operations and maintenance manuals. The plan must include the following:
·· Sequences of operation for the project space
·· Project tenant space occupancy schedule
·· Equipment run-time schedules
·· Setpoints for all HVAC equipment
·· Lighting levels throughout the project space
·· Minimum outside air requirements
·· Changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day
·· Systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment
·· Preventive maintenance plan for equipment described in the systems narrative
·· Cx program that includes periodic Cx requirements and ongoing Cx tasks
Where possible, pertinent building-level information should be included as well.
 119

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
The rating system refers to commissioning of HVAC&R systems “as they relate to energy, water, indoor
environmental quality, and durability.” That is, energy- and water-consuming equipment must operate efficiently
and according to the design intent and owner’s operational needs.
Efficient operations can be defined as the controlling of equipment such that it uses the minimum amount
of energy or water to maintain setpoints and comfort levels. Control is generally accomplished via a building
automation system and per the sequences of operation, with setpoints that are correct for the design and equipment
schedules.
For indoor environmental quality, the equipment must meet the OPR, BOD, and environmental codes and
standards. For durability, the equipment must not cause unnecessary wear and tear on the system.
Systems that must be commissioned for this prerequisite include the following:
·· Mechanical, including HVAC&R equipment and controls
·· Plumbing, including domestic hot water systems, pumps, and controls
·· Electrical, including service, distribution, lighting, and controls, including daylighting controls
·· Renewable energy systems dedicated to the project space

The envelope must be included in OPR and BOD if it is part of the scope of work, but actual commissioning is not
required.
Systems that are not required to be commissioned under this prerequisite but may be added to the Cx scope at
the request of the owner include the following:
·· Life safety systems
·· Communications and data systems
·· Process equipment

EA
COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY (CxA) QUALIFICATIONS

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two projects with a similar scope
of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of occupancy. The similar
scope of work may be defined by the size of project, the types of equipment being commissioned, or the function
of the space. However, the appropriate or acceptable level of “similar experience” should be defined by the owner.
Examples include the following:
·· A 10,000-square-foot (930-square-meter) office space, with baseboard heating and VAV cooling provided by
the base building
·· A 50,000-square-foot (4 645-square-meter) retail space, with ventilation provided by dedicated rooftop units
and chilled water provided by a base building central plant

If the project is pursuing fundamental commissioning only, the CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an
independent consultant, or an employee of the design or construction firm who is not part of the project’s design
or construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design or construction team. Special circumstances
include the following:
·· For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters), the CxA may be a qualified member of the
design or construction team.
·· If specialized knowledge of specific systems is required (e.g., manufacturing, data centers), the CxA may be a
qualified employee of the design or construction team. If the project is a data center, a qualified employee may
be the CxA only if the peak cooling load is less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or the total computer room
peak cooling load is less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW).
·· If an owner requires a single contract through one entity (such as a government agency contracting through
a general contractor), the CxA may be a qualified employee of the design or construction team for this
prerequisite. If the project team is also attempting the enhanced commissioning credit, however, the CxA must
be independent of the design or construction firm.
120

In all cases, the CxA must report findings directly to the owner.

TABLE 1. Who can be the CxA?

be CxA for …
Can … who is …
fundamental Cx? enhanced Cx?

a member of the design team No, unless project

(e.g., a project architect, engineer, or energy is under 20,000 ft 2 NO
modeler who is also the HVAC designer) (1 860 m 2)
an employee of the architecture or
engineering firm
not a member of the design team
(e.g., a LEED administrator or energy modeler YES NO
who is not participating in the design)

a member of the design team No, unless project

(e.g., a project engineer subcontracted to is under 20,000 ft 2 NO
the architect) (1 860 m 2)
a subconsultant to the architecture
or engineering firm
not a member of the design team
(e.g., a LEED administrator, Cx specialist, YES YES
energy modeler)

No, unless project

an employee or subcontractor a member of the construction team is under 20,000 ft 2 NO
of the general contractor or (1 860 m 2)
construction manager
not a member of the construction team YES NO

an employee of the owner or

an independent consultant YES YES
contracted to the owner

OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

EA

The owner, CxA, and project team must complete the OPR before any contractor submittals for Cx equipment or
systems are approved. Ideally, the initial document is completed at the early stages of pre-design. Updates during the
design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the owner.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The OPR details the functional requirements as well as the expectations for use and operation of the project
space. The intention is to document the owner’s requirements and objectives for the project to verify those goals are
carried through the life of the project. There is no required format; an OPR outline might include the following:
·· Key project requirements. Items that the Cx process will focus on and that the owner has deemed critical to
the project.
·· Occupant requirements. Functions, number of occupants, and schedules.
·· Budget considerations and limitations. The expected cost restrictions and considerations for the project’s
design, construction, and commissioning process.
·· Target goals. The owner’s overall goals, such as energy efficiency and sustainability.
·· Performance criteria. The standards by which the project will be evaluated by the Cx team. Each criterion
should be measurable and verifiable. Potential topics include general, economic, user requirements,
construction process, operations, systems, and assemblies.
·· Operations and maintenance requirements. Established criteria for ongoing operations and maintenance,
as well as training requirements for personnel.

BASIS OF DESIGN
The design team must document the basis of design before any contractor submittals for commissioned equipment
or systems are approved. Updates during the design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the
design team.
The BOD explains how the construction and other details will execute the OPR. The intention is to document the
thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions made to meet the OPR. There is no required format; a
BOD outline might include the following:
·· Systems and assemblies. A general overview of the systems and assemblies and how they are intended to
meet the OPR.
 121

·· Performance criteria and assumptions. The standards that the system was designed to meet and the
expectations regarding system operation and maintenance, both linked to the OPR.
·· Descriptions. A description of the tenant space, base building, envelope, HVAC, electrical, water, and other
systems and a statement of operation that describes how the facility is expected to operate under various
situations and modes.
·· Governing codes and standards. Specific codes, standards, and guidelines considered during the design of
the facility and the designer’s response to these requirements.
·· Owner directives. Assumptions regarding usage of the facility.
·· Design development guidelines. Concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections; the specific
design methods, techniques, and software used in design; information regarding ambient conditions (climatic,
geologic, structural, existing construction) used during design; and specific manufacturer makes and models
used as the basis of design for drawings and specifications.
·· Revision history. A summary of changes made throughout the project phases.

Cx PLAN
The commissioning team develops the Cx plan with input from the project team. Updates during the design and
construction process are the primary responsibility of the CxA.

The Cx plan begins with a program overview:

·· Goals and objectives
·· General project information
·· Systems to be commissioned

It describes the Cx team:

·· Team members, roles, and responsibilities

EA
·· Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management

Finally, it summarizes the Cx process activities:

·· Reviewing the OPR

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

·· Reviewing the BOD
·· Developing systems functional test procedures
·· Verifying system performance
·· Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process
·· Accepting the installed systems

ISSUES LOG FOR THE DESIGN REVIEW

It is useful to include the following information in the design review issues log:
·· Date of the review
·· Drawing number or page where the issue was found
·· Comments
·· Party responsible for addressing the issue
·· Response
·· Date the issue was closed

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

The functional performance test reports typically have the following sections:
·· Date and time of test
·· Individuals present during testing
·· Visual inspection observations. Before testing, the CxA should perform a visual inspection and document
any issues or relevant observations.
122

·· Sensor checks. The sensors are checked individually to make sure they are reading properly and are in the
correct locations per the design documents.
·· Device checks. Each device is checked to verify that it can open, close, modulate, start, stop, energize in
stages, etc.
·· Operating mode tests. A system is run through each type of operating mode including but not limited to
start up, shutdown, capacity modulation, emergency and failure modes, alarm scenarios, occupied mode and
unoccupied mode, and interlocks with other equipment.
·· Results. Indicate whether the system passed, failed, or requires retesting.

EXAMPLE ISSUES LOG

TABLE 2. Example Issues Log

LEED design review of commissioned systems

Mechanical

Comment Final review

Sheet Comment Design team response
number comment, status

M-1 01M-0.0 LEED EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering equipment is being installed to
Metering is being pursued. Verify proper monitor (on floor-by-floor basis) lighting,
metering devices are installed. HVAC, computer power, water heating.

M-2 BOD BOD discusses using demand-controlled Central outside air riser supplies floor-by-floor
ventilation in conference rooms as well as VAV boxes that measure outside air delivery
return ducts to “monitor” outside air for via integral flow measurement. See comment
each floor to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. 4 below for sequence of operation.
Clarify how “monitoring” of outside air is
achieved and how it’s going to be reset
based on demand.
EA

M-3 08M-2.0 Note 4 indicates, “install CO2 sensors New CO2 sensors for high-occupancy spaces
per LEED EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor along with existing return air CO2 sensors will
Air Quality Strategies” but BOD states be monitored by BAS. If any zone rises to
that CO2 sensors will be used to maintain more than 700 ppm above 400 ppm ambient
ASHRAE 62.1. Note 4 also states that CO2 CO2 threshold, OA damper will be opened in
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

levels must be maintained at 400 ppm stages with appropriate time delays using PID
or less in most critical zone. ASHRAE 62.1 control to satisfy critical zone CO2 setpoint.
allows for CO2 levels to be controlled up We will add this credit to sustainable design
to 1400 ppm or more depending on type requirements listing.
of space. Codes sometimes restrict this
down to 1000 ppm. Should include EQ
credit requirements under specification
section. “Maximum allowable CO2 levels”
should be defined.

E-1 01E-2.0 No lighting controls, including occupancy Design intent is to provide daylight sensors
sensors or daylight sensors, appear to and step dimming. Design documents will be
be provided for lobby. BOD indicates modified to reflect this.
that all lighting within perimeter
will have daylight sensors and step
dimming. Clarify how this lighting will be
controlled.

P-1 BOD LEED criteria for sink faucet do not Will update document.
match description of SK-1 or SK-2.

P-2 BOD SH-1 and SH-1A identified in BOD were Will be included in later design as required.
not included on plumbing drawings.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 123

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

CxA previous experience X

Confirmation of OPR and BOD contents X
List of systems to be commissioned X
Verification of CxA activities and reviews X
Cx plan X
Documentation of testing and verification X
CFR, O&M plan X
Cx report X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. Early analysis of energy- and water-related systems can affect site parameters,
programming, geometry, envelope and façade treatments, HVAC capacities and quantities, lighting control
strategies, or fixture specifications. The related credit can inform the OPR, BOD, and design documents.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. Meeting the related credit requirements will help projects teams achieve
the ongoing commissioning portions of this prerequisite.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems installed on site must be commissioned
under this prerequisite.

EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning. If a project team wishes to pursue Enhanced Commissioning, confirm

EA
that the CxA chosen for this prerequisite is appropriate. An early decision about the level of commissioning may
demonstrate that achieving the credit is feasible.

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· LEED v4 now requires the CxA to be engaged before the design development phase is complete.
·· The electrical and plumbing scopes have been expanded.
·· One design review and one operations and maintenance plan are now required.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, The Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for The Commissioning Process:
ashrae.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
124

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

commissioning (Cx) the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies
are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner’s project requirements

commissioning authority (CxA) the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of
commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to
ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner’s project requirements.

operations and maintenance (O&M) plan a plan that specifies major system operating parameters and limits,
maintenance procedures and schedules, and documentation methods necessary to demonstrate proper operation
and maintenance of an approved emissions control device or system

owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

systems manual provides the information needed to understand, operate, and maintain the systems and assemblies
within a building.  It expands the scope of the traditional operating and maintenance documentation and is compiled
of multiple documents developed during the commissioning process, such as the owner’s project requirements,
operation and maintenance manuals, and sequences of operation. 
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 125

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Minimum Energy
Performance
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

To reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy

EA
use by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency for the building
and its systems.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. TENANT-LEVEL ENERGY SIMULATION

Demonstrate a 3% improvement in the proposed performance rating compared with the baseline performance rating
for portions of the building within the tenant’s scope of work. Calculate the baseline according to ANSI/ASHRAE/
IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside
the U.S.), using a simulation model for all tenant project energy use.
Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before application of renewable energy systems.
The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
·· compliance with the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata, or a
USGBC–approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.);
·· inclusion of all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the tenant project; and
·· comparison against a baseline tenant project that complies with Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata
but without addenda (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard outside the U.S.).

Exception: the baseline project envelope must be modeled according to Table G3.1(5) (baseline), Sections a–e, and
not Section f.
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled
accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the tenant project.
126

If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed performance ratings, and the
simulation program cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5). Alternatively, use the COMNET modeling guidelines and procedures to
document measures that reduce unregulated loads.

RETAIL ONLY

OPTION 1. TENANT-LEVEL ENERGY SIMULATION

Process loads for retail may include refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, clothes washing,
and other major support appliances.. Many of the industry standard baseline conditions for commercial kitchen
equipment and refrigeration are defined in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. No additional documentation is necessary to
substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard.

OR

OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE

Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata
(or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Reduce connected lighting power density by 5% below ASHRAE 90.1-2010 using the space-by-space method or
by applying the whole-building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant space.
·· Install ENERGY STAR appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment
(HVAC, lighting, and building envelope products are excluded) for 50% (by rated-power) of the total ENERGY
STAR eligible products in the project. Projects outside the U.S. may use a performance equivalent to ENERGY
STAR.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 127

BEHIND THE INTENT

An optimized project design can substantially reduce energy use—often for a modest initial cost and in a short
payback period—when it includes load reduction, improved mechanical system efficiency, and smart operational
strategies. An integrated project design can lower operating and maintenance costs and improve indoor air quality,
thermal comfort, and access to daylight. Either a prescriptive or a performance approach may be used to attain such
results.
A simplified, prescriptive approach—applicable to small buildings and certain project types, such as offices and
retail stores—presents a limited set of system choices with mandatory performance characteristics; it is well suited
to projects with small budgets and straightforward design. Interiors projects commonly use a prescriptive approach,
since many of the complex energy conservation strategies or scenarios that could be explored through an energy
simulation, such as envelope and base building HVAC systems, may be outside the scope.
Alternatively, the performance path offers a more flexible, tailored way to evaluate the interactive effects of
efficiency measures. This option uses energy modeling to simulate the energy performance of the entire project,
including the tenant space and any systems that will be modified to accommodate it, such as an upgrade to a base
building HVAC system. The performance option may be appropriate if there are opportunities for system upgrades
beyond typical lighting and equipment retrofits, if the improvements exceed the prescriptive thresholds of
ASHRAE 90.1–2010, or if the project team wants to earn additional points under the related credit, Optimize Energy
Performance. If the base building has already been modeled, the simulation may be modified to incorporate tenant-
specific improvements.
Partnering with the design team, qualified energy modelers will be able to prepare a tenant-level simulation and
interpret the results of these complicated analyses to maximize the benefits to the project. When initiated early in
the design process, an energy simulation serves as a design tool instead of a compliance check. One of the greatest
benefits of early energy modeling is better integration of interrelated design issues, which encourages dialogue about
assumptions concerning building components and systems. Information on energy use and costs thereby plays a
bigger role as design decisions are made.

EA
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was chosen as the standard on which to base the requirements because it continues to push
building design toward greater energy efficiency. Specifically, a study by the U.S. Department of Energy showed an
average improvement of 18% across all building types when ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was applied instead of ASHRAE
90.1–2007.1

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE CLIMATE ZONE

Identify the project’s climate zone according to ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix B (see Further Explanation,
Climate Zone Determination).

STEP 2. DETERMINE SCOPE OF TENANT IMPROVEMENTS

List all the systems and components in the tenant spaces and the systems and components that serve
the tenant spaces in the LEED project boundary. Identify those that are addressed by the prescriptive
and mandatory provisions of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard
for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Determine which elements and systems are considered part of the base building and which are part of
the tenant improvement.
·· Upgrades to the base building systems requested by the tenant or required to fulfill the space needs
must meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010. If applicable, prescriptive requirements must also
be met.
·· Typical systems and equipment in a tenant scope of work include lighting, appliances and equipment,
terminal units for HVAC systems (e.g., fan coils, VAV boxes, water source heat pumps), packaged HVAC
systems for spaces with unusual schedules, and point-of-use service water heaters.

1. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1–2010 Final Determination Quantitative Analysis, p. 29, https://www.energycodes.gov/sites/default/files/documents/BECP_Final

QuantitativeAnalysisReport901-2010Determination_Oct2011_v00.pdf (accessed July 11, 2014)
128

·· Base building systems often include central HVAC, power, the building envelope, and service water
heating. Consider reviewing these systems for potential upgrades and improvements that the
building owner could complete, since the project may be able to take credit for base building system
improvements.

STEP 3. REVIEW ASHRAE MANDATORY COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

Early in the design process, review the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–
2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Focus on the areas and systems included in the project scope.
·· Ensure that the project complies with the mandatory measures throughout the design, construction,
and commissioning process, particularly when major design decisions are implemented.
·· Confirm that compliant components are included in the final construction documents.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY ENERGY USE TARGET

Set an energy goal for the project early in the design process. Identifying an energy goal can help
prioritize efficiency strategies, integrate systems, reduce first costs, and improve project performance.
·· For EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, the target must be established as energy use intensity
(EUI) in kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of source energy use.
·· Consider using ENERGY STAR’s Target Finder to develop the EUI goal. The Target Finder results are
derived from averaged values for typical climate zones, project types, and building orientations; they
may not account for specific features of the tenant space, such as large, west-facing windows.
·· The ENERGY STAR target must be based on all energy, whether or not it is intended to be metered in
the project space. Include the following:
°° Space lighting
°° Receptacle, appliance, and process loads
°° HVAC and service water heating in the space
°° The portion of the HVAC and water-heating energy for HVAC systems outside the project area that
serve the space (e.g., fans, cooling compressors, furnaces, chilled water or hot water). See Further
Explanation, Contribution of Base Building HVAC and Service Water-Heating Systems.
EA

·· The allocation of energy from systems outside the project space is based on the implemented energy
efficiency measures.
°° For example, if the project receives energy from the building plant but is not seeking any credit for
that energy, report the type of energy as “chilled water” and “hot water” in the ENERGY STAR tool.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

°° If the project is taking credit for the efficiency of the central plant, report the relative contribution
of the central plant’s fuel or electricity use that will be used to generate and distribute chilled water
and hot water to the project space.
°° See Further Explanation, Project Type Variations, Central Plant or District Energy Systems.

STEP 5. SELECT ONE OPTION

Select the appropriate option for the project (see Further Explanation, Selecting an Option).
·· Option 1 is available to all projects and takes advantage of trade-offs between prescriptive
requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010.
°° Consider this option if the project team wants to continually review the energy effects of design
decisions, or if the team is pursuing EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, since energy modeling
makes the project eligible to earn more points.
°° Select Option 1 if the project includes on-site renewable energy and intends to use the energy
produced for additional points in EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance.
°° The existence of a base building energy model available for use by the projet design team may
reduce the effort required to use energy modeling.
·· Option 2 is appropriate if the primary efficiency upgrades will focus on lighting, equipment, and
appliances.
°° For smaller tenant improvement projects, this may be a more cost effective option.
°° This option limits the number of points the team can pursue under EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance.
 129

Option 1. Tenant-Level Energy Simulation

STEP 1. REVIEW PREREQUISITE AND CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Thoroughly review the criteria and referenced standards for both EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance before beginning the simulation.
·· The prerequisite and credit are integrally linked. Teams that intend to pursue the credit should focus
on the expanded scope necessary for credit achievement.
·· Projects that meet the requirements for earning points under the credit, including mandatory
requirements and excluding any credits from renewable energy, automatically achieve the prerequisite.
·· Review the Integrative Process Credit to identify the requirements for concept-level energy modeling.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY ENERGY MODELER

Engage an energy modeler to perform the energy analysis.
·· It is recommended that the qualifications of the energy modeler be carefully reviewed to ensure that
the simulation will be prepared accurately, according to the prerequisite requirements.
·· Qualified energy modelers who have experience with numerous simulations for a variety of building
and project types can help the design team interpret the results to develop an efficient design (see
Further Explanation, Energy Modeler Qualifications).

STEP 3. DETERMINE BASE BUILDING SYSTEMS THAT SERVE PROJECT AND OTHER SPACES
If an HVAC or service water-heating system(s) serves both project and nonproject spaces, its energy use
must be allocated to each space, on a percentage basis.
·· This applies to dedicated outside air units, built-up or packaged air-handling units, ground-source or
water-source heat pump loops, service water-heating systems, and central or district energy plants.
·· See Further Explanation, Contribution of Base Building HVAC and Service Water Heating Systems.

STEP 4. COLLECT BASE BUILDING INFORMATION

Collect information on all building elements outside the project scope that must be included in the

EA
model. This may require referencing as-built drawings or surveying the existing building.
·· Project teams may use the results of the core and shell model, if it is available.
·· An existing base building model may be developed into a tenant-level simulation.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

STEP 5: DEVELOP PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL
Consider creating a preliminary energy model to analyze heating and cooling load reduction strategies
through changes to the systems within the tenant project scope. The preliminary model uses information
about the tenant improvement design and base building parameters to create a rough projection of
energy usage in various scenarios (see Further Explanation, Developing a Preliminary Energy Model).
·· A preliminary energy model is not required; however, developing a model for the proposed design will
help the design team explore the energy consequences of various design options and will provide an
early estimate of energy performance.
·· An analysis of various efficiency measures, which may take the form of a preliminary model,
contributes toward the achievement of the related credit.
·· Evaluate strategies for lighting, daylighting, and passive cooling and ventilating systems in terms
of projected energy savings and capital costs. Teams pursuing the Integrated Process Credit must
evaluate these parameters at a concept level early in the design phase.

STEP 6. MODEL POTENTIAL HVAC SYSTEM TYPES, IF APPLICABLE

After load reduction strategies have been assessed and implemented, use the energy model to analyze
the performance of HVAC system alternatives, if HVAC system upgrades or alterations are within the
tenant scope of work (see Further Explanation, Modeling Potential HVAC Systems).
·· Reducing loads before evaluating HVAC system types allows the team to size the HVAC system
appropriately. Smaller loads may make it possible for the HVAC designer to consider more effective
system types, such as radiant heating and cooling or displacement ventilation.
·· Evaluate whether alternative air distribution, heating, and cooling systems are compatible with the
base building’s HVAC system.
·· Analysis of HVAC systems in early design is optional for this prerequisite but is required for
achievement of the related credit.
130

STEP 7. DEVELOP ENERGY MODEL FOR PROPOSED DESIGN

Once the design parameters are established, build or update the model for the proposed design (see
Further Explanation, Building the Proposed Energy Model).
·· Include design conditions for systems within the tenant scope of work, including HVAC, lighting and
plug loads, and existing conditions for systems that are unchanged.
·· Include any modifications to existing conditions that are made in conjunction with the project.
·· Update the model throughout the design process and compare energy performance with the ASHRAE
90.1 baseline to ensure that the proposed design meets this prerequisite’s requirements. Doing so will
also prepare the project to earn points under the related credit.

STEP 8. CREATE BASELINE ENERGY MODEL

Build a baseline model that reflects the minimum requirements according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010,
Appendix G (see Further Explanation, Building the Baseline Energy Model).
·· The baseline model for the project space must follow the Appendix G requirements whether or not the
components or systems are existing or within the project scope of work.
·· Consider constructing the baseline model early in design so that the design team can see the effect
of design changes on the percentage savings relative to ASHRAE 90.1. This will contribute toward
achieving more points under the related credit.
·· As modifications are made to the proposed energy model, ensure that the baseline is updated
appropriately to reflect any required revisions.
·· Use the Appendix G energy modeling inputs and quality control checklists spreadsheet to help
create the baseline model. This tool was designed to help project teams develop a baseline model in
alignment with Appendix G requirements and avoid common issues raised during the LEED review
process.

STEP 9. UPDATE PROPOSED AND BASELINE MODELS BASED ON FINAL DESIGN

Update the proposed energy model to reflect final construction details and specifications and make any
corresponding updates to the baseline model (see Further Explanation, Finalizing the Energy Models).
·· For elements or systems that cannot be readily modeled by the software, use the exceptional
EA

calculation method or COMNET modeling guidelines for unregulated loads (see Further Explanation,
Exceptional Calculation Method and Common Issues with Energy Modeling).

STEP 10. DETERMINE ENERGY COST SAVINGS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost savings
(see Further Explanation, Energy Cost Savings).
·· Ensure compliance with the prerequisite criteria for energy savings.
·· Energy costs offset by on-site renewable energy systems do not count toward energy savings for
compliance with the prerequisite. Renewable energy may be included in the model for achievement of
points under the related credit.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance

STEP 1. ASSESS ASHRAE PRESCRIPTIVE REQUIREMENTS

Review the tenant scope of work with the design team to assess the prescriptive requirements of ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects
outside the United States).
·· Review Sections 5.5 (envelope), 6.5 (HVAC), 7.5 (water heating), 8.5 (power), and 9.2.2 (lighting) to
determine which elements are applicable.
·· Ensure that all parts of the building within the project scope, including base building systems that will
be upgraded to meet the tenant requirements, meet the prescriptive criteria.
·· Consider opportunities for the landlord to upgrade base building systems concurrent with the tenant
project.
·· Ensure that the lighting calculations include all task lighting except where specifically exempted by
ASHRAE 90.1, and account for the total luminaire wattage for each fixture, consistent with ASHRAE
90.1 requirements. The luminaire wattage is not necessarily the sum of the lamp wattages; it accounts
for the ballast factor for standard luminaires and the total circuit power or current-limited power for
track lighting.
 131

·· As a best practice, develop a checklist of all the requirements needed to comply with the standard,
review this list with the project team, and include these requirements in the owner’s project
requirements (see EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning).

STEP 2. DESIGN FOR COMPLIANCE

Starting early in design, work with the project team to ensure that the tenant space will comply. Include
requirements for ASHRAE 90.1–2010 compliance, reduced lighting power density, and ENERGY STAR
products, as noted in the prerequisite requirements.
·· Areas and systems that are not part of the tenant scope of work are exempt. However, modifications
to base building systems that serve the tenant space must comply with the ASHRAE 90.1–2010
prescriptive requirements if they are completed by or on behalf of the tenant.

STEP 3. ANTICIPATE EA CREDIT OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

If the project team is planning to achieve points under the related credit, consider the additional lighting,
equipment, and ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide (AEDG) requirements.
·· EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance has additional requirements (see EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance, Option 2).
·· To earn points for the base building under the related credit, the design must meet AEDG prescriptive
requirements for opaque envelope, glazing systems, and/or HVAC equipment. Retail projects have
additional requirements for process equipment.
·· If the project team plans to upgrade any of these systems, evaluate the potential to meet the related
credit’s prescriptive requirements.
·· Projects are eligible to earn points for existing base building systems that already meet the criteria,
without additional upgrades. For example, if the vertical glazing installed as part of the base building
meets the AEDG requirements, the project can earn 2 points without needing to upgrade the glazing.

EA
FURTHER EXPLANATION

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

CLIMATE ZONE DETERMINATION
Determining the right climate zone for the project is essential, since the requirements are specific to each climate
zone. ASHRAE 90.1 defines eight climate zones (Miami is in climate zone 1; Anchorage is in climate zone 8) and three
climate types: A (moist), B (dry), and C (marine).
To find the project’s climate zone and type, consult ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix B, for the appropriate state and
county. If the project’s county is not listed, use the climate zone listed for the state as a whole. For projects outside
the U.S., see Further Explanation, International Tips.

SELECTING AN OPTION
Determining which option is more appropriate for the project requires knowing the extent of energy performance
feedback desired during the design process.
·· If detailed feedback is important during the design process, systems can be upgraded beyond the minimum
prescriptive levels, and the investment in an energy simulation might lead to a reasonable return on
investment, then the performance option (1) may be appropriate. Energy modeling generates information on
the potential savings associated with various efficiency measures, both in isolation and in combination with
other measures. Often this includes estimates of overall energy use or cost savings for the project, which can
help gauge progress toward an energy savings goal or achievement of points under the related credit.
·· The prescriptive option (2) may be more appropriate for projects with small budgets, limited ability to modify
energy systems, or no available base building energy model. It is suitable for projects with standard systems,
and it provides only limited feedback, since all energy efficiency measures must be incorporated to achieve the
prescribed threshold.
132

Performance path
The following factors could indicate that Option 1 would be advantageous to the project:
·· The project has an HVAC system that is not covered by the prescriptive option.
·· The project team wants to explore the energy performance and load reduction effects of several systems.
·· The project team is planning to maximize the number of points earned under EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance.
·· The project team wants to achieve efficiency trade-offs between systems, offsetting the lower efficiency of one
system by the improved efficiency of another.
·· The owner is interested in commercial building federal tax credits or state, local, or utility incentives that
require energy modeling. The modeling requirements for such incentive programs may be different from the
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 requirements, however.
·· The owner wants an estimate of the carbon reductions or lower operating costs (energy savings, demand
charge savings) from energy strategies beyond a simple calculation for individual energy conservation
measures.

Before undertaking energy modeling as part of the performance path, consider the timing of the simulation
preparation and presentation, and understand the costs and benefits of energy modeling as it relates to the project.
When energy modeling is conducted late in design, its value is very limited, except as a compliance tool: the model
can only estimate the energy savings of the design.
In contrast, if initiated early and updated throughout the design process, energy modeling can be a decision-
making tool, giving feedback as part of the larger analysis of building systems and components. The best value will
be seen when energy modeling is used as a tool in an integrated design process because it enables a more informed,
cost-effective selection of efficiency strategies.
Develop clear expectations for the presentations of modeling results and their integration into the project
schedule. Ideally, iterations of the model will be presented to the team during each stage of design, beginning as
early as possible, when the project goals are incorporated into preliminary plans. Updates should be presented as the
EA

design is developed further to incorporate engineering and architectural details, and again when the construction
documents are being prepared.
Regardless of the project design phases, energy modeling can still be performed as the design progresses.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

However, the potential benefit of energy modeling decreases as the design becomes finalized and opportunities for
incorporating changes are lost.
Identify the individual best suited to perform the modeling. If an energy modeler is already part of the design
team, ask him or her to provide a schedule that integrates energy modeling into the design process, with appropriate
milestones.
To develop an accurate and compliant energy model, it is important that the energy modeler read and understand
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 (Appendix G in particular) in its entirety, not just the portions that apply to the project. This
will enable a more complete understanding of the energy modeling protocols and methodologies required for LEED
projects (see Further Explanation, ASHRAE 90.1–2010 vs. 2007). The energy modeler should also consider reading the
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, which expands on the Appendix G requirements.
Tenant improvement projects have specific modeling requirements. An energy modeler who has experience with
this LEED rating system can streamline the modeling process (see Further Explanation, Common Issues with Energy
Modeling).

Prescriptive path
The following factors could indicate that Option 2 would be advantageous to the project:
·· The project type is covered under the prescriptive option and incorporates conventional systems and energy
efficiency strategies.
·· The project budget and timeline would benefit from simplified decision making and analysis during the project
design.
·· The additional cost of energy modeling would not be warranted.
 133

ENERGY MODELER QUALIFICATIONS

The energy modeler should have the following competences:
·· A comprehensive understanding of all the building systems related to energy performance and the information
needed to construct a model using the selected software
·· The ability to understand and explain capabilities and limitations of modeling software in regards to the
strategies the team would like to pursue
·· Awareness of how much time the design team needs to provide information, feedback, and responses to the
modeling exercise
·· Experience with design phase modeling
·· The ability to demonstrate how energy modeling can be used to perform cost benefit analysis
·· Experience in modeling projects using ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, performance rating method, or a thorough
understanding of this approach
·· The ability to perform quality control to ensure that the modeling inputs accurately reflect the proposed
design and Appendix G baseline
·· The ability to evaluate the simulation results for reasonableness in relation to the energy modeling inputs,
including energy consumption by end-use, cost, and the performance savings claimed
·· The ability to validate the model through review of the actual utility bills during the occupancy phase
·· Awareness of the nuances of modeling tenant spaces to meet the requirements of this prerequisite and,
preferably, experience in modeling for LEED for Interior Design & Construction projects

DEVELOPING A PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Although not required for this prerequisite, preparation of a preliminary model can facilitate achievement of the
related credit, which requires analysis of efficiency measures. Past analyses of similar buildings or published data,
such as the AEDGs, may also be used to guide decision making, though the results will be less project-specific.

EA
A preliminary model includes design elements identified during schematic design and design development and
generates a preliminary estimate of energy consumption and an end-use profile.
Evaluate how changes to the following parameters affect HVAC sizing, design, energy consumption, and overall

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

energy performance:
·· Programmatic and operational parameters (multifunctioning spaces, operating schedules, space allotment
per person, teleworking, reduction of project area, operations and maintenance)
·· Lighting levels, interior surface reflectance, daylighting
·· Thermal comfort range options
·· Plug loads
·· Passive conditioning and natural ventilation strategies

Base building elements outside the scope of the tenant project will affect energy consumption. For example, a west
facing space with extensive glazing in the northern hemisphere will experience higher cooling loads than a north
facing space.
When examining alternative strategies, also consider the effect on human performance. For example, increasing
daylighting may cause glare.

Typical steps in preliminary energy modeling are as follows:

1. Gather information about building and project loads and systems. Typically, a portion of a base building
HVAC system serves the project’s tenant space (see Further Explanation, Contribution of Base Building HVAC
and Service Water Heating Systems).
2. Collect information from the base building’s owner about operating schedule, lighting, HVAC systems and
zones, size and efficiency of HVAC components, service hot water systems, area and exposure of fenestration,
and thermal conductivity of all exterior walls, windows, and doors.
If the other spaces served by the energy system have dissimilar occupancies to the project space, the
134

project team must allocate energy consumption using Method 2 under Further Explanation, Contribution of
Base Building HVAC and Service Water Heating Systems. For Method 2, document the type of occupancy and
operating schedule, envelope parameters, and estimated existing lighting and plug loads for those areas. If
information is not available, use default ASHRAE 90.1 and ASHRAE 62.1 values.
3. Review any existing base building documents, such as operation and maintenance manuals, commissioning
reports, energy audit reports, and utility bills. If utility consumption data are not available from the base
building’s owner, contact local utilities for energy rates and demand charges.
4. Research building energy codes, including any local variations.
5. Engage the design team early to investigate opportunities for load reduction. Focus on internal load reduction
(lights, plug loads, process loads), since there are likely to be limited opportunities to affect the central HVAC
system, envelope, or exterior shading. Examine energy consumption by end use and heating and cooling load
distribution to identify high-impact load reduction and energy efficiency opportunities.
6. Investigate interconnected strategies. For example, energy modeling could evaluate the effect of automatic
interior shades, with daylight harvesting controls, on cooling, heating and fan loads, HVAC system capacities,
and total energy consumption and cost. A life-cycle cost analysis for this scenario would indicate the net
increase or decrease in capital costs and the potential savings over multiple years. When evaluating the capital
cost, consider trade-offs between the higher capital cost for the shading and daylight harvesting controls and
the lower capital costs for a smaller HVAC system.
7. Use the model to compare potential performance with the project’s energy goals.

MODELING HVAC SYSTEMS

Although not required for this prerequisite, an evaluation of HVAC system alternatives can help the design team
optimize energy consumption. This exercise is a requirement for achievement of points under the related credit.
Because of base building constraints, the project team’s options may be limited to new or upgraded HVAC controls,
terminal units, or zoning.
EA

Typical steps for HVAC system type modeling include the following:
1. Coordinate with the mechanical engineer, since decreased loads may affect mechanical system sizing or
potential system types. Compare high-efficiency HVAC systems with typical systems for reductions in
operating costs (energy, maintenance). Weigh this against the higher first costs of more efficient equipment.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Evaluate the potential for reducing the first cost of HVAC equipment by reducing the loads. Include not only
the smaller equipment but also the infrastructure related to HVAC—ductwork, piping, and controls. Consider
opportunities to improve an existing system’s performance with upgraded controls or new zoning, based on
the project-specific design loads.
2. For the selected system, analyze and optimize additional HVAC energy efficiency measures, including
equipment efficiency, energy recovery, and demand-controlled ventilation.
3. Coordinate with the architect, since different system types may have specific space, height, or structural
requirements. For example, under-floor or ceiling plenums will reduce the interior floor-to-ceiling height.
4. Ensure that HVAC zones are accurately modeled according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and the project space as
designed.
5. Systems with chilled or hot water can be modeled as purchased energy, following the guidance in ASHRAE
90.1–2010, Appendix G, or using district energy system (DES) guidance. Alternatively, allocate a percentage
of the base building’s existing HVAC systems to the project area (see Further Explanation, Contribution of Base
Building HVAC and Service Water Heating Systems).

BUILDING THE PROPOSED ENERGY MODEL

An energy model of the proposed design is required for prerequisite compliance under Option 1. A team that has
already prepared a preliminary model may update it to reflect the newest design information throughout the project.
If a base building model is available, modify it to incorporate tenant space systems and criteria. If an energy system
serves both the project area and other spaces in the building, allocate its energy consumption on a percentage basis
(see Further Explanation, Contribution of Base Building HVAC and Service Water-Heating Systems).
Create or update the model based on the latest information and specifications on systems, assemblies, and
 135

equipment in the current design. This can be accomplished as early as design development to estimate projected
savings, and later updated when the construction documents are complete. The proposed design model must
include the existing conditions along with all modifications, new components, and systems, as shown on the project
design and construction documentation.
Analyze remaining efficiency strategies that the team would like to consider before the design documents are
finalized. For example, the proposed energy model could be used to evaluate the performance and cost implications
of value engineering decisions.

BUILDING THE BASELINE ENERGY MODEL

Developing a baseline energy model is a detailed process that requires a good working knowledge of ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, Appendix G, and familiarity with the relevant sections of the standard. The baseline model represents a typical
design for a project of the same size and use as the proposed project. It meets but does not exceed the performance
requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and is used as a comparison to calculate the percentage energy cost savings for
the project design.
In general, baseline development begins by changing the inputs for all of the components, assemblies, and
systems of the proposed design energy model to minimally compliant input values, in accordance with 90.1–2010
Appendix G. Determine or update baseline values for each system, assembly, and piece of equipment for the
appropriate climate zone, building type, and fuel type(s).
If the energy simulation software automates some or all of the baseline generation, review the automated
baseline model inputs against the expected baseline values, and confirm consistency (see Further Explanation,
Common Issues with Energy Modeling). This is especially critical for LEED Interior Design & Construction projects
that do not have many of the project’s systems or assemblies as part of the scope of work.
Preparation of the initial baseline model is best undertaken during the design development phase, after major
design decisions have been made, so that modeling can evaluate whether the project is likely to meet energy savings
targets (or achieve points under the related credit). The baseline model will typically need to be updated based on

EA
the final project design.
The baseline HVAC system type must be based on the building’s area and number of floors (not the project’s area
and number of floors).
If appropriate, apply Section G3.1.1 exceptions (a–f) to the model. More specifically, if the building heating

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

source (fossil fuel or hybrid versus electric) or building type (nonresidential versus residential) varies from the
predominant conditions of the building for an area exceeding 20,000 square feet, an alternative system type should
be modeled for the space where exception (a) applies. Additional systems should be modeled in any portions of the
space where exceptions (b) through (f) apply.
Existing conditions must be modeled as new construction in the baseline case, following Appendix G, for all
components and systems.

FINALIZING THE ENERGY MODELS

Update the proposed model based on the information and specifications for systems, assemblies, and equipment
in the final construction documents. Confirm that all efficiency measures claimed have been incorporated into the
design. Include all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the project.
Ensure that assumptions used in earlier versions of the model are replaced with actual data from the
construction documents. For example, if proposed chiller control sequences were assumed in the preliminary
model, use the actual control sequences from the construction documents for the final version. Update the baseline
model as necessary based on the project’s final construction documents, including changes in occupant density,
required outdoor airflow, thermostat setpoints, and system or fuel types. The model will have to be updated again if
any changes during construction affect efficiency measures.
Schedules must be modeled correctly for both the proposed and baseline models (see Further Explanation,
Schedules).
Perform a quality control check to verify that all Appendix G and LEED modeling guidelines have been followed.
136

Record both the proposed and baseline values in the Appendix G energy modeling inputs and quality control
checklists spreadsheet. This record of energy conservation measures is a good tool for confirming that proposed
project characteristics and baseline values have been selected properly.
Document the input assumptions for receptacle and process loads. These loads should be modeled accurately
to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building. Per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-12, receptacle
and process loads must be modeled identically in both the proposed and baseline models, unless there are specific
efficiency requirements listed in Sections 5 through 10 that allow a less stringent baseline requirement (e.g., motor
efficiency).
If the project claims savings for variations in power requirements, schedules, or control sequences, the burden
of proof is on the project team to document that the design represents a significant departure from conventional
practice. If an energy efficiency measure cannot be explicitly modeled, the team may use Section G2.5, Exceptional
Calculation Method (see Further Explanation, Exceptional Calculation Method).
Verify the final energy cost savings. Evaluate the energy savings by end use for reasonableness based on the
differences in the modeling inputs between the baseline and proposed models (see Further Explanation, Energy Cost
Savings). Use Figure 1 to help verify proposed energy savings.

PROJECT & CONTENT

Check Space Summary for Check for simulation program,

the building size, space types, climate zone, weather file, Check total points Check narratives are
conditioned vs. unconditioned reference standard used, heating attempted and Target included describing
spaces. Check the number of source and whether the project finder score special conditions
stories includes existing renovation

INPUTS
EA

Check HVAC Evaluate

Check Building Check Lighting Check Process special cases
and DHW
Envelope input input Energy input (DES & CHP)
system input
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OUTPUTS

Check unmet load hours and Check simulation output to verify Verify if the results of 4 orientations
simulation output reports consistency were reported

END-USE CONSISTENCY

Evaluate whether Identify efficiency

Verify that end- Verify whether Evaluate whether
energy consumption measures and verify
use demand and energy consumption and
and demand differences if savings are justified
energy use are consumption is demand savings are
between proposed and for the measures with
consistent with reasonable for consistent between
baseline cases are highest absolute
inputs major end uses linked end-uses
justified savings

BUILDING LEVEL CONSISTENCY SPECIAL OUTPUTS

Cross-check For each fuel type, if cost and enery savings Review Verify
with benchmark differ significantly, verify that virtual utility rates exceptional renewable energy
consumption are justified based on utility rate schedule calculations calculations

Figure 1. Steps to verify proposed energy savings Model Inputs Model Outputs Consistency
 137

CONTRIBUTION OF BASE BUILDING HVAC AND SERVICE WATER-HEATING SYSTEMS

In many projects, a portion of a base building HVAC system serves the project’s tenant space. To allocate a
percentage of that HVAC system to the tenant area, use whichever of the following two methods is more appropriate.
Method 1 is applicable when the additional spaces served by the HVAC or service water heating system have
similar occupancies to the project space, provided the resulting unmet load hours for the proposed design do not
exceed the amount allowed by ASHRAE 90.1.
·· Determine the total square footage (square meters) served by the HVAC or service water-heating system.
·· Determine the project floor area served by the HVAC or service water-heating system.
·· For air-handling units, determine the design supply airflow, design fan power, design heating capacity, design
cooling capacity, and outdoor airflow. For central service water heaters or thermal energy plants (e.g., steam,
hot water, or chilled water) located in the building, determine the chiller or boiler quantities and capacities,
storage tank volumes as applicable, pump design supply volume for each pump as applicable, heat rejection fan
power, and any other pertinent parameters relative to HVAC system capacities.
·· Determine the relative contribution of the HVAC or service water-heating system to the project floor space
by applying the project floor space ratio to each design parameter (design supply airflow, design fan power,
design heating capacity, design cooling capacity, outdoor airflow, chiller capacity, service water heating storage
volume, or pump capacity):

Parameter x Project area served by system

Adjusted parameter =
Total area served by system

·· Model the HVAC or service water-heating system based on the actual design conditions and sequence of
operations, but use the adjusted parameters as calculated above.

EA
Method 2 is applicable when the other spaces served by the air-handling unit have dissimilar occupancies to the
project space.
·· For air-handling units, determine the design supply airflow, design fan power, design heating capacity, design

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

cooling capacity, and outdoor airflow. For central thermal energy plants or service water heaters located in
the building, determine the chiller or boiler quantities and capacities, storage tank volumes as applicable,
pump design supply volume for each pump as applicable, heat rejection fan power, and any other pertinent
parameters relative to HVAC system capacities.
·· Determine the percentage allocation of HVAC or service water heating capacity to the project space, using the
following equations.

Airflow allocated to project space

% allocation =
Total design supply airflow

Chilled water capacity allocated to project space

% allocation =
Total chilled water capacity

·· Example: A dedicated outside air system supplies the entire building, and VAV boxes distribute the outside air
to each tenant space. The team makes the calculation as follows:

AHU design supply flow

% allocation = x VAV box peak design flow for project space
Sum of all VAV box peak design flows
138

·· Provide documentation from the base building’s owner identifying the airflow and/or thermal capacity
allocated to the project space versus the total design supply airflow and/or thermal capacity. Justify this
percentage allocation in a narrative.
·· Identify the different occupancies, by type and square footage (square meters), served by the air-handling unit
or thermal energy system.
·· In ASHRAE 90.1 User’s Manual or ASHRAE 62.1, look up default assumptions for the other occupancies’
lighting loads, ventilation, occupancy, etc. Use these values to determine (per square foot or square meter)
the peak heating and cooling loads, design supply air volume, and design outside air volume for the other
occupancies:

Design load
Total load = Sum x Area

ft2

Parameter x Total project area served by AHU or thermal system

Adjusted parameter =
Total area served by AHU or thermal system

·· Model the air-handling unit or thermal energy system based on the actual design conditions, but use the
adjusted parameters as calculated above.

SCHEDULES
EA

For optimal results, ensure that the schedule inputs into the model accurately reflect the base building and project
space operation. If anticipated operating schedules are unknown, helpful guidance for determining model inputs for
occupancy, lighting, HVAC system, receptacle power, and service hot water consumption values can be found in the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix G.

Schedules must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases unless documented in an exceptional
calculation or specifically allowed by ASHRAE 90.1–2010 Appendix G (see Further Explanation, Exceptional
Calculation Method).
Certain space types may require specific schedules based on anticipated operation and may vary by space type.
For example, a server room may have different temperature schedules than an occupied space.
Exceptions to Section G3.1.1 may require modeling of a different baseline HVAC system type in spaces with
schedules that vary significantly from the rest of the building.
Different lighting schedules may be used for a project with both office and retail occupancy when the space-by-
space method is used or when the building area method is used with multiple building type classifications. Different
schedules cannot be used, however, if an average lighting power density is applied to the whole project.
Ventilation and infiltration schedules should also be adjusted to ensure the same amount of outside air delivery
and infiltration between baseline and proposed cases, except for specific exceptions allowed by Appendix G.

ENERGY COST SAVINGS

For EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, modeled energy
savings must be reported on an energy cost basis using actual utility rates or the state’s average energy prices.
Using energy cost savings as a metric for overall energy efficiency is important for several reasons. It aligns with
the energy modeling procedures in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, and provides a uniform metric for all fuel types.
It captures the relative effects of various efficiency measures on energy demand and long-term operating costs—
valuable metrics for the owner in determining the overall cost-effectiveness of selected efficiency strategies. And
finally, the energy cost savings metric can help designers understand energy consumption because in many cases,
cost and carbon emissions of each fuel source are closely correlated.
 139

Ensure that project-level rates are included in the model, and the costs are limited to the fuels used by the
systems within the simulation scope.

EXCEPTIONAL CALCULATION METHOD

In ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Section G2.5, an exceptional calculation method (ECM) is used when the
simulation program that is generating the energy model is incapable of modeling a certain design, material, or device
of the proposed design. LEED has adopted and slightly expanded use of exceptional calculations to cover any savings
claimed for a nonregulated load, defined as any building load, end use, or control without an Appendix G baseline
modeling requirement that allows the load, end use, or control to be modeled differently in the proposed and
baseline buildings.

Energy savings limitations. Section G2.5 indicates that exceptional calculation methods cannot constitute more
than half of the difference (i.e., savings) between the proposed and baseline buildings. This will be enforced for the
ASHRAE definition of an ECM. However, in LEED, this rule will not be applied to savings attempted on nonregulated
loads unless the nonregulated load cannot be modeled in the simulation program.

Elements that cannot be simulated by modeling program. One type of ECM is creating a representation of an
element that cannot be modeled directly by the chosen energy modeling software. Examples include innovative
external shading devices, underfloor air systems, and the heat recovery performance of a variable refrigerant flow
system. Whether a particular strategy is considered an ECM may depend on the modeling program and whether the
energy modeler can simulate an approximation of the system in the software. If the methodology for approximation
has not been previously published by ASHRAE or USGBC as an acceptable modeling path, it is the responsibility of
the energy modeler to submit a narrative explanation describing the simulation and providing the calculations for
the energy savings if necessary.

Documentation for nonregulated loads. Examples of nonregulated load savings include manufacturing equipment

EA
not regulated by 90.1–2010, a unique manufacturing process, or any refrigeration or kitchen equipment (including
operation) not specifically covered in the LEED Retail Rating System Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. Energy savings for
nonregulated loads require additional documentation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-12, indicates that “variations
of the power requirements, schedules, or control sequences” are allowed by the “rating authority,” provided the

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

proposed design “represents a significant verifiable departure from documented conventional practice.” Project
teams must document the following information to prove that the savings represent a departure from conventional
practice and are not required by local code:
·· A narrative describing all baseline and proposed assumptions
·· The calculation methodology used to determine the savings
·· A document verifying that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice. This is generally accomplished
either by documenting the baseline comparison system/schedule/control as standard practice, or by showing
that the savings claimed for the efficiency measure are incentivized by a local utility program. Examples of
documents used to verify that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice may include the following:
°° A recent study with researched tabulations or monitored data establishing standard practice for the given
application in similar newly constructed facilities
°° A new-construction utility or government program that provides incentives for the measure
°° A document showing the systems used to perform the same function in similar facilities built within the past
five years; these systems are treated as the baseline system in the analysis, and evidence must show how the
energy use for the proposed and buildings is determined

Alternatively, the project team may use any of the prescriptive requirements from ASHRAE 90.1–2010 as the baseline
requirement without further justification to substantiate conventional practice, but only for the specific component.

Additional guidance. Sources of typical efficiency measures include the COMNET manual, which has a calculation
methodology for determining savings for process or receptacle loads, especially savings from ENERGY STAR
equipment. These are offered in Section 6.4.5, Receptacle and Process Loads, and Appendix B.
140

Always provide a narrative explanation of the methodology used to calculate savings for exceptional calculation
methods. Separate calculations are not necessary when the energy saving are found easily in the modeling results.

Changes from earlier versions of ASHRAE and LEED. Some efficiency measures that no longer need to be
modeled using an exceptional calculation method include low-flow water fixtures, kitchen equipment, and kitchen
ventilation.
·· Low-flow service water-heating fixtures. The flow rates given in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction set the allowable baseline values. Provide sufficient information to justify energy savings from
efficient fixtures and appliances that use hot water.
·· Kitchen equipment. All project types may count energy savings from efficient refrigeration equipment,
cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. LEED Appendix 3, Retail
Tables 1–4, defines the baseline conditions. Provide sufficient information to justify all the savings. Savings for
a piece of equipment (or its operation) not covered in Appendix 3 must be modeled using the ECM described
above.
·· Kitchen ventilation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now addresses kitchen ventilation, so it is no longer considered
a nonregulated load. Section G3.1.1, exception (d) requires a kitchen with more than 5,000 cfm (2360 L/s)
of total exhaust airflow to be modeled with its own separate system. Include demand ventilation on 75% of
the exhaust air, and reduce exhaust and replacement air by 50% for half the kitchen occupied hours in the
baseline design. Additionally, the maximum exhaust flow rates for hoods must meet the requirements of
Section 6.5.7.1.3. The exhaust flow rate must be modeled identically in the baseline and proposed case at design
conditions unless Appendix G indicates otherwise. Any design that goes beyond these minimum baseline
requirements may be counted. Provide sufficient information to justify all kitchen ventilation savings, with
consistent assumptions and operating schedules. Project teams that count kitchen ventilation savings must
separate the savings from each end use (e.g., fan, heating, cooling) when reporting the energy outputs.

ASHRAE 90.1–2010 VERSUS 2007

EA

The referenced standard for building the baseline model for this prerequisite has been updated to ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, which represents a substantial increase in efficiency from the previous version, ASHRAE 90.1–2007. The major
changes are described in Tables 1 and 2.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 1. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements, 2007 and 2010

Building envelope requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Air barriers Continuous on entire

NA
5.4.3.1.2 building envelope

HVAC requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Chiller efficiencies
NA Increased for all chiller types
6.4.1.1
Required to have VFD or two-
Single-zone VAV speed motors for DX >9.2 tons
NA
6.4.3.10 (32.3 kW), and chilled water AHUs
>5 hp (3.7 kW) fan motors
Water and evaporatively cooled unitary AC units
and heat pump efficiency NA 3–5% more stringent
Table 6.8.1A and B
PTAC and PTHP efficiency increased
12 EER (3.52 COP) 13.8 EER (4.05 COP)
6.4.1.1; Table 6.8.1D
Water to water heat pump, CRAC, and VRF
Not covered Now covered by 90.1
Table 6.8.1B; Table 6.8.1K; Table 6.8.1J respectively

Power requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

At least 50% of all receptacles

Automatic receptacle control installed in private offices, open
8.4.2 NA offices, and computer classrooms
must be controlled by automatic
control device
 141

TABLE 1. (CONTINUED) Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements, 2007 and 2010

Lighting requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Alterations that involve less than 50% of

connected lighting load in space or area need
Threshold for retrofit compliance
not comply with lighting power density or Less than 10% of connected load
9.1.2
auto-shutoff requirements, provided that such
alterations do not increase installed LPD
Reduced; average 17% in
Lighting power density
NA space types, more for retail
9.4.5; 9.4.6
display lighting
Automatic shutoff
Required in buildings >5,000 ft2 (465 m2) Required in all spaces
9.4.1.1
All spaces are required to
Additional control All spaces to have general lighting controls, have vacancy sensors or
9.4.1 manual or automatic occupancy sensors to 50% or less
of lighting power
More space types added,
Classrooms, conference rooms, and break rooms
Space controls including offices, restrooms,
must have occupancy sensor or time switch that
9.4.1.2 dressing rooms, and training,
turns light off within 30 minutes
copy, and storage rooms
Spaces must have controls
Light level reduction that reduce power level by
None
9.4.1.2 30–70% of connected load in
addition to off mode.
Automatic, multilevel daylighting
Lighting in daylit zones controls installed in sidelit areas
None
9.4.1.4 >250 ft2 (23 m2) and toplit areas
>900 ft2 (84 m2)
Exterior lighting Lighting must be controlled by At night light must either be off or
9.4.1.7 photosensor or time switch operated at reduced level
Functional testing All installed controls must

EA
None
9.4.4 be tested

TABLE 2. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive requirements, 2007 and 2010

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

For all HVAC system types,

Economizer exemptions Only for unitary equipment, must meet % efficiency
Table 6.3.2 EER/SEER (COP/SCOP) rating improvement, now required in
most climate zones
Reduced, average 17% in
Lighting power density
NA space types, more for retail
9.2.1
display lighting

COMMON ISSUES WITH ENERGY MODELING

Thoroughly review both ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and the 90.1–2010 User’s Manual. The manual presents extended
explanations and also includes examples of the concepts and requirements within the standard. Table 3 addresses
many of the most common issues but is not a comprehensive list.

TABLE 3. Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

Building envelope

Construction type and maximum U-factors for baseline walls, roofs, and floors are specified by Table
G3.1-5 Baseline (b).
Baseline building envelope The constructions for walls, roofs, and floors are specified by the standard and do not depend on the
proposed design. For example, if a building has concrete masonry walls, the baseline model will still
have steel-framed walls.
For existing envelopes, model the baseline case as described above. Model the existing envelope in the
Existing building envelope
proposed case as described below. Table G3.1-5 Baseline (f) is not applicable.
142

TABLE 3. (CONTINUED) Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
The proposed model must reflect the building as designed or built. To the extent possible, construction
assemblies need to match the dimension and U-value inputs in the model.
If changes will be made to the envelope, apply Appendix A to the proposed envelope. Provide the
Proposed model U-values assembly U-value, rather than a point U-value, by determining the overall construction assembly
U-value that takes into account thermal bridging, as shown in Appendix A.
Ensure that window U-values are input as the assembly U-value, which takes into account the U-value
of the framing system. The center-of-glass value is not acceptable.

HVAC

The HVAC system for the baseline model must be selected based on requirements in ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, Section G3.1.1. The system selected will depend on the base building type, size, and heat source.
Building type must be based on predominant conditions (i.e., those that account for the majority or
plurality of the building area), and no space types can be excluded from the model. Project size is
determined from conditioned area. Once the floor area of the predominant condition is known, consult
Table G3.1.1A to determine the predominant baseline HVAC system.
Section G3.1.1 also specifies whether HVAC systems must be modeled with a system per floor or a
system per thermal block. Systems 1–4 are modeled with one system per thermal block and systems
5–10 with one system per floor, using systems 9 and 10 where applicable.
Baseline HVAC system selection When multiple floors have identical thermal blocks, those floors may be combined in the energy model.
Note that a floor with a roof and a floor without a roof do not have identical thermal blocks and cannot
be combined. A multistory building with identical thermal blocks would need to be modeled with no
fewer than three floors: a ground floor, a middle floor with appropriate multiplier, and a top floor.
When using Table G3.1.1A, check for nonpredominant conditions. The area of nonpredominant
conditions can be deducted from the total area when determining the baseline HVAC system. If
nonpredominant conditions apply to more than 20,000 ft2 (1 860 m2), project teams must use
exception (a) and select an additional baseline HVAC system type to serve those spaces. If the LEED
project meets the requirements for one of the exceptions outlined in G3.1.1, then the baseline HVAC
system for the project must be selected as outlined in the exception.
If laboratory spaces in the building have a total laboratory exhaust rate greater than 5,000 cfm
Baseline HVAC system selection (2 360 L/s), a single system of type 5 or 7 must be modeled to serve only those spaces. Section G3.1.2.11
(laboratory spaces) requires exhaust air energy recovery in accordance with Section 6.5.6.1, which is likely to include
laboratories. Refer to 90.1–2010 for details.
EA

If kitchens in the project space have a total exhaust hood airflow rate greater than 5,000 cfm (2 360
Baseline HVAC system selection
L/s), system type 5 or 7 must be modeled and must include demand-controlled ventilation. Refer to
(kitchens)
90.1–2010 for details.
Any project with a combination of fossil fuel and electric heat serving the same space must use the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Baseline HVAC system fuel type

fossil-fuel baseline HVAC system (systems 1, 3, 5, and 7) unless it meets one of the exceptions to G3.1.1.
The baseline fan power is calculated according to Section G3.1.2.10, which indicates that the system fan
power is based on the supply airflow and distributed to supply, return, exhaust, and relief fans. If the
proposed system has additional return, exhaust, and/or relief fans, the team may not adjust the baseline
model to account for the additional fan power. Section G3.1.2.10 also includes Table G3.1.2.9, whose
value A is calculated according to Section 6.5.3.1.1 using pressure drop adjustments. Pressure drop
adjustments may not be taken for system types 1, 2, 9, or 10.
The calculations are straightforward, but a common issue involves pressure credits. Table G3.1.2.9
allows pressure drop adjustments for evaporative coolers or heat recovery devices only when they are
required in the baseline building system. Also, the pressure drop adjustment is applicable only to the
design airflow through each device.
For example, if only the ventilation air is filtered with a MERV 13 filter, then only the ventilation airflow
rate may apply the 0.9 in. w.c. (224.2 Pa) adjustment, and not the entire supply airflow rate.
Baseline fan power
Pressure credit may be taken only for those filters present in the proposed project.
For fully ducted return and/or exhaust air systems, the fan power allowance is based on plenum return.
The credit can be applied only when the return is fully ducted; systems that have a combination of
ducted and nonducted may not use this pressure credit.
For return or exhaust airflow control devices (which maintain a specific pressurization relative to other
spaces), a project team claiming this credit in spaces other than a laboratory, hospital, or similar space
type must provide evidence of this control device. The credit may be applied only for the amount of
airflow passing through the control device.
A project team using the modeling software to automatically determine the baseline building fan power
must ensure that the correct allowance has been calculated.
Publicly available fan power calculators can be used to verify and determine the correct fan power.
Table G3.1.1(a) requires that the proposed building be consistent with the design documents, including
envelope, lighting, HVAC, and service hot water systems. Additionally, all end-use load components
within and associated with the building must be modeled.

Proposed HVAC system sizing Table G3.1.10(b) specifically requires that the model be consistent with the design documents. All
modeled HVAC system parameters (e.g., fan volumes, fan powers, efficiencies, heating and cooling
capacities) must be consistent with the mechanical schedules and drawings. The simulation should
never be allowed to automatically size the HVAC system for the proposed case model when there is a
complete design.
 143

TABLE 3. (CONTINUED) Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
Section G3.1.3.1 describes the operation of baseline building heat pumps. The operation of the heat
pump was specifically address in ASHRAE Interpretation 90.1–2007-09, which means that the heat
pump and auxiliary heat should operate together at low temperature conditions, with the compressor
as the lead machine. The outside air cutoff temperature for the compressor must be no greater than
the temperature associated with the low-temperature heating efficiency requirements of Table 6.8.1B
Heat pumps (operation)
(17°F) (–8.3°C). The HSPF rating for packaged heat pump units smaller than 65,000 Btuh (19kW) and
packaged terminal heat pumps accounts for electric auxiliary operation, and includes test conditions
at 17 degrees F (–8.3°C). The heat pump efficiency curves in the model should reflect the heat pump
ratings that account for simultaneous operation of the electric resistance and heat pump elements
below 40°F (4.4°C).
Use the correct Table 6.8.1 to determine equipment efficiencies:
Table 6.8.1A for system types 3, 5, and 6
Table 6.8.1B (with electric resistance heating section) for system type 4
Unitary heating and cooling Table 6.8.1D for system types 1 and 2
efficiencies
These efficiencies are based on the capacity of each system individually, not a sum of all units. It is
important to correctly adjust efficiencies of each piece of equipment to separate fan power at AHRI
rating conditions, per Section G3.1.2.1. Most simulation software programs can perform this step
automatically.
Humidification must be modeled identically in the baseline and the proposed models since it is not
addressed in Appendix G. Use the exceptional calculation method if claiming savings. 
If the proposed project includes dehumidification controls, they must be modeled as designed.
Dehumidification controls may be modeled in the baseline only if one of the exceptions to Section
6.5.2.3 applies. Exception (d) for process dehumidification does not apply to computer rooms.
Table G3.1.4 requires that identical schedules be used in both models, and this includes humidity
Humidity controls setpoints. A problem may arise if the proposed building has a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS)
that maintains proper humidity. PTAC or small DX systems in the baseline design may not be able to
maintain both temperature and humidity simultaneously in the same way that the proposed system
can. The project team may then incur a penalty for higher humidity levels in the baseline building.
In this situation, model a DOAS in the baseline design using the same volume of outdoor air as for the
proposed design, but modeled with the same efficiency and efficiency curves as the baseline HVAC
systems. Additionally, the baseline fan power allowance would be separated between the DOAS and the
baseline system using the same ratio as the proposed system.

EA
Ventilation

Table G3.1.10(b) requires that the proposed building ventilation rate be consistent with the rate
indicated on the mechanical schedule. Section G3.1.2.6 requires that the ventilation rate be identical

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Ventilation rate inputs between the proposed and baseline buildings, and states that reduced ventilation “is not considered an
opportunity for energy savings under the Performance Rating Method; ventilation is energy neutral, per
the User’s Manual. However, there are exceptions to this requirement.
Exception (c) penalizes projects for providing more ventilation air to the space than is required by
ASHRAE 62.1 or local code, whichever requires more ventilation air. If the proposed project provides
outdoor air in excess of the amount required, the baseline must be modeled with the required
ventilation rates, which will be lower than the proposed ventilation rate. This creates an “energy
penalty” for the additional fan and conditioning energy.
Ventilation (above minimum For various reasons, however, it is common practice to specify slightly more ventilation air than
required) required. A project team that has specified up to 5% more total ventilation air than required may model
identical ventilation flows.
If exhaust requirements dictate the amount of ventilation air that must be provided to the building (as
indicated in Section 5.9.2 of ASHRAE 62.1–2010), the project team should model the ventilation rate
identically in both designs. Provide an explanation and documentation or calculations to show that
exhaust requirements exceed the minimum ventilation flows.
Exception (a) allows credit for demand-control ventilation when it is not required by Sections 6.3.2(p)
or 6.4.3.9. If demand-control ventilation is being modeled for credit, Table G3.1.4 (baseline) indicates
that schedules may be modified and allowed to differ to take it into account, provided the schedules
are approved by the rating authority. In this instance, project teams must submit both proposed and
baseline ventilation schedules.
ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.4.3.4.3, requires shutoff dampers that automatically shut during unoccupied
Demand-control ventilation periods when the HVAC system cycles on and off to meet loads except when ventilation reduces energy
and nighttime ventilation costs (e.g., night purge), or when ventilation must be supplied to meet local requirements (such as
requirements minimum flow requirements for hospital or chemical storage rooms during unoccupied periods).
Therefore, the demand-control ventilation schedules presented for both the baseline and proposed
cases should show zero outside airflow during unoccupied periods unless the supplemental
documentation supports that ventilation during unoccupied periods reduces energy cost or is required
by local code, in which case the baseline and proposed ventilation rates during unoccupied periods
must be modeled with identical flow rates. Additionally, the baseline ventilation flow must be modeling
using minimum required rates.
144

TABLE 3. (CONTINUED) Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
Exception (b) allows for lower ventilation rates in the proposed building for efficient ventilation
system designs that have high zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez >1.0), as determined by ASHRAE
62.1–2010.
In this case, the baseline ventilation levels can be based on the proposed calculations, only with
reduced zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez = 1.0). This makes the baseline outdoor airflow rates
higher than the proposed outdoor airflow rates, so ventilation calculations must be submitted to claim
the exception for a higher Ez in the proposed case.
If a lower ventilation flow rate is an aspect of the design, the project team must provide ventilation rate
Ventilation (zone air distribution procedure calculations for both the proposed and baseline designs, with the proposed building using
effectiveness) the actual Ez value and the baseline building using an Ez value of 1.0 in each zone where the Ez value is
greater than 1.0, but equal to the proposed building for all other zones where the Ez value is not greater
than 1.0.
If ASHRAE 62.1, Section 6.2, Ventilation Rate Procedure, is not used for the ventilation design, then this
exception may not be used.
Credit may not be taken, via ventilation flows, for any other ventilation design, such as a 100% outdoor
air unit. Additionally, credit may not be taken for increased system ventilation efficiency, Ev, of a
proposed ventilation system compared with a baseline ventilation system; Appendix G does not allow
this. The only exception would be a different Ev value due to an Ez greater than 1.0, as described above.
The ASHRAE User’s Manual indicates that an exceptional calculation method is not required for natural
ventilation, and gives some further examples.
Natural ventilation Perform sufficient analysis to document that loads can be met when credit is taken for passive cooling
and natural ventilation using a simulation tool capable of ensuring thermal conditions are met with
natural ventilation. A simple load calculation is not sufficient.

Service water heating

Hot water demand savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from WE Prerequisite or WE Credit
Hot water demand
Indoor Water Use Reduction calculations.

Lighting

Lighting power must be determined using the same categorization procedure (building area or space-
Lighting power density, method
by-space method) in both the proposed and baseline models.
EA

Table G3.1.6 requires that the proposed lighting power include all components shown on the plans and
be determined in accordance with Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Ensure that the lighting calculations include
Lighting power density, luminaire all task lighting except where specifically exempted by ASHRAE 90.1. Ensure that all power used by
wattage the luminaires, including lamps, ballasts, transformers, and controls is taken into account. For track and
other flexible lighting systems, use the specified wattage of the transformer supplying the system. The
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

sum of lamp wattages will not necessarily meet the requirements of G3.1.6.
ASHRAE 90.1, Section 9.6.2, addresses the use of additional lighting power for decorative lighting, in
retail areas, or when additional controls have been installed.
Additional lighting is allowed only when using the space-by-space method and if it is “installed and
automatically controlled, separately from the general lighting, to be turned off during nonbusiness
hours.”
Therefore, the general lighting system must be separate and capable of providing general illumination
to the space, and the additional lighting must have automated controls that shut it off during
nonbusiness hours even when the general lighting remains on.
In retail applications, a common mistake is that the lighting may not be used for any purpose other than
to highlight the merchandise.

Lighting power density, Project teams can model the additional lighting power up to what has actually been designed, and
additional lighting power no more; the baseline building must be modeled equal to what has been designed or up to the
lighting allowance from ASHRAE 90.1, Section 9.6.2, whichever is less (i.e., credit may not be taken for
unclaimed additional lighting power).
Note that only the sales area can be used in the lighting power allowance. For example, do not use
the entire project floor area (which may include space with other purposes, such as checkout areas,
corridors, or dressing rooms) to determine the allowance.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now allows an additional lighting power allowance based on the application of
additional controls and using the control factors found in Table 9.6.2. This additional allowance may be
used anywhere in the building and is based on the total wattage in the given space to which the control
method is being applied.
Unlike the retail allowance, this allowance is earned with the application of the control methods and
may be added to the baseline whether or not the project designs up to the full allowance.
ASHRAE 90.1, Table G3.1(g), indicates that only automatic lighting controls, such as occupancy sensors,
that are in addition to the required minimum control (Section 9.4.1) may be taken for credit.
One of the most common errors is taking credit for an occupancy sensor located in a conference room;
this is already a requirement of the baseline building. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 lists additional spaces that
Automatic lighting controls
must have occupant sensors or timer switches that automatically turn off lighting.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 has added requirements for the lighting system and controls for buildings. Project
teams are encouraged to read the standard, the User’s Manual, and the lighting compliance forms to
ensure that all mandatory measures have been met; these are prerequisites to LEED certification.
 145

TABLE 3. (CONTINUED) Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section
Where exterior lighting is included in the LEED project, such as for a ground floor project with exterior
entrances, and for terraces, patios, and balconies, whether existing or proposed, this end use must be
included in the model.
Exterior lighting Exterior lighting is divided into allowances for tradable and non-tradable surfaces. No credit may be
taken for lighting reductions on non-tradable surfaces. A lighting power allowance cannot be claimed in
the baseline building for surfaces that are not provided with lighting in the actual design, and lighting
fixtures cannot be double counted for different exterior surfaces.
Project teams must consistently use either actual utility rates or their state’s average energy prices,
Energy rates published by the U.S. Department of Energy’s Energy Information Administration for commercial
building customers. The sources may not be mixed.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
Option 1. For projects using tenant-level energy simulation, include all relevant process loads in the energy model
and ensure that they are modeled accurately. Retail process loads can constitute a large proportion of the total
energy consumption, and equipment selection can significantly affect savings.
Typical retail process loads include refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, ice machines, display
lighting for merchandise, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. Compare the energy consumption
of each piece of equipment with the value indicated in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. If the item is not included, use an
accepted industry standard.
For hard-wired refrigeration, the modeling software may be used if the system can be modeled explicitly.
Otherwise, a thermodynamically similar component model must be used, in accordance with Table G3.1.13. An
example of this would be an analysis prepared using 8760 hourly weather data.
For commercial kitchen equipment and refrigeration defined in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, no additional
documentation is necessary to substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard. Supporting
documentation is still needed to verify that the proposed equipment includes the claimed energy-efficient features.

EA
For other equipment not listed in the table, identify an appropriate standard, provide hourly energy use for the
baseline and proposed models, estimate daily use hours, and include the total energy use in the energy model as a
plug load.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

For display lighting, use the space-by-space method to determine allowed lighting power under ASHRAE
90.1–2010.

Option 2. If the project team is using prescriptive compliance and intends to earn points under EA Credit Optimize
Energy Performance, also comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of total energy
consumption for all process equipment.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Central Plant or District Energy Systems
If the base building is served by a central thermal energy plant or a district thermal energy system and the project
is following Option 1, the team may demonstrate compliance with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance by using Path 1, ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G; Path 2, Full DES or
central plant performance accounting; or Path 3, Streamlined DES modeling.

Scope of DES equipment inclusion. Downstream equipment (e.g., heat exchangers, steam pressure reduction
stations, pumps, valves, pipes, controls) may not be located in a commercial interiors project, but when present, all
such equipment must be included consistently in the scope of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Upstream equipment is included or excluded depending on the chosen
compliance path.
The proposed design for any building air distribution systems, ground source heat pump loops, or water source
heat pump loops must still be modeled consistent with Method 1 or 2 (see Further Explanation, Contribution of Base
Building HVAC and Service Water Heating Systems).
146

Energy simulation versus postprocessing. Whenever possible, incorporate system and equipment performance
parameters directly into the energy simulation. Potential methods include developing efficiency curves and
scheduling equipment operation and curves. Postprocessing of DES performance is acceptable if reasonable
simulation methods are not available or are too onerous. All postprocessing methodologies must be fully
documented.

Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G

Model the proposed and baseline designs using purchased energy according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G. The
project may be modeled using purchased energy even if the building’s central plant generates the thermal energy for
the project space.

Energy rates
All virtual DES energy rates must be identical in the baseline and proposed cases. If tariffs or rates are not
available from the district plant servicing the project, such as campus or military plants, or for central plants
located within the building, calculate the rates based on the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates from the model.
If a flat rate structure, in which the cost per unit of energy is the same throughout the year and there are no
demand charges, is being used for all energy sources, then those flat rates become the virtual energy rates for the
project.
If all energy rate structures are not flat, a preliminary run of the baseline case energy model must first be
completed to identify the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates for the project. For this preliminary run only, the
rate for the energy supplied by the DES or central plant may be left blank or entered as any value.
Once all the virtual energy rates are identified for electricity and fossil fuel, calculate the virtual DES
or central plant rates for both the baseline and proposed cases, using the values in the minimum energy
performance calculator provided by USGBC.
Exception: to obtain the virtual fuel rate when the connected project does not use fossil fuel but the DES
or central plant does, use a flat rate consistent with the central plant rates or the historical average local market
rates. No preliminary model run is needed. Input the virtual DES or central plant rates into the modeling
EA

software for each DES or central plant source and use for the remainder of the process. Alternatively, calculate
the DES or central plant energy costs directly by multiplying the DES or central plant energy consumption for
each DES or central plant source by its virtual DES or central plant rate.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Energy Rates for Path 1:

If tariffs or rates are not available from the district plant servicing the project (e.g. for campus or
military plants), calculate the rates based on the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates from the model:
• If a flat rate structure is being used for all energy sources (meaning the cost per unit energy is the
same throughout the year, and there are no demand charges), then these flat rates simply become
the virtual energy rates for the project.
• Otherwise, if all energy rate structures are not flat, then a preliminary run of the
• Option 1 Baseline Case energy model must first be completed to identify the virtual electric and
fossil fuel rates for the project. For this preliminary run only, the rate for the DES-supplied energy
may be left blank, or may be entered as any value.
• Once all the virtual energy rates are known for electricity and fossil fuel, the virtual DES rates for
both the Baseline and Proposed Case are then derived as follows:

District Chilled Water Rate:

Units of $ Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/kWh)
× 71
(Btu x 106)

Units of $ Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/kWh)
× 0.85
ton-hour

Units of $ Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/kWh)
× 0.24
kWh
 147

District Hot Water Rate:

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/(Btu x 106))
× 1.59 + (in $/kWh)
× 3
(Btu x 106)

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/kWh)
× 1.59 + (in $/kWh)
× 0.01
kWh

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/therm)
× 1.59 + (in $/kWh x 0.3
therm

District Steam Rate:

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/(Btu x 106))
× 1.81 + (in $/kWh)
× 3
(Btu x 106)

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/kWh)
× 1.81 + (in $/kWh)
× 0.01
kWh

Units of $ Virtual Fuel Rate Virtual Electric Rate

= (in $/therm)
× 1.81 + (in $/kWh x 0.3)
therm

• Exception: to obtain the virtual fuel rate when the connected building does not use fossil fuel but
the DES central plant does, use a flat rate consistent with the central plant rates or the historic

EA
average local market rates (no preliminary model run is needed). The virtual fuel rates must match
in the Baseline and Proposed Case.
• The virtual DES rates are then input into the modeling software for each DES source and used

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

for the remainder of the process. Alternatively, the virtual DES rates may be used to calculate the
DES energy costs directly by multiplying the DES energy consumption for each DES source by its
virtual DES rate. All virtual DES energy rates must be identical in the Baseline and Proposed Case.

Path 2. Full DES or central plant performance accounting

Path 2 is available to projects connected to a central plant or DES that wish to account for average efficiency across a
smaller time step. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream equipment and upstream equipment and
requires calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using either modeling or monitoring.

Energy rates
All DES energy rates must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases. Use local rates as they would
normally apply to the project for the energy sources under consideration. For energy sources used by the DES but
not normally available to the building, such as diesel fuel, use the rates charged to the DES. If this information is
not available, use representative market rates.
Exception: For DES plants that operate under specific and atypical rate structures and actively take
advantage of those rates through strategies such as load management or energy storage, use the rate structures as
they apply to the DES.

Baseline plant
Model the baseline case with a dedicated plant that is compliant with ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, baseline
requirements. Model the baseline building plant with conventional equipment using performance parameters
and efficiencies per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, using energy sources corresponding to the DES or central plant.
148

Proposed plant
Model the proposed case with a virtual central plant or DES-equivalent plant. Model a virtual plant with the same
efficiencies as the entire upstream DES heating, cooling, and combined heat and power (CHP) system, including
all distribution losses and energy use. Equipment efficiencies, distribution losses, and distribution pumping
energy may be determined using any of the following methods:
·· Monitored data
·· Engineering analysis
·· Default values
Efficiencies and losses may be determined and modeled at any level of time resolution, from hourly to annual.
However, the time resolution must be sufficiently granular to capture and reasonably represent any significant
time- or load-dependent interactions between systems, such as thermal storage or CHP.
Monitoring data for heating, cooling, pumping, and cogeneration may be used only if the thermal loads
that are monitored represent at least 90% of the load on the building, campus, or district plant predicted after
occupancy of the project space.
Monitoring and analytical methods may be combined as necessary and appropriate. Whether using
monitoring or an analytical method, the methodologies must be fully documented. The following specific
requirements apply.

Heating and cooling plants

Efficiencies, whether determined through monitoring or analytically, must include all operational effects, such as
standby, equipment cycling, partial-load operation, internal pumping, and thermal losses.

Thermal distribution losses

For central plants located inside the project building, the thermal losses are assumed to be zero. For district
systems, use monitored data or an engineering analysis.
·· If using monitored data, determine the distribution losses for the DES by measuring the total thermal
EA

energy leaving the plant and comparing it with the total thermal energy used by the buildings connected to
the DES. De-rate the plant efficiency accordingly in the energy model:
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

% plant efficiency × { 100% - distribution loss (%) {

·· An engineering analysis takes into consideration all distribution losses between the DES and the building.
For distribution main losses, use a prorated amount based on load. For dedicated branch losses, use the total
losses of the branch that feeds the building, including heat losses and steam trap losses. Compare the total
losses with the total load of the building to get a percentage distribution loss relative to load and downgrade
the plant’s efficiency accordingly in the energy model.

Pumping energy
Whether through monitored data or engineering analysis, determine pumping energy for the project by prorating
the total pump energy of the DES or central plant by the ratio of the annual thermal load of the project space to
the total annual DES thermal load. Model the pump energy as auxiliary electrical load. Pumping energy must be
determined or estimated where it applies (i.e., there is no default value).

Default efficiencies and losses

Actual efficiency performance data on the DES serving the project building are preferred. If the project team
cannot obtain or determine the actual performance data, use the following default values. These values are
conservative and are intended to represent a DES with relatively low efficiency; a well-designed, well-operated
DES generally performs better.
·· DES heating plant: 70% (higher heating value, HHV) for the total boiler plant average efficiency
·· DES cooling plant: coefficient of performance (COP) of 4.4 for the total cooling plant average efficiency
(including cooling towers and primary pumps)
 149

·· Thermal distribution losses, including minor leaks or condensate losses:

°° Chilled water district cooling, 5%
°° Hot water district heating, 10%
°° Closed-loop steam systems, 15%
°° Open-loop steam systems, 25%
For steam systems that are partially open and partially closed, prorate between the above 15% and 25% losses in
accordance with the fraction of expected or actual condensate loss.
The above guidance assumes that DES-generated heat is used for heat in the connected building, and
DES-generated cooling is used for cooling in the connected building. If the DES produces heating that is then
converted to cooling for the connected building using absorption chillers or other similar technology, this
guidance must be modified (see CHP Modeling Guidance).

Path 3. Streamlined DES modeling

Path 3 is applicable for simple district energy systems. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream
equipment and upstream equipment and also requires calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using
either the modeling or monitoring methods.

Energy rates
Use Streamlined DES Modeling in the calculator provided by USGBC to allocate the energy costs to the results of
the model for each district energy source, in lieu of the purchased energy rates, to determine the baseline energy
cost.

Baseline plant
Calculate the average annual efficiency values for each district or central plant fuel source used to generate and
distribute the thermal energy, based on ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, baseline case requirements. These
values depend on the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 system type that would be selected for the building if the baseline case

EA
were modeled with on-site equipment. The calculations for baseline cost per district energy source are the same
as those for the proposed case model, except that the average efficiency is constant.

Proposed plant

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Determine a single value for average annual efficiency, including thermal losses and distribution energy, for each
district or central plant fuel source used to generate and distribute the thermal energy. For example, for chilled
water:

COST(CHW)BUILDING = CHWBUILDING × ∑ ( Cost i × η i )

i
where
COST(CHW) BUILDING = proposed case cost of chilled water
CHWBUILDING = building energy model metered data for chilled water consumption
i =  ach fuel source used at the district plant to generate or distribute chilled water (e.g.
e
electricity, diesel oil)
Cost =  irtual energy rate for each fuel source (in $/unit energy). This should match the
v
i
proposed case virtual energy rate for fuel sources present in the building, and should
be supported by local energy tariffs for fuel sources not present in the building.

ηi = average efficiency calculated for each fuel source

CHP modeling guidance

The baseline case is modeled as described in ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, and as summarized in the steps for
each path. The baseline model assumes separate production of electricity and thermal energy. Although not
modeled as CHP, the baseline case is charged with extra energy use for CHP energy accounting purposes in some
situations.
150

The proposed case may be modeled in various ways.

·· The average electricity generation, fuel input, and heat recovery of the CHP must be determined, or the
defaults for electric and thermal efficiency (below) must be used in conjunction with capacity ratings of the
equipment.
·· Calculate annual electricity generation using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total annual gross electricity generation. Also monitor the total annual parasitic loads, such
as the annual electricity used for cooling the intake air for a turbine. Calculate the net annual electricity
generation by subtracting all parasitic loads from the annual gross electricity generated.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies
and generator curves that match the installed generators. Apply measured or estimated load profiles
as process loads to reflect the estimated total electric and thermal loads on the district energy CHP
system. Use the total energy generated and total fuel input from this analysis. Any parasitic loads must
be included in the analysis and subtracted from the annual electricity generation.
·· Calculate annual fuel input using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total annual fuel input to the generators.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies
and generator curves that match the installed generators.
·· Calculate waste heat recovery using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total waste heat recovered.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies
and generator curves that match the installed generators. Model the thermal equipment served by
the CHP waste heat, such as boilers and absorption chillers, using the installed equipment capacities,
efficiencies, and efficiency curves, and reflecting the total heating and cooling loads on the plant as a
process load. Use the energy modeling outputs to identify the total heat recovered.
For baseline CHP electricity output, follow the general procedures described in this section for the proposed
EA

case, and adjust the results as follows depending on the results of the DES electricity allocation and the
total modeled electricity use of the building in the Path 2 or Path 3 proposed case, including the electricity
consumption of district plant equipment serving the building or project space:
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Scenario A. If the building’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity is less than or equal to its modeled
electricity consumption, no adjustment is necessary. The baseline project is charged with the energy used by
its (non-CHP) systems at market rates using standard procedures.
·· Scenario B. If the project’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity exceeds its modeled electricity
consumption, the amount of excess CHP electricity allocated to the building is considered process energy
in the energy model. Adjust the input fuel associated with this excess CHP electricity in the baseline case as
described in CHP fuel input.
For the proposed design’s CHP electricity output, allocate the electricity generation to the building or project
space based on the fraction of thermal loads for the DES sources that use recovered waste heat. For each DES
source, determine the fraction of the recovered waste heat applied to that source as well as the amount serving
the project building. For relatively simple DES systems, in which the recovered waste heat is used directly in the
DES, and for which waste heat serves only heating loads in the connected buildings, use the formula for simple
systems:

CHP_ELECBLDG (simple systems) = (XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL

where
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building
XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building

CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

 151

For CHP plants in which a portion of the recovered heat is used to drive absorption chillers that provide cooling
through a DES chilled-water loop, or a portion of the recovered heat is used for a third, separate district energy
source (e.g., if the building connects to both a steam loop and a hot-water loop), calculate the electricity
generation assigned to each building using the formula for heat recovery-driven chillers.

CHP_ELECBLDG (heat recovery-driven chillers) = ( XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) + ( YCHW × BLDGCHW ) + ( ZSOURCE × BLDGSOURCE ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL

where

CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building

XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES
directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building
YCHW = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to producing
chilled water in DES
BLDGCHW = fraction of total district chilled water provided to building
ZSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
BLDGSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

When modeling CHP fuel input, allocate the CHP input fuel to the project building based on a proration and
assignment of the total input fuel according to the results of the CHP electricity allocation described above for
CHP electricity output. Use the prevailing energy rates as they apply to the project. Any additional energy used by
the proposed design is also charged at market rates.

EA
For the proposed case, calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the building as follows:

Proposed BLDGFUEL =
( CHP_ELECBLDG

) × CHPFUEL

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

CHP_ELECTOTAL

where
Proposed CHP_ELECBLDG = proposed case CHP input fuel allocated to building
CHP_ELECTOTAL = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
CHPFUEL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant

For the baseline (scenario B in CHP electricity output only), calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the
building as follows:

Baseline BLDGFUEL

with
=
( PROCESS_ELECBLDG

CHP_ELECTOTAL ) × CHPFUEL

PROCESS_ELECBLDG = CHP_ELECBLDG - PROPOSED_ELECBLDG

152

where
Baseline BLDGFUEL = baseline case CHP input fuel charged to building
PROCESS_ELECBLDG = amount of allocated CHP electricity in excess of building’s modeled annual
electricity consumption (treated as process energy in model)
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant
CHPFUEL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
PROPOSED_ = modeled electricity consumption for building from proposed case
ELECBLDG

The model must include CHP generator default efficiencies. Actual efficiency performance data on the CHP
serving the project is preferred, based on either ongoing operations (existing CHP) or design specifications
(new CHP). If the project team cannot obtain the actual performance data, use the following default seasonal
performance values. These values are conservative and intended to represent a CHP system with relatively low
efficiency; a well-designed, well-and operated CHP system generally performs better.
·· Generator electrical efficiency, 22%
·· Generator thermal efficiency, 25%
·· Single-effect absorption chillers, 0.60 COP
·· Double-effect absorption chillers, 0.90 COP
·· Absorption cooling plant electrical efficiency, including cooling towers and primary pumps, 40 COP

Special situations for DES energy models

Service water heating
If service water is heated in full or in part by a DES or central plant, consider modeling the energy source as
purchased energy to hold the DES cost-neutral for service water heating. If desired, project teams using Path 2 or
EA

Path 3 may use an exceptional calculation method to document DES-related savings from service water heating.
Project teams that elect to document savings must fully justify and support the annual energy consumption and cost
in both the baseline and the proposed models. Use a reasonable, well-founded purchased energy rate in the models,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

such as the actual rate paid to the DES supplier or a virtual rate.

Heating converted to cooling

Sometimes the district or campus system heating energy supply is converted to chilled water using absorption
chillers or other similar technologies to serve cooling loads. In this circumstance, the equipment that converts
heating to cooling may reside within the DES itself (i.e., the DES provides cooling to the building) or within the
connected buildings (i.e., DES provides heating to the building; building converts heating to cooling).

Other atypical systems.

DES also often incorporate unconventional features, such as thermal storage, ground or surface water cooling, and
waste heat recovery. These features should be incorporated into the proposed virtual plant to the greatest extent
practical using the general principles presented in this guidance.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Option 1. Tenant-Level Energy Simulation. Consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendices
B and D, to find the project’s climate zone. Use Table B-2 (Canada) or Table B-3 (International) if the location is
listed. For locations not listed in Table B-3, use Table B-4, along with the climate type definitions in Section B2, plus
Appendix D to determine climate zone.
For an expanded reference of international locations, ASHRAE 169-2013 Table A-5 (Canada) or Table A-6
(International) may be consulted. ASHRAE 169-2013 subdivides Climate Zone 1 into two climate zones (Climate
Zone 1 and Climate Zone 0). Locations listed in ASHRAE 169-2013 in Climate Zone 1 and Climate Zone 0 should be
considered Climate Zone 1 under ASHRAE 90.1-2010.
For example, a team working on a project in Beijing consults ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendix B, to determine the appropriate climate zone. Table B-3 does not give a climate zone for Beijing.
 153

The project team finds Beijing in Table D-3, which lists the values for heating degree-days to base 65°F or 18°C
(HDD65 of HDD18) as 5252, and cooling degree-days to base 50°F or 10°C (CDD50 or CDD10) as 4115. The team uses
these values to determine Beijing’s climate zone as defined in Appendix B, Section B2 and Table B-4.
Beijing is in a “moist climate” because its warmest month has a mean temperature higher than 72°F (22.2°C) and
is therefore too warm to be a “marine climate,” and annual rainfall data indicate that the city is not in a “dry climate.”
Finally, the project team uses the values found in Table D-2 for HDD65 (5252) and CDD50 (4115) in Table B-4 and
determines that Beijing is in Zone 4A (mixed-humid) because the CDD50 value is 4500 or less, and the HDD65 value
is between 3600 and 5400.
If ASHRAE 90.1–2010 is not applicable, Option 1 requirements can be met with a USGBC-approved equivalent
standard.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance. A project outside the U.S. may install products not labeled under the ENERGY
STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the ENERGY STAR website. All
products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date of their purchase.

Developed by members of the European Roundtable, this table provides further guidance for project teams in
Europe wishing to use European standards in lieu of certain ASHRAE 90.1-2010 mandatory provisions in LEED v4.
The guidance covers ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Mandatory Provision Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4 and 10. Column 1 of the
table references the specific subsection used in ASHRAE 90.1-2010. Column 2 displays the requirement as written
in ASHRAE 90.1-2010. Column 3 outlines the compliance pathway available for European projects. Column 4
includes, in some cases, further information about the proposal, differences between the proposal and the ASHRAE
requirement, or a reference to further documentation.
Please refer back to the LEED v4 web-based reference guide (Further Explanation > International Tips > Europe)
for further information on the regional alternative compliance path.
Additionally, for projects using the Performance Option for compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Performance and EAc1: Optimize Energy Performance, the documentation must also use the calculated U-factor
for fenestration products including windows and skylights based on either the LBNL Windows 6 program, or a

EA
simulation software program that approximates the NFRC rating methodologies. Alternatively, a narrative shall be
provided supporting the claim that the fenestration U-factor used in the model is similar to the values that would be
achieved using the NFRC rating. The CE-marked fenestration does not account for thermal bridging and seasonal

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

performance in the same way as the NFRC rating, and when accounted for in the energy model, has been observed to
lead to savings that exceed those claimed for the same fenestration rated under the NFRC ratings.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Appendix G energy modeling inputs X

Input and output reports from modeling software X
Exceptional calculations (if applicable) X
Energy consumption and demand for each end use and fuel type X
Fuels rates X
Target Finder results and summary X X
Lighting power density calculations X
ENERGY STAR appliance percentage X
154

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. Project teams intending to pursue the related credit must perform a preliminary energy
analysis of at least two design options to understand the effects of load reduction strategies on energy use in the
tenant space. This may take the form of a modeling exercise or a comparison of established measures. The analysis
will inform the project team’s approach to achieving this prerequisite through Option 1. The concept model should
be prepared early—during predesign or schematic design, before undertaking a preliminary energy model.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Developing an early phase energy model focused on load reduction
and establishing an energy savings goal for the project will ensure that the project is eligible to receive points under
the related credit for any energy cost savings beyond the prerequisite’s 3% minimum threshold. Consider the
requirements for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance prior to initiating the energy model, to ensure that the
criteria for both the prerequisite and the credit are met. Further reduction of the connected lighting power density
and the installation of ENERGY STAR appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service
equipment beyond the prerequisite requirements for Option 2 may help the team earn points under the related
credit.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Consider renewable energy production for the project during early
design. Although renewables cannot be counted toward this prerequisite, they are a viable energy cost savings
measure that can achieve points for two related EA credits, Renewable Energy Production and Optimize Energy
Performance.

EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets. If the team is pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, the energy model
output will be used to calculate the amount of green power required to meet the related credit requirements.

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. For projects pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, hot water
demand savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from the related prerequisite’s calculations.
EA

EQ Prerequisite Minimum IAQ Performance. For projects pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, as-designed
ventilation flow rates reported in the related prerequisite must correspond to the inputs in the proposed energy
model.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The prerequisite now includes two options: Option 1, Tenant-Level Energy Simulation, and Option 2, Prescriptive
Compliance.

Option 1. Tenant-Level Energy Simulation

·· Tenant-level modeling now more closely follows that for whole buildings.
·· The LEED methodology for modeling shared HVAC systems has been revised to allocating a percentage of the
shared systems to the LEED project. Specific guidance for this allocation is included in Further Explanation,
Contribution of Base Building HVAC and Service Water Heating Systems.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance. The requirements of the 2009 prerequisite were adapted to become Option 2 in
LEED v4.
 155

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings:
ashrae.org

Standard 90.1–2010 User’s Manual: ashrae.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov

COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
combined heat and power an integrated system that captures the heat, otherwise unused, generated by a single
fuel source in the production of electrical power. Also known as cogeneration. (Adapted from U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency)

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

EA
downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

plug load or receptacle load the electrical current drawn by all equipment that is connected to the electrical system
via a wall outlet

process energy power resources consumed in support of a manufacturing, industrial, or commercial process other
than conditioning spaces and maintaining comfort and amenities for building occupants of a building. It may include
refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances.
(ASHRAE)

process load or unregulated load the load on a building resulting from the consumption or release of process
energy (ASHRAE)

regulated load any building end use that has either a mandatory or a prescriptive requirement in ANSI/ASHRAE/IES
Standard 90.1–2010

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

156
 157

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Fundamental
Refrigerant Management
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion.

EA
FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
REQUIREMENTS
Do not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in new heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and
refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems. When reusing existing HVAC&R equipment, complete a comprehensive CFC
phase-out conversion before project completion. Phase-out plans extending beyond the project completion date
will be considered on their merits.
Existing small HVAC&R units (defined as containing less than 0.5 pound [225 grams] of refrigerant) and other
equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small water coolers, and any other equipment that contains less than
0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are exempt.
158

BEHIND THE INTENT

Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other refrigerants contribute to the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. The
thinning of this ozone layer is linked to many human health problems, such as skin cancer, to ecological effects, such
as reduced crop yields, and to damage to the marine food chain.1 To address these issues, the 1987 Montreal Protocol
established an international agreement to phase out use of the most harmful ozone-depleting substances, including
CFCs.
Production of CFCs was phased out in industrialized nations that signed the Montreal Protocol before December
1995 and in most other countries by 2010. Accordingly, new construction projects cannot install new CFC-based
refrigeration. However, CFCs may still be used in previously installed HVAC equipment.
To further progress, this prerequisite supports the elimination of CFCs. Only equipment within the project scope
must meet the requirements; however, project teams are strongly encouraged to choose base buildings with systems
that do not use CFCs. Though both hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) and CFCs contribute to ozone depletion,
only CFCs must be addressed to meet this prerequisite.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SELECT NEW EQUIPMENT THAT CONTAINS NO CFC REFRIGERANTS

Identify all new HVAC&R equipment installed as part of the project that contains refrigerant and confirm
that CFC refrigerants are not used.
·· The mechanical engineer is typically responsible for specifying equipment that meets the prerequisite
requirements.
EA

·· Older or retrofit equipment with higher efficiency ratings are the most likely to have CFCs, but it is
important to check the refrigerant type for all new equipment.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Renovations

STEP 1. IDENTIFY CFCS IN EXISTING EQUIPMENT

Inventory all existing HVAC&R equipment in the project and determine whether any items use CFC
refrigerants.

STEP 2. PHASE OUT CFCS IN EXISTING EQUIPMENT

Before the project’s completion, replace or retrofit all existing CFC-based HVAC&R equipment currently
serving the ID+C space and within the purview of the project. This includes equipment dedicated to
the space, whether located in the space or not, that can be influenced by the project owner. Existing
small equipment with less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant is exempt from the prerequisite
requirements.
·· Projects are not required to address CFCs contained in base building equipment for this prerequisite.
·· If the CFC phaseout cannot be completed before occupancy, see Further Explanation, Postoccupancy
Phaseout).
·· Projects that retain CFCs past initial occupancy, even if a phase-out plan is in progress, are ineligible
for EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management. The credit calculations must account for all
refrigerants present at time of occupancy, except those contained in existing small equipment with
less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant.

1. Questions and Answers about the Environmental Effects of the Ozone Layer Depletion and Climate Change: 2010 Update, http://ozone.unep.org/
Assessment_Panels/EEAP/eeap-report2010-FAQ.pdf.
 159

FURTHER EXPLANATION

POSTOCCUPANCY CFC PHASEOUT

If all CFC-based equipment cannot be replaced or retrofitted before the project’s completion, adopt a CFC phase-
out plan with a schedule. Develop a narrative that describes the circumstances that prevent CFC phaseout before
the project concludes. Consider obtaining preapproval for a postoccupancy phase-out plan before submission for
certification.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems (DES)
All applicable downstream equipment within the purview of the project must meet the prerequisite requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All equipment Phaseout required

EA
Equipment type X X
Refrigerant type X X
Installation date X X

FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

CFC conversion or replacement plan X
Refrigerant leakage rate, quantity X
Phase-out completion date X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management. Selecting equipment that has low ozone depletion potential
(ODP) and global warming potential (GWP), as well as no CFCs, will help achieve the related credit.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Alternatives to CFC and HCFC refrigerants, such as HFC-410A, have
lower refrigerant impacts but may require higher levels of energy use. Some energy-efficient systems, like variable
refrigerant flow (VRF), may increase the overall refrigerant impact because of the relatively higher amount of
refrigerants their operation requires.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.
160

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. EPA Clean Air Act, Title VI, Section 608, Refrigerant Recycling Rule: epa.gov/air/caa

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerant a fluid, containing hydrocarbons, that absorbs heat from a reservoir
at low temperatures and rejects heat at higher temperatures. When emitted into the atmosphere, CFCs cause
depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 161

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Enhanced
Commissioning
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (4-5 points)

Retail (4-5 points)
Hospitality (4-5 points)

INTENT

To further support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a

EA
project that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water,
indoor environmental quality, and durability.

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING (4 POINTS)

Projects must complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for mechanical, electrical, domestic
hot water, and renewable energy systems and assemblies in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and
ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and
durability.
·· Review contractor submittals.
·· Include systems manual requirements in construction documents.
·· Include operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents.
·· Verify systems manual updates and delivery.
·· Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
·· Verify seasonal testing.
·· Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.
·· Develop an on-going commissioning plan.
162

OR

OPTION 2. MONITORING-BASED COMMISSIONING (5 POINTS)

Achieve Option 1.
Develop monitoring-based procedures and identify points to be measured and evaluated to assess performance
of energy- and water-consuming systems.
Include the procedures and measurement points in the commissioning plan. Address the following:
·· roles and responsibilities;
·· measurement requirements (meters, points, metering systems, data access);
·· the points to be tracked, with frequency and duration for trend monitoring;
·· the limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values (where appropriate, predictive
algorithms may be used to compare ideal values with actual values);
·· the elements used to evaluate performance, including conflict between systems, out-of-sequence operation of
systems components, and energy and water usage profiles;
·· an action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies;
·· training to prevent errors;
·· planning for repairs needed to maintain performance;
·· the frequency of analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly);
·· Update the systems manual with any modifications or new settings, and give the reason for any modifications
from the original design.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 163

BEHIND THE INTENT

Enhanced commissioning is a natural extension of the fundamental commissioning (Cx) process. It provides
owners, via the commissioning authority (CxA), further oversight and verification that the building will meet their
expectations and requirements beyond the first day of occupancy. Enhanced commissioning gives the CxA the
power to act as the owner’s advocate by conducting in-depth reviews of the basis of design, design documents, and
construction submittals. Training and a postconstruction verification visit are some of the enhancements that
contribute to ongoing quality control and operations.
The CxA may make additions to the Cx plan to verify that the building operators will have the proper tools
to manage the project’s equipment efficiently and effectively, in conjunction with the base building equipment.
Monitoring-based commissioning (MBCx) gives the owner, operators, and the CxA a continual stream of
information that helps them identify operational issues as they occur, thereby saving time, money, and energy
consumption over the lifetime of the tenant space.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Use input from the CxA and the project team and select one or both options. Review the space type, the
assumed occupancy type, and the project goals and scope. The team should be familiar with the credit
requirements so that any gaps in scope or skill can be addressed (see Further Explanation, Planning the
Cx Process and Choosing an Appropriate CxA).
·· Option 1 is applicable to all projects.
·· Option 2 is often appropriate for projects that are energy-intensive and will benefit from real-time data

EA
and the ability to track trends. The additional initial costs may be offset by maintaining the proper
energy usage over time.

STEP 2. UPDATE DOCUMENTS TO INCLUDE ENHANCED Cx ACTIVITIES

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
Project documents should reflect the enhanced commissioning activities included in the project scope.
·· Update the owner’s project requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD), and Cx plan (see Further
Explanation, Enhanced Commissioning Plan).
·· The CxA must ensure that the OPR, the BOD, and the Cx plan include all additional commissioning
activities that will be conducted throughout the design and construction phases of the project.

Option 1. Enhanced Systems Commissioning

STEP 1. DEVELOP SYSTEMS MANUAL SCOPE AND FORMAT

During the design development phase, outline the scope and format for the project systems manual
in order to include all the information necessary to operate, maintain, and recommission all energy-
consuming systems within or serving the space.
·· The CxA is responsible for working with the owner to develop and outline the requirements of the
systems manual. Include operating staff in preparing the manual if the team is in place during design.
·· Information for the systems manual is generally collected during construction and after completion of
a project.
The basic scope and format of a systems manual are outlined in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, Annex O;
the manual usually includes the following:
·· Executive summary
·· Owner’s project requirements
·· Basis of design
·· System single-line diagrams
164

·· Construction record documents and specifications

·· Approved submittals
·· As-built drawings
·· As-built sequence of operation
·· Original setpoints for all systems commissioned
·· Recommended schedule for recommissioning
·· Recommended schedule for sensor recalibration
·· Equipment operations and maintenance manuals
·· Equipment preventative maintenance schedules
·· Confirmation of completed training for the owner and occupants
·· Ongoing system optimization procedures
·· Final commissioning report

STEP 2. DEVELOP TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Create training requirements (see Further Explanation, Examples, Table 2). Verify that they meet the
scope of the owners’ requirement for the operator training.
·· Training requirements must be completed before the bid documents are final.
·· Integrate requirements into the commissioning specifications, to be issued as part of the bid package
during the construction document phase.
Training requirements include the following:
·· List of those who should receive operational training, by position or name
·· List of systems that require operator training
·· Level of instruction required for each system
·· Determination of whether the training provided by the equipment manufacturer is acceptable
·· Tracking method to ensure that all required positions or persons receive training

STEP 3. ENSURE ENHANCED Cx SCOPE ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTS
EA

Confirm that the following items are included in the construction documents to be issued for bid:
·· System manual requirements
·· Operator and occupant training requirements
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 4. REVIEW CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS

Ensure ongoing compliance with the OPR, BOD, and Cx requirements by reviewing the HVAC&R
contractor’s submittals.
·· Conduct a submittal review by the CxA concurrently with the design team’s review or, at the latest,
before final acceptance by the engineer or architect of record.
·· The CxA must document all issues discovered during the review process in a log, to be distributed to
the project’s design and construction teams (see Further Explanation, Examples, Table 3).
·· The CxA must also confirm that all issues recorded in the log are addressed or resolved by the owner,
design, or construction teams.
·· Establish the submittal review process at the commissioning kickoff meeting included in the
fundamental commissioning steps.

STEP 5. VERIFY TRAINING

Confirm that the training program has been completed according to the owner’s requirements for all
commissioned equipment.
·· Training is required in order to ensure that the operating staff is fully knowledgeable about operating
the equipment and systems. Typically, it is provided by the equipment manufacturer, general
contractor, or subcontractors.
·· A good training program covers all new HVAC&R equipment and associated controls as well as
monitoring equipment and software (if Option 2 is pursued).
·· It is recommended that the training cover all operating scenarios to help the building engineering team
and tenant facilities staff understand the most effective and efficient way to operate the space.
As outlined in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, a robust training program will address the following:
·· Emergency instructions and procedures
 165

·· Operation instructions and procedures

·· Troubleshooting procedures
·· Maintenance and inspection procedures
·· Repair procedures
·· Upkeep of the systems manual and associated maintenance documentation logs

STEP 6. DELIVER POSTCONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Compete and deliver the necessary operating documents and reports to the owner before tenant
occupancy to ensure a smooth transition from construction to operation. The project CxA must confirm
delivery, and the final package must include the following:
·· Up-to-date systems manual including operations and maintenance manuals for all commissioned
equipment
·· Documentation of operator training on all commissioned systems
·· Completed functional performance test reports
·· Up-to-date issues log detailing closed and open issues
·· Updated Cx plan that outlines commissioning completed to date, plan for seasonal testing, plan for
10-month operational review, and plan for addressing open issues identified after the initial round of
commissioning.

STEP 7. PERFORM SEASONAL TESTING, IF REQUIRED

Determine whether seasonal testing will be necessary, based on the project schedule.
·· Both projects that reach substantial completion during peak heating or cooling months and projects
that are occupied and operational before all equipment has been installed must create Cx plans and
complete all necessary tests.
·· The project CxA must be involved in seasonal testing, even if it occurs after the project is completed.
The results of seasonal testing and the issues log must be included in the final commissioning report
(preferred) or issued as an addendum to the owner.

STEP 8. REVIEW OPERATIONS 10 MONTHS AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

EA
Perform the 10-month review of operations after substantial completion to ensure that the space is being
operated per the owners’ requirements. The 10-month review may include the following:
·· Interviews with the operations and maintenance staff

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
·· Interviews with occupants
·· Status of outstanding commissioning-related issues
·· Comparison of current operations with the operations and maintenance plan that was documented as
part of EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning
·· Follow-up functional performance testing, when required
·· Trends in tenant space operations, as indicated by the building automation system or system
submeters

STEP 9. DEVELOP ONGOING Cx PLAN

Before or as part of the 10-month review of operations, the CxA must issue an ongoing commissioning
plan. The plan should provide operating staff with procedures, blank test scripts, and a schedule for
ongoing Cx activities. It may be executed either by the operators, in addition to their normal preventive
maintenance activities, or by an independent CxA (see Further Explanation, Ongoing Commissioning
Basics).
The plan must include the following:
·· Definition of the ongoing commissioning process
·· Defined roles and responsibilities
·· Recommended schedule for recommissioning as-built systems
·· Continuous documentation and updating of tenant space operating plan and current facility
requirements throughout the building’s lifetime
·· Blank testing materials, including functional performance tests for all commissioned as-built systems in
the project, as well as an issues log
·· Direction for testing new and retrofitted equipment
166

Option 2. Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning

STEP 1. ACHIEVE OPTION 1

Ensure that the requirements for Option 1 have been met.

STEP 2. UPDATE CX PLAN TO INCLUDE MONITORING-BASED COMMISSIONING (MBCX)

REQUIREMENTS
During the design development phase, incorporate the MBCx requirements and activities into the project
Cx plan (see Further Explanation, Monitoring-Based Commissioning Basics).
·· Define analysis procedures, including frequency during year one.
·· Outline the evaluation process and determine the procedure for handling system conflicts, usage
profiles, and out-of-sequence operations.
·· Include preventive planning and maintenance procedures necessary to meet performance goals.
·· Determine measurement requirements and decide whether predictive algorithms can be used in
conjunction with metered points.

STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT MBCX IS FULLY INCORPORATED INTO ENHANCED CX

Ensure that requirements for MBCx are included in all commissioning documents. Items to look for may
include the following:
·· Owner’s requirements, such as specific trends to track, reflected accurately in the engineer’s BOD
·· Metering and monitoring required for MBCx, included in the BOD
·· Single-line or riser diagrams for location of building and system meters
·· Controls sequences for specification of appropriate monitoring points
·· Cx specifications for contractors and building operators
·· Submittal reviews of meters, energy analysis software, and drawings of controls for compliance with
the owner’s MBCx metering and monitoring requirements
·· Creation and completion of prefunctional tests for MBCx-related equipment, such as meters and
energy analysis software programs, by the CxA and contractors
EA

·· MBCx operator education regarding measurement techniques, energy analysis software tools, fault
detection and fault resolution, all incorporated into training requirements

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT MBCX PLAN

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Execute, concurrently whenever possible, MBCx monitoring and analysis with the functional performance
testing completed for EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning.
The equipment and tools required for MBCx must be installed, and the electrical and controls contractor
should submit construction checklists for review by the CxA.
The benefits of implementing MBCx functional testing after construction but before occupancy include
the following:
·· More robust documentation of functional performance tests
·· Verification that the energy meters and monitoring points have been properly installed and
programmed
·· CxA oversight of monitoring procedures and energy analysis, to ensure that the owner’s requirements
for ongoing monitoring are executed correctly
·· Verification that energy analysis software tools, if installed, are appropriately identifying faults and
producing the correct reports
It is recommended that the CxA confirm execution of the MBCx commissioning plan during the 10-month
review. Confirmation of execution includes the following:
·· Review of metering and trend logs
·· Review of the issues log showing results of the MBCx
·· Confirmation of issue resolution
·· Confirmation of ongoing operator training
·· Updating of the systems manual with any modifications or new settings that differ from design, with
explanations for the changes
 167

FURTHER EXPLANATION

PLANNING THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS

Table 1 outlines the tasks required to meet the intent of EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and
Verification and EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning, Options 1 and 2, with suggested timing.

TABLE 1. Commissioning activities

Phase Cx task Responsible party Cx Enhanced Cx MBCx

Predesign Develop OPR Owner X X X

Develop BOD, including envelope requirements Design team X X X

Schematic design
Include general monitoring, metering, and trending
Design team X
requirements

Engage CxA Owner X X X

Develop initial commissioning plan CxA X X X

Include monitoring requirements, equipment CxA X

CxA, owner, design

Conduct OPR, BOD, and design document review X X X
team
Design documents
Prepare systems manual outline CxA, owner X X

Include monitoring requirements, equipment CxA, owner X

EA
Document training requirements CxA, owner X X

CxA, owner, design

Update OPR and BOD as necessary X X X
team

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
Issue Cx specifications for inclusion in bid/permit
CxA X X X
documents

Include enhanced Cx requirements CxA X X

Construction
Include monitoring-based Cx requirements CxA X
documents
CxA, owner, design
Update OPR and BOD as necessary X X X
team

Conduct design review (recommended) CxA, design team X X X

168

TABLE 1. (CONTINUED) Commissioning activities

Phase Cx task Responsible party Cx Enhanced Cx MBCx

CxA, owner, design

Update OPR and BOD as necessary X X X
team

Perform prefunctional inspections CxA X X X

Complete submittal reviews concurrently with or

CxA X X
before acceptance by design team
Update OPR, BOD, Cx plan and systems manual as
CxA X X X
necessary

Issue owner’s training requirements CxA to contractor X X

Issue construction checklists CxA X X X

Issue functional performance test scripts for

CxA, contractor X X X
contractor review
Construction
Issue/review verified TAB report Contractor, CxA X X X

Issue/review completed construction checklists Contractor, CxA X X X

Execute functional performance tests CxA, contractor X X X

Document issues in issues log CxA X X X

Compile final systems manual CxA X X

Complete final commissioning report CxA X X X

EA

CxA, contractor,
Verify training plan has been implemented X X
building operators
Complete Cx report CxA X X X
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Compile operations and maintenance plan CxA X X X

Compile final systems manual CxA X X

Occupancy and CxA, contractor,

Perform seasonal testing X X
operations building operators
CxA, contractor,
Perform 10-month review X X
building operators
CxA, building
Develop ongoing Cx plan X X
operators
BOD = basis of design Cx = commissioning process CxA = commissioning authority
MBCx = monitoring-based commissioning process OPR = owner’s project requirements

CHOOSING AN APPROPRIATE CxA

Review the guidance on qualifications for commissioning authorities in EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning, including Table 1, Who can be the CxA? The following points also apply:
·· Multiple team members from different companies may collaborate to complete the commissioning scope of
work. However, one CxA must lead, review, oversee, and coordinate all activities and deliverables provided by
the commissioning team.
·· The members of the commissioning team can be employees of the same company or employees of separate
firms, provided they all meet the basic requirements for the task to which they are assigned.
·· Not all CxAs are qualified to perform all aspects and types of commissioning activities.
 169

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING PLAN

The CxA develops the commissioning plan with input from the project team. Updates during the design and
construction process are the primary responsibility of the CxA. A sample table of contents for the enhanced
commissioning plan is provided in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005p Informative Annex G – Commissioning Plan.
The recommended components of the commissioning plan are the following:
·· Commissioning program overview
°° Goals and objectives
°° General project information
»» Scope of commissioning
»» Systems (Option 1)
»» Monitoring, which may include points, meters, and trending logs (Option 2)
·· Commissioning team
°° Team members, roles, and responsibilities
°° Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management
·· Commissioning process activities
°° Reviewing the OPR
°° Reviewing the BOD
°° Documenting the systems commissioning review process (Option 1)
°° Documenting the monitoring-based commissioning review process (Option 2)
°° Developing the systems manual
°° Developing systems functional test procedures documentation
°° Verifying system performance via functional performance testing
°° Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process: monitoring system analysis (Option 2) must be
conducted at least quarterly an ongoing basis during occupancy.

EA
°° Verifying the training of operations personnel: monitoring system training (Option 2) must be conducted
on an ongoing basis during occupancy.
°° Reviewing building operation after 10 months of operations

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
ONGOING COMMISSIONING BASICS
Ongoing Cx, an extension of enhanced Cx process, is essentially a repetition of the functional performance testing
and reporting procedures that occurred immediately after construction, during the initial occupancy and operations
phase. Ongoing testing is required to ensure that the building continues to perform according to the OPR, BOD,
and approved design and construction documents. The commissioning activities should occur approximately twice
a year, to correspond with the summer and winter seasons. Those who conduct the Cx activities should use the
functional performance tests and issues log templates provided as part of the original Cx report.
Ongoing Cx activities can be conducted either by in-house operating staff (in addition to their normal preventive
maintenance activities) or by a third-party CxA who is responsible for all testing and issues reporting. Using
the operating staff to perform the functional performance tests may be beneficial to their understanding of the
building operations. However, as the facility requirements change or as systems are retrofitted over the lifetime
of the building, a CxA may need to be retained to ensure all test scripts and procedures are up to date and properly
documented.

MONITORING-BASED COMMISSIONING BASICS

Monitoring-based commissioning is the integration of three components: permanent energy monitoring systems,
real-time energy analysis, and ongoing commissioning. Ongoing Cx is a component of MBCx but should not be
confused with it. When executed independently or without MBCx capabilities, ongoing Cx is a process of discrete
functional performance testing and reporting over the lifetime of a building. In comparison, MBCx is an ongoing
performance analysis of an operational building, or subset of a building, that provides real-time equipment
170

performance information to the building operators. In other words, MBCx allows the user to track energy
consumption, detect faulty equipment operations, and identify unusual energy or power consumption patterns as
they occur.
MBCx can be accomplished via systems submetering, operational points trending, and real-time analyses, such
as fault-detection and sequence verification. The real-time analyses can be performed by either a service provider or
an on-site energy manager who uses software to monitor data from meters and the building automation system.
Additions to the commissioning plan may include the following:
·· Roles and responsibilities for maintaining an MBCx plan throughout the first year of occupancy
·· Monitoring requirements
°° Meters and meter locations
°° Points to be tracked
°° Frequency and duration of trend monitoring
°° Software
°° Hardware
°° Data access
·· Limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values
·· Specification of fault diagnostics or predictive algorithms for tracked points and metered values, if appropriate
·· Elements used to evaluate performance, including the following:
°° Conflict between systems, such as simultaneous heating and cooling
°° Out-of-sequence operation of systems components
°° Unexpected energy and water usage profiles
·· Action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies, including the ongoing
documentation of an issues log
·· Ongoing operator and occupant training to prevent errors
EA

·· Planning ongoing monitoring device calibration to maintain performance

·· Frequency of analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly)

MBCx is most cost-effective when the metering and energy analysis software are integrated into the initial design of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

a space.

EXAMPLES

TABLE 2. Example training plan

System, Hours per Training Theory of Hands-on

Spec Section Remarks
subsystem class date(s) operation demo

Engage factory-authorized
service representative to train
Rooftop unit 01783 - O&M 2 4/5/2011 YES YES maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain
rooftop units
Engage factory-authorized
service representative to train
Makeup air unit 01783 - O&M 1 4/5/2011 YES YES maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain
the makeup air unit
Engage factory-authorized
service representative to train
Kitchen exhaust
01783 - O&M 0.5 4/5/2011 YES YES maintenance personnel to
fans
adjust, operate, and maintain
kitchen exhaust fans
Engage factory-authorized
service representative to train
General exhaust
01783 - O&M 0.5 4/5/2011 YES YES maintenance personnel to
fans
adjust, operate, and maintain
general in-line exhaust fans
 171

TABLE 3. Example submittal review log

Design team comments, Final review comment,

Comment Sheet Comment
response status

FF 1C and 2C call for 30 kBtu/h at 3 gpm

with 180°F entering and 160°F leaving and
300 cfm. Transmittal 312037-0031 states
1 M2-1 34.8 kBtu/h at 3 gpm with 180°F and Acceptable to engineer Item closed
156.82 leaving, and 320 cfm. Designer to
comment if slight deviation in parameters
is acceptable.

FC 1F and CU 1F specified as 12 kBtu/h

at 95°F entering air temperature to the
2 M2-1 condenser. Transmittal 312037-0026 shows Acceptable to engineer Item closed
11.9 kBtu/h at ARI standard conditions.
Design to comment if rating is acceptable.

AV 1 minimum cfm specified as 600,

heating as 4,000. Transmittal 312037-0022 Noted by engineer on Final approved submittal
3 M1-1C
lists each as 800 cfm. Designer to check submittal needed
cfm discrepancy.
AV 2 minimum cfm specified as 360,
heating as 2,400. Transmittal 312037-0022 Noted by engineer on Final approved submittal
4 M1-1C
lists each as 800 cfm. Designer to check submittal needed
cfm discrepancy.
TB-CO3 minimum cooling cfm specified
as 100 on M1-1c. Transmittal 312037-0022 Noted by engineer on Final approved submittal
5 M1-1C
states as 250 cfm. Designer to confirm fm submittal needed
discrepancy.

EA
CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Training outline and participation list X X

Verification of CxA activities X X
Ongoing Cx plan X X
Confirmation of systems manual delivery X X
Monitoring and trending point list and schedule X
172

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. Enhanced commissioning is an extension of
fundamental commissioning and cannot be completed if the scope of fundamental commissioning is not fulfilled.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems installed on site must be commissioned
under this credit.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. Although not a requirement of this credit, achievement of the related credit
will ease the execution of the MBCx plan. Conversely, if a project is pursuing the related credit, MBCx is a powerful
tool for extracting additional value from the existing advanced metering system.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

A monitoring-based commissioning option is now included.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, The Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for The Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
EA

Not available.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

commissioning (Cx) the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies
are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner’s project requirements

commissioning authority (CxA) the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of
commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to
ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner’s project requirements.

operations and maintenance (O&M) plan a plan that specifies major system operating parameters and limits,
maintenance procedures and schedules, and documentation methods necessary to demonstrate proper operation
and maintenance of an approved emissions control device or system

owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

systems manual provides the information needed to understand, operate, and maintain the systems and assemblies
within a building.  It expands the scope of the traditional operating and maintenance documentation and is compiled
of multiple documents developed during the commissioning process, such as the owner’s project requirements,
operation and maintenance manuals, and sequences of operation. 
 173

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Optimize Energy
Performance
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1–25 points)

Retail (1–25 points)
Hospitality (1–25 points)

INTENT

To achieve increasing levels of energy performance beyond the

EA
prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic harms
associated with excessive energy use.

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS
Establish an energy performance target no later than the schematic design phase. The target must be established as
KBtu per square foot-year (kW per square meter-year) of source energy use.

Select one of the options below.

OPTION 1. TENANT-LEVEL ENERGY SIMULATION (1–25 POINTS)

Analyze efficiency measures during the design process and account for the results in design decision-making.
Analysis can include energy simulation of efficiency opportunities, energy simulation analyses for similar projects,
or published data from energy analyses performed for similar projects (such as AEDGs).
Analyze efficiency measures focused on load reduction and HVAC-related strategies; passive measures are
acceptable. Project the potential energy savings and cost implications for all affected systems.
Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance to demonstrate a percentage improvement
in the proposed tenant project performance rating compared with the baseline.
174

TABLE 1. Points for percentage improvement in energy performance

Interior construction Points

4% 4
5% 6
6% 8
7% 10
8% 11
9% 12
10% 13
11% 14
12% 15
13% 16
14% 17
15% 18
16% 19
17% 20
18% 21
20% 22
22% 23
24% 24
28% 25
EA

RETAIL ONLY

For all process loads, define a clear baseline to compare with proposed improvements. The baselines in Appendix 3,
Tables 1–4, represent industry standards and may be used without additional documentation. Calculate the baseline
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

and design as follows:

·· Appliances and equipment. For appliances and equipment not covered in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4 indicate
hourly energy use for proposed and budget equipment, along with estimated daily use hours. Use the total
estimated appliance/equipment energy use in the energy simulation model as a plug load. Reduced use
time (schedule change) is not a category of energy improvement in this credit. ENERGY STAR ratings and
evaluations are a valid basis for performing this calculation.
·· Display lighting. For display lighting, use the space by space method of determining allowed lighting power
under ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for
projects outside the U.S.), to determine the appropriate baseline for both the general building space and the
display lighting.
·· Refrigeration. For hard-wired refrigeration loads, model the effect of energy performance improvements with
a simulation program designed to account for refrigeration equipment.

OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE (1–16 POINTS)

Use any combination of the strategies in any or all of the categories below.

Base Building Systems (2-6 points)

For base building systems that serve the project, as well as any applicable improvements that are part of the
project, document compliance with the following according to base building type and climate zone. For projects
outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to determine the
appropriate climate zone.
·· Building Envelope, Opaque (2 points)
Comply with the recommendations in the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for all
roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, vestibules, and continuous air barriers.
 175

·· Building Envelope, Glazing (2 points)

Comply with the recommendations in the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for all
vertical fenestration.
·· HVAC Equipment Efficiency (2 points)
For all base building HVAC systems that serve the project, comply with the recommendations in the
appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide.

HVAC Systems (2 points)

·· HVAC Zoning and Controls (2 points)
For the tenant fit-out of spaces, provide a separate control zone for each solar exposure and interior space.
Provide controls capable of sensing space conditions and modulating the HVAC system in response to space
demand for all private offices and other enclosed spaces (e.g., conference rooms, classrooms).

Interior Lighting Power (1–4 points)

·· Lighting Power Density (1–4 points)
Reduce connected lighting power density below that allowed by ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, either
using the space-by-space method or applying the whole-building lighting power allowance to the entire tenant
space. Points are awarded according to Table 2.

TABLE 2. Points for percentage reduction in lighting power density

Percentage below standard LPD Points

10% 1

15% 2

20% 3

EA
25% 4

Interior Lighting Controls (1–2 points)

·· Daylighting Controls (1 point)

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Install daylight-responsive controls in all regularly occupied daylit spaces within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of
windows and under skylights for at least 25% of the connected lighting load. Daylight controls must switch or
dim electric lights in response to daylight illumination in the space.
·· Occupancy Sensor Lighting Controls (1 point)
Install occupancy sensors for at least 75% of the connected lighting load.

Equipment and Appliances (1–2 points)

·· ENERGY STAR Equipment and Appliances (1–2 points)
Install ENERGY STAR appliances, office equipment, electronics, and commercial food service equipment
(HVAC, lighting, and building envelope products are excluded from this credit) or performance equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.. Calculate their percentage of the total (by rated-power) ENERGY STAR–eligible
products in the project. Points are awarded according to Table 3.

TABLE 3. Points for installing ENERGY STAR equipment and appliances

Percentage of ENERGY STAR products Points

70% 1

90% 2

RETAIL ONLY
All projects pursuing Option 2 must also comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of
total energy consumption for all process equipment.
176

BEHIND THE INTENT

See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Behind the Intent.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. REVIEW REQUIREMENTS FOR EA PREREQUISITE MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

·· Ensure that the related prerequisite will be achieved before pursuing the credit.
·· Follow the initials steps of the prerequisite.
·· The option pursued in the prerequisite must also be pursued in the credit.

STEP 2. DECIDE WHETHER TO PURSUE ADDITIONAL POINTS

Review the list prepared for the prerequisite to identify any potential upgrades to systems and
components within the tenant space or to base building systems and equipment that serve the project.
·· Early in design, determine mandatory and prescriptive requirements for any base building system
upgrades requested by the tenant to ensure that these upgrades will meet the credit requirements
and, if pursuing Option 1, to establish the baseline against which energy savings can be calculated.
·· During the design process, project teams may discover that additional savings can be achieved more
easily than originally expected. Revisit decisions made earlier in design to identify any additional low-
effort and low-cost alternatives.

Option 1. Tenant-Level Energy Simulation

EA

STEP 1. REVIEW CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Read this credit’s requirements and referenced standards before beginning the simulation. If pursuing the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Integrative Process Credit, identify the scope of the energy analysis to determine how to coordinate the
overall model development.

STEP 2. CONFIRM ENERGY USE TARGET FOR TENANT SPACE

Ensure that the energy use intensity (EUI) target developed for the prerequisite is based on all energy
used within the space, whether or not it will be metered at the tenant level. For credit compliance, the
target must be established as EUI in kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of source
energy use. The EUI should account for the following energy uses in the tenant space:
·· Lighting
·· Receptacle, appliance, and process loads
·· HVAC and service water heating
·· The tenant space’s portion of fans, air-handling units, furnaces, chillers, boilers, and other components
of the base building’s HVAC and service water-heating energy system

STEP 3. ANALYZE EFFICIENCY MEASURES

Determine whether preliminary energy models will be prepared, as outlined in EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance. A preliminary model may be prepared to satisfy the credit requirement for analysis
of energy efficiency measures and can help the team estimate the energy implications of early design
alternatives.
·· A concept model prepared for compliance with the Integrative Process credit can form the basis for
the preliminary energy model.
·· Project teams must perform an analysis of efficiency measures. Past analyses of similar buildings or
published data, such as the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guides (AEDGs), may also be used to
guide decision making in lieu of a preliminary energy model, though the results will be less project-
specific.
 177

STEP 4. MODEL POTENTIAL HVAC SYSTEM TYPES, IF APPLICABLE

Create an energy model of the proposed design, or expand the scope of the preliminary model, to
analyze HVAC system alternatives early in the design process.

STEP 5. UPDATE PROPOSED ENERGY MODEL

Add details to the proposed model to reflect changes that may affect energy performance compared
with the required ASHRAE 90.1–2010 baseline.

STEP 6. UPDATE PROPOSED AND BASELINE ENERGY MODELS BASED ON FINAL DESIGN
DOCUMENTS
Update the proposed and baseline energy models to reflect final construction details and specifications
(see Further Explanation, Finalizing the Energy Models for Credit Compliance) and review the table of
common mistakes to avoid (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation,
Common Issues with Energy Modeling).

STEP 7. DETERMINE ENERGY COST SAVINGS

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost savings.
·· Apply any savings from on-site renewable energy systems after minimum compliance has been
demonstrated.
·· If taking credit for renewable systems serving the base building, provide documentation showing that
the energy is not double-counted.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance

STEP 1. EVALUATE BASE BUILDING SYSTEMS FOR AEDG COMPLIANCE

Determine whether one of the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides is applicable to the

EA
base building.
Choose the appropriate AEDG for the base building type (office, retail, K–12 schools, and hospitals)
and review the floor area requirements. AEDG criteria apply to the base building property, not the
tenant space. (Exception: Building opaque envelope and glazing system options may be applied to the

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

tenant space using the AEDG if the building meets all AEDG Criteria except the gross floor area. For
example, an office space in a 120,000 ft2 office building may document points for meeting the AEDG
prescriptive opaque envelope and glazing system requirements even though the building gross area
exceeds the 100,000 ft2 AEDG criteria).
·· Points for the base building may be achieved by a project that meets the AEDG prescriptive
requirements for some or all of the following building systems: opaque envelope, glazing systems,
and base building HVAC equipment serving the tenant space.
·· If the project team plans to upgrade any of these systems, evaluate the possibility of meeting
AEDG requirements (see Further Explanation, Base Building AEDG Compliance).
·· Projects are eligible to earn points for existing base building systems that already meet the criteria,
without additional upgrades. For example, if the vertical glazing installed as part of the base building
meets the AEDG requirements, the project can earn points without needing to upgrade the glazing.

STEP 2. DECIDE WHICH TENANT-SPECIFIC STRATEGIES TO PURSUE

Use the AEDG to identify potential energy-saving measures for the tenant space. Possible targets
typically include HVAC systems and controls, interior lighting and controls, and equipment and
appliances. All projects are eligible to pursue these measures, regardless of whether any AEDGs apply
to the base building.
·· HVAC zoning and controls opportunities often depend on the base building system; however, most
standard systems allow for the addition of thermostats, occupant sensors, and carbon dioxide (CO2)
sensors, which can contribute toward credit points (see Further Explanation, Tenant HVAC Zoning and
Controls).
·· ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010 expands on the lighting controls required in previous versions; the
updated mandatory requirements must be incorporated when the project team selects lighting control
strategies.
·· Retail projects must meet additional requirements for process equipment.
178

FURTHER EXPLANATION

FINALIZING THE ENERGY MODELS FOR CREDIT COMPLIANCE

Update the proposed model based on the information and specifications for systems, assemblies, and equipment
in the final construction documents (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation,
Finalizing the Energy Models). Ensure that all changes made to the design have been captured in the model. If changes
occur during construction that could affect efficiency measures, the model information will have to be updated
accordingly. Value engineering exercises may affect energy efficiency as well as credit achievement.
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for receptacle and process loads. These loads should be
modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the tenant space (see EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Exceptional Calculation Method).
Verify the final energy cost savings. Evaluate the energy savings by end use for reasonableness based on the
differences in the modeling inputs between the baseline and proposed models. Ensure that renewable energy savings
have been properly credited (see Further Explanation, Applying Renewable Energy Savings).

APPLYING RENEWABLE ENERGY SAVINGS

Only projects pursuing Option 1 of this credit may count savings from renewable energy systems, whether owned by
the tenant or installed as part of the base building, provided those systems meet the definition of on-site renewable
energy in ASHRAE 90.1-2010. Not all systems eligible for EA Credit Renewable Energy Production will be eligible for
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance under ASHRAE 90.1-2010.
Calculate the renewable energy produced by the tenant space system, or ask the base building’s owner about the
total amount of energy generated by the system and the ownership of the environmental attributes, then determine
the tenant space’s share. Convert this value into the equivalent cost using either utility rates or virtual energy rates.
See EA Credit Renewable Energy Production.
EA

Apply the equivalent cost directly to the energy model through the simulation software, or subtract it from the
final energy cost savings calculation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

BASE BUILDING AEDG COMPLIANCE

Use the climate type determined for prerequisite compliance to find the criteria for the project in the AEDG.
For the building envelope, confirm through contractor submittals and commissioning documents, if available,
that envelope components meet AEDG requirements. Design documents are not sufficient because value
engineering or other decisions may have changed what was originally specified.
For HVAC equipment, submittals and commissioning documents are good sources for confirming equipment
efficiency; it may also be possible to determine efficiencies directly from equipment nameplates.

TENANT HVAC ZONING AND CONTROLS

The types of controls that can be used to meet credit requirements differ based on the dominant loads, space uses,
and type of HVAC equipment installed.

Interior private offices or interior nondensely occupied specialty use spaces. A separate thermal control for
each space is sufficient because the space demand is related to internal loads (lighting, occupants, and plug loads).
When the occupant leaves the space, particularly if the space has lighting occupant sensors and ENERGY STAR
computing equipment, the thermostat senses a change in demand and modulates the HVAC system in response.

Perimeter offices or perimeter nondensely occupied specialty use spaces. A separate thermal control for each
space paired with an occupant-sensing or CO2-sensing device is necessary. Perimeter spaces have both envelope
loads and internal loads, and the HVAC system would respond minimally to changes in space occupancy without the
additional controls.
 179

Densely occupied specialty use spaces (e.g., conference rooms). A separate thermal control for each space,
paired with a CO2- or occupant-sensing device used to provide demand-controlled ventilation or to reset the
temperature setpoint when the space is unoccupied, is necessary. 

VAV systems. Supply air diffusers equipped with room thermostats are appropriate in lieu of a separate thermal
zone for each private office or nondensely occupied specialty use space.
·· The system should be capable of modulating AHU and zone minimum supply volume below 0.30 cfm/ft2 (1.52
L/s/m2) of supply volume for standard VAV terminals, or below 22.5% of the peak design flow rate for fan-
powered VAV boxes.
·· Occupant-sensing or demand-controlled ventilation should be employed to achieve the specified minimum
supply volumes in spaces where these minimum supply volumes are lower than the minimum outdoor air
required for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. 
·· Include controls for fan static pressure reset in the control system.

VRF systems, fan coils, or packaged single-zone systems. Set the fan coil or system fan that serves the room to
cycle on and off with loads or, for multispeed fans, to operate on the lowest setting when the space is unoccupied. 

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
Option 2, Prescriptive Compliance. Comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of
total energy consumption for all process equipment.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems
See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.

EA
INTERNATIONAL TIPS

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Option 1. Tenant-Level Energy Simulation. If ASHRAE 90.1 is not applicable, Option 1 requirements can be met with
a USGBC-approved equivalent standard.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance. A project outside the U.S. may install products that are not labeled under the
ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the ENERGY STAR
website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date of their
purchase.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
180

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Appendix G energy modeling inputs X

Input and output reports from modeling software X

Renewable energy (if applicable) X

Exceptional calculations (if applicable) X

Energy consumption and demand for each end use and fuel type X

Fuels rates X

Target Finder results and summary X

Lighting power density calculations X

ENERGY STAR appliance percentage X

Building envelope characteristics (if applicable) X

Base building HVAC equipment efficiencies (if applicable) X

HVAC control devices and locations (if applicable) X

Lighting control devices and locations (if applicable) X

Retail projects only: list of process equipment efficiencies X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. See the related prerequisite for related credit tips.
EA

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings:
ashrae.org

Standard 90.1–2010 User’s Manual: ashrae.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov

COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Achieve 32% savings.

DEFINITIONS
See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
 181

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Advanced Energy
Metering
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1–2 points)

Retail (1–2 points)
Hospitality (1–2 points)

INTENT

To support energy management and identify opportunities for

EA
additional energy savings by tracking building-level and system-level
energy use.

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. METERING (1 POINT)

Install new or use existing tenant-level energy meters to provide tenant-level data representing total tenant energy
consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass, etc.). Utility-owned meters are
acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if
metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification. At a minimum, energy
consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the space changes ownership or lessee.

OPTION 2. ADVANCED METERING (2 POINTS)

Install advanced energy metering for the following:
·· all energy sources used in the tenant space; and
·· any individual energy end uses that represent 10% or more of the total annual consumption of the tenant
space.
182

The advanced energy metering must have the following characteristics.

·· Meters must be permanently installed, record at intervals of one hour or less, and transmit data to a remote
location.
·· Electricity meters must record both consumption and demand. Whole-building electricity meters should
record the power factor, if appropriate.
·· The data collection system must use a local area network, building automation system, wireless network, or
comparable communication infrastructure.
·· The system must be capable of storing all meter data for at least 18 months.
·· The data must be remotely accessible.
·· All meters in the system must be capable of reporting hourly, daily, monthly, and annual energy use.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 183

BEHIND THE INTENT

Disparities between how buildings are designed to operate and how they actually perform are common. Even green
buildings exhibit this gap between projected and actual performance. Numerous factors can explain the incongruity:
flaws with energy modeling, inadequate commissioning, inaccurate assumptions regarding occupants’ behavior,
lack of coordination during the transition from construction to operations, or the everyday operation of the building
systems. To reduce such disparities, USGBC collects and analyzes performance data, comparing performance across
the LEED portfolio to identify common traits among high and low performers, then shares the findings to help LEED
registrants improve performance.
This credit encourages energy metering so that tenants can track consumption over time and identify and
address variations in usage patterns.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select one option

·· Option 1 is for project teams that pursue tenant-level metering only.
·· Option 2 is achievable if the project has sophisticated energy systems and/or a large tenant space with
its own HVAC system; the team must first complete Option 1.

Option 1. Tenant-Level Metering

EA
STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL ENERGY SOURCES THAT SERVE TENANT SPACE
Identify all external sources of energy delivered to the tenant. Sources of energy that must be metered
include all energy supplied by a utility provider or base building central plant, such as the following:

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

·· Electricity
·· Natural gas, synthetic natural gas, propane, fuel oil, diesel fuel, other fossil fuels
·· Biofuels
·· District or base building chilled water, steam, and hot water
Base building service water heating does not need to be metered.
This option does not require metering of locally generated sources of energy that are dedicated to the
project space, such as the following:
·· Solar photovoltaic- generated electricity
·· Wind-generated electricity
·· Solar hot water generation for domestic hot water or heating hot water
This option also does not require tenant-level metering of the energy consumption associated with
shared components of Air Handling Units or DX units serving both the project space and areas outside of
the project space such as:
·· Dedicated or 100% outside air systems
·· Multiple-zone recirculating systems
·· VRF outdoor units
Any components of the shared AHU or DX system that exclusively serve the project space must be
included in the tenant metered energy, such as:
·· • VAV fan-powered terminals (including the electricity from fans or electric heating coils, and any hot
water from hot water coils)
·· VRF indoor units
·· 4-pipe fan coil units (including the fan electricity, the chilled water, and the hot water)
184

STEP 2. DETERMINE SCOPE OF UTILITY AND LANDLORD-PROVIDED METERING

Determine whether the energy provided to the tenant space is metered by one or more utility companies
or whether the landlord has installed submetering for the tenant space, per Option 1 requirements.
Ensure that the area to be served by the meters aligns with the tenant space.
A utility company’s or landlord’s meter is acceptable if it provides monthly energy consumption data or if
staff can read its monthly cumulative energy usage directly.

STEP 3. DETERMINE NUMBER, TYPE AND LOCATION OF ADDITIONAL METERS

If the project includes energy sources that are not metered by a utility or the landlord, install submeters
that will provide the required data.
·· Projects may use a single meter at the energy source service entrance to the tenant space or multiple
submeters that account for all tenant space energy use in aggregate.
·· Select locations with easy access for reading and/or maintenance.
·· There are no requirements for the type of meters except that they be permanent (see Further
Explanation, Meter Selection).
·· Meters installed by the owner must be maintained and calibrated per manufacturer’s
recommendations.

STEP 4. TRACK ENERGY CONSUMPTION

Begin tracking energy use when the project achieves LEED certification or at occupancy, whichever
occurs first.
·· Measure and record energy consumption on at least a monthly basis.
·· Consider tracking space occupancy, use and maintenance concurrently to help place energy use data
in context and understand anomalies in usage patterns.

STEP 5. SHARE ENERGY CONSUMPTION DATA

The project owner must commit to sharing with USGBC the energy use data in one of the following ways:
·· USGBC-approved data template
·· Third-party data source
EA

If the energy consumption associated with shared AHUs is excluded from the total energy consumption,
details regarding the equipment excluded must be reported as part of the data sharing.
To see the most recent list of data-sharing pathways, visit USGBC’s credit library, at usgbc.org/credits.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2. Advanced Metering

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ENERGY SOURCES THAT REQUIRE ADVANCED METERING

Advanced metering must be installed for the following sources of energy delivered to the project:
·· The same sources of energy described in Option 1. Tenant Level Metering.
·· Energy generated on-site and dedicated to the tenant space, including renewable sources (e.g., wind
turbines, photovoltaic panels, solar thermal panels, geothermal) and nonrenewable sources (e.g., fossil
fuel–burning generators, microturbines).

STEP 2. IDENTIFY ENERGY END USES THAT REQUIRE ADVANCED ENERGY METERING
Determine the type and quantity of advanced meters necessary to capture all individual end uses that
represent 10% or more of the tenant space’s total annual energy consumption (see Further Explanation,
Determining Major End Uses).
·· Projects that used modeling to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1) must
use the simulation results to determine which end uses must be metered.
·· Projects that followed a prescriptive pathway for EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2) should use historical data from buildings with similar design and operational characteristics.
 185

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT ADVANCED METERING SYSTEM

Design and install an advanced metering system.
·· Refer to the credit requirements for types of equipment, measurement frequency, communication
protocols, and data storage requirements (see Further Explanation, Meter Selection).
·· Locate the meters to capture the usage of major end users (see Further Explanation, Electricity
Metering Strategies).
·· Install and calibrate the meters according to the manufacturers’ recommendations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

DETERMINING MAJOR ENERGY END USES

Defining appropriate energy end uses is crucial to the success of an advanced energy metering program and energy
management plan. Low data granularity, such as with whole-building energy data, will not help a building operator or
tenant understand or identify sources of anomalies in energy consumption and does not meet the intent of this credit.
Extreme granularity, achieved by metering every piece of equipment in a building, may be cost prohibitive
because of the quantity of equipment and the data storage capacity required. In addition, too much information may
overwhelm an energy manager and may hamper the effectiveness of an energy management program.
Identifying major energy end uses for the tenant space is the first step in choosing what to meter. End uses are
often classified as systems composed of discrete pieces of equipment that can be metered together. For example, for
a tenant space:
·· Chilled water meter
·· Hot water meter

EA
·· Air-handling system: supply fan, return fan, damper motors

Some systems may not be easily segregated by function. A common example is a rooftop unit (RTU), a single
packaged piece of equipment that can provide the cooling, heating, and air handling but is cost and space prohibitive

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

to submeter. Therefore, metering the entire RTU (or metering each fuel supplying the RTU, if there is more than
one) is an acceptable way to achieve this credit.
The metering strategy for systems that serve the same basic function, such as multiple built-up air-handling units
serving a tenant office space spanning several floors, or multiple RTUs serving a retail tenant, is left to the discretion
of the project team. Examples of options for submetering these systems include the following:
·· Meter all similar systems together. This strategy is appropriate for multiple systems that serve the same type of
occupant and operate according to the same schedule.
·· Meter all similar systems separately. This strategy is appropriate if each system serves a different type of
occupancy group or has a different operating schedule.
·· Meter similar systems by grouped occupancy type or operating schedule. This strategy is a combination of the
above.

Choosing what equipment and components to group requires a balance between keeping the project costs on budget
while ensuring that robust data are available for future decision making.

Examples of typical end uses for a commercial office tenant that may require advanced metering include the following:
·· Receptacle equipment
·· Interior lighting
·· Space heating
·· Space cooling
·· Fans

Energy modeling software that is acceptable for EA Credit Minimum Energy Performance produces a report of
energy consumption for a standard set of end uses. Some programs also allow the user to virtually meter additional
186

end uses. An energy model completed in the design phase of the project will enable the metering system to be
integrated into design drawings and project specifications. The engineer of record may enlist the energy modeling
professional to help identify and specify the number and location of meters.
If the project team does not conduct energy modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance, the end uses to meter can be estimated by referencing the Commercial Building Energy Consumption
Survey (2003) End-Use Consumption Tables for Non-Mall Buildings or End-Use Consumption Tables for All Buildings.

SHARED BUILDING AHUS, OUTDOOR DX UNITS, OR RENEWABLE ENERGY GENERATION

SYSTEMS
Tenant-level metering of end-uses may not be feasible for tenants that have shared Air Handling Units or renewable
generation systems. The following path may be used to document compliance for shared systems.

Option 1. Tenant-Level Metering

This option does not require tenant-level metering of the energy consumption associated with shared Air Handling
Units, shared renewable systems, or shared DX units serving both the project space and areas outside of the project
space. This option also does not require metering for renewable generation systems allocated to the project space.

Option 2. Advanced Metering

For shared air handling units, and/or shared renewable energy generation systems with renewable energy allocated
to the project space:
·· Provide documentation showing that the Building complies with LEED BD&C requirements for Advanced
Energy Metering (either by uploading the BD&C LEED Review report for the building showing the credit has
been approved, or by uploading the required submittals for LEED BD&C for the building). The building-level
documentation may be provided only for shared systems that represent more than 10% of the building energy
consumption (e.g. heating, cooling, service water heating), and does not need to be provided for tenant energy
EA

sources or end-uses that are entirely contained within the project space (e.g. interior lighting, receptacle
equipment, etc.).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

METER SELECTION
The accuracy of available commercial meters and submeters varies widely. Select meters based on the level of
accuracy required for energy management purposes.
It is recommended that submeters that may be used for revenue purposes conform to the applicable revenue-
grade accuracy.
When locating meters, consider any physical installation requirements for meter location (e.g., straight lengths
of piping). Incorrect application or installation of a meter can reduce measurement accuracy. 
Ensure that staff responsible for installing and maintaining equipment and using the data have input into the
meter selection
The project owner is responsible for maintaining and calibrating meters per the manufacturers’ recommendation.

ELECTRICITY METERING STRATEGIES

The number and location of electrical meters depends on the layout of a project’s electrical panels.
If major energy-using systems are segregated by panel, energy consumption can be measured at the panel level
and fewer sub-meters will be required (Figure 1).
Individual branch circuit meters can be avoided if over 90% of the panel’s power is directed to a single end use.
For example, if a panel is shared by the air-handling system and mechanical room but the lighting accounts for less
than 10% of the power load of the panel, then the individual lighting branch circuits do not need to be metered.
If multiple diverse end uses are connected to the same panel, individual branch circuits must be metered in order
to extract the individual energy consumption of each (Figure 2). Submetering individual branch circuits will be an
additional cost.
If the majority of a panel serves one system type, subtraction metering may be used. This strategy requires
metering of the entire panel as well the individual branch circuits for minority end uses. The energy consumption
 187

of the majority end use is then determined by subtracting the minority end uses from the total panel consumption
(Equation 1, Figure 3).

EQUATION 1. Example subtraction metering

Lighting energy consumption Total panel energy Water heater energy Conference room fan powered box
(Major panel end use) = (Panel meter) – (Branch circuit meter 1) – (Branch circuit meter 2)

Figure 1. Power panel that serves single end use: single submeter

EA
ADVANCED ENERGY METERING
Figure 2. Panel that serves diverse end uses: one submeter for each branch circuit

Figure 3. Panel that serves one majority use: one meter for panel and one meter for branch circuits for minority uses
188

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Confirmation that tenant-level meters have been installed for all energy sources, except shared AHUs or
X
DX units.
Confirmation that tenant-level advanced meters have been installed for all energy sources, except shared
X
AHUs or DX units, and all end uses that represent more than 10% of total tenant energy use

List of all tenant-level advanced meters to be installed, including type, energy source metered X

Manufacturers’ cutsheets X

Controls drawings or single-line diagrams indicating all meters X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Project teams following Option 1, Tenant-Level Energy
EA

Simulation, must use the results of the simulation to determine which end uses represent 10% or more of the total
annual consumption of the tenant space. Project teams following Option 2, Prescriptive Compliance, can estimate
energy consumption by referencing the Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (2003), End-Use
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Consumption Tables for Non-Mall Buildings or End-Use Consumption Tables for All Buildings.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems and net metering will affect the kind of
energy meters installed for this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
revenue-grade meter a measurement tool designed to meet strict accuracy standards required by code or law.
Utility meters are often called revenue grade because their measurement directly results in a charge to the customer.
 189

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Renewable Energy
Production
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1–3 points)

Retail (1–3 points)
Hospitality (1–3 points)

INTENT

To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil

EA
fuel energy by increasing self-supply of renewable energy.

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

REQUIREMENTS
Use tenant renewable energy systems to offset the project’s energy cost. Calculate the project’s percentage of
renewable energy by the following equation:

Equivalent cost of usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total building annual energy cost

Use the project’s annual energy cost, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if Option 1
was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey
(CBECS) database to estimate energy use and cost.
The use of solar gardens or community renewable energy systems is allowed if both of the following
requirements are met.
·· The project owns the system or has signed a lease agreement for a period of at least 10 years.
·· The system is located with the same utility service area as the facility claiming the use.

Credit is based on the percentage of ownership or percentage use assigned in the lease agreement. Points are
awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for renewable energy

Percentage renewable energy Points

1% 1

3% 2

5% 3
190

BEHIND THE INTENT

Renewable energy generation can reduce carbon emissions and offer local environmental benefits by reducing air
pollution. Some renewable energy systems capture wind or sunlight; others usefully employ materials that might
otherwise be wasted. Renewable energy produced on site protects projects from energy price volatility and reliance
on the grid while reducing wasted energy lost in transmission. Ultimately, renewable energy production contributes
to reducing a country’s demand for imported energy.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. EXPLORE OPPORTUNITIES FOR RENEWABLES

Determine the most abundant renewable resources on site, such as sunlight, wind, or water, and explore
opportunities for using renewable fuels, such as waste wood or biomass (see Further Explanation,
Renewable Resource Considerations).

STEP 2. COMPARE REQUIREMENTS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Carefully evaluate the space requirements, costs, financial incentives, and efficiencies for each potential
technology.
·· Local funding, financing, and incentives for renewable generation projects may be available for certain
technologies and may be a significant factor.
·· Excess energy, beyond the project’s energy demand at a given point, can be sold to the utility
company (net metering). The owner receives the market rate, however, and cannot charge a premium
for the renewable energy. In effect, the grid serves as a storage system and frees the project from
EA

hosting a storage system on site.

·· Tying into an existing community system or creating a community system may lower cost barriers
through economies of scale, because unit costs may decrease as system sizes increase. Community
systems can also take advantage of time-shifted demand: one space that is occupied during the day
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

and another space that is occupied at night could both take advantage of the same biofuel-fired
heating system.
·· Renewable energy may be available from a third-party system, or the project team may enter an
arrangement in which a third party owns a system that serves the project. In such cases, project teams
must take additional steps to ensure that the arrangement continues for a set period of time and that
the renewable energy credits (RECs) are retained (see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy Systems
and Third Parties).
·· Some systems that are commonly considered renewable do not qualify for this credit (see Further
Explanation, Eligible Renewable Energy Systems).

STEP 3. SET RENEWABLE ENERGY TARGET

To establish the target renewable energy system size for the project, estimate the annual energy cost for
the project.
·· Projects that used modeling to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1) must
base annual energy cost on the simulation results (see Further Explanation, Example 1).
·· Projects that used the prescriptive path to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2) must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) data to estimate annual energy use and cost (see Further Explanation, Example 2).
·· Use either the maximum system size that can be accommodated in the project or the available budget
as the starting point to estimate the maximum number of points for this credit, or evaluate the energy
available from the existing base building system.
·· To qualify toward credit points, the environmental benefits associated with generated renewable
energy must be retained or, if sold, purchased in an equivalent amount (see Further Explanation,
Renewable Energy Certificates [RECs] and Carbon Offsets).
 191

STEP 4. DESIGN AND SPECIFY SYSTEM CRITERIA

Many resources are available, some for no or little cost, for planning and designing a renewable energy
system. Given basic information for the project, many manufacturers can complete the necessary
calculations for the project team. Teams will also find software tools that help in sizing. If pursuing EA
Credit Enhanced Commissioning, address commissioning of the system at this step.

STEP 5. CALCULATE RENEWABLE ENERGY COST CONTRIBUTION

Use Equation 1 to estimate the annual energy cost of the usable energy produced by the renewable
energy system and calculate the points available. Teams that used simulation to comply with EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance must use the results of the model in this calculation.

EQUATION 1. Percentage renewable energy cost contribution

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy cost =
Total estimated project annual energy cost

·· Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system less any transmission and conversion
losses, such as standby heat loss or losses when converting electricity from DC to AC.
·· The project may use the virtual energy rate or the actual utility rates (see Further Explanation,
Equivalent Cost for Renewable Energy).
Projects whose base building uses renewable energy are eligible to receive credit for the percentage of
its contribution. Use Equation 2 to determine this amount.

EQUATION 2. Equivalent cost of renewable energy from base building system

$ value of renewable
Equivalent cost of base % of base building energy

EA
building renewable energy = energy used in base x cost delivered to project
building

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

Similarly, projects whose base building is served by a district energy system (DES) using renewable
energy are eligible to receive credit for the percentage of its contribution. Use Equation 3 to determine
this amount (see Further Explanation, Example 3).

EQUATION 3. Equivalent cost of renewable energy with DES serving base building

$ value of % of DES energy

Equivalent cost of DES % of base building energy
renewable energy = renewable energy x delivered to x delivered to project
used at DES building

Projects generating renewable energy through a community or off-site facility have additional
documentation requirements for the criteria noted in the credit requirements.
192

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

RENEWABLE RESOURCE CONSIDERATIONS

Project teams may want to look for a building that already has a renewable energy system or whose owner may be
amenable to adding one. Possible cost-sharing opportunities may make the investment attractive to both parties.
A project team should use web resources and other tools available to determine the feasibility of renewable
systems, given the project site’s climate, context, and infrastructure (see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy
Tools). Consider the features of the site, such as solar availability, wind patterns, and other renewable energy sources,
and any seasonal or daily variations in its supply. Certain project types may have special opportunities: office or
university campuses typically have available land, for example, and warehouse projects may have large roof areas.
Match the project’s energy needs with renewable energy output when selecting a renewable system. For example,
a sunny site is a good candidate for solar thermal hot water, but this type of renewable resource is most cost-effective
if the project has a constant demand for hot water.
Daily and seasonal variations in loads may also factor into the investigation of renewable energy. For example, a
residential project with low day-time electricity demand may require battery storage to benefit from a photovoltaic
(PV) array; an office building with high daytime demand may not.
Existing energy systems may be able to switch to renewable fuels, such as natural gas instead of methane gas in a
boiler. In such cases, additional restrictions may apply (see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy Systems and Third
Parties).

RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS AND THIRD PARTIES

EA

Renewable Fuels Purchased Off-Site

Some renewable energy power generation systems that use fuels produced off site (e.g., landfill gas) can still be
eligible to receive points under this credit if these fuels are harvested and produced within the same utility service
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

area. In such a case, the project team must provide documentation showing the following:
·· The project has a minimum 10-year contract with the fuel provider.
·· The contract with the fuel provider includes both the fuel and all associated RECs.

On-Site Third Party Systems

In some cases, on-site renewable energy may be available from equipment, such as a PV array or wind turbine owned
by a third party. Project teams wishing to receive credit for such an arrangement must submit documentation,
including the agreement between the project owner and the power producer. The contract must last for at least
10 years, and the project owner must retain all environmental benefits from the renewable energy. Project teams
wishing to receive credit for such an arrangement must submit documentation, including the agreement between
the project owner and the power producer. The power purchase agreement must last for at least 10 years, and the
project owner must retain all environmental benefits from the renewable energy.

ELIGIBLE RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Allowable sources for renewable energy include the following:
·· Photovoltaic
·· Solar thermal
·· Wind
·· Biofuel (in some cases)
·· Low-impact hydroelectricity
·· Wave and tidal energy
·· Geothermal energy (in some cases)
 193

Some renewable energy systems do not meet the intent of the credit and are not eligible. Strategies like architectural
features, passive solar, and daylighting, for example, reduce energy consumption but are not eligible renewable
energy systems.
Geothermal energy, such as electricity generated from subterranean steam or heat generated from subterranean
steam or hot water, is eligible. However, geothermal energy used in conjunction with vapor compression cycles, as in
a ground-source heat pump, is not.
If a biofuel is used in a cogeneration plant that produces both electricity and heat, both of these energy uses count
as renewable energy. A biofuel used in a boiler to produce heat also qualifies. However, not all biofuels will meet the
intent of this credit. The following biofuels are ineligible:
·· Combustion of municipal solid waste
·· Forest biomass waste other than mill residue
·· Wood coated with paints, plastics, or laminate
·· Wood treated for preservation with materials containing halogens, chlorine compounds, halide compounds,
chromated copper arsenate, or arsenic; if more than 1% of the wood fuel has been treated with these
compounds, the energy system is ineligible.

RENEWABLE ENERGY CERTIFICATES (RECS) AND CARBON OFFSETS

The environmental benefits from renewable energy generation are certified and tracked through renewable energy
certificates (RECs). A third party ensures that a specific amount of power was generated by a renewable source. By
purchasing RECs, a project that is using nonrenewable energy can still stimulate demand for green power.
Carbon offsets allow buildings or companies to fund activities that decrease carbon emissions or remove carbon
from the atmosphere. Carbon offset projects include reforestation, carbon sequestration, energy efficiency projects,
and land-use changes.
Generating renewable energy has both environmental and financial benefits, and projects must retain both
benefits to be eligible for this credit. Projects with ownership of renewable energy generation have the option to

EA
sell the RECs associated with their renewable energy generation. Some utilities may grant a rebate to projects
that generate their own renewable energy and also require that they give up the rights to the RECs associated with
the generation. An on-site renewable generation project can still claim this credit by purchasing enough RECs or

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

offsets to make up for the RECs that were sold. In such cases, projects that are generating electricity are required
to purchase Green-e–certified RECs; projects that are generating heat or other nonelectric energy are required to
purchase Green-e Climate–certified carbon offsets.
Both RECs and carbon offsets are addressed in EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets.

EQUIVALENT COST OF RENEWABLE ENERGY

The equivalent cost of the usable energy system can be calculated in two ways, virtual rate or actual utility tariff plus
demand rates.
Virtual rate. The project team may use the virtual energy rate determined by the proposed energy model used
for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The virtual rate accounts for both consumption and demand charges.
Project teams that use the Energy Information Administration’s average energy prices must use the virtual rates to
determine the renewable energy system cost.
Actual rate plus demand. Calculate the expected savings in both consumption and demand charges, based on
the rates charged by the utility that serves the project. If a project is served by a utility that uses time-dependent
valuation to set rates, the team may use those rates but must provide hourly calculations for the value of generated
energy. Some energy modeling software may calculate the savings from renewable energy systems if the utility rates
include consumption, demand, time-dependent valuation, time-of-use, ratchets, and other factors.
For renewable energy sources priced on a basis other than per unit of energy, the project team must account for
all the costs associated with the source, such as delivery costs and annual fees. For example, a project that uses heat
generated from geothermal steam needs to account for all the equipment, maintenance, and labor costs associated
with the geothermal system throughout the year.
194

In addition to calculating the equivalent cost of the energy generated, project teams must also provide
calculations that show how much energy the renewable energy system will produce. With some technologies, like a
biofuel-fired boiler, energy modeling software can determine the amount of energy generated. In other cases, such
as PV or wind systems, the amount of energy generated may be determined by using an external calculation program
(see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy Tools). In either case, provide all assumptions and outputs associated with
the renewable energy calculations.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Project with complete energy modeling data
A proposed tenant retail project has completed its energy model for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, and
is working with the building owner to install a PV array on the roof. The project anticipates using 562,457 kWh of
electricity, with a virtual energy rate of $0.082 per kWh. Gas consumption is calculated as 29,650 therms, at a utility
rate of $0.675 per therm of natural gas. The total project annual energy cost is as follows:

Total cost = (Gas consumption x Gas rate) + (Electricity consumption x Electricity rate)

Total cost = (29,650 therms x $0.675/therm) + (562,457 kWh x $0.082/kWh)

Total cost = $20,013 + $46,121 = $66,134

The project has space on site for a 150-kW PV array. Based on calculations provided by the solar array installer, the
system will produce 218,789 kWh of electricity per year, after transmission and conversion losses. The project team
calculates the equivalent cost of the renewable energy generated:

Equivalent cost = (Units of renewable energy generated x Project utility or virtual rate for type of
energy generated)
EA

Equivalent cost = (218,789 kWh x $0.082/kWh) = $17,941

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The project can now calculate its percentage of renewable energy:

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total project annual energy cost

$17,941
% renewable energy =
$66,134

% renewable energy = 27%

Example 2. Project without energy modeling data

A proposed 75,000-square-foot office project is complying with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
through the prescriptive path but is also installing an on-site renewable energy system. In order to achieve this
credit, the team must determine its total annual energy cost. The project will have gas and electric service. Local
utility rates are $1.10 per therm of natural gas and $0.09 per kWh of electricity. Using data from CBECS (Table 1), the
project can estimate its annual energy consumption by fuel type.
Projects with multiple space types should calculate energy consumptions for each space type separately based on
Table 2.
 195

TABLE 2. CBECS building energy intensity data

Total energy consumption (CBECS Total electric energy consumption Total nonelectric energy
Table C3) (CBECS Table C14) consumption
Building type

kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2 kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2 kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2

Education 83.1 262.2 11 118.4 45.5 143.6

Food sales 199.7 630.1 49.4 531.8 194.6 614

Food service 258.3 814.9 38.4 413.3 127.4 401.9

Health care
249.2 786.2 27.5 296.0 155.5 490.6
inpatient

Health care
94.6 298.5 16.1 173.3 39.6 124.9
outpatient

Lodging 100 315.5 13.5 145.3 53.9 170.1

Retail (nonmall) 73.9 233.2 14.3 153.9 25.1 79.2

Enclosed and strip

102.2 322.4 22.3 240.0 26.2 82.7
malls

Office 92.9 293.1 17.3 186.2 34 107.3

Public Assembly 93.9 296.3 12.5 134.6 51.3 161.9

EA
Public order and
115.8 365.3 15.3 164.7 63.5 200.3
safety

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

Religious worship 43.5 137.2 4.9 52.7 26.9 84.9

Service 77 242.9 11 118.4 39.5 124.6

Warehouse and
45.2 142.6 7.6 81.8 19.3 60.9
storage

Other 164.4 518.7 22.5 242.2 87.6 276.4

Electricity cost is estimated as follows:

Electricity cost = (Electricity kWh/ft2 for space type x Project area x Project electricity rate)

Electricity cost = (17.3 kWh/ft2 x 75,000 ft2 x $0.09/kWh)

Electricity cost = $116,775

The project gas cost can be estimated in the same manner:

Gas cost = (Nonelectric kBtu/ft2 for space type x Project area x (1 Therm / 100 kBtu) x Project gas
rate)

Gas cost = (34 kBtu/ft2 x 75,000 ft2 x (1 Therm / 100 kBtu) x $1.10 / Therm)

Gas cost = $28,050

196

The project’s total annual energy cost is the sum of the electricity and gas costs, or $144,573. The building site has
space for a 70-kW solar array, which is estimated to produce 92,254 kWh of electricity per year, after transmission and
conversion losses. The project’s equivalent cost of usable energy is calculated as follows:

Equivalent cost = (Units of renewable energy generated x Project utility rate for type of energy generated)

Equivalent cost = (92,254 kWh x $0.09/kWh) = $8,303

The project can now calculate its percentage of renewable energy:

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total project annual energy cost

$8,303
% renewable energy =
$144,825

% renewable energy = 5.7%

Example 3. Project connected to a base building with renewables

A commercial office building contains a central chilled water plant that serves multiple tenant spaces. The central plant
has a dedicated photovoltaic array that provides a portion of the energy to the chilled water plant. The central plant uses
the equivalent of $100,000 of electricity generated from PV, and the project receives 25% of the chilled water output of
the chiller plant. The project team calculates the equivalent cost of renewable energy:

Equivalent cost = ($ value of renewable energy used at chiller plant x

EA

% of chiller plant energy delivered to tenant space)

Equivalent cost = ($100,000 x 25%)

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Equivalent cost = $25,000

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
On-site third
On-site Community
Documentation party system
system system
ownership

Renewable system rated capacity X X X

Calculations to determine energy generated X X X

Equivalent cost of renewable energy produced X X X

Documentation of annual energy costs X X X

Contract indicating duration X X

Documentation indicating percentage owned or leased of community system X

If selling RECs for on-site system, Contract and Green-e certification for REC or
X
carbon offset purchase
 197

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning.
All renewable energy systems dedicated to the project space must be commissioned to comply with the related
prerequisite and credit.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Renewable energy systems will contribute to achievement of the related
credit.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. All whole-building energy sources, including renewable energy sources,
must be submetered to comply with the related credit.

EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets. Renewable energy certificates, green power, and carbon offsets
purchased from outside vendors are addressed in the related credit; additional points are available for projects that
purchase them.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Solar gardens and community systems are eligible under certain conditions.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Center for Resource Solutions Green-e Program: green-e.org

Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS): eia.gov/consumption/commercial

EA
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

Meet 10% renewable energy generation.

DEFINITIONS
renewable energy energy sources that are not depleted by use. Examples include energy from the sun, wind, and
small (low-impact) hydropower, plus geothermal energy and wave and tidal systems.

renewable energy credit (REC) a tradable commodity representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated
from a renewable resource. RECs are sold separately from electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green power
by a user of conventionally generated electricity.

solar garden a shared solar array or other renewable energy system with grid-connected subscribers who
receive credit for the use of renewables using virtual net metering. Also known as a community renewable energy
system. (Adapted from solargardens.org)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

198
 199

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Enhanced Refrigerant
Management
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

INTENT

To reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the Montreal

EA
Protocol while minimizing direct contributions to climate change.

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

REQUIREMENTS

COMMERCIAL INTERIORS, HOSPITALITY

OPTION 1. NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW-IMPACT REFRIGERANTS (1 POINT)

Do not use refrigerants, or use only refrigerants (naturally occurring or synthetic) that have an ozone depletion
potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.

OR

OPTION 2. CALCULATION OF REFRIGERANT IMPACT (1 POINT)

Select refrigerants that are used in heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R) equipment
to minimize or eliminate the emission of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and climate change. The
combination of all new and existing base building and tenant HVAC&R equipment that serve the project must
comply with the following formula:
200

IP Units SI Units

LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 100 LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 13

Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 100 (IP units) Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP x 105 ≤ 13 (SI units)

LCODP = [ODPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life LCODP = [ODPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc ] / Life

LCGWP = [GWPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life LCGWP = [GWPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life

LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential
(lb CFC 11/ Ton-Year) (lb CFC 11/Ton-Year)

LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential
(lb CO2 /Ton-Year) (kg CO2 /kW-year)

GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 12,000 lb CO2 / lbr) (0 to 12,000 kg CO2 /kg r)

ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 0.2 lb CFC 11/lbr) (0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11/kg r)

Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%) Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%)

Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%) Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%)

Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.5 to 5.0 lbs of refrigerant per ton of gross Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.065 to 0.65 kg of refrigerant per kW of
AHRI rated cooling capacity) AHRI rated or Eurovent Certified cooling capacity)

Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type, Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type,
unless otherwise demonstrated) unless otherwise demonstrated)

For multiple types of equipment, calculate a weighted average of all base building HVAC&R equipment, using the
following formula:

IP UNITS SI UNITS

( )× ( )×
EA

∑ LCGWP + LCODP × 105 Qunit ∑ LCGWP + LCODP × 105 Qunit

≤ 100 ≤ 13
Qtotal Qtotal
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CALCLULATION DEFINITIONS FOR (IP UNITS) CALCLULATION DEFINITIONS FOR (SI UNITS)

∑
[( LCGWP + LCODP × 105
)× Qunit
] ≤ 100
∑
[( LCGWP + LCODP × 105
)× ]
Qunit

≤ 13
Qtotal Qtotal

Qunit = Gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of an individual HVAC Qunit = Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of an individual HVAC
or refrigeration unit (Tons) or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of all HVAC or Qtotal = Total Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of all HVAC or
refrigeration refrigeration (kW)

RETAIL

Meet Option 1 or 2 for all HVAC systems.

Stores with commercial refrigeration systems must comply with the following.
·· Use only non-ozone-depleting refrigerants.
·· Select equipment with an average HFC refrigerant charge of no more than 1.75 pounds of refrigerant per 1,000
Btu/h (2.72 kg of refrigerant per kW) total evaporator cooling load.
·· Demonstrate a predicted store-wide annual refrigerant emissions rate of no more than 15%. Conduct leak
testing using the procedures in GreenChill’s best practices guideline for leak tightness at installation.

Alternatively, stores with commercial refrigeration systems may provide proof of attainment of EPA GreenChill’s
silver-level store certification for newly constructed stores.
 201

BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit addresses the two main threats to the environment posed by refrigerants: their ozone depletion potential
(ODP) and global warming potential (GWP).
As is well known, chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), and other ozone-depleting
substances commonly used in refrigerants contribute to the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. Yet
refrigerants released into the atmosphere also contribute to global climate change, having a disproportionately large
effect compared with other greenhouse gases. For example, HCFC-22 contributes to warming at 1,780 times the
potency of an equal amount of carbon dioxide.
However, trade-offs also exist between the above concerns and energy use. Alternatives to CFC and HCFC
refrigerants, such as HFC-410A, have a lower GWP when directly released, but their use may require more energy—
which also affects climate. Conversely, variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems may improve energy efficiency but
have a higher refrigerant charge.
Careful consideration of the refrigerant requirements of energy systems and appliances can improve
performance and reduce operating cost. Refrigerants vary in operating pressure, material compatibility,
flammability, and toxicity. Operating pressure and material compatibility are particularly critical factors to take into
account when refrigerants in existing equipment are replaced.
The refrigerant impact calculation addresses the overall effect of each refrigerant’s ODP and GWP combined by
accounting for these interrelated factors.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

EA
STEP 1. GATHER INFORMATION ON SYSTEMS AND REFRIGERANTS IN PROJECT
All refrigerant-using equipment part of systems serving the project space, including those that are part
of the base building systems, must be included in the credit calculations. Identify all HVAC&R equipment
that contains refrigerant and record the refrigerant charge and type for existing and new units. Projects

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

that retain CFCs past initial occupancy, even if using a phase-out plan to meet the requirements of EA
Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant management, are ineligible for this credit.
·· Small systems with less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerants, such as individual water fountains
or stand-alone refrigerators, do not need to be included in credit calculations.
·· Unit charge information is often not available for new equipment until contractor submittals are
provided (particularly for split systems) because the charge depends on the length of refrigerant
piping runs.
·· If a district energy system (DES) serves the project, data for the refrigerant-using equipment in the
DES must be collected.
·· Consider incorporating the credit requirements and equations into project specifications.

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OPTION

·· Option 1 is for projects that have no refrigerants and projects with refrigerants that have an ODP of
zero and a GWP of less than 50 (see Further Explanation Designing for No Refrigerants or Low-Impact
Refrigerant Use). These projects achieve the credit; no additional steps are required.
·· Option 2 is for projects whose refrigerants exceed the Option 1 limit.

Option 2. Refrigerant Impact Calculation

STEP 1. CALCULATE REFRIGERANT IMPACT OF PROPOSED SYSTEMS

To determine the environmental effects of HVAC&R systems containing refrigerants, apply the following
assumptions.

Assume the ODP and GWP values listed in Table 1.

202

TABLE 1. Ozone depletion and global warming potentials of common refrigerants

Refrigerant ODPr GWPr Common building applications

Chlorofluorocarbons

CFC-11 1.0 4,680 Centrifugal chiller

CFC-12 1.0 10,720 Refrigerators, chiller
CFC-114 0.94 9,800 Centrifugal chiller
CFC-500 0.605 7,900 Centrifugal chiller, humidifier
CFC-502 0.221 4,600 Low-temperature refrigeration

Hydrochlorofluorocarbons

HCFC-22 0.04 1,780 Air-conditioning, chiller

HCFC-123 0.02 76 CFC-11 replacement

Hydrofluorocarbons

HFC-23 ~0 12,240 Ultra-low-temperature refrigeration

HFC-134a ~0 1,320 CFC-12 or HCFC-22 replacement
HFC-245fa ~0 1,020 Insulation agent, centrifugal chiller
HFC-404A ~0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration
HFC-407C ~0 1,700 HCFC-22 replacement
HFC-410A ~0 1,890 Air-conditioning
HFC-507A ~0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration

Natural refrigerants

Carbon dioxide (CO2) 0 1.0

Ammonia (NH3) 0 0
Propane 0 3
EA

Assume equipment life according to Table 2. For any HVAC&R equipment not listed, assume an
equipment life of 10 years. Different values for equipment life may be substituted, with manufacturers’
documentation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For existing equipment, apply the default equipment life according to Table 2. The equation is based on
refrigerant impact spread over the life of the equipment; estimated remaining equipment life should not
be substituted because it would provide inaccurate results.

TABLE 2. Default equipment life

Equipment Default equipment life

Window air-conditioner, heat pump 10 years

Unitary, split, packaged air-conditioner, package heat pump 15 years
Reciprocating and scroll compressor, reciprocating chiller 20 years
Absorption chiller 23 years
Water-cooled packaged air-conditioner 24 years
Centrifugal chiller 25 years

Assume that refrigerant leakage rate (Lr) is 2% per year and end-of-life refrigerant loss (Mr) is 10%,
for all equipment types. No alternative values may be substituted for these percentages (see Further
Explanation, Calculations and Examples).
Refrigerant charge (Rc) is the ratio of the total refrigerant used in a piece of equipment to the total
cooling capacity of that equipment, expressed in pounds per ton or kilograms per kW. For example,
if a packaged air-conditioning unit uses 7 pounds of refrigerant and its cooling capacity is 5 tons, the
refrigerant charge is 1.4.

STEP 2. INCORPORATE DESIGN CRITERIA INTO PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

If calculations were performed during design, use the results to specify the maximum refrigerant
charge for the HVAC equipment. When the project is under construction, review equipment submittals
from the mechanical contractor to verify that the equipment and refrigerant charge meet the design
specifications.
 203

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
Weighted Average Refrigerant Impact for the Project Building:
The project team must develop a weighted average calculation based on both downstream and upstream equipment.
The weighted average is based on the entire downstream equipment capacity, but only the designed capacity of the
equipment being served by the base building central plant, not the entire capacity of the central plant.

EQUATION 1. Weighted average refrigerant impact

{ ( ) ( )
}
Project building Chilled water central Project building Project building
design chilled water × plant refrigerant + refrigerant systems’ × refrigerant
cooling load in tons impact score total capacity in tons impact score

Total combined capacity (tons):

Project building design chilled
Project building refrigerant + water cooling load in tons
systems’ total capacity in tons

For example, a project has 50 tons of packaged equipment with a refrigerant impact value of 100 per ton. The base
building central plant has a refrigerant impact value of 70 per ton and a total capacity of 1,000 tons. The project
also has a designed 50 tons of equipment served by the central plant. The weighted average impact is calculated as
follows:

{ ( ) ( )
}

EA
50 tons × 70 + 50 tons × 100

= 85 weighted average

( )
refrigerant impact

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

50 tons + 50 tons

OPTIMIZING HVAC SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE REFRIGERANT IMPACT

Avoiding equipment with a high refrigerant charge, such as multiple small packaged units or split systems, can
make this credit easier to achieve. Systems that use chillers or a central plant are more likely to meet the credit
requirements. If possible, incorporate indirect or direct evaporative cooling.
For renovations, consider retrofitting or replacing existing HVAC systems to minimize ODP and GWP
contributions. Assess whether equipment replacement or refrigerant conversion is economical. Equipment that
is easily accessible and has a high run time may be a candidate for refrigerant swap with a reasonable return on
investment.

EXAMPLES
Sample Calculation 1. Interior Office Space (SI)
The cooling equipment for a commercial office consists of the following systems:
·· Twelve 17.57-kW packaged HVAC units with HFC-410A for the open office
·· One 7.03-kW split system HVAC unit with HCFC-22 for a data room
·· One-3.51 kW window HVAC unit with HCFC-22 for a private office
204

SAMPLE CALCULATION. Interior Office Space (SI)

Inputs Calculations

Refrigerant
Tr Total LCGWP LCODP x 105 (LCGWP
atmospheric
Qunit Rc (kg/ Life Lr Mr Leakage (GWPr x 100,000 x + LCODP
Units Refrigerant GWPr ODPr impact =
(kW) kW) (yrs.) (%) (%) (Lr x Life Tr x Rc) / (ODPr x Tr x x 105 x N
LCGWP +
+Mr) Life Rc) / Life x Qunit
LCODP x105
12 17.57 R-410A 1 890 0 0.23 15 2 10 40% 11.59 0 11.59 2 443.64
1 7.03 R-22 1 780 0.04 0.43 15 2 10 40% 20.41 45.87 66.28 465.95
1 3.51 R-22 1 780 0.04 0.27 10 2 10 30% 14.42 32.4 46.82 164.34
Qtotal 221.38 Subtotal 3 073.93
Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = S (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit) / Qtotal 13.89

Lr = leakage rate Mr = refrigerant loss Qunit = cooling capacity of equipment Rc = refrigerant charge

Because the average refrigerant impact is greater than 13, the project does not earn the credit.

Sample Calculation 2. Interior Office Space with Variable Refrigerant Flow

The cooling equipment in an office building consists of four 8-ton outdoor VRF units. Each unit has a base refrigerant
amount of 16.5 pounds and an additional refrigerant amount of 2.7 pounds for distribution, which must be included.
The Rc for each unit is (16.5 pounds + 2.7 pounds) / 8 tons = 2.4 pounds/ton.

SAMPLE CALCULATION 2. Interior Office Space with Variable Refrigerant Flow

Inputs Calculations

Refrigerant
Tr Total LCGWP LCODP x 105
Rc atmospheric (LCGWP +
Qunit Life Lr Mr Leakage (GWPr x x 100,000
Units Refrigerant GWPr ODPr (lb/ impact = LCODP x 105
EA

(tons) (yrs.) (%) (%) (Lr x Life Tr x Rc) / (ODPr x Tr x

ton) LCGWP + x N x Qunit
+Mr) Life Rc) / Life
LCODP x105
4 8 R-410A 1,890 0 2.4 15 2 10 40% 120.96 0 120.96 3,871
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Qtotal 32 Subtotal 3,871

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = S (LCGWP + LCODP x 105) x Qunit) / Qtotal 120.96
Lr = leakage rate Mr = refrigerant loss Qunit = cooling capacity of equipment Rc = refrigerant charge

Becauseecause the average refrigerant impact is greater than 100, the project does not earn the credit.

DESIGNING FOR NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW-IMPACT REFRIGERANT USE

In some cases, cooling needs can be met without vapor compression HVAC equipment. This can be possible in
buildings that are designed for natural ventilation and have very low cooling loads. Optimizing the following non-
HVAC design elements can help reduce the project’s cooling load:
·· Glazing properties
·· Shading
·· Insulation
·· Lighting and equipment power density

Determine whether natural refrigerants like carbon dioxide, ammonia, or water can be used to meet cooling needs
or other project goals. Absorption chillers, for example, are compatible with refrigerants like ammonia, and carbon
dioxide is popular for low-temperature cooling applications.
Heat from the refrigeration process can be recovered for other uses, like service hot water heating. To reduce
peak cooling requirements for ventilation air, use air-side energy recovery.
 205

EVAPORATIVE COOLING
Another strategy for minimizing refrigerant charge is to incorporate direct or indirect evaporative cooling. Table 3
outlines the most favorable circumstances for this approach to refrigerant impact reduction.

TABLE 3. Evaporative cooling scenarios

Direct evaporative cooling Indirect evaporative cooling

Hot and dry climates with design wet-bulb temperatures 68°F Hot and dry climates with design wet-bulb temperatures 68°F
(20°C) or lower (20°C) or lower
Residential, light commercial, industrial or other spaces with low Pretreatment of outside air for systems with higher latent loads, such
latent heat gain as densely occupied office spaces, and need to control humidity

Indirect and direct evaporative cooling can be combined for greater efficiency. An indirect cooler lowers the
temperature of air and reduces the air’s moisture content; a direct cooler then cools the air further and restores
humidity to the air.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
For Retail HVAC systems, use the calculation methodology and assumptions listed for all projects.
Retail projects with commercial refrigeration systems may either follow the prescriptive criteria or pursue
certification through U.S. EPA GreenChill’s certification program for newly constructed stores. If pursuing EPA
certification, follow the certification steps outlined on the program website.
If following prescriptive requirements, have the commercial refrigeration equipment tested for leaks according
to the procedures outlined in GreenChill’s Best Practices Guideline for Leak Tightness at Installation. The leak
testing is required for GreenChill certification but the guidelines are applicable to any retail project, including
non-U.S. projects, regardless of whether the project is pursuing GreenChill certification. The installer is typically

EA
responsible for conducting leak testing after installation. Include requirements in the contract with the commercial
refrigerant installer. The commissioning scope may also include verification of proper leak testing, but this is not
required.
Non-Retail projects that have commercial refrigeration systems may follow the prescriptive criteria available

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

to retail projects for commercial refrigeration systems. Both these prescriptive criteria for the commercial
refrigeration systems and the credit requirements for the HVAC refrigerant-using systems must be met to achieve
credit compliance in this case.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems and Central Plants
If a project has only downstream refrigeration equipment, only that equipment must be included in the refrigerant
impact calculation. If a project has only upstream refrigeration equipment, only that equipment must be included in
the refrigerant impact calculation. If a project has both downstream and upstream refrigeration equipment, use the
following procedure to show credit compliance.
Complete two separate refrigerant impact calculations: one to calculate the refrigerant impact using only the
downstream equipment and another using only the upstream equipment.
If both calculations meet the credit requirements, the project team has demonstrated credit compliance. If
neither calculation meets the credit requirements, the project cannot achieve this credit. If one calculation fails but
the other passes, the project team may demonstrate compliance using the weighted average refrigerant impact (see
Further Explanation, Calculations).
206

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Option 1. Eligible.

Option 2. Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually. 

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Confirmation that only no or low-impact refrigerants are used X

Equipment type X
Equipment cooling capacity X
Equipment quantity X
Refrigerant type X
Refrigerant charge (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X
Equipment life (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X
Refrigerant charge calculations (for VRF systems only) X
Provide Refrigerant equipment schedule or GreenChill certification (commercial
X
refrigeration systems only)
Provide Leak Test Results (commercial refrigeration systems only) X
EA

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Sector-specific requirements have been added for commercial refrigeration equipment.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Alternatives to CFC and HCFC refrigerants, such as HFC-410A, have
lower refrigerant impacts but may require higher levels of energy use. Variable refrigerant flow (VRF) and some split
systems rarely meet the requirements of this credit because of the long refrigerant piping runs and the high quantity
of refrigerant needed.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
 207

DEFINITIONS
district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

natural refrigerant a compound that is not manmade and is used for cooling. Such substances generally have much
lower potential for atmospheric damage than manufactured chemical refrigerants. Examples include water, carbon
dioxide, and ammonia.

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.

EA
ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

208
 209

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Green Power and

Carbon Offsets
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1–2 points)

Retail (1–2 points)
Hospitality (1–2 points)

INTENT

To encourage the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions through

EA
the use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies and carbon
mitigation projects.

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

REQUIREMENTS
Engage in a contract for qualified resources that have come online since January 1, 2005, for a minimum of five years,
to be delivered at least annually. The contract must specify the provision of at least 50% or 100% of the project’s
energy from green power, carbon offsets, or renewable energy certificates (RECs).
Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the equivalent. RECs can only be used to mitigate the
effects of Scope 2, electricity use.
Carbon offsets may be used to mitigate Scope 1 or Scope 2 emissions on a metric ton of carbon dioxide–
equivalent basis and must be Green-e Climate certified, or the equivalent.
For U.S. projects, the offsets must be from greenhouse gas emissions reduction projects within the U.S.
Determine the percentage of green power or offsets based on the quantity of energy consumed, not the cost.
Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for energy from green power or carbon offsets

Percentage of total energy addressed by

Points
green power, RECs and/or offsets

50% 1

100% 2

Use the project’s annual energy consumption, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if
Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) database to estimate energy use.
210

BEHIND THE INTENT

The voluntary market can be an effective catalyst for encouraging energy generators and utility companies to
develop clean energy sources and help address climate change. Purchasing renewable energy certificates (RECs)
allows projects that use nonrenewable power to create market demand for renewable energy. Carbon offsets
allow projects or companies to fund activities that seek to decrease carbon emissions or remove carbon from the
atmosphere, such as methane abatement, energy efficiency projects, and reforestation or land-use changes.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. INVESTIGATE AVAILABLE OPTIONS

The possibilities for purchasing green power, RECs, and offsets will vary with the project’s location and
energy types. Consider the costs of various options.
·· Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the equivalent. Direct or local green power
may be available through local utility providers; review their websites for green power cost premiums.
·· Green power and RECs can be used only toward the electric energy use portion of the project’s annual
energy use (Scope 2, electricity). They cannot be applied toward nonelectric energy uses.
·· Carbon offsets must be Green-e Climate certified or the equivalent. Unlike RECs and purchased green
power, carbon offsets can be used toward both electric and nonelectric energy use.

STEP 2. CONDUCT COST-BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Undertake a cost-benefit analysis to understand the financial and environmental payback for the
available options. All carbon offsets are not the same. Some are associated with land-use development,
EA

others with energy efficiency projects. Teams are encouraged to purchase carbon offsets that align with
their environmental interests and values.

STEP 3. SET PROJECT GOAL FOR GREEN POWER OR CARBON OFFSETS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Review the credit point thresholds and establish the green power or carbon offset purchase goal for the
project. The offset goal is not a one-time purchase—it must be met for multiple consecutive years, as
indicated in the credit requirements.

STEP 4. CALCULATE ENERGY USE ASSOCIATED WITH SCOPE 1 AND SCOPE 2 EMISSION
CATEGORIES
Determine the total grid-generated annual energy use, based on the option selected in EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance.
·· Projects that used modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1)
must use the simulation results to determine the total annual electricity and nonelectricity energy use.
°° Exclude any site-generated electricity (e.g., wind turbines, photovotaics) and fuel (e.g., biogas) from
the total consumption amount, provided the project does not sell the on-site energy generated as
RECs.
°° Include as nonelectric energy any steam and chilled water purchased from the utility provider or a
third party and any fuel purchased for on-site electricity generation in the building (e.g., diesel for
gensets).
·· Projects that used the prescriptive pathway to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2) must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) database to estimate annual energy use (see EA Credit Renewable Energy
Production, Further Explanation, Table 2).
°° Exclude any site-generated electricity from the total annual electric energy use.
°° Use the total project area and appropriate energy use intensity (EUI) from the CBECS database to
calculate the projected electric and nonelectric annual energy use.
·· Net-zero tenant spaces—those anticipated to consume zero net energy on an annual basis— are
eligible to achieve 2 points under this credit without purchasing any additional renewable energy,
RECs, or carbon offsets, provided the project does not sell any RECs associated with the on-site
renewable energy production.
 211

STEP 5. CALCULATE REQUIRED GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

Use the project’s electricity and nonelectricity energy use totals to determine the required amount
of green power and/or carbon offsets to be purchased.
·· Projects that use green power or RECs must convert their annual grid-generated electricity use
to MWh.
·· Projects that use carbon offsets must convert their annual grid-generated electricity use to metric
tons of CO2e. For conversion factors and GHG emissions factors, see Further Explanation, Calculating
Greenhouse Gas Emissions.
·· All projects must convert their annual nonelectricity energy use to metric tons of CO2e.
·· Any combination of the above can be used to achieve either the 50% or the 100% threshold. If the
project goal is less than the 100% threshold, prorate the required amount accordingly.

STEP 6. OBTAIN PROPOSALS FROM GREEN-E PROVIDER OR EQUIVALENT AND MAKE

PURCHASE
Solicit proposals for green power, RECs, and/or carbon offsets from qualified Green-e providers, as
specified in the credit requirements and select a vendor.
·· The provider must provide confirmation of the date on which the qualified resources came online.
·· The contract must specify the purchasing goals and is valid for the duration indicated in the credit
requirements.
·· For U.S. projects, the offsets must come from greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions reduction projects
within the U.S.
·· If Green-e certified products are not available, equivalency of other products must be demonstrated
(see Further Explanation, Establishing Green-e Equivalency). Projects outside the U.S. that cannot find
local products that meet the Green-e standard or equivalent can still achieve this credit by purchasing
Green-e certified products from the U.S.

EA
FURTHER EXPLANATION

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Total qualifying energy use

Total qualifying
annual energy
use
=
{( Total annual
grid-based
electricity use
–
Total annual
site-generated
electricity ) (+
Total annual
fossil fuel use
–
Total annual
renewable
fuels use ) }
EQUATION 2. Percentage of energy purchased or offset

{ ( ) ( ) ( )
}
Quantity of Purchased Purchased
RECs in kWh green power carbon offsets
% Energy
purchased or = + +

( ) ( ) ( )
offset
Annual building Annual building GHG emissions
energy use in energy use in associated with project’s
kWh kWh annual energy use
212

EQUATION 3. Metric tons of CO2 equivalent, Fuel A

Metric tons of CO2

equivalent, Fuel A
= Annual use, Fuel A (kBtu) × Direct GHG emissions factor, Fuel A (mt CO2e ⁄ kBtu)

EQUATION 4. Metric tons of CO2 equivalent, electricity

Metric tons of CO2

equivalent, electricity
= Annual electricity
use (kWh)
× 3.412 (kBtu ⁄ kWh) × Indirect GHG emissions factor,
electricity (mt CO2e ⁄ kBtu)

ESTABLISHING GREEN-E EQUIVALENCY

Projects not using Green-e certified products must demonstrate the alternative’s equivalency to the quality
standards established for Green-e Energy and Green-e Climate products:
·· Green-e Energy National Standard v2.1, Sections II, III (excluding G), IV (excluding A), and V
·· Green-e Climate National Standard v2.0, Sections 4, 5, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, and 7

The accounting process and standards must be equivalent to Green-e products and address the following:
·· Verifiable chain of custody
·· Verifiable age of renewable energy
·· Tracking of GHG reductions from eligible projects
·· Mechanism to prevent double-counting
·· Third party–verified retail transaction
EA

For carbon offsets, retirement of an eligible credit alone is not equivalent to Green-e Climate certification.

CALCULATING GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

When calculating offsets, project teams must use the default emissions factors established by ENERGY STAR
Portfolio Manager for the appropriate fuel types (Tables 2 and 3). Using Equation 1, apply the default emissions
factor to the project’s annual fuel consumption to determine the project’s greenhouse gas footprint, expressed in
metric tons of CO2 equivalent (CO2e).

EQUATION 5. Project greenhouse gas emissions

GHG emissions (CO2e) = Consumption × CO2 emissions factor

where emissions factor = mass CO2 per mass or volume unit of fuel

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Determining compliance based on modeled energy use

A project team has used modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1).
According to the simulation results, the project’s annual electricity use is 5,077,667 kWh plus 5,750,000 kBtu of
natural gas use. To earn 1 point under this credit, the project team has two choices.
1. The project can purchase RECs for electricity consumption and carbon offsets for natural gas consumption. For
RECs, the team uses the following calculation:
5,077,667 kWh/yr x 50% = 2,538,834 kWh /yr
 213

For carbon offsets, the team uses this calculation:

5,775,000 kBtu/yr x (5.32 x 10-5 mtCO2e /kBtu) x 50% = 153.6 mtCO2e/yr

Projects are not required to cover 50% of its electricity use and 50% of its natural gas use, only 50% of total
energy use.
2. Alternatively, the project can purchase carbon offsets for all consumption (Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions). For
the carbon offsets to cover electricity use (Scope 2), the team performs the following calculation:
5,077,667 kWh/yr x (5.90 x 10-4 mtCO2e/ kWh) = 2995.8 mtCO2e/yr

For carbon offsets to cover natural gas use (Scope 1), the team uses this calculation:
5,775,000 kBtu/yr x (5.32 x 10-5 mtCO2e/kBtu) = 307.2 mtCO2e / yr

2995.8 + 307.2 = 3303 metric tons of CO2 equivalent. Thus, the project’s total carbon offsets are as follows:
3303 mtCO2e/yr x 50% = 1651.5 mtCO2e/yr

Example 2. Determining compliance using CBECS data

A project team has achieved EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance through the prescriptive pathway
(Option 2) and will therefore use CBECS data to estimate electricity and gas consumption. The project is a 10,000–
square-foot ground-floor retail space that uses both electricity (for cooling and equipment) and natural gas (for
heating and domestic hot water). The team is attempting to earn 2 points by covering 100% of the project’s energy
usage through RECs and offsets.
The team must estimate total electricity and natural gas use based on CBECS data for the retail space type, as
follows:

EA
Electricity: 10,000 ft2 x 14.3 kWh/ft2 = 143,000 kWh
Natural gas: 10,000 sf x 25.1 kBtu/ft2 = 251,000 kBtu

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

The emissions factor is applied as follows:
251,000 kBtu x 5.32 x 10-5 = 13.35 mtCO2e

To earn 2 points, the project must purchase Green-e certified green power equal to 143,000 kWh and must also
purchase carbon offsets for 13.35 metric tons of CO2 equivalent.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems and Central Plants
For projects using energy model Path 2 or 3, green power and offsets used in a DES or base building central plant may
contribute toward this credit for a connected space. For any projects using energy model Path 1, green power and
offsets used in a DES or central plant do not contribute.
Performance is based on the fraction of the project’s annual energy consumption that is supplied by green power
or made up for by carbon offsets. In the DES or central plant setting, this fraction depends in turn on the fraction of
plant energy that is supplied by the green power or offset, and the fraction of the model’s annual energy consumption
associated with the plant. For each thermal energy source provided to the project by the plant, calculate the green
power or offset contribution as follows:
1. Find the fraction of the annual DES or central plant energy use supplied by qualifying green power sources or
covered by offsets:
214

{ }{ }
Fraction of Thermal Quantity RECs or Quantity Carbon
Energy Source i from Green Power purchased Offsets purchased
= +
Green Power or covered Carbon equivalent
Electricity used to
by RECs/offsets (GS) of fuel used to
generate source, i
generate source, i

Total energy used to generate source, i

2. Find the fraction of the project’s annual energy consumption that is supplied by the DES or central plant’s
thermal energy source.
Fraction of building
Project energy supplied by Source, i
annual energy
consumption supplied
=
by source (BS), i Total project energy consumed

3. Multiply the two.

∑
Total Green Power or offset contribution from DES = i
GSi x BSi

4. Derive the project’s total annual energy consumption reported for EA Credit Green Power and Carbon
Offsets credit compliance from the proposed case modeling run of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance.

If green energy contributions from the DES/central plant are applied to the project, submit a letter from the plant or
EA

base building owner or operator verifying that the renewable energy is allocated specifically to the DES generation or
distribution equipment, and confirming that no renewable energy allocated specifically to the DES or central plant
building, if any (in a separate LEED application), is being counted toward the renewable energy contribution of the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

satellite project building or space. The letter must also confirm that no renewable energy is being double-counted
among any satellite projects (in separate LEED applications).
Projects without a Path 2 or 3 energy model may not take credit for renewable energy sources used for the DES
upstream of the project. However, credit may be taken for green power associated with the project itself. In this case,
project teams should follow the standard guidance provided.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Projects must use Green-e qualified products or demonstrate Green-e equivalency to achieve this credit.
Projects that wish to use a local benchmark based on source energy from their country’s national or regional
energy agency must submit proof that the local benchmark contains a statistically significant sample of the project
type being referenced and that the benchmarking process is repeatable. The benchmark should include at least
30 buildings of the project building type and the data should be weather normalized and account for internal and
external loads.
·· Additional information on the regressions and models used in CBECS can be found at eia.gov/emeu/cbecs/
tech_end_use.html to help determine whether a local baseline is equivalent to CBECS.
·· Projects outside the U.S. are not required to purchase products from the country in which the project is
located. Projects in Canada can either buy Green-e certified products or use RECs from Canadian facilities
that meet the eligible renewable definition and are generated at facilities certified by the EcoLogo Program
(ecologo.org).
·· Projects can use the WRI-WBCSD Greenhouse Gas Protocol Standards to calculate GHG emissions based on
GHG inventories for the project location.
 215

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Annual electricity and nonelectricity energy use calculation X

Calculations showing required REC, green power, carbon offsets for targeted point X
Purchase contract or letter of commitment showing REC, green power, or carbon offsets for targeted point threshold X
Green-e equivalent documentation, if not Green-e certified X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. The amount of the project’s proposed energy use, as determined
in Option 1 of the related prerequisite, can be used to calculate the green power, RECs, or offsets that will be
contracted.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Implementing energy efficiency measures that reduce total annual
energy use will reduce the amount of RECs and carbon offset purchases required to meet this credit’s requirements.

EA
EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy production will reduce the project’s total energy use
and therefore the amount of green power, RECs, or carbon offsets required.

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· In addition to including electricity, the credit now requires nonelectric use to be offset using carbon offsets.
·· The credit now requires a five-year contract and specifies that resources must have come online after January
1, 2005, and be delivered at least annually.
·· The percentage thresholds have been increased to 50% for 1 point and 100% for 2 points.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Green-e Energy and Green-e Climate: green-e.org

U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS):

eia.gov/consumption/commercial/index.cfm

ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager: Methodology for Greenhouse Gas Inventory and Tracking Calculations:
https://portfoliomanager.energystar.gov/pdf/reference/Emissions.pdf

Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Sinks: 1990–2010. Annex 2 Methodology and Data for
Estimating CO2 Emissions from Fossil Fuel Combustion:
epa.gov/climatechange/ghgemissions/usinventoryreport/archive.html
216

2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories, Intergovernmental Panel on Climate
Change, Geneva, Switzerland: ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/public/2006gl/index.html.

eGRID2012 Version 1.0, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency:

epa.gov/cleanenergy/energy-resources/egrid/index.html

WRI-WBCSD Greenhouse Gas Protocol: ghgprotocol.org/standards

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
carbon offset a unit of carbon dioxide equivalent that is reduced, avoided, or sequestered to compensate for
emissions occurring elsewhere (World Resources Institute)

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

green power a subset of renewable energy composed of grid-based electricity produced from renewable energy
sources

renewable energy credit (REC) a tradable commodity representing proof that a unit of electricity was generated
EA

from a renewable resource. RECs are sold separately from electricity itself and thus allow the purchase of green
power by a user of conventionally generated electricity.

Scope 1 emissions direct greenhouse gas emissions from sources owned or controlled by the entity, such as
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

emissions from fossil fuels burned on site. Electricity produced on site through the burning of fossil fuels is
measured by the Scope 1 emissions associated with that fossil fuel.

Scope 2 emissions indirect greenhouse gas emissions associated with the generation of purchased electricity,
heating/cooling, or steam off site, through a utility provider for the entity’s consumption. Transmission and
distribution losses related to hot water, chilled water, and steam are included in Scope 2 emissions, but transmission
and distribution losses associated with electricity are not included.
GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS EA
217
 219

Materials and
Resources (MR)

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

OVERVIEW
The Materials and Resources (MR) credit category focuses on minimizing the embodied energy and impacts
associated with the extraction, processing, transport, maintenance, and disposal of building materials. The
requirements are designed to support a life-cycle approach that improves performance and promotes resource
efficiency. Each requirement identifies a specific action that fits into the larger context of a life-cycle approach to
embodied impact reduction.

MR
THE WASTE HIERARCHY
Construction and demolition waste constitutes about 40% of the total solid waste stream in the United States1
and about 25% of the total waste stream in the European Union.2 In its solid waste management hierarchy, the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ranks source reduction, reuse, recycling, and waste to energy as the four
preferred strategies for reducing waste. The MR section directly addresses each of these recommended strategies.
Source reduction appears at the top of the hierarchy because it avoids environmental harms throughout a
material’s life cycle, from supply chain and use to recycling and waste disposal. Source reduction encourages the use
of innovative construction strategies, such as prefabrication and designing to dimensional construction materials,
thereby minimizing material cutoffs and inefficiencies.
Building and material reuse is the next most effective strategy because reusing existing materials avoids the
environmental burden of the manufacturing process. Replacing existing materials with new ones would entail
production and transportation of new materials, and it would take many years to offset the associated greenhouse
gases through increased efficiency of the building. LEED has consistently rewarded the reuse of materials. LEED v4
now offers more flexibility and rewards all material reuse achieved by a project—both in situ, as part of a building
reuse strategy, and from off site, as part of a salvaging strategy.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, epa.gov/osw/conserve/rrr/imr/cdm/pubs/cd-meas.pdf.

2. European Commission Service Contract on Management of Construction and Demolition Waste, Final Report, http://www.eu-smr.eu/cdw/docs/BIO_
Construction%20and%20Demolition%20Waste_Final%20report_09022011.pdf (accessed April 9, 2013).
220

Recycling is the most common way to divert waste from landfills. In conventional practice, most waste is
landfilled—an increasingly unsustainable solution. In urban areas landfill space is reaching capacity, requiring
the conversion of more land elsewhere and raising the transportation costs of waste. Innovations in recycling
technology improve sorting and processing to supply raw material to secondary markets, keeping those materials in
the production stream longer.
Because secondary markets do not exist for every material, the next most beneficial use of waste materials is
conversion to energy. Many countries are lessening the burden on landfills through a waste-to-energy solution. In
countries such as Sweden and Saudi Arabia, waste-to-energy facilities are far more common than landfills. When
strict air quality control measures are enforced, waste-to-energy can be a viable alternative to extracting fossil fuels
to produce energy.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

In aggregate, LEED projects are responsible for diverting more than 80 million tons (72.6 million tonnes) of
waste from landfills, and this volume is expected to grow to 540 million tons (489.9 million tonnes) by 2030.3 From
2000 to 2011, LEED projects in Seattle diverted an average of 90% of their construction waste from the landfill,
resulting in 175,000 tons (158 757.3 tonnes) of waste diverted.4 If all newly constructed buildings achieved the 90%
diversion rate demonstrated by Seattle’s 102 LEED projects, the result would be staggering. Construction debris is
no longer waste, it is a resource.

LIFE-CYCLE ASSESSMENT IN LEED

Through credits in the MR category, LEED has instigated market transformation of building products by creating
a cycle of consumer demand and industry delivery of environmentally preferable products. LEED project teams
have created demand for increasingly sustainable products; in turn, suppliers, designers, and manufacturers
are responding. From responsibly harvested wood to recycled content to biobased materials, the increased
supply of sustainable materials has been measurable over the history of LEED. Several MR credits reward use of
products that perform well on specific criteria. It is difficult, however, to compare two products that have different
sustainable attributes—for example, cabinets made of wheat husks sourced from all over the country and bound
together in resin versus solid wood cabinets made from local timber. Life-cycle assessment (LCA) provides a
more comprehensive picture of materials and products, enabling project teams to make more informed decisions
that will have greater overall benefit for the environmental, human health, and communities, while encouraging
manufacturers to improve their products through innovation.
LCA is a “compilation and evaluation of the inputs and outputs and the potential environmental impacts
of a product system throughout its life cycle.”5 The entire life cycle of a product (or building) is examined, the
MR

processes and constituents identified, and their environmental effects assessed—both upstream, from the point of
manufacture or raw materials extraction, and downstream, including transportation, use, maintenance, and end of
life. This approach is sometimes called “cradle to grave.” Going even further, “cradle to cradle” emphasizes recycling
and reuse at the end of life rather than disposal.
Life-cycle approaches to materials assessment began in the 1960s with carbon accounting models. Since
then, LCA standards and practices have been developed and refined. In Europe and a few other parts of the world,
manufacturers, regulators, specifiers, and consumers in many fields have been using life-cycle information to
improve their product selections and product environmental profiles. Until relatively recently, however, the data
and tools that support LCA were lacking in the U.S. Now a growing number of manufacturers are ready to document
and publicly disclose the environmental profiles of their products, and programs that assist this effort and help users
understand the results are available.
LEED aims to accelerate the use of LCA tools and LCA-based decision making, thereby spurring market
transformation and improving the quality of databases. Recognizing the limitations of the life-cycle approach for
addressing human health and the ecosystem consequences of raw material extraction, LEED uses alternative,
complementary approaches to LCA in the credits that address those topics.

3. USGBC, Green Building Facts, USGBC, usgbc.org/ShowFile.aspx?DocumentID=18693 (accessed September 13, 2012).
4. City of Seattle, LEED Projects Analysis, seattle.gov/dpd/greenbuilding/docs/dpdp022009.pdf (accessed March 26, 2013).
5. ISO 14040 International Standard, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment, principles and framework (Geneva, Switzerland: International
Organization for Standardization, 2006).
 221

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES
Required Products and Materials
The scope of the MR credit category includes the building or portions of the building that are being constructed
or renovated. Portions of an existing building that are not part of the construction contract are excluded from MR
documentation unless otherwise noted. For guidance on the treatment of additions, see the minimum program
requirements.

Qualifying Products and Exclusions

The MR section for interior design and construction includes permanently installed building products as well as
furniture. “Permanently installed building products” is defined by LEED as the products and materials that create the
building or are attached to it. Examples include structure and enclosure elements, installed finishes, framing, interior
walls, cabinets and casework, doors, and roofs. Most of these materials fall into Construction Specifications Institute
(CSI) 2012 MasterFormat Divisions 3-10, 31, and 32. Some products addressed by MR credits fall outside these divisions.
Furniture items within the project’s scope of work are also required to be included in credit calculations.
In past versions of LEED, all mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) equipment, categorized as CSI
MasterFormat divisions 11, 21-28, and other specialty divisions, was excluded from MR credits. In this version
of LEED, some specific products that are part of these systems but are “passive” (meaning not part of the active
portions of the system) may be included in credit calculations. This allows flexibility for the optional assessment
of piping, pipe insulation, ducts, duct insulation, conduit, plumbing fixtures, faucets, showerheads, and lamp
housings. If optional products or materials are included in cost-based credit calculations, such as Option 2 under
each Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits, they must be included consistently across all cost-based

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

credit calculations. Additionally, if optional products and materials are included in product based calculations,
such as Option 1 under each Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits, they are not required to be
included in cost-based credit calculations. However, unlike furniture, if some of these products are included in credit
calculations, not all products of that type must be included.
Special equipment, such as elevators, escalators, process equipment, and fire suppression systems, are excluded
from the credit calculations. Also exclude products purchased for temporary use on the project, like formwork for
concrete.

Defining a Product
Several credits in this category calculate achievement on the basis of number of products instead of product cost.
For these credits, a “product” or a “permanently installed building product” is defined by its function in the project.

MR
A product includes the physical components and services needed to serve the intended function. If there are similar
products within a specification, each contributes as a separate product. Here are a few scenarios.

Products that arrive at the project site ready for installation:

·· Metal studs, wallboard, and concrete masonry units are all separate products.
·· For wallboard, the gypsum, binder, and backing are all required for the product to function, so each ingredient
does not count as a separate product.

Products that arrive at the project site ready for installation:

·· Metal studs, wallboard, and concrete masonry units are all separate products.
·· For wallboard, the gypsum, binder, and backing are all required for the product to function, so each ingredient
does not count as a separate product.
·· Concrete is a single product as it typically arrives at the site as a mixed product ready to pour.

Products that arrive as an ingredient or component used in a site-assembled product:

·· Lumber for custom millwork.
·· Concrete mix components (admixture, aggregate, and cement) may be considered separate products if they
arrive to site as separate products.

Similar products from the same manufacturer with distinct formulations versus similar products from the same
manufacturer with aesthetic variations or reconfigurations:
·· Paints of different gloss levels are separate products because each paint type is specified to serve a different
function, such as water resistance. Different colors of the same paint are not separate products because they
serve the same function.
222

·· Carpets of different pile heights are separate products because they are used for different kinds of foot traffic.
The same carpet in a different color is not a separate product.
·· Desk chairs and side chairs in the same product line are different products because they serve different
functions. Two side chairs differing only in aesthetic aspects, such as the presence of arms, are not different
products.

Determining Product Cost

Product and materials cost includes all expenses to deliver the material to the project site. Materials cost should
include all taxes and delivery costs incurred by the contractor but exclude any cost for labor and equipment after the
material is delivered to the site.
The Building Design and Construction (BD+C) rating systems use a default materials cost calculation. This
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

approach is not applicable to Interior Design and Construction (ID+C) rating systems.

Location Valuation Factor

Several credits in the MR section include a location valuation factor, which adds value to locally produced products
and materials. The intent is to incentivize the purchase of products that support the local economy. Products and
materials that are extracted, manufactured, and purchased within 100 miles (160 kilometers) of the project are
valued at 200% of their cost (i.e., the valuation factor is 2).
For a product to qualify for the location valuation factor, it must meet two conditions: all extraction,
manufacture, and purchase (including distribution) of the product and its materials must occur within that radius
(Figure 1), and the product (or portion of an assembled product) must meet at least one of the sustainable criteria
(e.g., FSC certification, recycled content) specified in the credit. Products and materials that do not meet the
location radius but do meet at least one of the sustainability criteria are valued 100% of their cost (i.e., the valuation
factor is 1).

Portland cement manufacturing Gravel extraction

Silica extraction Concrete mixing plant

MR

Blast furnace slag extraction

Lime extraction Project site location

100 mile (160 km) radius from project site

Figure 1. Example material radius

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR5

MRc Responsible Sourcing of Raw Material
 223

The distance is measured as the crow flies, not by actual travel distance. The point of purchase is considered the
location of the purchase transaction. For online or other transactions that do not occur in person, the point of
purchase is considered the location of product distribution.
For the location valuation factor of salvaged and reused materials, see MR Credit Building Product Disclosure
and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Further Explanation, Material Reuse Considerations.

Determining Material Contributions of an Assembly

Many sustainability criteria in the MR category apply to the entire product, as is the case for product certifications
and programs. However, some criteria apply to only a portion of the product. The portion of the product that
contributes to the credit could be either a percentage of a homogeneous material or the percentage of qualifying
components that are mechanically or permanently fastened together. In either case, the contributing value is based
on weight. Examples of homogeneous materials include composite flooring, ceiling tiles, and rubber wall base.
Examples of assemblies (parts mechanically or permanently fastened together) include office chairs, demountable
partition walls, premade window assemblies, and doors.
Calculate the value that contributes toward credit compliance as the percentage, by weight, of the material or
component that meets the criteria, multiplied by the total product cost (Figure 2, Table 1).
Product value ($) = Total product cost ($) x (%) product component by weight x (%) meeting
sustainable criteria

Cotton fabric 5% (certified

by Rainforest Alliance)

Fastening hardware 2% Plastic component 25%

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

(25% recycled content) (10% post-consumer recycled content)
Arm rest plastic 5%
(10% post-consumer recycled content)

MR

Metal base 20% Steel post 8% Wheels 5%

(25% recycled content) (40% recycled content) (10% post-consumer
recycled content)

Percentage (%) denotes assembly components by weight

Figure 2. Sustainably produced components of $500 office chair

OR CONSTRUCTION
224

TABLE 1. Example calculation for $500 office chair

Percentage of
Percentage of product, Value of sustainability
Chair component Value of component component meeting
by weight criteria
sustainability criteria

25% preconsumer
Fastening hardware 2% $10 $2.50
recycled content
100% certified by
Cotton fabric 5% $25 $25.00
Rainforest Alliance
10% postconsumer
Plastic component 25% $125 $12.50
recycled content
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

10% postconsumer
Armrest 5% $25 $2.50
recycled content
25% preconsumer
Metal base 20% $100 $25.00
recycled content
40% preconsumer
Steel post 8% $40 $16.00
recycled content
10% postconsumer
Wheels 5% $25 $1.25
recycled content

Total value contributing to credit $84.75

MR
 225

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES PREREQUISITE

Storage and Collection

of Recyclables
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

To reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled

to and disposed of in landfills.

REQUIREMENTS

MR
COMMERCIAL INTERIORS, HOSPITALITY

Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the collection and storage of
recyclable materials for the entire building. Collection and storage areas may be separate locations. Recyclable
materials must include mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals. Take appropriate measures
for the safe collection, storage, and disposal of two of the following: batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and
electronic waste.

RETAIL

Conduct a waste stream study to identify the retail project’s top five recyclable waste streams, by either weight
or volume, using consistent metrics. Based on the waste stream study, list the top four waste streams for which
collection and storage space will be provided. If no information is available on waste streams for the project, use
data from similar operations to make projections. Retailers with existing stores of similar size and function can use
historical information from their other locations.
Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the separation, collection, and
storage of recyclable materials for at least the top four recyclable waste streams identified by the waste study. Locate
the collection and storage bins close the source of recyclable waste. If any of the top four waste streams are batteries,
mercury-containing lamps, or electronic waste, take appropriate measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal.
226

BEHIND THE INTENT

Waste disposal continues to be a significant environmental burden on communities and ecosystems. In the U.S.,
paper, food, glass, metals, and plastics—all recyclable—make up approximately 69% of total municipal solid waste6
(Figure 1). Diverting such recyclable waste from landfills can not only reduce hauling costs but also help convert
recyclables into new products, reducing demand for virgin materials.

Figure 1. Total municipal solid

waste generation. Adapted from
Food scraps the US Environmental Protection
Yard trimmings 12.7% Other 3.3%
Agency.
13.2%
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Wood 6.6%

Rubber,
leather, and
textiles 7.9%

Plastics 12%
Paper 31%

Metals
8.4% Glass
4.9%

A factor that commonly thwarts recycling efforts within buildings is a lack of convenient, physical spaces for
doing so. Incorporating recycling infrastructure early in the design process encourages successful recycling once
operations begin. Well-designed and accessible waste management infrastructure that anticipates how and where
waste will be discarded helps occupants make recycling their default behavior.
The increasing volume of electronic waste (e-waste)—computers, cameras, printers, keyboards—has become
a growing environmental concern. Therefore, identifying storage areas, recycling facilities, and haulers that can
process e-waste is important. The disposal procedure for batteries, fluorescent lamps, and other e-waste is more
hazardous than for cardboard, glass, plastic, metals, and paper. Because safety in handling and diversion of these
MR

materials is often overlooked by many recycling programs, this prerequisite requires developing waste management
infrastructure for at least two hazardous waste streams.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY THE WASTE DISPOSAL NEEDS FOR THE PROJECT

Identify the possible waste types and quantities that may be generated by different occupants and
spaces. For example, an office may need a large area devoted to paper recycling, whereas a café may
require more space for plastics, glass, and metals.
·· Even if a recycling service is not available, all required recyclable waste streams must have dedicated
storage in anticipation of future service (see Further Explanation, Projects without Available Recycling
Infrastructure).
·· Retail projects only. Conduct a waste stream audit for the project in an existing location, or make
projections based on historical data for similar establishments. Identify the top-five recyclable waste
streams. List the top-four waste streams for which collection and storage space will be provided. See
Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

6. epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw2009rpt.pdf (accessed July 3, 2013).

 227

STEP 2. DESIGN APPROPRIATELY SIZED STORAGE AREAS

Provide sufficient collection and storage space for all required recyclables. Indicate recycling storage
and collection areas on a floor plan, and be prepared to describe the dedicated recycling storage areas,
their accessibility, and how these spaces will serve their functional needs (see Further Explanation,
Infrastructure Considerations).
·· Storage areas should be easily accessible to building occupants, including visitors, full time occupants,
operations staff, and waste haulers.
·· For any of the collected hazardous waste streams (batteries, mercury-containing lamps, e-waste), take
appropriate measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal.
·· Locate and highlight central collection and storage areas for recyclables, including paper, cardboard,
glass, plastic, metal, and e-waste, on submitted floor plans.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

PROJECTS WITHOUT AVAILABLE RECYCLING INFRASTRUCTURE
Projects where there is no access to haulers or external facilities must still comply with this prerequisite by
establishing accessible recycling areas. As an interim measure, until a recycling service becomes available, consider
alternative means of recycling, such as reuse or donation.
The requirements of this prerequisite help establish a recycling infrastructure in the building, and encourage
waste separation behavior by occupants.

INFRASTRUCTURE CONSIDERATIONS
Consider the following factors for the setup, size, and accessibility of storage and collection of recyclables.

Recycling approach. Research local recycling programs. Some project teams may need to coordinate multiple
services. Determine which materials will be stored separately on site and which may be commingled into a single
stream and separated off site. The number and size of bins will affect storage requirements. Consider any special

MR
equipment that might be needed (e.g., tanks for fryer oil, compactors, and bailers).

Frequency of collection. Occupants may generate more of one type of waste than another, necessitating different
schedules for collection or different space requirements. Haulers may operate on a calendar schedule, use sensing
technology to retrieve waste only when the compactor is full, or negotiate pick-up patterns for specialized waste,
such as e-waste.

Specialized waste streams. Some waste streams may require particular handling or disposal requirements. For
example, health care, retail, and some office projects may require secure areas for shredding sensitive or proprietary
documents. Electronic waste and mercury-containing lamps may require extra precautions to prevent breakage
or exposure to toxins. To set up safe storage and recycling programs, refer to the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency’s universal wastes page, at epa.gov/wastes/hazard/wastetypes/universal/index.htm.

Access for waste haulers. Ensuring that waste haulers have access to the recyclable materials is particularly
important when planning and building loading docks and roads or when special equipment is required. Waste
hauling for the building is typically outside the scope of a commercial interiors project, but dedicated storage within
the project space is required to support recycling for the building.
228

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
Retail projects must identify the project’s top-five recyclable waste streams by conducting a waste stream study.
The waste stream study must include, at a minimum, a 24-hour period. In some cases the representative time
period may be longer. Project teams will be asked how the time period chosen is representative.
The required measurement of each waste stream may be by weight or volume but must be consistent. Visual
estimation is not considered an effective metric. Project teams must describe the method of conducting the waste
stream study, including location, time period, separation method, safety precautions, and measurement method.
Waste streams comprise two major substreams: waste disposed of via landfills or incinerators and waste diverted
from disposal through recycling, reuse, or composting. The results of the waste stream study must divide the waste
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

into at least these two substreams.

Use the findings of the study to evaluate how each type of waste can be reduced and set goals for minimizing
waste and disposal costs. This may include source reduction, reuse, and recycling. In addition, check local waste
haulers, buyers, and other recycling service providers to investigate the potential disposal and diversion options. For
example, a local nursery may be able to use coffee grounds for compost.
If a waste stream study is not feasible, the project team may make an informed estimate using one of the
following approaches:
·· Make projections based on a waste stream study of a similar retail operation in close proximity to the project.
·· Use historical data from existing stores in other locations of the same retailer or of similar size and function.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. For campuses, a shared central recycling facility for
haulers is acceptable, provided the space accommodates recycling produced by all spaces being served.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
MR

Documentation All Projects Retail Only

Verification of recycled material types X X

Narrative describing recycling storage and collection strategies X X

Floor plans indicating recycling storage and collection areas X X

Methodology and results of waste stream study X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Materials that require dedicated storage now include batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and e-waste; project
teams may choose two of the three. For retail projects, the required number of waste streams with dedicated storage
has increased from three to four.
 229

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.

dedicated storage a designated area in a building space or a central facility that is sized and allocated for a

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

specific task, such as the collection of recyclable waste. Signage often indicates the type of recyclable waste stored
there. Some waste streams, such as mercury-based light bulbs, sensitive paper documents, biomedical waste, or
batteries, may require particular handling or disposal methods. Consult the municipality’s safe storage and disposal
procedures or use

electronic waste discarded office equipment (computers, monitors, copiers, printers, scanners, fax machines),
appliances (refrigerators, dishwashers, water coolers), external power adapters, and televisions and other
audiovisual equipment

mixed paper white and colored paper, envelopes, forms, file folders, tablets, flyers, cereal boxes, wrapping paper,
catalogs, magazines, phone books, and photos

MR
MR LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

230
 231

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES PREREQUISITE

Construction and

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

Demolition Waste
Management Planning
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and

incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.

MR
REQUIREMENTS
Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan:
·· Establish waste diversion goals for the project by identifying at least five materials (both structural and
nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate a percentage of the overall project waste that these
materials represent.
·· Specify whether materials will be separated or commingled and describe the diversion strategies planned for
the project. Describe where the material will be taken and how the recycling facility will process the material.

Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion rates.
Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not qualify as material diverted from disposal. Include materials destined for
ADC in the calculations as waste. Land-clearing debris is not considered construction, demolition, or renovation
waste that can contribute to waste diversion.
232

BEHIND THE INTENT

Construction waste is a significant portion of the waste produced in the world. The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) estimated that in the U.S. in 2003, 170 million tons of construction and demolition waste were
generated and, of that, 61% from nonresidential construction projects.7 The European Commission estimates that
510 million metric tonnes of construction waste is generated annually by European Union member nations.8 Keeping
these materials out of landfills prevents ground and water pollution, promotes recycling, and keeps materials in
active use longer.
Waste management services vary widely from one location to another; therefore, teams should begin
by identifying the technologies, haulers, and facilities in the project’s area. Planning for construction waste
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

management (CWM) before construction allows time to identify the most effective waste diversion strategies
available. Such strategies typically include reuse, recycling, donation, and salvage; however, source reduction and
source separation are also viable and effective. Source reduction eliminates project waste through prefabrication,
modular construction, or incorporating standard material lengths or sizes into construction documents. Source
separation sorts waste on site into recycling streams, ensuring delivery to the correct facility.
Developing a CWM plan early in the design process allows more time for planning and coordination, identifying
appropriate strategies, and developing contractual agreements. Educating project team members, site workers, and
waste haulers helps ensure that the plan is followed and material is actually diverted from landfills and incinerators.
A well-devised CWM plan can also minimize cost and maximize return by decreasing tipping fees, selling high-
valued scrap materials, or identifying materials for reuse.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY WASTE DIVERSION GOALS

Identify at least five construction or demolition material streams for diversion from landfill. It may be
easiest to focus on determining the heaviest waste or the waste that generates the most volume.
·· Common materials that may be simple to divert include drywall, wood, scrap metals, brick, and
concrete.
MR

·· Finish materials, such as flooring and ceiling tiles, can often be recycled through the major
manufacturers.
·· Consider incorporating reuse of finish materials, furniture, or framing into the design early. Reusing
existing materials may require design modifications. Some materials must remain intact to be reused
(e.g., drywall) or may require additional preparation (e.g., de-nailing).
Source reduction strategies should be incorporated into the design of the project and outlined in the
CWM plan. These strategies include modular construction, reduced packaging, using industry-standard
measurements, and prefabrication.

STEP 2. SELECT COLLECTION AND DIVERSION METHODS

Explore on-site and off-site waste collection and sorting opportunities and consider the infrastructure
needed for implementation (see Further Explanation, Effective Construction Waste Management
Strategies).
·· Projects may use a combination of on-site separation and commingled collection, depending on what
is appropriate for the project location, material stream, and available facilities and haulers.
·· For on-site separation, common CWM strategies include donation, resale, on-site reuse, recycling, or
refurbishment. Crushing asphalt, concrete, and masonry for infill or aggregate is also considered on-
site waste diversion.
·· The most common off-site strategies are incineration, combustion of wood, and sending commingled
waste to a sorting facility.

7. epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw2009rpt.pdf (accessed July 3, 2013).

8. ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/pdf/story_book.pdf (accessed May 28, 2013).
 233

·· Identify diversion options for materials.

·· Incineration may be considered diversion if reuse and recycling methods are not readily available in the
project’s location; this must be included in the CWM plan. Wood-derived fuel, or wood combustion,
is considered diversion and not subject to the additional requirements for incineration (see Further
Explanation, Waste-to-Energy).
·· Using a recycling facility for which recycling rates have been independently certified by a third
party, such as the Recycling Certification Institute (recyclingcertification.org), provides assurance
that diversion rates are accurate, but it is not required for compliance. Some haulers work with local
municipalities to certify their average diversion rates.
·· Consider how CWM plan requirements, or the requirement to write a plan, can be included in
specification documents under Division 1, General Requirements.

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

STEP 3. DRAFT CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
The CWM plan must be customized for each project. The plan must include an overall project waste
diversion goal and identify at least five kinds of materials that will be diverted from landfills or
incinerators.
·· There is no minimum threshold for diversion, though project teams may earn points for meeting
the thresholds set in the corresponding credit (see MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste
Management).
·· All projects must comply with this prerequisite, including projects located in areas without recycling
services and those not intending to pursue the corresponding credit.
·· The plan must account for all materials, including land-clearing debris, materials to be used for
alternative daily cover (ADC), and other materials not contributing to diversion but not included in the
diverted waste total.
·· The safe removal and disposal of hazardous materials must also be covered in the CWM plan.
Hazardous materials must be tracked separately and not be included in the project’s total waste.
·· Specify the means and methods of diversion for each of the five selected material streams and the
approximate amount of waste of each.
·· If possible, provide contracts or sample contract language that describes the waste-sorting strategies
and technologies used by the waste hauler and facility. Successful CWM plans start with early
establishment of contractual obligations.
·· When developing the waste hauler contract, consider including the waste reporting structure, a
schedule that identifies the responsible parties and their contact information, and a clear chain and
method of communication. Consider involving waste haulers in regular construction meetings.

STEP 4. DECIDE WHETHER TO PURSUE CREDIT

Determine whether the project team will seek to achieve the corresponding credit, which awards points

MR
for implementing the plan developed in this prerequisite and meeting diversion thresholds (see MR Credit
Construction and Demolition Waste Management). A project team that does not pursue the credit must
nevertheless develop the plan and produce a final waste report.

STEP 5. PRODUCE WASTE REPORT

Create a final report on the total construction and demolition waste produced by the project and the
total waste diverted, using the following equation.

EQUATION 1. Diversion rate

Diversion rate = (Total waste diverted from landfill / Total waste produced by project) × 100

·· Units may be in weight or volume but must be consistent throughout.

·· If the project team is pursuing the corresponding credit, see MR Credit Construction and Demolition
Waste Management for additional requirements for the final waste report.
234

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance. This prerequisite has no performance requirement, but the corresponding
credit does (see MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management).

EFFECTIVE CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES

On-site separation (also known as source separation) is most viable if multiple bins are conveniently located and the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

general contractor and subcontractors enforce careful separation. A best practice for source separation is to target
waste materials that are easily separated and have established recycling markets, such as steel, wood, and concrete.
On-site separation is preferable to commingling because separated wastes are more likely to actually be diverted
from the landfill. Using easy-to-understand multilingual or symbol-based signage helps prevent contamination of
on-site source separation areas.
Commingled collection (or single-stream recycling) may be more appropriate for sites with limited storage
area for waste containers. Recyclable materials are mixed in one container but sorted and processed at an off-site
recycling facility, which separates them from the waste going to a landfill. Commingled waste may be considered
only one material stream unless the facility can provide diversion rates for specific materials.
To count toward the corresponding credit (MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management),
commingled recycling facilities must be able to provide diversion rates either specific to the project, or an average
diversion rate for the facility that is regulated by the local or state authority. The average recycling rate for the facility
must exclude ADC.
Donating surplus or architectural salvage or community donation is permissible, provided the organization can
verify and track the material, including how much is received and where it is going. Habitat for Humanity Restore is a
commonly used donation facility in the U.S and Canada.
Use of construction waste to infill mining pits is permissible only if the waste is “clean” and the work is overseen
by the state or local government or a government-sponsored organization.
Leaving items on the curb for people to pick up is not acceptable. Dumping in the ocean is never permissible as a
diversion strategy.

WASTE-TO-ENERGY
MR

Waste-to-energy may be considered a viable diversion strategy if the project team follows European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and the European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 200/76/EC are
followed. In addition, the facility must meet the applicable European standards based on the fuel type. See Referenced
Standards for more information on these directives:
·· EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers
·· EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels
·· EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner

The combustion of wood or “wood-derived fuel” is not considered waste-to-energy and is exempt from the above
criteria.
Project teams must demonstrate that reuse and recycling strategies were exhausted before sending waste
material to energy facilities.
 235

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. Campus spaces may develop one comprehensive plan for
construction waste.

Campus Approach
Ineligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

Documentation All projects

Construction waste management plan X

Total construction waste X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management. See the related credit for additional
considerations and waste diversion requirements.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The creation of a CWM plan is a new prerequisite requirement.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC:

MR
·· ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/framework/index.htm
·· eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2008:312:0003:0030:en:PDF

European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 200/76/EC:

·· europa.eu/legislation_summaries/environment/waste_management/l28072_en.htm
·· central2013.eu/fileadmin/user_upload/Downloads/Document_Centre/OP_Resources/Incineration_
Directive_2000_76.pdf

EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Terminology, general requirements,
testing and marking: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with
atomizing oil burners: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers, Assembly comprising a boiler body and a forced
draught burner: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with forced
draught oil burners with outputs up to 70 kW and a maximum operating pressure of 3 bar, Terminology,
special requirements, testing and marking: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels, manually and automatically stoked, nominal heat output of up
to 500 kW: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx
236

EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Specific requirements for the domestic hot
water operation of combination boilers with atomizing oil burners of nominal heat input not exceeding 70
kW: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner of nominal heat
output not exceeding 1000 kW: http://www.cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Not available.

DEFINITIONS
alternative daily cover (ADC) material other than earthen material placed on the surface of the active face of a
municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and
scavenging. Generally these materials must be processed so they do not allow gaps in the exposed landfill face.
(CalRecycle)

clean waste nonhazardous materials left over from construction and demolition. Clean waste excludes lead and
asbestos.

commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.

land-clearing debris and soil materials that are natural (e.g., rock, soil, stone, vegetation). Materials that are man-
made (e.g., concrete, brick, cement) are considered construction waste even if they were on site.

waste-to-energy the conversion of nonrecyclable waste materials into usable heat, electricity, or fuel through a
variety of processes, including combustion, gasification, pyrolization, anaerobic digestion, and landfill gas (LFG)
recovery.
MR
 237

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Long-Term
Commitment
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

LONG-TERM COMMITMENT
INTENT

To encourage choices that will conserve resources and reduce

environmental harm from materials manufacturing and transport for
tenants’ relocation.

MR
REQUIREMENTS
The occupant or tenant must commit to remain in the same location for at least 10 years.
238

BEHIND THE INTENT

Frequent tenant turnover often entails major remodeling projects that replace materials and equipment before the
end of their useful life. Less demolition and renovation reduce construction and demolition waste and avoid the use
of virgin resources in products, materials, and equipment required to fit out the tenant space.
Long-term leases and commitments also bring social benefits, such as stronger relationships with service
providers in the building and surrounding community. Tenants realize economic savings by using materials and
equipment for longer periods and by avoiding the costs and productivity losses of a move. Longer lease terms
encourage tenants to implement improvements, such as energy-efficiency technologies, that may have a longer
payback period but generate more savings over time.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SELECT LOCATION

When reviewing potential locations, investigate and identify a space that will serve the project’s needs for
at least 10 years.

Owners
·· Consider how ownership of the project space will help achieve sustainability goals. Often, upgrades to
building systems are easier to facilitate when negotiations with third-party owners are avoided.
·· When purchasing office space, recognize potential growth or contraction over time and design flexible
spaces so that relocation does not become necessary.

Tenants
·· To the extent feasible, anticipate how much space is needed for future growth when selecting a long-
term tenant space.
·· Consider the investment opportunities that longer-term location planning allows, such as the value of
energy-efficient technologies and durable materials.

STEP 2. COMMIT TO AT LEAST 10-YEAR LEASE

MR

Owners
·· Express commitment to remain in space for 10-year period (see Further Explanation, Owner-Occupied
Spaces).

Tenants
·· Commit to remaining in space for at least a 10-year lease through lease terms (see Further Explanation,
Tenant-Occupied Spaces).
 239

FURTHER EXPLANATION

OWNER-OCCUPIED SPACES
In the case of owner-occupied spaces, the owner of the property must also be the occupant of the project space. To
demonstrate these requirements, the address of owned property must be the same as, or include, the project space.
Ownership must be effective as of certification submission at a minimum. In addition, a commitment letter must
be provided by the owner indicating a commitment to remain in the project space for at least 10 years. The letter
must be on the owner's letterhead and be signed and dated by the project owner, and must state the address of the
property and the effective dates of the commitment.

TENANT-OCCUPIED SPACES
Submit a copy of the portions of the tenant lease that indicate compliance and contain the required information.
Sensitive information may be redacted.
Agreements for less than 10 years with an option to renew do not satisfy the credit requirement. The lease does
not need to start at the beginning of construction or major renovation. As long as the minimum 10-year lease is in
effect when the project is registered and achieves certification, the project is eligible for this credit. Tenants are not
expected to occupy the space until construction or renovation is complete.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS

LONG-TERM COMMITMENT
Even if the regional market does not typically engage in leases for as long as 10 years, it is up to the tenant to negotiate
terms that meet the credit requirements. A commitment letter is insufficient for tenants seeking this credit.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one. One document for all tenant spaces is acceptable,
provided all tenant spaces covered in this document comply with the minimum lease duration of 10 years. Ensure
that this document clearly identifies each property covered by the lease.

Campus Approach

MR
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Verification of intent to remain in project space for 10 years, either as an owner or tenant. X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction. Designing the project space to be flexible (Option 3, Design for
Flexibility) can make it easier for a tenant to adapt and grow without relocating.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. When negotiating lease terms for this credit, consider including provisions
regarding metering and payment of utilities to earn the related credit.
240

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
MR
 241

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Interiors Life-Cycle
Impact Reduction
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-4 points)

Retail (1-5 points)

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

Hospitality (1-4 points)

INTENT

To encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental

performance of products and materials.

REQUIREMENTS

MR
OPTION 1. INTERIOR REUSE (2 POINTS)
Reuse or salvage interior nonstructural elements for at least 50% of the surface area. Hazardous materials that are
remediated as a part of the project must be excluded from the calculation.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. FURNITURE REUSE (1 POINT)

Reuse, salvage, or refurbish furniture and furnishings for at least 30% of the total furniture and furnishings cost.

AND/OR

OPTION 3. DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY (1 POINT COMMERCIAL INTERIORS AND HOSPITALITY,

2 POINTS RETAIL)
Conduct an integrative planning process to increase the useful life of the project space. Increase project space
flexibility, ease of adaptive use, and recycling of building materials while considering differential durability and
premature obsolescence over building design life and individual component service lives. Use at least three of the
following strategies.
·· Install accessible systems (floor or ceiling) for at least 50% of the project floor area to allow for flexible use of
space and access to systems (under floor distribution systems) not entangled with other building systems.
242

·· Design at least 50% of interior nonstructural walls, ceilings, and floors to be movable or demountable.
·· Ensure that at least 50%, by cost, of nonstructural materials have integral labels (radio frequency
identification, engraving, embossing, or other permanent marking) containing information on material origin,
properties, date of manufacture, in compliance with Canadian Standards Association CSA Z782-06 Guideline
for Design for Disassembly and Adaptability in Buildings.
·· Include in at least one major component or systems purchase contract a clause specifying sub-contractor,
vendor, or on site take back system.
·· Ensure that at least 50% of nonstructural materials, by cost, are reusable or recyclable, as defined by the
Federal Trade Commission Guide for Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 260.12.
·· Implement flexible power distribution (i.e., plug-and-play) systems for at least 50% of the project floor area so
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

that lighting, data, voice, and other systems can be easily reconfigured and repurposed.
·· Implement a flexible lighting control system with plug and play components such as wall controls, sensors,
and dimming ballasts for a minimum of 50% of the lighting load. The system shall allow for reconfiguring and
repurposing of luminaires and controls without rewiring such as having the capability to group and assign
luminaires into zones and change those zones as needed. Also, the system shall be flexible so that as a space
changes functions, the lighting levels can change to suit the needs of the space without rewiring or removing or
adding luminaires.
MR
 243

BEHIND THE INTENT

Reusing materials and designing for flexibility are effective ways to lessen the overall environmental consequences
of an interior space over its lifetime. These strategies reduce costs, energy use, and construction waste and avoid the
environmental burdens associated with raw material extraction, manufacturing, transportation, embodied energy,
and greenhouse gas emissions.
Office spaces and other commercial interiors undergo alterations numerous times over a building’s life cycle.
Spaces designed for flexibility and adaptive use are more easily renovated, mitigating many of the harms caused
by construction activities. Material reuse avoids the costs associated with the purchase of new materials and their
transportation and installation. The payback is more pronounced in the case of furniture and furnishings, which are
often the largest single purchase for commercial interiors projects.
This credit encourages integrated design solutions, such as plug–and-play lighting and accessible floor systems,
so that offices can be moved and reconfigured without alterations to building systems. It also encourages purchasing
solutions, such as integral labeling and take-back programs, that reduce the volume of durable goods to be thrown
away at the end of their useful life.

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Determine which option is most appropriate for your project. A combination of the three options may be
used to cumulatively achieve the points indicated in the credit requirements. The decision to pursue this
credit should occur early in the design process.
·· Option 1 is appropriate for projects that can reuse existing nonstructural wall, ceiling, and flooring
systems.
·· Option 2 is suitable if existing furniture and furnishings are in good condition and could be refurbished
and reused in the project.
·· Option 3 is for projects whose clients want flexible spaces to accommodate their future plans.

MR
Option 1. Interior Reuse

STEP 1. SURVEY EXISTING INTERIOR NONSTRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

Develop drawings showing the location of existing nonstructural interior elements.
·· Elements could include existing and finished ceilings, flooring, interior wall partitions, doors for interior
walls, exterior and party walls, and built-in case goods.
·· Take into account excluded items, such as reused, salvaged, and refurbished interior elements that
qualify for MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials; these
items may not be double-counted under this credit (see Further Explanation, Determining Area of
Interior Nonstructural Elements).

STEP 2. DEVELOP REUSE STRATEGY

Identify the surface areas that are in good condition and could be reused, salvaged, or refurbished for the
project. Maximize reused area by working through several design iterations. Casework has considerable
surface area and can therefore contribute significantly to the credit.
Develop a tracking table that lists all surveyed elements, with columns that record the total area and
reused area for each interior element (see Further Explanation, Example 1). The following items are
considered reused:
·· Items that will be reused in place, as-is, for the same function
·· Existing items that will be reused to serve a new function (e.g., a wood counter repurposed to serve as
stair treads)
244

Products and materials reused from off-site, whether to serve either their original function or a new
function, may be included in the credit calculations.

STEP 3. COMPLETE PRELIMINARY CALCULATIONS

Quantify the existing and reused interior nonstructural elements in terms of surface area (see Further
Explanation, Determining Area of Interior Nonstructural Elements).
·· Keep separate lists of items included and excluded.
·· Using the information from the tracking table, calculate the percentage of eligible reused interior
elements using Equation 1.

EQUATION 1. Area of reused interior elements

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Reused nonstructural interior elements area (ft2 or m2)

Reused interior = × 100

Total existing interior nonstructural elements area (ft2 or m2)

STEP 4. INCORPORATE REUSED ELEMENTS INTO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Once the scope of desired reuse is determined, ensure that the areas intended for reuse are well defined,
incorporated into the project scope, and specified in construction documents.
·· In the demolition drawings, clearly identify areas to be protected for reuse in-place.
·· In the design drawings and project specifications, clearly identify any items that will be reused for a
different purpose.

STEP 5. CONFIRM FINAL PERCENTAGE OF REUSED ELEMENTS

Once the project is complete, calculate the percentage of reused elements using Equation 1. Record the
details and the final results in the tracking table.

Option 2. Furniture Reuse

STEP 1. INVENTORY REUSED, SALVAGED, OR REFURBISHED FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS

Early in the design process, inventory existing furniture and furnishings that could be incorporated into
the project design. Develop a tracking table that lists all potentially reusable furniture and furnishings, in
MR

order of their suitability for reuse.

·· Furniture and furnishings may be sourced on-site or off-site, from such sources as existing client
furniture inventories, furniture resellers, and reused furniture and material exchanges.
·· Take into consideration any storage requirements for reused furniture during construction and any
necessary repairs or refurbishment.
·· To qualify as reused, salvaged furniture taken from the owner’s previous facility or location must have
been purchased at least two years before the date of project registration. Alternatively, furniture that
is leased must have been in service for at least two years before being installed in the current project.
Document this claim.
·· Reused, salvaged, and refurbished furniture that qualifies for MR Credit Building Product Disclosure
and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials may be double-counted with this credit.

STEP 2. ESTIMATE TOTAL FURNITURE COSTS

Determine the total cost of the project’s furniture and furnishings (both new and reused, refurbished, or
salvaged). For the reused, salvaged, and refurbished items, use replacement values; enlist the help of a
construction cost estimator or furniture representative if needed (see MR Overview, Determining Product
Cost).

STEP 3. ESTIMATE PERCENTAGE OF REUSED ITEMS

Calculate the percentage, by cost, of reused, salvaged and refurbished items using Equation 2.
 245

EQUATION 2. Percentage of reused furniture

Cost of reused furniture and furnishings

Reused furniture = × 100

Total cost of furniture and furnishings

STEP 4. INCORPORATE REUSED ITEMS INTO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Once list of reused, salvaged, and refurbished furniture and furnishings has been finalized, specify these
items in the furniture plan and construction documents.

STEP 5: CONFIRM FINAL PERCENTAGE OF REUSED FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS

Once the project is complete, calculate the percentage of reused, salvaged, and refurbished items used,
with Equation 2. Record the details and the results in the tracking table.

Option 3. Design for Flexibility

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

STEP 1. DEVELOP FLEXIBILITY GOALS
Early in design, define the desired flexibility needs and establish flexibility goals and metrics for the
project.
·· Obtain early commitment from the entire team to ensure flexible strategies are not value-engineered
out.
·· In the predesign and schematic design phases, identify possible scenarios for future renovation and
expansion and discuss how a flexible design could help to accommodate those potential changes.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY AT LEAST THREE STRATEGIES THAT MEET CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Determine which design strategies outlined in the credit requirements will best help achieve the goals.
Some strategies provide flexibility for future architectural, mechanical, and electrical changes; others
prioritize materials and products that can be reused or recycled.
·· Incorporate strategies that allow for disassembly, reuse, and recycling of building materials and
systems (see Further Explanation, Strategies for Designing for Flexibility).
·· Consider differential durability and premature obsolescence when designing and specifying products

MR
and materials.

STEP 3. COMPLETE PRELIMINARY CALCULATIONS TO DETERMINE STRATEGY SCOPE

Before design is finalized, determine whether the minimum threshold will be achievable for each
applicable strategy. Calculation methodologies to determine percentage of compliance vary by strategy
(see Further Explanation, Calculations and Examples).

STEP 4. INCORPORATE SELECTED STRATEGIES INTO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Once the selected flexibility strategies have been finalized, incorporate them into the furniture plan and
construction documents.

STEP 5. CONFIRM STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION

Track performance through construction to ensure that the reuse and flexibility requirements specified in
the project documents are implemented.
·· During construction, some strategies may have to be scrapped. Tracking performance and allows the
project team to come up with replacement strategies.
·· Ensure that the completed project will achieve the reuse and flexibility strategy thresholds (see
Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· Record the details and the final results in the tracking table.
246

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
For Options 1 and 2, see Step-by-Step Guidance, Equations 1 and 2. The following equations are applicable to Option 3
only.

EQUATION 3. Design for flexibility: Accessible floor and ceiling systems

Total area of accessible floor and ceiling systems

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Accessible floor and

ceiling systems = × 100
Total interior floor area

EQUATION 4. Design for flexibility: Movable walls, ceilings, and floors

Total area of movable or demountable walls, ceilings, and floors

Movable walls, ceilings,
and floors = × 100
Total area of all interior walls, ceilings, and floors

For Equation 4, exclude exterior walls, partial-height walls (considered furniture), and walls, ceiling, and floors
required for fire separation by code.

EQUATION 5. Design for flexibility: Integrated materials labels

Total cost of materials with compliant integral labels

Integrated materials
labels = × 100
Total cost of all nonstructural materials

EQUATION 6. Design for flexibility: Reusable and recyclable materials

MR

Total cost of reusable and recyclable nonstructural materials

Reusable and recyclable
materials = × 100
Total cost of all nonstructural materials

EQUATION 7. Design for flexibility: Plug-and-play power systems

Total area with plug-and-play power systems

Plug-and-play power
systems = × 100
Total interior floor area

EQUATION 8. Design for flexibility: Plug-and-play lighting systems

Total lighting load with plug and play lighting systems

Plug-and-play lighting
systems = × 100
Total lighting load
 247

DETERMINING AREA OF INTERIOR NONSTRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

Include all finish ceilings, flooring, interior wall partitions, doors within interior walls, , exterior or party walls that
are within the scop of work, and built-in case goods and determine the surface area (square feet or square meters)
as follows.

Built-in case goods. Calculate the visible surface area of the assembly after installation.

Structural support elements. Columns, beams, and studs are considered part of the larger surfaces they support.
Calculate the surface area of these elements as the surface area of the wall, ceiling, or floor.

Wall, ceiling, and floor assemblies. Each assembly (vertical or horizontal) may be calculated as up to three layers of
surface area (see Further Explanation, Example 2, Figure 2). For vertical building elements, the layers are categorized
as enclosure, structure, and interior finish. For horizontal building elements, the layers are categorized as ceiling
finish, structure, and floor finish.
Not all layers may be present at the beginning of construction, depending on the state of the building. If a layer
that existed before construction or demolition is removed and replaced with new material, it must be included in the
calculation. If an existing layer was removed and not replaced, it is excluded.
·· Example: A floor assembly consisting of ceiling tiles, structural slab, and carpeting has reused ceiling tiles and

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

structural slab, but the carpet was removed and not replaced; instead, the exposed structural concrete is the
finish material. The project team excludes the carpeting from the calculation but counts the slab as reused.
·· Example: A building has an existing brick enclosure and steel structure but the drywall has been replaced. The
team includes all three layers in the denominator but only the reused portions (enclosure and structure) in the
numerator.
·· Example: A building has an existing brick enclosure and steel structure with no drywall or interior finish. The
team counts only those two layers in the reuse calculations.

Exclude the following items from the calculations:

·· Exterior windows and doors
·· Elements of the assembly that are outside the scope of work (e.g., the exterior of a wall)
·· Items that are demolished and not replaced (e.g., the area of removed finish ceiling if the project has an
exposed structural ceiling)
·· Hazardous materials that are remediated as part of the project

MR
Reused, salvaged and refurbished interior elements included in Option 1 of this credit that qualify for MR Credit
Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials cannot be double-counted with this
credit.

STRATEGIES FOR DESIGNING FOR FLEXIBILITY

A variety of design strategies can provide flexibility for future architectural, mechanical, and electrical changes or
make it easier to reuse or recycle materials and products.

Consider the following approaches to flexible design.

Accessible floor and ceiling systems. Accessible ceiling systems include typical t–bar and other movable ceiling
assemblies that allow access to plenum spaces and building systems. The Owens Corning World Headquarters in
Toledo, Ohio, for example, was built with access floors throughout. In the first year of occupancy, employees moved
an average of 1.3 times. The access flooring system enabled those moves to be made very inexpensively.1

Demountable partitions. The entire wall, ceiling, or floor system is designed to be moved without deconstruction
or demolition. Space needs in commercial interior spaces can change frequently, so incorporating demountable
partitions allows tenants to meet their changing needs more easily, quickly, and cost-effectively.

Plug-and-play power and lighting systems. These systems allow for quick adjustments to meet changing power
and lighting demands. When combined with flexible wall, ceiling, and floor strategies, they give building managers a
high degree of interior space flexibility.

1. Access Floors: A Step Up for Commercial Buildings, Environmental Building News.

248

Integral labels. Reuse and recycling extend the use of materials, but during deconstruction it can be difficult to
identify reusable and recyclable products. Specifying products with integral labels (radio frequency identification,
engraving, embossing, or other permanent marking) containing information on material origin, properties, and
date of manufacture will allow easier identification and reuse of these materials in the future. Refer to the Canadian
Standards Association CSA Z782-06 Guideline for Design for Disassembly and Adaptability in Buildings for further
information on integral labeling.

Take-back programs. In these programs, the manufacturer or another party collects used materials for recycling.
More and more carpet and ceiling system manufacturers are taking back their products after use.

Leasing arrangements. Systems such as furniture can be leased, and the vendor takes the items back when the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

contract is up or the furniture is no longer needed. Leasing systems increase the likelihood that items will be used
more than one before they reach their end of life. They also remove the burden of disposal from the project and can
create an incentive to provide durable, reusable, and recyclable products.

To earn the project credit for a take-back or leasing program, the arrangement must cover a “major system or
component,” defined as any product or group of items used in the majority (more than 50%) of the project spaces
where that item is relevant. Examples of qualifying systems include ceilings, carpeting, furniture, partitions, and
casework. An example that may not qualify is built-in casework, which is typically not installed in more than half of a
project’s spaces.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Calculating reused interior surfaces (Option 1)
The project is an interior refit. Figure 1 highlights the reused elements, including the interior walls. In this example,
the interior side of exterior walls and the floors are not part of the scope of work and are therefore excluded from
credit calculations (Table 1).

Existing ceiling (counts towards credit) Demolished/not replaced wall

(excluded from calculation)

Reconstructed wall (does not

count towards credit)
MR

Salvaged door (counts towards credit)

Surfaces that can be counted toward credit

Reconstructed surfaces that were existing and have been re-built are
included in the calculation but do not contribute towards credit

Figure 1. Example existing interior surface area reuse contribution

 249

TABLE 1. Example tracking of reused elements (Option 1, Interior Reuse)

Existing area Reused area Percentage

Interior elements
(m2) (m2) reused

Reconstructed wall: 2nd-floor hallway 100 0 0%

Demolished wall (not replaced): 2nd-floor office partition 0 0 0%
Reused wall: 1st-floor office partitions 500 350 70%
Reused wall: 1st-floor hallway 100 100 100%
Ceiling: 1st-floor asbestos tiles, removed (hazardous material) — — —
Ceiling: 2nd-floor ceiling, reused 1 200 1 000 83%

Total 1 900 1 450 76.3%

Example 2. Three layers of reuse

The project team must account for partial reuse of a wall assembly. The entire wall, including the exterior, is part of
the project’s scope of work. The project is reusing the exterior layers but replacing interior layers.

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

Backer board: reused

Batt insulation: replaced Layer 3: reused studs

Layer 2: replaced interior drywall

MR

Layer 1: reused bricks, repaired as needed

Reused materials included in credit calculations

Figure 2. Example surface area reuse calculations using wall assembly layers

All Rights Reserved. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

250

TABLE 2. Wall assembly layers

Existing area Reused area Percentage

Wall assembly layers
(ft2) (ft2) reused

Layer 1. Exterior enclosure, brick and backer board 1,000 1,000 100%

Layer 2. Interior surface, wallboard 1,000 800 80%

Layer 3. Structural framing, aluminum studs 1,000 800 80%

Total (transfer to tracking table) 3,000 2,600 86.6%

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Option 1. All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Option 2. All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Option 3. Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Drawings indicating locations of interior elements X

Tracking table showing total area of all interior elements, reused interior elements,
X
percentage of reused elements, and cost of each element
Tracking table for furniture and furnishings, listing all items and showing total cost,
costs for reused, salvaged, and refurbished items, and percentage of reused, salvaged, X
and refurbished items
MR

Floor plans, sections and/or details (as applicable) showing compliance with flexibility
X
strategies.
Cutsheets and product information showing compliance with flexibility strategies
X
(as applicable)

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management. For interior renovation projects, materials and
products that are not reused on-site but are sold or donated for reuse can contribute to the diversion requirements
for the related credit.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. Reused or salvaged
interior nonstructural materials (found on-site or off-site) may contribute toward Option 1 or Option 2 of this credit,
depending on which credit(s) the project is pursuing and which calculation makes more sense (surface area versus
cost). However, materials may not be double-counted under both credits.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Option 2, Leadership
Extraction Practices. Salvaged, reused, and refurbished furniture contributing toward Option 2 of this credit may
also contribute toward the related credit. If furniture is included in this credit, it must be included consistently
across all Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits.
 251

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Two former MR credits, Building Reuse—Maintain Interior Nonstructural Components and Materials
Reuse—Furniture and Furnishings, have been combined into this credit.
·· The reuse threshold for interior nonstructural elements has been changed from a tiered approach (40% and
60%) to a single 50% threshold.
·· Credit is given both for items that are reused in place and for items that serve a new purpose.
·· Option 3, Design for Flexibility, is new.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Canadian Standards Association CSA Z782-06 Guideline for Design for Disassembly and Adaptability in
Buildings: shop.csa.ca/en/canada/design-for-the-environment/z782-06/invt/27025282006/

Federal Trade Commission Guide for Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 260.7(d):
ftc.gov/bcp/grnrule/guides980427.htm

INTERIORS LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Achieve 95% interior nonstructural element reuse.

Option 2. Achieve 60% furniture and furnishings reuse.

Option 3. Use at least six design-for-flexibility strategies.

DEFINITIONS
differential durability a state in which two materials with different life spans make up one complete component. If
one material wears out and cannot be separated and replaced, the entire product must be thrown away.

MR
furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

integral labeling an information conveyance system that cannot be easily removed. For furniture, such labeling may
include radio frequency identification, engraving, embossing, or other permanent marking containing information
on material origin, properties, and date of manufacture.

premature obsolescence the wearing out or disuse of components or materials whose service life exceeds their
design life. For example, a material with a potential life of 30 years is intentionally designed to last only 15 years, such
that its remaining 15 years of service is potentially wasted. In contrast, components whose service life is the same as
their expected use are utilized to their maximum potential.

refurbished material an item that has completed its life cycle and is prepared for reuse without substantial
alteration of its form. Refurbishing involves renovating, repairing, restoring, or generally improving the appearance,
performance, quality, functionality, or value of a product.
252

reused area the total area of the building structure, core, and envelope that existed in the prior condition and
remains in the completed design

salvaged material a construction component recovered from existing buildings or construction sites and reused.
Common salvaged materials include structural beams and posts, flooring, doors, cabinetry, brick, and decorative
items.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
MR
 253

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—
Environmental Product
Declarations
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

MR
To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-cycle
information is available and that have environmentally, economically,
and socially preferable life-cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products from manufacturers who have verified improved
environmental life-cycle impacts.

REQUIREMENTS
Achieve one or more of the options below, for a maximum of 2 points.

OPTION 1. ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATION (EPD) (1 POINT)

Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least five different manufacturers that meet
one of the disclosure criteria below.
254

·· Product-specific declaration.
°° Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that
have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (¼) of a product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
·· Environmental product declarations which conform to ISO 14025 and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least
a cradle to gate scope.
°° Industry-wide (generic) EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator are
valued as one half (½) of a product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
°° Product-specific Type III EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator
are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· USGBC approved program – Products that comply with other USGBC approved environmental product
declaration frameworks.

OPTION 2. MULTI-ATTRIBUTE OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed
products in the project. Products will be valued as below.
·· Third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction below industry average in at least three of
the following categories are valued at 100% of their cost for credit achievement calculations.
°° global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;
°° depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11;
°° acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2 ;
°° eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
°° formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and
°° depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ.
·· USGBC approved program — Products that comply with other USGBC approved multi-attribute frameworks.

For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles
(160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost.
MR

Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
Projects with significant amounts of structural and enclosure materials may exceed the 30% limit by calculating an
alternative structure and enclosure limit (See Equation 3 under Further Explanation).

FOR ALL OPTIONS

Meet the requirements of the credit above and include furniture and furnishings within the project’s scope of work.
 255

BEHIND THE INTENT

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

This credit recognizes the selection of products for which the environmental impacts are well known because of
industry standard life-cycle information and reporting protocols. Environmental product declarations (EPDs) are
a standardized way of communicating the environmental effects associated with a product or system’s raw material
extraction, energy use, chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions to air, soil, and water. Although a variety
of EPD programs exist, the credit requires that EPDs come from program operators who follow the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards, the internationally recognized norm for EPDs. Project teams
using EPDs can more accurately compare and evaluate similar products, improving their decisions when selecting
materials.
As EPDs become commonplace, this credit will recognize the most advanced disclosures available. Giving
preference to products with EPDs supports the transition from a “single-attribute” approach to one that relies on
more comprehensive reporting and rewards manufacturers whose products are less harmful to the environment.
The diversity of options and compliance paths in this credit is designed to reward both initial first steps and
leadership in life-cycle information disclosure. The credit intends to help transform the market for building
products and materials for which life-cycle information is available and encourage manufacturers that have verified
their environmental performance.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select which option(s) to pursue. Products may contribute to both Options 1 and 2. Early product research
can help the project team capitalize on opportunities for products contributing to multiple credits and
options.
The required scope of this credit is permanently installed building products and furniture within the project
scope of work, excluding mechanical, plumbing, electrical (MEP), and specialty equipment and items
purchased for temporary use on the project. However, optional MEP products may be included, provided
they are also included in the other two cost-based credits, MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—
Sourcing of Raw Materials and MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—Materials Ingredients. For
more information see MR Overview, Qualifying Products and Exclusions.

MR
·· Option 1 is for projects with products with product-specific declarations or industry-wide EPDs,
or otherwise recognized USGBC-approved program. Products must be sourced from multiple
manufacturers, as indicated in the credit requirements. Various thresholds are available to
accommodate stages of EPD development in different industries. The weighted value of the product
must meet the threshold indicated in the credit requirements.
·· Option 2 is for projects with products that come from manufacturers adhering to USGBC-approved
programs that will certify verified reductions in the multiple impact categories listed in the credit
requirements. USGBC will endorse specific third-party programs if their certifications are based on
verified data. This information will be available on the USGBC website. The proportion of qualifying
materials must meet the threshold indicated in the credit requirements and includes the weighted
value of locally sourced products.

Option 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify at least 20 products from at least five different manufacturers for which the available EPDs meet
at least one of the credit criteria.
·· Include performance requirements or sole-source compliant products as applicable to the selected
option(s) in the project specifications. To ensure compliant purchases, consider creating a Division 1,
General Requirements, specification for sustainability criteria that meet MR requirements. Reference
256

that section to distinguish it from other sections that cover products and materials (see Further
Explanation, Environmental Product Declarations and Environmental Product Declaration Types).
·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations, but not if they are aesthetic variations or reconfigurations (see MR Overview,
Defining a Product).

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that selected products
meet credit requirements. To track progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into
the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent
custom tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders during buy-out and installation to ensure that
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

replacement products meet the credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully
reviewed by the design team and contractor for compliance with credit requirements.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. COUNT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

With the data collected in a tracking tool or the calculator provided by USGBC, use Equation 1 (see
Further Explanation, Calculations) to calculate the total number of products that comply with Option 1
requirements. This equation calculates compliance based on the number of products, not their cost.
·· A product is the unit of purchase. The requirement for EPDs applies to the final unit of purchase—that
is, entire assemblies, not individual components.
·· Products with EPDs that meet more than one criterion are weighted at the highest valuation factor
(not a combined factor).
·· Collect all EPDs and life-cycle assessment (LCA) reports for contributing products for credit
documentation. Ensure that EPD documentation includes a summary sheet of measured impacts.
·· Retain product data for all materials that contribute to credit achievement and be prepared to provide
it on request (see Further Explanation, Documentation of Product-Specific Declarations and Example
Documentation of an EPD).
MR

Option 2. Multi-attribute Optimization

STEP 1. RESEARCH PRODUCTS

Identify products that meet one or more of the attributes listed in the credit requirements under
Option 2. See Further Explanation, Impact Categories or Measures.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

Collect documentation of environmental claims for each product expected to contribute toward credit
achievement. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into the MR
building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent custom
tool.
·· Request documentation via correspondence with the product’s manufacturer or third-party certifying
body.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that the credit threshold will be met.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE COMPLIANCE

Purchase 50%, by cost, of permanently installed products that meet at least one of the requirements
listed in Option 2 of this credit. Calculate compliant materials using Equation 2 and the data collected in
the tracking tool (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
 257

·· Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant
building products. Once the cap on structural material is met these product can no longer contribute

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

toward the credit, but must be included in the denominator of Equation 2.
·· Some products may meet multiple criteria, or are part of assemblies (see Further Explanation,
Documentation of EPD’s, Figure 3).
Compile documentation needed to verify environmental claims for each product. Retain product data for
all materials that contribute to credit achievement.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Total number of products with environmental product declarations

# of products # of products # of
Total # of
products =
with product
specific × 0.25 + with industry
specific × 0.5 +
products
with Type × 1
declarations declarations III EPDs

EQUATION 2. Percentage of multi-attribute optimization materials cost

cost of all
location criterion location
product1
cost
permanently
installed
valuation + product2
cost
valuation valuation + ...
% of
factor factor factor
materials = prodcuts
cost
× 100
criterion valuation factor

MR
where

Product cost = cost of the product contributing toward credit. For assemblies, the cost amount contributing toward
credit is based on weight (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost).

Criterion valuation factor = weighting multiplier for the criterion. This factor will be determined for each
certification that becomes available.

Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR Overview,
Location Valuation Factor)

Equation 3: Alternative Structure & Enclosure Percentage Limit for Option 2

For projects with significant amounts of structure and enclosure materials, the following calculation can be made
to determine an alternative limit for the percentage of value that structure and enclosure materials can contribute to
credit achievement. Note: this option is only available for projects that use the actual materials cost method (not the
default cost method) to determine total project material costs.

EQUATION 3: Alternative Structure and Enclosure limit

Alternative Structure value $ of total building materials that are structural or enclosure
and Enclosure limit
=
total actual materials value $

Use the results of equation 3 to replace the 30% contribution factor limit in determining compliance with the credit..
258

ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

An EPD is a standardized way of communicating the environmental impacts, such as global warming potential and
energy resource depletion, of a product or system. A product category rule (PCR) defines how to standardize this
information for a specific product type, such as flooring. The PCR defines scope, system boundary, measurement
procedures, impact measures and other technical requirements.
PCR development is the responsibility of the EPD Program Operator and is often organized through standards
organizations or industry associations or sponsored by private or government organizations. Many countries
maintain lists of PCRs that are publicly available; private Program Operators have PRCs on their websites:
·· China EPD program, sepacec.com/cecen
·· Japan Ecoleaf program, ecoleaf-jemai.jp/eng
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· International EPD system, environdec.com/en/Product-Category-Rules

·· Institut Bauen und Umwelt (Institute Construction and Environment), bau-umwelt.de
·· Norway EPD system, epd-norge.no
·· Taiwan EPD system, pcr-library.edf.org.tw/product_country/taiwan.asp
·· Korean EPD system, eng.keiti.re.kr
·· UL Environment EPD system, ul.com/global/eng/pages/offerings/businesses/environment/services/
certification/epd
·· Global Environmental Declaration network, gednet.org

Because an EPD must have a corresponding PCR to contribute to this credit, project teams might find it useful to
research EPDs by finding out whether a PCR exists for a product type, and if so, the entity that created it. The entity
that created the PCR is likely to have used it to create an EPD.
In Option 1 Environmental Product Declaration, different thresholds are designed to accommodate varying
levels of development of EPDs across industries. For example, the flooring industry has an established PCR, and as
a result, several carpet and resilient flooring companies now provide EPDs. In industries without established PCRs,
some manufacturers provide life-cycle assessments in accordance with ISO. The credit-calculated value for an ISO
14040/44 LCA is lower, to encourage manufacturers to work through their industry associations to develop PCRs,
which allow more accurate comparisons between products in similar categories. Generic EPDs are a good starting
point for manufacturers; they provide a baseline of information for a specific product category, but are not specific to
a company or manufacturing plant.

Product-specific declarations are publicly available and critically reviewed (but not necessarily verified) by a third
MR

party to ensure that they conform to ISO 14044, which defines how LCAs are critically reviewed.

Industry-wide (generic) declarations have third-party (Type III) certification, which includes verification. The
declaration is generic to a product, such as concrete, not specific to a particular manufacturer or company. For
the product to be eligible, the manufacturer must claim representation either directly on the EPD or through the
Program Operator for the associated EPD.

Product-specific Type III declarations also use third-party certification that includes verification. Unlike generic
EPDs, however, product-specific declarations are specific to a particular manufacturer and do not necessarily reflect
the practices of the rest of the industry.

A Type III EPD uses data from a life-cycle assessment (LCA) and is defined by the PCR so that all EPDs for a product
are comparable. LCA data can also be aggregated to produce a representative EPD of several products in the same
family (type). ISO has developed several standards regarding independent verification of quantitative data (the
LCA), PCR development, and EPD review and publication. EPDs can be found on manufacturers’ websites or the
program operator’s website or can be requested from the manufacturer.
For this credit, the scope of any EPD must be at least cradle-to-gate—that is, it must cover the part of a product’s
life cycle from extraction (“cradle”) and material processing to creation of the final product ready for sale by the
manufacturer (“gate”); it excludes transportation from the factory to distributors or end customers. EPDs that cover
only manufacture (“gate to gate”) do not contribute toward the credit.
 259

All EPDs must be consistent with ISO standards 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930. These standards
address how to set up and perform LCA, how LCA feeds into an EPD, and the appropriate level of detail and content

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

to be included in an EPD (see Referenced Standards).
For products not included in EN 15804 or the superseded ISO 21930 (i.e., furniture and other items not
considered building products), conformance to ISO 14025 only is acceptable.
EN 15804 is a European standard for PCR development. Products using EN 15804 in North America are expected
to adapt regionally specific aspects of the EN standard for North America. Declaration Holders should work with the
Program Operator to perform these adaptations.
To contribute to the credit threshold, the EPD must include statements of compliance with a specific PCR and
compliance with the ISO standards.

Commissioning
(Individual or group)

Implementation

Life Cycle
Product Category PCR Verification
Inventory
Rules
Data Collection (3rd Party)

Life Cycle
Assessment

Environmental
Product
Declaration
(program operator)

OR
EPD Verification EPD Verification

MR
(program operator) (3rd Party)

Publication
(program operator)

Figure 1. EPD process

TABLE 1. EPD process comparison

Product specific declaration Industry wide EPD Product-specific EPD

Data are critically reviewed X X X

Data are specific to product X X
Data are reported according to a PCR possibly X

For a manufacturer, the EPD process is as follows:

1. A manufacturer searches for existing product category rules for its product category (aka the product type)
see list above for regional entities that maintain PCR libraries.
If a PCR does not exist, manufacturers work with a program operator to convene a group and develop product
category rules for the product type. This process includes a proposal, draft creation, open consultation, panel
review, and approval and publication of product category rules.
260

2. The manufacturer conducts a life-cycle assessment, based on the product’s goals and functional unit, global
warming potential, primary energy demand, contribution to acidification and eutrophication, and other
environmental indicators.
3. The manufacturer creates the EPD using this information and initiates verification by a third party, which
determines whether the LCA followed the correct ISO processes and the EPD was created according to the
PCR.
4. The manufacturer registers the declaration with a program operator, which verifies the EPD according to ISO
standards. Examples of program operators include UL Environmental, ICC-ES, ASTM, NSF, FP Innovations,
the Institute for Environmental Research and Education.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTATION OF PRODUCT-SPECIFIC DECLARATIONS

Product-specific declarations are defined for this credit as declarations that are based on a life-cycle assessment
of a product but not constituting a full EPD. To document this claim, the project team must provide the following
information:
·· Name (declaration holder or producer, typically the manufacturer)
·· Contact information
·· Product type
·· Product name
·· Product description
·· Summary of impact categories measured and overall values
·· Functional unit
·· Standards met
·· Independent review entity’s name and statement

DOCUMENTATION OF EPDS
For industry-wide (generic) declarations and product-specific Type III declarations, the project team must provide
the following:
·· Declaration holder (the company, usually the manufacturer, that the EPD is attributed to)
·· EPD program operator (the entity that creates and registers the EPD)
MR

·· LCA verifier (the third-party entity that verifies the life-cycle assessment)
·· PCR reviewer (the third-party entity that has reviewed the product category rules)

During the selection of products with EPDs, identify two items about the document: the type of EPD it is, and the
summary that will be uploaded for credit compliance. Figure 2 illustrates an EPD created by Interface Flor for Type 6
Nylon with GlasBac.
 261

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

This EPD is for a
single product

This EPD has a

reviewed PCR

This EPD was

performed
according
to ISO 14044

Figure 2. Example of EPD that meets requirements of Type III. Used with permission from Interface.

Such a summary is preferable to the full document, provided it includes the following:
·· Name (declaration holder, the producer or group of producers; each producer must be listed to claim
the credit)
·· Program operator
·· Contact information

MR
·· Product type
·· Product name
·· Product description
·· Product category rule (title)
·· Certification period
·· Declaration number
·· Summary of impact categories measured and overall values
·· Functional unit
·· Standards met
·· Independent verification body (may be the same as the program operator)
262
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
MR

Figure 3. Sample EPD for carpet tile product. Used with permission from Interface.

IMPACT CATEGORIES OR MEASURES

Option 2 lists a series of environmental indicators targeted for reduction. These impact measures originate from
those used in a life cycle assessment (LCA). In the case of option 2, manufacturers or third party programs would be
conducting the LCA and releasing results to project teams for documentation of
this option.

The impacts measured in LCA are divided into two categories, as described in ISO 21930–2007. Impacts are either
expressed in terms of the categories of life-cycle impact assessments (LCIA) or derived from a life-cycle inventory
(LCI) and not assigned to impact categories. LCIA is an additional step in analysis that interprets and quantifies the
resulting ecological effects of resources used and waste emitted over the life-cycle of the product. In contrast, LCI
simply quantifies flows in and out of the process in terms of resources used and depleted and waste created.

The first five measures specified in the credit requirements are impact categories of LCIA; they are the only LCI
categories cited in ISO 21930. Other LCIA measures are in use or being developed (e.g., human health and ecotoxicity
 263

measures) but are less quantifiable than the measures required for LEED, although they may be reported separately.
Other impact assessment methods not listed in Table 4 may be used if the reasons are justified and documented.

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

The sixth measure in the list, depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, is in the second category because it
is derived directly from the LCI (defined in the ISO standard as “phase of life-cycle assessment involving the
compilation and quantification of inputs and outputs for a product throughout its life-cycle”).

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking tool X X

EPD and LCA reports or compliant summary documents for 100% of products contributing toward credit X

Documentation of compliance with USGBC-approved program X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. Locally sourced
materials contributing to the credit may also contribute to this related credit if compliant harvesting or extraction
can be confirmed.

MR
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients. Manufacturers whose
products and materials have EPDs may report ingredients. Ensure that the level of detail reported meets the credit
requirements. If the level of detail is sufficient, the product can contribute to both this credit and the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This is a new credit.
·· Some materials excluded from MR credits in the past may now be included, such as mechanical fixtures,
fittings, and rough-in materials that are considered nonmotorized MEP components.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
International Standard ISO 14021-1999, Environmental labels and declarations. Self Declared Claims (Type
II Environmental Labeling): iso.org

International Standard ISO 14025–2006, Environmental labels and declarations (Type III Environmental
Declarations—Principles and Procedures): iso.org
264

International Standard ISO 14040–2006, Environmental management. Life cycle assessment principals, and
frameworks: iso.org

International Standard ISO 14044–2006, Environmental management. Life cycle assessment requirements,
and guidelines: iso.org

CEN Comité Européen de Normalisation (European Committee for Standardization) EN 15804—2012

Sustainability of construction works. Environmental product declarations. Core rules for the product
category of construction products: cen.eu

International Standard ISO 21930–2007 Sustainability in building construction -- Environmental declaration

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of building products: iso.org

Federal Trade Commission, Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 16 CFR 260.7 (e): ftc.gov/
bcp/grnrule/guides980427.htm

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Source at least 40 qualifying products from five manufacturers.

Option 2. Purchase 75%, by cost, of permanently installed building products that meet the required attributes.

DEFINITIONS
cradle-to-gate assessment analysis of a product’s partial life cycle, from resource extraction (cradle) to the factory
gate (before it is transported for distribution and sale). It omits the use and the disposal phases of the product.

enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,
crawl space, basement).
MR

environmental product declaration a statement that the item meets the environmental requirements of ISO
14021–1999, ISO 14025–2006 and EN 15804, or ISO 21930–2007.

life-cycle assessment an evaluation of the environmental effects of a product from cradle to grave, as defined by ISO
14040–2006 and ISO 14044–2006

product (permanently installed building product) an item that arrives on the project site either as a finished
element ready for installation or as a component to another item assembled on-site. The product unit is defined
by the functional requirement for use in the project; this includes the physical components and services needed to
serve the intended function of the permanently installed building product. In addition, similar products within a
specification can each contribute as separate products.

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous
 265

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—Sourcing
of Raw Materials
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

To encourage the use of products and materials for which life cycle
information is available and that have environmentally, economically,

MR
and socially preferable life cycle impacts. To reward project teams
for selecting products verified to have been extracted or sourced in a
responsible manner.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. RAW MATERIAL SOURCE AND EXTRACTION REPORTING (1 POINT)

Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that have publicly
released a report from their raw material suppliers which include raw material supplier extraction locations, a
commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use, a commitment to reducing environmental harms
from extraction and/or manufacturing processes, and a commitment to meeting applicable standards or programs
voluntarily that address responsible sourcing criteria.
·· Products sourced from manufacturers with self-declared reports are valued as one half (½) of a product for
credit achievement.
266

·· Third-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) which include environmental impacts of extraction
operations and activities associated with the manufacturer’s product and the product’s supply chain, are
valued as one whole product for credit achievement calculation. Acceptable CSR frameworks include the
following:
°° Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report
°° Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Develoment (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises
°° U.N. Global Compact: Communication of Progress
°° ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility
°° USGBC approved program: Other USGBC approved programs meeting the CSR criteria.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OPTION 2. LEADERSHIP EXTRACTION PRACTICES (1 POINT)

Use products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria below for at least 25%, by cost, of the total
value of permanently installed building products in the project.
·· Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that participates in
an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility.
Products meeting extended producer responsibility criteria are valued at 50% of their cost for the purposes of
credit achievement calculation.
·· Bio-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable
Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally
harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other
animal skin material. Products meeting bio-based materials criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the
purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· Wood products. Wood products must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-approved
equivalent. Products meeting wood products criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
·· Materials reuse. Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products. Products meeting materials reuse
criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· Recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the
preconsumer recycled content, based on cost. Products meeting recycled content criteria are valued at 100%
MR

of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation

·· USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting leadership extraction criteria.

For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, and purchased) within 100 miles
(160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit achievement calculation,
the base contributing cost of individual products compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not
permitted to exceed 100% its total actual cost (before regional multipliers) and double counting of single product
components compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not permitted and in no case is a product
permitted to contribute more than 200% of its total actual cost.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
Projects with significant amounts of structural and enclosure materials may exceed the 30% limit by calculating an
alternative structure and enclosure limit (See Equation 3 under Further Explanation).

FOR ALL OPTIONS

Meet the requirements of the credit above and include furniture and furnishings within the project’s scope of work.
 267

BEHIND THE INTENT

Raw material extraction has a direct environmental impact on Earth’s ecosystems. For example, conventional
logging is the largest source of deforestation in Latin America and subtropical Asia, accounting for more than 70%
of resource depletion; mining operations clear another 18% of the world’s forests. Unmanaged extraction practices
can cause not only deforestation but also degradation of water sources, habitat loss, threats to rare and endangered

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

species, releases of toxic chemicals, and the infringement of indigenous peoples’ rights.
This credit encourages the use of responsibly sourced and extracted materials through reporting and
demonstration of responsible extraction practices. Corporate sustainability reports (CSRs), based on widely
recognized frameworks and standards, can shed light on product supply chains and identify sources of raw material
extraction. CSRs have become increasingly popular among all types of businesses, from retail organizations to
product manufacturers. As sustainability goals become more prominent, CSRs provide frameworks that allow
transparency and environmental impacts to be assessed, improved, and compared with other companies.
In addition to seeking the responsible sourcing of virgin materials, teams are also encouraged to reduce raw
material usage by selecting reused and recycled materials. Teams may also follow leadership performance standards
and certifications that encourage local sourcing. To recognize the rapidly changing marketplace conditions for
product and material reporting, this credit has an additional “USGBC-approved program” criterion designed to
recognize any leadership certification programs that may be developed in the future.
By increasing the demand for transparency in mining, quarrying, agriculture, forestry, and other industries, this
credit rewards environmental impact reductions that go beyond the individual project and have positive effects on
the sources of project materials.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select which option(s) to pursue. Projects can earn a maximum of 2 points by achieving the requirements for
both options, and products may contribute to both options 1 and 2 simultaneously. Early product research
can help the project team capitalize on opportunities for products contributing to multiple credits and
options.

MR
The required scope of this credit is permanently installed building products and furniture within the project
scope of work, excluding mechanical, plumbing, electrical (MEP), and specialty equipment and items
purchased for temporary use on the project. However, optional MEP products may be included, provided
they are also included in the other two cost-based credits, MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—
Environmental Product Declarations and MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—Material
Ingredients. For more information see MR Overview, Qualifying Products and Exclusions.
·· Option 1 Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting is for projects that have products consisting
of materials from manufacturers that have reported sustainable sourcing and extraction methods
according to an acceptable framework, as indicated in the credit requirements. Products must be
sourced from the minimum number of manufacturers as specified in the credit requirements.
·· Option 2 Leadership Extraction Practices is for projects that have products and/or constituent
materials that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria listed in the credit.

Option 1. Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify products from manufacturers that can provide reports of raw materials from their suppliers.
·· To meet the credit requirements, reports must include information on the following:
°° Raw material supplier extraction locations
°° Commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use
268

°° Commitment to reducing environmental harms from extraction and manufacturing processes

°° Commitment to meeting voluntary standards or programs that address responsible sourcing
·· The reports may be available in the form of a corporate sustainability report (CSR) (see Further
Explanation, Raw Material Reporting and Corporate Sustainability Reports).
·· Include performance requirements or sole-source compliant products as applicable to the selected
option(s) in the project specifications. To ensure compliant purchases, consider creating a Division 1,
General Requirements, specification for sustainability criteria that meet MR requirements. Reference
that section to distinguish it from other sections that cover products and materials.
·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations but not if they are aesthetic variations or reconfigurations (see MR Overview,
Defining a Product).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Research sourcing disclosure reports for contributing products. Third-party verified reports—also
called externally assured reports—are counted at full value for credit compliance; self-declared reports
are counted at half value. Retain all reports for credit documentation.
·· For a material procured directly from a raw material supplier, such as timber from a forest products
company or stone from a quarry, verify that any reporting meets the requirements.
·· For a product made by a manufacturer that uses raw materials extracted by others, ask the
manufacturer or supplier to provide documentation of compliant reporting.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

Track purchasing of products throughout the construction of the project. To review progress toward
credit achievement, regularly enter information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization
calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent custom tool.
·· The best source of documentation is the manufacturer or the organization that manages the reporting
program. Reports are typically available online, but in some cases it might be necessary to contact a
company representative. Documentation may also be available from third-party websites that compile
the information of many companies in one place. Use formal correspondence to request CSRs or other
documentation indicating that the required information has been disclosed if it is not readily available.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the credit
requirements.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS AND COMPILE

DOCUMENTATION
MR

Using the data collected in the tracking tool, calculate the number of compliant products, using
Equation 1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· In this option, compliance is based on the number of products, not their cost.
·· Collect all sourcing disclosure reports. Retain the reports for all materials that contribute to credit
achievement.

Option 2. Leadership Extraction Practices

STEP 1. RESEARCH PRODUCTS

Specify products that meet one or more of the criteria listed in the credit requirements.
·· Different components or ingredients in a product may contribute to different credit criteria.
·· Each product, component, or ingredient that meets several criteria receives credit for each criterion
met. For exceptions see Further Explanation, Calculating FSC Credit Contributions.
Review preliminary design concepts and identify opportunities to use and procure biobased, qualified
wood as well as salvaged and recycled-content materials and products covered by extended producer
responsibility, especially for applications that use either significant quantities of materials or small
amounts of high-cost materials.
·· The amount of biobased content in a product is determined by the manufacturer according to ASTM
Standard D6866. Testing per ASTM Standard D6866 may be necessary to determine the fraction of
biobased content if it cannot be determined by other means (see Further Explanation, Documentation
for Wood and Biobased Products).
 269

·· Wood must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) unless it is considered reused,
salvaged, or recycled. Look for vendors that hold an FSC chain-of-custody certificate. Material covered
by both FSC and the Sustainable Agriculture Standard, such as non-wood forest products and
bamboo, may be certified under either FSC or Sustainable Agriculture Network standards (see Further
Explanation, Materials Reuse Considerations).
·· Extended producer responsibility (also known as a closed-loop recycling program and as product

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

take-back) puts a used product back into the production stream (see Further Explanation, Extended
Producer Responsibility). The program can be sponsored by the product’s manufacturer or other
service.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction product submittals to ensure that the
selected products meet credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly
enter information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by
USGBC or an equivalent custom tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the
credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE PRODUCT AND MATERIAL COSTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

Use Equation 2 to determine the total value of compliant products (see Further Explanation,
Calculations). Compliance is based on products’ cost.
·· Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant
building products. Once the cap on structural material is met, these products can no longer contribute
toward the credit but must be included in the denominator of Equation 2.
·· Some products may meet multiple criteria or are part of assemblies (see MR Overview, Determining
Material Contributions).
·· Collect documentation. For certification programs, provide documentation for all products.

MR
FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Number of products with raw material extraction reporting

# of products
# of products
with
Total # of with 3rd
products = manufacturer × 0.5 + party verified × 1
declared
reports
reports
270

EQUATION 2. Percentage of responsibly sourced products

applicable criterion1 location applicable criterion2 location

% of
product valuation valuation + product valuation valuation + ...
cost1 factor factor cost2 factor factor
materials =
cost

× 100
Cost of all permanently installed prodcuts
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

where
Product cost = the cost of the product contributing toward credit (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost).

Criterion valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each sourcing criterion. Criteria are:
·· Bio-based nonwood products meeting Sustainable Agriculture Standard, value 1.0, by cost
·· Wood products certified to FSC standards, 1.0 value (see Further Explanation, Calculating FSC Credit
Contributions).
·· Reused materials, value 1.0, by cost
·· Postconsumer recycled materials, value 1.0, by cost
·· Preconsumer recycled materials, value 0.5, by cost
·· Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR
Overview, Location Valuation Factor)
·· Extended producer responsibility is valued at 50%; that is, the valuation factor is 0.5. Products that are part of
an extended producer responsibility program may be counted in their entirety even if only part of the product
is recycled.

Equation 3: Alternative Structure & Enclosure Percentage Limit for Option 2

For projects with significant amounts of structure and enclosure materials, the following calculation can be made
to determine an alternative limit for the percentage of value that structure and enclosure materials can contribute to
credit achievement. Note: this option is only available for projects that use the actual materials cost method (not the
default cost method) to determine total project material costs.
MR

EQUATION 3: Alternative Structure and Enclosure limit

Alternative Structure value $ of total building materials that are structural or enclosure
and Enclosure limit
=
total actual materials value $

Use the results of equation 3 to replace the 30% contribution factor limit in determining compliance with the credit.

RAW MATERIAL REPORTING AND CORPORATE SUSTAINABILITY REPORTS

For a product to count toward credit achievement, its report must be current for the product at its time of
installation. Reports published within one year of the project’s LEED registration date, or reports that cover a period
that ends within that year are acceptable.
A compliant report must be issued by either the manufacturer or the raw material supplier and cover at least
the criteria listed in the rating system requirements. At least 90% of the contents of each product must be from raw
materials covered by a compliant report; no partial credit is allowed for products that do not meet this threshold.
Reports obtained directly from raw material suppliers must verify the use of the raw material in products purchased
for the project building. A manufacturer’s report must trace activities to the source of extraction of the product’s raw
materials. In either case, acceptable frameworks for raw material reporting include the following:
 271

Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report

The GRI reporting framework is widely recognized as the most comprehensive. Its corporate sustainability reporting
program offers reporting services, a publicly available database of reports, and tracking of required progress. Reports
are assigned a score of A, B, or C, reflecting how closely the framework was followed in the report; this letter grade is
not an indicator of quality but pertains only to the application.

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

The reporting framework also supports third-party verification (“external assurance”) through a network of
approved assurance providers. A plus sign (+) after the score indicates that the report has been externally assured.
For a product to count toward credit achievement, the “assurance scope” must cover either the entire report or
all sections of the report that directly address raw materials extraction practices. The “level of assurance” for the
relevant sections must be “reasonable/high” for the report to be considered third-party verified. If the level is
“limited/moderate,” the report is not considered third-party verified for the purposes of this credit. The report can
still count as a manufacturer-declared report, however, provided it includes all the information specified in the credit
requirements.
A report status of “GRI-checked” or “third-party checked” applies only to the application level. These checks are
not the same as external assurance and do not qualify the report as third-party verified for the purposes of this credit.
For more details on these report qualifiers, refer to globalreporting.org/resourcelibrary/GRI-Data-Legend-
Sustianability-Disclosure-Database-Profiling.pdf. The framework can also be used as a stand-alone guidance
document. The current version of the framework is G3.1. The next version, G4, is intended to align better with other
reporting programs worldwide.

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises
These guidelines are a comprehensive corporate social responsibility instrument developed by governments.
The recommendations, addressed to multinational enterprises operating in or from adhering countries, set forth
voluntary principles and standards for responsible business conduct in such areas as employment and industrial
relations, human rights, environment, information disclosure, antibribery practices, consumer interests, science
and technology, competition, and taxation. The guidelines are general and not intended to define specific reporting
requirements, so it is up to the product’s manufacturer to ensure that its report covers the required measures and, if
it is third-party verified, that the verification process is truly independent. Project teams should seek a signed letter
from the manufacturer on company letterhead attesting to that conformance with the credit requirements.

UN Global Compact: Communication of Progress

The UNGC is a policy framework for the development, implementation, and disclosure of 10 sustainability

MR
principles in four core areas: human rights, labor, environment, and anticorruption. The GRI Sustainability
Reporting Guidelines can be used to produce the Global Compact’s annual Communication on Progress, the
mechanism that UNGC uses to demonstrate progress toward its principles. The GRI guidelines provide a structure
for reporting and independent verification. See the GRI Sustainability Reports section, above, for details on how to
use that format to meet the credit requirements. Project teams should seek a signed letter from the manufacturer on
company letterhead attesting to conformance with the credit requirements.

ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility

ISO 26000 provides guidance on how businesses and organizations can operate in an ethical and transparent way
that contributes to the health and welfare of society. Not a standard to which a company’s report can be certified,
it helps clarify what social responsibility is, helps businesses and organizations translate principles into effective
actions, and shares best practices relating to social responsibility.
To document product compliance with Option 1, provide a publicly available document confirming the
manufacturer’s third-party-verified corporate sustainability report. Reports are often available on websites, but
because web pages can change without notice, project teams are advised to print and retain paper copies.

EXTENDED PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY

Extended producer responsibility (EPR) is a waste management strategy that promotes integrating the life-cycle
environmental costs associated with goods into the market price of the products. EPR is based on the idea that
because producers have the greatest control over product design, they also have the ability and responsibility to
reduce their products’ toxicity and waste.
272

The Organisation for Economic Co-Operation and Development (OECD) defines extended producer
responsibility as an environmental policy approach in which a producer’s responsibility for a product is extended
to the postconsumer stage of the product’s life cycle. An EPR policy (1) shifts responsibility (physically and/or
economically, fully or partially) upstream toward the producer and away from municipalities; and (2) creates
incentives for producers to take into account environmental considerations when designing their products. There
are two basic types of EPR programs:
·· Manufacturer-based programs. The manufacturer of the product has a take-back or recycling program for
the product purchased (Figure 1). Documentation for Option 2 can be a brochure describing the EPR program
and including contact information, plus proof that the product purchased for the project is included in the
program. Documentation may also be a letter from the manufacturer verifying that an EPR program is in place
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

and that the product purchased for the project is eligible, with contact information.
·· Third-party program. In some cases a separate business collects material and sells or transports it back
to manufacturers. Verifying that the material is in fact recycled is of the utmost importance. Acceptable
documentation is a brochure that describes the recycling process and states the average rate of return for the
material.
MR

Figure 1. Education pamphlet about extended producer responsibilty from Armstrong for commercial ceiling tiles.

DOCUMENTATION FOR WOOD AND BIO-BASED PRODUCTS

Documentation for Wood
To contribute toward credit achievement, wood products that are not reused, salvaged, or recycled must be certified
to the standards of the Forest Stewardship Council. Bamboo, nonwood forest products, and other materials that are
not actually wood but are certified by FSC can count toward this credit. Collect vendor invoices for wood products
purchased for the project (see Further Explanation, FSC Chain of Custody).

Documentation for Biobased materials

Biobased products are defined by ASTM D6866, but testing (by the manufacturer or a contracted party) is not
required in all cases. Manufacturers use this test to determine the amount of biobased material in a product. If the
percentage of biobased materials, by weight, in the product are known, testing to this standard may not be necessary.
 273

Nonwood products must be grown on farms that meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard of the Sustainable
Agricultural Network (SAN). Products originating on farms that meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard must
adhere to the guidelines and policies of the Rainforest Alliance—including traceability, chain of custody and use of
seal—and receive pre-approval from the Rainforest Alliance in order to bear the Rainforest Alliance Certified™ seal.
The Rainforest Alliance is a member of SAN and hosts its international secretariat, providing traceability, market

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

linkages, and technical assistance. Several certification bodies in different countries are accredited to conduct
Rainforest Alliance certification. A full listing of certified farms and operations can be found on the SAN website,
sanstandards.org. A list of Rainforest Certified products can be found at rainforest-alliance.org. To date, nearly all
Rainforest Alliance Certified agricultural products are foods, coffee, tea, and cut flowers.
Because the number of Rainforest Alliance–certified crops in building materials is limited, project teams may
include products with manufacturer-declared conformance to the Sustainable Agriculture Standard (except bamboo
and nonwood forest products that could be FSC certified) under the following three conditions:
·· The product’s manufacturer provides a signed letter on company letterhead from the raw material supplier
attesting that its practices meet the standard.
·· The letter includes a link to a publicly available document that specifies how the raw material supplier’s
practices conform to each paragraph in all 10 sections of the standard and attesting that each “critical
criterion” is met.
·· Both the letter and the detailed documentation are dated within one year before the date of project
registration.

FSC CHAIN OF CUSTODY

Chain-of-Custody (CoC) certification requirements are established by Forest Stewardship Council Chain of
Custody Standard 40-004 v3-0. To view this and all FSC standards, see the FSC website, ic.fsc.org, for listings.
Every entity that processes or trades FSC-certified material before it is shipped to the project site must have FSC
CoC certification. On-site installers of FSC-certified products must have CoC certification only if they modify the
products off the project site.

CALCULATING FSC CREDIT CONTRIBUTIONS

FSC-certified products must be itemized on the vendor’s invoice. Their value toward credit contribution is
calculated as one of the following, as determined by the FSC claim on the invoice provided by the supplier:

MR
·· Products identified as FSC 100% contribute 100% FSC content.
·· Products identified as FSC Mix Credit contribute 100% FSC content.
·· Products identified as FSC Mix [NN]% contribute the FSC content percentage indicated. For example, a
product identified as “FSC Mix 75%” is valued at 75% of the product’s cost (Equation 3).

EQUATION 3. Credit contribution of FSC Mix

FSC product value ($) = Total product cost ($) × FSC Mix [NN] %

·· Products identified as FSC Recycled Credit contribute 100% postconsumer recycled content.
·· Products identified as FSC Recycled [NN] % contribute the percentage postconsumer recycled content
percentage indicated [NN].

Multiple Sustainable Claims and FSC

FSC and recycled content. Some products identified as FSC Mix Credit or FSC Mix [NN] % also have pre- or
postconsumer recycled content, the latter of which is commonly reported separately by the product manufacturer.
In these instances the project team must choose whether to classify the product (or some fraction of the assembly)
as FSC certified or as recycled content; the material cannot contribute to both claims simultaneously.
FSC and SAN certified products. Products certified by both FSC and to the Sustainable Agriculture Standard they
may receive credit for each criteria.
274

Documenting FSC Claims

Project teams must document FSC certification for all wood products that contribute to credit achievement. FSC-
certified products qualify for credit only when purchased from a vendor with an FSC chain-of-custody certificate
that is current at the time of sale. The status of a CoC certification can be verified at info.fsc.org.
Each product shipped to the project site and contributing toward credit must be documented by an invoice from
the CoC certificate holder as follows:
·· The invoice must have the vendor’s CoC certificate code (e.g., RA-COC-001025, SCS-COC-000345, or SGS-
COC-002563). The invoice must itemize FSC-certified products and specific FSC claims.
·· The invoice may aggregate the value of products, provided the cost of FSC products is isolated from other
wood products and the vendor’s CoC certificate code is on the invoice.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· The invoice must show the entity being invoiced and indicate the delivery is intended for the LEED project.

An alternative documentation process is available for architectural woodworkers (manufacturers of millwork,

casework, and furniture) who supply custom wood products to the project. The purpose of this alternative process is
to allow FSC-certified materials used in a custom millwork, casework, or furniture package to contribute toward the
credit even if the entire package is not eligible to be invoiced with a FSC claim. Documentation for this alternative
process must meet all of the following requirements:
·· The woodworker (whether an individual or a company) must be FSC CoC certified, and the CoC certificate
number must appear on the project invoice.
·· The woodworker must install the custom millwork, casework, or furniture.
·· The woodworker’s invoice must isolate product costs from installation costs.
·· The woodworker must provide a document, separate from the project invoice, detailing FSC-certified wood
materials used and total cost of wood materials used. (The woodworker does not need to provide itemized
material cost calculations but must maintain calculation records for auditing purposes by the FSC certifying
body.)
·· The contract cost may include assembly labor but must exclude on-site labor (see MR Overview, Determining
Product Cost).

The project team should complete a spreadsheet itemizing wood components by cost and identifying FSC-certified
and noncertified components to determine overall contributions to the credit, to be entered into the MR calculator.
Calculate the FSC-certified contribution value toward the credit by multiplying the percentage of FSC-certified
wood by the overall value of the contract. Calculate the percentage of FSC-certified wood by dividing the cost of
MR

FSC-certified wood by the total cost of the wood.

Submit the FSC-certified contribution value as well as the total contract amount. Include the woodworker’s CoC
certificate number, invoice, and itemized costs.

MATERIAL REUSE CONSIDERATIONS

Determine the cost of each material. The cost of reused or reclaimed materials is either the actual cost paid or, the
replacement value, whichever is higher.
The replacement value can be determined by pricing a comparable material in the local market; exclude labor and
shipping. If a project team receives a discount from a vendor, the replacement value should be the discounted price,
not the list value.
If the actual cost of the reused or salvaged material is below the cost of an equivalent new item, use the higher
value (actual cost) of the new item. If the cost to reclaim an item found on site is less than the cost of an equivalent
new item, use the cost of the new item (or replacement cost).
Generally, opportunities to reuse building materials may be limited. Core materials that may be eligible include
salvaged brick, structural timber, railroad ties, stone, and pavers. When considering the reuse of salvaged materials,
confirm that they do not contain toxic substances, such as lead or asbestos.

Reused Materials Found On-Site

Components that are retained either in their original function or in a new role are eligible for this credit. For reused
materials found on site, the source location distance is zero.
 275

Reused Materials Found Off-Site

Materials obtained off-site qualify as reused if they were previously used in a building or other application. These
materials may be purchased as salvaged, like any other project material, or moved from another facility, including
facilities used or owned by the LEED project owner.
For salvaged furniture taken from the owner’s previous facility or location, demonstrate that these materials

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

were purchased at least two years before the date of project registration. For example, if the owner is moving to a
new building, furniture and furnishings relocated to the new site can contribute to this credit because their reuse will
eliminate the need for purchasing new furniture and furnishings. Alternatively, furniture that is leased must have
been in service for at least two years before being installed in the current project. Document this claim.

Location Valuation Factor for Salvaged or Reused Materials

For reused materials, the source location of extraction or harvest is the location of the materials before their removal
to the project site.
For material taken directly from another building, the source location is the building. For items purchased from
a building materials salvage store or recycling facility, the source location is the store or facility. In this case, it is not
necessary to track material to the original building.

RECYCLED CONTENT
Recycled content claims for products must conform to the definition in ISO 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and
Declarations, Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling).
Many common materials have recycled content because of how they are manufactured; examples are steel,
gypsum board, and acoustical ceiling tile. Design and construction teams may need to research which materials
contain high levels of recycled content or verify which factories and which models of a product line feature the
desired recycled content. Average recycled content claims given in a range are not acceptable for the purposes of this
criterion.
Although it is a good practice, reusing materials reclaimed from the same process in which they were generated
does not contribute toward the recycled content of the material. Putting waste back into the same manufacturing
process from which it came is not considered recycling because it was not diverted from the waste stream.
Reuse of materials includes rework, regrind, or scrap product (ISO 14021); these count as preconsumer recycled
only if they are used in a different product than the one whose production generated the waste. For example, glass
culls that are reused to make new glass products do not count, but planer shavings, plytrim, sawdust, chips, bagasse,
and sunflower seed hulls are considered preconsumer recycled content when used to make new products. .

MR
Distinguish between postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content when tracking materials for the purpose
of credit calculations. To calculate the percentage of recycled-content materials used in a project, list all recycled-
content materials and products and their costs. For each product, identify the percentage of postconsumer and/or
preconsumer recycled content by weight, and list the recycled content information source. The information must
come from a reliable, verifiable source, such as the product’s manufacturer.

Postconsumer Recycled Content

Postconsumer recycled content is consumer waste, much of which comes from residential curbside recycling
programs for aluminum, glass, plastic, and paper. Other postconsumer feedstock is generated when construction
and demolition debris is recycled. To be a feedstock, the raw materials must have served a useful purpose in the
consumer market before being used again.

Preconsumer Recycled Content

Preconsumer recycled content comes from process waste that is used to make a different product. For instance,
a composite board manufacturer may use sawdust from a lumber mill or waste straw from a wheat farm. This
definition does not include in-house industrial scrap or trimmings, which are normally fed back into the same
manufacturing process.
The end product must be considered when determining whether a waste product is preconsumer or
postconsumer. For example, a power plant’s end product is electricity, so waste products from the combustion of
coal may be considered preconsumer waste but not postconsumer; the power plant is not an end-use consumer of
the coal.
276

Default Recycled Content

For steel products where no recycled content information is available, assume the recycled content to be 25%
postconsumer. No other material is known to have a similarly consistent minimum recycled content.
Many steel products contain 90% or higher recycled content if manufactured by the electric arc furnace process,
so it may be beneficial to obtain actual information from the manufacturer rather than relying on the default value.

Average Recycled Content

Recycled content claims must be specific to the installed product. Installed product refers to a item distinguished by
color, type, and/or location of manufacture, as identified to the consumer by SKU or other means.
Project teams may use the average recycled content value provided by a single manufacturer for a single product.
Recycled content claims for custom products must be product specific; industry-wide or national averages are not
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

acceptable. In all cases, if recycled content is given as a range, use the lowest recycled-content percentage.

EXAMPLES
Option 2 Example Calculation: MDF Panel with FSC-Certified Veneer
A project is installing $10,000 worth of veneer paneling. The MDF core is 90% of the product by weight, of which
80% is preconsumer waste wood that meets the ISO 14021 requirement. The veneer is 10% of the product by weight
and FSC certified. The MDF is extracted, manufactured, and purchased within 100 miles (160 km); the veneer is
imported.

TABLE 1. Sample calculation for product assembly meeting sustainable criteria

Sustainable criteria
Percentage Location
Value of Sustainable
Component of product by valuation
component Percentage of criteria value
weight Requirement factor?
component

Preconsumer
MDF core 90% $9,000 80% Yes $7,200
recycled content
Veneer 10% $1,000 100% FSC certified No $1,000

Total sustainable criteria value $8,200

Option 2 Example Calculation: Salvaged Doors

A project team purchases 50 doors salvaged from a local deconstruction site and sold through a local Habitat for
MR

Humanity ReStore for $500. The value of equivalent new doors is documented at $400 each, or $20,000. Their
contribution to the credit is as follows:
$20,00 × 1.0 criterion valuation × 2.0 location valuation = $40,000

($40,000 / $800,000) × 100 = 5%

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking tool X X

Corporate sustainability reports for 100% of products contributing toward credit X

Documentation of product claims for credit requirements or other USGBC approved program X
 277

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction, Option 1. Reused, salvaged, and refurbished floors, walls, and
ceilings may contribute to either this credit (on the basis of cost) or the related credit (on the basis of surface area)
but may not be double-counted.

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

MR Credit Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction, Option 2. Reused, salvaged, and refurbished furniture that
contributes to the related option may be double-counted under this credit but must be included consistently across
all Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations. Products

may be double-counted if they meet the requirements of both credits.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients. Products may be double-
counted if they meet the requirements of both credits.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Multiple criteria from the following LEED 2009 credits have been combined into this credit. Except as noted,
the criteria are unchanged from LEED 2009. Other criteria are now incorporated into other MR credits, such as
Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction and Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product
Declarations (see Related Credit Tips).
·· MR Credit Resource Reuse. Materials that are reused on-site are no longer required to be repurposed.
·· MR Credit Recycled Content. The requirements for recycled content have not changed; however, this
criterion is now combined with other criteria in a single option.
·· MR Credit Regional Materials. The 500-mile (805-km) radius requirement was decreased to 100 miles (160
km). The definition of regional has been expanded to include the distribution and purchase location and now
includes all points of manufacture.
·· MR Credit Rapidly Renewable Materials. Biobased materials are no longer defined by the harvest cycle of
the raw materials; instead, products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard to count toward this
credit.

MR
REFERENCED STANDARDS
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report: globalreporting.org/Pages/default.aspx

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises: oecd.org/daf/internationalinvestment/guidelinesformultinationalenterprises/

U.N. Global Compact, Communication of Progress: unglobalcompact.org/cop/index.html

ISO 26000—2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility: iso.org/iso/home/standards/iso26000.htm

Forest Stewardship Council: ic.fsc.org

Sustainable Agriculture Network: www.sanstandards.org

The Rainforest Alliance: rainforest-alliance.org/

ASTM Test Method D6866: astm.org/Standards/D6866.htm

International Standards ISO 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and Declarations—Self Declared

Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling): iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=23146
278

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Source at least 40 products from five manufacturers.

Option 2. Purchase 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products that meet the
responsible extraction criteria.

DEFINITIONS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

bio-based material commercial or industrial products (other than food or feed) that are composed in whole, or
in significant part, of biological products, renewable agricultural materials (including plant, animal, and marine
materials), or forestry materials. For the purposes of LEED, this excludes leather and other animal hides.

chain of custody (CoC) a procedure that tracks a product from the point of harvest or extraction to its end use,
including all successive stages of processing, transformation, manufacturing, and distribution

enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,
crawl space, basement).

extended producer responsibility measures undertaken by the maker of a product to accept its own and
sometimes other manufacturers’ products as postconsumer waste at the end of the products’ useful life. Producers
recover and recycle the materials for use in new products of the same type. To count toward credit compliance, a
program must be widely available. For carpet, extended producer responsibility must be consistent with NSF/ANSI
140–2007. Also known as closed-loop program or product take-back.

furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
MR

such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

postconsumer recycled content waste generated by households or commercial, industrial and institutional
facilities in their role as end users of a product that can no longer be used for its intended purpose

preconsumer recycled content matter diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process,
determined as the percentage of material, by weight. Examples include planer shavings, sawdust, bagasse, walnut
shells, culls, trimmed materials, overissue publications, and obsolete inventories. The designation excludes rework,
regrind, or scrap materials capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated them (ISO 14021).
Formerly known as postindustrial content.

raw material the basic substance from which products are made, such as concrete, glass, gypsum, masonry, metals,
recycled materials (e.g., plastics and metals), oil (petroleum, polylactic acid), stone, agrifiber, bamboo, and wood

recycled content defined in accordance with the International Organization of Standards document ISO 14021,
Environmental labels and declarations, Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling)

reuse the reemployment of materials in the same or a related capacity as their original application, thus extending
the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. Reuse includes the recovery and reemployment of
materials recovered from existing building or construction sites. Also known as salvage.
 279

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous

wood plant-based materials that are eligible for certification under the Forest Stewardship Council. Examples
include bamboo and palm (monocots) as well as hardwoods (angiosperms) and softwoods (gymnosperms)

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

MR
MR LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

280
 281

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—Material
Ingredients
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-cycle

information is available and that have environmentally, economically,

MR
and socially preferable life-cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products for which the chemical ingredients in the product are
inventoried using an accepted methodology and for selecting products
verified to minimize the use and generation of harmful substances. To
reward raw material manufacturers who produce products verified to
have improved life-cycle impacts.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. MATERIAL INGREDIENT REPORTING (1 POINT)

Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that use any of the
following programs to demonstrate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000 ppm).
·· Manufacturer Inventory. The manufacturer has published complete content inventory for the product
following these guidelines:
°° A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by name and Chemical Abstract Service
Registration Number (CASRN) and/or European Community Number (EC Number)
282

°° Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may withhold the name and/or CASRN/EC
Number but must disclose role, amount and hazard screen using either:
−− GreenScreen benchmark, as defined in Green Screen v1.2.
−− The Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals rev.6 (2015) (GHS)
»» The hazard screen must be applied to each trade secret ingredient and the inventory liststhe hazard
category for each of the health hazards included in Part 3 of GHS (e.g. “GHSCategory 2 Carcinogen”).
»» Identify in the inventory all hazard classes for which aclassification cannot be made because there are
insufficient data for a particularendpoint(s).
·· Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration
with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Cradle to Cradle. The end use product has been certified at the Cradle to Cradle v2 Basic level or Cradle to
Cradle v3 Bronze level.
·· Declare. The Declare product label must indicate that all ingredients have been evaluated and disclosed down
to 1000 ppm.
·· ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard. The documentation from the assessor or scorecard
from BIFMA must demonstrate the product earned at least 3 points under 7.5.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3
points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2012.
·· Cradle to Cradle Material Health Certificate. The product has been certified at the Bronze level or higher
and at least 90% of materials are assessed by weight.
·· Product Lens Certification
·· Facts - NSF/ANSI 336: Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric at anycertification level
·· USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting the material ingredient reporting
criteria.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. MATERIAL INGREDIENT OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use products that document their material ingredient optimization using the paths below for at least 25%, by cost, of
the total value of permanently installed products in the project.
·· GreenScreen v1.2 Benchmark. Products that have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm that
have no Benchmark 1 hazards:
MR

°° If any ingredients are assessed with the GreenScreen List Translator, value these products at 100% of cost.
°° If all ingredients are have undergone a full GreenScreen Assessment, value these products at 150% of cost.
·· Cradle to Cradle Certified. End use products are certified Cradle to Cradle. Products will be valued as
follows:
°° Cradle to Cradle v2 Gold: 100% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v2 Platinum: 150% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v3 Silver: 100% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v3 Gold or Platinum: 150% of cost
·· International Alternative Compliance Path – REACH Optimization. End use products and materials have
fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm and assess each substance against the Authorization list –
Annex XIV, the Restriction list – Annex XVII and the SVHC candidate list, (the version in effect in June 2013 ),
proving that no such substance is included in the product. If the product contains no ingredients listed on the
REACH Authorization, Restriction, and Candidate list, value at 100% of cost.
·· USGBC approved program. Products that comply with USGGBC approved building product optimization
criteria.
 283

AND/OR

OPTION 3. PRODUCT MANUFACTURER SUPPLY CHAIN OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use building products for at least 25%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project
that:
·· Are sourced from product manufacturers who engage in validated and robust safety, health, hazard, and risk
programs which at a minimum document at least 99% (by weight) of the ingredients used to make the building
product or building material, and

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

·· Are sourced from product manufacturers with independent third party verification of their supply chain that
at a minimum verifies:
°° Processes are in place to communicate and transparently prioritize chemical ingredients along the supply
chain according to available hazard, exposure and use information to identify those that require more
detailed evaluation
°° Processes are in place to identify, document, and communicate information on health, safety and
environmental characteristics of chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to implement measures to manage the health, safety and environmental hazard and
risk of chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to optimize health, safety and environmental impacts when designing and improving
chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to communicate, receive and evaluate chemical ingredient safety and stewardship
information along the supply chain
°° Safety and stewardship information about the chemical ingredients is publicly available from all points
along the supply chain

Products meeting Option 3 criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
For credit achievement calculation of options 2 and 3, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased)
within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit
achievement calculation, the value of individual products compliant with either option 2 or 3 can be combined to
reach the 25% threshold but products compliant with both option 2 and 3 may only be counted once.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
Projects with significant amounts of structural and enclosure materials may exceed the 30% limit by calculating an

MR
alternative structure and enclosure limit (See Equation 3 under Further Explanation).

FOR ALL OPTIONS

Meet the requirements of the credit above and include furniture and furnishings within the project’s scope of work.
284

BEHIND THE INTENT

The occupants of an average office building, school, or retail store have little knowledge of the building products
that surround them every day. Often, not even those who specify the materials have enough information on which to
base their own selection criteria, given that disclosure data are hard to acquire. Despite the regulatory safeguards for
some toxic chemicals, 96% of the roughly 85,000 chemicals on the U.S. market have never been screened for possible
health effects.1
Persistent bioaccumulative and toxic chemicals (PBTs) and persistent organic pollutants (POPs) are often found
in building products and materials. PBTs linger in the environment, accumulate in organisms high on the food chain
(including humans), and can cause harm even in very small doses. PBTs released during the manufacture, use, or
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

disposal of a product can threaten the health of plants and animals many miles away. Even less is known about which
chemicals are potential carcinogens, mutagens, neurotoxicants, or developmental toxicants.
By adhering to the precautionary principle and supporting green chemistry, this credit encourages project teams
to avoid products containing potentially harmful chemicals, which will ultimately spur innovation in materials
from manufacturers. The precautionary principle states, “Where there are threats of serious or irreversible damage,
lack of full scientific certainty shall not be used as a reason for postponing cost-effective measures to prevent
environmental degradation.”2 Green Chemistry is the design of chemical products and processes that reduce or
eliminate the use and generation of hazardous substances.3 Companies practicing green chemistry research are
developing safer alternatives to priority chemicals so that one day there will be “green lists” instead of “red lists.”
Such companies are also developing corporate policies that include the precautionary principle, establish credible
monitoring and assurance programs, and strengthen relationships with suppliers.4
This credit aims to support manufacturers that disclose information about the ingredients in their products,
allowing project teams to make better-informed decisions. The programs described below use hazard assessment
approaches that evaluate multiple human and environmental health endpoints at a level of detail that goes beyond
the scope of most life-cycle assessments. Project teams may demonstrate responsible product selection by providing
manufacturers’ reports or by ensuring the absence of materials of concern, using specified programs.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
MR

Select which option(s) to pursue. Projects can earn a maximum of 2 points by achieving the requirements for
two options, and products may contribute to Options 1 and 2. A project that cannot achieve Option 1 is not
precluded from achieving Option 2 and vice versa.
·· Option 1 Material Ingredient Reporting is for projects that have at least 20 permanently installed
products consisting of materials from manufacturers that have disclosed their ingredient inventory in
one of the listed formats, as indicated in the credit requirements. Products must be sourced from at
least five manufacturers.
·· Option 2. Material Ingredient Optimization and Option 3 Supply Chain Optimization are for projects
with 25% permanently installed products,by cost, that meet at least one of the paths listed in the credit
requirements.

1. epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw2009rpt.pdf (accessed July 3, 2013).

2. Report of the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development; http:/www.un.org/documents/ga/conf151/aconf15126-1annex1.htm (accessed
May 29, 2013)
3. Anastas and Warner, Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice (New York: Oxford University Press, 2000).
4. Healthy Business Strategies for Transforming the Toxic Chemical Economy, Clean Production Action (June 2006), cleanproduction.org/library/CPA-
HealthyBusiness-1.pdf (accessed May 29, 2013).
 285

Option 1. Material Ingredient Reporting

STEP 1. ASSESS OPTION FEASIBILITY

Research at an early phase can help the project team identify products that contribute to multiple credits
and options. Review the approved programs and assess the feasibility of finding enough products that
meet project requirements (see Further Explanation, Material Ingredient Reporting).
·· Some of these programs are new and have documented or certified only a few products in a way that
complies with the requirements.

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

·· The Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute publishes a searchable registry of certified
products.
·· Products can comply under different programs; it is not necessary to find 20 products that all comply
using the same path.

STEP 2. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify at least 20 products, from at least five different manufacturers (see MR Overview, Qualifying
Products and Exclusions).
·· All ingredients in the end product must be characterized through a USGBC-approved program.
·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations, but not if they are just aesthetic variations or reconfigurations.

STEP 3. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that the selected
products meet credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter the
information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or
an equivalent custom tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure replacement products meet the credit
requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 4. COUNT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

MR
Using the data collected in the tracking tool, tally the number of products that comply with Option 1
requirements. Collect all ingredient disclosure reports for contributing products for credit documentation.
·· Documentation availability varies by reporting program.
·· Retain product data for all materials that contribute to credit achievement and be prepared to provide
the information on request.
·· The best source of documentation is the manufacturer or the organization that manages the reporting
program. Reports are typically available online, but in some cases it might be necessary to contact a
company representative.
·· Documentation may also be available from third-party websites that collect the information of many
companies.

Option 2. Material Ingredient Optimization and Option 3 Supply Chain

Optimization

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify products meeting one or more of the criteria listed in the credit requirements. Note that these
options evaluate complete products; therefore, the criteria for assemblies found in other MR credits do
not apply to these options.
286

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure selected products meet
credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into the
MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent custom
tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the
credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these credit requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct
a LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE PRODUCT AND MATERIAL COSTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

Using Equation 1 and Equation 2, determine the total value of compliant products (see Further
Explanation, Calculations). These options calculate compliance based on product cost.
Collect relevant documentation:
·· For regional and local claims, provide a representative sample of documentation.
·· For certification programs, provide documentation for all products.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
Use the following equation for Option 2 Material Ingredient Optimization (see Further Explanation, Material
Ingredient Optimization).
MR

EQUATION 1. Percentage of compliant materials’ cost

program location program location

product1
cost
valuation valuation + product2
cost
valuation valuation + ...
% of
factor factor factor factor
materials =
cost × 100

Cost of all permanently installed prodcuts

where
Product cost = price charged to the project owner for the product. Each product can be counted only once, even if it
meets the requirements of multiple programs.

Program valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each compliance program:

·· GreenScreen benchmark. Products that have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm:
°° All ingredients assessed using GreenScreen List Translator and have no Benchmark-1 hazards, 100% value
(by cost)
°° All ingredients have undergone a full GreenScreen assessment and have no Benchmark-1 scores, 150% value
(by cost)
·· Cradle to Cradle Certified version 2.1.1:
°° Gold, 100% value (by cost)
°° Platinum, 150% value (by cost)
 287

·· Cradle to Cradle Certified version 3.0:

°° Silver, 100% value (by cost)
°° Gold or Platinum, 150% value (by cost)
·· REACH Optimization. This is an alternative compliance path for projects outside the U.S. If the product
contains no ingredients listed on the REACH authorization or candidate list, value it at 100% of cost.

Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR Overview,
Location Valuation Factor).

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

Use the following equation for Option 3 Supply Chain Optimization (see Further Explanation, Supply Chain
Optimization). Products that meet the requirements of Option 3, as outlined below, contribute toward earning
LEED credit at 100% of the product cost. To encourage actions beyond those minimum requirements, additional
credit can be earned in a number of ways.
EQUATION 2. Percentage Supply Chain Optimization of compliant materials cost.

criterion supply criterion supply

location location
chain chain
% of
product 1 valuation
depth
valuation + product 2 valuation
depth
valuation + ...
cost factor factor cost factor factor
materials = factor factor
cost
× 100
Cost of all permanently installed products

where:

Criteria valuation factor = multiplier assigned to number of enhanced achievement measures

·· 100% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements are met.
·· 150% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements plus:
°° Inventory and screening performed to 99.9% level

OR

Use GHS Category 2 criteria for hazard screening for carcinogens, mutagens, reproductive toxicants, and skin

MR
irritants for determining which ingredients are subject to management, reporting, and optimization (the basic
requirement stops at GHS Category 1 for these endpoints). See Table 1.

OR

The building product manufacturer shall require either self-declared or third-party validated environmental
management and health & safety management systems as described in the requirements in Section 4 for ALL
ingredients up to the 99% threshold, not just those that fail the initial hazard screen. If the building product
manufacturer is also seeking extra credit in the Supply Chain Depth factor, this would also apply to all ingredients at
the additional tier or tiers. The building product manufacturer shall document substitution or elimination of at least
one ingredient that was flagged in the hazard screening process. Where substitution occurs, manufacturer shall take
action based on that alternatives assessment such that the hazard is no longer flagged at the Enhanced Achievement
hazard Criteria level (table 1) in place of the original ingredient.
200% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements are met plus any two of the four above options.

Supply chain depth factor = multiplier assigned to level of supply chain engagement
·· 100% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements are met.
·· 150% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements plus one of these two:
°° The building product manufacturer has met the Option 3 minimum requirements for the entire business
unit or company.
288

OR

All tier 2 suppliers have documented processes in place as described for tier 1 suppliers. This multiplier is not available
to products with only tier 1 suppliers in their supply chain.
200% value (by cost) where the minimum requirements plus:
·· All suppliers in the supply chain of the product have documented processes in place as described for tier 1
suppliers.
·· This multiplier is not available to products with only tier 1 and tier 2 suppliers in their supply chain.

Equation 3: Alternative Structure & Enclosure Percentage Limit for Option 2

For projects with significant amounts of structure and enclosure materials, the following calculation can be made
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

to determine an alternative limit for the percentage of value that structure and enclosure materials can contribute to
credit achievement. Note: this option is only available for projects that use the actual materials cost method (not the
default cost method) to determine total project material costs.

EQUATION 3: Alternative Structure and Enclosure limit

Alternative Structure value $ of total building materials that are structural or enclosure
and Enclosure limit
=
total actual materials value $

Use the results of equation 3 to replace the 30% contribution factor limit in determining compliance with the credit.

MATERIAL INGREDIENT REPORTING

Under Option 1, products can be documented as compliant and thus contribute to credit achievement in any of three
ways (Table 1).

TABLE 1. Manufacturers’ documentation for compliant products

Program What has to be reported? To whom? Based on what framework?

All ingredients at or above 0.1%;

Report hazards associated with GreenScreen (GS) (either
Manufacturer’s inventory LT-1, LT-P1 (GS List Translator) Public GS Translator List or full
or Benchmark 1 (full GreenScreen assessment)
GreenScreen) scores
MR

All ingredients down to 0.1%

and full disclosure of health
HPD authoritative lists
hazards from ingredients; some
Health Product Declaration Public (closely match GreenScreen
ingredients can remain unnamed
List Translator)
but health hazards must still be
reported
Independent, accredited
Version 2.1.1: proprietary
assessors (some data protected
screening
under nondisclosure agreement
All ingredients down to 0.01%, Version 3.0: Material Health
Cradle to Cradle between the assessor and
with some banned substances Assessment Methodology
suppliers); data not disclosed
(includes hazard screening and
under NDA may be made public
risk assessment)
at manufacturer’s discretion

Manufacturer’s Inventory
Manufacturers may publicly disclose all ingredients by name and Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) registry number.
No third-party verification is required for this option, but the information must be publicly available; direct
disclosure to the designer or contractor is not acceptable.
If a specific ingredient cannot be disclosed for proprietary reasons, the manufacturer may withhold the name and
CAS registry number but still provide the following information:
·· Role or function in the product
·· Amount, as a percentage of total product content or ppm
 289

·· GreenScreen LT score (GS List Translator) or GS Benchmark score (full GS). Report hazard levels and
hazard endpoints that result in scoring the ingredient as LT-1 or LT-P1 using GS List Translator (e.g. High for
Carcinogenicity) or hazard levels and hazard endpoints that result in scoring the ingredient as Benchmark 1
using full GreenScreen. It is not necessary to report hazards associated with higher Benchmark levels or LT-
UNK (Unknown) using GS List Translator.

All ingredients that constitute 0.1% (1,000 ppm) or more of the product must be accounted for. This threshold is 10
times lower than the typical 1% minimum threshold for reporting on a material safety data sheet (MSDS).

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

Health Product Declaration Open Standard
Disclosure is done through Health Product Declaration (HPD), which is an open standard for reporting product
ingredients and their associated health hazards. Manufacturers that use HPDs must provide the nonproprietary
information listed above (role or function, amount, and health hazards) for every ingredient, not just those whose
names have been withheld. The manufacturer affirms “full disclosure of known hazards” on the front summary
page and further affirms the level of disclosure with residuals/impurities. For the material to comply with the credit
requirements, the HPD standards for the 1,000-ppm level must be attained and the appropriate box on the summary
page checked.
An HPD is several pages long, with a one-page summary listing company information, metadata about the
report, and ingredients, and continuing on subsequent pages with more detail about individual ingredients and
their associated health hazards, plus details on any certifications and associated materials. GreenScreen List
Translator scores and/or Benchmarks, if any, are listed for each ingredient in HPDs, in the contents section. A report
from a certified GreenScreen profiler may also be used to document the GreenScreen benchmarks for a product’s
ingredients.Manufacturers that use the standard HPD format reduce uncertainty about whether the information
that they have provided meets the credit requirements, and they create a report that should be useful in other
settings as well.
Qualifying HPDs developed under the Open Standard version 1.0, 2.0, 2.1 or subsequent versions of the standard
are eligible for documenting credit achievement if the HPD is still valid at the time that the product is purchased and
used on a project.

Cradle to Cradle Certified, version 2.1.1 and version 3.0

Project teams may also select Cradle to Cradle Certified (C2C) products. C2C requires that ingredients be disclosed
to an independent, accredited C2C assessor. The percent of the product defined and assessed impacts the level
of certification. Products certified under v2.1.1, have had at least 95% by weight of their materials assessed at any

MR
level and 100% of their materials assessed at the Gold and Platinum levels. Products certified under v3.0, have
had at least 75% or 95% by weight of their materials assessed at the Bronze and Silver levels respectively, and 100%
of their materials at the Gold and Platinum levels. Eligible products will have their scorecard available in the C2C
product registry. The product scorecard shows the level of achievement for all five standard attributes, the overall
certification level for the product (Basic, Bronze, Silver, Gold, or Platinum), the certificate expiration date, and the
version of the standard that the product is certified against. For each certified product the registry includes an image
of the product, the product description and certification level, and the expiration date of the current certification.
Product certification claims from manufacturers’ websites should always be verified against this registry because
they may be out-of-date (see Further Explanation, Example, Cradle to Cradle (C2C) certification). During the material
health assessment, assessors review the scientific literature available for all chemical ingredients contained in a
material above 100 ppm, use structure activity relationship models and chemical analog data to fill data gaps, and
compare the collected information against the C2C hazard criteria. Through this process, the environmental and
human health hazards of the chemical ingredients are classified using a green–yellow–red rating system. In a second
step, assessors evaluate whether exposure to any of the identified or suspected hazardous chemicals are plausible
in the context of the materials containing these chemicals and the product use and end of life scenarios. If avenues
for exposure to these chemicals in a material exist, the material will receive an overall risk assessment rating of
‘x’. Gold and Platinum certified products do not contain any x-assessed materials. Products certified at the Silver
level under v3.0 do not contain materials that have been x-assessed due to the presence of a carcinogen, mutagen,
or reproductive toxicant (CMR). Products certified at any level under v3.0 do not contain banned list chemicals.
Chemicals on the v3.0 banned lists include PVC and related compounds, certain flame retardants, PFOS and PFOA,
certain phthalates, halogenated hydrocarbons and toxic heavy metals. C2C certification addresses a total of five
product attributes and ingredient screening is just one part of the program.
290

Other USGBC-approved programs

As the industry evolves, additional programs and protocols for reporting on material ingredients are likely to emerge.
USGBC will determine whether any new programs are acceptable and issue rating system addenda to include them
as additional approaches to earning the credit.

MATERIAL INGREDIENT OPTIMIZATION

Under Option 2, GreenScreen (a program of Clean Production Action), Cradle to Cradle Certified, and the European
Union’s REACH program (for projects outside the U.S.) can be used as frameworks for documenting the substitution
of potentially problematic substances.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2 goes beyond Option 1’s reporting requirement and encourages the use of products that are made
without problematic ingredients. It offers these four approaches:
·· No GreenScreen Benchmark 1 materials (see the following section)
·· Cradle to Cradle certified gold or platinum certification (see above, under Material Ingredient Reporting)
·· REACH (see Further Explanation, International Tips)
·· Other programs that may be approved by USGBC in the future

GreenScreen Benchmark 1
The GreenScreen hazard assessment method evaluates individual chemicals. GreenScreen is based on a
toxicological assessment that starts with a collection of authoritative lists of “chemicals of concern” published by
governmental and nongovernmental organizations (GreenScreen List Translator). These substances are known to
be associated with certain health problems. The assessment then proceeds to reviews of the scientific literature, use
of structure activity relationship models and chemical analog data to fill data gaps (Full GreenScreen). Chemicals are
assigned to one of four main categories: those of highest concern, as indicated in the authoritative lists, are assigned
Benchmark 1. Chemicals that are not on the major authoritative lists and pass a toxicological review based on Clean
Production Action’s protocols can be assigned benchmarks that indicate lower levels of concern; Benchmark 4 is the
lowest level of concern. A full GreenScreen assessment overrides the results of screening using the GreenScreen List
Translator only.
The GreenScreen List Translator has been automated by two software providers. It can be accessed through the
Chemical and Material Library found in Healthy Building Network’s Pharos Tool, the ToxNot website, and in the GS
List Translator module in the GreenWERCS software tool by The Wercs. The Interstate Chemicals Clearinghouse
has created a website where GreenScreen assessments can be posted by various participating State governments
MR

and shared with no costs or restrictions. The GreenScreen Store is another source for some freely available full
assessments: www.greenscreenchemicals.org/gs-assessments
Option 1 of this credit requires only the GreenScreen List Translator review of ingredients to ensure that none
of the ingredients are on the authoritative lists and thus flagged as Benchmark 1 substances. Project teams should
look for documentation from manufacturers that either identifies all ingredients in the product or identifies and
characterizes any benchmark hazards.
Option 2 requires the Full GreenScreen toxicological assessment to ensure that none of the ingredients are
Benchmark 1. Project teams should look for documentation from manufacturers that shows each ingredient in the
product has been subject to a full GreenScreen assessment by a licensed GreenScreen Profiler and that the product
contains only Benchmark 2 and higher ingredients.
Products using GreenScreen version 1.2, 1.3, or subsequent versions are eligible for documenting credit
achievement if the analysis/scores are valid at the time that the product is purchased and used on a project.

For Manufacturers and Suppliers

GreenScreen’s List Translator assigns hazard classifications based on the various governmental and authoritative
hazard lists including lists of chemicals classified using the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and
Labeling. The GreenScreen List Translator can be used to identify chemicals that achieve or may achieve the
Benchmark 1 level of concern. Under Option 1, manufacturers that keep certain ingredients proprietary must
characterize any health hazards from those ingredients, as indicated by the List Translator or a full GreenScreen
assessment.
 291

Under Option 2, the manufacturer must warrant that no ingredients in the product at levels of 0.01% or more
(100 ppm) are designated as Benchmark 1 chemicals based on the referenced lists defined by the List Translator.
These products achieve compliance at the first level of the option.
The second level of compliance requires that all ingredients be Benchmark 2 or higher. There is no definitive
List Translator for Benchmark 2, so manufacturers must engage an independent third party to screen all their
ingredients, using the screening protocol defined by GreenScreen, and certify that none of them are Benchmark 1.
Products using GreenScreen version 1.2, 1.3, or subsequent versions are eligible for documenting credit

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

achievement if the analysis/scores are valid at the time that the product is purchased and used on a project.

SUPPLY CHAIN OPTIMIZATION

These requirements build on programs that many companies already have in place, specifically environmental
management systems (EMS) such as ISO 14001 and health and safety management systems such as OHSAS 18000,
to meet and document compliance with Option 3. To comply with this option, the building product manufacturer
(BPM), and any company that supplies it with ingredients or components that are significant health hazards, must
have a robust program for continual improvement in environmental management and health & safety management.
Specific industry programs that are consistent with ISO 14001:2015 include:
·· RC14001:2013 Responsible Care
·· ChemStewards Integrated Management System-2011
Guiding Principles
The building product manufacturer publishes a publicly available set of guiding principles for the optimization of
ingredients and products in their supply chain with an emphasis on human and environmental health. The principles
may be a standalone document or part of a website or other document. The principles include, at a minimum and in
the building product manufacturer’s own words, the following:
a. a commitment toward continual improvement (e.g., actual or attempted reduction in use of hazardous
chemicals) in their supply chain;
b. a commitment toward greater communication and transfer of information within their supply chain and with
their industry partners; and
c. a commitment to applying the principles of green chemistry and principles of green engineering
These principles should be endorsed by top management and referenced in documentation relating to Option 3
conformance.
LEED Documentation

MR
Project teams specify and install products that have verified processes in place for assessing and improving the
health impact of the product along the supply chain. The team must obtain third party-verification that the building
product manufacturer has processes in place for the specific product, as defined above. The LEED project team
submits that certification with its LEED application as evidence that the products or materials purchased contribute
to the 25% by cost threshold for Options 2 & 3 in the credit.
Inventory
The manufacturer of permanently installed building products determines the composition of the ingredients and
components it’s buying, based on final composition of the product in question, to at least the 99% level by mass; no
more than 1% of the contents can remain undetermined. A product disclosed via an approved method for Option
1 (such as Declare or HPD or other manufacturers inventory) could also be used to demonstrate conformance. If a
supplier chooses to withhold the chemical identity of materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property, they
may withhold the name and/or CASRN but must disclose role, amount and associated GHS Hazard classification of
each ingredient via Safety Data Sheet and/or supplier’s documentation on company letterhead, signed by a company
official. In the case of mixtures, each ingredient in the mixture must be documented. The manufacturer will typically
obtain this information from its first-tier suppliers, although if those suppliers provide manufactured components it
may be necessary to reach further back into the supply chain to obtain content information to the 99% level.
Hazard Screen
All documented ingredients representing at least 99% by mass of the final product shall be screened for human
health and environmental hazard characteristics according to the most current available criteria of the Globally
Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals (GHS). For each product, any ingredient that is
292

flagged against the hazard criteria identified in Table 2 is determined to “not pass” the hazard screen, and shall be
addressed by the building product manufacturer’s environmental and health & safety management systems and
supplier engagement (see below). While the GHS Screening is required, it is encouraged to go beyond the GHS
screening criteria. For example, if a hazardous chemical is present at 0.05% in product but the GHS screening level
is at 0.1%, the building product manufacturer is encouraged but not required to flag the ingredient. Ingredients with
data gaps (no information available on the substance for one or more endpoints) should be flagged (i.e., should not
pass) the hazard screen. If the 99% of ingredients to be screened includes recycled content, the building product
manufacturer shall document its best management practices to characterize the sources of pre- and post-consumer
recycled material and reduce or eliminate hazards associated with these materials.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 2. GHS Hazard Criteria by Endpoint for Option 3 Screening

If a substances falls into this

If a substance falls into this category, it
category, it fails the Enhanced
Endpoint fails the minimum requirements hazard
Achievement Option Hazard
criteria and is “flagged”/does not pass
Criteria (see Section 3 and Note 3)

Carcinogenicity (C) Category 1 (1A, 1B) Category 2

Mutagenicity & Genotoxicity (M) Category 1 (1A, 1B) Category 2

Reproductive Toxicity (R) Category 1 (1A, 1B) Category 2

Acute Mammalian Toxicity (AT) (oral, dermal, and

Category 1,2,3
inhalation routes)

Systemic Toxicity & Organ Effects (ST-single exposure) Category 1

Skin Irritation (IrS) Category 1 (1A, 1B, 1C) Category 2

Eye Irritation (IrE) Category 1 or 2A

Aspiration Hazard Category 1

Systemic Toxicity & Organ Effects* Repeated Exposure

Category 1 Category 2
sub-endpoint (ST-repeat)

Skin Sensitization (SnS) Category 1A

Respiratory Sensitization (SnR) Category 1A

Acute hazards to the aquatic environment (note 1) Category 1 or 2 (note 1a)

MR

Chronic hazards to the aquatic environment (note 1) Category 1 or 2 (note 1b)

Note 1: For the purposes of this option, USGBC has mapped the GHS Hazard Categorizations to low, moderate, high, and very high. Persistence and
bioaccumulation characteristics are factored into the aquatic environment hazards endpoints. As an alternative, if GHS categorizations for the aquatic endpoints
are not available and specific empirical science is also not available, then the online PBT Profiler (http://www.pbtprofiler.net/) can be used to determine if the
substance falls within the associated GHS categories:
Note 1a: If the fish chronic value (ChV) in the PBT Profiler (or more appropriate metric, as approved by the auditor) is less than 10 mg/L the substance is screened
as having a Category 1 or 2 Acute Hazard GHS classification.
Note 1b: If the fish chronic value (ChV) in the PBT Profiler is less than 0.1 mg/L the substance is screened as having a Category 1 or 2 Chronic Hazard GHS classification.
Note 2: In general, this table establishes GHS Category criteria for each endpoint so that chemicals with only "low" or "moderate" hazard classifications for each
endpoint pass the rapid hazard screening criteria. The exception is skin irritation, where chemicals characterized as GHS Category 2 (defined as “skin irritation,
reversible adverse effects in dermal tissue”) will pass through the screen at the base level of achievement.
Note 3: For Enhanced Achievement in the Rapid Hazard Screen, in addition to the Base Level of Achievement, the inclusion of GHS Category 2 for the
Carcinogenicity, Mutagenicity, and Reproductive Toxicity (“CMR”), and Systemic Toxicity & Organ Effects Repeated Exposure sub-endpoint (ST-repeat) endpoints
allows only chemicals with a “low" hazard condition to pass through the screen. Under GHS language, GHS Category 2 chemicals in one or more CMR endpoints
show evidence of having the specific hazard characteristic to be “suspected” of being carcinogenic, etc. This is in contrast to chemicals that are GHS Category
1A or 1B for one or more of the CMR endpoints, which indicate higher hazard evidence that the chemical is a “known” or “presumed" carcinogen, etc. Similarly,
the Enhanced Achievement Criteria adds GHS Category 2 for Skin Irritation as a trigger for further action in addition to CMR endpoints. To receive Enhanced
Achievement Credit via the Rapid Hazard Screen, only chemicals showing evidence of moderate or low hazard for Skin Irritation (GHS Category 3) will pass the
Enhanced Achievement Rapid Hazard Screening Criteria.

Environmental and Health & Safety Management Systems

Building product manufacturers shall have programs for environmental and health & safety management that
include all the essential elements listed below and cover the facility, facilities, or portion of a facility where the
building products for which the manufacturer seeks credit under Option 3 are manufactured. Building product
manufacturers may need to specify new requirements or processes as compared to existing ISO or Responsible Care
 293

systems to meet these requirements. This step describes an environmental or health and safety management system
as the framework, with health and safety criteria added to the EMS, but the systems can be combined differently as
long as they contain the same elements.
For the purposes of documenting conformance with Option 3, all building product manufacturer’s
environmental and health & safety management systems must meet requirements 1 through 3 for the facility,
facilities, or portion of a facility where the building product in question is manufactured, whether these systems are
separate or combined into one:

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

1. Publicly available policy statement signed by top management that describes the company’s commitment and
what the environmental or health and safety management system is intended to achieve.
2. Processes or controls that address continual improvement based on a list of existing and potential
environmental aspects and impacts or health and safety risks. The plan must include:
a. Targets and objectives addressing all significant environmental aspects or health and safety risks on list.
b. Monitoring and measurement of key elements in the operation that have relevant impacts.
c. Documented activities implementing the plan.
d. Internal evaluation, corrective action and audits of conformance to plan.
e. Communication to top management about results of audits.
3. The management system policy and plan shall include chemical safety & health as objectives with specific
targets and goals in the plan. Joint objectives and targets set at both the corporate level and operational level
are found to be most effective as they show a level of commitment throughout the organization. As a general
framework, the plan should seek to, on a continual improvement basis:
a. eliminate the use of hazardous ingredients,
b. minimize the use of hazardous ingredients where elimination is not possible,
c. transition to more effective control measures where hazardous ingredients remain, and
d. manage those remaining hazardous ingredients responsibly with a goal of zero exposure and discharge to
humans and the environment.
Building product managers with one or more hazard flagged ingredients must further meet requirements 4
through 6:
4. For any building product for which the manufacturer seeks credit under Option 3, at least 99% by mass of the
ingredients comprising that product must be identified and screened for hazardous characteristics pursuant to
Sections 2.2 and 2.3. ,
5. The building product manufacturer shall share hazardous characteristics for each ingredient that fails the

MR
hazard screen with customers to inform their appropriate handling, installation, and management of the
product, and with suppliers as an input to their management system prioritization.
6. The management system shall have a continual improvement plan to evaluate and eliminate or reduce
chemical hazards and exposure to the ingredients in the final building products as well as chemical hazards and
exposures during the manufacturing processes.
a. For optimization purposes established frameworks that contain steps for the comparative or alternatives
assessment that meet the intent of this requirement are listed below, but others can also be used as long as
they are known as acceptable equivalents. Frameworks that factor in broader environmental impacts such
as climate change and resource extraction impacts are encouraged but not required.
i. National Academy of Sciences (National Research Council) Alternatives Assessment Framework
ii. BizNGO Chemical Alternatives Assessment Protocol
iii. Interstate Chemicals Clearinghouse Alternatives Assessment Guide
Supplier Engagement
Suppliers of any chemical ingredient or component flagged in the hazard screen must have systems for
environmental and health & safety management as described above, items 1–3. The building product manufacturer
will notify its immediate (first-tier) suppliers that this requirement is due to the presence of flagged ingredients
or components.The supplier provides documentation of its management system(s) to the building product
manufacturer. This documentation can be third party verification or a self-declaration stating that processes
are in place for the ingredients and/or components supplied. Any self-declaration must be accompanied by
supporting documentation, which must be reviewed as part of the third-party verification of the building product
manufacturer’s environmental and health & safety management systems.
294

Verification
The building product manufacturer obtains third-party validation of fulfillment of the requirements of
Option 3. Pre-existing audit processes may be acceptable if the audit process specifically includes validation
of Option 3-related steps, including confirming that the steps listed above are completed and a review of
documentation from the suppliers about their corresponding programs. Audits are to be repeated at least every three
years.If no ingredients are hazard-flagged, then the fact that the hazard screen was completed is the only specific
element required beyond basic conformance with the environmental and health & safety practices described above
in parts 1-3. Procedures for building product manufacturer’s assessment of ingredient hazards must be disclosed to
the auditor.
Customer Communication
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The building product manufacturer provides a certificate from a third-party verifying its Option 3-conforming
program to anyone seeking to specify or purchase its product for a LEED project. The certificate must include a brief
summary of the manufacturer’s continual improvement objectives specific to that product or product line.

Supply Chain Optimization - Enhanced Achievement Options

In addition to the minimum requirements described in Further Explanation – Supply Chain Optimization,
building product manufacturers have the option of pursuing more advanced supply chain optimization measures,
which can help their products contribute more value towards earning the LEED point, as described in Calculations.
Seven enhanced achievement options are available for this LEED point, described below. Each relates only to the
product for which the building product manufacturer is seeking credit under Option 3.
Additional ingredient inventory
Instead of identifying ingredients to the 99% level, the building product manufacturers identifies and includes in the
screening (and, if appropriate, additional requirements) all ingredients to the 99.9% level (1,000 ppm).
Additional hazard screening
Use GHS Category 2 criteria for hazard screening for carcinogens, mutagens, reproductive toxicants, skin irritants,
and Systemic Toxicity & Organ Effects Repeated Exposure sub-endpoint (ST-repeat) for determining which
ingredients are subject to management, reporting, and optimization (the basic requirement stops at GHS Category 1
for these endpoints). See Table 2.
Supplier documentation for all ingredients
To address hazardous substances that do not persist into ingredients comprising the end product, the building
product manufacturer shall require either self-declared or third-party validated environmental management and
health & safety management systems for ALL ingredients up to the 99% threshold, not just those that fail the initial
Hazard Screen. If the building product manufacturer is also seeking extra credit in the Supply Chain Depth factor,
MR

this would also apply to all ingredients at the additional tier or tiers.
Green chemistry optimization
The building product manufacturer takes actions to design and improve chemical ingredients within their supply
chain. To demonstrate compliance, building product manufacturer must:
·· Take at least one supply chain ingredient that triggered a Hazard Criteria in Table 1 and conduct a comparative
assessment on that ingredient.
·· Based on the comparative hazard assessment, the building product manufacturer must substitute or eliminate
(e.g. product design change or process change) that ingredient.
·· Where substitution occurs, manufacturer shall take action based on that alternatives assessment such that the
hazard is no longer flagged at the Enhanced Achievement hazard Criteria level (table 2) in place of the original
ingredient.
·· After substitution or elimination, safety and stewardship information about the chemical ingredient is publicly
available for all points along the supply chain.
Ingredients that are substituted must have been incorporated within 3 years of the alternative assessment date,
and the ingredient being replaced must have been present in the product manufacturing processes no more than
6 years prior to the alternatives assessment and a subject of said alternatives assessment (e.g., the alternatives
assessment was intended for the ingredient).
 295

Enterprise-wide application of the EMS

The building product manufacturer has met the Option 3 minimum requirements for the entire business unit or
company.
Extension of supplier engagement to Tier 2
All Tier 2 suppliers have documented environmental and health & safety management systems as described
for Tier 1 suppliers. Building product manufacturer must procure third party verification or self-declaration
with documentation that all first and second tier suppliers have those systems in place for the material they are

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

supplying.
Extension of supplier engagement to source.
All suppliers in the supply chain of the product have documented processes in place as described for Tier
1 suppliers. Building product manufacturer must procure third party verification or self-declaration with
documentation that all suppliers have processes in place for the material they are supplying.

EXAMPLES

MR
Figure 1. Cradle to Cradle (C2C) certification

Example GreenScreen List Translator Result

The GreenScreen List Translator identifies each list that GreenScreen references, including its source, which
hazards in the GreenScreen it covers, whether it is “authoritative” or “screening,” and which GreenScreen hazard
level and subsequent Benchmark score applies, along with other data.
Table 2. GreenScreen List Translator Result (version 1.2 shown). Used with permission from Clean Production
Action.
296

TABLE 2. GreenScreen List Translator Result. Used with permission from Clean Production Action.

Display
A
Green screen Hazard iii hazard Benchmark
ID List List category List type or
hazard range box score
B
(see notes)

Group 2A: Agent is

154 IARC probably carcinogenic Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
to humans

158 MAK Carcinogenic Group 1 Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1

159 MAK Carcinogenic Group 2 Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Occupational
174 NIOSH-C Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
Cancer

Clear Evidence
NTP- Developmental
175 of Adverse Effects - Authoritative A H H 1
OHAaT Toxicity
Developmental Toxicity

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Alternative Compliance Path for International Projects: Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH).
The European Union’s REACH legislation requires all chemicals sold in quantity in the EU to be registered in a
central database and prioritized for evaluation and possible avoidance based on their hazard profile. The program
maintains several lists of “Substances of Very High Concern.”
Products can contribute to Option 2 under this credit if they come with clear documentation from the supplier
that they do not contain any substances on the “Authorization List” (chemicals that can only be used with special
authorization) nor on the “Candidate List” (chemicals being considered for the Authorization List). Because these
lists can change over time, the supplier documentation must be dated; if a substance in the product was added to
one of these lists after that documentation was produced and after the project’s registration date, the product is still
considered compliant. Projects in the U.S. may not use this alternative compliance path.
·· Authorization List: echa.europa.eu/web/guest/addressing-chemicals-of-concern/authorisation/
recommendation-for-inclusion-in-the-authorisation-list/authorisation-list
·· Candidate List: echa.europa.eu/web/guest/candidate-list-table
MR

REACH also provides for a “Restriction List” of chemicals that are to be banned from production and use, but as of
August 2013 no substances had made it onto that list. Any substances that are moved from the Authorization List
and Candidate List to the Restriction List continue to be treated as substances to be avoided in Option 2-compliant
products.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 297

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking tool X X

Documentation of chemical inventory through Health Product Declaration, Cradle
to Cradle certification labels, manufacturers’ lists of ingredients, with GreenScreen
X
assessment reports for confidential ingredients, or USGBC-approved programs (if
applicable)

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS

Verification of ingredient optimization through Cradle to Cradle certification labels,
manufacturers’ lists of ingredients with GreenScreen Benchmark or LT scores listed
X
for all ingredients, or manufacturers’ declaration (for REACH), or USGBC-approved
programs (if applicable)

Documentation of supply chain optimization X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction. This credit requires more detailed ingredient information than
is typically used in a building life-cycle assessment study.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations. This

credit is structured similarly to the related credit, but because it requires more detailed ingredient information than
typically used for an environmental product declaration, it reveals different information about the products.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. This credit is
structured similarly to the related credit and uses the same calculation methodology.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

MR
REFERENCED STANDARDS
Chemical Abstracts Service: cas.org/about-cas

Health Product Declaration: hpdcollaborative.org

Cradle-to-Cradle CertifiedCM Product Standard: c2ccertified.org/product_certification

Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH):

echa.europa.eu/support/guidance-on-reach-and-clp-implementation

GreenScreen: cleanproduction.org/Greenscreen.v1-2.php

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Purchase at least 40 permanently installed building products that meet the credit criteria.

Option 2. Purchase at least 50%, by cost, of permanently installed building products that meet the credit criteria.
298

DEFINITIONS
building product manufacturer Any company making an product for incorporation into the project that would
arrive at the job site.

business unit a logical segment of a company that represents a specific operational function or production of a
product type. Also called department, division, or a functional area.

component Uniquely identifiable input, part, element, piece, assembly or subassembly, system or subsystem, that
(1) is required to complete or finish an activity, item, or job, (2) performs a distinctive and necessary function in
the operation of a system, or (3) is intended to be included as a part of a finished, packaged, and labeled product.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Components are usually removable in one piece and are considered indivisible for a particular purpose or use.
Commonly, items of very small or insignificant cost are not considered components.

facility one or more buildings or locations, or part of a building, that it is clearly delineated in the EMS and includes
all process associated with the relevant building product (in the case of a Building Product Manufacturer) or
ingredient or component (in the case of a supplier to the building product manufacturer).

first-tier supplier any company providing components or ingredients directly to a building product manufacturer.

green chemistry The design of chemical products and processes that reduce or eliminate the use and generation
of hazardous substances (Anastas, P. T. and Warner, J. C. Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice. Oxford University
Press: New York, 1998, p. 30).

green engineering The development and commercialization of industrial processes that are economically feasible
and reduce the risk to human health and the environment (Anastas, P.T., and Zimmerman, J.B., "Design through the
Twelve Principles of Green Engineering", Env. Sci. Tech. 2003, 37(5), 94A-101A).

ingredient A substance or single constituent of fixed composition, characterized by its molecular structure(s)
used to make a compound, mixture, or finished product. Ingredients can be active (help directly in achieving
a performance objective(s)) or inert (facilitate acceptance, application, stability, handling or marketing of the
product, or delivery of the active ingredients). Ingredients typically have an associate CAS RN (and may also have
synonym CAS RNs).

optimization Developing a product or process with the highest achievable combination of functional performance,
MR

cost, and positive social, environmental, and health impacts by maximizing desired factors and minimizing
undesired ones. For the purposes of LEED’s Material Ingredients credit “optimization” implies giving human and
environmental health higher priority among the multiple factors than is typically the case.

product (permanently installed building product) an item that arrives on the project site either as a finished
element ready for installation or as a component to another item assembled on-site. The product unit is defined
by the functional requirement for use in the project; this includes the physical components and services needed to
serve the intended function of the permanently installed building product. In addition, similar products within a
specification can each contribute as separate products.

second-tier supplier A supplier providing ingredients to another supplier that end up in the product being
considered by the building product manufacturer.
 299

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Construction and
Demolition Waste

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

Management
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and

incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.

MR
REQUIREMENTS
Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition materials. Calculations can be by weight or
volume but must be consistent throughout.
Exclude excavated soil and land-clearing debris from calculations. Include materials destined for alternative
daily cover (ADC) in the calculations as waste (not diversion). Include wood waste converted to fuel (biofuel) in the
calculations; other types of waste-to-energy are not considered diversion for this credit.
However, for projects that cannot meet credit requirements using reuse and recycling methods, waste-to-energy
systems may be considered waste diversion if the European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC
and Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC are followed and Waste to Energy facilities meet applicable European
Committee for Standardization (CEN) EN 303 standards.

OPTION 1. DIVERSION (1–2 POINTS)

Path 1. Divert 50% and Three Material Streams (1 point)
Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least three
material streams.
300

OR

Path 2. Divert 75% and Four Material Streams (2 points)

Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least four
material streams.

OR

OPTION 2. REDUCTION OF TOTAL WASTE MATERIAL (2 POINTS)

Do not generate more than 2.5 pounds of construction waste per square foot (12.2 kilograms of waste per square
meter) of the building’s floor area.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
MR
 301

BEHIND THE INTENT

Diversion of construction waste has increased greatly in recent years because of new market incentives, better
recycling and reuse infrastructure, and more sophisticated sorting technology. However, the majority of diverted
materials are those that occur in high volume, such as structural waste, or are easily resold, valuable materials such as
metals.
Both planning and implementation are critical to reducing construction waste. This credit rewards projects
that implement the plan created in MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. It
encourages the diversion of a greater quantity and diversity of materials across multiple material steams by setting
thresholds for both an overall diversion percentage and a minimum number of material streams. With an option that
rewards waste reduction, the credit also offers an alternative to diversion.
For more on the benefits of diverting construction and demolition waste, please refer to the prerequisite.

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

The process for waste management should be developed as part of the construction waste management
(CWM) plan in the corresponding prerequisite. Review the steps in MR Prerequisite Construction and
Demolition Waste Planning and select an option.
·· Option 1 focuses on diverting construction and demolition waste from landfills by implementing the
CWM plan created in the prerequisite and meeting minimum thresholds.
·· Option 2 is appropriate for projects implementing source reduction strategies in both the design and
construction phases. Before selecting this option, estimate the amount of waste produced by the
project to see whether the performance threshold is realistic.

Option 1. Diversion

STEP 1. IMPLEMENT CWM PLAN

MR
Implement the procedures outlined in the CWM plan developed for the corresponding prerequisite to
achieve diversion goals and meet minimum thresholds.
·· Establish on-site infrastructure, practices, and policies for off-site sorting, and develop a tracking
system, as applicable. Identify at least three material streams that will be diverted (see Further
Explanation, Identifying Material Streams).
·· Track all the construction and demolition waste leaving the site. Retain waste hauler reports for
documentation. Record estimated weight or volume of materials that are reused on site or salvaged
for reuse on other projects by subcontractors or vendors.
·· Retain receipts and estimate weight or volume for materials donated to charities, reuse retailers, or
other recipients that can verify and track incoming and outgoing materials.
To contribute to this credit, commingled waste diversion must comply with one of the following
requirements:
·· The waste-sorting facility provides a waste diversion percentage specific to the project’s waste based
on measurement of each component waste material. Visual inspection is not an acceptable method of
evaluation for documenting this percentage.
·· The project team uses the facility’s average diversion rate, which must be regulated by the local or
state authority and must exclude alternative daily cover (ADC). This system must be a closed system;
shipping waste to another municipality to manage, thus burdening another system, does not count as
diverting the waste.

STEP 2. CALCULATE DIVERSION RATE

Applying Equation 1 to the total waste generated and diverted, determine the construction and
demolition waste diversion rate. To ensure that the credit requirements will be met, project teams should
302

calculate the diversion rate periodically (e.g., monthly or bimonthly) so that adjustments can be made to
meet diversion goals.

EQUATION 1. Diversion rate

Total waste diverted from landfill

Diversion rate = × 100
Total waste produced by project

·· The performance threshold requires both a minimum diversion percentage and diversion of at least
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

three (Path 1) or four (Path 2) material streams.

·· Ensure that units are consistent for all materials, in either weight or volume.
·· Diverted waste includes all recycled, salvaged, reused, and donated materials.
·· ADC does not count as diversion but must be included in total construction and demolition waste.
·· Exclude hazardous waste, land-clearing debris, soil, and landscaping materials.
·· Projects that cannot meet the credit threshold via reuse or recycling are eligible to claim diversion
through waste-to-energy systems, provided they meet applicable standards and requirements (see
Further Explanation, Waste-to-Energy). Wood-derived fuel may contribute toward diversion.

STEP 3. PRODUCE CWM REPORT

Create a final waste report for the project that includes the following information (see Further
Explanation, Example):
·· Total construction and demolition waste produced by the project
·· Types of waste material and quantity of each material
·· Total waste diverted and diversion rate (percentage)
The report must address ADC and other materials that are included in the calculation even if they do
not count toward diversion. If a single hauler is used for all waste, this company may be able to provide
this report. If multiple haulers or diversion strategies are used, the project team must compile waste
management information from all sources into a single report.

Option 2. Reduction of Total Waste

MR

STEP 1. DESIGN FOR REDUCED WASTE

Project teams should consider design strategies that will greatly reduce the amount of waste generated
on site. Strategies such as prefabrication, modular construction, and designs that use industry standard
sizes greatly reduce the amount of waste that needs to be managed and diverted from landfill and
incineration (see Further Explanation, Source Reduction).

STEP 2. CALCULATE TOTAL WASTE REDUCTION

Calculate threshold achievement using Equation 2.

EQUATION 2. Waste per area calculation

Total construction and demolition waste generated

Waste per area =
Project gross floor area

·· Under Option 2, materials reused on site do not count as waste.

·· Include all waste materials donated, sent to reuse facilities, or reused on other projects.
·· Include all waste materials sent to recycling facilities, landfills, and incinerators.
 303

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

WASTE TRACKING (OPTION 1)

One best practice is tracking waste throughout the entire project. The project team may determine the best strategy
for ongoing tracking, which will then feed into the MR construction and demolition waste management calculator
provided by USGBC or an equivalent tracking tool.
Web-based tools can provide contractors with an easy, step-by-step process for electronically tracking and
submitting waste management and recycling plans. Electronic tracking can save them time and money by identifying
materials that can be recycled, locating the nearest recycling facilities, following recycling progress in real time,

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

gathering comprehensive statistics, and creating reports regarding waste generation and recycling for project,
clients, company, government, as well as for green rating systems.
Some tools provide LEED credit templates so that data can be transferred directly to LEED report formats.

TABLE 1. Sample waste-tracking tool

Diverted waste per report date

Material stream
Sept Oct Nov Dec Total Units

Plastic 1.25 2.5 10 5 18.75 yards

Carpet 2.5 2.5 2.5 0 7.5 yards

Material streams contributing

Paper/Cardboard 5 2.5 2.5 5 15 yards

toward credit

Clean Wood 0 25 0 1.25 26.25 yards

Metal 1.25 2.5 5.5 7 16.25 yards

Sheetrock 2.5 2.5 4 5 14 yards

Brick/Concrete Masonry 10.5 2.5 5.5 8.75 27.25 yards

Asphalt Shingles 10 0 0 0 10 yards

MR
Total diverted waste 135 yards

Landfill 10.75 7.5 15 10 43.25 yards

Material streams
not contributing
toward credit

Screen Fines (ADC) 5 1.25 0 2.5 8.75 yards

6" Minus (ADC) 1.25 1.25 5 5.5 13 yards

Total landfill/ADC waste 65 yards

Total waste 200 yards

Percent (%) diverted 67.5 %

Figure 1. Sample waste-tracking tool

IDENTIFYING MATERIAL STREAMS

Under Option 1 of this credit, project teams must divert at least three material streams from landfill. A material
stream is defined as a flow of materials coming from a job site into markets for building materials. A stream can be
either of the following:
·· a specific material category that is diverted in a specific way; or
·· a mixture of several material categories that are diverted in a specific way.
304

Examples of material streams include deconstructed materials sent to reuse markets, commingled waste sent to
mixed-waste recycling facility, source separation where each material is sent to a specific facility, manufacturers’ or
suppliers’ take-back of materials, and reuse of deconstructed materials on-site.
As a best practice, a material stream should constitute at least 5% (by weight or volume) of total diverted
materials. The option requires that multiple material streams be diverted for several reasons: to stimulate markets
for recovered materials by keeping materials separated at the job site, thus increasing recycling rate of materials; to
encourage better project planning, job site diversion best practices, and new sorting and diversion techniques; and to
encourage manufacturers to use closed-loop product systems.

WASTE-TO-ENERGY
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Waste-to-energy may be considered a viable diversion strategy if the project team follows the European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and the European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/
EC. These standards consist of performance metrics of both efficiency and emissions for different types of energy
recovery systems. In addition, the facility must meet the applicable European standards based on the fuel type. See
Referenced Standards for more information on these directives:
·· EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers
·· EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels
·· EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner

Project teams pursuing this compliance option must demonstrate that reuse and recycling strategies were exhausted
before sending material to waste-to-energy facilities.
The combustion of wood or “wood-derived fuel” is not considered waste-to-energy and is exempt from the
criteria above.

SOURCE REDUCTION
Source reduction eliminates waste produced by a project in the following three ways:
MR

·· Prefabrication is a viable alternative for many wall assemblies. Because prefabrication occurs off site in a
dedicated facility, the manufacturer can achieve high efficiencies in its use of equipment and materials, thereby
reducing waste.
·· Modular designs are likely to have a longer lifespan if they use of durable materials and permanent fastening.
They are also safer to build because large assemblies are constructed in controlled environments, reducing
workers’ exposure to elevated work tasks.
·· Designing for standard material lengths eliminates large amounts of off-cuts and scrap. If incorporated early in
the design process, this strategy does not add additional cost to a project.

Under Option 2, exclude on-site reused materials. Materials reused on site are not considered waste for the purposes
of calculating this option only.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All projects in the group may be documented as one. Multiple project spaces may share waste hauling contracts and
on-site collection equipment. Data aggregation is allowed, provided that each project included is pursuing the same
option.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 305

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR construction and demolition waste management calculator or equivalent tool, tracking

X
total and diverted waste amounts and material streams

Documentation of recycling rates for commingled facilities X

Justification for use of waste-to-energy as diversion strategy (if applicable) X

Documentation of waste-to-energy facilities adhering to relevant EN standards (if applicable) X

Total waste per area X

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

RELATED CREDIT TIPS
MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. The diversion accomplished in
this credit should be done according to the plan developed in the related prerequisite.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· A compliance option has been added for total project waste reduction per gross floor area of the project.
·· Multiple material streams must be diverted to earn the credit for waste diversion (Option 1).
·· ADC has been specifically excluded from diversion calculations. In LEED 2009 it could count as diverted
waste.
·· Waste-to-energy may count as a diversion method if the facility meets European Union requirements for waste
management and emissions into air, soil, surface water, and groundwater.

REFERENCED STANDARDS

MR
Certification of Sustainable Recyclers: recyclingcertification.org

European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC:

·· ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/framework/index.htm
·· eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2008:312:0003:0030:en:PDF

European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 200/76/EC:

·· europa.eu/legislation_summaries/environment/waste_management/l28072_en.htm
·· central2013.eu/fileadmin/user_upload/Downloads/Document_Centre/OP_Resources/Incineration_
Directive_2000_76.pdf

EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Terminology, general requirements,
testing and marking: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with
atomizing oil burners: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers, Assembly comprising a boiler body and a forced
draught burner: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx
306

EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with forced
draught oil burners with outputs up to 70 kW and a maximum operating pressure of 3 bar, Terminology,
special requirements, testing and marking: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels, manually and automatically stoked, nominal heat output of up
to 500 kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Specific requirements for the domestic hot
water operation of combination boilers with atomizing oil burners of nominal heat input not exceeding 70
kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner of nominal heat
output not exceeding 1000 kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve both Options 1 (either Path 1 or 2) and Option 2.

DEFINITIONS
alternative daily cover (ADC) material other than earthen material placed on the surface of the active face of a
municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and
scavenging. Generally these materials must be processed so they do not allow gaps in the exposed landfill face.
(CalRecycle)

clean waste nonhazardous materials left over from construction and demolition. Clean waste excludes lead and
asbestos.

commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.

land-clearing debris and soil materials that are natural (e.g., rock, soil, stone, vegetation). Materials that are man-
MR

made (e.g., concrete, brick, cement) are considered construction waste even if they were on site.

source reduction a decrease in the amount of unnecessary material brought into a building in order to produce less
waste. For example, purchasing products with less packaging is a source reduction strategy.

waste-to-energy the conversion of nonrecyclable waste materials into usable heat, electricity, or fuel through a
variety of processes, including combustion, gasification, pyrolization, anaerobic digestion, and landfill gas (LFG)
recovery
MR CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
307
 309

Indoor
Environmental
Quality (eq)

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

OVERVIEW
The Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) category rewards decisions made by project teams about indoor air quality
and thermal, visual, and acoustic comfort. Green buildings with good indoor environmental quality protect the
health and comfort of building occupants. High-quality indoor environments also enhance productivity, decrease
absenteeism, improve the building’s value, and reduce liability for building designers and owners.1 This category
addresses the myriad design strategies and environmental factors—air quality, lighting quality, acoustic design,
control over one’s surroundings—that influence the way people learn, work, and live.
The relationship between the indoor environment and the health and comfort of building occupants is complex

EQ
and still not fully understood. Local customs and expectations, occupants’ activities, and the building’s site, design,
and construction are just a few of the variables that make it difficult to quantify and measure the direct effect of
a building on its occupants.2 Therefore, the EQ section balances the need for prescriptive measures with more
performance-oriented credit requirements. For example, source control is addressed first, in a prerequisite, and a
later credit then specifies an indoor air quality assessment to measure the actual outcome of those strategies.
The EQ category combines traditional approaches, such as ventilation and thermal control, with emerging
design strategies, including a holistic, emissions-based approach (Low-Emitting Materials credit), source control
and monitoring for user-determined contaminants (Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies credit), requirements
for lighting quality (Interior Lighting credit), and advanced lighting metrics (Daylight credit). A new credit covering
acoustics is now available.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Health Buildings Healthy People: A Vision for the 21st Century, epa.gov/iaq/pubs/hbhp.html (October 2001)
(accessed July 25, 2013).
2. Mitchell, Clifford S., Junfeng Zhang, Torben Sigsgaard, Matti Jantunen, Palu J. Lioy, Robert Samson, and Meryl H. Karol, Current State of the Science:
Health Effects and Indoor Environmental Quality, Environmental Health Perspectives 115(6) (June 2007).
310

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES

FLOOR AREA CALCULATIONS AND FLOOR PLANS

For many of the credits in the EQ category, compliance is based on the percentage of floor area that meets the credit
requirements. In general, floor areas and space categorization should be consistent across EQ credits. Any excluded
spaces or discrepancies in floor area values should be explained and highlighted in the documentation. See Space
Categorization, below, for additional information on which floor area should be included in which credits.

SPACE CATEGORIZATION
The EQ category focuses on the interaction between the occupants of the building and the indoor spaces in which
they spend their time. For this reason, it is important to identify which spaces are used by the occupants, including
any visitors (transients), and what activities they perform in each space. Depending on the space categorization, the
credit requirements may or may not apply (Table 1).

Occupied versus unoccupied space

All spaces in a building must be categorized as either occupied or unoccupied. Occupied spaces are enclosed areas
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

intended for human activities. Unoccupied spaces are places intended primarily for other purposes; they are
occupied only occasionally and for short periods of time—in other words, they are inactive areas.

Examples of spaces that are typically unoccupied include the following:

·· Mechanical and electrical rooms
·· Egress stairway or dedicated emergency exit corridor
·· Closets in a residence (but a walk-in closet is occupied)
·· Data center floor area, including a raised floor area
·· Inactive storage area in a warehouse or distribution center
For areas with equipment retrieval, the space is unoccupied only if the retrieval is occasional.

Regularly versus nonregularly occupied spaces

Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied, based on the duration of the
occupancy. Regularly occupied spaces are enclosed areas where people normally spend time, defined as more than
one hour of continuous occupancy per person per day, on average; the occupants may be seated or standing as they
work, study, or perform other activities. For spaces that are not used daily, the classification should be based on the
time a typical occupant spends in the space when it is in use. For example, a computer workstation may be largely
vacant throughout the month, but when it is occupied, a worker spends one to five hours there. It would then be
considered regularly occupied because that length of time is sufficient to affect the person’s well-being, and he or she
would have an expectation of thermal comfort and control over the environment.
Occupied spaces that do not meet the definition of regularly occupied are nonregularly occupied; these are areas
that people pass through or areas used an average of less than one hour per person per day.
EQ
 311

Examples of regularly occupied spaces include the following:

·· Airplane hangar ·· Hospital dialysis and ·· Natatorium
·· Auditorium infusion area ·· Open-office workstation
·· Auto service bay ·· Hospital exam room ·· Private office
·· Bank teller station ·· Hospital operating room ·· Reception desk
·· Conference room ·· Hospital patient room ·· Residential bedroom
·· Correctional facility cell or day ·· Hospital recovery area ·· Residential dining room
room ·· Hospital staff room ·· Residential kitchen
·· Data center network operations ·· Hospital surgical suite ·· Residential living room
center ·· Hospital waiting room ·· Residential office, den, workroom
·· Data center security operations ·· Hospital diagnostic and ·· Retail merchandise area and
center treatment area associated circulation
·· Dorm room ·· Hospital laboratory ·· Retail sales transaction area
·· Exhibition hall ·· Hospital nursing station ·· School classroom
·· Facilities staff office ·· Hospital solarium ·· School media center
·· Facilities staff workstation ·· Hospital waiting room ·· School student activity room
·· Food service facility dining area ·· Hotel front desk ·· School study hall
·· Food service facility kitchen area ·· Hotel guest room ·· Shipping and receiving office
·· Gymnasium ·· Hotel housekeeping area ·· Study carrel
·· Hospital autopsy and morgue ·· Hotel lobby ·· Warehouse materials-
·· Hospital critical-care area ·· Information desk handling area
·· Meeting room

Examples of nonregularly occupied spaces include the following:

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

·· Break room ·· Hospital short-term charting ·· Residential laundry area
·· Circulation space space ·· Residential walk-in closet
·· Copy room ·· Hospital prep and cleanup area in ·· Restroom
·· Corridor surgical suite ·· Retail fitting area
·· Fire station apparatus bay ·· Interrogation room ·· Retail stock room
·· Hospital linen area ·· Lobby (except hotel lobby)* ·· Shooting range
·· Hospital medical record area ·· Locker room ·· Stairway
·· Hospital patient room bathroom ·· Residential bathroom

*Hotel lobbies are considered regularly occupied because people often congregate, work on laptops, and spend more time there
than they do in an office building lobby.

Occupied space subcategories

EQ
Occupied spaces, or portions of an occupied space, are further categorized as individual or shared multioccupant,
based on the number of occupants and their activities. An individual occupant space is an area where someone
performs distinct tasks. A shared multioccupant space is a place of congregation or a place where people pursue
overlapping or collaborative tasks. Occupied spaces that are not regularly occupied or not used for distinct or
collaborative tasks are neither individual occupant nor shared multioccupant spaces.

Examples of individual occupant spaces include the following:

·· Bank teller station ·· Hospital patient room ·· Open-office workstation
·· Correctional facility cell or day ·· Hotel guest room ·· Private office
room ·· Medical office ·· Reception desk
·· Data center staff workstation ·· Military barracks with personal ·· Residential bedroom
·· Hospital nursing station workspaces ·· Study carrel
312

Examples of shared multioccupant spaces include the following:

·· Active warehouse and storage ·· Gymnasium ·· Hotel housekeeping area
·· Airplane hangar ·· Hospital autopsy and morgue ·· Hotel lobby
·· Auditorium ·· Hospital critical-care area ·· Meeting room
·· Auto service bay ·· Hospital dialysis and ·· Natatorium
·· Conference room infusion area ·· Retail merchandise area and
·· Correctional facility cell ·· Hospital exam room associated circulation
or day room ·· Hospital operating room ·· Retail sales transaction area
·· Data center network ·· Hospital surgical suite ·· School classroom
operations center ·· Hospital waiting room ·· School media center
·· Data center security ·· Hospital diagnostic and ·· School student activity room
operations center treatment area ·· School study hall
·· Exhibition hall ·· Hospital laboratory ·· Shipping and receiving office
·· Facilities staff office ·· Hospital solarium ·· Warehouse materials-
·· Food service facility dining area ·· Hotel front desk handling area
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Food service facility kitchen area

Occupied spaces can also be classified as densely or nondensely occupied, based on the concentration of occupants
in the space. A densely occupied space has a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (93
square meters), or 40 square feet (3.7 square meters) or less per person. Occupied spaces with a lower density are
nondensely occupied.

Table 1 outlines the relationship between the EQ credits and the space categorization terms. If the credit is listed, the
space must meet the requirements of the credit.

TABLE 1. Space types in EQ credits

Space Category Prerequisite or Credit

• Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, ventilation rate procedure and natural ventilation procedure
• Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, monitoring requirements
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 C
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 D
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 E
Occupied space • Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 B
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 E
• Indoor Air Quality Assessment, Option 2, Air Testing (sampling must be representative of all occupied
spaces)
• Thermal Comfort, design requirements
• Acoustic Performance (CI, Hospitality)
EQ

• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy A

• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy D
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy E
Regularly occupied space • Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy G
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy H
• Daylight
• Quality Views
• Thermal Comfort, control requirements
Individual occupant space
• Interior Lighting, Option 1

Shared multioccupant • Thermal Comfort, control requirements

space • Interior Lighting, Option 1

Densely occupied space • Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 C

 313

Table 2 outlines the relationship between the EQ credits and the space categorization terms specific to each rating
system (see Definitions). Unless otherwise stated, if the credit is listed, the space must meet the requirements of the
credit.

TABLE 2. Rating system–specific space classifications

Rating system Space type Prerequisite or Credit

• Interior Lighting*
Hospitality Guest rooms
• Thermal Comfort, control requirements*

Office and administrative • Thermal Comfort, control requirements

Retail
areas • Interior Lighting, Option 2
*Hotel guest rooms are excluded from the credit requirements.

The following credits are not affected by space classifications:

·· Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 A
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 B
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 A
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 D (no specific spaces; applicable spaces are determined by
the project team)
·· Low-Emitting Materials
·· Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
·· Indoor Air Quality Assessment, Option 1, Flush-Out (the floor area from all spaces must be included in
calculation for total air volume; the flush-out must be demonstrated at the system level)
·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy B
·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy C

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy F

TRICKY SPACES
Pay extra attention to how the following types of spaces are classified in specific credits.

Residential
·· See the Project Type Variations sections in Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting for guidance on providing
appropriate controllability in residential buildings.

Auditoriums
·· Exceptions to Daylight and Quality Views are permitted. See the Project Type Variations sections in Daylight
and Quality Views.

EQ
Gymnasiums
·· See the Project Type Variations section in Thermal Comfort for guidance on dealing with high levels of physical
activity.
·· Exceptions to Quality Views are permitted. See the Project Type Variations section in Quality Views.

Transportation Terminals
·· For Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting, Option 1, Lighting Control, most of the areas in a transportation
terminal can be considered shared multioccupant. Most areas in transportation terminals are also regularly
occupied.

Dormitories and Military Barracks

·· These spaces fall in-between a work space and residence.
·· Dorm rooms or military barracks with personal workspaces are considered individual occupant spaces.
Military barracks without personal workspaces are considered shared multioccupant.
314

Industrial Facilities
·· For Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting, Option 1, Lighting Control, most of the active warehouse and
storage areas are considered multioccupant.
·· Most areas in industrial facilities are also regularly occupied.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ
 315

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PREREQUISITE

Minimum Indoor Air

Quality Performance
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

INTENT

To contribute to the comfort and well-being of building occupants by

establishing minimum standards for indoor air quality (IAQ).

REQUIREMENTS
Meet the requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.

Ventilation
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),

EQ
chose one of the following cases.

CASE 1. SYSTEMS ABLE TO MEET REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW RATES

OPTION 1. ASHRAE STANDARD 62.1–2010

Determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for mechanical ventilation systems using the ventilation rate
procedure from ASHRAE 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent and meet the minimum
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Sections 4–7, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with
errata), or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.

OPTION 2. CEN STANDARDS EN 15251–2007 AND EN 13779–2007

Projects outside the U.S. may instead meet the minimum outdoor air requirements of Annex B of Comité
Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 15251–2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design
and assessment of energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting
316

and acoustics; and meet the requirements of CEN Standard EN 13779–2007, Ventilation for nonresidential
buildings, Performance requirements for ventilation and room conditioning systems, excluding Section 7.3,
Thermal environment; 7.6, Acoustic environment; A.16; and A.17.

Case 2. Systems Unable to Meet Required Outdoor Airflow Rates

If meeting the outdoor airflow rates in Case 1 is not feasible because of the physical constraints of the existing
ventilation system, complete an engineering assessment of the system’s maximum outdoor air delivery rate.
Supply the maximum possible to reach the minimum setpoint in Case 1 and not less than 10 cubic feet per minute
(5 liters per second) of outdoor air per person.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
determine the minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements using the natural ventilation
procedure from ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Confirm
that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram in the Chartered
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation
in Nondomestic Buildings, Figure 2.8 and meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a
local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.

All Spaces
The indoor air quality procedure defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 may not be used to comply with this
prerequisite.

Monitoring
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),
monitor outdoor air intake flow as follows:
·· For variable air volume systems with an outdoor air intake in the project scope of work, provide a direct
outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor air intake flow with an
accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate, as defined by the ventilation requirements
above. An alarm must indicate when the outdoor airflow value varies by 15% or more from the outdoor
airflow setpoint.
·· For constant-volume systems included in the project scope of work, balance outdoor airflow to the design
minimum outdoor airflow rate defined by ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata), or higher. Install a
current transducer on the supply fan, an airflow switch, or similar monitoring device.
EQ

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
comply with at least one of the following.
·· Provide a direct exhaust airflow measurement device capable of measuring the exhaust airflow with an
accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow values
vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.
·· Provide automatic indication devices on all natural ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum
opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied
hours.
·· Monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) concentrations within each thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between
3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor and within the thermal zone. CO2 monitors must
have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration
exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints by using the methods in
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C.
 317

BEHIND THE INTENT

By diluting pollutants created by a building’s occupants and other contaminant sources, ventilation with outdoor
air contributes to the occupants’ comfort and well-being. The exact connections between ventilation rates
and occupants’ health are still being researched, but a multidisciplinary scientific review of the current state of
knowledge shows some strong associations.1 Maintaining good indoor air quality (IAQ) depends on controlling
pollutant sources, removing contaminants from outdoor air, and supplying at least some outdoor air, among other
factors. The standards referenced in this prerequisite outline well-tested methods for determining the amount
of outdoor air each type of space requires. These standards were chosen because they strike a balance between
providing fresh air and maintaining energy efficiency.
Different kinds of occupants, activities, and equipment in a building will make for different IAQ parameters,
so requirements vary both by space type in a building and by project type. For example, residential projects must
meet additional prescriptive requirements that protect occupants from indoor contaminants, such as combustion
byproducts and radon, and health care facilities have more stringent ventilation and space pressurization
requirements to prevent cross-contamination.
Intelligent ventilation design is only the first step. Monitoring, as required by this prerequisite, helps maintain
IAQ during all stages of a building’s operation. Even though occupants may not notice reductions in outdoor airflow
or exhaust airflow, indoor air pollutants begin to build up the moment proper ventilation ceases. The combination of
intelligent ventilation design with monitoring provides confidence that occupants enjoy comfort and well-being.
Indoor air quality is directly affected by the ventilation system serving the space. For this reason, the credit
requirements must be met whether the HVAC system is a part of the project scope of work or controlled by the
tenant.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. EVALUATE OUTDOOR AIR QUALITY

Investigate local outdoor air quality at the project location. If pursuing Option 1 for mechanically
ventilated spaces, or using naturally ventilated spaces, follow ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent. If pursuing Option 2 for mechanically ventilated spaces, see
Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 13779–2007, Section 6.2.3, Outdoor Air.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY PROJECT’S VENTILATION STRATEGY

Determine how ventilation air is or will be provided to the building and to the project spaces.
Determine which elements and systems are considered part of the base building, and which are part
of the LEED project. The ventilation system serving the project space may be independent of the

EQ
system serving the rest of the building, or it may be shared with other areas in the building. Determine
whether any requirements for this prerequisite fall outside the project space and/or tenant’s control. The
ventilation requirements must be met regardless of whether the ventilation systems are in the project’s
scope of work, but the monitoring requirements apply only to the systems in the project scope of work.
If a new ventilation system is being installed for the project, determine whether mechanical ventilation,
natural ventilation, or a mixed-mode approach is appropriate for the project (see Further Explanation,
Ventilation Strategies).
If the project is being served by a central HVAC system, confirm as early as possible that the system
will function adequately in the project space and meet the ASHRAE standard’s provisions. Perform an
engineering assessment of an existing ventilation system (see Further Explanation, Existing Ventilation
System).

1. Sundell, Jan, Hal Levin, and Davor Novosel, Ventilation Rates and Health: Report of an Interdisciplinary Review of the Scientific Literature
(National Center for Energy Management and Building Technologies Task 06-01, September 2006), ncembt.org/downloads/Sundell%20J_
VentilationRatesAndHealthReportOfAnInterdisciplinaryReviewOfTheScientificLiterature_NCEMBT-070914.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
318

STEP 3. CATEGORIZE SPACES

Create a table of all rooms and spaces in the project and identify the following for each space.
·· Ventilation strategy
·· Net occupiable space, as defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, page 4, or room floor area if using
CEN Standard 15251
·· Occupancy category, as listed in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Table 6-1, or CEN Standard 15251,
Table B.2
·· If applicable, identify whether the building is very low polluting, low polluting, or not low polluting (see
CEN Standard 15251, Annex C).
·· Design occupancy (see Getting Started, Occupancy)
It may be appropriate to group rooms or spaces into ventilation zones (see Further Explanation, Types of
Mechanical Ventilation Systems). If the project shares a ventilation system that is also serving other areas
in the building, collect occupancy and net occupiable space information for those areas as well.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY APPROPRIATE PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Follow the steps below for mechanical ventilation or natural ventilation, depending on the ventilation
strategy used in each space.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For mixed-mode systems, projects must comply with mechanical ventilation requirements when the
mechanical system is active, and natural ventilation requirements when the mechanical ventilation system
is inactive.

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces (and Mixed-Mode Spaces When

Mechanical Ventilation Is Active)

STEP 1. DETERMINE PRELIMINARY HVAC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Identify the following basic mechanical system features, which will affect the calculation of outdoor air
required:
·· Single-zone, 100% outdoor air, or multiple-zone systems
·· Underfloor, overhead or side air distribution and location of return grilles
·· Supply air temperature: cooling only or heating and cooling
·· Variable air volume (VAV) or constant volume (CV) supply

STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW UNDER OPTION 1

Complete the ventilation rate procedure in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.2, to determine the
minimum amount of outdoor air that must be supplied to the project spaces or building.
·· Complete a separate ventilation rate procedure calculation for each ventilation system that serves the
project spaces.
·· Account for all occupied spaces in the calculation. Any spaces not within the LEED project boundary
must be properly accounted for in the calculation (see Further Explanation, Shared Ventilation
EQ

System).
·· Perform ventilation rate procedure calculations for worst-case conditions, which typically occur in the
heating mode when supply airflows are lowest or supply air temperature is highest. From Table 6-2
of the standard, select the zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez) value that corresponds to the air
distribution configuration of the worst-case conditions. Ez is typically less than 1.0 when the system is
in heating mode. If Ez is greater than 1.0, see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further
Explanation, Common Issues with Energy Modeling, Ventilation (zone air distribution effectiveness).
·· As applicable, evaluate and document assumptions for all variables required for the ventilation rate
procedure calculation. These variables include the percentage of total design airflow rate at condition
analyzed (Ds), the primary air fraction of supply air at condition analyzed (Ep), the system ventilation
efficiency (Ev), and the fraction of local recirculated air that is representative of system return air (Er).
·· For special conditions that apply to systems designed to respond to varying operating conditions,
such as with demand-controlled ventilation, see Further Explanation, Considerations for Variable
Operating Conditions.
 319

Ensure that the appropriate method is selected for each system in the project. The ventilation rate
procedure calculation differs for single-zone, 100% outdoor air, and multiple-zone systems. Suggested
methods are as follows:
·· For single-zone systems or 100% outdoor air systems, use the calculator provided by USGBC or a user-
generated spreadsheet. The 62MZCalc spreadsheet is not applicable to these systems and should not
be used to perform the ventilation calculations.
·· For multiple-zone systems, use the calculator provided by USGBC or ASHRAE’s 62MZCalc
Spreadsheet. This includes VAV and CV systems in which one or more air handlers supply a mixture
of outdoor air and recirculated air to more than one ventilation zone (see Further Explanation,
Calculations for Multiple-Zone Systems).
Energy modeling software may also be used to perform ventilation rate procedure calculations for all
three system types. Direct outputs from the programs are acceptable, provided they include sufficient
information about the values used for all variables in the calculation.
If the local code is more stringent than ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Local Equivalent to
ASHRAE 62.1–2010.

ALTERNATIVE STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW UNDER OPTION 2

Follow the calculations outlined in Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard 15251–2007, Annex
B, to determine the minimum amount of outdoor air that must be supplied by each ventilation system
that serves the project spaces.

STEP 3. REVISE DESIGN TO MEET OUTDOOR AIR REQUIREMENTS, IF NECESSARY

If the ventilation calculations in Step 2 indicate that the preliminary design does not provide enough
outdoor air to meet the selected reference standard, revise the design and recalculate the minimum
amount of outdoor air to confirm compliance.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

For single-zone and 100% outdoor air systems, increase the amount of outdoor air supplied by the
system. For multiple-zone systems, increase supply airflow to the critical zone or increase the amount of
outdoor air supplied by the system. If an existing system is physically incapable of meeting the minimum
outdoor airflow requirement even after adjustments have been made, Case 2 of the rating system applies
(see Further Explanation, Existing Ventilation System).
In the final calculations, ensure that the net occupiable space, design occupancy, number of air handlers,
and outdoor air volume are consistent with the project’s mechanical schedules and documentation
provided for other LEED credits. Create a summary table that lists the required outdoor air intake flow
and design outdoor air intake flow for each ventilation system.

STEP 4. MEET MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Ensure that the design meets the minimum requirements of the selected referenced standard. Many of
the minimum requirements, such as the location of air intakes, apply to functional aspects of the HVAC
system that are most commonly located in parts of the building outside the project space.

Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010

·· Confirm compliance with Sections 4 through 7.

EQ
·· Indicate whether the project is in a nonattainment area for fine particulate matter (PM2.5), and if so,
confirm that filters with minimum efficiency reporting values (MERV) of 11 or higher have been or will
be installed.
·· Indicate whether the project is in an area where ozone exceeds the most recent three-year average,
annual fourth-highest daily maximum eight-hour average ozone concentration of 0.107 ppm, and if so,
confirm that the project has or will have air-cleaning devices for ozone.
·· If using a local code instead of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Local Equivalent to
ASHRAE 62.1–2010.

Option 2. CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007

·· Confirm compliance with the requirements in CEN Standard 13770–2007, excluding Section 7.3
Thermal environment, 7.6 Acoustic environment, A.16, and A.17.

STEP 5. IMPLEMENT AIRFLOW MONITORING

Incorporate airflow monitoring equipment if the ventilation systems are included in the LEED project’s
scope of work. The monitoring equipment does not have to be dedicated to the project spaces, but
each ventilation system serving the project spaces must have a measurement device. The technique for
320

monitoring outdoor air depends on the HVAC system.

For VAV systems—for example, a 100% outdoor air energy recovery unit with demand-controlled
ventilation, or any system that provides a variable amount of supply or outdoor air—a direct outdoor
airflow measurement device must measure the intake flow rate (Figure 1).
·· Indirect measurements, such temperature or current transducers, cannot directly measure the airflow
rate and thus are not allowed for VAV systems.
·· If a 100% outdoor air system provides ventilation air to the return of downstream terminal devices
(e.g., fan coil units, heat pumps), the measurement device needs to measure the outdoor airflow rate
at the 100% outdoor air unit only, not at each terminal device. The ventilation rate procedure must still
be calculated for each terminal device.
·· For device requirements, see the specific language in the prerequisite requirements.

Louvres
Chilled water

Hot water
Damper

Outside Mixed Supply

Filter
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Coil

Coil

Fan
Air Air Air

Damper Damper

Damper

Room 1 Room 2
Recirculated
Air
Damper

Exhaust Return
Air Air

Return fan

General
Exhaust

Outdoor
Air
EQ

Outdoor air volume VAV box

flow sensor

Figure 1. Example schematic for outdoor air sensor location

For constant volume systems, balancing ensures that the correct amount of outdoor air is being supplied to
the building.
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ3
·· Once the system has been balanced, a current transducer on the supply fan, airflow switch, pressure
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance_3
 321

transducer, or similar monitoring device must be installed.

·· If a 100% outdoor air system provides ventilation air to the return of downstream terminal devices
(e.g., fan coil units, heat pumps), the measurement device needs to be installed at the 100% outdoor
air system only, not at each terminal device. The ventilation rate procedure must still be calculated to
each terminal device.
For all systems, retain equipment cutsheets showing the accuracy of the monitoring device(s), copies
of control sequences and diagrams, and test and balance reports that show airflow setpoints for each
ventilation system.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces (and Mixed-Mode Systems When

Mechanical Ventilation Is Inactivated)

STEP 1. CONFIRM NATURAL VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS

Use Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, Natural
Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Figure 2.8 (flow chart), to confirm that natural ventilation is
appropriate. Retain a copy of the flow chart path for the project.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY CEILING HEIGHTS AND NATURAL VENTILATION OPENINGS

Collect the following information for each naturally ventilated space and add to the table of rooms and
spaces:
·· Minimum ceiling height in the space
·· Location of natural ventilation openings (on one side, two opposite sides, or two adjacent sides)

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

·· Size of the natural ventilation openings (openable area)

STEP 3. PERFORM NATURAL VENTILATION PROCEDURE

Use the natural ventilation procedure in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, to determine the size of
openings required in each space and the maximum distance from the openings that can be considered
naturally ventilated.
·· Compare the calculation results with the design and revise, if necessary, to ensure that all spaces meet
the requirements of the standard.
·· If the project includes an engineered natural ventilation system approved by the authority having
jurisdiction, the requirements of Section 6.4 do not apply (see Further Explanation, Authority Having
Jurisdiction Exception).
·· Confirm compliance with the exhaust ventilation requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010,
Section 6.5.

STEP 4. CONFIRM MECHANICAL SYSTEM EXCEPTION OR COMPLIANCE

If the project qualifies for an exception to the mechanical ventilation requirement in ASHRAE 62.1–2010,
Section 6.4, prepare an explanatory narrative.

EQ
If the project does not qualify for exception, follow the step-by-step instructions for mechanical
ventilation systems to demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE 62.1–2010 when mechanical ventilation is
active (see Further Explanation, Natural Ventilation Exceptions).

STEP 5. IMPLEMENT MONITORING SYSTEM

Incorporate airflow monitoring equipment into the natural ventilation system design through one of the
following three monitoring strategies.
Direct exhaust airflow measurement device
·· Incorporate exhaust airflow monitoring equipment that has an accuracy of +/–10% of the design
minimum exhaust airflow rate.
·· Naturally ventilated systems induce passive air movement from openings to the point of exhaust,
requiring that airflow measurement devices be placed at the exhaust location.
·· Configure the exhaust airflow monitoring equipment to generate an alarm when airflow values vary by
15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.
·· Retain equipment cutsheets for the monitorings, plans indicating sensor locations, and copies of
control sequences and diagrams.
322

Alarmed openings for naturally ventilated spaces

·· Identify all windows, louvers, and trickle vents used for natural ventilation.
·· Each opening counted as a natural ventilation intake for this prerequisite must have an alarm under
this strategy. For example, an office with two windows intended to provide natural ventilation must
have alarms installed on both windows. However, if only one window is counted as a natural ventilation
intake, only one window is required to have an alarm.
Carbon dioxide (CO2) monitors
·· Install a CO2 sensor in each thermal zone.
·· CO2 sensors must be located in the breathing zone, as defined in the prerequisite requirements
(Figure 2). CO2 sensors installed in return air ducts cannot be used to meet the requirements.
·· Determine CO2 concentration setpoint(s) using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C.
See ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix A, for calculations and examples.
·· Configure the CO2 monitoring system to generate an audible or visual alarm to the system operator if
the differential CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%.

Outdoor air Airflow monitoring equipment/

CO2 sensor
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

5'-0"
(1.5m)
EQ

Airflow monitoring equipment/

CO2 sensor

Figure 2. Example CO2 sensor locations

 323

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
For mechanical ventilation, Option 1, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual,
Chapter 6.2. Refer to ASHRAE Journal articles2 for additional information on the calculations.

For mechanical ventilation, Option 2, see CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007.

For natural ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Chapter 6.4.

VENTILATION STRATEGIES
Investigate local outdoor air quality at the project location. If pursuing Option 1 for mechanically ventilated spaces,
follow ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. If pursuing Option 2 for
mechanically ventilated spaces, see CEN Standard EN 13779–2007, Section 6.2.3.
Use the results of this analysis to inform ventilation strategy selection and system design. For example, natural
ventilation may not be appropriate in high-pollution areas, where outdoor air requires significant filtration. Outdoor
air quality may also affect mechanical equipment filtration specifications.
Consider how the building’s form, location, orientation, programming, and depth of the floor plate can create
opportunities for low-energy, high-quality natural ventilation or mixed-mode systems. For help in determining
whether natural ventilation is feasible for a building or space, see Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineer
(CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings, Figure 2.8 (flow

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

chart).
ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 requires mechanical ventilation systems in addition to natural ventilation, unless
specific exceptions are met. See ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.4.
If mechanical ventilation is preferred, consider separating ventilation from thermal conditioning with a
dedicated outdoor air system. These systems ensure that the correct amount of ventilation air is provided while
minimizing overventilation and reducing energy consumption.

SHARED VENTILATION SYSTEM

If the project space is being served by a ventilation system that is also serving other areas in the building, the
ventilation rate procedure (or CEN calculations) must account for the other areas in one of the following ways:
·· Account for the total system population, area, supply air, and outdoor air volume. If applicable, the critical
zone may be determined based on the spaces listed for the project. Perform floor area–weighted calculations to
determine the required outdoor air ventilation rates.
·· If a specific percentage of outdoor air, by volume, is being provided to the project space, this percentage may
be used to determine the design outdoor airflow volume. The ventilation rate procedure is required only for

EQ
the project spaces. This method is acceptable only if the majority of space use and occupancy in the building is
consistent with the LEED project (e.g., the project is one or more floors in a downtown high-rise).
·· To document compliance with this method, describe how the percentage of outdoor air by volume was
determined and how the spaces outside the LEED project are used.

EXISTING VENTILATION SYSTEM

If the project space is ventilated by an existing mechanical system that cannot meet the minimum outdoor air
requirements, as determined by ventilation rate procedure calculations, and physical or legal constraints prohibit its
modification, Case 2 of the rating system applies.
For this option, an engineering assessment of the system must be performed. The assessment must identify the
maximum outdoor air volume from the system and the constraints that prevent the required outdoor air rates, as
determined by ventilation rate procedure calculations, from being delivered to the project space. Ensure that the

2. Stanke, Dennis, “Single-Zone & Dedicated-OA Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (October 2004); “Single-Path Multiple-Zone System Design,” ASHRAE Journal
(January 2005); “Designing Dual-Path Multiple-Zone Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (May 2005).
324

ventilation system provides the maximum amount of outdoor air possible at the worst-case operating conditions at
existing setpoints. This prerequisite requires a minimum of 10 cubic feet per minute per person of outdoor air.

NATURAL VENTILATION EXCEPTIONS

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, requires naturally ventilated spaces to include a mechanical ventilation
system unless one of the following exceptions applies:
·· Ventilation openings comply with Section 6.4 and are permanently open.
·· Ventilation openings comply with Section 6.4 and have controls that prevent them from being closed during
times of expected occupancy.
·· The naturally ventilated zone is not served by heating or cooling equipment.
·· The system is an engineered natural ventilation system approved by the authority having jurisdiction (see
Further Explanation, Authority Having Jurisdiction Exception).

TYPES OF MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEMS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ASHRAE 62.1–2010 defines a ventilation zone as any area with similar occupancy categories, occupant density, zone air
distribution effectiveness, and zone primary airflow per unit area. This differs from the definition of a thermal zone.

There are three main types of mechanical ventilation systems.

Single-zone system
This system delivers a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to only one ventilation zone. For example, a single
rooftop unit that provides ventilation and conditioned air to three separate offices is likely to be considered a single-
zone system, provided the offices are similar, as defined above.
Alternatively, a single rooftop unit that provides ventilation and conditioned air to an office and a conference
room would not be considered a single-zone system, since these two spaces differ in occupancy category and
occupant density, even though the unit itself is often considered “single-zone” because it only has one thermal zone.
In this case, the unit must be analyzed using the method for multiple-zone recirculating systems.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each single-zone system serving the building.

100% outdoor air system

This type of system delivers only outdoor air directly to one or more ventilation zones. The ventilation air cannot
contain any recirculated air. For example, an energy recovery unit that provides 100% outdoor ventilation air to each
space via a separate distribution system and mixes this air with air from only the same zone would be considered a
100% outdoor air system.
Alternatively, an energy recovery unit that provides 100% outdoor ventilation air to zone-level fan coil units that
mix outdoor air with return air from other ventilation zones before delivering it to the space would not be considered
a 100% outdoor air system. In this case, each fan coil unit must be analyzed as either a single-zone or a multiple-zone
EQ

recirculating system.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each 100% outdoor air system serving the
building.

Multiple-zone recirculating system

This type of system delivers a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to more than one ventilation zone. Typical
examples include a constant volume rooftop unit that serves more than one ventilation zone or a VAV system that
serves an entire building.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each multiple-zone recirculating system
serving the building (see Further Explanation, Calculations for Multiple-Zone Recirculating Systems).

CALCULATIONS FOR MULTIPLE-ZONE RECIRCULATING SYSTEMS

Because of the complexity of the calculations for multiple-zone recirculating systems, project teams must use the
calculator provided by USGBC, ASHRAE's 62MZCalc spreadsheet, or energy modeling software to perform the
ventilation rate procedure calculations and determine the amount of outdoor air required at the system level.
 325

System ventilation efficiency

Multiple-zone system calculations need to account for the inefficiency that occurs when the zones have different
ratios of outdoor ventilation air to supply the air required for thermal conditioning. The calculations account for this
through system ventilation efficiency (Ev) and by determining the critical zone.
The critical zone is the zone with the highest proportion of required outdoor air to provided supply air. Critical
zones are often densely occupied spaces, such as conference rooms. If using the calculator provided by USGBC
or ASHRAE’s 62MZCalc spreadsheet, when all zones are entered, the critical zone for the system is determined
automatically.
For large projects, it may not be feasible to enter each individual zone. In these cases, the mechanical engineer
can determine the outdoor air required for the system simply by identifying the potentially critical zone(s). For a
detailed discussion of identifying critical zones, see ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Appendix A–A3.1, Selecting Zones
for Calculation, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Example 6–L.

Diversity factor
Alternatively, the multiple-zone system calculations may include a diversity factor to account for the movement
of occupants between spaces, per ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.5.3.1. For example, in a school, it is
reasonable to assume that not all rooms are occupied simultaneously, because students and staff would not be in a
classroom if they are eating lunch in the cafeteria. In this case, diversity can be applied, provided the classroom and
cafeteria are served by the same ventilation system.
Diversity may not be applied to either single-zone or 100% outdoor air systems. If applying diversity, all
calculations and assumptions must be included with the documentation.
If preliminary calculations indicate that a multiple-zone system does not comply with ASHRAE 62.1–2010
outdoor air requirements, consider the following before increasing outdoor air at the air-handling unit(s):

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

·· Increase the amount of supply air (e.g., zone primary airflow, Vpz) to the critical zone. This has the effect of
decreasing the primary outdoor air fraction, Zpz, which will increase system efficiency and reduce the total
amount of outdoor air required.
·· For systems with VAV terminal units, increase the minimum terminal unit flow rate setting for the critical
zone. This has the same effect described above.

CONSIDERATIONS FOR VARIABLE OPERATING CONDITIONS

ASHRAE 62.1–2010 permits ventilation systems to reflect or respond to changes in zone occupancy in two ways,
time-average population and dynamic reset. These two strategies cannot be applied simultaneously, however.

Time-average population. In spaces where peak occupancy occurs over only a short period, a time-average design
population may be used, per ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.6.2 (see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples
6-W, 6-X, 6-Y, 6-Z, and 6-AA). Project teams must include all calculations and assumptions used when submitting the
ventilation rate procedure calculations for time-average population.

EQ
Dynamic reset. The system varies the flow of outdoor air as operating conditions change, thereby reducing the
amount of energy needed to condition outdoor air. Demand-controlled ventilation is one of the most common reset
strategies. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.7, for dynamic reset requirements, some of which include the
following:
·· A minimum level of outdoor air, based on the area outdoor air rate, must be provided to each ventilation zone
at all times when dynamic reset is implemented. Refer to the ASHRAE standard’s Section 6.2.7.1.2.
·· The ventilation system must be controlled to provide the required amount of outdoor air in each zone, based
on current occupancy. For a multiple-zone recirculating system, a single CO2 sensor mounted in the return
duct does not meet the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, since it does not guarantee that the appropriate
amount of outdoor air will be provided to the critical zones. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual,
Appendix A, and the ASHRAE Journal3 for demand-controlled ventilation approaches for multiple-zone
systems and for CO2 setpoint calculations.

3. Stanke, Dennis, “Dynamic Reset for Multiple-Zone Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (March 2010).
326

LOCAL EQUIVALENT TO ASHRAE STANDARD 62.1–2010

If local code is more stringent than ASHRAE 62.1–2010 for the system design, use the local code.

For mechanically ventilated spaces, prepare the following documentation:

·· A detailed summary comparing the two standards’ requirements
·· A comparison demonstrating that outdoor air requirements established by the local code for occupants and
for floor area are at least as stringent as the ASHRAE standard
·· Evidence that the local code incorporates the zone- and system-level efficiency of the ventilation systems in an
equivalent or more stringent way than the ASHRAE ventilation rate procedure

For naturally ventilated spaces, prepare the following documentation:

·· A detailed summary comparing the two standards’ requirements for fenestration opening area, distance from
window, and ceiling height
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach, and documentation of approval by the local
code authority
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION EXCEPTION

In some situations, compliance with this prerequisite is acceptable through an authority having jurisdiction
exception. With this exception, the local code authority (the authority having jurisdiction) approves the plans and
specifications used for the project’s engineered natural ventilation approach. There are three possible situations for
this exception: (1) the local code is ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, (2) the ventilation code governing the project is any
code other than ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, and (3) USGBC is serving as the authority having jurisdiction for the
purposes of LEED certification.
If USGBC is the authority having jurisdiction, a ventilation strategy that meets the intent of ASHRAE 62.1–2010
but does not meet the requirements of the ventilation rate procedure may be approved. It is highly recommended
that project teams contact USGBC for approval of the engineered natural ventilation approach as early as possible,
rather than waiting until the system has been fully designed.

If the local code is ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, provide the following documentation:
·· Evidence that ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (or a later version) is required for local building code compliance
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach
·· Documentation of plan approval by the local code authority

If the ventilation code governing the project is other than ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, provide the following:
·· Evidence that the alternate code is at least as stringent as ASHRAE 62.1–2010 in its entirety (see Further
Explanation, Local Equivalent to ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010).
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach
EQ

·· Documentation of plan approval by the local code authority

If USGBC is serving as the authority having jurisdiction for the purposes of LEED certification, provide the
following:
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach
·· Drawings and calculations or airflow analyses
·· Evidence that the project’s engineered natural ventilation system meets the intent of ASHRAE 62.1–2010.
This documentation must clearly identify how the project does not meet the standard’s natural ventilation
requirements, and how the ventilation design has been engineered to meet the intent of the standard.

OCCUPIED VERSUS OCCUPIABLE

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 requires occupiable spaces to be ventilated. For consistency with other LEED credits,
this prerequisite uses the term occupied. Spaces classified as occupiable per Standard 62 are considered occupied for
the purposes of LEED certification (see Definitions).
 327

EXAMPLES
For mechanical ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples 6-F through 6-V.

For natural ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples 6-AC through 6-AF.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Apparatus Bays in Fire Stations
Typically, these spaces are not designed for human occupancy and would not be required to meet the prerequisite
requirements. However, if these spaces will be occupied, then the space must be ventilated according to the
prerequisite requirements.

Vehicle Repair Facilities and Maintenance Bays

These space types include military buildings where trucks, tanks, aircraft, and other vehicles are being serviced.
Because these are occupied spaces, they must meet the prerequisite requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project must pursue the prerequisite individually.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Case 1
Naturally
Documentation Options 1 Case 2 Mixed mode
ventilated
and 2

Description of ventilation systems within project scope of work; description

of any shared ventilation systems and their effect on minimum ventilation X X X
rate calculations
Confirmation that project meets minimum requirements of ASHRAE
X X X
62.1–2010, Sections 4–7, or CEN Standard 13779–2007
Confirmation that project has MERV 11 or higher filters (if project is in
X X
nonattainment area for PM2.5)
Confirmation that the project is in a non-attainment area for ozone
X X X
(if applicable)
Ventilation rate procedure or CEN calculations and documentation of
X X X

EQ
assumptions for calculation variables
X
Engineering assessment of system’s maximum outdoor air delivery rate, as
X (if using
applicable
Case 2)
Confirmation that project meets minimum requirements of ASHRAE
Standard 62.1–2010, Section 7, and exhaust ventilation requirements of X X
Section 6.5
Documentation of CIBSE flow diagram process for project X X
Natural ventilation procedure calculations and ventilation opening
X X
information
Any natural ventilation exception from mechanical ventilation system
X X
(ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4)
Any exception from authority having jurisdiction X X
Controls drawing showing monitoring devices (outdoor airflow measuring
device, current transducer, airflow switch, or similar monitor, automatic X X X X
indication device, CO2 sensor)
328

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Outdoor air can increase the amount of energy needed to heat
and cool the building. Dynamic reset, such as demand-controlled ventilation, can reduce energy use.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Airflow monitoring and increased ventilation addressed by
this prerequisite will assist in earning the related credit.

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. The building’s minimum outdoor air ventilation rate may affect the
duration of the flush-out required for Option 2, Occupied Flush-Out, of the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· ASHRAE Standard 62.1 has been updated to version 2010 from version 2007.
·· ASHRAE 62.1–2010 natural ventilation calculations now consider window configuration and ceiling height.
·· ASHRAE 62.1–2010 now requires supplementary mechanical ventilation systems for naturally ventilated
spaces in some cases.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Project teams are required to confirm the appropriate application of natural ventilation through CIBSE AM10,
Figure 2.8 (flow chart).
·· Projects outside the U.S. are now allowed to demonstrate achievement via CEN requirements (rather than
ASHRAE 62.1–2010).
·· This prerequisite now includes the monitoring requirements previously included in Indoor Environmental
Quality Credit 1, Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring. Additionally, the monitoring requirements now distinguish
between variable air volume and constant volume systems.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 62.1–2010: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Standard 170–2008: ashrae.org

2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities: fgiguidelines.org

CEN Standard EN 15251–2007: cen.eu

CEN Standard EN 13779–2007: cen.eu

CIBSE Applications Manual AM10, March 2005: cibse.org

EQ

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
occupiable space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended
primarily for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are occupied only occasionally
and for short periods of time (ASHRAE 62.1–2010)
 329

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

unoccupied space an area designed for equipment, machinery, or storage rather than for human activities. An
equipment area is considered unoccupied only if retrieval of equipment is occasional.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

EQ
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

330
 331

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PREREQUISITE

Environmental Tobacco
Smoke Control
This prerequisite applies to:

Commercial Interiors
Retail
Hospitality

INTENT

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces,
and ventilation air distribution systems to environmental tobacco smoke.

REQUIREMENTS

Locate the project in a building that prohibits smoking by all occupants and users both inside the building and
outside the building except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from all entries, outdoor
air intakes, and operable windows. Also prohibit smoking outside the property line in spaces used for business
purposes.
If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5 meters) cannot be implemented because of code,

EQ
provide documentation of these regulations.
Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances indicating the no-smoking policy.
332

BEHIND THE INTENT

Tobacco use kills more than five million people worldwide every year.1 Smoking also puts nonsmokers at risk by
exposing them to environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), often called secondhand smoke. In 2006, nearly half of all
nonsmoking Americans were regularly exposed to secondhand smoke.2 ETS exposure at home or in the workplace
increases nonsmokers’ risk of developing lung cancer, heart disease, and other serious health problems.3
Prohibiting indoor smoking is the only way to fully eliminate the health risks associated with ETS.4 For this
reason, designated indoor smoking rooms are not allowed in LEED-certified buildings. The prerequisite also
prohibits smoking in outdoor areas used for business purposes. A business that uses a public sidewalk or courtyard
for seating or kiosks still maintains control over those areas, even though they are typically outside the property
boundary line. They are included under this prerequisite because the business owner still has control over the
smoking policy in these areas.
Restricting the introduction of ETS into the building interior not only benefits human health, it also improves
the longevity of building surfaces, air distribution systems, furniture, and furnishings when compared with those in
buildings that allow smoking.5
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE SMOKE-FREE LOCATIONS

The smoking requirements apply to the LEED project space as well as areas occupied or managed by the
base building and/or all other tenants.
·· Identify the location of building openings, including entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable
windows. Identify the property line and the location of outdoor areas used for business purposes, both
inside and outside the property line. Indicate these elements on a site plan, map, or sketch.
·· Emergency exits do not qualify as building openings if the doors are alarmed, because alarmed doors
will not be opened. Emergency exits without alarms qualify as building openings.
The requirements may be challenging if the building does not already have a no-smoking policy.
Commercial interiors projects should discuss smoking requirements with the owner and other tenants
early in the project timeline to ensure compliance in areas not under the project team’s control.

STEP 2. DESIGNATE LOCATIONS OF EXTERIOR SMOKING AREAS

Determine whether the project has or will have designated outdoor smoking areas. Locate any area
designated for smoking at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from smoke-free areas, based on the information
gathered in Step 1. The 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance is a straight-line calculation.
·· Consider design strategies that may encourage people to use the designated smoking area, such as
covered seating.
EQ

·· Educate occupants on the smoking policy and encourage them to self-police. This is particularly
important in retail situations.
·· Ash trays signal that smoking is allowed in a particular area. Be sure these are placed outside the 25-
foot (7.5-meter) perimeter.

1. World Health Organization, WHO Report on the Global Tobacco Smoke Epidemic (Geneva, 2009). who.int/tobacco/mpower/2009/gtcr_download/en/
index.html (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, The Health Consequences of Involuntary Exposure to Tobacco Smoke: A Report of the Surgeon General
(Atlanta, Georgia, 2006), surgeongeneral.gov/library/reports/secondhandsmoke/report-index.html (accessed June 10, 2013).
3. Ibid.
4. Ibid.
5. Mudarri, D.H., The Costs and Benefits of Smoking Restrictions: An Assessment of the Smoke-Free Environment Act of 1993 (H.R.3434) (Washington, DC:
Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Radiation and Indoor Air, Indoor Air Division, 1994), tobaccodocuments.org/landman/89268337-8360.html
(accessed June 10, 2013).
 333

STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT SMOKING IS PROHIBITED IN NONDESIGNATED AREAS

Provide confirmation from the owner that smoking outside of designated areas is prohibited in any space
used by the building for business purposes, even if the space falls outside the property line. Examples of
spaces used for business purposes include sidewalk seating, kiosks, and courtyards.
·· Smoking must be prohibited in areas within 25 feet (7.5 meters) from building openings.
·· If smoking cannot be prohibited for the full 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance because of code
restrictions, provide documentation of the regulation (see Further Explanation, Code Limitations
and Restrictions).
·· Smoking in the prohibited area is not allowed, even when the 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance extends
beyond the property line. The boundary of the space for business purposes, other than a building
opening, indicates the end of a nonsmoking area (see Further Explanation, Property Line Less Than 25
Feet from the Building).
The exterior smoking requirement must be complied with at the building level, regardless of where the
project is located in the building.
·· Exterior spaces used for business purposes by any tenants in the building or the owner of the building
must be no-smoking, even if the spaces fall outside the property line.
·· For example, if the LEED project occupies second-floor space in a building with multiple tenants,
smoking is not allowed within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of any opening for the entire building.

STEP 4. DETERMINE LOCATIONS OF NO-SMOKING SIGNAGE

Post signage within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances indicating that smoking is not allowed.
·· Language on the signage is up to the project team. Two examples of successful language include “No
smoking allowed within 25 feet” and “Smoking is allowed in designated smoking areas only.”
·· It may be helpful to stripe sidewalks to show the no-smoking boundary.

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

FURTHER EXPLANATION

PROPERTY LINE LESS THAN 25 FEET (7.5 METERS) FROM THE BUILDING
Projects with a property line less than 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the building must consider space usage when
determining the outdoor smoking policy. The no-smoking requirement still applies to spaces outside the property
line used for business purposes. Public sidewalks are not considered used for business purposes, but smoking must
still be prohibited on sidewalks within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of openings. Building staff should be educated about this
policy so that they can direct smokers to designated smoking areas and away from entrances or windows.
Examples of common business activities that would require the smoking prohibition include outdoor seating,
outdoor stadium areas, courtyards, and banking kiosks.

EQ
334

Figure 1. Example site plan with no smoking areas

Non-smoking boundary LEED PROJECT /

restaurant property line

25'-0"
(7.6m)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Public sidewalk Non-smoking boundary

Non-smoking area

CODE LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS

Many local governments ban smoking in the workplace and in public spaces. These regulations do not always meet
the 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance for exterior smoking required by this prerequisite. In most cases, LEED projects can
extend the smoking ban to the required 25 feet (7.5 meters), regardless of existing code. However, if existing code
EQ

explicitly prohibits this, building owners may still achieve the prerequisite by providing documentation of the code.

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ6

Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control_2 ID+C
 335

Figure 2. Smoking bans by state

Smoking banned in restaurants

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

Smoking banned in restaurants & bars
Smoking banned in non-hospitality workplaces
Smoking banned in restaurants & non-hospitality workplaces
Smoking banned in all of the above
No statewide smoking ban

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Multitenant
Owners and property management teams for multitenant buildings may find it useful to communicate the interior
and exterior smoking policy in tenant guidelines, handbooks, or similar documents.

CAMPUS
Group Approach

EQ
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible. Projects can demonstrate compliance with a campus-wide no-smoking policy in lieu of building signage.
The policy must be widely communicated to all occupants (including transients and visitors) through ongoing
methods such as site signage and other media (brochures, websites, etc.).
336

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
All projects where
Documentation
smoking is prohibited

Description of project’s no-smoking policy, including information on how policy is communicated to building
X
occupants and enforced
Scaled site plan or map showing location of designated outdoor smoking and no-smoking areas, location of
X
property line, and site boundary and indicating 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance from building openings
Drawings, photos, or other evidence of signage communicating no-smoking policy X
Any code restrictions that prevent establishment of no-smoking requirements X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Designated interior smoking rooms are no longer permitted, with the exception of residential projects. This
change recognizes the overwhelming evidence and broad consensus that exposure to ETS harms human
health, and it supports increased levels of indoor air quality performance in LEED projects.
·· The no-smoking policy has been expanded to apply to spaces outside the property line if the space is used for
business purposes and is within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of building openings or outdoor air intakes.
·· Projects must prohibit smoking by all occupants and users throughout the entire building. This expands on the
previous requirement to prohibit smoking in the tenant space and common areas only.
·· A specific requirement for the location of exterior posted signs has been added.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
EQ

DEFINITIONS
None.
 337

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Enhanced Indoor Air

Quality Strategies
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-3 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

INTENT

To promote occupants’ comfort, well-being, and productivity by

improving indoor air quality.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. ENHANCED IAQ STRATEGIES (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.

Mechanically ventilated spaces:

A. entryway systems;

EQ
B. interior cross-contamination prevention; and
C. filtration.

Naturally ventilated spaces:

A. entryway systems; and
D. natural ventilation design calculations.

Mixed-mode systems:
A. entryway systems;
B. interior cross-contamination prevention;
C. filtration;
D. natural ventilation design calculations; and
E. mixed-mode design calculations.
338

A. Entryway Systems
Install permanent entryway systems at least 10 feet (3 meters) long in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt
and particulates entering the building at regularly used exterior entrances. Acceptable entryway systems include
permanently installed grates, grilles, slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath, rollout mats, and any other
materials manufactured as entryway systems with equivalent or better performance. Maintain all on a weekly basis.

B. Interior Cross-Contamination Prevention

Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or chemicals may be present or used (e.g., garages,
housekeeping and laundry areas, copying and printing rooms), using the exhaust rates determined in EQ
Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance or a minimum of 0.50 cfm per square foot (2.54 l/s per square
meter), to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each
of these spaces, provide self-closing doors and deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling.

C. Filtration
Each ventilation system that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces must have particle filters or air-cleaning devices
that meet one of the following filtration media requirements:
·· minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or higher, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007;
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

or
·· Class F7 or higher as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation,
Determination of the Filtration Performance.

Replace all air filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy.

D. Natural Ventilation Design Calculations

Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces employs the appropriate strategies in Chartered Institution
of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-
Domestic Buildings, Section 2.4.

E. Mixed-Mode Design Calculations

Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces complies with CIBSE Applications Manual 13–2000, Mixed
Mode Ventilation.

OPTION 2. ADDITIONAL ENHANCED IAQ STRATEGIES

(1 POINT COMMERCIAL INTERIORS AND HOSPITALITY, 2 POINTS RETAIL)

Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.

Mechanically ventilated spaces (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;
B. increased ventilation;
EQ

C. carbon dioxide monitoring; or

D. additional source control and monitoring.

Naturally ventilated spaces (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room by room calculations.

Mixed-mode systems (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;
B. increased ventilation;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room-by-room calculations.
 339

A. Exterior Contamination Prevention

Design the project to minimize and control the entry of pollutants into the building. Ensure through the results
of computational fluid dynamics modeling, Gaussian dispersion analyses, wind tunnel modeling, or tracer gas
modeling that outdoor air contaminant concentrations at outdoor air intakes are below the thresholds listed in
Table 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S., whichever is more stringent).

TABLE 1. Maximum concentrations of pollutants at outdoor air intakes

Pollutants Maximum concentration Standard

Allowable annual average

OR
Those regulated by National Ambient Air 8-hour or 24-hour average where an annual National Ambient Air Quality Standards
Quality Standards (NAAQS) standard does not exist (NAAQS)
OR
Rolling 3-month average

B. Increased Ventilation
Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates
as determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance.

C. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring

Monitor CO2 concentrations within all densely occupied spaces. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900
and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building
automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate
CO2 setpoints using methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C.

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

D. Additional Source Control and Monitoring
For spaces where air contaminants are likely, evaluate potential sources of additional air contaminants besides
CO2. Develop and implement a materials-handling plan to reduce the likelihood of contaminant release. Install
monitoring systems with sensors designed to detect the specific contaminants. An alarm must indicate any unusual
or unsafe conditions.

E. Natural Ventilation Room-by-Room Calculations

Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4, Design Calculations, to predict that room-by-room airflows will provide effective
natural ventilation.

EQ
340

BEHIND THE INTENT

Indoor pollutants and particulates are brought indoors by occupants, through ventilation system intakes or building
openings, and from activities conducted within the building. Designing for effective indoor air quality (IAQ) can
help produce a comfortable indoor environment for building occupants and prevent the human health problems
associated with poor indoor air quality.
This credit identifies IAQ strategies that extend beyond the outdoor air requirements of EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Design strategies include the installation of entryway systems to prevent
contaminants from being brought inside by occupants, use of enhanced filtration media, increased ventilation,
and monitoring strategies for ventilation systems. Each strategy alone is beneficial, but a combination of multiple
strategies is encouraged.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. DETERMINE HOW PROJECT IS VENTILATED

Determine whether the project will use mechanical ventilation, natural ventilation, or a mixed-mode
approach (see EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance).

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Determine which option(s) and strategies the project will pursue, based on the information in Table 2 and
the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 requires implementing all strategies applicable to the project’s ventilation system type.
·· Option 2 requires implementing one strategy applicable to the project’s ventilation system type.
If multiple ventilation system types are used (i.e., mixed mode), only one strategy needs to be
attempted. For example, if a space is both naturally and mechanically ventilated, the project team
could select carbon dioxide monitoring and implement this strategy by installing monitors that
operate whenever the space is operating in mechanical ventilation mode. Similarly, if the project has
both naturally and mechanically ventilated spaces, it could also select carbon dioxide monitoring and
implement this strategy by installing monitors in all mechanically ventilated spaces.

TABLE 2. Ventilation systems and credit requirements

Option 1. Enhanced IAQ strategies

Interior cross- Natural

Entryway Mixed-mode
contamination Filtration ventilation design
systems design calculations
prevention calculations
EQ

Mechanically ventilated space REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED N/A N/A

Naturally ventilated space REQUIRED N/A N/A REQUIRED N/A

Mixed-mode system REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED REQUIRED

Option 2. Additional enhanced IAQ strategies

Exterior Additional source Natural ventilation

Increased Carbon dioxide
contamination control and room-by-room
ventilation monitoring
prevention monitoring calculations

Mechanically ventilated space SELECT 1 OF 4 N/A

Naturally ventilated space SELECT 1 OF 3 N/A N/A SELECT 1 OF 3

Mixed-mode system SELECT 1 OF 4 N/A SELECT 1 OF 4

 341

STEP 3. COMPLY WITH APPROPRIATE STRATEGY REQUIREMENTS

For each strategy required for a given space’s ventilation system, follow the appropriate set of steps.
Prepare a narrative indicating the system type and strategies pursued, detailing how compliance was
achieved.

Option 1. Enhanced IAQ Strategies

ENTRYWAY SYSTEMS

STEP 1. IDENTIFY APPLICABLE ENTRIES

Identify all regularly used exterior entrances to the building (see Further Explanation, Regularly Used
Exterior Entrances). Projects that do not have direct access to the exterior are exempt from this
requirement.

STEP 2. INCORPORATE PERMANENT ENTRYWAY SYSTEMS INTO THE DESIGN

Determine which type of permanent entryway system will be installed and incorporate into the project
drawings and specifications (see Further Explanation, Selecting a Permanent Entryway System). Indicate
the compliant entryways on project plans.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE STRATEGY

Determine how the entryway systems will be maintained on a weekly basis. Consider modifying standard
operating procedures, cleaning programs, and vendor requirements to include entryway maintenance.

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL SPACES NEEDING INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

Identify spaces where hazardous gases or chemicals may be handled or used, as indicated in the credit
requirements.
·· Open garages are exempt from this requirement.
·· Include housekeeping and laundry areas even if green cleaning policies are adopted.
·· Copying and printing rooms with convenience printers and copiers only may be excluded. The
definition of convenience printers and copiers is left to the discretion of the design team; convenience
machines are generally small units shared by many office personnel for short printing and copying jobs.

STEP 2. DEVELOP CONTAMINANT CONTROL DESIGN

Work with the architect and mechanical designer to develop a contaminant control design for all spaces
needing interior cross-contamination prevention and incorporate strategies into the project drawings and
specifications.
·· Include self-closing doors and either deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling for each space, as
indicated in the credit requirements.

EQ
·· Design the exhaust system such that each space has negative pressure, as indicated in the credit
requirements. Use the exhaust rates from EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
or 0.50 cfm per square foot, whichever is greater (see Further Explanation, Exhaust Rates for Interior
Cross-Contamination Prevention).
·· Additional ductwork and exhaust fans may be needed to provide the required ventilation. Possible
strategies to achieve the necessary ventilation economically include stacking all high-pollutant source
areas and locating rooms with hazardous material adjacent to outside walls and each other.

FILTRATION MEDIA

STEP 1. SPECIFY COMPLIANT FILTRATION MEDIA

Identify all HVAC equipment that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces and specify outdoor air
filtration media that meet the credit requirements for minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) ratings
or filtration class. All outdoor air supplied to occupied spaces must be filtered.
·· Ensure that specified air-handling equipment is designed to accommodate the required filter media.
Otherwise, customization—resizing ductwork, increasing fan capacity to maintain air delivery despite
342

the added resistance of MERV 13 (F7) filtration, or other modifications to system design—may be
required.
·· Mixed return and outdoor air can also be filtered with MERV 13 (F7) or higher, but this is not required.
·· If the project design includes a dedicated outdoor air system with local distribution systems, the
filtration requirement only applies to the dedicated outdoor air system.

STEP 2. REPLACE FILTRATION BEFORE OCCUPANCY

Replace all filters after completion of construction but before occupancy.

NATURAL VENTILATION DESIGN CALCULATIONS

STEP 1. REVIEW STANDARD

Review the basic forms of ventilation strategy presented in Chartered Institution of Building Service
Engineers Applications (CIBSE) Manual AM10, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Section
2.4: single-sided ventilation, single opening, double opening, cross-ventilation, stack ventilation, double-
skin facade ventilation, mechanically assisted strategies, and night ventilation. Identify which ventilation
strategies apply to the project.

STEP 2. CONFIRM RULES OF THUMB FOR ESTIMATING EFFECTIVENESS OF NATURAL

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

VENTILATION
Use the rules of thumb or guidance from CIBSE AM10 as applicable to the project. Prepare diagrams and
narratives to explain how each applicable rule of thumb or guidance was considered. The documentation
should supplement the natural ventilation calculations for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality
Performance.

MIXED-MODE VENTILATION DESIGN CALCULATIONS

STEP 1. REVIEW STANDARD

Review the mixed-mode design strategies presented in Chartered Institution of Building Service
Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM13, Mixed-Mode Ventilation, Section 2.1: contingency design,
complementary design, and zone design. Identify which mixed-mode strategy applies to the project.
If the complementary design is selected, also identify the operational strategy based on CIBSE AM13,
Section 2.2.
Use CIBSE AM13, Figure 2.1, as the iteration strategy to optimize the mixed mode system.

STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT DESIGN FOLLOWS APPROPRIATE MIXED-MODE STRATEGIES

Use the guidance and strategies from CIBSE AM13 (Section 2.1, Section 2.2, and Figure 2.1) as applicable
to the project. Prepare diagrams and narratives to explain how the guidance was considered. The
documentation should supplement that prepared for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality
Performance and requirement D (natural ventilation design calculations) in this credit.
EQ

Option 2. Additional Enhanced IAQ Strategies

Determine which strategy the project will implement, based on Table 2.

EXTERIOR CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

STEP 1. DESIGN OUTDOOR AIR INTAKES TO MINIMIZE AND CONTROL ENTRY OF

POLLUTANTS
The exterior contaminant prevention applies to all outdoor air intakes that serve the project space.
Consider locating outdoor air intakes away from nearby sources. Air intakes located one-third of the way
up the side of the building tend to work best.1 Locate air intakes away from loading docks, at ground
level near roadways, below grade in areaways, or on roofs near exhausts.2 ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Table 5-1,
lists minimum separation distances for air intakes (see Further Explanation, International Tips).

1. Spengler, J.D., J.M. Samet, and J.F. McCarthy, Indoor Air Quality Handbook (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001).
2. Ibid.
 343

STEP 2. SELECT MODELING TOOL

Determine which modeling tool, of the list in the credit requirements, will be used to verify compliance
with pollution concentration requirements. Consider whether the software can accurately capture
expected meteorological conditions, potential pollutant plumes, and contaminant concentrations at the
project’s outdoor air intakes.

STEP 3. COMPLETE LEVEL 1 SCREENING

Model contaminant travel at worst-case meteorological conditions. Worst-case conditions should be
based on the wind speed and direction, with a direct line of sight from each pollutant source to the
project building.
Once worst-case conditions have been identified, perform a simulation to determine whether
concentrations for the pollutants regulated by National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) at
outdoor air intakes are below the allowable annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an
annual standard does not exist, or the rolling three-month average. If all pollutant concentrations are well
below the required thresholds, no further modeling is required.

STEP 4. COMPLETE LEVEL 2 SCREENING

If the Level 1 screening indicates that pollutant concentrations are barely compliant or noncompliant,
perform a Level 2 screening to reassess pollutant concentrations. Use more detailed inputs pertaining to
atmospheric processes, building geometry, and emissions concentrations. If the precise composition of
chemical exhaust from a source is unpublished, document how the team arrived at its components and
concentrations.
The Level 2 screening should confirm one of the following outcomes:
·· The concentrations for the pollutants regulated by NAAQS at outdoor air intakes are below the
allowable annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an annual standard does not exist, or

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

the rolling three-month average.
·· The indoor concentrations for the pollutants regulated by NAAQS are below 2.5% of the allowable
annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an annual standard does not exist, or the rolling
three-month average. Indoor analyses may require a different modeling technique than that used in
the Level 1 dispersion analysis. If the Level 2 screening indicates that pollutant concentrations are
noncompliant, consider modifying air filtration or the locations of the outdoor air intakes.

INCREASED VENTILATION

STEP 1. DETERMINE VOLUME OF OUTDOOR AIR REQUIRED

Use the ventilation standard or code and the calculation methodology selected for EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance to determine the 30% increase.
·· Follow the prerequisite’s steps for mechanical ventilation systems to determine the amount of outdoor
air that must be supplied by each ventilation system. To meet the credit requirements, the system must
deliver 30% more outdoor air to the occupied spaces at all times the space is occupied. For multiple-
zone recirculating systems, this will likely increase the required outdoor air intake for the system by
more than 30%.
·· For projects that use ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Determining Increased Ventilation

EQ
Rate.
·· Exhaust rates are excluded from the credit requirements.

STEP 2. REVISE DESIGN TO MEET OUTDOOR AIR REQUIREMENTS, IF NECESSARY

See EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance for recommended modifications for
specific mechanical ventilation system types.

CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) MONITORING

STEP 1. IDENTIFY DENSELY OCCUPIED SPACES

Review ventilation calculations developed for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
or the project’s furniture plans to identify all spaces with an occupant density greater than 25 people per
1,000 square feet (93 square meters).

STEP 2. DESIGN THE CO2 MONITORING SYSTEM

Incorporate CO2 sensors into the design for each densely occupied space.
·· CO2 sensors must be installed in the breathing zone as defined in the credit requirements. CO2 sensors
installed in return air ducts cannot be used to meet the requirements of this credit.
344

·· Determine CO2 concentration setpoint(s) using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C. See
ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix A, for calculations and examples.
·· Configure the CO2 monitoring system to generate an alarm if the differential CO2 concentration
exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Alarms may be audible or visual indicators to space occupants
or building automation system alerts. CO2 sensors may be incorporated into the HVAC control system,
for example, to open zone VAV dampers when the setpoint is exceeded. However, this is not required.

STEP 3. INSTALL AND COMMISSION CO2 SENSORS

During construction, install CO2 sensors per the design. Include CO2 sensors in the commissioning process
for EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.

ADDITIONAL SOURCE CONTROL AND MONITORING

STEP 1. DETERMINE POTENTIAL CONTAMINANT SOURCES

List potential indoor air contaminants that may be present in the project spaces. Consider typical
substances found in the particular building types, and review activities and processes that will
occur. Substances might include cleaning supplies, laboratory chemicals, or materials required for
manufacturing.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 2. IDENTIFY PRIORITY CONTAMINANTS AND EXPOSURE LIMITS

From the list of potential sources, identify the priority contaminants—those that pose the greatest risk to
occupants’ health. For each priority contaminant, identify a reference standard and an exposure limit.

STEP 3. DESIGN AND INSTALL MONITORING SYSTEM

Install a permanent monitoring system to continuously monitor concentrations of priority contaminants.
Configure the system to generate an alarm when unusual or unsafe concentrations occur.
·· Retain documentation that describes how alarm setpoints were established.
·· Include the contaminant monitoring system in the commissioning process for EA Prerequisite
Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.

STEP 4. DEVELOP AND IMPLEMENT MATERIALS HANDLING PLAN

Develop a materials handling plan to limit human exposure to priority contaminants and ensure that
the monitoring system is effective. For example, a materials handling plan may require that a particular
solvent be stored and used in a single room that is properly ventilated and equipped with sensors
connected to an alarm.

NATURAL VENTILATION ROOM-BY-ROOM CALCULATIONS

STEP 1. DETERMINE REQUIRED FLOW RATES

Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4.1, to determine the desired airflow rates.

STEP 2. DETERMINE OPENING SIZES

Follow CIBSE AM10, Sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.2, and 4.3, as applicable, to determine whether the design
will produce sufficient airflow rates and to optimize opening sizes, locations, and characteristics. These
EQ

sections offer many calculation options. All options are acceptable, provided inputs and results are
justified and reasonable.

STEP 3. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE

Create a table of all naturally ventilated spaces in the project, opening characteristics, desired flow
rates, and calculated flow rates. Indicate how seasonal conditions and different wind conditions were
considered.
Determine the free area of natural ventilation openings and the required opening area. Confirm that
natural ventilation openings meet or exceed the sizes calculated for all spaces. The documentation
should supplement that developed for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance and
Option 1, requirement D (natural ventilation design calculations) in this credit. Note, if you comply with
these natural ventilation room-by-room calculations, you automatically comply with the ventilation
requirements for naturally ventilated spaces in the Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance prerequisite.
The monitoring requirements in the prerequisite must still be met.
 345

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See the referenced standards for all calculations.

REGULARLY USED EXTERIOR ENTRANCES

See Definitions to help in identifying regularly used entrances.
For renovation or additions where the scope of the project does not include an exterior entrance, entryway
systems do not need to be installed. However, if the project scope includes an entrance that would qualify as a
regularly used exterior entrance, the team must ensure that appropriate entryway systems are also installed.

SELECTING A PERMANENT ENTRYWAY SYSTEM

Permanent entryway systems must catch and hold dirt particles and prevent contamination of the building interior.
Acceptable permanent entryway systems include the following:
·· Permanently installed grates
·· Grilles
·· Slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath
·· Rollout mats
·· Carpet tile specifically designed for entryway system or similar use

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

·· Other materials manufactured for use as an entryway system or similar that performs at least as well as the
above systems

Typical building carpeting is not an acceptable permanent entryway system.

Consider permanent entryway systems that have solid backings. A nonporous backing captures dirt and moisture
and helps prevent contaminants from collecting underneath. Consider permanent entryway systems made with
mold- and mildew- resistant materials.
The permanent entryway system should be at least 10 feet (3 meters) long. Exceptions to the 10-foot (3-meter)
distance are allowed if the team submits documentation verifying that the proposed entryway system performs at
least as well as a full-length system. The selected product should be appropriate for the project’s climate. Areas with
high precipitation, for example, may need to install more absorbent mats to prevent occupants from slipping.
Evaluate maintenance requirements when selecting the permanent entryway system. All permanent entryway
systems must be maintained on a weekly basis.

EXHAUST RATES FOR INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

EQ
In general, exhaust rates are prescribed by the ventilation standard or code used in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor
Air Quality Performance. However, if this standard or code does not set a requirement for a particular space type,
a minimum exhaust rate of 0.5 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot (2.54 liters per second, l/s, per square
meter) must be used.
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Table 6-4, lists numerous spaces whose exhaust requirements exceed the 0.5 cfm per square
foot (2.54 l/s per square meter) rate. Exhaust rates for these spaces must be maintained at all times, even when the
building is not occupied.
If supply air is being provided to the room, the exhaust rate must be sufficient to create a negative pressure with
respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed.
No recirculation of the air from these rooms is permitted.

DETERMINING INCREASED VENTILATION RATES

When using ASHRAE 62.1–2010, use the following process to determine the 30% increase in ventilation for the
breathing zone:
346

Single-zone or 100% outdoor air system. Calculate the required outdoor intake flow using the ventilation rate
procedure and multiple the result by 1.3.

Multiple-zone recirculating system. At the system level, multiply the uncorrected outdoor air requirements for
the system, Vou, by 1.3. Multiply the outdoor airflow (Vbz) in the critical zone’s breathing zone by 1.3. Recalculate the
system ventilation efficiency, Ev, based on the revised values for Vou and critical zone Vbz. This will likely increase the
required outdoor air intake for the system (Vot) by more than 30%.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For Option 2, local guidelines for maximum concentrations of pollutants at air intakes may be followed, provided
they are at least as stringent as the U.S. EPA guideline.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Entryway systems: scaled floor plans showing locations and measurements X

Interior cross-contamination prevention: list of rooms, areas, exhaust rate, separation method X

Filtration: mechanical schedules highlighting MERV or class ratings for all units that supply outdoor air X

Natural ventilation design: calculations and narrative demonstrating appropriate strategies per referenced
X
standard
Mixed mode design: calculations and narrative demonstrating appropriate strategies per referenced
X
standard
Exterior contamination prevention: narrative describing type of modeling; model output reports highlighting
X
contaminant levels and required thresholds
Increased ventilation: confirmation (calculations are documented under EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air
X
Quality Performance)

Carbon dioxide monitoring: controls drawing sample showing CO2 monitors and densely occupied space X
EQ

Additional source control and monitoring: description of likely air contaminants and how they were
X
identified, description of materials handling plan, plans showing installed monitoring system
Natural ventilation: room-by-room calculations, narrative, and diagrams demonstrating effective natural
X
ventilation per referenced standard

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Increased
filtration and increased ventilation affect energy consumption. Consider incorporating energy efficiency measures,
such as dedicated outdoor air systems, economizers, and demand-controlled ventilation, to reduce or eliminate
potential energy penalties.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The ventilation system referenced in the related
prerequisite must be consistent with this credit.
 347

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Portions of IEQ Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring, IEQ Credit 2 Increased Ventilation, and IEQ Credit
5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control have been combined into a single credit.
·· Meeting the requirements of interior cross-contamination prevention no longer requires a calculation of a
minimum pressure differential. However, the exhaust rates from the ventilation standard in EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance must be used. For spaces that do not have a requirement from
this standard, a minimum exhaust rate of 0.5 cubic feet per minute per square foot (2.54 liters per second per
square meter) must be used.
·· Additional options regarding naturally ventilated spaces have been included.
·· An option for filtration media requirements, CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General
Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance, has been added.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007: ashrae.org

CEN Standard EN 779–2002: www.cen.eu/

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010: ashrae.org

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005:
cibse.org

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual 13–2000: cibse.org

National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS): epa.gov/air/criteria.html

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve both Option 1 and Option 2 and incorporate an additional Option 2 strategy.

DEFINITIONS
densely occupied space an area with a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (93 square
meters)

EQ
occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

regularly occupied space an area where one or more individuals normally spend time (more than one hour per
person per day on average) seated or standing as they work, study, or perform other focused activities inside a
building. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a typical occupant uses the space.
For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the time a typical occupant spends in
the space when it is in use.

regularly used exterior entrance a frequently used means of gaining access to a building. Examples include the
main building entrance as well as any building entryways attached to parking structures, underground parking
garages, underground pathways, or outside spaces. Atypical entrances, emergency exits, atriums, connections
between concourses, and interior spaces are not included.
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

348
 349

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Low-Emitting Materials
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-3 points)

Retail (1-3 points)
Hospitality (1-3 points)

INTENT

To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air

quality, human health, productivity, and the environment.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
REQUIREMENTS
This credit includes requirements for product manufacturing as well as project teams. It covers volatile organic
compound (VOC) emissions into indoor air and the VOC content of materials, as well as the testing methods
by which indoor VOC emissions are determined. Different materials must meet different requirements to be
considered compliant for this credit. The building interior and exterior are organized in seven categories, each
with different thresholds of compliance. The building interior is defined as everything within the waterproofing
membrane. The building exterior is defined as everything outside and inclusive of the primary and secondary
weatherproofing system, such as waterproofing membranes and air- and water-resistive barrier materials.

EQ
350

OPTION 1. PRODUCT CATEGORY CALCULATIONS

Achieve the threshold level of compliance with emissions and content standards for the number of product
categories listed in Table 2.

TABLE 1. Thresholds of compliance with emissions and content standards for 6 categories of materials

Category Threshold Emissions and content requirements

At least 90%, by volume, for • General Emissions Evaluation for paints and coatings applied to
Interior paints and coatings applied walls, floors, and ceilings
emissions; 100% for VOC
on site
content • VOC content requirements for wet applied products
Interior adhesives and sealants At least 90%, by volume, for • General Emissions Evaluation
applied on site (including flooring emissions; 100% for VOC • VOC content requirements for wet applied products
adhesive) content
Flooring 100% • General Emissions Evaluation
100% not covered by other • Composite Wood Evaluation
Composite wood
categories
Ceilings, walls, thermal, and acoustic • General Emissions Evaluation
100%
insulation
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Furniture At least 90%, by cost • Furniture Evaluation

TABLE 2. Points for number of compliant categories of products

Compliant categories Points

3 1
5 2
6 3

OPTION 2. BUDGET CALCULATION METHOD

If some products in a category do not meet the criteria, project teams may use the budget calculation method (Table 3).

TABLE 3. Points for percentage compliance, under budget calculation method

Percentage of total Points

≥ 50% and < 70% 1

≥ 70% and < 90% 2
≥ 90% 3

The budget method organizes the building interior into five assemblies:
·· flooring;
EQ

·· ceilings;
·· walls;
·· thermal and acoustic insulation;
·· furniture; and

Walls, ceilings, and flooring are defined as building interior products; each layer of the assembly, including paints,
coatings, adhesives, and sealants, must be evaluated for compliance. Insulation is tracked separately.

Determine the total percentage of compliant materials according to Equation 1.

EQUATION 1. Total percentage compliance

( % compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation )

Total % compliant +
for projects with ( % compliant furniture )
furniture ________________________________________________________________________

5
 351

EQUATION 2. System percentage compliant

Flooring, walls,
( compliant
surface area
of layer 1
+
compliant
surface area
of layer 2
+
compliant
surface area
of layer 3
+ ...
)
ceilings, insulation = × 100

( )
% compliant
total total total
surface area + surface area + surface area + ...
of layer 1 of layer 2 of layer 3

EQUATION 3. Furniture systems compliant, using ANSI/BIFMA evaluation

0.5 × cost compliant with §7.6.1 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011

+
% compliant for
furniture = cost compliant with §7.6.2 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 × 100

total furniture cost

Calculate surface area of assembly layers based on the manufacturer’s documentation for application.

If 90% of an assembly meets the criteria, the system counts as 100% compliant. If less than 50% of a assembly meets
the criteria, the assembly counts as 0% compliant.

Manufacturers’ claims. Both first-party and third-party statements of product compliance must follow the
guidelines in CDPH SM V1.1–2010, Section 8. Organizations that certify manufacturers’ claims must be accredited
under ISO Guide 65.

Laboratory requirements. Laboratories that conduct the tests specified in this credit must be accredited under
ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
Emissions and Content Requirements
To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet all of the following requirements, as applicable.

Inherently nonemitting sources. Products that are inherently nonemitting sources of VOCs (stone, ceramic,
powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid wood)
are considered fully compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include integral organic-based
surface coatings, binders, or sealants.

General emissions evaluation. Building products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance

EQ
with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure
scenario. The default scenario is the private office scenario. The manufacturer’s or third-party certification must
state the exposure scenario used to determine compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must
state the amount applied in mass per surface area.
Manufacturers’ claims of compliance with the above requirements must also state the range of total VOCs after
14 days (336 hours), measured as specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.1:
·· 0.5 mg/m3 or less;
·· between 0.5 and 5.0 mg/m3; or
·· 5.0 mg/m3 or more.

Projects outside the U.S. may use products tested and deemed compliant in accordance with either (1) the CDPH
standard method (2010) or (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010). Test products either with
(1) the CDPH Standard Method (2010), (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010), (3) ISO 16000-
3: 2010, ISO 16000-6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-11:2006 either in conjunction with AgBB, or with French
352

legislation on VOC emission class labeling, or (4) the DIBt testing method (2010). If the applied testing method does
not specify testing details for a product group for which the CDPH standard method does provide details, use the
specifications in the CDPH standard method. U.S. projects must follow the CDPH standard method.

Additional VOC content requirements for wet-applied products. In addition to meeting the general
requirements for VOC emissions (above), on-site wet-applied products must not contain excessive levels of
VOCs, for the health of the installers and other tradesworkers who are exposed to these products. To demonstrate
compliance, a product or layer must meet the following requirements, as applicable. Disclosure of VOC content
must be made by the manufacturer. Any testing must follow the test method specified in the applicable regulation.
·· All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air
Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South
Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011.
·· All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site must meet the applicable chemical content requirements of
SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, as analyzed by the methods specified
in Rule 1168. The provisions of SCAQMD Rule 1168 do not apply to adhesives and sealants subject to state or
federal consumer product VOC regulations.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· For projects outside the U.S., all paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants wet-applied on site must either
meet the technical requirements of the above regulations, or comply with applicable national VOC control
regulations, such as the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC), the Canadian VOC Concentration
Limits for Architectural Coatings, or the Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC) Regulation.
·· If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added
exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt compounds) must be disclosed.
·· If a product cannot reasonably be tested as specified above, testing of VOC content must comply with ASTM
D2369-10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or ISO 11890-2.
·· For projects in North America, methylene chloride and perchloroethylene may not be intentionally added in
paints, coatings, adhesives, or sealants.

Composite Wood Evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic
Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, must be documented
to have low formaldehyde emissions that meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde
requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins. For projects
outside the U.S., composite wood must be documented not to exceed a concentration limit of 0.05 ppm of
formaldehyde (0.06 mg/m2-h when expressed as emission rate) as tested either following EN-717-1:2004, following
ISO 16000-3: 2010, ISO 16000-6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-11:2006, or following CEN/TS 16516: 2013
either in conjunction with AgBB or with Belgian or French legislation on VOC emission class labeling.
Salvaged and reused architectural millwork more than one year old at the time of occupancy is considered
compliant, provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants.

Furniture evaluation. New furniture and furnishing items must be tested in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA
EQ

Standard Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1
(for half credit, by cost) OR 7.6.2 (for full credit, by cost), using either the concentration modeling approach or the
emissions factor approach. Model the test results using the open plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/
BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing methodologies and contaminant thresholds are
also acceptable. For classroom furniture, use the standard school classroom model in CDPH Standard Method v1.1.
Documentation submitted for furniture must indicate the modeling scenario used to determine compliance.
Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the time of use is considered compliant, provided it
meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants.
 353

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many types of chemicals, both engineered and naturally occurring, are present everywhere. Volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) are chemicals that are released into the air from numerous materials—some of them natural,
humanmade, plant-based, and from animals, including people. Prolonged exposure to high concentrations of some
VOCs has been linked to a wide range of chronic health problems such as asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary
disease, and cancer. Short-term exposure to VOCs can also cause acute reactions, such as eye, nose, and throat
irritation.
Some VOCs are present in the natural environment; however, higher concentrations of VOCs are typically found
indoors, where reduced air ventilation and numerous sources of VOCs may exist. Although completely eliminating
exposure to all VOCs is impossible, specifying low-emitting and nonemitting products will significantly reduce the
strength and quantity of VOC exposure indoors.
Project teams should specify products that meet the compliance thresholds established by recognized standards,
or choose products classified as inherently nonemitting (see Further Explanation, About the Referenced Standards).
Ideally, all interior building materials—from furniture and furnishings to thermal and acoustic insulation and the
interior finishes of all floors, walls, and ceilings—would be compliant. This credit, however, uses a holistic systems
approach that rewards teams for partial compliance, recognizing compliance of product assemblies even if some of
their elements do not meet the applicable standard.
This credit addresses each layer of wall, flooring, and ceiling interior finish—a methodology that is conservatively
protective of occupants, given that the emissions from layers that are not directly exposed to air are tested separately.
Air concentration measurements from chamber testing are a much better predictor of emissions over time
than VOC content limits. However, chamber emissions testing is generally more expensive, less widely adopted for
wet-applied products, and unable to evaluate emissions generated at the time of application. The credit still limits
VOC for on-site wet-applied products, in part to avoid environmental damage (e.g., smog formulation) and in part to
protect the people who apply these products or are exposed to them during installation.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. RESEARCH AND SPECIFY LOW- OR NONEMITTING FINISHES AND FURNITURE

Review project documents to identify all applicable products and specify them as low- or nonemitting.
Research products that meet the requirements by having one or more of the following characteristics:
·· The product is inherently nonemitting. Examples of nonemitting products are stone, ceramic, powder-
coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid
wood flooring, provided they do not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or

EQ
sealants (see Further Explanation, Inherently Nonemitting Materials).
·· The manufacturer has self-declared the product’s compliance and provides appropriate
documentation, as outlined in the credit requirements.
·· The product has third-party certification of compliance.
In most cases, turning to third-party certification to recognized guidelines, such as California Department
of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1, is the easiest way to find and specify products; in other
cases, self-declared compliance to a standard, such as South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) Rule 1113, is widespread and sufficient. Check that the appropriate version of the testing
method was used to test the product Check the USGBC website for an up-to-date listing of certification
programs that test to the referenced standards (see Further Explanation, Testing Standards).
Provide the contractor with detailed specifications to ensure that the team has the information needed
to meet the credit requirements. The design team should specifically call out products that have been
researched and confirm that they meet the credit requirements.
Request the specific documentation that will be required for the certification review, such as material
safety data sheets (MSDS), third-party certificates, and test reports from subcontractors; this will
354

help in procuring compliant products. Certificates must state the testing methodology and the model
as appropriate. The units must be stated and be consistent with those as required. For wet-applied
products, the manufacturer must state each product’s classification and application according to the
referenced standard’s definitions or be otherwise justified; how it’s used in the project does not count
as justification. For example, a defined roof coating is not a carpet adhesive simply because it was used
this way on the project. If the product is classified as a roof coating under SCAQMD, it must meet the
appropriate limit for roof coatings.
Specifying only compliant products is the easiest way to ensure that the credit requirements are met and
the building will have the lowest possible emissions. But Option 2 allows project teams to substitute a
noncompliant product if necessary.
The credit requirements need to be met for all products and materials installed within the waterproofing
membrane (see Definitions).

STEP 2. PERFORM CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL REVIEWS

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that selected products
meet the credit requirements and do not exceed the allocated VOC emissions.
·· Because meeting these credit requirements is not typical for all construction teams and suppliers,
conducting a LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

stress their importance will aid in successful product procurement.

·· Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and contractor for
compliance with credit requirements. Such lists are good resources for design teams and contractors
to consult when sourcing products that may meet the requirements of this credit. Some manufacturers
have a list of LEED compliant products on their websites.

STEP 3. SELECT ONE OPTION

Based on the research performed and products purchased in each category identified in the credit
requirements, determine which option is more appropriate for the project.
·· Option 1 is simpler but less flexible, since partial credit (i.e., less than the minimum percentage
compliance required) in one category cannot be combined with partial credit in another category.
If the minimum percentage compliance cannot be attained in a category, project teams must use
Option 2.
·· Option 2 offers a budget calculation method that categorizes building interior products and materials
into six “assemblies.” If at least 50% of an assembly is compliant, partial credit for that assembly can
be combined with partial credit from another assembly to earn points, which ensures that teams can
receive partial credit for specifying compliant low-emitting products or materials in each assembly
category if full compliance is not readily achievable.
·· Option 2 may also allow the project to achieve more points and demonstrate higher overall
compliance, even if the Option 1 requirements are also feasible.

Option 1. Product Category Calculations

EQ

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL APPLICABLE PRODUCTS

List all specified interior paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, flooring, composite wood, ceilings, walls,
thermal and acoustic insulation, and furniture.
·· During the construction submittal review process, obtain manufacturer documentation confirming
compliance for each product category. All products must comply with each applicable threshold
requirement. If two requirements exist, the product must comply with both requirements.
·· The most effective way to track this credit is for one team member to keep a running list of products
and their compliance information (e.g., VOC content, emissions testing, emissions percentage by
volume), with manufacturers’ documentation.
·· Furniture must be included, regardless of who specified or provided it.
·· Adhesives, sealants, paints, and coatings used on site with flooring products are considered interior
adhesives and sealants or interior paints and coatings, as appropriate. The flooring itself must meet
the requirements of the flooring product category.
·· For wet-applied product categories, 90% of products must meet emissions criteria and 100% must
meet VOC content criteria.
·· To demonstrate the project’s overall attainment of 100% of the VOC content criteria, compare the
 355

baseline case and the design case in a VOC content budget. If the design (or actual) level is less than
the baseline, the credit requirement is satisfied. The values used in the comparison calculation are the
g/L of VOCs contained in the product. To determine the budget, multiply the volume of the product
used by the threshold VOC level for the baseline case from the appropriate referenced standard;
use the actual product VOC level for the design case. If a product with high VOC levels is applied
unintentionally, use the VOC budget approach to determine whether compliance can nevertheless be
attained.
·· Example. SCAQMD Rule 1113 sets the allowable VOC content limit for faux finishing coatings—trowel-
applied coatings at 350 g/L. A subcontractor mistakenly used 50 liters of a faux finish coating with
450 g/L VOC content. The project team must now create a budget for all paints and coatings installed
in the project to offset this product, which does not meet the Rule 1113 limits.

TABLE 4. SCAQMD Rule 1113

VOC budget
General
Volume Allowable Actual VOC
Regulation Product type emissions
installed (l) VOC content content Baseline Design case
criteria met?
case (g) (g)

Faux finishing
coatings—
SCAQMD Rule 1113 YES 50 350 450.00 17,500 22,500
trowel-applied
coatings

Clear wood
SCAQMD Rule 1113 finishes— YES 55 275 150 15,125 8,250
sanding sealers

VOC budget baseline case total (g) 32,625

VOC budget design case total (g) 30,750

STEP 2. PERFORM BUDGET CALCULATION METHOD (AS NECESSARY)

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A different budget may be used if threshold requirements cannot be achieved for the material categories
specified in the credit requirements. That is, if 100% of the product category does not meet the
requirements, use the budget calculation method in Option 2.

Option 2. Budget Calculation Method

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ASSEMBLIES

Break out assembly components for each category (flooring, ceilings, walls, insulation, and furniture).
·· For each product in an assembly, calculate the surface area for typical wall, ceiling, and floor areas (see

EQ
Further Explanation, Building Products and Systems).
·· Identify products that are full-spread, such as paint or carpet adhesive, according to the
manufacturer’s documentation for application.

STEP 2. CALCULATE TOTAL PERCENTAGE COMPLIANCE

Use Equation 1 in the credit requirements to calculate the total percentage compliance. Generate take-
offs and review estimates from subcontractors to calculate the surface area for each product. Equations
2 and 3 may be required to generate values for Equation 1.
For assemblies, use the following guidelines:
·· If all layers of an assembly are compliant, the entire surface area (square footage or square meters)
counts. Not-full-spread, wet-applied products are included in the definition of interior finish if they are
installed on site.
·· If some layers of an assembly are noncompliant, calculate the weighted average using Equation 2.
·· At least 50% of an assembly must be compliant to contribute to credit compliance: if less than 50%
of the assembly is compliant, it counts as 0%; if 90% of the assembly meets the criteria, it counts as
100% compliant.
If some furniture is noncompliant, calculate the percentage of compliance using Equation 3.
356

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in the credit requirements.

ABOUT THE REFERENCED STANDARDS

As VOC emissions test methods and related criteria have advanced, the choices in standards have significantly
improved. In the very early days of LEED, only proprietary criteria and incomplete standards were available, which
did not promote competition between laboratories or provide consistent comparisons between products. However,
after much research and work in this area, qualified laboratories, manufacturers, and third-party certification
organizations are now available to support the choice of safe interior materials (see Further Explanation, Testing
Standards).
The science behind these credit criteria is complex. Compliance with the credit requires testing agencies to
measure millionths of a gram of a chemical compound in a cubic meter of air under tightly controlled laboratory
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

conditions, and then equate these measurements to standard building conditions to correlate the results with real-
world conditions.

Selection of the referenced standards included consideration of the following factors:

·· Leadership and scientific basis of target criteria (necessary for market transformation)
·· Rigor of the standards (specificity, consistency, repeatability across competing assessors)
·· Standard development process (proprietary business interest, open balanced consensus)
·· Market adoption (balanced with other factors but high enough to ensure credit success)
·· Harmonization with best practices (necessary for efficiency and economical application)

When multiple, competing criteria exist, purchasers find it difficult to make meaningful comparisons among
products and materials. If compliance with all cited standards were required, manufacturers (and ultimately
customers) would pay for duplicative tests and evaluations, wasting precious time and resources. Thus,
harmonization on baseline standards is essential for market clarity and efficiency.

INHERENTLY NONEMITTING MATERIALS

Naturally occurring materials and products that are made from inorganic materials (e.g., granite) emit either very
low or no VOCs. USGBC recognizes that such products do not need to undergo testing to prove they do not emit
VOCs. For the purposes of this credit, untreated and unfinished solid wood (not engineered wood) can also be
considered nonemitting even though such materials will likely emit some amount of formaldehyde naturally.
EQ

TESTING STANDARDS
CDPH Standard Method v1.1
This credit uses the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, v.
1.1–2010, for the emissions testing and requirements of all products and materials except furniture. The method,
widely recognized as a leadership standard for its stringent scientific criteria and detailed specificity, was developed
through an open, consensus process. It uses the chronic reference exposure levels established by the California
Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment, which include some of the most stringent criteria in use. It also
adopted and incorporated the first edition of the ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 standard test method for furniture.
There is no total volatile organic compound (TVOC) pass-fail requirement in the CDPH standard, which focuses
on measuring and limiting individual VOCs. However, this credit requires manufacturers using the CDPH standard
to also disclose the range of TVOC for each product, a requirement intended to provide greater transparency for
project teams, especially when they are comparing similar materials. Though TVOC alone is a crude measurement
not suitable for health-based determinations of acceptability, it is useful as a general indicator in combination with
individual VOC measurements, since higher TVOC may suggest the need for additional investigation.
 357

CARB ATCM composite wood formaldehyde regulation

This credit uses the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 93120 Airborne Toxic Control Measure (ATCM)
for formaldehyde emissions from composite wood products. It provides a way to determine the compliance of
composite wood materials used in products not covered by full VOC testing in other categories. CARB 93120 ATCM
is required in California but widely used internationally.
This credit uses not the minimum requirements of the CARB 93120 ATCM but the more stringent requirements
for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde based resins, as defined in the CARB
ATCM. These criteria are some of the strongest available for formaldehyde emissions from composite wood.
Although composite wood compliance with the CARB formaldehyde criteria is beneficial, chamber testing for a
broader range of individual VOCs emitted from assembled products that include composite wood in combination
with other components can provide a better determination of a product’s potential effect on indoor air quality.
Therefore, the composite wood criteria of this credit do not apply to composite wood covered by the full VOC testing
of other categories.

ANSI/BIFMA standards
This credit requires that all furniture VOC emissions testing be conducted in accordance with the ANSI/BIFMA
M7.1–2011 Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components and
Seating. The second edition of this standard incorporates important advances that include defining an emissions
factor approach for compliance, refining the mathematical estimation procedures for nonmeasured time points, and
adding specific, highly detailed surface area calculation requirements to ensure consistency.
This credit also requires furniture to comply with the low-emitting requirements in the ANSI/BIFMA e3–2011
Furniture Sustainability Standard. This standard includes both the historical VOC emissions requirements for
furniture from earlier versions of LEED and the health-based requirements from the 2010 version of the CDPH
standard, both as concentration limits and as maximum emissions factors. These emissions factor limits effectively
increase the stringency of the standard and make it easier for furniture component suppliers to modify their
products for compliance.

International standards
Recognizing the need for additional compliance options for projects outside the U.S., this credit also references

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
select international standards, which can be used only under specific conditions because of the complicated nature
of air quality standards.
The German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010) is a leading industry standard that can be used for
this credit, with some limitations. The AgBB standard does not represent a European consensus but does share
common attributes with several European counterparts. It addresses six times more individual VOC requirements
than the CDPH standard, and it specifies TVOC and total semivolatile organic compound (TSVOC) limits for all
nonregulated substances. However, the standard has limitations, including the following:
·· The formaldehyde limit value of 10 μg/m3 at 28 days must also be met when using the AgBB alternative, as
specified for class A+ in French compulsory VOC emissions class labeling.
·· The AgBB requirements use different exposure scenario conditions than CDPH. Because VOC emissions from

EQ
building materials generally decrease over time, the point in time for determining compliance is critical. The
more time there is for off-gassing to occur, the easier it may be to meet the standard, even though in many cases
the difference is minor (most emissions decay within the first week). CDPH requires compliance at 14 days; the
full AgBB requirements apply at three or 28 days, which this credit does not take into account.

Similarly, this credit allows the use of the ISO 16000 series standards when combined with the AgBB standard, the
cited French legislation (Decree no 2011-321 and arrêté of 19 April 2011), or the DIBT method (German Institute for
Building Technology, Principles of Health Assessment of Construction Products in Indoor Environments, 2010 dibt.de/de/
data/Aktuelles_Ref_II_4_6.pdf). The ISO 16000 series standards do not contain enough detail to be cited alone for
testing in this credit. The same requirements for formaldehyde also apply in each of these cases.
For composite wood, this credit allows the use of EN-717-1, CEN/TS 16516 and the ISO 16000 series provided
that a formaldehyde limit of 0.05 ppm (0.06 mg/m2-h when expressed as emission rate) is met. This is the same
limit required to meet CARB ATCM requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins (ULEF). EN 717-
1 was established by the Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) as a consistent standard for determining
formaldehyde emissions from wood-based panels and is used primarily for assigning E1 and E2 classifications to
wood products.
358

Referenced mass VOC regulatory standards

The U.S. regulatory system for adhesives and sealants captures a limited range of listed product categories and
excludes small packages intended for consumer use. The leading CARB and SCAQMD regulations are well ahead
of other state and national regulations. Historically, CARB has developed the suggested control measure (SCM)
coatings regulatory framework later adopted by some U.S. states and Canada. SCAQMD created a widely cited
regulatory system for sealants and adhesives packaged and designed for commercial applications.
This credit includes requirements for all product categories found in the referenced standards. Product
categories that are not listed do not need to be tracked. The credit incorporates various district, state, and national
regulations limiting the overall VOC content in coatings, sealants, and adhesives. These regulatory limits serve as a
minimum requirement, in addition to emissions testing standards listed in the general emissions requirements.
Because of divergent regulatory development processes, the coatings categories, category definitions, and
VOC limits vary between CARB SCM and SCAQMD Rule 1113. Suppliers should provide information on the proper
categorization of their materials consistent with definitions in the referenced regulations.
For projects outside the U.S., existing national VOC regulations may serve as the credit requirement. The
Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings and the Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC)
Regulation are examples of local regulations deemed equivalent to the CARB SCM and SCAQMD Rule 1113. Project
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

teams should contact USGBC to determine additional equivalent regulations. Establishing parity or a direct
comparison with cited U.S. regulations is difficult, given varying definitions of product categories, the VOC status of
specific solvents, and varying applications of the less-water and exempt-solvent approaches.
Information on any VOC compounds exempt from regulation is required for credit compliance. Cited regulatory
limits do not include the VOC content of colorants added to coatings at the point of sale. Pretinted flat, nonflat,
industrial maintenance coatings and stains include the VOC content of all ingredients, including colorants.

BUILDING PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

Use Table 5 to calculate the surface area for each layer in a building system. For all building systems listed in the table,
salvaged and reused items more than one year old at the time of occupancy do not require testing.

TABLE 5. Building products and systems

Building system Includes Exceptions Calculations

Insulation Includes the following, if inside Insulation on interior or Total area of insulation is based on installed planar areas
(thermal and the building waterproofing exterior of HVAC ductwork and of each insulation type. Total area of insulation for project
acoustic) membrane: insulation on any piping may is sum of planar areas of all types of insulation in defined
• Thermal and acoustical be excluded (because of lack of scope. Percentage of compliant insulation is calculated
boards, batts, rolls, blankets modeling scenarios). based on percentage of compliant insulation surface area.

• Sound attenuation fire If insulation system comprises more than one component,
blankets all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
compliant for system to qualify for full credit. Otherwise,
• Loose fill insulation use Equation 2 to determine credit percentage.
• Spray foam insulation Example of multicomponent insulation system is insulation
(open and closed cell)
EQ

board bonded to structural components with adhesive.

Flooring Includes all finished flooring: Testing not required: Total finished floor area for project is sum of areas of all
• Subflooring • Mineral-based finished flooring.

• Fluid and trowel-applied flooring without integral Percentage of compliant flooring is calculated based on
adhesives and grout (full organic-based modifiers, percentage of compliant floor area.
spread only) or topically applied film- If flooring system comprises more than one component,
forming or penetrating all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
• Engineered wood coatings such as tile, compliant for system to qualify for full credit.
• Resilient flooring terrazzo, and masonry
Flooring systems generally comprise multiple
• Carpeting • Associated site-applied components; identify all components in spreadsheet
adhesives, grouts, and matrix. This includes all site-applied products and
• Mineral-based tile
sealers must be meet materials such as adhesives, underlays, grouting, stains,
requirements for adhesives and sealers.
and sealants.
Examples of multicomponent flooring systems are carpet
• Untreated and unfinished with cushion, resilient flooring with flooring adhesive,
solid wood flooring wood flooring with site-applied finish, cut stone flooring
with site-applied sealer, tile with adhesive and grout, and
concrete finish consisting of stain, sealer and top coat.
 359

TABLE 5. (CONTINUED) Building products and systems

Building system Includes Exceptions Calculations

Ceilings • Overhead structural Testing not required: Total ceiling area for project is ceiling plan area for project
elements (exposed, finished, • Exposed concrete plus areas of additional finished ceiling planes.
unfinished) Percentage of compliant ceiling is calculated based on
• Exposed metal structural
• Direct-applied ceiling systems elements percentage of compliant ceiling area.
• Suspended systems (including • Factory-finished metal If ceiling system comprises more than one component, all
canopies and clouds) ceiling products components identified in USGBC’s low-emitting materials
• Glazed skylights calculator must be compliant for system to qualify for
• Glazing full credit. Examples of multicomponent ceiling systems
• Examples include painted • Ceiling systems considered are drywall panel with skim coat, primer and finish paint;
drywall and plaster, acoustical architectural woodwork manufactured wood coffer applied with adhesive; and any
suspension systems, specialty must comply with ceiling surface with site-applied paint or coating.
systems (plastic, metal, prescriptive material
wood), and painted or requirements specified for
otherwise finished structural built-in cabinetry
elements
• Bare concrete or metal
• When it is unclear what is structural elements; tile,
wall versus ceiling, project masonry and cut stone
teams may classify elements without integral organic-
either way, as they deem based coatings and sealants;
appropriate transition strips
Walls • Generally vertical structural • Office furniture system Total wall area for project is total interior surface area of
elements (exposed, finished, partitions (e.g., partial- all elements within scope of wall systems category.
unfinished) height or floor-to-ceiling Because of potential complexity of area calculations for
• All finish wall treatments cubicle panels that are large projects, wall surface areas may be estimated as for
manufactured off-site) are painting.
• Interior columns addressed under Furniture
• Exterior and interior wall and furnishings Percentage of compliant wall systems is calculated based
glazing on percentage of compliant wall area.
Testing not required:
• Doors If wall system is comprises more than one component,
• Bare concrete or metal all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
• Partial-height vertical surfaces structural elements; tile, compliant for system to qualify for full credit. Examples
(e.g., transoms, bulkheads, masonry and cut stone

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

of multicomponent wall systems are drywall panel and
pony walls, knee walls, and without integral organic- acoustic panel applied with adhesive, drywall panel with
similar structures normally based coatings and sealants; primer and finish paint coats, and movable wall system
constructed and finished factory-finished metal wall with wood frame, wood door, and fabric-covered acoustic
on-site) products; and glazing. panels.
• Architectural woodwork • Plaster and stucco without
applied to walls >1% organic additives
• Built-in cabinetry • Wall systems considered
to be architectural
• Floor-to-ceiling, moveable.
woodwork must comply
demountable wall systems
with prescriptive material
and partitions
requirements specified for
• When it is unclear what is built-in cabinetry (see below)
wall versus ceiling, project
• Salvaged and reused
teams may classify elements
architectural woodwork is
either way, as they deem
available for credit without
appropriate.
any requirements other
than those associated with

EQ
site-applied paints, coatings,
adhesives, sealants
Built-in cabinetry Includes all furniture-like items Total emitting surface area of built-in cabinetry is the area
(subcategory of built on site that are typically exposed to interior
wall systems in procured by general contractor For built-in cabinetry, compliance is determined based
Option 2) at earlier stage than furniture on following prescriptive construction criteria intended to
and furnishings limit sources of indoor VOC contaminants:
• Examples: cabinets, other • Products with composite woods constituting all or
storage units, shelving, portion of product (e.g., countertops, cabinetry with
product-display units, composite wood cores and internal components) must
integrated or built-in be constructed with composite wood documented to
reception desks and seating have low formaldehyde emissions (compliant to CARB
ATCM limits for no added formaldehyde or ultra-low
formaldehyde emitting or its equivalent). Materials
with no defined category under ATCM must follow
requirements for particleboard. Built-in cabinetry
constructed of inherently nonemitting materials (e.g.,
metal with factory-applied powder coating or plating)
are eligible for credit without testing.
• Site-applied finishes must comply with VOC content
limits and VOC emissions limits for paints and coatings.
• Site-applied adhesives must comply with VOC content
limits for adhesives and sealants.
360

TABLE 5. (CONTINUED) Building products and systems

Building system Includes Exceptions Calculations

Furniture and All stand-alone furniture items • Salvaged and reused Total amount of stand-alone furniture for project and
Furnishings purchased for project furniture more than one year the relative contributions of these products is based on
• Examples: individual and old at time of occupancy is purchase costs (i.e., excluding labor for installation).
group seating; open-plan and available for credit without To achieve full credit, 50% or more of total stand-alone
private office workstations; any IAQ testing furniture costs must be compliant for project to earn
desks and tables of all types; • Office accessories (e.g., credit for this category. Product compliance of 90% or
storage units, credenzas, desk-top blotters, trays, more is treated as 100%.
bookshelves, filing cabinets, tape dispensers, waste Furniture and furnishing items must be tested following
and other case goods; baskets, work tools normally ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1–2011. Use either
wall-mounted, visual display hung on office cubicle a concentration modeling approach or emission
products (e.g., markerboards panels, monitor arms, and all factor approach. Model test results using open plan,
and tackboards, excluding electrical items such as desk private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1
electronic display products); lamps and small appliances) as appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing
and miscellaneous items are excluded methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also
(e.g., easels, mobile carts, acceptable. For classroom furniture, use standard
freestanding screens, and school classroom model in CDPH Standard Method v1.1.
movable partitions) Documentation submitted for furniture must indicate
• Movable partitions include modeling scenario used to determine compliance.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

office furniture system cubicle Furniture compliant with Section 7.6.1 of BIFMA e3-2011
panels that are typically counts for half credit, by cost and furniture compliant with
integrated with work surfaces, Section 7.6.2 of BIFMA e3–2011 counts for full credit, by
desks, and storage furniture. cost. Furniture compliant with both sections is eligible for
full credit, by cost, not to exceed 100% of the furniture cost.

DEFINITION OF BUILDING INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR

Metal studs

Exterior concrete Interior concrete

wythe wythe
Insulation Sheathing
EQ

Insulation
Figure 1. Insulated concrete panel
Concrete
Plane dividing interior and exterior

Insulated Concrete Panel

 361

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
EQ

Figure 2. Curtain wall assembly

362

Finished gypsum board Sheathing

Batt insulation

Felt

Rigid insulation

Mortar net
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Flashing

Face brick
EQ

Insulation
Plane dividing interior and exterior

Metal 3.
Figure Stud Masonry
Metal Wall wall
stud masonry
 363

Coarse drainage fill

Backfill Slab

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
Backfill

Spread footing

EQ
Cast in place concrete foundation wall

Earth Sheet waterproofing membrane

Subsurface drainage 1 1/2 in (38.1mm)

mat foundation insulation

Insulation
Cast in place concrete
Backfill
Plane dividing interior and exterior

Cast In Place Concrete Foundation wall

Figure 4. Cast in place concrete foundation wall
 Balast
364

EPDM membrane

Splicing adhesive
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Insulation Vapor retarder Structural deck

Surface can be considered a substrate depending on the membrane, insulation, vapor retarder and deck.
Plane dividing interior and exterior

Figure 5. EPDM roofEPDM Roof Assembly

assembly

Membrane Cover board

Bonding adhesive Insulation

Vapor barrier

RUCTION

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ28

Low Emitting Interiors(6) ID+C
EQ

Thermal barrier or Structural deck

barrier board

Surface can be considered a substrate depending on the membrane, insulation, vapor retarder and deck.
Plane dividing interior and exterior

TPO Roof Assembly

Figure 6. TPO roof assembly
 365

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

USGBC low-emitting materials calculator X X

Product information (e.g., MSDS, third-party certifications, testing reports) X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. Using products with low emissions can significantly improve indoor
air quality. Each product category pursued increases the chance of passing the indoor air quality testing limits for the
related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Former individual credit paths have been combined into one credit, with a scaled point system for each path
earned.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
·· Compliance of interior finishes may be demonstrated in assemblies with multiple layers in combination, or in
each system individually.
·· Consideration of furniture emissions has been included for all rating systems.
·· New referenced standards have been added to address international projects and new product requirements.
·· Ceilings are now included in the requirements.
·· Emissions from insulation are now included.
·· Emissions requirements for on-site wet-applied, full-spread products measured via chamber tests in air are
now included. VOC content limits for on-site, wet-applied products are still required.

EQ
REFERENCED STANDARDS
CDPH Standard Method v1.1–2010: cal-iaq.org

ISO 17025: iso.org

ISO Guide 65: iso.org

AgBB–2010: umweltbundesamt.de/sites/default/files/medien/377/dokumente/agbb-evaluation-scheme2010.pdf

ISO 16000 parts 3, 6, 7, 11: iso.org

South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168: aqmd.gov

South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113: aqmd.gov
366

European Decopaint Directive: ec.europa.eu/environment/air/pollutants/stationary/paints/paints_legis.htm

Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings:

ec.gc.ca/lcpe-cepa/eng/regulations/detailReg.cfm?intReg=117

Hong Kong Air Pollution Control Regulation:

epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/air_maincontent.html

CARB 93120 ATCM: arb.ca.gov/toxics/compwood/compwood.htm

ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems,
Components and Seating: bifma.org

ANSI/BIFMA e3–2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard: bifma.org

EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels - Determination of formaldehyde release - Formaldehyde emission by the

chamber method: http://www.en-standard.eu/

CEN/TS 16516:2013 Construction products - Assessment of release of dangerous substances - Determination

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of emissions into indoor air: http://www.cen.eu

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Earn all points and reach 100% of products.

Option 2. Reach 100% of products.

DEFINITIONS
building exterior a structure’s primary and secondary weatherproofing system, including waterproofing
membranes and air- and water-resistant barrier materials, and all building elements outside that system

building interior everything inside a structure’s weatherproofing membrane

furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
EQ

such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

interior floor finish all the layers applied over a finished subfloor or stairs, including stair treads and risers, ramps,
and other walking surfaces. Interior finish excludes building structural members, such as beams, trusses, studs, or
subfloors, or similar items. Interior finish also excludes nonfull spread wet coatings or adhesives.

interior wall and ceiling finish all the layers comprising the exposed interior surfaces of buildings, including fixed
walls, fixed partitions, columns, exposed ceilings, and interior wainscoting, paneling, interior trim or other finish
applied mechanically or for decoration, acoustical correction, surface fire resistance, or similar purposes
 367

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Construction
Indoor Air Quality
Management Plan
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

INTENT

To promote the well-being of construction workers and building

occupants by minimizing indoor air quality problems associated with
construction and renovation.

REQUIREMENTS
Develop and implement an indoor air quality (IAQ) management plan for the construction and preoccupancy phases

EQ
of the building. The plan must address all of the following.
During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under
Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3.
Protect absorptive materials stored on-site and installed from moisture damage.
Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during construction unless filtration media with
a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2–2007, with errata (or equivalent
filtration media class of F5 or higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General
Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance), are installed at each return air grille and return or
transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass around the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy,
replace all filtration media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building entrance
during construction.
368

BEHIND THE INTENT

Construction activities adversely affect indoor air quality (IAQ) when they generate dust, toxic substances, or
other contaminants, which can cause health problems not only for construction workers but also those who occupy
the building long after construction is complete. Incorporating IAQ best practices during construction has many
benefits. One is the protection of building occupants from airborne pollutants associated with the construction.
Another is the protection of construction workers from toxins and dust during build-out. A less obvious one, finally,
is the benefit gained when building material and HVAC equipment last longer and perform better over time.
This credit requires teams to develop and implement a construction IAQ management plan that follows the
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors’ Association (SMACNA) IAQ guidelines. The SMACNA
standard identifies major sources of construction-related indoor air pollution and spells out best practices for
controlling them.
By implementing SMACNA IAQ strategies, projects will capture dust and other airborne pollutants, keep
contaminants and toxic substances out of building systems, and prevent mold and other damage to building
materials. Additionally, projects must protect absorptive material from moisture damage, prohibit smoking during
construction inside the building and near entrances, and ensure that any permanent air handlers operated during
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

construction meet filtration requirements.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. INTEGRATE SMACNA CONTROL MEASURES INTO PROJECT DRAWINGS AND

SPECIFICATIONS
Include compliance with SMACNA guidelines and other credit requirements in the project drawings and
specifications (see Further Explanation, SMACNA Guidelines).
·· Consider how the requirements and guidelines may affect design decisions. If used during
construction, the air-handling equipment must be designed to accommodate MERV 8 or higher filters.
Finishes such as paints and coatings specified by the design team must be consistent with SMACNA
guidelines, regardless of whether those materials will contribute to other LEED credits.
·· Include SMACNA requirements in project specifications. For example, specify that air handlers and
ducts be delivered to the site prewrapped in plastic, to avoid having to protect equipment after
delivery.
·· Review the credit requirements and SMACNA guidelines in detail with all pertinent members of
the design and construction team, specifically, the construction manager, general contractor, and
mechanical subcontractor(s).

STEP 2. DEVELOP INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN

EQ

Before construction begins, develop an IAQ management plan that meets or exceeds the credit
requirements. The IAQ plan is typically prepared by the general contractor or construction manager. It
includes IAQ management practices implemented during construction and preoccupancy phases and
describes how each requirement in the SMACNA guidelines and credit requirements will be addressed
and managed on the job site. The plan should adhere to the SMACNA guidelines and cover the following
additional items:
·· Specify procedures for protecting stored and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
·· Highlight the no-smoking policy. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within
25 feet (7.5 meters), or more if required by the local jurisdiction, of the building entrance at all times
during construction. Consider prohibiting smoking on the entire job site.
·· Indicate whether air handlers will be operated during construction, and specify compliant filtration
procedures for permanent equipment that will be used.
A detailed checklist instead of an IAQ management plan is also acceptable.
 369

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN

Ensure that the IAQ management plan is in place before starting above-ground construction, storing
materials on site, or roughing in mechanical systems. Take photographs of each IAQ measure for
documentation.
The following best practices support successful implementation of the plan:
·· Identify the key players and someone responsible for implementing the plan, such as the HVAC
installer and the general contractor. Make sure they understand the requirements of the plan and help
champion its goals.
·· Include the IAQ management plan requirements in contract agreements with subcontractors.
·· As subcontractors are selected and deployed on site, familiarize them with the plan and how it will
affect their daily activities. Hold a subcontractors’ orientation meeting to review the plan requirements
as a group.
·· Include construction IAQ progress check-ins as a regular item in weekly subcontractor meetings and
safety meetings.
·· Provide a copy of the plan on site, preferably posted in an accessible area. Translate the plan into the
languages spoken by subcontractors and their crews.
·· General contractors, construction managers, and owners should verify that the IAQ management plan
is being followed on job walks, ideally daily, so that issues can be addressed with subcontractors as
necessary. Creating a checklist of major items for easy reference is often effective.
·· Decide whether air handlers need to be used during construction. If so, substituting stand-alone
temporary air handlers or heaters may make it easier to meet the HVAC protection requirement. If

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

permanent air handlers are used during construction, record the filtration media used to meet the
documentation requirements.
·· Annotate photographs to indicate each IAQ measure depicted and its general location.
·· Provide photographs of the methods employed to protect stored and installed absorptive materials
from moisture damage during construction and preoccupancy.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SMACNA GUIDELINES
The following SMACNA guidelines apply to teams seeking credit.

HVAC protection. Keep contaminants out of the HVAC system. Do not run permanently installed equipment if
possible, or maintain proper filtration if it is used.
·· If conditioning is required during construction, use supplementary HVAC units instead of permanently

EQ
installed equipment if possible.
·· If permanently installed HVAC system must be used during construction, install filtration to protect the return
(negative pressure) side of the system. Replace these filters regularly during construction.
·· Seal all ductwork, registers, diffusers, and returns with plastic when stored on site or not in service. Seal
unfinished runs of ductwork at the end of each day.
·· Replace all filtration media before occupancy.
·· Do not store materials in mechanical rooms, to reduce potential debris and contamination to mechanical
systems.

Source control. Keep sources of contaminants out of the building and have a plan to eliminate any that are
introduced.
·· Use low-toxicity and low-VOC materials to the greatest extent possible.
·· Develop protocols for the use of any high-toxicity materials. Isolate areas where high-toxicity materials are
being installed and use temporary ventilation for that area.
370

·· Prevent exhaust fumes (from idling vehicles, equipment, and fossil-fueled tools) from entering the building.
·· Enforce the no-smoking job site policy.
·· Protect stored materials from moisture because absorbent materials exposed to moisture during construction
can mold and degenerate long after installation. Store materials in dry conditions indoors, under cover, and off
the ground or floor.
·· If materials are improperly exposed to moisture, replace the material and consider testing air quality before
occupancy to make sure no mold contamination has occurred.

Pathway interruption. Prevent circulation of contaminated air when cutting concrete or wood, sanding drywall,
installing VOC-emitting materials, or performing other activities that affect IAQ in other work spaces.
·· Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of other spaces, whether they are finished or not. Seal
doorways, windows, or tent off areas as needed using temporary barriers, such as plastic separations. Provide
walk-off mats at entryways to reduce introduced dirt and pollutants.
·· Depressurize the work area to allow a differential between construction areas and clean areas. Exhaust to the
outdoors using 100% outdoor air, if possible.
·· Use dust guards and collectors on saws and other tools.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Housekeeping. Maintaining a clean job site results in fewer IAQ contaminants to manage.
·· Maintain good job site housekeeping on a daily basis. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency particulate
filters and use sweeping compounds or wetting agents for dust control when sweeping.
·· Keep materials organized to improve job site safety as well as indoor air quality.

Scheduling. Sequence construction activities to reduce air quality problems in new construction projects. For major
renovations, coordinate construction activities to minimize or eliminate disruption of operations in occupied areas.
·· Keep trades that affect IAQ physically isolated on site and separated from each other by the construction
schedule. For example, schedule drywall finishing and carpet installation for different days or different
sections of the building. Consider after-hours or weekend work if practical.
·· Install absorptive-finish materials after wet-applied materials have fully cured whenever possible. For
example, install carpet and ceiling tile after paints and stains are completely dry.
·· If applicable, plan adequate time to conduct a flush-out and/or perform IAQ testing before occupancy, in
compliance with EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment (see Related Credit Tips).
·· Remove all temporary filtration media and replace them with new filters before occupancy.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
In countries where filters with MERV ratings are not available, filtration media must be Class F5 or higher, as defined
by CEN Standard EN 779–2002. Filtration media with a minimum dust spot efficiency of 30% or higher and greater
than 90% arrestance on a particle size of 3–10 µg are also acceptable.
EQ

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces may be documented as one. One master indoor air quality management plan is allowed. The
plan should include building specific guidelines if necessary. Photo documentation must include a sampling for all
buildings.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 371

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

IAQ management plan or detailed checklist, highlighting nonsmoking policy X

Narrative describing protection measures for absorbent materials X

Annotated photographs of each IAQ measures X

Record of filtration media X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. The related credit builds on the best practices implemented
during construction to maintain optimal indoor air quality. Both credits have filtration requirements; however,
the related credit requires MERV 13 filtration (or Class F7 filters for projects outside the U.S.) to be installed
immediately before occupancy, whereas this credit does not specify a rating for filtration installed before occupancy.

EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. Both the related credit and this credit’s SMACNA source control strategies

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

require the use of low-VOC and low-toxicity materials. Although earning one credit does not necessarily mean that
all requirements are met for the other, implementing a comprehensive strategy of using low-VOC and low-toxicity
materials can contribute to earning both credits.

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. A single IAQ management plan can be developed for both this credit
and the related credit. Teams may pursue the assessment credit without pursuing this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The use of tobacco products during construction is now explicitly prohibited inside the building and within 25 feet
(7.5 meters) (or greater, if required by the local jurisdiction) of the building entrance.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008 (Chapter 3): smacna.org

EQ
ASHRAE 52.2–2007 (with errata but without addenda): ashrae.org

CEN standard EN 779–2002: cen.eu

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

372
 373

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Indoor Air Quality

Assessment
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (1-2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

To establish better quality indoor air in the building after construction

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

and during occupancy.

REQUIREMENTS
Select one of the following two options, to be implemented after construction ends and the building has been
completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable
furnishings (e.g., workstations, partitions), must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished. The
options cannot be combined.

EQ
OPTION 1. FLUSH-OUT (1 POINT)
Path 1. Before Occupancy
Install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of
outdoor air per square foot (4 267 140 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an
internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no higher than
60%.

OR

Path 2. During Occupancy

If occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a
minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot (1 066 260 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross
floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and
relative humidity no higher than 60%.
374

Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (cfm) per
square foot of outdoor air (1.5 liters per second per square meter of outdoor air) or the design minimum outdoor air
rate determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, whichever is greater. During each day
of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy.
These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air (4 270 000 liters
of outdoor air per square meter) has been delivered to the space.

OR

OPTION 2. AIR TESTING (2 POINTS)

After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typical for occupancy, conduct
baseline IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the methods listed in Table 1 for all occupied spaces.
Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA compendium methods, or ISO methods, as indicated.
Laboratories that conduct the tests for chemical analysis of formaldehyde and volatile organic compounds must be
accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. Retail projects may conduct the testing within 14 days
of occupancy.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ
 375

Demonstrate that contaminants do not exceed the concentration levels listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1. Maximum concentration levels, by contaminant and testing method

ASTM and U.S. EPA

Contaminant Maximum concentration ISO method
methods
50 μg/m3
PM10 (for all buildings)
Healthcare only: 20 μg/m3 EPA Compendium
Particulates ISO 7708
PM2.5 (for buildings in EPA nonattainment Method IP-10
15 μg/m3
areas for PM2.5, or local equivalent)
Ozone (for buildings in EPA nonattainment areas for Ozone,
0.075 ppm ASTM D5149 - 02 ISO 13964
or local equivalent)
9 ppm; no more than EPA Compendium
Carbon monoxide (CO) ISO 4224
2 ppm above outdoor levels Method IP-3
500 μg/m3 EPA TO-1, TO-17, or EPA
Total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs) ISO 16000-6
Healthcare only: 200 μg/m3 Compendium Method IP-1
27 ppb ASTM D5197, EPA TO-11,
Formaldehyde
Healthcare only: 16.3 ppb or EPA Compendium ISO 16000-3
Target 1 Acetaldehyde 140 μg/m3 Method IP-6
volatile 2 Benzene 3 μg/m3
organic 3 Carbon disulfide 800 μg/m3
compounds* 4 Carbon tetrachloride 40 μg/m3
5 Chlorobenzene 1000 μg/m3
6 Chloroform 300 μg/m3
7 Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 800 μg/m3
8 Dichloroethylene (1,1) 70 μg/m3
9 Dimethylformamide (N,N-) 80 μg/m3
10 Dioxane (1,4-) 3000 μg/m3
11 Epichlorohydrin 3 μg/m3
12 Ethylbenzene 2000 μg/m3
13 Ethylene glycol 400 μg/m3
14 Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether 70 μg/m3

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether
15 300 μg/m3
acetate
16 Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether 60 μg/m3
ASTM D5197;
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether
17 90 μg/m3 EPA TO-1, TO-17, or ISO 16000-3,
acetate
EPA Compendium ISO 16000-6
18 Hexane (n-) 7000 μg/m3 Method IP-1
19 Isophorone 2000 μg/m3
20 Isopropanol 7000 μg/m3
21 Methyl chloroform 1000 μg/m3
22 Methylene chloride 400 μg/m3
23 Methyl t-butyl ether 8000 μg/m3
24 Naphthalene 9 μg/m3
25 Phenol 200 μg/m3
26 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 7000 μg/m3
27 Styrene 900 μg/m3
Tetrachloroethylene
28 35 μg/m3

EQ
(Perchloroethylene)
29 Toluene 300 μg/m3
30 Trichloroethylene 600 μg/m3
31 Vinyl acetate 200 μg/m3
Xylenes, technical mixture (m-, o-,
32-34 700 μg/m3
pxylene combined)
ppb = parts per billion; ppm = parts per million; μg/m3 = micrograms per cubic meter
*The target volatile organic compounds are from CDPH Standard Method v1.1, Table 4-1. The Maximum concentration limits for these target
compounds are the full CREL adopted by Cal/EPA OEHHA in effect on June 2014 http://oehha.ca.gov/air/allrels.html.

Conduct all measurements before occupancy but during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation
system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate for the occupied
mode throughout the test.
For each sampling point where the concentration exceeds the limit, take corrective action and retest for the
noncompliant contaminants at the same sampling points. Repeat until all requirements are met.
376

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many building materials contain substances that are hazardous to human health, and construction activity can
introduce contaminants into the indoor environment. Harmful substances include formaldehyde and volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) from building materials. Dust, ozone, and fine particulate matter generated by construction
activity, diesel engines, or unfiltered outdoor air can also be harmful. Reducing indoor air contaminants has significant
human health benefits and typically improves occupants’ comfort, lowers absenteeism, and increases productivity.
Testing airborne pollutant levels is the best way to demonstrate that source control strategies have been
effectively and properly implemented. For VOCs, this credit follows the California Department of Public Health
Standard Method v1.1, which is widely recognized by the industry for its science-based best practices and rigorous,
well-established testing procedures.
An alternative to testing that can improve indoor air quality is a building flush-out, an effective method to
disperse off-gassed compounds and other contaminants left behind at the end of construction. The threshold for
duration of building flush-out is based on a typical mechanical ventilation system. A typical ventilation system
supply airflow rate is 0.7 cubic feet per minute per square foot (3.55 liters per second per square meter). Therefore,
if a system operates at 100% outdoor air continuously for two weeks, the cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

floor area is calculated as follows:

14,112 cu ft of
outdoor air ⁄ ft2
of floor area
= 0.7
()
cfm

ft2
× 14 days ×
( )( )
24 hours

day
×
60 mins

hr

In SI units,

4 294 080 l of
outdoor air ⁄ sq meter
of floor area
= 3.55
()
lps

m2
× 14 days ×
( )( )( )
24 hours

day
×
60 mins

hr
×
60 sec

min

This demonstrates that two weeks of flush-out provides adequate time for removing contaminants from the
construction process.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
EQ

STEP 1. ASSESS OPTIONS

Develop a plan for the preferred option. Teams can change to a different option later if, for example, they run
out of time to complete a flush-out. Options 1 and 2 cannot be combined to meet the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 may be feasible if the project’s schedule allows time for a flush-out. Work with the mechanical
engineer to estimate the flush-out duration before the construction schedule is established (see
Further Explanation, Calculations, and Considerations for Flush-Out).
·· Option 2 can typically be completed in less time than a flush-out, but the cost of air quality testing
must be factored into the project’s budget.

STEP 2. SPECIFY LOW-EMITTING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Use the requirements of the source control credits in this credit category, such as EQ Credit Low-
Emitting Materials and EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan, as guidance during
selection and installation of products and materials.
 377

By incorporating low-emitting products, the project team can reduce the contaminant load before the
flush-out and position the project for good test results. However, project teams are not required to
achieve EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials to meet the requirements of this credit.

STEP 3. INSTALL FINISHES, FURNITURE, AND FURNISHINGS

Install all finishes, furniture, and furnishings before performing tests or beginning a flush-out.
·· All owner-provided furniture must be installed in residential projects.
·· All punch list items that would generate VOCs or other contaminants must be completed.
·· Complete testing and balancing of the HVAC system before testing.

STEP 4. CLEAN BUILDING

Thoroughly clean the building, including the ductwork, before testing or beginning a flush-out.
·· Consider using low-emitting cleaning products to prevent high short-term VOC levels that may affect
test results.
·· Consider using vacuum cleaners with HEPA filtration to capture particulates.

Option 1. Flush-out

STEP 1. SELECT PATH 1 OR PATH 2

Path 1 is preferable if the schedule permits, since it exposes occupants to lower levels of potential toxins;
Path 2 is acceptable if the schedule does not allow time for Path 1 (see Further Explanation, Examples
1–4).
·· For Path 2, begin the flush-out three hours before daily occupancy and continue throughout the
occupied portion of the day.
·· For Path 2, ensure that outdoor air volume is at least 0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.5
liters per second per square meter) or the design minimum outdoor air rate, whichever is greater.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED VOLUME
Use the gross square footage (or square meters) to calculate the total cubic feet (or liters) of air required.
The area used must be consistent with the area reported in other credits. Every space in the building
must be flushed out (see Further Explanation, Calculations).

STEP 3. DETERMINE DURATION OF FLUSH-OUT

Determine the rate of outdoor air the HVAC system can provide and calculate the duration of flush-out
with the required volume calculated in Step 1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· If a shorter duration is desired, or if the HVAC system is unable to provide at least 0.3 cubic feet
per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) for an occupied flush-out,
supplemental units may be used.
·· Ventilation fans without supplemental cooling or heating, or temporary, supplemental HVAC units
(installed in window or door openings) may be used, provided the outdoor conditions are within

EQ
the required temperature and humidity constraints at all times during the flush-out. See the credit
requirements.
·· Commissioning can occur during the flush-out, provided none of the commissioning procedures
introduce contaminants into the space and none of the flush-out procedures circumvent the
commissioning process. Complete testing and balancing of the HVAC system after the flush-out is
complete.
·· If even partial construction work occurs during the flush-out (e.g., repainting a room) the flush-out
must be started again from the beginning for that space.
·· If multiple, discrete HVAC systems operate independently, the team may flush out portions of the
building as work is completed in each area served by a given system.

STEP 4. REPLACE OR INSTALL FILTERS

If the permanent HVAC system will be used to perform the flush-out procedure, first replace used filters.
·· Replace the used HVAC filtration media with new media. Filter selection has implications for other
credits (see Related Credit Tips).
·· Remove any temporary filters or duct coverings installed as part of the construction indoor air quality
management plan.
378

STEP 5. COMPLETE FLUSH-OUT

Complete the flush-out, following the requirements for Path 1 or Path 2.

STEP 6. PREPARE FLUSH-OUT REPORT

Provide a flush-out report with the following information.
·· Base the duration calculations on the capacity of all HVAC units used and indicate which are
permanent and which temporary; capacity should take into account the volume of outdoor air and
temperature and humidity allowances.
·· Describe the flush-out procedure and include a log of dates, hours, and recorded temperature and
humidity.
·· If the amount of outdoor air is more than has been designed in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air
Quality Performance or more than shown on the mechanical schedules, include a narrative explaining
how the additional air was provided to the building.

Option 2. Air Testing

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. DETERMINE AIR-TESTING LOCATIONS

Determine where in the building IAQ testing will be performed.
First, perform an initial analysis to identify potential locations to test in the building. Consider locations
that are most representative of the building space, and where occupants will normally spend their time.
·· Identify at least one location per ventilation system. Include locations that represent the worst-case
zones where the highest concentrations of contaminants of concern are likely to occur.
·· Identify at least one location per floor of the building.
·· Identify at least one location per space type. In most cases, only regularly occupied spaces need to
be included. Additionally, for each space type identified, if the air is not well mixed or contaminants
are not expected to be uniform throughout the space include more than one location in the space for
testing.
Next, determine whether a sampling protocol can be used to reduce the number of testing locations
identified in the initial analysis. A sampling protocol is particularly useful if the project has many floors or
a large number of ventilation systems.
·· Identify and group spaces (or floors) that are very similar in their construction, finishes, configuration,
size, and HVAC systems.
·· Randomly select one out of every seven identical spaces to include in the testing. In addition, for
buildings with a large number of identical spaces (more than 21 spaces in a sample group), test a
minimum of three spaces in the sample group.

STEP 2. PERFORM TEST

Ensure that the following procedures are followed at all test locations. If a location fails the test, take
corrective action (e.g. clean and flush out the space) and retest. If a test fails and a sampling protocol
EQ

was used, conduct re-testing to assess whether the failure is unique or the rest of the spaces are likely to
have similar failings. The duration of any flush-out between tests is at the discretion of the project team.
·· The measurement equipment must be positioned in the breathing zone, between 3 and 6 feet
(900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor.
·· The test must occur during normal occupied hours, with the HVAC system starting at the normal start
time and delivering outdoor air at the minimum rate.
·· Testing must be performed by an appropriately accredited professional, using the approved test
methods. The accredited professional should determine the sampling time based on the test method,
maximum allowable concentration, and expert judgment.

STEP 3. PREPARE INDOOR AIR QUALITY TESTING REPORT

Develop an IAQ testing report that includes the following:
·· Narrative describing procedures and how locations were determined
·· Dates and results of each test
 379

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

Option 1, Path 1. Flush-Out before Occupancy

EQUATION 1. Flush-out outdoor air volume

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) × 14,000 ft3/ft2

Liters of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (m2) × 4 267 140 l/m2

Option 1, Path 2. Flush-Out during Occupancy

EQUATION 2. Flush-out outdoor air volume before occupancy

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (ft2) × 3,500 ft3/ft2

Liters of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy = Area (m2) × 1 066 260 l/m2

EQUATION 3. Flush-out outdoor air volume during occupancy

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed during occupancy to complete flush-out = Area (ft2) × 10,500 ft3/ft2

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Liters of outdoor air needed during occupancy to complete flush-out = Area (m2) × 3 200 880 l/m2

Options 1 and 2

EQUATION 4. Flush-out duration

( Area (ft2) × 14,000 ft3/ft2 )

Duration (Days) =
( Air handler capacity ÷ 1440 minutes /day )

EQ
( Area (m2) × 4 267 140 l/m2 )
Duration (Days) =
( Air handler capacity ÷ 86,400 seconds/day )

EXAMPLES
The figures below assume that air handlers are capable of delivering 100% outdoor air while maintaining 60–80ºF
(15–27ºC) and 60% relative humidity 24 hours per day.
380

Example 1. Option 1, Path 1, flush-out before occupancy calculation (IP)

TABLE 2. Option 1, Path 1 (IP)

Duration of
Total Outdoor Volume of air Duration of
Gross Floor Air handler OA preoccupancy
  Air Required required before preoccupancy
Area (ft2) Capacity (cfm) flush-out
(ft3/ft2) occupancy (ft3) flush-out (days)
(minutes)

Space type 1 50,000 14,000 700,000,000 15,000 46,667 32.4

Space type 2 10,000 14,000 140,000,000 4,000 35,000 24.3

Space type 3 5,000 14,000 70,000,000 5,000 14,000 9.7

Example 2. Option 1, Path 1, flush-out before occupancy calculation (SI)

TABLE 3. Option 1, Path 1 (SI)

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Volume of air Duration of

Total Outdoor Air handler Duration of
Gross floor required before preoccupancy
  Air Required outdoor air preoccupancy
area (sq m) occupancy flush-out
(l/m2) capacity (lps) flush-out (days)
(liters) (seconds)

Space type 1 4 645 4 267 140 19 820 865 300 7 079 2 799 953 32.4

Space type 2 929 4 267 140 3 964 173 060 1 888 2 099 668 24.3

Space type 3 464 4 267 140 1 979 952 960 2 360 838 963 9.7

Example 3. Option 1, Path 2, flush-out during occupancy calculation (IP)

TABLE 4. Option 1, Path 2 (IP)

Minimum outdoor air delivery rate
Total outdoor air required before

Air handler outdoor air capacity

Time to complete flush-out at

Time to complete flush-out at

Volume of air required before

Total outdoor air required to

min. delivery rate (minutes)

complete flush-out (ft3/ft2)
Duration of preoccupancy

Duration of preoccupancy

Volume of air required to

min. delivery rate (days)

complete flush-out (ft3)
Gross Floor Area (ft2)

postoccupancy (cfm)
flush-out (minutes)
occupancy (ft3/ft2)

flush-out (days)
occupancy (ft3)

(cfm)

 
EQ

(0.3 cfm/ ft2 )

525,000,000
175,000,000
50,000

35,000
15,000

10,500

15,000
3,500

11,667

Space
24.3
8.1

type 1
105,000,000
35,000,000

4,000*
10,000

26,250
10,500
4,000
3,500

Space
8,750

18.2
6.1

type 2
52,500,000
17,500,000

5,000*
10,500

10,500
5,000

5,000
3,500

3,500

Space
2.4

7.3

type 3

* Minimum rate required in Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

 381

Example 4. Option 1, Path2, flush-out during occupancy calculation (SI)

TABLE 5. Option 1, Path 2 (SI)

Total outdoor air required before

Duration of preoccupancy flush-

Duration of preoccupancy flush-

Air handler outdoor air capacity

Minimum outdoor air delivery

Time to complete flush-out at

Time to complete flush-out at

Volume of air required before

Total outdoor air required to

complete flush-out (liters)

complete flush-out (l/m2)

Volume of air required to

rate postoccupancy (lps)

Gross floor area (sq m)

occupancy (liters)

min. delivery rate

min. delivery rate

occupancy (l/m2)

out (seconds)

out (days)

(seconds)

(days)
(lps)
 

14 868 087 600

4 952 777 700

3 200 880

2 100 309
1 066 260

699 644
4 645

7 079

7 079
Space

24.3
8.1
type 1

2 973 617 520

990 555 540

3 200 880
1 066 260

1 575 009
524 659

1 888*
1 888

Space
929

18.2
6.1
type 2

1 485 208 320

494 744 640

3 200 880
1 066 260

209 638

629 326
2 360*
2 360

Space
464

2.4

7.3
type 3

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

* Minimum rate required in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

CONSIDERATIONS FOR FLUSH-OUT

Before committing to a flush-out, check with the mechanical engineer to confirm that proposed mechanical systems
are capable of providing outdoor air at the required rate. Flush-out during occupancy requires at least 0.3 cubic feet
per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) of outdoor air.
Systems that meet ASHRAE 62.1–2010 airflow rates and provide a fixed volume of outdoor air may not be able to
provide sufficient outdoor air, or the flush-out could take a long time.
For systems that can provide a sufficient volume of outdoor air, confirm that heating and cooling equipment can
handle the additional load from increased outdoor air during times of peak heating and cooling. The equipment must
be able to maintain an internal temperature between 60ºF (15ºC) and 80ºF (27ºC), with a relative humidity no higher

EQ
than 60%.
Buildings with air-side economizers may be able to provide the required outdoor air during the free cooling
season, reducing the energy required to provide the increased outdoor air, assuming it can be provided at a constant
volume.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
To address PM2.5 and ozone (see Table 1 of the credit requirements), use an equivalent to the U.S. EPA standards for
nonattainment areas. If no equivalent exists, consider the project to be in a nonattainment area.
382

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1, Path 1 Option 1, Path 2 Option 2

Flush-out report X X

IAQ testing report X

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Projects that pursue Option 1, Path 2 (flush-out
during occupancy), must use the greater of the minimum outdoor air rate determined for this prerequisite or
0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) for the occupied portion of the
flush-out.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Projects that pursue Option 1 must install new MERV 13 or
Class F7 filters before the flush-out to meet the requirements of this credit. Using comprehensive strategies will
improve indoor air quality, increase the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air
quality tests.

EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. Specifying low-emitting products and materials will improve indoor air
quality, increase the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air quality tests.

EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan. For projects that pursue Option 1, new filters
that meet the appropriate specifications and were installed immediately before the flush-out also satisfy the
requirements of this credit. Proper attention to contaminants during construction will improve overall indoor air
quality, increase the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air quality tests.
EQ

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Options can no longer be combined.
·· An upper interior temperature limit is now identified in Option 1.
·· Testing is now required for an expanded list of contaminants in Option 2.
·· There is no longer a 4-hour sampling time requirement in Option 2.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASTM D5197–09e1 Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other Carbonyl
Compounds in Air (Active Sampler Methodology): astm.org/Standards/D5197.htm

ASTM D5149–02(2008) Standard Test Method for Ozone in the Atmosphere: Continuous Measurement by
Ethylene Chemiluminescence: astm.org/Standards/D5149
 383

ISO 16000-3, Indoor air–Part 3: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds in indoor
air and test chamber air—Active sampling method: iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.
htm?csnumber=51812

ISO 16000-6, Indoor air–Part 6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air
by active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS or MS-FID:
iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=52213

ISO 4224 Ambient air—Determination of carbon monoxide—Nondispersive infrared spectrometric method:

iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=32229

ISO 7708 Air quality—Particle size fraction definitions for health-related sampling: iso.org/iso/home/store/
catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=14534

ISO 13964 Air quality—Determination of ozone in ambient air—Ultraviolet photometric method: iso.org/iso/
home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=23528

US EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air, IP-1: Volatile Organic
Compounds, IP-3: Carbon Monoxide and Carbon Dioxide, IP-6: Formaldehyde and other aldehydes/ketones,
IP-10 Volatile Organic Compounds: nepis.epa.gov

US EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air, TO-1:
Volatile Organic Compounds, TO-11: Formaldehyde, TO-15: Volatile Organic Compounds, TO-17: Volatile
Organic Compounds: epa.gov/ttnamti1/airtox.html

California Department of Public Health, Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources using Environmental Chambers, v1.1–2010: cal-iaq.org/separator/
voc/standard-method

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.

EQ
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

384
 385

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Thermal Comfort
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

INTENT

To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by

providing quality thermal comfort.

REQUIREMENTS

THERMAL COMFORT
Meet the requirements for both thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control.

Thermal Comfort Design

OPTION 1. ASHRAE STANDARD 55-2010

Design heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy, with errata

EQ
or a local equivalent.
For natatoriums, demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5,
Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions, with errata.

OR

OPTION 2. ISO AND CEN STANDARDS

Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of the applicable standard:
·· ISO 7730:2005, Ergonomics of the Thermal Environment, analytical determination and interpretation of
thermal comfort, using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria; and
·· CEN Standard EN 15251:2007, Indoor Environmental Input Parameters for Design and Assessment of
Energy Performance of Buildings, addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting, and acoustics,
Section A2.
386

Thermal Comfort Control

Provide individual thermal comfort controls for at least 50% of individual occupant spaces. Provide group thermal
comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces, to
adjust at least one of the following in their local environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed, and
humidity.

HOSPITALITY ONLY
Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate thermal comfort controls and are therefore not included in the credit
calculations.

RETAIL ONLY
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Meet the above requirements for at least 50% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas.
EQ
 387

BEHIND THE INTENT

A large body of laboratory and field research has demonstrated how thermal conditions inside buildings directly
affect people’s satisfaction and performance.1 Often associated only with air temperature, thermal comfort is a
complex amalgam of six primary factors (Figure 1), all of which are influenced by building design and operation. An
effective thermal comfort strategy considers all six concurrently, meaning that close collaboration among the owner,
architect, and engineer is critical to achieving this credit.

Figure 1. Primary factors that affect thermal comfort

Surface temperature Air temperature Humidity Air movement Metabolic rate and clothing

Modifying one or more of the six comfort factors can greatly improve occupants’ perception of the thermal
environment while still supporting energy reduction goals. Working closely with the owner during design, the
project team can maximize comfort by coordinating design with operational policies. For example, a flexible dress

THERMAL COMFORT
code that permits seasonally appropriate clothing can allow design air temperatures to be adjusted upward during
the cooling season and downward during the heating season without affecting occupants’ perception of comfort.
Occupants who are able to modify their thermal environment through thermal controls will perceive more
comfort regardless of conditioning strategy, and they may exhibit additional satisfaction and productivity. Indoor
environment quality surveys administered by the Center for the Built Environment have shown significant increases
in satisfaction among occupants who have individual control of a thermostat or an operable window.2 Likewise,
research from the International Centre for Indoor Environment and Energy suggests that giving occupants +/–5°F
(3°C) of local temperature control can result in productivity gains of 2.7% to 7%.3

EQ
The referenced standards for this credit use two indices: predicted mean vote (PMV) and predicted percentage
of dissatisfied (PPD). The PMV was developed by placing test subjects in climate chambers and asking them to
rate their level of comfort on a seven-point thermal sensation scale. The scale runs from plus 3 (too hot) to minus 3
(too cold), with zero representing neutral. The PPD index is then determined; it predicts the percentage of people
who are likely to be dissatisfied with a given thermal condition. The referenced standards for this credit also use
field-based research as the basis of the adaptive model, which relates indoor design temperatures or acceptable
temperature ranges to outdoor meteorological or climatological parameters.4

1. Fisk, W. 2001. “Estimates of Potential Nationwide Productivity and Health Benefits from Better Indoor Environments: An Update.” In Spengler, J., J. Samet,
and J. McCarthy. Indoor Air Quality Handbook. New York: McGraw Hill, 4.1–4.31.
2. Huizenga, C., S. Abbaszadeh, L. Zagreus, and E. Arens. 2006. “Air Quality and Thermal Comfort in Office Buildings: Results of a Large Indoor
Environmental Quality Survey.” In Proceedings of Healthy Buildings 2006, vol. III, Lisbon, Portugal, pp. 393–397.
3. Wyon, D. 1996. “Individual Microclimate Control: Required Range, Probable Benefits, and Current Feasibility.” In Proceedings of Indoor Air 1996: Seventh
International Conference of Indoor Air Quality and Climate, vol. 1, Nagoya, Japan, pp.1067–1072.
4. ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
388

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH THERMAL COMFORT GOALS

Work with the owner to understand expectations for the indoor thermal environment, the level of control
that occupants should have, and characteristics of the occupant population.
·· Determine whether a tightly controlled environment is required or whether some variation in indoor
conditions is acceptable.
·· Determine whether occupants would see natural conditioning as a workplace benefit.
·· Consider including factors and design criteria related to occupants in the owner’s project requirements
(OPR) for commissioning activities.
·· Thermal comfort needs for natatoriums are unique (see Further Explanation, Natatoriums).

STEP 2. SELECT CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Based on the thermal comfort goals, determine the best conditioning approach for the project (see
Further Explanation, Thermal Comfort Conditioning Approaches). Consider any limitations of the base
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

building systems.
·· Consider whether the project is a candidate for natural conditioning. Examine the climate by season,
including temperature, humidity, and air quality, to determine optimal times of the year for natural
conditioning.
·· Identify program areas that could be designed to accommodate cross or stack ventilation and consider
ways they could be organized to create microclimates to expand annual hours of natural conditioning
(see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally Conditioned Spaces).

STEP 3. SELECT COMFORT CONTROLS

Determine the best thermal comfort controls for the conditioning system(s) selected, based on the type
of project and occupant’s activities (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations and Project Type
Variations).
·· Consider thermal comfort controls that allow occupants to control air temperature, radiant
temperature, air speed, and humidity.
·· Examples of eligible thermal comfort controls include thermostats, ceiling fans, adjustable underfloor
diffusers, task-mounted controls (such as plug-in desktop fans, humidifiers, or dehumidifiers), and
operable windows. Examples of ineligible thermal comfort controls include a ceiling diffuser without
an accessible control, and a thermostat with a fixed setpoint that cannot be adjusted by occupants.
·· Zone the conditioning system to ensure that at least 50% of individual occupant spaces have individual
thermal comfort controls. Additional controls may be appropriate for some projects but are not
required by this credit.
·· Provide at least one group thermal comfort control in each shared multioccupant space. Meeting
spaces that can be subdivided (e.g., a convention hall with movable walls) must be designed such that
each group of occupants can control their area.

STEP 4. SELECT THERMAL COMFORT STANDARD

EQ

Decide which standard or set of standards is suited to the project. Either option is appropriate for
common space types, such as offices, educational buildings, hospitals, hotels and restaurants, and retail
buildings. For other building types, see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.
·· Option 1 is suitable for most U.S. project teams, who are likely to be familiar with ASHRAE Standard
55-2010. This option allows project teams to use the same standard for both mechanically and
naturally conditioned spaces.
·· Option 2 relies on two international standards, ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007, to document
mechanically and naturally conditioned spaces, respectively.
Both options are based on the same comfort models.
 389

Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 55–2010

STEP 1. SELECT ANALYSIS METHOD(S)

Select the methodology from ASHRAE Standard 55–2010 that will be used for the thermal comfort
analysis.
·· For mechanically conditioned spaces, select one or more of the following from Section 5.2, Methods
for Determining Acceptable Conditions in Occupied Spaces:
°° Section 5.2.1, Graphic Comfort Zone Method for Typical Indoor Environments
°° Section 5.2.1.2, Computer Model Method for General Indoor Application
°° Section 5.2.3.1, Graphic Elevated Air Speed Method
°° Section 5.2.3.2, SET Method
Section 5.2.4 must also be followed for potential sources of local discomfort.
·· For naturally conditioned spaces, select Section 5.3, Optional Method for Determining Acceptable
Thermal Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces. The optional method is available only for
spaces that meet certain criteria (see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally
Conditioned Spaces). Spaces that do not meet these criteria must follow one of the mechanically
conditioned spaces methods.
For mixed-mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using Section 5.2 and cooling season compliance using
Section 5.3.

STEP 2. PERFORM ANALYSIS

If using Section 5.2, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Estimate occupants’ personal factors, such as clothing and activity levels.
·· Using the owner’s comfort expectations, energy goals, and occupancy factors, set seasonal comfort
criteria for operative temperature, humidity, and air speed for each programmed area. Refer to
ASHRAE 55–2010, Appendices A and B, for recommended values.
·· Calculate the effects of any likely local discomfort sources, such as radiant temperature asymmetry,
vertical air temperature difference, floor surface temperature, and drafts, as described in Section 5.2.4.
Confirm that dissatisfaction is within the allowable ranges listed in Table 5.2.4.
This analysis may be an iterative process in which thermal conditions are revised or refined to meet the
ASHRAE requirements. By using the standard in this way, project teams can ensure that the thermal
conditions meet the credit requirements before they begin detailed design work.

THERMAL COMFORT
If using Section 5.3, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Calculate mean monthly outdoor temperature for the project’s location, as described in the ASHRAE
standard, for times of the year when natural conditioning is used.
·· Use Figure 5.3 to establish the upper and lower operative temperature limits of the comfort zone. It
may be helpful to plot mean monthly outdoor temperatures, comfort zone boundaries, and design
operative temperatures on Figure 5.3.
·· Compare indoor operative temperatures with the comfort zone boundaries.

STEP 3. DESIGN PROJECT’S CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

EQ
Design the project’s conditioning systems to provide the acceptable comfort conditions identified in
the previous step. Additionally, verify that all spaces at risk for discomfort, such as locations close to
entrances prone to drafts or west-facing walls that may retain heat, have been addressed.
ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 6.1, requires the design to be within the acceptable comfort range at all
combinations of conditions that are expected to occur, including variations in internal loads and the
exterior environment, and at both full- and partial-load conditions. Systems that cannot maintain comfort
under all conditions (e.g., a constant-volume rooftop unit with a single compressor may have problems
controlling humidity levels) do not meet the credit requirements (see Further Explanation, Examples).
390

Option 2. ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007

STEP 1. SELECT ANALYSIS METHOD(S)

Select the methodology that will be used for the thermal comfort analysis.
·· For mechanically conditioned spaces, select ISO 7730–2005.
·· For naturally conditioned spaces, select EN 15251–2007, Annex A.2, Acceptable Indoor Temperatures
for Design of Buildings without Mechanical Cooling Systems. The EN method is available only for
spaces that meet certain criteria (see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally
Conditioned Spaces). Spaces that do not meet these criteria must follow ISO.
For mixed-mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using ISO 7730 and cooling season compliance using
EN 15251.

STEP 2. SELECT BUILDING CATEGORY

Identify the space category and comfort threshold for the project based on the selected standard’s
classifications.
·· The ISO and EN standards set different ranges of comfort acceptability for specific building types and
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

occupant populations (Table 1).

·· Category B (ISO) and Category II (EN) are appropriate for most new buildings.

TABLE 1. Comparison of comfort acceptability ranges, ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007

Category
Allowable predicted
Allowable predicted
Description percentage
ISO EN mean vote
dissatisfied
7730– 2005 15251– 2007

Recommended for spaces occupied by very sensitive

A I and fragile persons with special requirements (very –0.2 < PMV < 0.2 <6%
young children, elderly, ill)
B II Suitable for most new buildings and renovations –0.5 < PMV < 0.5 <10%
C III Suitable for existing buildings –0.7 < PMV < 0.7 <15%
Values other than above; acceptable for only part
IV PMV < –0.7 or PMV > 0.7 >15%
of year
PMV = predicted mean vote (index of thermal comfort)
PPD = predicted percentage (of people) dissatisfied
Source: This excerpt is adapted and modified from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO. © ISO
2013 – All rights reserved.  

STEP 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS

If using ISO 7730-2005, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Estimate occupants’ personal factors, such as clothing and activity levels.
EQ

·· Using the owner’s comfort expectations, energy goals, and occupancy factors, set seasonal comfort
criteria for operative temperature, humidity, and air speed for various programmed areas. Refer to ISO
7730–2005, Appendices A and C, for recommended values.
·· Use the simplified look-up tables provided in ISO 7730–2005, Annex E, to determine PMV for spaces
with 50% relative humidity and minimal difference between air and mean radiant temperature. For
spaces that do not meet Annex E criteria, calculate PMV as described in Section 4.1 or Annex D.
·· Confirm that PMV falls within the allowable range for general thermal comfort for appropriate building
category (Table 1).
·· Calculate the effects of any likely local discomfort sources, such as draughts, vertical air temperature
difference, floor surface temperature, and radiant temperature asymmetry, as described in ISO 7730–
2005, Section 6, and Annex A, Section A.3, and confirm that dissatisfaction is within the allowable
ranges listed in Annex A, Table A1.
This analysis may be an iterative process in which thermal conditions are revised or refined to meet the
ISO requirements. By using the standard in this way, project teams can ensure that design criteria meet
the credit requirements before they begin detailed design work.
 391

If using EN 15251–2007, perform the analysis as described in the standard.

·· Calculate running mean outdoor temperatures for the project’s location, as described in Section 3.11 of
the EN standard, for times of the year when natural conditioning is used.
·· Use Figure A1 or the equations in Section A.2 of the EN standard to establish the upper and lower
operative temperature limits of the comfort zone. It may be helpful to plot running mean outdoor
temperatures, comfort zone boundaries, and design operative temperatures on Figure A1.
·· Compare design operative temperatures with the comfort zone boundaries.

STEP 4. DESIGN PROJECT’S CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

Design the project’s conditioning systems to provide the acceptable comfort conditions identified in
the previous step. Additionally, verify that all spaces at risk for discomfort, such as locations close to
entrances prone to drafts or west-facing walls that may retain heat, have been addressed.
ISO 7730–2005, Section A.2, requires the mechanical conditioning system design to maintain the
specified comfort ranges “at all locations within the occupied zone of a space … at all times.” Systems
that cannot maintain comfort under all conditions (e.g., a constant-volume rooftop unit with a single
compressor may have problems controlling humidity levels) do not meet the credit requirements (see
Further Explanation, Examples).

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
All calculations are found in the referenced standards.

THERMAL COMFORT CONDITIONING APPROACHES

There are three basic approaches to conditioning for thermal comfort: mechanical, natural, and a combination.
Mechanical conditioning is the use of mechanical systems, such as chillers and boilers, to supply cooling or

THERMAL COMFORT
heating to a space. Comfort is based on the predicted mean vote (PMV) model, which is the result of laboratory-
based controlled climate chamber research in which test subjects assigned comfort values to different conditions.
PMV assumes relatively consistent comfort conditions with minimal adjustment for seasonal variations. Occupants
of mechanically conditioned spaces have come to expect a tightly controlled indoor thermal environment and a
narrow band of indoor conditions.
Natural conditioning is the use of zero-energy strategies, such as cross or stack natural ventilation paths, passive
solar heating, and thermal mass, to moderate exterior conditions. The thermal comfort zone is determined using the
adaptive comfort model, which accounts for outdoor climate as well changes in occupants’ expectations, clothing

EQ
adjustments and use of controls, such as operable windows. Occupants of naturally conditioned spaces typically
expect a broader comfort zone and accept more variation in comfort conditions, both of which can facilitate lower-
energy solutions than are possible with mechanical conditioning alone.
Mixed-mode conditioning combines mechanical and natural conditioning systems, which may be used
concurrently or on an alternating basis (within a working day or seasonally) in the same space, or may be used
independently in different spaces in the same building.

CRITERIA FOR OCCUPANT-CONTROLLED NATURALLY CONDITIONED SPACES

The referenced standards, ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 5.3, and EN 15251–2007, Section A.2, set the following
requirements for when the occupant-controlled naturally conditioned spaces (or adaptive) method may be used:
·· Occupants’ metabolic rate is between 1.0 and 1.3 metabolic equivalent of task (MET).
·· Occupants are free to adapt their clothing to the indoor and/or outdoor thermal conditions.
392

·· User-controlled operable windows are present.

·· No mechanical cooling is installed.
·· Running mean outdoor temperatures are within the ranges specified in the standards at times of year when
natural conditioning is used.
·· The natural conditioning comfort model cannot be applied to times of the year when the heating system is
operating.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 1, mechanically conditioned , graphic method
An office space is cooled with an underfloor air system and heated by perimeter fin tube radiators. The metabolic
rate for the space is 1.1, per ASHRAE Appendix A. The clothing insolation (clo) is calculated as 0.9 when the outdoor
environment is cool and 0.6 when the outdoor environment is warm, per garment insulation values from ASHRAE
55–2010, Appendix A, Table B2.
The project team has decided to determine compliance using the graphic method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010,
Section 5.2.1.1. The design air speeds (less than 40 feet per minute), clothing insulation levels (0.5–1.0 clo), and
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

occupant metabolic rate1.0–1.3 MET) are all within the specified ranges for this method.
The comfort zone boundaries are calculated using the ASHRAE equations for Tmax, Icl, Tmin, Icl, and Icl. The design
parameters and comfort zone boundaries are plotted on a psychometric chart (Figure 2). The team has determined
that any local thermal discomfort effects are unlikely. Because the space’s operative temperature and humidity levels
fall within the comfort zone in heating and cooling modes, the project achieves the credit.

Figure 2. Supporting documentation for Example 1

Design parameters and acceptable range of operative temperature and humidity
EQ

Heating operative Cooling operative

Example 2. Option 1, mechanically conditioned, computer model method

An office’s file room is heated and cooled by a fan coil unit. Because the occupants of this space will be standing
and filing, the expected metabolic rate is 1.4 MET, per ASHRAE 55–2010, Appendix A. The clo is calculated as in
Example 1.
The project team is determining compliance using the computer model method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010,
Section 5.2.1.2, because the activity level exceeds the upper metabolic limit of the graphic method (1.3 MET) but falls
below the 2.0 limit for computer model method.
 393

The design parameters are entered into the Center for the Built Environment (CBE) Thermal Comfort Tool for
ASHRAE-55, which performs the required PMV and PPD calculation. The results from the tool (Figure 3) indicate
that the room’s operative temperature and humidity levels comply with the standard, and the project meets the
credit requirements.

Figure 3. Supporting documentation for Example 2. Hoyt Tyler, Schiavon Stefano, Piccioli Alberto. 2013, CBE Thermal
Comfort Tool for ASHRAE-55. Center for the Built Environment, University of California Berkeley, http://cbe.berkeley.edu/
comforttool/

THERMAL COMFORT
Example 3. Option 1, naturally conditioned, adaptive method
An open office space is naturally cooled with occupant-controlled operable windows and does not have any
mechanical cooling system installed. Heating is provided by fin tube radiators.

EQ
The project team has decided to determine compliance for the cooling period (April through October) using the
adaptive method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 5.3, Optional Method for Determining Acceptable Thermal
Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces.
The average monthly outdoor temperatures and design operative temperatures are plotted on Figure 5.3, found
in Section 5.3 of the standard (Figure 4).
The project team must also determine compliance for the mechanically conditioned heating period (November
through March) and uses the CBE Thermal Comfort Tool for ASHRAE-55, as described in Example 2.
394

Figure 4. Supporting documentation for Example 3

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The project team must also determine compliance for the mechanically conditioned heating period (November
through March) and uses the ASHRAE Thermal Comfort tool, as described in Example 2.

Example 4. Option 2
A classroom is naturally cooled via operable windows that are manually operated by teachers and students. The
heating system consists of a hydronic radiant panel supplied with hot water from a central boiler system and
controlled by a local thermostat in each classroom.
The project team has decided to determine compliance for the cooling period using the adaptive method,
described in EN 15251–2007, Annex A, Section A.2, and will determine compliance for the mechanically conditioned
heating period using ISO 7730–2005, Table E.3.
The project team creates a summary table for the design parameters (Table 2).

TABLE 2. Summary table for Example 4

EQ

Mean monthly
Activity level Operative Relative Air speed
Space type outdoor
(MET) temperature (°C) humidity (%) (m/s)
temperature (°C)

Cooling Classroom 1.2 25.5 20 N/A 1

Heating Classroom 1.2 22.2 N/A 50 0.15

The average mean monthly outdoor temperature and design operative temperature is plotted on Figure A1 in Annex
A of the EN standard (Figure 5).
 395

Figure 5. Supporting documentation for naturally conditioned period for Example 4. This excerpt is adapted and modified
from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO. © ISO 2013 – All rights reserved.  

33,0

32,0

31,0

30,0

29,0

28,0

27,0

III
Θ o (°C)

26,0

25,0 II
24,0 I
23,0

22,0
I
21,0
II
20,0
III
19,0
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Θ rm (°C)

The design parameters were compared with the ISO 7730–2005 Annex E lookup table, Table E.3 (Figure 6),
and the PMV was determined to be –0.40. This is within the acceptable range for a Category B building, which is
–0.5<PMV<+0.5.

Figure 6. Supporting documentation for mechanically conditioned period for Example 4. This excerpt is adapted and
modified from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO. © ISO 2013 – All rights
reserved.  

THERMAL COMFORT
EQ
396

For the heating period, the project reviews the potential for local discomfort effects, as required by the ISO
standard, and determines that draft rate, vertical air distribution, and warm and cool floors are not likely. Radiant
asymmetry was considered likely, however, so the team must perform additional calculations.
Radiant asymmetry was calculated to be 10ºC from warm walls and 5ºC from cool walls. Figure 4 from Section
6.5, ISO 7730–2005 provides the associated percentages dissatisfied, <2% and <1%, respectively. The team compares
percentages dissatisfied with the local discomfort limits listed in ISO 7730–2005, Annex A, Table A.1 and sees that
they are well below the 5% limit for Category B buildings.
Alternatively, the project could have compared the radiant temperature asymmetry with Annex A, Table A.4,
which shows that for a Category B building, the radiant temperature asymmetry must be below 23°C for warm walls
and below 10°C for cool walls.

Example 5. Thermal comfort controls

A project consists of a library that has private offices, open library space with reference desks, meeting rooms,
and a children’s storytime room. All spaces are regularly occupied. The project develops a table to summarize the
controls for each space (Table 3).

TABLE 3. Summary table for Example 5

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Space type Occupancy Spaces Spaces with controls Type of control

Private office Individual occupant 16 12 Operable window

Adjustable underfloor
Reference desk Individual occupant 6 2
diffuser

Meeting rooms Multioccupant 8 8 Thermostat

Storytime room Multioccupant 2 2 Operable window

Percentage of individual occupant spaces with controls 64% (=14/22)

Percentage of multioccupant spaces with controls 100% (=10/10)

The project team earns the credit because the percentage of individual occupant spaces with controls is above 50%
and all multioccupant spaces have controls.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Hospitality
The thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step
Guidance with the exception of guest rooms, which are assumed to have individual thermal comfort controls and are
therefore excluded from the controls requirements of this credit.
EQ

Retail
The thermal comfort design requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance. The thermal comfort
control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance but apply only to individual occupant spaces in
office and administrative areas. All other spaces may be excluded.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Gymnasiums, Fitness Areas, and Other Spaces with High Metabolic Rates
ASHRAE 55–2010, Normative Appendix A, permits use of a time-weighted average metabolic rate over a period of an
hour or less. Any space with a rate of 2.0 MET or less must be addressed using standard compliance methods.
Although the ASHRAE standard does not apply where the time-averaged metabolic rate is above 2.0 MET,
thermal comfort in these spaces must still be addressed. For spaces with a rate above 2.0 MET, address how the
project meets the intent of the credit. ISO 7730–2005 addresses metabolic rates up to 4.0 MET.
 397

Kitchens
Many kitchens are not conditioned, not cooled, or are only indirectly cooled and may have difficulties achieving
the requirements of ASHRAE 55–2010 or ISO 7730–2005. For kitchens that cannot meet the requirements of these
standards, address how the project meets the intent of the credit.

Apparatus Bays in Fire Stations

Typically, these spaces are not designed for human occupancy and thus would not have to meet the credit
requirements. However, if these spaces are designed for human occupancy, the project must meet thermal comfort
criteria. The requirements for LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers may be applied to meet the
credit requirements for such spaces. Design each regularly occupied bulk storage, regularly occupied sorting and/or
regularly occupied distribution area to include one or more of the following systems:
·· Radiant flooring
·· Circulating fans
·· Passive systems, such as nighttime air, heat venting, or wind flow
·· Localized active cooling (refrigerant or evaporative-based systems) or heating systems
·· Localized, hard-wired fans that provide air movement for occupants’ comfort

Vehicle Repair Facilities

The requirements for LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers may be applied to earn the credit (see
Apparatus Bays in Fire Stations, above). This space type, which is not typically cooled, also includes military
buildings where trucks, tanks, aircraft, and other vehicles are being serviced.

Natatoriums
Discuss with the owner how the natatorium will be used and the associated activity levels. Design the space to meet
the thermal comfort design requirements in the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5,
Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions. Calculate internal loads and rates of evaporation and
verify that the design criteria will result in acceptable comfort. Retain all activity levels and factors, evaporation
rates, and design calculations for credit documentation.

Residential
The thermal comfort design requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance. The thermal comfort

THERMAL COMFORT
control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance, except the entire residential unit only needs one
thermal comfort control.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach

EQ
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
398

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Thermal comfort design
Thermal comfort
Documentation
controls
Option 1 Option 2

Description of weather data used to determine operative temperatures,

X
relative humidity, and outdoor temperatures
Plots or calculation results verifying that design parameters meet ASHRAE
Standard 55–2010 for 80% acceptability (e.g., psychometric chart; PMV or
PPD calculations; ASHRAE Thermal Comfort Tool results; copy of ASHRAE X
55–2010, Figure 5.2.4.1, Figure 5.2.4.3, or Figure 5.2.4.4; or predicted worst-
case indoor conditions for each month on copy of Figure 5.3)
Documentation to verify thermally conditioned spaces meet ISO 7730 or
EN 15251, as applicable (e.g., for ISO, calculations based on Sections 4.1 and
6 or Annex H, computer program results based on Annex D, tables based on X
Annex E, or copy of Figures 2, 3, 4, A.1, A.2; for EN, documentation of worst-
case indoor conditions for each month on copy of Figure A1)
Floor plans or drawings indicating all individual and shared multioccupant
X
spaces.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

List of spaces by type, quantity, and controls. X

PMV = predicted mean vote (index of thermal comfort)
PPD = predicted percentage of dissatisfied (people)

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Any plug-in devices that are claimed as thermal controls must be
included in Option 1 of the related prerequisite.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The requirements for natural conditioning
(ASHRAE 55–2010) are different from those for natural ventilation (ASHRAE 62.1–2010). The former standard
does not specify a minimum window size or any location or proximity requirements. The latter specifies minimum
window or ventilation opening area as well as maximum distance from the ventilation opening that may be
considered naturally ventilated. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, for additional information. Adjustable
diffusers used to provide thermal control (whether floor, wall, or ceiling mounted) can affect the supply air flow of
ventilation and should be coordinated with the ventilation design under the related prerequisite.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Natural ventilation and mixed mode systems must meet
additional requirements of CISBE AM10 and AM13 to earn the related credit.

EQ Credit Interior Lighting. The quantity of individual occupant spaces and shared multioccupant spaces for this
credit must be consistent with the quantity in the related credit.
EQ

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This thermal comfort credit combines the LEED 2009 credits Controllability of Systems: Thermal Comfort
(IEQ Credit 6.2, IEQ Credit 6) and Thermal Comfort: Design (IEQ Credit 7.1, IEQ Credit 7) into a single credit.
·· The referenced standard has been updated to ASHRAE 55–2010. Refer to ASHRAE Journal (June 2011) for an
explanation of changes from the 2004 version of the standard: ashrae.org/resources--publications/periodicals/
ashrae-journal/.
·· International standards have been included to provide more relevant compliance options for non-U.S.
projects.
·· The requirements for natatoriums are now applicable to all rating systems, not just Schools.
 399

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy: ashrae.org

ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5, Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium
Design Conditions: ashrae.org

ISO 7730–2005 Ergonomics of the thermal environment, Analytical determination and interpretation of
thermal comfort using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria: iso.org

EuropeanStandard EN 15251: 2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design and assessment of
energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting and acoustics:
cen.eu

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
individual occupant space an area where an occupant performs distinct tasks. Individual occupant spaces may be
within multioccupant spaces and should be treated separately where possible.

nonregularly occupied space an area that people pass through or an area used for focused activities an average
of less than one hour per person per day. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a
typical occupant uses the space. For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the
time a typical occupant spends in the space when it is in use.

occupant control a system or switch that a person in the space can directly access and use. Examples include a task

THERMAL COMFORT
light, an open switch, and blinds. A temperature sensor, photo sensor, or centrally controlled system is not occupant
controlled.

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

EQ
regularly occupied space an area where one or more individuals normally spend time (more than one hour per
person per day on average) seated or standing as they work, study, or perform other focused activities inside a
building. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a typical occupant uses the space.
For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the time a typical occupant spends in
the space when it is in use.

shared multioccupant space a place of congregation, or where occupants pursue overlapping or collaborative tasks

unoccupied space an area designed for equipment, machinery, or storage rather than for human activities. An
equipment area is considered unoccupied only if retrieval of equipment is occasional.
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

400
 401

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Interior Lighting
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-2 points)

Retail (2 points)
Hospitality (1-2 points)

INTENT

To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by

providing high-quality lighting.

REQUIREMENTS

INTERIOR LIGHTING
COMMERCIAL INTERIORS, HOSPITALITY

Select one or both of the following two options.

OPTION 1. LIGHTING CONTROL (1 POINT)

For at least 90% of individual occupant spaces, provide individual lighting controls that enable occupants to adjust
the lighting to suit their individual tasks and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off,
midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight contributions).

EQ
For all shared multioccupant spaces, meet all of the following requirements.
·· Have in place multizone control systems that enable occupants to adjust the lighting to meet group needs and
preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel).
·· Lighting for any presentation or projection wall must be separately controlled.
·· Switches or manual controls must be located in the same space as the controlled luminaires. A person
operating the controls must have a direct line of sight to the controlled luminaires.

HOSPITALITY ONLY
Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate lighting controls and are therefore not included in the credit
calculations.
402

AND/OR

OPTION 2. LIGHTING QUALITY (1 POINT)

Choose four of the following strategies.
A. For all regularly occupied spaces, use light fixtures with a luminance of less than 2,500cd/m2 between 45 and
90 degrees from nadir.
Exceptions include wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data, indirect
uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly occupied space above,
and any other specific applications (i.e. adjustable fixtures).
B. For the entire project, use light sources with a CRI of 80 or higher. Exceptions include lamps or fixtures
specifically designed to provide colored lighting for effect, site lighting, or other special use.
C. For at least 75% of the total connected lighting load, use light sources that have a rated life (or L70 for LED
sources) of at least 24,000 hours (at 3-hour per start, if applicable).
D. Use direct-only overhead lighting for 25% or less of the total connected lighting load for all regularly occupied
spaces.
E. For at least 90% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet or exceed the following thresholds for area-
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

weighted average surface reflectance: 85% for ceilings, 60% for walls, and 25% for floors.
F. If furniture is included in the scope of work, select furniture finishes to meet or exceed the following
thresholds for area-weighted average surface reflectance: 45% for work surfaces, and 50% for movable
partitions.
G. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average wall surface illuminance
(excluding fenestration) to average work plane (or surface, if defined) illuminance that does not exceed 1:10.
Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 60% for
walls.
H. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average ceiling illuminance (excluding
fenestration) to work surface illuminance that does not exceed 1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F,
or demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 85% for ceilings.

RETAIL

For at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas, provide individual lighting
controls.
In sales areas, provide controls that can reduce the ambient light levels to a midlevel (30% to 70% of the
maximum illumination level not including daylight contributions).
EQ
 403

BEHIND THE INTENT

Studies of lighting in buildings have shown that workers are more comfortable and productive in an environment
that is carefully illuminated and where lighting controls are provided for individual and group needs.1 Also, high-
quality lighting helps eliminate distractions, creates visual interest and a sense of place, supports interaction and
communication, contributes to occupants’ well-being, and reduces health problems.2 This credit rewards lighting
quality that dramatically improves occupants’ comfort and productivity.3
The credit encourages lighting quality in multiple ways.
·· Minimizing light fixture luminance (strategy A) helps reduce disability and discomfort glare; the threshold,
2,500 candela per square meter, was selected because research by the Light Right Consortium found that above
that level, glare became objectionable.
·· Using light sources with a color rendering index above 80 (strategy B) helps approximate natural light.
·· Using light sources with long lamp life (strategy C) can lengthen the period over which the integrity of the
lighting design is maintained; it also reduces maintenance costs and lowers material and resource inputs. A
lamp life of 24,000 hours promotes the use of longer-life fluorescents.
·· Designing spaces with less direct-only overhead lighting (strategy D) helps minimize glare, reduces the
perceived brightness of the direct luminaires, and reduces contrast between ceiling and luminaire.
·· Specifying surfaces with high reflectance (strategies E and F) helps make the space brighter through reflection,
minimizing the difficulty of viewing light documents on dark surfaces; the specific surface reflectance values
for ceilings, walls, and floors are above the standard industry assumptions of 80, 50, and 20, respectively, as
recommended in the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook4.
·· Designing for an illuminance ratio less than 1:10 (strategies G and H) minimizes the amount of contrast
that occupants experience between their work surface and the ceiling and wall surfaces around them; the
1:10 illuminance ratio represents one log scale difference in lighting levels (human eyes are logarithmic, but
illuminance is linear).

Research on lighting and visual performance is cited in Further Explanation, Additional Lighting Resources.

INTERIOR LIGHTING
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH LIGHTING NEEDS

Work with the owner to understand occupants’ lighting needs and desires.
·· Document the types of tasks that will occur in each space and the tools and equipment that occupants
will use regularly, and determine appropriate light levels for tasks.

EQ
·· Identify the level of control that occupants should have and the characteristics of the occupant
population.

STEP 2. SELECT OPTION(S)

Determine which option(s) are appropriate for the project. All projects except Retail projects may earn
one or both options.
·· Option 1 requires lighting controls for 90% of the individual occupant spaces and 100% of shared
multioccupant spaces. Standard on-off switches are not acceptable; at least three lighting levels or
scenes must be provided. Project teams that are familiar with previous versions of LEED may prefer
this option, and it is easier to implement in later phases of design than Option 2.

1. Lighting Quality and Office Work: A Field Simulation Study, lrc.rpi.edu/researchAreas/pdf/LRAlbanyStudyReport.pdf (accessed June 11, 2013).
2. Federal Lighting Guide, eere.energy.gov/femp/pdfs/light_controls.pdf (accessed June 11, 2013).
3. Veitch, J.A., et al., “Lighting Appraisal, Well-Being, and Performance in Open-Plan Offices: A Linked Mechanisms Approach,” Lighting Research and
Technology 40(2) (June 2008): 133-151.
4. DiLaura, David, Kevin Houser, Richard Mistrick, and Gary Steff, eds., The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition (New York: Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America, 2011).
404

·· Option 2 offers eight strategies (Table 1), of which four must be implemented to meet the
requirements. The first four strategies (A–D) are based on characteristics of the lighting fixtures, light
sources, and luminaires. The second four strategies (E–H) are based on characteristics of the surfaces
in the project and the illuminance levels that fall on those surfaces. This option requires attention
during early design phases because achievement depends on luminaire selection and configuration
and architectural surface specifications.

For Retail projects, see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

TABLE 1. Option 2. Lighting quality strategies

Strategy Scope Exceptions, exclusions

• Wallwash fixtures properly aimed at

walls, as specified by manufacturer
• Indirect uplighting fixtures, provided
All light fixtures located in regularly there is no view down into these
A. Light fixture luminance
occupied spaces uplights from regularly occupied space
above
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

• Any other specific applications (e.g.,

adjustable fixtures)
• Lamps or fixtures specifically designed
to provide colored lighting for effect
B. Color rendering index (CRI) All light fixtures
• Site lighting
• Any other special use
C. Lamp life 75% connected lighting load —
25% connected lighting load for
D. Direct-only overhead lighting —
regularly occupied spaces
E. Surface reflectance: ceilings, walls, floors 90% of regularly occupied floor area —
F. Surface reflectance: furnishings All furniture used for work surfaces —
G. Surface illuminance ratio: wall to work surface 75% regularly occupied floor area —
H. Surface illuminance ratio: ceiling to work surface 75% regularly occupied floor area —

STEP 3. COMPLY WITH OPTION REQUIREMENTS

For the option(s) selected, follow the appropriate set of steps to confirm compliance.

Option 1. Lighting Control

Identify all individual occupant and shared multioccupant spaces in the project (see EQ Overview).
·· Design lighting controls for individual and multioccupant spaces to meet the credit requirements for
EQ

Option 1. Task lighting may be used to meet the credit requirements for individual occupant spaces.
Task lights are not required to be hardwired.
·· All lighting controls must provide at least three lighting levels or scenes: including on, off, and
a midlevel, defined as 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight
contributions). Daylight does not qualify as a separate lighting level.
·· For multioccupant spaces that can be subdivided by movable walls or partitions, provide the required
lighting controls for each subdivision of the space.
·· Tabulate all individual and multioccupant spaces and their respective lighting controls. Confirm that
at least 90% of individual occupant spaces and 100% of multioccupant spaces meet credit
requirements. The percentage of compliant individual occupant spaces is based on the number of
spaces, not floor area.
 405

Option 2. Lighting Quality

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy A

Identify all regularly occupied spaces in the project and all light fixtures in these spaces (see EQ
Overview). The following fixtures may be excluded:
·· Wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data
·· Indirect uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly
occupied space above
·· Any other specific applications (e.g., adjustable fixtures)
For the light fixtures, review luminaires cutsheets, Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) photometric
files, or other documentation to identify luminance between 45 degrees and 90 degrees from nadir and
select products that meet the credit requirements. The luminance must be below 2,500 candela per
square meter.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for luminance.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy B

Specify all light sources to meet the credit requirements for color rendering index (CRI).
·· The following light sources may be excluded: lamps or fixtures specifically designed to provide colored
lighting for effect, site lighting, and lamps or fixtures designed for some other special use.
·· For the light sources, determine the CRI, not to be confused with correlated color temperature (CCT),
which refers to the spectrum of warm to cool. A light source can have a high or low CRI regardless of
its CCT.
·· Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for the lighting’s CRI.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy C

Specify all light sources to meet the credit requirements for lamp life.
·· Calculate the total connected lighting load for all lighting in the project, in watts or kilowatts. Refer
to the lighting power calculations prepared for EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and
tabulate luminaire quantities and wattages to determine the total connected load. For guidance on
determining connected lighting load, see ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Plug-in lighting is
included in the calculation for connected load.
·· For lamp life, review luminaire cutsheets or other documentation. Lamp life depends on the type
of source. For traditional light sources, the lamp life is based on the time at which 50% of the test

INTERIOR LIGHTING
samples have burned out. For LED light sources, the lamp life criterion L70 is based on the time at
which the light source has a 30% reduction in light output. Review the IES Lighting Handbook for more
information on lamp life.
·· Calculate the amount of connected lighting load with compliant light source; it must be 75% or greater.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for lamp life.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy D

Specify a combination of direct-only overhead lighting and other lighting. Minimize the use of direct-only
overhead lighting to meet the credit requirements for strategy D.

EQ
·· Identify all regularly occupied spaces in the project and the total connected lighting load associated
with these spaces (see EQ Overview). Refer to the lighting power calculations prepared for EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and tabulate luminaire quantities and wattages to determine
the total connected load. For guidance on determining connected lighting load, see ASHRAE 90.1–2010,
Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Plug-in lighting is included in the calculation for connected load.
·· Determine the connected lighting load that is associated with direct-only overhead lighting; it must be
25% or less.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for overhead lighting.

Option 2. Surface Reflectance (Strategies E and F)

Select or specify high-reflectance finish materials as applicable to the strategy pursued: ceilings, walls,
and floors for strategy E, and work surfaces and movable partitions for strategy F.
·· Before construction begins, review manufacturers’ cutsheets to identify reflectance, typically
expressed as a fraction or percentage LR (light reflectance) or LRV (light reflectance value). If
manufacturers’ data do not include reflectance, measure the reflectance of product samples (before
construction) or the installed product (postconstruction) using the methodology described in IES
406

Lighting Handbook, Section 9.12.2, Measuring Reflectance and Transmittance. Or use reflectance
charts, such as Lighting Guide 11, Surface Reflectance and Colour.5
·· For strategy E, 10% of the regularly occupied floor area may be excluded.
·· For strategy F, work surfaces include desks or other table surfaces where individuals perform tasks.
The surface area for movable partitions is limited to opaque surfaces of the partition; transparent or
partially transparent surfaces are not included in the calculation.
·· Use Equation 1 to calculate the average surface reflectance for walls, ceilings, and floors (strategy E)
and work surfaces and movable partitions (strategy F).

EQUATION 1. Average surface reflectance

Weighted
average
of surface
reflectances
= ( reflectance
of surface 1
×
((
surface area
of surface 1
+ reflectance
of surface 2
× surface
( (
area
of surface 2
+ ... +
reflectance of

(
surface n and surface
area of surface n

total surface area

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Confirm that the average surface reflectance of the specified surfaces meets or exceeds the values in the
credit requirements.

Option 2. Illuminance (Strategies G and H)

Develop a lighting design strategy to minimize the ratio of wall surface illuminance (strategy G) or ceiling
surface illuminance (strategy H) to work surface illuminance. Consider the following design strategies:
·· Specify ceiling and wall finishes that are light colored or have high surface reflectance.
·· Design the lighting system to intentionally light the walls or ceiling.
·· Consider luminaires that throw 20% to 30% of light on ceiling or wall, such as direct-indirect lighting.
·· Arrange luminaires to provide wall wash.
Use lighting calculation software or measurements to determine the average illuminance levels on work,
wall, and ceiling surfaces for each regularly occupied space. If illuminance values vary widely throughout
the space, either subdivide or use the predominant illuminance level. Work surfaces include desks or
other table surfaces where individuals perform tasks. Where work surfaces are not specified, calculate
the illuminance at a height of 30 inches (750 millimeters) above the finished floor. Alternatively, calculate
illuminance at the height where most visual tasks are expected to be performed. For existing building
projects or after construction is complete, the illuminance may be measured. The illuminance of a given
surface is measured with a light meter, with the sensor facing away from the surface for which the
measurement is being taken.
Use Equation 2 (for Strategy G) and Equation 3 (for Strategy H) to calculate an illuminance ratio for
each regularly occupied space. Determine the percentage of regularly occupied area that achieves an
illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less, it must be at least 75%.

EQUATION 2. Wall to work plane illuminance ratio EQUATION 3. Ceiling to work plane illuminance ratio
EQ

average work surface illuminance average work surface illuminance

Illuminance Illuminance
ratio
= 1: ratio
= 1:
average wall surface illuminance average ceiling illuminance

Spaces where similar ratios of wall surface or ceiling surface illuminance to work surface illuminance are
expected can be assessed through a single representative calculation.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for illuminance, As
applicable, include confirmation that one of the following has also been met: strategy E, strategy F, area-
weighted surface reflectances of at least 60% for walls, or area-weighted surface reflectances of at least
85% for ceilings.

5. cibseknowledgeportal.co.uk (accessed June 11, 2013).

 407

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 1
An office has individual occupant spaces (workstations), private offices, and a conference room. The workstations
have task lighting that is part of the furniture system; the control allows for four distinct light levels. The private
offices have overhead lighting with manual dimming controls. The conference room can be divided into two spaces,
each with its own set of manual controls for overhead lighting. The overhead lighting is divided into two separate
zones and is also fully dimmable. There are separate controls for lighting the presentation wall. Because this office
has the appropriate lighting controls for at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces and all shared multioccupant
spaces, the project earns 1 point under Option 1 of the credit.

Figure 1. Example 1
Task lighting

Indirect pendant Indirect/direct Recessed cove fixture

pendant light

INTERIOR LIGHTING
EQ
Recessed flourescent Recessed can

Example 2. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies A and D

The data for all luminaires specified in the project building’s regularly occupied spaces are summarized in Table 2.

For strategy A, two luminaire types (indirect pendant and indirect-direct pendant) are excluded because there is no
view of these luminaires from above. There is one luminaire type that does not meet the requirement, the surface-
mounted luminaires. For this reason, the project does not achieve strategy A.

For strategy D, there are two direct-only overhead lights: recessed and surface mounted. The percentage of
connected lighting load attributed to these lights is 5.7 % which is well below the 25% threshold. For this reason, the
project achieves strategy D.
408

TABLE 2. Luminaire information for Example 2

Luminance
Connected load Total <2,500 cd/m2 Excluded
Direct-
Description per luminaire Luminaires connected load between 45° and from strategy
only?
(W) (W) 90° from nadir A
(Y/N)

Indirect pendant 112 8 896 N Y N

Recessed 56 4 224 Y N Y
Surface mounted 32 1 32 N N Y
Indirect-direct
168 20 3,360 N Y N
pendant
Total connected lighting load (W): 4,512
Percentage of connected lighting load that is direct-only: 5.7% (256 W)

Example 3. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies B and C

Data for all light sources in the building are summarized in Table 3.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For strategy B, all three light sources have a CRI above 80. For this reason, the project achieves strategy B.

For strategy C, the lamp life for the linear fluorescent T8 and linear LED cove light both meet the lamp life
requirement of 24,000 hours or more rated life or L70. The percentage of connected lighting load attributed to the
light fixtures with these lamps is 96.2 % which is well above the 75% threshold. For this reason, the project achieves
strategy C.

TABLE 3. Example 3 Light source information

Total connected load for

Light source description CRI Lamp life (hours)
fixtures (W)

Linear fluorescent T8 5,320 82 26,000

Halogen 250 99 5,000

Linear LED cove light 1,000 81 L70

Total connected load (W): 6,570

Percentage of connected lighting load that meets lamp life requirement: 96.2% (6,320 W)

Example 4. Option 2, Lighting quality, strategies E and F

The values of the reflectance for the ceilings, walls, floors, work surfaces, and partitions were determined. The
results are summarized in the table below.
EQ
 409

Figure 2. Example using form supplemental calculator

Surface Reflectance for

Surface Information Surface Reflectance for Ceilings, Walls, Floors
Furnishings

Pctg. total regularly occupied

100%
floor area included below (%) Work Surface Moveable
Reflectance
Description of Surface Area Partition Area
(%)
Ceiling Area Wall Area Floor Area (sq ft) (sq ft)
(sq ft) (sq ft) (sq ft)

high reflectance ceiling 90.00% 26786.00

generic ceiling 80.00% 216.00

wall type 1 65.00% 7312.00

wall type 2 55.00% 500.00

light wood floor 27.00% 500.00

dark carpet 12.00% 216.00

light carpet 25.00% 26286.00

workstation type 1 60.00% 2000.00

workstation type 2 50.00% 20.00

workstation type 3 10.00% 500.00

partition type 1 50.00% 80.00

partition type 2 55.00% 40.00

Total area incl. in calculation 27002.00 7812.00 27002.00 2520.00 120.00

Average surface reflectance for ceilings 90%

E. Surface Reflectance for
Average surface reflectance for walls 64%
Ceilings, Walls, Floors
Average surface reflectance for floors 25%

Average surface reflectance for work surfaces 50%

F. Surface Reflectance for
Furnishings
Average surface reflectance for moveable partitions 52%

INTERIOR LIGHTING
Example 5. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies G and H
The project’s lighting designer has used lighting calculation software to determine the illuminance levels for wall,
ceiling, and work surfaces and compiled Table 4. Private office 2 was excluded from the calculation because the office
has low wall and ceiling illuminance values.
The project team wishes to use strategies G and H. The wall to work surface illuminance ratio exceeds 1:10 in the
open office, which constitutes the majority of the floor area in the project, so the project does not attain strategy G.
However, the ceiling to work surface illuminance ratio is below 1:10 for the open office, private office 1, and the

EQ
conference room. The project has also achieved strategy E, so the project complies with strategy H.

TABLE 4. Illuminance information for Example 5

Average illuminance (footcandles) Illuminance ratio

Space Floor area (ft2)
Wall to work Ceiling to work
Work surface Wall Ceiling
surface surface

Open office 26,284 80 (861 lux) 7 (75 lux) 20 (214 lux) 1:11.4 1:4

Private office 1 96 75 (807 lux) 10 (107 lux) 25 (267 lux) 1:7.5 1:3

Conference room 500 60 (642 lux) 10 (107 lux) 15 (160 lux) 1:6 1:4

Private office 2 120 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Total regularly occupied floor area (ft2): 27,000

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area that meets wall to work surface illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less (must be 75%): 2.2% ( 596 ft2)
Percentage of regularly occupied floor area that meets ceiling to work surface illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less (must be 75%):
99.6% (26,892 ft2)
410

ADDITIONAL LIGHTING RESOURCES

Studies of the effect of lighting on visual performance and comfort can be found in the following sources:
·· Peter R. Boyce, Human Factors in Lighting, 2nd edition (Taylor and Francis, 2003).
·· Lighting and Human Performance II (available at no cost from EPRI): my.epri.com/portal/server.pt?
·· Lighting Guide 11: Surface Reflectance and Colour: cibseknowledgeportal.co.uk/
·· Lighting Research Center at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute: lrc.rpi.edu/
·· National Research Council Canada Institute for Research in Construction:
nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/eng/rd/construction/
·· J.A. Veitch, “Psychological Processes Influencing Lighting Quality,” Journal of the Illuminating Engineering
Society 30(1) (2001): 124–40.
·· The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (2011).

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 1. Lighting Control

Follow the step-by-step guidance for Option 1 for office and administration areas. In addition, provide at least three
lighting levels: on, off, and a midlevel in sales areas.

Hospitality
Option 1. Lighting Control
Exclude guest rooms from the lighting control calculations.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Residential
For Option 1, residential units must have one lighting control for each individual occupant and multioccupant space.
For example, for a bedroom (listed as individual occupancy), a task light in the bedroom or an overhead light with
manual dimmable control would be acceptable. See EQ Overview for a list of individual and multioccupant space
types in residential buildings.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
EQ
 411

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Option 2
Documentation Option 1
A B C D E F G H

Table of individual occupant and multioccupant spaces and

X
lighting controls in each space

Table of regularly occupied spaces and associated lighting details X X

Calculations of total connected lighting load X X

Lighting details, including manufacturer and model, results of

X X X X
estimations, or in situ or laboratory photometric tests
List of ceiling surfaces, wall surfaces, floor surfaces and their
X
associated surface reflectance values
List of work surfaces and movable partitions and their associated
X
surface reflectance values

Average surface reflectance calculations X X

List of work surfaces and illuminance values (lux) X

List of wall or ceiling surfaces with illuminance values (lux) X

Illuminance ratio calculations X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Thermal Comfort. Individual and multioccupant spaces must be applied consistently with the related
credit.

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning. All
lighting controls must be included in the commissioning process.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The connected lighting load calculated for hardware strategies in

INTERIOR LIGHTING
Option 2 of this credit should be the same for the related credit. This credit emphasizes manual user controls; the
related credit rewards projects that incorporate daylighting and occupancy sensor lighting controls. Review the
requirements for both credits and coordinate all automatic and manual lighting controls.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· An additional point and option for lighting quality has been added to the previous lighting control

EQ
requirements.
·· The requirements for lighting control have been revised to require at least three lighting levels to meet the
controllability criteria.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America: ies.org
412

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
color rendering index a measurement from 0 to 100 that indicates how accurately an artificial light source, as
compared with an incandescent light, displays hues. The higher the index number, the more accurately the light
is rendering colors. Incandescent lighting has a color rendering index above 95; standard high-pressure sodium
lighting (such as orange-hued roadway lights) measures approximately 25; many fluorescent sources using rare earth
phosphors have a color rendering index of 80 and above. (Adapted from U.S. ENERGY STAR)

illuminance the incident luminous flux density on a differential element of surface located at a point and oriented
in a particular direction, expressed in lumens per unit area. Since the area involved is differential, it is customary
to refer to this as illuminance at a point. The unit name depends on the unit of measurement for area: footcandles
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

if square feet are used for area, and lux if square meters are used. (Adapted from IES) In lay terms, illuminance is a
measurement of light striking a surface. It is expressed in footcandles in the U.S. (based on square feet) and in lux in
most other countries (based on square meters).

individual occupant space an area where an occupant performs distinct tasks. Individual occupant spaces may be
within multioccupant spaces and should be treated separately where possible.

shared multioccupant space a place of congregation, or where occupants pursue overlapping or collaborative tasks
EQ
 413

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Daylight
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-3 points)

Retail (1-3 points)
Hospitality (1-3 points)

INTENT

To connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce circadian

rhythms, and reduce the use of electrical lighting by introducing
daylight into the space.

REQUIREMENTS
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices for all regularly occupied spaces.

DAYLIGHT
Select one of the following three options.

OPTION 1. SIMULATION: SPATIAL DAYLIGHT AUTONOMY AND ANNUAL SUNLIGHT

EXPOSURE (2–3 POINTS)
Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that spatial daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) of at least

EQ
55%, 75%, or 90% is achieved. Use regularly occupied floor area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area
determined under EQ Credit Quality Views. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for daylit floor area: Spatial daylight autonomy

sDA (for regularly occupied floor area) Points

55% 2
75% 3

AND

Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that annual sunlight exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) of no more
than 10% is achieved. Use the regularly occupied floor area that is daylit per the sDA300/50% simulations.
The sDA and ASE calculation grids should be no more than 2 feet (600 millimeters) square and laid out across the
regularly occupied area at a work plane height of 30 inches (760 millimeters) above finished floor (unless otherwise
414

defined). Use an hourly time-step analysis based on typical meteorological year data, or an equivalent, for the nearest
available weather station.
Include any permanent interior obstructions and moveable furniture and partitions.

OR

OPTION 2. SIMULATION: ILLUMINANCE CALCULATIONS (1–2 POINTS)

Demonstrate through computer modeling that illuminance levels will be between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for 9 a.m.
and 3 p.m., both on a clear-sky day at the equinox, for the floor area indicated in Table 2. Use regularly occupied floor
area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area determined under EQ Credit Quality Views.

TABLE 2. Points for daylit floor area: Illuminance calculation

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area Points

75% 1
90% 2

Calculate illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and sky (diffuse component) for clear-sky conditions as
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

follows:
·· Use typical meteorological year data, or an equivalent, for the nearest available weather station.
·· Select one day within 15 days of September 21 and one day within 15 days of March 21 that represent the clearest
sky condition.
·· Use the average of the hourly value for the two selected days.

Exclude blinds or shades from the model.

Include any permanent interior obstructions and moveable furniture and partitions.

OR

OPTION 3. MEASUREMENT (2-3 POINTS)

Achieve illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for the floor area indicated in Table 3.

TABLE 3. Points for daylit floor area: Measurement

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area Points

75 2
90 3

With furniture, fixtures, and equipment in place, measure illuminance levels as follows:
·· Measure at appropriate work plane height during any hour between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
EQ

·· Take one measurement in any regularly occupied month, and take a second as indicated in Table 4.
·· For spaces larger than 150 square feet (14 square meters), take measurements on a maximum 10 foot
(3 meter) square grid.
·· For spaces 150 square feet (14 square meters) or smaller, take measurements on a maximum 3 foot
(900 millimeters) square grid.
 415

TABLE 4. Timing of measurements for illuminance

If first measurement is taken in … take second measurement in …

January May-September
February June-October
March June-July, November-December
April August-December
May September-January
June October-February
July November-March
August December-April
September December-January, May-June
October February-June
November March-July
December April-August

DAYLIGHT
EQ
416

BEHIND THE INTENT

Increased access to daylight has positive human behavioral and health effects because it reinforces our circadian
rhythms.1 Access to sufficient daylight has been shown to increase healing times in hospitals, improve students’
performance,2 increase productivity in the workplace,3 fight depression and lethargy, and even increase sales in retail
environments.4 A well-designed daylit building also uses less electric lighting energy, conserving natural resources
and reducing air pollution.
This credit has evolved significantly and now focuses on using simulated daylight analysis and actual
measurement to estimate daylight quality and daylight levels. These methods more accurately predict daylight
access and support the design process for optimizing daylight. The previous prescriptive method for calculating
daylight using window design less accurately accounted for such project-specific factors as building orientation,
exterior conditions, the interaction with interior finishes, time of day and year, and other performance variables.
The new simulation requirements use global metrics and performance values for daylight established by daylighting
professionals. Other globally recognized standards-setting organizations are using the credit’s language, metric
conversions, and performance goals to create consistency in the daylighting and building professions.
Projects have three compliance options. The options that require more detailed design input and analysis or that
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

demonstrate actual performance earn a correspondingly higher number of points. A good computer simulation is the
best way to inform the design phase and help create a more effective daylit project. Project teams should integrate
daylight concerns into the design process while taking into account such factors as heat gain and loss, glare control,
visual quality, and variations in daylight availability.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH DAYLIGHTING GOALS

During predesign, work with the owner to understand lighting and daylighting goals. Specify daylighting
performance criteria in the owner’s project requirements.

STEP 2. EVALUATE BUILDING SITE AND MASSING

During schematic design, evaluate the building and project space for daylight availability.
·· Review the building’s orientation to see whether it allows for passive solar strategies. Consider
strategies to improve daylight penetration and distribution.
·· Consider the topography and landscape features that shade (or will shade) the building or minimize
glare.
·· Consider proximity to neighboring buildings and their effects on daylighting availability and shading.
·· Evaluate the building footprint, the structural floor-to-floor height, and finished ceiling clearances to
EQ

understand the ratio of window to floor area.

·· Evaluate the envelope design and any exterior shading that may minimize solar heat gains and glare
while admitting daylight (see Further Explanation, Daylight Resources).

STEP 3. DESIGN TO MAXIMIZE DAYLIGHT

Consider how best to allocate interior space to ensure that daylight is available in all regularly occupied
spaces. Enclosure design and furniture selection will affect daylight penetration. Possible design
strategies include the following:

1. Kellert, Stephen R., Judith H. Heerwagen, and Martin L. Mador, Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Life into Buildings (New
York: Wiley, 2008), p. 99.
2. Boyce, Peter, Reviews of Technical Reports on Daylight and Productivity (Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 2004); Heschong Mahone Group, Daylighting in
Schools: An Investigation into the Relationship between Daylighting and Human Performance (1999).
3. Edwards, L., and P. Torcellini. A Literature Study of the Effects of Natural Light on Building Occupants (Golden, Colorado: NREL, 2002).
4. Peet, Ramona, Lisa Heschong, Roger Wright, and Don Aumann, Daylighting and Productivity in the Retail Sector (2004), eceee.org/conference_
proceedings/ACEEE_buildings/2004/Panel_7/p7_24/paper (accessed June 12, 2013).
 417

·· Use transparent partitions or interior glazing to provide daylight to enclosed spaces.

·· In open-plan offices, select low partitions or incorporate glazed panels above 42 inches (1 070
millimeters).
·· Consider using daylighting simulations early in the design process to ensure effective daylighting and
to identify and minimize sources of glare.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES

Identify all regularly occupied spaces within the project (see EQ Overview, Regularly versus nonregularly
occupied spaces). Highlight regularly occupied spaces on the floor plan or furniture plan and create a
tracking table that lists all regularly occupied spaces and their respective floor area.
Determine whether any regularly occupied spaces should be excluded from the daylight requirements
(see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations). Spaces where tasks would be hindered by the use of
daylight may be excluded. Spaces may not be excluded for security or noise concerns.

STEP 5. PROVIDE GLARE CONTROLS

Provide glare-control devices (Figure 1) for all transparent glazing in regularly occupied spaces,
regardless of whether the glazing receives direct sunlight or whether the space meets the illuminance
requirements of this credit.
·· All glare-control devices must be operable by the building’s occupants to address unpredicted glare.
Automatic devices with user override are acceptable.
·· Acceptable glare-control devices include interior window blinds, shades, curtains, movable exterior
louvers, movable screens, and movable awnings.
·· Systems not acceptable as glare-control devices include fixed exterior overhangs, fixed fins and
louvers, dark-colored glazing, and frit and other glazing treatments.
·· Diffused and translucent glazing systems do not require glare-control devices.

DAYLIGHT
EQ
418
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 1. Glare control devices

STEP 6. SELECT ONE OPTION

Determine which option the project will pursue. Options 1 and 2 involve different modeling procedures
(see IES LM 83-12 and Further Explanation, Illuminance Simulation Procedure).
·· Option 1 requires project teams to simulate both hourly illuminance and direct sunlight in each
space over an entire year and likely necessitates engaging a daylighting consultant. The method
uses a daylight simulation program that generates spatial daylight autonomy (sDA) ratios,5 a metric
that determines annual daylight performance based on annual weather data and occupancy use.
This temporal analysis provides more information for design decisions than single-point-in-time
calculations.6 Only spatial daylight autonomy (and not continuous autonomy or daylight autonomy) is
modeled.
·· Option 2 is similar to the simulation option in previous versions of LEED and may require the help of
EQ

a daylighting consultant. This compliance method has been carried over from previous LEED versions
because illuminance calculation is still used by many daylighting professionals. However, project teams
are now required to use site-specific daylight illuminance values instead of the program default values
for weather. This provides daylight performance data that better reflect actual site conditions, leading
to better design decisions.
·· Option 3 is typically for renovations that involve minimal modifications to the building envelope and
for substantiating a completed project’s design strategies with a performance-based metric. Consider
the schedule before selecting Option 3: the second required measurement must occur at least five
months after the first measurement. Measurement compliance method is similar to the method used in
previous versions and is now the only method for credit compliance that is not simulation based. This
method has been revised to better address the differences in daylight experienced throughout the
year by requiring measurements at two times—when the sun is high in the sky and when the sun is low
in the sky.

5. Illuminating Engineering Society, Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) and Annual Sunlight Exposure (ASE), IES document LM-83
(2013), ies.org/store/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-sda-and-annual-sunlight-exposure-ase-1287.cfm (accessed June 12, 2013).
6. Heschong Mahone Group, Daylighting Metrics (California Energy Commission, PIER Daylighting Plus Research Program, February 2012), energy.
ca.gov/2012publications/CEC-500-2012-053/CEC-500-2012-053.pdf (accessed June 12, 2013).
 419

Option 1. Simulation—Spatial Daylight Autonomy

STEP 1. COLLECT SDA SIMULATION INPUTS

Work with the daylighting consultant to identify information needed for the daylight simulation. At a
minimum, compile the following:
·· Exterior building geometry and obstructions
·· Site plan, location, and context
·· Floor plan and furniture plan
·· Interior finishes and surface reflectance (see Further Explanation, Surface Reflectance).
·· Glazing performance specifications
·· Glare control devices specifications
·· Project occupancy schedule
·· Local climate weather files, such as typical meteorological year (TMY2 or TMY3) data, available at
nrel.gov

STEP 2. PERFORM sDA SIMULATION

Prepare the sDA model based on information collected in Step 1. Follow the modeling methodology
outlined in IES LM83.
Prepare the sDA model based on information collected in Step 1. Follow the modeling methodology
outlined in IES LM 83 (section numbers below refer to this standard).
·· See Section 2.2, sDA—Building 3D Modeling Methodology, for guidance on the period of analysis,
illuminance threshold information, temporal threshold, analysis area, analysis points, operation of
blinds and shades, optical properties of blinds and shades, exterior obstructions, window and skylight
details, interior surface reflectances, and furniture and partitions. For building geometries, develop a
complete building model.
·· Ensure that the software program selected is capable of simulating the sDA model per Section 2.3.3,
Modeling Parameters.
·· Determine how the regularly occupied spaces will be divided into analysis areas. The analysis areas
must cover all regularly occupied floor area. For the annual sunlight exposure (ASE) calculations, at a
minimum, each floor must be an analysis area.
·· Include glare-control devices in the model as described in Section 2.2.6, Blinds/Shades Operation, and
2.2.7, Blinds/Shades Optical Properties.
·· Set thresholds for the simulation to 300 lux for 50% of the hours between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m. local clock
time, for a full calendar year, from January 1 to December 31. See Sections 2.2.1, Period of Analysis;
2.2.2, Illuminance Threshold Information; and 2.2.3, Temporal Threshold.
·· Ensure that the model includes all permanent interior obstructions and movable furniture and

DAYLIGHT
partitions. See Section 2.2.11 for suggestions on modeling furniture and partitions.
·· Consult with the project team on assumptions developed for early design simulations. The
assumptions should be further refined as design develops. Simulation results used for credit
documentation should be based on the design that is closest to the completed construction
documents for the as-built scenario.

EQ
STEP 3. EVALUATE sDA COMPLIANCE
Review the simulation output results and determine the sDA value for all regularly occupied floor area.
·· Record the areas that are daylit (i.e., they contribute to the sDA value by meeting the threshold for the
simulation).
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the requirements in Table 1 in the credit requirements.

STEP 4. PERFORM ANNUAL SUNLIGHT EXPOSURE SIMULATION

Prepare the annual sunlight exposure (ASE) model based on information collected in Step 1 and the sDA
model created in Step 2. The sDA model can be used for ASE analysis with a few modifications. Follow
the modeling methodology outlined in IES LM83 (section numbers below refer to this standard).
·· See Section 3.2, ASE—Building 3D Modeling Details, for guidance on the period of analysis, illuminance
threshold information, temporal threshold, analysis area, analysis points, operation of blinds and
shades, optical properties of blinds and shades, and exterior obstructions.
·· The analysis areas should be the same as those used for the sDA simulations. To align with the
supporting research for ASE, small analysis areas (ideally space by space, or orientation per floor)
are recommended. At a minimum, the analysis area must be for all regularly occupied floor area on a
single floor.
420

·· Glare-control devices are not included in the analysis per Section 3.2.6, Blinds/Shade Operation.
·· Set thresholds for the simulation to 1,000 lux of direct sunlight for more than 250 hours of the hours
between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m. local clock time, for a full calendar year, from January 1 to December 31.
See Sections 3.2.1, Period of Analysis; 3.2.2, Illuminance Threshold Information; and 3.2.3, Temporal
Threshold).
·· Refer to Section 3.3, ASE—Climatic Modeling Methodology, for guidance on climate conditions for the
project’s location. The ASE analysis does not require modeling of sky luminance or ground reflectance.
If the software being used does not accommodate direct sunlight as described in Section 3.3, ASE may
be identified based on illuminance compared with adjacent nodes.
For an alternative way to determine ASE, see Further Explanation, Direct Sunlight Based on Lux
Differences between Adjacent Grid Points.

STEP 5. EVALUATE COMPLIANCE FOR ANNUAL SUNLIGHT EXPOSURE

Review the simulation output results and determine the ASE values for each analysis area.
·· Record the ASE values for each floor area being analyzed.
·· Confirm that the ASE value does not exceed 10% for each analysis area. The 10% threshold should be
determined for small areas, ideally space by space or orientation per floor. At a minimum, the 10%
threshold must be determined for all regularly occupied floor area.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2. Simulation—Illuminance Calculations

STEP 1. COLLECT ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION INPUTS

Work with the daylighting consultant or modeler to identify information needed for the daylight
simulation. At a minimum, compile the following:
·· Exterior building geometry and obstructions
·· Site plan, location ,and context
·· Floor plan and furniture plan
·· Interior finishes and surface reflectance (see Further Explanation, Surface Reflectance)
·· Glazing performance specifications
·· Local climate weather files, such as typical meteorological year (TMY2 or TMY3) data, available at nrel.
gov

STEP 2. PERFORM ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION

Prepare the illuminance model based on information collected in Step 1.
·· Follow the modeling methodology outlined and illustrated in Further Explanation, Illuminance
Simulation Procedure.
·· Perform the point-in-time simulations.
·· Consult with the project team on assumptions developed for early design simulations. The
assumptions should be further refined as design develops. Simulation results used for credit
documentation should be based on the design that is closest to the completed construction
EQ

documents for the as-built scenario.

·· Perform one illuminance simulation at 9 a.m. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21).
·· Perform a second illuminance simulation at 3 p.m. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21).

STEP 3. EVALUATE ILLUMINANCE COMPLIANCE

Review the simulation output results and determine the illuminance values for all regularly occupied floor
area.
·· Record the areas that are daylit (have illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for both 9
a.m. and 3 p.m.) and the associated floor area.
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the values in Table 2 in the credit requirements.
 421

Option 3. Measurement

STEP 1. PREPARE FOR MEASUREMENTS

Determine when the first and second measurements will be taken.
·· Schedule the first day of measurement after the project construction is complete, all furniture is moved
in, window shades are installed, and people have occupied the space.
·· Review Table 4 in the credit requirements to determine timing of the second measurement. Both
measurements must occur during regularly occupied months. For example, measurements for a school
may not be taken during school breaks.
·· Review the regularly occupied space floor area to determine the required measurement grid. Draw the
measurement grid and the measurement nodes (usually located at the center of each grid space) on a
floor plan.

STEP 2. PERFORM MEASUREMENTS

Use a light meter to take a daylight illuminance measurement at workplane height (30 inches [750
millimeters] above finished floor, unless otherwise defined) between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. (see Further
Explanation, Solar Time or Local Time).
·· Refer to the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Section 9.7, for
more information on light meters.
·· Identify the location of each measurement node in the actual space.
·· Record the measured illuminance at each node on the floor plan or in a tracking table.
·· If measurements cannot be completed for the entire project in one day, continue the following day
between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
·· Repeat the process using the same nodes for the second measurement (see Further Explanation,
Examples, Option 3).

STEP 3. EVALUATE ILLUMINANCE COMPLIANCE

Review the measurement results and determine the illuminance values for all regularly occupied floor
area.
·· Record the areas that are daylit (have illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for both
measurements) and the associated floor area.
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the values in Table 3 in the credit requirements.

DAYLIGHT
FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQ
See the daylight and quality views calculator provided by USGBC.

SURFACE REFLECTANCE
IES LM 83-12, Section 2.2.10, provides general guidance for interior surface reflectances.
If surface reflectance values are not available in manufacturers’ information, field measurements may be
performed. Refer to IES LM 83-12, Section 9.12.2, on measuring illuminance and luminance.

Field measurements may be performed as follows:

·· Use a reflectance chart, such as that found in the CIBSE’s Lighting Guide 11: Surface Reflectance and colour
document, to measure reflectance.
·· Measure illuminance with an illuminance meter, and luminance with a spot luminance meter.
·· Reflectance is defined as illuminance divided by luminance in the space.
422

DIRECT SUNLIGHT BASED ON LUX DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ADJACENT GRID POINTS

For ASE analysis, direct sunlight can be assumed to occur for any grid point that has an hourly illuminance level at
least 1,000 lux higher than any directly adjacent grid point. This could be determined from manual post-processing
of the simulation results, through a sun path and shadow program, or with software that automatically post-
processes the simulation results.

FINDING METEOROLOGICAL DATA

Obtain typical meteorological year data for the nearest available weather station in a format the simulation program
can accept. Example formats include TMY2 and TMY3, EPW, and WEA.
Most U.S. and international weather data can be downloaded from the U.S. Department of Energy, at
apps1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/weatherdata_about.cfm.
The National Renewable Energy Laboratory provides a weather file viewer (DView) at
beopt.nrel.gov/downloadDView.

ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION PROCEDURE

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The simulation methodology for illuminance simulation is similar to that described in IES LM 83-12 for sDA and ASE.
For building geometries, develop a complete building model. Some programs allow energy model geometries to
be transferred to the daylight modeling interface. Include exterior walls, roofs, shading devices, glazed assemblies
(including mullion thickness), skylight and window recesses, rough opening thicknesses, and light shelves. Refer to
LM 83, Section 2.2, for general guidance on the level of detail for the model.

Period of analysis. The analysis is performed at 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21),
adjusted for daylight savings time and longitude.

Illuminance threshold. The illuminance threshold for analysis is 300 lux or greater and below 3,000 lux at the
horizontal workplane, which is 30 inches (750 mm) above the finished floor, unless otherwise defined.

Analysis area and points. The analysis area should cover all regularly occupied floor area. For Healthcare projects,
the analysis area must cover all perimeter floor area, which is any area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of the building
perimeter. Refer to LM 83, Section 2.2.5, for guidance on the calculation grid and location of the analysis points.

Exterior obstructions. Refer to LM 83-12, Section 2.2.8, for guidance on modeling exterior obstructions.

Window and skylight details. Refer to LM 83-12, Section 2.2.9, for guidance on modeling windows and skylights. If
the modeling software requires an input of glazing transmissivity, use the visible light transmittance value provided
by the manufacturer. Glare-control devices are not included in the analysis.

Surface reflectances. Prepare a list of material finishes for all model surfaces and verify material specifications with
EQ

the design team. A library of materials is available with most daylight programs, such as the material.rad file structure
for the RADIANCE-based7 simulation programs. The material.rad flile may be customized, but in RADIANCE, the
simulation fails if a material is incorrectly defined. Check the normal direction of model surfaces. To receive daylight,
exposed surfaces should face outward from the center of each zone in which they belong. Ground surfaces should
face upward. Refer to LM 83, Section 2.2.10, for further guidance on modeling interior surface reflectances.

Furniture and partitions. The model must include all permanent interior obstructions and movable furniture and
partitions. See LM 83, Section 2.2.11, for suggestions on modeling furniture and partitions.

Illuminance climatic modeling methodology. Proceed as follows.

1. Obtain typical meteorological year data (see Further Explanation, Finding Meteorological Data). Use
local weather data or TMY weather data files for the nearest city. If the simulation program is capable of
automatically determining clear sky condition, select that option.

7. radsite.lbl.gov/radiance/HOME.html (accessed June 12, 2013).

 423

2. To calculate the illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and sky (diffuse component) in a TMY2 or
TMY 3 file, export the data into a text file or spreadsheet format.
3. From the TMY, select the day within 15 days of September 21 that has the clearest sky condition (total sky
cover at its lowest value) at 9 a.m.
4. From the TMY, select the day within 15 days of March 21 that has the clearest sky condition at 9 a.m.
5. Determine the direct horizontal irradiance (Wh/m2) values at 9 a.m. for the day selected in September and at
9 a.m. for the day selected in March. Average the two values and use the result in the 9 a.m. simulation as the
direct horizontal irradiance input. If the file does not explicitly state direct horizontal irradiance, calculate it
as follows:
Direct horizontal irradiance = Global horizontal irradiance – Diffuse horizontal irradiance8

6. Determine the diffuse horizontal irradiance (Wh/m2) values at 9 a.m. for the day selected in September and at
9 a.m. for the day selected in March. Average the two values and use the result in the 9 a.m. simulation as the
diffuse horizontal irradiance input.
7. Repeat procedures 3–6 for 3 p.m. (see Further Explanation, Examples).
8. Prepare the model to run a simulation to input custom values for direct horizontal and diffuse horizontal
irradiance.

Refer to LM83, Sections 2.3.1 and 2.3.2, for additional guidance on climate conditions for the project’s location such
as, the sun position and intensity, sky illuminance distribution, and modeling parameters. Refer to IES LM83, Section
2.3.3, for guidance on modeling parameters.
The daylight simulation is most successful when the light is reflected back from the interior walls into the space.
The daylight modeler can specify a certain number of inter-reflections before a ray path is discarded.

SOLAR TIME OR LOCAL TIME

When performing daylight measurements, determine whether the measurements will be taken at solar or local time.
Both are acceptable, but solar time may be more appropriate because it is based on the position of the sun in the sky.
Solar time varies from the local standard time because of eccentricities in Earth’s orbit and because of time zones
and daylight saving adjustments. Solar time is typically calculated using a third-party calculator, such as the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s solar calculator.

EXAMPLES

DAYLIGHT
Example 1. Option 2
An open office with core areas is being assessed for compliance with Option 2 Illuminance Simulation. The office
is in New York City and includes six regularly occupied spaces (Table 5) plus several nonregularly occupied spaces,
such as mechanical, elevator, and restroom space. The office has equally spaced ribbon glazing on all four sides and a
window-to-wall ratio of 63%.

EQ
Illuminance simulations were performed for all the regularly occupied spaces, based on diffuse and direct
horizontal radiation inputs determined in Figure 2. For the entire project, the percentage of regularly occupied area
that is daylighted is 81%. The percentage of regularly occupied floor area exceeds 75%, so project has earned 1 point
under Option 2.

8 More information on determining different kinds of irradiance is available at the Natural Frequency wiki site: wiki.naturalfrequency.com/wiki/
SolarRadiation/Components (accessed June 12, 2013).
424

TABLE 5. Regularly occupied spaces in office

Floor area with daylight

Regularly occupied space ID Floor area (ft2)
illuminance of 300–3,000 lux

2nd-floor open office 9,000 7,200

3rd-floor conference room 500 420
3rd-floor private office 301 96 72
3rd-floor private office 302 120 88
3rd-floor open office 8,284 6,900
4th-floor open office 9,000 7,200

Total regularly occupied area (ft2) 27,000

Daylighted regularly occupied area (ft2) 21,880

Regularly occupied area that is daylighted 81%

Figure 2. Diffuse and direct horizontal radiation inputs for New York City
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

New York City TMY3

September
Lowest total sky cover for 9 a.m. on September 17
• Global horizontal irradiance = 618 Wh/m2
• Diffuse horizontal irradiance = 98 Wh/m2
• Direct horizontal irradiance = 618 – 98 = 520 Wh/m2
March
Daily illuminance intensity data Lowest total sky cover for 9 a.m. on March 21
• Global horizontal irradiance = 155 Wh/m2
• Diffuse horizontal irradiance = 136 Wh/m2
• Direct horizontal irradiance = 155 – 136 = 19 Wh/m2
Computer model will input following values:
• Average diffuse horizontal irradiance = 117 Wh/m2
• Average direct horizontal irradiance = 270 Wh/m2

Example 2. Option 3
After construction of the New York City office building (Example 1) was completed in mid-June, the project team
took daylight measurements in all regularly occupied spaces. A second set of daylight measurements was taken
for the same spaces in October to determine the compliant floor areas in the building. The two measurements for
each space were compared to determine the areas that were compliant at both times. Figures 3 and 4 display the
measurement results for a third-floor private office, 301.
EQ
 425

3 ft. Grid Used for Private Office 301

Spaces less than
3 ft. Grid Used150
for SF June Daylight Measurements
Private Office 301
Spaces less than 150 SF June Daylight Measurements

280 lux 630 lux 1,200 lux 2,000 lux

280 lux 630 lux 1,200 lux 2,000 lux

240 lux 540 lux 930 lux 1,800 lux 8’

240 lux 540 lux 930 lux 1,800 lux 8’

200 lux
200 lux 500 lux 900 lux 1,600 lux
500 lux 900 lux 1,600 lux

12’
12’

Figure 3. Measurements recorded in June

3 ft. Grid Used for Private Office 301

Spaces less than
3 ft. Grid Used150
for SF OctoberPrivate
Daylight Measurements
Office 301
Spaces less than 150 SF October Daylight Measurements

150 lux 450 lux 800 lux 1,500 lux

DAYLIGHT
150 lux 450 lux 800 lux 1,500 lux

8’

EQ
120 lux 400 lux 780 lux 1,600 lux
120 lux 400 lux 780 lux 1,600 lux 8’

100 lux
100 lux 380 lux 750 lux 1,400 lux
380 lux 750 lux 1,400 lux

12’
Figure 4. Measurements recorded in October
12’
426

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Auditoriums
Auditoriums must be included in the daylight requirements, but a lower illuminance level is acceptable (see
recommended illuminance values in The Lighting Handbook, Table 24.29).

Conference rooms dedicated to video conferencing

Conference rooms that are dedicated to video conferencing may be excluded from the daylight requirements.

Gymnasiums
Gymnasiums must be included in the daylight requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Floor plans highlighting regularly occupied spaces X X X X

List of glare-control devices for all windows with their control
X X X X
mechanism
List of compliant spaces with their annual summary values for
X
sDA and ASE
Geometric plots from simulations X X
Narrative or output file describing daylight simulation program,
X X
simulation inputs, and weather file
List of compliant spaces with their calculated illuminance values X
Floor plans or list of compliant spaces with measured
X
illuminance values for each node
Calculations demonstrating percentage of compliant space
X
between 300 lux and 3,000 lux
EQ

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Good
daylighting and glare control reduce the need for electric lighting. Consider daylight contribution when designing
the lighting system. Consider incorporating daylight sensors and dimmers to reduce lighting energy consumption,
and account for these efficiency measures in the related prerequisite and credit.

EQ Credit Quality Views. Design strategies that enhance daylight penetration are also likely to increase the number
of occupants with exterior views. Regularly occupied spaces must be consistently reported for both this and the
related credit.

EQ Credit Interior Lighting. For projects that pursue Option 1 or Option 2 of this credit, ensure that same surface
reflectance values used in daylight simulation models match those used in lighting quality calculations for the
related credit.

9. Illuminating Engineering Society, The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition.

 427

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The prescriptive compliance path has been eliminated.
·· An additional simulation option is available. The new option incorporates two new metrics, spatial daylight
autonomy and annual sunlight exposure, based on computer simulations run over an entire year.
·· For Option 2, the illuminance simulation now relies on local weather data and uses a calculated illuminance
intensity.
·· For Option 3, measurements are required at two times of the year.
·· The number of points available and thresholds for achievement have changed.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
IES Lighting Measurement LM 83-12, Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) and Annual
Sunlight Exposure (ASE): webstore.ansi.org

The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society: ies.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
annual sunlight exposure (ASE) a metric that describes the potential for visual discomfort in interior work
environments. It is defined as the percentage of an analysis area that exceeds a specified direct sunlight illuminance
level more than a specified number of hours per year. (Illuminating Engineering Society)

ASE1000,250 reports the percentage of sensors in the analysis area, using a maximum 2-foot spacing between points,
that are found to be exposed to more than 1000 lux of direct sunlight for more than 250 hours per year, before any
operable blinds or shades are deployed to block sunlight, considering the same 10 hour/day analysis period as sDA

DAYLIGHT
and using comparable simulation methods

automated dynamic façade systems are daylighting control devices whose position or light transmission level
can be automatically changed by a control system to address sunlight penetration or perceived glare in the space.
Acceptable automated dynamic façade systems include interior automated window blinds or shades; exterior
automated louvers, shades, or blinds; or automatically controlled dynamic glazing. Automated methods of sunlight

EQ
penetration or perceived glare control do not include manually operated interior or exterior façade shading systems;
manually operated dynamic glazing; or fixed exterior overhangs, fins, shades, screens, awnings or louvers whose
position on the fenestration cannot be automatically changed or adjusted. Automated dynamic façade systems
are allowed to have manual override but must default back to automated operation after a predefined period of no
longer than two hours. Dynamic glazing is further defined in ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and the International Energy
Conservation Code (IECC)

clear glazing glass that is transparent and allows a view through the fenestration. Diffused glazing allows only
daylighting.

direct sunlight an interior horizontal measurement of 1,000 lux or more of direct beam sunlight that accounts for
window transmittance and angular effects, and excludes the effect of any operable blinds, with no contribution from
reflected light (i.e., a zero bounce analysis) and no contribution from the diffuse sky component (Adapted from IES)
428

movable furniture and partitions items that can be moved by the users without the need of tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management

permanent interior obstruction a structure that cannot be moved by the user without tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management. Examples include lab hoods, fixed partitions, demountable opaque full- or
partial-height partitions, some displays, and equipment.

spatial daylight autonomy (sDA) a metric describing annual sufficiency of ambient daylight levels in interior
environments. It is defined as the percentage of an analysis area (the area where calculations are performed, typically
across an entire space) that meets a minimum daylight illuminance level for a specified fraction of the operating
hours per year (i.e., the Daylight Autonomy value following Reinhart & Walkenhorst, 2001). The illluminance level
and time fraction are included as subscripts, as in sDA300,50%. The sDA value is expressed as a percentage of area.
(Illuminating Engineering Society).

sDA300/50% the percentage of analysis points across the analysis area that meet or exceed this 300 lux value for at least
50% of the analysis period 
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ
 429

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Quality Views
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

INTENT

To give building occupants a connection to the natural outdoor

environment by providing quality views.

REQUIREMENTS
Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoors via vision glazing for 75% of all regularly occupied floor area.
View glazing in the contributing area must provide a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers,

QUALITY VIEWS
patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color balance.
Additionally, 75% of all regularly occupied floor area must have at least two of the following four kinds of views:
·· multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart;
·· views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3) objects at least 25
feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing;
·· unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing; and

EQ
·· views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in “Windows and Offices; A Study of Office Worker
Performance and the Indoor Environment.”

Views into interior atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area.

Include any permanent interior obstructions and moveable furniture and partitions.
430

BEHIND THE INTENT

Building occupants who can visually connect with outdoor environments while performing everyday tasks
experience greater satisfaction, attentiveness, and productivity. Outside views that incorporate natural elements
are more enticing and offer better visual respite. Workers seated at computers, who often develop eye strain or dry
eyes from looking at their screens for extended periods without a break, find relief in attractive distance views.1 In
healthcare facilities, providing patients with views and access to nature can shorten hospital stays and reduce stress,
depression, and the use of pain medication.2
Views to the outdoors also connect the occupants with natural environmental cues, such as diurnal changes from
light to dark and the changes in light from season to season, which are important for maintaining natural circadian
rhythms. Disruption of these rhythms can lead to long-term health care problems, including mental disorders.3
Designing for quality views involves consideration of building orientation and site design, facade, and interior
layout. Integrated design enables project teams to identify potential compromises. For example, glazing with frits,
fibers, patterns, colors, or tints is often used to provide privacy, enhance aesthetics, and reduce glare and solar heat
gain; however, these types of glazing distort and in some cases completely block the views to the exterior.
Four former exemplary performance paths have been incorporated as credit compliance options, expanding the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

credit to include consideration for the quality of views provided to building occupants. Specifically, glazing color, frit,
and patterns have been restricted to ensure that quality views are being maintained. Additionally, the type of objects
visible in the view (e.g., vegetation, sky, brick wall, busy street)—is now an important factor. Although the bar has
been raised, four credit paths give teams flexibility in how their designed spaces may comply. Also, atriums may now
account for up to 30% of the required area with access to quality views—a change based on industry recognition that
atriums can not only increase daylight and views for interior spaces but also reduce the need for electrical lighting in
spaces that would otherwise likely require it.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. EVALUATE PROJECT SITE

During schematic design, review the project’s surroundings to identify the presence of elements that
meet the view quality requirements of this credit, such as parks, green roofs and walls, nearby buildings,
and pedestrian and vehicle movement.

STEP 2. DESIGN FOR TRANSPARENCY AND QUALITY VIEWS

During programming, consider how best to allocate interior space to maximize access to views. During
design development, design enclosures and select furniture to minimize visual obstructions to perimeter
glazing (see Further Explanation, Quality View Design Considerations).
EQ

·· Consider using transparent partitions or providing interior glazing at eye level to ensure views for
enclosed spaces.
·· In open-plan offices, select low partitions or incorporate glazed panels to provide views in multiple
directions.
·· Pay particular attention to maintaining views for spaces near the core. One successful strategy is
to locate open-plan areas, including classrooms, at the perimeter, while placing private offices and
unoccupied areas near the core.
·· Consider using glare control devices that preserve the view to the exterior. Movable glare control
devices do not need to be included in the calculations.

1. California Energy Commission, Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and Indoor Environment: Technical Report (2003), pp. 8–9,
ff. 1–8, energy.ca.gov/2003publications/CEC-500-2003-082/CEC-500-2003-082-A-09.PDF (accessed June 12, 2013); Oklahoma State University Healthy
and Safety Office, You Can
Do Something About Eyestrain (2011), ehs.okstate.edu/kopykit/eyestrain.htm (accessed June 12, 2013).
2. Ulrich, Roger, et al., “A Review of the Research Literature on Evidence-Based Healthcare Design,” Health Environments Research and Design Journal 1(3)
(2008), (http://www.herdjournal.com).
3. Kellert, Stephen R., Judith H. Heerwagen, and Martin L. Mador, Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Life into Buildings (New
York: Wiley, 2008), p. 91.
 431

STEP 3. IDENTIFY REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES

Identify all regularly occupied spaces within the project (see EQ Overview, Regularly versus nonregularly
occupied spaces). Highlight regularly occupied spaces on the floor plan or furniture plan and list all
regularly occupied spaces and their respective floor areas (Table 1).

TABLE 1. Quality views tracking table

Quality views
Regularly  
Floor area
occupied space Space type   View types
(ft2 or m2) Floor area with direct line of sight
ID  
to outdoors via vision glazing
1 2

         
             
             
             
             
             

Determine whether any regularly occupied spaces should be excluded from the views requirements
(see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations). Spaces whose functional requirements prohibit the
incorporation of glazing for direct access to views may be excluded. Spaces may not be excluded for
security or noise concerns.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY SIGHT LINES TO EXTERIOR VIEWS

On floor plans or furniture plans, identify the locations of perimeter and interior glazing, and all
permanent interior obstructions.
·· Determine whether the perimeter and interior glazing qualifies as vision glazing (see Further
Explanation, Vision Glazing).
·· Identify permanent interior obstructions (see Definitions) and movable furniture and partitions.
These must be included in the calculations. Movable glare control devices may be included in the
calculations, but this is not required.
·· Consider performing an initial rough assessment before performing the detailed assessment of view
quality. Determine whether the regularly occupied floor area with proximity to vision glazing is at least
75% of the total regularly occupied floor area

QUALITY VIEWS
STEP 5. ASSESS VIEW QUALITY
Identify which kinds of view will be used to demonstrate view quality. For each regularly occupied space
or area of the floor plan, select two view types and add the selection to the tracking table. Eligible view
types are as follows:
1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart
2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3) objects
at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing

EQ
3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing
4. Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker
Performance and the Indoor Environment4
Review Further Explanation, Quality View Design Considerations, for tips on which view types make the
most sense for the project.
The view types may be mixed and matched, but documentation will be simpler if the same view types are
used consistently across spaces.
If the entire regularly occupied space or area does not meet the requirements of the selected view type,
include only the regularly occupied floor area that complies. To assess the regularly occupied space for
each view type selected, perform the following steps (also see Further Explanation, Examples).

4. California Energy Commission, Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and Indoor Environment: Technical Report (2003), pp. 8–9, ff.
1–8, energy.ca.gov/2003publications/CEC-500-2003-082/CEC-500-2003-082-A-09.PDF (accessed June 12, 2013).
432

View type 1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90
degrees apart
On the floor plan or furniture plans, draw two lines of sight to the vision glazing for each location within
the space.
·· The space or location qualifies if the lines of sight are at least 90 degrees apart and if they are not
intercepted by any permanent interior obstructions. If necessary, draw sight lines on section or
elevation plans to confirm that permanent interior obstructions do not block the lines of sight.
·· It may be easiest to determine the boundary of qualifying areas to non-qualifying areas (Figure 1).

Figure 1. Identifying multiple lines of sight

Window
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

90°

Compliant view area

Noncompliant view area

View type 2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2)
movement; and (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing
In plan, label the qualifying features located at the vision glazing.
EQ

·· Two features must be indicated.

·· Movement (feature 2) includes such activities as people walking, cars driving on the street, and boats
moving through the water. Movement of plants and trees from wind does not qualify.
·· Account for any changes in exterior views as floor elevation changes.
·· In plan, draw one line of sight to the vision glazing for each location in the space. The space or location
qualifies if the line of sight is not intercepted by any permanent interior obstructions. If necessary,
draw sight lines on section or elevation plans to confirm permanent interior obstructions do not block
the lines of sight.

View type 3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height
of the vision glazing
In section, determine the head height of the vision glazing for each regularly occupied space. In plan,
identify all regularly occupied floor area that is within three times the head height of the perimeter.
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ37
·· The space or location qualifies if there are no permanent interior obstructions present in the area. No
permanent interior obstructions are allowed, regardless of their height. Quality Views_1 BD+C
·· Any regularly occupied floor area not in the identified area does not qualify.
 433

View type 4. Implement views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and
Offices; A Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment.
On the floor plan or furniture plan, identify occupants’ typical locations in each regularly occupied space
(e.g., open-office workstation, enclosed office, conference room seat, counter). Indicate whether the
location is the primary view location or a break view location (see Further Explanation, View Factor).
·· Assess the view factor for each of these locations, based on either the primary view or the break view.
·· In section or elevation, or through drawings or images, demonstrate how the view factor was
determined.

STEP 6. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE

Complete the tracking table to confirm that at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area meets two
view types.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See the daylight and quality views calculator provided by USGBC.

QUALITY VIEW DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

TABLE 2. Design considerations by view type

View type Design considerations

1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in Providing multiple lines of site to vision glazing in different directions could be
different directions at least 90 degrees apart advantageous for high-rise buildings with curtain wall exteriors, especially for open-
office spaces.
Interior atrium and exterior glazing provide views in several directions.
Consider glazing characteristics that avoid excessive heat gain, to reduce energy use for

QUALITY VIEWS
cooling
2. Views that include at least two of following: In dense urban environments, providing views of movement, flora, fauna, or sky, and
• (1) flora, fauna, or sky; objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from exterior of building may prove difficult.
• (2) movement; or Conversely, this criterion may be easy to achieve in low-rise buildings or buildings in
• (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from suburban areas surrounded by open space and landscaping.
exterior of glazing Vertical landscaping may be effective strategy for achieving views of flora and fauna in
dense urban environments.
3. Unobstructed views located within distance This option is easiest to achieve in buildings with large expanses of perimeter glazing.

EQ
of three times head height of vision glazing Layouts that include extensive open-office workstations or open areas with little interior
obstructions along perimeter glazing are good candidates for this approach.

4. Views with view factor of 3 or greater View factor must be determined by observation of available views for each workstation.
This approach may allow greater flexibility in building orientation, window size, and
surroundings, but without 3D modeling, team may be unable to determine view factor
until substantial completion.

VIEW FACTOR
View factor is a measure of the amount and quality of views within a 90-degree cone of vision from an individual
workstation. View factor is rated from 0 (poor quality) to 5 (high quality).
To achieve this credit, teams may determine the view factor for either primary view, what an occupant would
see while working on the phone or computer, or break view, what occupants would see while taking a short break by
turning their heads or moving their chairs while remaining seated.
434

View factor is determined for each workstation by assessing the vertical and lateral viewing angle for either
the primary or the break view (Figure 2). To determine view factor, first find the smaller of the vertical or lateral
view angle. Use the angle to identify the preliminary view factor (Table 3). If the view angle falls within the gray
zone, assess the content of the view. View angles in the gray zone are rated up one level when the view has very high
vegetation content, and down one level if the view has no vegetation content.
Alternatively, use Figure 3, which demonstrates examples of different view factors, to visually assess the view
factor of a given space.

TABLE 3. View factor

View angle
Preliminary view
factor Min–max Gray-zone range
(degrees) (degrees)

1 1–4

1 or 2 4–5

2 5–9
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2 or 3 9–11

3 11–15

3 or 4 15–20

4 20–40

4 or 5 40–30

5 50–90

Figure 2. Assessing view angles

Vertical angle Lateral angle

EQ
 435

Figure 3. View factor illustrations. The following images illustrate the view quality associated with each view factor level.

View Factor 1 View Factor 2 View Factor 3

View Factor 4 View Factor 5

VISION GLAZING
Vision glazing is defined as that portion of exterior windows that permits views to the exterior (or an atrium). Vision
glazing must have a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that

QUALITY VIEWS
distort color balance (Figures 4–8). Some patterns are acceptable if they preserve the view.
The glazing does not have to be located between 30 and 90 inches (750 and 2300 millimeters) above the finished
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
floor.
EQ42
Figures 4–7 illustrate examples of glazing solutions that are eligible for this credit.
Quality Views_6

EQ

Figure 4. Fritted glass with horizontal strips of Figure 5. Fritted glass with vertical panels of clear glazing. Photo by
clear glazing. Photo by Michael Spillers. The area Michael Spillers. The glazing between the fritted panels is acceptable
between the upper and lower portions of fritted vision glazing.
glass is acceptable vision glazing.
436
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 6. Frosted glass above, clear glazing below. Photo by Todd Reed. The area below the frosted glazing is acceptable
vision glazing. This space also has multiple views more than 90 degrees apart.
EQ

Figure 7. Lightly tinted glazing. The gray tint darkens the view but does not distort color balance, so it is acceptable vision
glazing.
 437

Figure 8 is an example of glazing that is ineligible for this credit.

Figure 8. Partial-height partitions with

frosted glass. Photo by Marcus Sheffer
Frosted glass is not acceptable
because it interferes with occupants’
views to the vision glazing.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. View type 1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart
A classroom is assessed for compliance with the requirement for view type 1. The classroom has a total floor area of
750 square feet (70 square meters) and no permanent interior obstructions. To identify compliant areas within the
classroom, the team has identified representative points on the classroom floor plan with two lines of sight at least
90 degrees apart (Figure 9) and determined that 500 square feet (45 square meters) of the classroom complies with
the requirement.

QUALITY VIEWS
90°

EQ

Total area = 750 sq ft (70 sq m) Window

Compliant view area = 500 sq ft (45 sq m)
Noncompliant view area

Figure 9. Lines of sight in classroom

438

Example 2. View type 2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement;
and (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing

A regularly occupied space on the southeast side of the project building is assessed for compliance with requirements
for view type 2. A section drawing of the building and adjacent properties is prepared to demonstrate that the
space has views of trees close to the building and objects 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior glazing (Figure 10).
The section also shows that the space, which is an office, has no permanent interior obstructions, so this regularly
occupied area meets the requirements.

Adjacent building Unobstructed sight of green space

25'-0" (7.5m) minimum

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Green space/park

Figure 10. Flora within sight of space

Figure 11 illustrates a view with flora.

EQ

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ39

Quality Views_3

Figure 11. Planters outside a school. Photo by Marcus Sheffer.

 439

Example 3. View type 3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the
vision glazing

An open-plan office space (Open Office 1) is assessed for compliance with the quality view requirement to have
unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing. A section view of
the space is prepared to demonstrate that there are no permanent interior obstructions within 29 feet 3 inches (8.9
meters) of the vision glazing, which has a head height of 9 feet 9 inches (3 meters). The office space is compliant with
the requirement (Figure 12).
In the same building, a similar open office space is also assessed for compliance. A section view of the space is
prepared, but in this case, there are permanent interior obstructions within 29 feet 3 inches (8.9 meters) of the vision
glazing, which has a head height of 9 feet 9 inches (3 meters). The fixed workstation with partitions and separate
partition are both considered permanent interior obstructions. This open office space is not compliant with the
requirement (Figure 12).

Moveable work stations

without partitions

9'-9"
(3m)

29'-3" (8.9m)
Open Office 1

Partition

Systems furniture: fixed

workstations with partitions

QUALITY VIEWS
9'-9"
(3m)
4'-2" 4'-2"
(1.3m) (1.3m)

29'-3" (8.9m)

EQ
Open Office 2

SCALE:
1’ 5’ 10’
(.3m) (1.5m) (3m)

Figure 12. Compliant and noncompliant office spaces

Example 4. View type 4. Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and Offices; A Study of
Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment

The primary view for a workstation in an open-office space (Figure 13) is evaluated and assigned a view factor of
5, based on the view factor illustrations provided in Figure 3. The view factor is rated 5 because the workstation is
directly in front of two large windows, with no obstructions or odd angles disrupting the view to the outdoors.

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ40

440
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 13. Workstation with view factor of 5. Photo by Marcus Sheffer.

Example 5. Views into atrium

Figure 14 illustrates how regularly occupied spaces with views into a sunlit interior space can be used as an
alternative to views to the outdoors. This approach can be used for up to 30% of the regularly occupied floor area.
The requirements for direct line of sight and two view types still apply.
EQ

Figure 14. View into atrium. The Christman Building: Photo by Gene Meadows.
 441

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Auditoriums
Auditoriums may be excluded from the view requirements.

Conference rooms dedicated to video conferencing

Conference rooms that are dedicated to video conferencing may be excluded from the view requirements.

Gymnasiums
Gymnasiums may be excluded from the view requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

View type
Documentation All projects
1: multiple 2: exterior 3: unobstructed 4: view
lines of sight features views within 3H factor

List of all regularly occupied spaces, qualifying

X
floor area in each space, and view features
Sections, elevations, diagrams, renderings, or
photos indicating sight lines to glazing do not X
encounter permanent interior obstructions.
Floor plans or diagrams identifying regularly
X
occupied spaces and the following:
Multiple sight lines for each regularly occupied

QUALITY VIEWS
X
space
Sight lines and exterior features labeled; provide
multiple floor plans if view features change at X
varying building heights
Sight lines and area indicating three times head
X
height
Area with view factor of 3 or greater X
Primary or break view angle to perimeter

EQ
X
glazing
Method for determining view factor for each
X
typical occupant location

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Daylight. Window tints used for solar and glare control may hinder the quality of view by distorting the
color of objects and light. Increasing the area of vision glazing may provide greater access to daylight.

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Increased window-to-wall ratio in design can alter energy
performance and has a direct correlation to lighting design strategies to conserve energy. Increased glazing may
contribute to heat gain and increased HVAC energy use, but daylighting reduces the need for electric lighting.
442

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The exemplary performance requirements from LEED 2009 are now the basis for the credit requirements.
·· Glazing must provide a clear image of the outdoors. The glazing does not have to be located between 30 and 90
inches (750 and 2 300 millimeters) above the finished floor.
·· Atriums now qualify for up to 30% of the total area.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment: h-m-g.com

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Meet the requirements for 90% of all regularly occupied area.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

DEFINITIONS
color rendering index a measurement from 0 to 100 that indicates how accurately an artificial light source, as
compared with an incandescent light, displays hues. The higher the index number, the more accurately the light
is rendering colors. Incandescent lighting has a color rendering index above 95; standard high-pressure sodium
lighting (such as orange-hued roadway lights) measures approximately 25; many fluorescent sources using rare earth
phosphors have a color rendering index of 80 and above. (Adapted from U.S. ENERGY STAR)

movable furniture and partitions items that can be moved by the users without the need of tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management

permanent interior obstruction a structure that cannot be moved by the user without tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management. Examples include lab hoods, fixed partitions, demountable opaque full- or
partial-height partitions, some displays, and equipment.

vision glazing the glass portion of an exterior window that permits views to the exterior or interior. Vision glazing
must allow a clear image of the exterior and must not be obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints
that distort color balance.
EQ
 443

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Acoustic Performance
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (2 point)

Hospitality (2 point)

INTENT

To provide workspaces and classrooms that promote occupants’

well-being, productivity, and communications through effective
acoustic design.

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS
For all occupied spaces, meet the following requirements, as applicable, for HVAC background noise, sound
isolation, reverberation time, and sound reinforcement and masking.

HVAC Background Noise

Achieve maximum background noise levels from heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems per
2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 48, Table 1; AHRI Standard 885-2008, Table 15; or a local
equivalent. Calculate or measure sound levels.
For measurements, use a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general

EQ
purpose) sound measurement instrumentation, or a local equivalent.
Comply with design criteria for HVAC noise levels resulting from the sound transmission paths listed in ASHRAE
2011 Applications Handbook, Table 6; or a local equivalent.

Sound Transmission
Meet the composite sound transmission class (STCC) ratings listed in Table 1, or local building code, whichever is
more stringent.
444

TABLE 1. Minimum composite sound transmission class ratings for adjacent spaces

Adjacency combinations STCC

Residence (within a multifamily residence), hotel or motel room Residence, hotel or motel room 55

Residence, hotel or motel room Common hallway, stairway 50

Residence, hotel or motel room Retail 60

Retail Retail 50

Standard office Standard office 45

Executive office Executive office 50

Conference room Conference room 50

Office, conference room Hallway, stairway 50

Mechanical equipment room Occupied area 60

Reverberation Time
Meet the reverberation time requirements in Table 2 (adapted from Table 9.1 in the Performance Measurement
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Protocols for Commercial Buildings1).

TABLE 2. Reverberation time requirements

T60 (sec), at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz,

Room type Application
and 2000 Hz

Apartment and condominium — < 0.6

Individual room or suite < 0.6

Hotel/motel
Meeting or banquet room < 0.8

Executive or private office < 0.6

Conference room < 0.6

Office building Teleconference room < 0.6

Open-plan office without sound masking < 0.8

Open-plan office with sound masking < 0.8

Unamplified speech < 0.7

Courtroom
Amplified speech < 1.0

Performing arts space Drama theaters, concert and recital halls Varies by application
EQ

Testing or research with minimal speech

< 1.0
communication
Laboratories
Extensive phone use and speech communication < 0.6

Church, mosque, synagogue General assembly with critical music program Varies by application

Library — < 1.0

Gymnasium and natatorium < 2.0

Indoor stadium, gymnasium
Large-capacity space with speech amplification < 1.5

Classroom — < 0.6

1. Adapted from ASHRAE (2007d), ASA (2008), ANSI (2002), and CEN (2007)
 445

Sound Reinforcement and Masking Systems

Sound Reinforcement
For all large conference rooms and auditoriums seating more than 50 persons, evaluate whether sound
reinforcement and AV playback capabilities are needed.

If needed, the sound reinforcement systems must meet the following criteria:
·· Achieve a speech transmission index (STI) of at least 0.60 or common intelligibility scale (CIS) rating of at
least 0.77 at representative points within the area of coverage to provide acceptable intelligibility.
·· Have a minimum sound level of 70 dBA.
·· Maintain sound-level coverage within +/–3 dB at the 2000 Hz octave band throughout the space.

Masking Systems
For projects that use masking systems, the design levels must not exceed 48 dBA. Ensure that loudspeaker coverage
provides uniformity of +/–2 dBA and that speech spectra are effectively masked.

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
EQ
446

BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit challenges project teams to address best practices in acoustic design as an indoor environmental quality
imperative that complements other green building practices.
Research by the Center for the Built Environment (CBE) of 34,000 building inhabitants2 showed that LEED
buildings outperform standard design in all areas of indoor environmental quality except acoustics (Figure
1). Acoustic performance typically is considered during the design process, the study found, yet teams are just
beginning to understand the trade-offs with other green building practices, such as open floor planning, highly
efficient HVAC systems, and efficient lighting strategies.

Average Scores by Category

LEED / Green Buildings

rest of database

General Satisfaction—Workspace 0.84

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Office Layout 0.96

Office Furnishings 0.84

Thermal Comfort -0.16

Air Quality 0.22

Lighting 1.12

Acoustics -0.19

Cleanliness and Maintenance 0.92

-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 -3

Very Very
Dissatisfied Satisfied

Figure 1. Occupants’ satisfaction in conventional versus LEED-certified buildings. Used with permission from the Center for
the Built Environment, UC Berkeley.

LEED 2009 covered acoustics in the Schools and Healthcare rating systems, partly because it critically affects
learning and healing environments. Now an acoustics credit is available to all new construction projects, challenging
EQ

project teams to balance acoustical design strategies with considerations for daylighting, thermal comfort, and other
performance areas that must be considered when planning systems and indoor spaces. In all project types, well-
designed acoustics can enhance the environmental quality of the space by facilitating communication, increasing
productivity, improving the well-being of workers, or aiding in noise control and speech privacy.

2. Huizenga, C., et al. 2005. LEED Post-occupancy Evaluation: Taking Responsibility for the Occupants. cbe.berkeley.edu/research/pdf_files/Huizenga_
Greenbuild2005.pdf (accessed June 12, 2013).
 447

The benefits of open spaces should be balanced with acoustic design. Better acoustics do matter: research links
poor acoustic performance to sleep disturbance,3,4 increased blood pressure and heart rates, and stress.5

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DEFINE ACOUSTIC NEEDS FOR EACH SPACE

Identify occupied spaces and determine the following:
·· Activities or user groups within each space and adjacencies
·· Privacy or sound sensitivity requirements

STEP 2. REVIEW ACOUSTIC CRITERIA

Evaluate how the four performance areas addressed by this credit affect each applicable space:
·· HVAC background noise levels. Engineers or acoustic experts will need to analyze background noise
levels resulting from HVAC equipment.
·· Sound isolation. Designers will need to specify materials to meet composite sound transmission class
ratings.
·· Reverberation time. Designers will need to specify sound-absorbing treatments and/or revisit room
size to address reverberation time.
·· Sound reinforcement and masking systems. Designers will need to analyze STI or CIS, sound level
and sound-level coverage for spaces with sound reinforcement systems. Designers will also need to
analyze sound level, loudspeaker coverage, and speech spectra for spaces with masking systems.
Prepare a log or spreadsheet to record pertinent acoustic information for each space.
Determine how the acoustic requirements fit into the design process so that each can be addressed by
the responsible party at the appropriate time.

STEP 3. ADDRESS HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
Identify equipment and air distribution elements that could contribute to HVAC background noise in
occupied spaces. The following steps refer to the referenced standard, 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE
Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control (“Chapter 48”).
·· When selecting and designing HVAC systems, consider basic acoustic design techniques (e.g., Chapter
48, page 48.8).
·· Consider specific source design considerations (e.g., Chapter 48, pages 48.1–48.41 and 48.8–48.30).
·· Compile acoustic performance data at specific operating points from the HVAC equipment
manufacturer’s data. This information may inform the HVAC background noise criteria used for
compliance.
·· Consider source-receiver paths when locating occupied spaces, and HVAC equipment. For example,

EQ
noise-generating HVAC equipment could be placed above a corridor rather than above a conference
room. Review Chapter 48, Table 6, and address each applicable transmission path.

STEP 4. VERIFY HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Determine noise criteria (NC), room criteria (RC), A-weighted sound pressure levels, or C-weighted sound
pressure levels for each occupied space through one or more of the following methods (see Further
Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method). Consider sound pressure levels from HVAC equipment
only; plumbing, lighting, and electrical may be excluded.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per Chapter 48 and follow the steps outlined in the HVAC Noise-
Reduction Design Procedures section of the handbook. Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per AHRI Standard 885–2008, Procedure for Estimating Occupied
Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. Follow the steps outlined in

3. Aaron, J.N., et al., “Environmental Noise as a Cause of Sleep Disruption in an Intermediate Respiratory Care Unit,” SLEEP 19(9) (1996): 707–710.
4. Novaes, M.A., et al., “Stressors in ICU: Patients’ Evaluation,” Intensive Care Medicine 23(12) (1997): 1282–1285.
5. Baker, C.F., “Discomfort to Environmental Noise: Heart Rate Responses of SICU Patients,” Critical Care Nursing Quarterly 15(2) (1992): 75–90.
448

Section 6, Calculation Procedures for Estimating Sound Levels in Occupied Spaces. Calculations may
be done in the design phase.
·· Measure sound pressure levels per Chapter 48. Follow field measurement guidelines from
Determining Compliance section. Follow guidelines from the Room Noise Measurements sections.
The measurements must be performed postconstruction and should be done in furnished spaces
with HVAC systems operating in typical conditions and while no occupants are present. Noises from
sources other than HVAC systems should be minimized or turned off during testing.
A local standard, procedure, or handbook that is equivalent to one of the above methods may also be
used.
Prepare a narrative that describes the methods followed and a summary report with measurements or
calculations.
Demonstrate compliance with the overall sound pressure limits listed in Chapter 48, page 48.3, Table 1, or
AHRI Standard 885-2008, Table 15, for applicable spaces.

STEP 5. VERIFY NOISE REDUCTION METHODS FOR SOUND TRANSMISSION PATHS

In a narrative and associated drawings or details, highlight each transmission path from Chapter 48, Table
6, that is applicable to the project and the specific noise reduction measures selected.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 6. IDENTIFY ADJACENCIES FOR SOUND ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS

Identify occupied spaces and their adjacency combinations. Review Table 1 of the credit requirements
and the local building code to determine the applicable composite sound transmission class (STCc)
rating.
Identify all assemblies (e.g., wall, floor-ceiling, roof-ceiling, door, window) that serve to acoustically
isolate each occupied space.

STEP 7. VERIFY SOUND ISOLATION

Verify that the assemblies for each occupied space meet the sound isolation requirements. Demonstrate
compliance through published data, calculation, or measurement, as follows:
·· Published data. Select walls, doors, and windows with published manufacturer’s data
·· Calculation. Perform averaging calculations that allow a trade-off between higher STC of walls
and lower STC ratings of doors, windows, and penetrations (see Further Explanation, Determining
Composite Sound Transmission Class). Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Measurement. Measure noise isolation class (NIC) for all assemblies per Annex A.3 of ANSI S12.60–
2010 and compare the results with the sound isolation requirements. A NIC rating within 3 points of
the specified STC rating may be considered compliant. Measurements cannot be performed until after
the substantial completion of construction.
Assemblies with similar construction details may be grouped together. Any significant variance in
opening areas, such as window or door ratios, should be evaluated separately.
Compile a list of each occupied space. For each space, list the maximum STC rating, the design STC
rating or measured results, and data or calculations to support the values.

STEP 8. IDENTIFY SPACE REVERBERATION TIME REQUIREMENTS

EQ

Use Table 2 in the credit requirements to determine reverberation time requirements for each occupied
space in the project. For spaces that vary by application or are not listed in the table, use criteria from
referenced standards, or use values for the space type with the closest functional use.

STEP 9. IMPLEMENT REVERBERATION TIME MITIGATION STRATEGIES

Use sound-absorptive materials or other strategies to limit the reverberation times for each occupied
space as appropriate for the room type.
Consider the following surfaces when specifying materials:
·· Sound-absorptive materials can be applied to any planar surface in the space. Although applying
treatment to the walls is typically effective, a sound-absorptive ceiling is generally more cost-effective.
·· Absorptive wall surfaces or vertical acoustic panels in spaces that require hard surfaces, such as
laboratories
·· Soft or upholstered backs and seats for spaces with seating
·· Window curtains, ceiling baffles, or other acoustic finishes
 449

Determine sound-absorption coefficients for absorptive materials. Use manufacturers’ documentation or

Table 3 for common materials.

TABLE 3. Sound absorption coefficients for common materials

Coefficient ( ) Coefficient ( )

Material 500HZ 1000HZ 2000HZ Material 500Hz 1000Hz 2000HZ

Walls Floor

Brick, unglazed .03 .04 .05 Concrete or Terrazzo .015 .02 .02

Linoleum, asphalt, rubber, or cork

Brick, unglazed, painted .02 .02 .02 .03 .03 .03
tile on concrete

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

.02 .03 .04 Wood .10 .07 .06
smooth finish on tile or brick

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

Wood parquet in asphalt on
rough or smooth finish on .06 .05 .04 .07 .06 .06
concrete
lath

Concrete block, light, porous .31 .29 .39 Carpet, heavy, on concrete .14 .37 .60

Concrete block, dense, Same, on 40 oz hairfelt or foam

.06 .07 .09 .57 .69 .71
painted rubber

Same, with impermeable latex

Gypsum boards. 1/2-inch
.05 .04 .07 backing on 40 oz hairfelt or foam .39 .34 .48
nailed to 2x4s, 16 inches o.c.
rubber

Plywood paneling, 3/8-inch

.17 .09 .10 Marble or glaze tile .01 .01 .02
thick

Large panes of heavy plate

.04 .03 .02 Fabrics
glass

Light velour, 10 oz per sq yd, hung

Ordinary window glass .18 .12 .07 .11 .17 .24
straight, in contact with walll

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
Medium velour, 14 oz per sq yd,
Misc .49 .75 .70
draped to half area

Chairs, metal or wood seats, Heavy velour, 18 oz per sq yd,

.22 .39 .38 .55 .72 .70
each, unoccupied draped to half area

STEP 10. VERIFY THAT REVERBERATION TIME REQUIREMENTS ARE MET

Calculate or measure the reverberation time for each occupied space (see Further Explanation,
Reverberation Time).
·· Reverberation time must be verified at 500, 1,000, and 2,000 Hz.
·· Retain calculations and measurements for credit documentation.
·· Spaces with identical size and material treatments may be documented together. To reduce

EQ
documentation burden, calculations and measurements can also be based on acoustically critical
spaces or room types or on worst-case combinations of room assemblies.

STEP 11. SELECT SOUND REINFORCEMENT AND MASKING SYSTEMS, IF NEEDED

Determine whether the project will have any sound reinforcement or masking systems (see Further
Explanation, Sound Reinforcement, and Further Explanation, Masking Systems). This credit does not
require that sound reinforcement or masking systems be implemented, but it does require that any
installed system meet specific criteria.
·· For each space using sound reinforcement, select sound reinforcement strategies that meet the
speech intelligibility, sound level, and sound-level coverage credit requirements (see Further
Explanation, Meeting Sound Reinforcement Credit Requirements).
·· For each space using masking systems, select a system that meets the credit requirements for sound
level and system uniformity (see Further Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method).
·· Document the needs that are addressed through a sound reinforcement or masking system, or the
rationale for not including these systems.
450

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
Reverberation Time
Equation 1 must be calculated separately for each frequency: 500, 1,000, and 2,000 Hz. The calculation should
include all finish materials in the room.

EQUATION 1. Total sound absorption for room

A = ( α 1 S1 + α 2 S2 + α 3 S3 + ...... α n Sn )

where
α is the sound absorption coefficient for a material at a specific frequency
S is the total surface area for that material in square feet (or square meters).

Reverberation time must be calculated for all rooms at each of the three frequencies; all must meet the specified T60
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

requirement in Table 2 in the credit requirements.

EQUATION 2. Reverberation time (IP)

V
RT = 0.049 ×
A

where
V is the room volume in cubic feet
A is the total sound absorption in the room (from Equation 1)

EQUATION 3. Reverberation time (SI)

V
RT = 0.161 ×
A

where
V is the room volume in cubic meters
A is the total sound absorption in the room (from Equation 1).

DETERMINING COMPOSITE SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS (STC) RATINGS

Composite sound transmission class (STC) rating is a weighted value for the capacity of a partition to attenuate
airborne sound. STC rating is calculated by averaging the transmission loss through an entire assembly.
EQ

In design, consider both the acoustic performance and ratio of partition materials. Because sound has a tendency
to travel through the weakest element (that with the lowest STC rating), carefully evaluate the use of penetrations,
openings, or fenestration in assemblies with a high STC rating requirement.
Ensure compliance with the standard through an evaluation of wall and floor sections and specification of tested
window and door assemblies. STC ratings are typically reported by manufacturers on product data sheets and other
documentation that show tested results based on standard wall materials.

SOUND REINFORCEMENT
Sound reinforcement may be needed for meeting, open office, public, or presentation spaces in the project that seat
more than 50 people, depending on their function. For smaller spaces and for spaces with simple geometry, simple
amplification systems may meet the credit criteria.
For spaces with unique architecture or ‘live’ acoustic environments, systems with advanced balancing and
signal processing may be required to meet the credit criteria. Balancing the sound reinforcement system assists in
 451

providing appropriate coverage throughout the audience. The balancing requirements and methodology depend on
the type of sound system strategy implemented and the sound reinforcement system equipment available. Signal-
processing equipment can aid in improving the sound system fidelity and uniformity of coverage.

MEETING SOUND REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS

For each space with a sound reinforcement system, verify compliance with the speech intelligibility (the extent to
which a listener can hear and comprehend spoken words over other noise), sound level, and uniformity of coverage
requirements, which involve evaluating the relationship of the room acoustic environment, sound reinforcement
system design or location, background noise level, and the listeners’ location(s). For more information on the
performance criteria, see the following:
·· For speech intelligibility, CIS criterion, see the Speech Intelligibility White Paper by 3M.6 The speech
transmission index (STI) varies from 0 (totally unintelligible) to 1.0 (perfectly intelligible). The common
intelligibility scale (CIS) relates to STI with the following equation: CIS = 1 + log (STI).
·· For sound-level and uniformity of coverage, refer to ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M–2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity
in Enclosed Listener Areas.

Compliance with the criteria can be determined with basic calculations, acoustic modeling software, or with
measurements.

If the space is not compliant, consider one or a combination of the following options:
·· Revising the room’s acoustic treatment strategy (typically by increasing the distribution and amount of
treatment)
·· Revising the sound reinforcement strategy (adjusting the type of sound reinforcement system or location and
the type and aiming of loudspeakers)
·· Lowering the background noise level in the room
·· Adjusting the sound output as needed to increase the output level while maintaining uniform coverage

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
MASKING SYSTEMS
Sound masking is a technology that uses artificially produced sound to cover or mask unwanted environmental
noise. These systems may be appropriate in open-floor layouts where full height partitions do not exist between
workspaces. Sound-masking systems can mitigate the perception that open offices are noisy and distracting places to
work.
Our hearing system tends to notice specific sounds when they are above ambient noise levels. Therefore, very
quiet spaces with isolated areas of activity may be balanced by targeted sound-masking systems.
Project teams using sound masking should consider their use as a supplement to architectural finishes or other
passive strategies for sound isolation. Masking systems need to be carefully designed and calibrated so that their
coverage is uniform and even and the sound spectrum (not just overall loudness) is appropriate for masking the

EQ
intended environmental noise. A system should not sound “hissy” or “rumbly,” and the level should be low enough
that it does not cause listening fatigue. A system’s use time period also needs to be evaluated. Consider incorporating
“ramping” in the masking system design, whereby the equipment gradually increases noise levels throughout the day
or when a space is occupied.
A commonly applied rule is to control no more than 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) per zone, though
project teams may consult with sound-masking system experts to identify appropriate control strategies.
For more information on sound masking and how it can improve workplaces, see “Sound Matters,” available at
gsasoundmatters.com/.

MEETING MASKING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Typically, a sound masking system’s specification includes the required frequency spectrum (or spectra) , which
could be assessed to make sure that the maximum masking noise levels are at or below 48 dBA. See ASTM E1130 for
an example of a speech spectrum.

6. http://multimedia.3m.com/mws/mediawebserver?mwsId=SSSSSufSevTsZxtUoY_vN82eevUqevTSevTSevTSeSSSSSS--&fn=Speech
452

Make sure the system will be measured or evaluated after installation to confirm the masking system operates as
designed. Consider specifying the procedures and reporting methods from ASTM Standard E1573.

SELECTING A SOUND RATING METHOD

The referenced standards for this credit present HVAC background noise level guidelines based on space type. The
guidelines use the following sound rating methods:
·· Noise criteria (NC)
·· Room criteria (RC) or room criteria neutral (RCN)
·· A-weighted decibel (dBA)
·· C-weighted decibel (dBC)
·· RC Mark II rating method

The methods are described in the 2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration
Control. Teams must demonstrate compliance with one of the background noise rating methods for each space.
The selection of rating method depends on the project requirements for acoustic quality but may be affected by the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

availability of data for HVAC components’ sound levels.

In each method, sound levels must be calculated or measured across a range of audible frequencies. NC and RC
methods are more sensitive to the balance of sound frequencies, whereas dBA reports the maximum sound level
within a frequency range.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
The International Electrotechnical Commission (2013) IEC 61672-1:2013 Electroacoustics – Sound Level Meters –
Part 1: Specifications are considered to be an equivalent to ANSI S1.4. Project teams in Europe may use measuring
equipment which is in line with IEC 61672-1:2013.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each project space.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
EQ

Documentation All projects

Occupied spaces’ sound level values X

Background noise Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X
Noise reduction narrative X
STCc ratings for space adjacencies X
Sound isolation
Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X
Reverberation criteria for each room X
Reverberation time
Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X
List of all large conference rooms and auditoriums X

Sound reinforcement Explanation of sound reinforcement methodology (if installed) X

and masking systems Explanation of sound reinforcement system components and specifications (if installed) X
Explanation of masking system components and specifications narrative (if installed) X
 453

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 2011 HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control: ashrae.org

AHRI Standard 885–2008: ahrinet.org

ANSI S1.4 Performance Measurement Protocols for Commercial Buildings: ashrae.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

sound-level coverage a set of uniformity criteria that ensure consistent intelligibility and directionality of audible
frequencies for all occupants within a space

speech spectra the distribution of acoustic energy as a function of frequency for human speech

EQ
 455

Innovation (in)
OVERVIEW
Sustainable design strategies and measures are constantly evolving and improving. New technologies are continually
introduced to the marketplace, and up-to-date scientific research influences building design strategies. The purpose
of this LEED category is to recognize projects for innovative building features and sustainable building practices and
strategies.
Occasionally, a strategy results in building performance that greatly exceeds what is required in an existing LEED
credit. Other strategies may not be addressed by any LEED prerequisite or credit but warrant consideration for
their sustainability benefits. In addition, LEED is most effectively implemented as part of a cohesive team, and this
category addresses the role of a LEED Accredited Professional in facilitating that process.

INNOVATION
IN
IN LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

456
 457

INNOVATION CREDIT

Innovation
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-5 points)

Retail (1-5 points)
Hospitality (1-5 points)

INTENT

To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative performance.

REQUIREMENTS
To achieve all five innovation points, a project team must achieve at least one pilot credit, at least one innovation
credit and no more than two exemplary performance credits.

OPTION 1. INNOVATION (1 POINT)

Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED green
building rating system.

Identify the following:

·· the intent of the proposed innovation credit;

INNOVATION
·· proposed requirements for compliance;
·· proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance; and
·· the design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. PILOT (1 POINT)

IN

Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit Library.

AND/OR

OPTION 3. ADDITIONAL STRATEGIES

Innovation (1-3 points)
458

·· Defined in Option 1 above.

Pilot (1-3 points)
·· Meet the requirements of Option 2.
Exemplary Performance (1–2 points)
·· Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4 prerequisite or credit that allows exemplary
performance, as specified in the LEED Reference Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary performance point is
typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
IN
 459

BEHIND THE INTENT

Sustainable design comes from innovative strategies and thinking. Institutional measures that reward such
thinking—such as the achievement of this credit—benefit our environment. Recognition of exceptional efforts will
spur further innovation.
When project teams innovate and go beyond LEED requirements, they not only achieve measurable
environmental benefits beyond those specified by the LEED rating system, they also have the opportunity to explore
cutting-edge pilot credits and contribute to the development of future LEED credits. When they can demonstrate
that the project exceeds the standard level of performance associated with one or more LEED credits, their
innovations can be adopted by other teams in the future.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY INNOVATIVE STRATEGIES

Innovation may begin at a project’s conception, but it can enter at any step of the process and come
from any member of the project team.
·· During initial meetings or design charrettes, explore opportunities to incorporate innovative strategies,
achieve exemplary performance for existing LEED credits, and develop pilot credits, based on the
project scope.
·· Review the project goals and targeted credits to determine whether the project is likely to meet any
exemplary performance criteria.
·· Identify any environmental strategies included in the project that are not addressed by existing
LEED credits.
·· Discuss pilot credits, green housekeeping, public education, and other opportunities for innovation.

STEP 2. DEVELOP INNOVATION POINT STRATEGY

Projects may earn up to 5 points for Innovation through a combination of the following:
·· Innovation (up to 4 points). This option is appropriate for strategies that are not addressed by any
existing credits in the LEED rating system under which the project will be certified.
·· Pilot credits (up to 4 points). This option requires project teams to achieve, document, and provide
feedback on pilot credit strategies developed by USGBC members and committees.
·· Exemplary performance (up to 2 points). This option is achieved by demonstrating performance that
greatly exceeds the level or scope required by existing LEED prerequisites or credits.
°° One point is reserved for Pilot Credits and one for Innovation. To use all five points, projects must
use at least one pilot credit and one innovation credit.

INNOVATION
Innovation (up to 4 points)

STEP 1. CONFIRM CREDIT ELIGIBILITY

For innovations that are not addressed by existing LEED credits, confirm that the proposed strategy
IN

meets the following three basic criteria:

·· The project must demonstrate a quantitative improvement in environmental performance by
identifying or establishing a baseline of standard performance and comparing that benchmark with
the final design performance.
·· The strategy must be comprehensive. Measures that address a limited portion of a project or are not
comprehensive in other ways are not eligible. The project team must demonstrate that the proposed
innovation credit applies to the entire project being certified under LEED and has at least two
components (i.e., it is not limited to use of a single product).
·· The strategy must be significantly better than standard sustainable design practices.
Points can also be earned by achieving selected credits from other LEED rating systems.
460

Strategies must demonstrate a comprehensive approach, have significant, measurable environmental

benefits, and be better than standard practice (see Further Explanation, Suggested Topics for Innovation
Credits and Ineligible Strategies).

STEP 2. DEVELOP DOCUMENTATION

Document credit eligibility as outlined above, and note any project-specific strategies.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Develop and execute the innovative strategy or program in a manner that yields a meaningful
environmental benefit. Retain documentation and calculations to validate the project team’s approach
and implementation.

Pilot credits (up to 4 points)

STEP 1. SELECT CREDIT

Select a credit from the LEED Pilot Credit Library on the USGBC website. The Pilot Credit Library
includes credit intent and requirements, submittals, and specific feedback questions for each pilot credit.
·· Pilot credits open and close at varying intervals. Check the website for a current list of available pilot
credit strategies.
·· Pilot credits are applicable to specific rating systems. Review the list on the USGBC website to identify
pilot credits for the applicable rating system.

STEP 2. REGISTER PILOT CREDIT

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Register for the selected pilot credit through the Pilot Credit Library.
·· Since pilot credit availability changes over time, register for a credit as soon as the project team
decides to pursue it, rather than waiting until documentation review.
·· When a project is registered for a pilot credit, the project team may continue to pursue it even if it is
closed to new registrants.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Follow the required steps to implement the credit as outlined in the pilot credit. Visit the LEEDuser
forums for the selected pilot credit to ask questions or get advice on strategy.

STEP 4. PROVIDE FEEDBACK

Complete the credit’s feedback survey, found on the USGBC website. Include any information that might
be helpful in future revisions of the credit.

STEP 5. DOCUMENT CREDIT

Complete all credit specific documentation as outlined in the pilot credit.
·· Some pilot credits will have documentation forms or calculators.
·· Pilot credits may be attempted in any review stage and can be replaced before the next review if the
initial credit is not accepted.

Exemplary Performance (up to 2 points)

IN

STEP 1. IDENTIFY TARGET EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE CREDITS

During design, review exemplary performance criteria and select credits for which exemplary
performance will be pursued. Credits that allow exemplary performance through a predetermined
approach are noted throughout this reference guide.

STEP 2. CONFIRM IMPLEMENTATION

Incorporate design elements and specifications requirements to ensure that the selected exemplary
performance criteria are met. Provide the required documentation as noted in the base credit.
 461

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SUGGESTED TOPICS FOR INNOVATION CREDITS

Project teams are encouraged to explore the full range of innovative opportunities in their buildings. Refer to
the online Innovation Catalog for examples of successful innovation credits. The examples do not constitute
preapproval of any Innovation strategy, however, and Innovation credit awarded for a project today does not imply
automatic approval for similar strategies in the future. A team seeking formal preapproval should submit a project
credit interpretation request (CIR).

The following example was submitted for an Innovation credit:

Public education. Provide an educational program on the environmental and human health benefits of green building practices
and how building occupants or the public can help improve green performance within the LEED space (such as recycling
and appropriate use of efficient fixtures and equipment). The program must be actively instructional and include at least
two instructional initiatives that have ongoing components such as a signage program, case study, guided tours, educational
outreach program through periodic events covering green building topics, and/or a website or electronic newsletter. 

INELIGIBLE STRATEGIES
Innovation credits are not awarded for the use of a particular product or design strategy if the technology aids in the
achievement of an existing LEED credit, even if the project is not attempting to earn that credit.
Innovation strategies that are closed pilot credits are not available unless they are listed in the online Innovation
Catalog.
No strategy can achieve more than 1 point under Innovation. That is, a single strategy cannot be double-counted
for both exemplary performance and innovation (or both exemplary performance and a pilot credit, or both a pilot
credit and innovation).
The innovation strategy must be specific to the LEED project under review.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All project spaces in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

INNOVATION
Exemplary
Documentation Innovation Pilot credit
performance

Innovation narrative X

Supporting documentation X X X

Pilot credit registration X

IN

Pilot credit survey X

Pilot credit specific submittals X

Exemplary performance credit and level X

462

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The maximum number of exemplary performance strategies eligible for IN credits has changed from three to two.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

DEFINITIONS
None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
IN
 463

INNOVATION CREDIT

LEED Accredited
Professional
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1 point)

Retail (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point)

INTENT

To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project and to

streamline the application and certification process.

REQUIREMENTS

LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL

At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a specialty
appropriate for the project.

IN
464

BEHIND THE INTENT

A LEED Accredited Professional (LEED AP) with specialty can be a valuable resource in the LEED certification
process. The presence of a LEED AP with specialty helps project team members understand the elements of the
rating system, the importance of interactions among the prerequisites and credits, and the LEED application
process.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ENGAGE LEED AP WITH SPECIALTY

Identify a project team member who is a LEED AP with specialty, or engage a LEED AP with specialty to
support the project and participate in the certification process.
·· Select a project team member with a LEED AP Interior Design + Construction (LEED AP ID+C)
credential.
·· The LEED AP with specialty identified for this credit must have an active credential at the time of
certification review (see Further Explanation, Maintaining a LEED Credential).
·· LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) do not qualify for this credit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
IN
 465

FURTHER EXPLANATION

MAINTAINING A LEED CREDENTIAL

The LEED AP with specialty credential can be maintained through either of the following methods:
·· Retaking and passing the LEED accreditation exam
·· Earning 30 continuing education hours per credentialing period

A credential is considered active (and eligible for this credit) only if the credential holder has completed his or her
credential maintenance through the GBCI Credential Maintenance Program. For more information, visit USGBC’s
website.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Eligible. All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Required

Full name and specialty credential of LEED AP X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) are no longer eligible for this credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.
IN

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
 467

RP
REGIONAL PRIORITY
Regional Priority (rp)
OVERVIEW
Because some environmental issues are particular to a locale, volunteers from USGBC chapters and the LEED
International Roundtable have identified distinct environmental priorities within their areas and the credits that
address those issues. These Regional Priority credits encourage project teams to focus on their local environmental
priorities.
USGBC established a process that identified six RP credits for every location and every rating system within
chapter or country boundaries. Participants were asked to determine which environmental issues were most salient
in their chapter area or country. The issues could be naturally occurring (e.g., water shortages) or man-made (e.g.,
polluted watersheds) and could reflect environmental concerns (e.g., water shortages) or environmental assets (e.g.,
abundant sunlight). The areas, or zones, were defined by a combination of priority issues—for example, an urban
area with an impaired watershed versus an urban area with an intact watershed.
The participants then prioritized credits to address the important issues of given locations. Because each LEED
project type (e.g., a data center) may be associated with different environmental impacts, each rating system has its
own RP credits.
The ultimate goal of RP credits is to enhance the ability of LEED project teams to address critical environmental
issues across the country and around the world.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RP

468
 469

REGIONAL PRIORITY CREDIT

RP
Regional Priority

REGIONAL PRIORITY
This credit applies to:

Commercial Interiors (1-4 points)

Retail (1-4 points)
Hospitality (1-4 points)

INTENT

To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that address

geographically specific environmental, social equity, and public
health priorities.

REQUIREMENTS
Earn up to four of the six Regional Priority credits. These credits have been identified by the USGBC regional
councils and chapters as having additional regional importance for the project’s region. A database of Regional
Priority credits and their geographic applicability is available on the USGBC website, http://www.usgbc.org/rpc.

One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved, up to a maximum of four.
470

BEHIND THE INTENT

LEED projects are designed, built, and operated in many different contexts. Climate, population density, and local
regulations can differ significantly from one location to another, making certain environmental issues more critical
than others. Examples include water conservation in arid climates versus rainwater management in wet climates.
LEED projects can be more transformative if teams recognize their location’s priority environmental issues and
address them through design, construction, and operation choices. LEED encourages a focus on regional issues
through RP credits—existing LEED credits that USGBC volunteers have determined to be especially important in a
RP

given area. For every location in the U.S., six credits are prioritized. The ultimate intent is to motivate project teams
to earn the credits that address an area’s priority issues.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY APPLICABLE RP CREDITS

Review the credits flagged for regional priority in the project’s area (see USGBC’s website). Consider how
achievement of these credits will affect the project.

STEP 2. DETERMINE PERFORMANCE REQUIRED TO EARN RP POINTS

·· For credits with multiple thresholds (e.g., percentage improvement in energy efficiency), points are
awarded at particular levels of achievement.
·· If such a credit is flagged as RP for the project’s location, confirm the threshold the project must meet
to earn the bonus point.
 471

FURTHER EXPLANATION

None.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

RP
Documentation

No additional documentation is required to earn Regional Priority credits. Document compliance for the selected credits, and the related
RP bonus points for their achievement will be awarded automatically.

REGIONAL PRIORITY
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The RP credits for a given region may be different than they were for LEED 2009.

REFERENCED STRANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
APPENDICES LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

472
 473

APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1. USE TYPES AND CATEGORIES

TABLE 1. Use Types and Categories

Category Use type

Food retail Supermarket

Grocery with produce section

Community-serving retail Convenience store

Farmers market

Hardware store

Pharmacy

Other retail

Services Bank

Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports)

Gym, health club, exercise studio

Hair care

Laundry, dry cleaner

Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru

service)

Civic and community facilities Adult or senior care (licensed)

Child care (licensed)

Community or recreation center

Cultural arts facility (museum, performing arts)

Education facility (e.g., K—12 school, university, adult

education center, vocational school, community college)

Government office that serves public on-site

Medical clinic or office that treats patients

Place of worship

Police or fire station

Post office APPENDICES

Public library

Public park

Social services center

Community anchor uses (BD+C and ID+C only) Commercial office (100 or more full-time equivalent jobs)

Adapted from Criterion Planners, INDEX neighborhood completeness indicator, 2005.

474

APPENDIX 2. DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS

Use Table 1 to calculate default occupancy counts. Only use the occupancy estimates if occupancy is unknown.
For the calculation, use gross floor area, not net or leasable floor area. Gross floor area is defined as the sum of
all areas on all floors of a building included within the outside faces of the exterior wall, including common areas,
mechanical spaces, circulation areas, and all floor penetrations that connect one floor to another. To determine gross
floor area, multiply the building footprint (in square feet or square meters) by the number of floors in the building.
Exclude underground or structured parking from the calculation.

TABLE 1. Default Occupancy Numbers

Gross square feet per occupant Gross square meters per occupant

Employees Transients Employees Transients

General office 250 0 23 0

Retail, general 550 130 51 12

Retail or service (e.g., financial, 600 130 56 12

auto)

Restaurant 435 95 40 9

Grocery store 550 115 51 11

Medical office 225 330 21 31

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0

Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0

Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0

Hotel 1,500 700 139 65

Educational, daycare 630 105 59 10

Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13

Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14

Sources:
·· ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2004 (Atlanta, GA, 2004).
·· 2001 Uniform Plumbing Code (Los Angeles, CA)
·· California Public Utilities Commission, 2004–2005 Database for Energy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update
Study (2008).
·· California State University, Capital Planning, Design and Construction Section VI, Standards for Campus
Development Programs (Long Beach, CA, 2002).
·· City of Boulder Planning Department, Projecting Future Employment—How Much Space per Person
(Boulder, 2002).
APPENDICES

·· Metro, 1999 Employment Density Study (Portland, OR 1999).

·· American Hotel and Lodging Association, Lodging Industry Profile Washington, DC, 2008.
·· LEED for Core & Shell Core Committee, personal communication (2003 - 2006).
·· LEED for Retail Core Committee, personal communication (2007)
·· OWP/P, Medical Office Building Project Averages (Chicago, 2008).
·· OWP/P, University Master Plan Projects (Chicago, 2008).
·· U.S. General Services Administration, Childcare Center Design Guide (Washington, DC, 2003).
 475

APPENDIX 3. RETAIL PROCESS LOAD BASELINES

TABLE 1A. Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 16,000 Btu/h/ 35% 12,000 Btu/h/ft2
ft2 peak input peak input

Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P+4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P+0.6400 kW
steam mode mode
(P = pan capacity)

Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 20% steam 1,210P+35,810 38% steam mode 200P+6,511 Btu/h
steam mode mode Btu/h

Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P+1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P+0.4989 kW
convection mode convection
mode

Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 35% 322P+13,563 44% convection mode 150P+5,425 Btu/h
convection mode convection Btu/h
mode

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW

full-size

Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 18,000 Btu/h 46% 12,000 Btu/h
full-size

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW

half-size

Conveyor oven, > Gas Cooking 20% 70,000 Btu/h 42% 57,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt

Conveyor oven, ≤ Gas Cooking 20% 45,000 Btu/h 42% 29,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt

Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW

Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 14,000 Btu/h 50% 9,000 Btu/h

2
Griddle (based on Elec Cooking 60% 400 W/ft 70% 320 W/ft2
3 ft model)

Griddle (based on Gas Cooking 30% 3,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,650 Btu/h/ft2
3 ft model) ft2

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 21.5V Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
0 < V < 13 ft³ (V =
volume)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 2.0V + 254 Watts

cabinets (excluding
APPENDICES

drawer warmers
and heated display)
13 ≤ V < 28 ft³

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 3.8V + 203.5 Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
28 ft³ ≤ V

Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW

476

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 20,000 Btu/h 50% 12,000 Btu/h

Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 65,000 Btu/h 50% 35,000 Btu/h

Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 43,000 Btu/h 50% 29,000 Btu/h

Range Elec Cooking 70% 80%

Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots

Steam cooker, Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
batch cooking

Steam cooker, Gas Cooking 15% 2,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,100 Btu/h/pan
batch cooking pan

Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook
to order

Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 5,000 Btu/h/ 38% 4,300 Btu/h/pan
production or cook pan
to order
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate

Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 6.89 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head, 0.0011H lb ice
H = harvest ice), H kWh/100
≥ 450 lb/day lb ice

Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 10.26 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head), 0.0086H lb ice
H < 450 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice

Ice machine Elec Ice 8.85 – na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote 0.0038H kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit, kWh/100lb
w/o remote ice
compressor), H <
1,000 lb/day

Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
1600 > H ≥ 1000
lb/day

Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na -0.00011*H + 4.60 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
APPENDICES

H ≥ 1600 lb/day

Ice machine SCU Elec Ice 18.0 – na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

(self-contained 0.0469H kWh/100 lb ice
unit), H < 175 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice

Ice machine self- Elec Ice 9.80 na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

contained unit, H ≥ kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
175 lb/day lb ice
 477

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 4.0 na 3.68 kWh/100 lb ice na

cooled ice-making kWh/100
head, H ≥ 1436 lb/ lb ice
day (must be on
chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 5.58 – na 5.13 – 0.001H kWh/100 na

cooled ice-making 0.0011H lb ice
head, 500 lb/day < kWh/100
H < 1436 (must be lb ice
on chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 7.80 – na 7.02 – 0.0049H na

cooled ice-making 0.0055H kWh/100 lb ice
head, H < 500 lb/ kWh/100
day (must be on lb ice
chilled loop)

Ice machine Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

water-cooled once-
through (open
loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 11.4 – na 10.6 – 0.177H kWh/100 na

cooled SCU (self- 0.0190H lb ice
contained unit), H kWh/100
< 200 lb/day (must lb ice
be on chilled loop)

Ice machine, Elec Ice 7.6 na 7.07 kWh/100 lb ice na

water-cooled self- kWh/100
contained unit, H ≥ lb ice
200 lb/day (must
be on chilled loop)

Chest freezer, solid Elec Refrig 0.45V + na ≤ 0.270V + 0.130 kWh/ na

or glass door 0.943 kWh/ day
day

Chest refrigerator, Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.125V + 0.475 kWh/ na

solid or glass door kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.607V + 0.893 kWh/ na

freezer 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.733V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer 15 ≤ V < kWh/day day
30 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.250V + 13.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 30 ≤ V < kWh/day day
50 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.450V + 3.50 kWh/ na

APPENDICES
freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.118V + 1.382 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.140V + 1.050 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 15 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 30 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.088V + 2.625 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 30 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 50 ft³
478

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.110V + 1.500 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.250V + 1.25 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.400V – 1.000 kWh/ na

freezer, 15 ≤ V < kWh/day day
30 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.163V + 6.125 kWh/ na

freezer, 30 ≤ V < kWh/day day
50 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.158V + 6.333 kWh/ na

freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.089V + 1.411 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.037V + 2.200 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 15 ≤ V kWh/day day
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

< 30 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.056V + 1.635 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 30 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 50 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.060V + 1.416 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³

Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF na 2.00 MEF na

Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

machine, high temp

Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

machine, low temp

Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp

Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

conveyor dish
machine, low temp

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp
APPENDICES

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish
machine, low temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, high temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, low temp
 479

The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing
Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 38°F for medium-
temp refrigerators, 0°F for low-temp freezers, and -15°F for ice cream freezers

TABLE 1B. Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 50.5 kW/m2 35% 37.9 kW/m2

Combination oven, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P + 4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P + 0.6400
steam mode (P = pan mode kW
capacity)

Combination oven, Gas Cooking 20% steam (1 210P + 38% steam mode (200P + 6 511)/
steam mode mode 35 810)/3 412 3 412 kW
kW

Combination oven, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P + 1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P + 0.4989
convection mode convection kW
mode

Combination oven, Gas Cooking 35% (322P + 44% convection mode (150P + 5 425)/
convection mode convection 13 563)/3 412 3 412 kW
mode kW

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW

full-size

Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 5.3 kW 46% 3.5 kW

full-size
APPENDICES
Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW
half-size

Conveyor oven, > 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 20.5 kW 42% 16.7 kW
cm belt

Conveyor oven, < 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 13.2 kW 42% 8.5 kW
cm belt

Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW

Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 4.1 kW 50% 2.64 kW

Griddle (based on 90- Elec Cooking 60% 4.3 kW/m2 70% 3.45 kW/m2
cm model)
480

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Griddle (based on 90- Gas Cooking 30% 11 kW/m2 33% 8.35 kW/m2
cm model)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (21.5*V)/0.0283

cabinets (excluding kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0 < V <
0.368 m3 (V = volume)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (2.0*V +

cabinets (excluding 254)/0.0283 kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0.368 ≤
V < 0.793 m3

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (3.8*V +

cabinets (excluding 203.5)/0.0283
drawer warmers and kW/m3
heated display) 0.793
m3 ≤ V

Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW

Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 5.86 kW 50% 3.5 kW

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 19 kW 50% 10.25 kW

Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 12.6 kW 50% 8.5 kW

Range Elec Cooking 70% na 80% na

Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots

Steam cooker, batch Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
cooking

Steam cooker, batch Gas Cooking 15% 733 W/pan 38% 615 W/pan
cooking

Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook to
order

Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 1.47 kW/pan 38% 1.26 kW/pan
production or cook to
order

Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate

Ice machine IMH (ice- Elec Ice 0.0015 – na— ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na
making head, H = ice 5.3464E-07 kg ice
harvest) H ≥ 204 kg/day kWh/kg ice
APPENDICES

Ice machine IMH (ice Elec Ice 0.2262 – na ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

making head) ice- 4.18E-04 kg ice
making head, H < 204 kWh/kg ice
kg/day

Ice machine, RCU Elec Ice 0.1951 – na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing 1.85E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
unit, w/o remote kWh/kg ice
compressor) H < 454
kg/day
 481

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) 726 > H ≥ 454
kg/day

Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ -0.00024H + 4.60 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) H ≥ 726 kg/day

Ice machine SCU (self Elec Ice 0.3968 – na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na

contained unit), H < 79 2.28E-03 kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day kWh/kg ice

Ice machine SCU (self- Elec Ice 0.2161 kWh/ na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na
contained unit), H ≥ 79 kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.0882 na ≤ 8.11 kWh/100 kg ice na

cooled ice-making head, kWh/kg ice
H ≥ 651 kg/day (must be
on a chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1230 – na ≤ 11.31 – 0.065H na

cooled ice-making head, 5.35E-05 kWh/100 kg ice
227 ≤ H < 651 kg/day kWh/kg ice
(must be on a chilled
loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1720 – na ≤ 15.48 – 0.0238H na

cooled ice-making head, 2.67E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
H < 227 kg/day (must be kWh/kg ice
on a chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

cooled once-through
(open loop)

Ice machine water- Elec Ice 0.2513 – na ≤ 23.37 – 0.086H na

cooled SCU (self- 29.23E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
contained unit) H < 91 kWh/kg ice
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1676 kWh/ na 15.57 kWh/100 kg ice na
cooled SCU (self- kg ice
contained unit) H ≥ 91
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)

Chest freezer, solid or Elec Refrig 15.90V + na 9.541V + 0.130 kWh/day na

glass door 0.943 kWh/
day

Chest refrigerator, solid Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 4.417V + 0.475 kWh/ na

or glass door 2.04 kWh/ day
APPENDICES
day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 21.449V + 0.893 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 25.901V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 ≤ V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 8.834V + 13.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < kWh/day day
1.42 m3
482

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 15.90V + 3.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 4.169V + 1.382 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.42 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 4.947V + 1.050 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.85 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 3.109V + 2.625 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 3.34 kWh/ day
1.42 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 3.887V + 1.500 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 3.34 kWh/ day
day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 8.834V + 1.25 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 4.819V – 1.000 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 < V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 5.760V + 6.125 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < kWh/day day
1.42 m3

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 5.583V + 6.333 kWh/ na

freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 3.145V + 1.411 kWh/day na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 2.04 kWh/
0.42 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 1.307V + 2.200 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 2.04 kWh/ day
0.85 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 1.979V + 1.635 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 2.04 kWh/ day
1.42 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 2.120V + 1.416 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 2.04 kWh/ day
day

Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF 2.00 MEF

Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

high temp

Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

APPENDICES

low temp

Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

dish machine, high temp

Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

dish machine, low temp

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish machine,
high temp
 483

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish machine,
low temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, high temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, low temp

The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 3°C for mediumtemp
refrigerators, -18°C for low-temp freezers, and -26°C for ice cream freezers.

TABLE 2. Supermarket refrigeration prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget

Prescriptive Baseline for

Item Attribute
Measure Energy Modeling Path

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Freezers Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L Table 6.8.1L

Commercial Refrigeration Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Equipment Addendum g. Table 6.8.1M Table 6.8.1M

TABLE 3. Walk-in coolers and freezers prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget
APPENDICES
Baseline for
Item Attribute Prescriptive Measure
Energy Modeling Path

Envelope Freezer insulation R-46 R-36

Cooler insulation R-36 R-20

Automatic closer Yes No

doors

High-efficiency low- 40W/ft (130W/m) of door 40W/ft (130W/m) of door frame (low
or no-heat reach-in frame (low temperature), 17W/ temperature), 17W/ft (55W/m) of door frame
doors ft (55W/m) of door frame (medium temperature)
(medium temperature)
484

Evaporator Evaporator fan motor Shaded pole and split phase Constant-speed fan
and control motors prohibited; use PSC or
EMC motors

Hot gas defrost No electric defrosting Electric defrosting

Condenser Air-cooled condenser Shaded pole and split phase Cycling one-speed fan
fan motor and motors prohibited; use PSC or
control EMC motors; add condenser
fan controllers

Air-cooled condenser Floating head pressure controls 10°F (-12°C) to 15°F

design approach or ambient subcooling (-9°C) dependent on suction temperature

Lighting Lighting power 0.6 W/sq.ft. 0.6 W/sq.ft.

density (W/sq.ft.) (6.5 W/sq. meter) (6.5 W/sq. meter)

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings

TABLE 4. Commercial kitchen ventilation prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget

Strategies Prescriptive Measure Baseline

Kitchen hood control ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1, except that ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1 and Section G3.1.1
Section 6.5.7.1.3 and Section 6.5.7.1.4 shall apply Exception (d) where applicable
if the total kitchen exhaust airflow rate exceeds
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2,000 cfm (960 L/s) (as opposed to 5,000 cfm

(2,400 L/s) noted in the ASHRAE 90.1-2010
requirements)
APPENDICES
LOCATION & TRANSPORTATION LT
487